Author: Webmaster

  • Coalitions and Coterie

    Ira Lightman

    University of Norwich
    I.Lightman@uea.Ac.Uk

     

    Edwards, Tim. Erotics and Politics: Gay Male Sexuality, Masculinity, and Feminism. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1994.

     
    This book doesn’t quarrel too much with anyone, but then it doesn’t leave itself much room for polemic, so thorough is its survey of essays and books about and by gay men and feminists. It listens, which can’t be a bad thing. Tim Edwards’s procedure is to quote most of the writers he discusses at some length, and nearly always to show them in a favorable light, even when they clash with each other. Edwards is trying to settle an existing feud rather than to start a new one, and to establish the common ground on which more productively cross-disciplinary approaches to sexuality might emerge.

     

    The feud at issue here is that between feminists who have written critically about pederasty, pornography, and sexist attitudes among gay men, and gay men who have responded to these attacks by writing critically about feminists’ too-sweeping (and hence homophobic, heterosexist) generalizations about gay sexuality. A good example of the latter is Craig Owens, who, in a marvellous essay from Men in Feminism cited by Edwards, argues that feminists accept Freud’s theory that anti-gay bigotry stems from repressed gay desire in straight-identified men because this theory piques the bigoted straight-identified men who are implicitly these women’s target.1 But, says Owens, this approach fails to acknowledge genuine homoerotic feeling that hasn’t passed through a self-hating, gay-hating denial stage, i.e. it fails to acknowledge the very areas of feeling that mean most to many gay-identified men. Thus, Owens is arguing, feminist application of this “homophobia equals homoerotic” equation draws on straight experience rather than gay experience, and is in fact marginalizing of the latter. Similarly, other gay male critics of feminism cited by Edwards point out that feminist critiques of pornography begin by postulating the essence of the practice, then proceed to demonize it, and, by extension, to demonize all gay manifestations of it. This kind of feminist critique locates the abusive dimension, the insult, of a sexual practice within a straight sexual relationship, in terms of the institutionalized misogyny and oppression of women within patriarchy, and then extends the analysis without pausing to consider the quite different forms of oppression patriarchy exercises over gay men.

     

    The stakes of these critiques and counter-critiques are high, for they lead feminists to associate gay men, and gay men to associate feminists, with patriarchy rather than with its active resistance. Indeed, gay men end up accusing straight feminist women not only of naively collaborating with the patriarchal enemy but of supplying that enemy with the academically legitimized weapons he needs to police the terrain of sexual difference.

     

    Edwards does a good job of describing this situation. He calls particular attention to the curious protocols of the whole debate, which reflect the demographics of feminist and gay sympathizers. The former, being the larger group, offer broad generalizations and critiques of the latter, while the smaller group for the most part merely defends its own turf from unfriendly critical incursions. While feminist writers have presented wholesale critiques of the theory and strategy of gay male activism, it is almost unheard of for a gay male writer to attack the theoretical positions and institutional practices of feminist women except where these touch upon gay politics itself. This creates a fundamental and limiting asymmetry in the debate which Edwards does well to highlight, though it has nothing to do with the substance of the arguments advanced.

     

    But for all its usefulness as an overview of the current state of gay and feminist politics–and the book ranges widely across such topics as pederasty, pornography, visibility, AIDS, and postmodernism–this volume seems somehow too narrow in its conception. Reading it I found myself trying to imagine a more boldly interdisciplinary or multi-voiced version of the project: a broader dialogue. It’s not so much that I wanted a more ethnographic approach. True, this book lacks the kind of oral-historical dimension that would incorporate the views of people who can’t write or can’t get published; but ethnographic work can itself produce the lack of theoretical, or simply cordial, engagement between disparate parties that Edwards laments. No, it’s Edwards’s asides–against the men’s movement, against straight men in general–and his cursory treatment of child abuse literature (which contrasts with his thoroughness on most everything else), that mark the limits to his apparent inclusiveness. Edwards addresses himself to an audience which he envisions as sharing with him a very specific and finite hierarchy of approaches and texts; he covers this material and excludes everything else. It is possible that if he had gone further afield he would have alienated some of the gay men and feminists whose solidarity the book is meant to promote. His aim, after all, is to resist the divide-and-conquer tactics of a patriarchal order. But in my view his omissions are a real weakness; there is a danger that the coalition he promotes will be too static and comfortable, too much of a closed establishment in its own right.

     

    My most general objection to the book has to do with what might be seen as a kind of residual Freudianism, or at least scientism, in its tone. Freud has always seemed to me the archetypal distrustful outsider, the sort of commentator on gay sexuality who is handled in today’s gay press with amused indifference or mocking disbelief. He sits in his office, sees someone for an hour, sums him up with reference to his own tiny range of models of peoples’ lives, and comes to a conclusion, finishes the day, locks up the office, and goes home to dinner party functions and relations only with heterosexuals. He offers sweeping scientific theories on the basis of very brief and shallow acquaintance with his objects of study–and this makes him a figure of some amusement to writers of the gay press, who speak from detailed knowledge of lives led differently. It seems that Tim Edwards can’t, except in occasional brief anecdotes, draw on this latter, indigenous tradition of writing about gay sexuality, but must instead locate his work in the tradition that’s home to Freud. Perhaps this is academically required of him. And perhaps his publishers, Routledge, encourage his use of the voice of the distrustful outsider as well, as a voice of greater authority or at least greater appeal to a straight readership. In any case, the book seems closer in this respect to the community of straight “experts” on homosexuality than to the gay community on the streets.

     

    Aside from from this general question of tone and positionality, I would also raise some more specific questions about the book’s arguments, arguments in which a residual Freudianism is again discernable. Edwards cites the work of Sheila Jeffreys, who has battled to deny any comradeship, as a lesbian, with advocates of sado-masochism. Her argument is that S/M glorifies heterosexist and misogynist oppression as well as child abuse, by eroticising them. Her opponents argue that, on the contrary, eroticizing power destabilizes and dethrones it. This debate strikes right to the heart of the struggle to build a coalition of the sort Edwards advocates. A coalition between S/M practitioners, both gay and straight, and gay non-S/M practitioners would need, as Edwards indicates, to be based on shared values of some sort. But what Edwards and most other commentators seem not to recognize is that these values can be detached from a specifically sexual agenda and cast in terms of the radical reform of the structure of society; it is a matter of shared social values, not shared sexualities or sexual attitudes. To return to Craig Owens’s essay in Men in Feminism, it is divisive to define homoerotica as always filtered through homophobic repression, because this doesn’t recognize, and indeed therefore marginalizes, the majority of homoerotic experiences (which are oppressed, not repressed). But it does not therefore follow that the remedy for this situation is more detailed analysis of gay men’s sexual experiences, S/M sexual experiences, or any other sexual experiences. Freud thought that he could cure mental unease by providing a way of talking exhaustively about sex abstracted from love. It seems to me that the disputants in debates about the common ground amongst sexualities still proceed from the assumption that one must seek “cures” for certain sexual problems–that the way to fix what is wrong with the social order is to fix what is wrong with people’s sexuality.

     

    I can suggest more clearly what I mean by considering the way Edwards handles childhood. For Edwards, the key–indeed the only–question for gay men to ask about childhood remains the Freudian question of when and how sexuality is formed there. Under the subheadings “Definitions of Childhood” and “Constructions of Childhood Sexuality,” he provides a rather one-dimensional analysis of a very problematic and contentious area, in order to get quickly to the debate over sexual relationships between young gay adolescents and their older lovers–relationships which Edwards is eager to destigmatize. This approach bypasses what seems to me the most crucial set of questions. What really takes place, in social terms, during childhood? What lessons do children learn about social relations, relations of power? How and in what way are children silenced, stopped from asking difficult or awkward questions? What interventions might be made into the institutional practices that produce childhood as we know it? These are not questions that can be adequately addressed through case histories in childhood sexuality, yet they should be of fundamental interest to anyone interested in effecting social change of a sort sufficiently radical to dehegemonize patriarchy.

     

    It may well be that there is no market for gay writers who would take up the analysis of childhood in a more thoroughgoing way. Gay publishing has its hands full already. But more gay arguments need to be brought against the rather uncomplicated picture presented by advocates of pederasty here. More gay writers need to undertake a radical rethinking of childhood such that, instead of simply defending themselves against the charge (by feminists and others) that they advocate abusive behavior, they can work in tandem with the feminist and children’s rights movements to envision new, more enabling familial and educational environments for children to inhabit. The sort of thing Edwards calls for–the creation of more lesbian and gay youth movement groups, where a young gay teenager can find understanding and companionship without the potentially unwanted sexual attentions that come when this understanding is sought among older men–is probably a good step. But it does not go much distance toward addressing the way childhood as such is constructed in our society, nor does it locate the common value out of which to forge an alliance between child-rights and gay-rights advocates.

     

    I am not suggesting that other recent writers on childhood and sexuality have done much better. The child-rights books, such as Susan Forward’s Betrayal of Innocence, 2 are compelling in their indictment of child-abuse crimes by parents and relatives, but their treatment of gay sexuality is crude at best, often explaining male-male abuse as a failure in the abuser’s heterosexual marriage, without considering the ways that patriarchy encourages and sustains such “failures.” By ignoring the pressures of patriarchy, Forward leaves no room for the gay victim of incestuous rape who wants to denounce the rape but not the fact of being gay. Edwards’s fellow queer theorists have not succeeded very well, either. In her new collection of essays, Tendencies, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick proposes that we regard all gay adults as “survivors,” since they have survived the relentless homophobia that hounds a great many gay teenagers literally to death. 3 Given that two thirds of all teenage suicides are committed by gay teens, one is sympathetic to this terminological move. But Sedgwick is here appropriating the language of child-rights campaigners in a way that is bound to antagonize them. For in this latter parlance, “survivor” is the name taken by those who were physically abused in childhood but who reject the media name for them: victim. By eliminating the distinction between survivors of childhood physical abuse and gays in general, Sedgwick is in effect delegitimating the whole approach of the anti-abuse movement.

     

    All such commentators will continue to play a zero-sum game, moving no closer toward any sort of practicable coalition, until new and more far-reaching arenas of dialogue are opened up. Interestingly, one of the places where the most advanced work on the construction of childhood is being done is the men’s movement. But this movement’s anti-gay and anti-feminist tendencies are sufficiently notorious to keep almost anyone outside the movement–Forward, Sedgwick, Edwards–from engaging its discourse on childhood seriously. Even a critic as generous and inclusive in his approach as Edwards leaves these sorts of impasses largely uncontested. The best he can do is to suggest that gay men might in fact learn something from feminist critiques–that being gay does not necessarily preclude one’s collaborative relation to patriarchy–and that feminist critics might in fact learn something from gay writers who question the range of applicability of feminist theory.

     

    This is not a new point; it doesn’t shift the ground of debate in any significant way. But it is given a new intensity by the occasional passages of personal and autobiographical comment that Edwards introduces to his argument. Because so much of the book is written in a removed cool prose, the moments of autobiography make Edwards seem vulnerable and prepared to admit to being flummoxed sometimes. In this way he perhaps acknowledges the limits of his particular scholarly procedures, of his capacity as an “expert,” and produces evidence of a life lived mutually and fruitfully between a gay men and his women friends–a life that doesn’t seem to be reflected anywhere in the public debate he surveys, but which might be the starting point for a new approach. One returns from these autobiographical excursions to the cool prose with a sense of going from an exciting present to a stuffy past. The cool prose remains diplomatic and patient with its authors, but Edwards’s unwillingness to sustain it without interruption perhaps implies a kind of exasperation with all the disputants and even with his readership. I myself would have liked to see this exasperation made more explicit and central to the whole project, but what Edwards has given us is certainly worth having. His is a book that shows us how much important work remains to be done before we will truly succeed in opening the diverse fields of sexual and social activism to each other.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Craig Owens, “Outlaws: Gay Men in Feminism,” in A. Jardine and P. Smith, eds. Men in Feminism (London: Methuen, 1987).

     

    2. Susan Forward, Betrayal of Innocence (London: Penguin, 1988).

     

    3. Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick, Tendencies (London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1994).

     

  • Unthinkable Writing

    Gregory Ulmer

    English Department
    University of Florida at Gainesville
    glulmer@nervm.Nerdc.Ufl.Edu

     

    Perforations 5 (1994): “Bodies, Dreams, Technologies.” Public Domain, Inc., POB 8899, Atlanta, GA. 31106-0899. INFO@PD.ORG

     

    Described as a media-kit journal of theory, technology, and art, Perforations is just one facet of Public Domain’s activities. Jim Demmers, Robert Cheatham, and Chea Prince (PD’s coordinating committee) also sponsor “Working Papers”–“a series of presentations devoted to the various crises of legitimation, representation, and communication.” Held at various venues around Atlanta, recent sessions addressed “the new alien in science fiction,” “Madonna, Paglia, Camp, Queer Theory, and PoMo Feminism,” “mirror, myopia, modesty, weakness, failure, scandal.” Their Kiosk project-in-progress (demonstrated at SIGGRAPH 93) will be a series of interactive hypermedia stations as alternative public sites for displaying electronic arts. PD also engages in video and public access cable television production, and provides internet access for arts organizations.

     

    In short, PD has learned one of the fundamental lessons of the information age: the goal is not to design only a product–a tape, a form, a performance–but also the institutional frame capable of receiving that product. They approach the electronic as an “apparatus” consisting not only of technology but also of institutional practices and individual behaviors (ideological subject formation). Functioning as a relay site (a booster switching node operating as an information wild card), PD represents a new kind of creative activity that challenges the old subject/object divisions separating criticism from art: you cannot study PD without having them study you back. For now, though, I am going to consider one of their products–number 5 in their series of media kits.

     

    Perforations 5 is a collector’s item not only because it is a limited edition but because it constitutes an exhibition of the status of multimedia in this brief transitional moment of the convergence of media between the book and the computer: after the desire to write with sound, image and text together has spread to the general citizenry but before the technology capable of democratizing such writing is widely available. The kit comes in a large box, the receipt of which is better than getting a crate of Florida citrus and almost as good as Christmas. The contents: an oversize “adult comic” (black drawing on yellow paper)– “Brain-Dead Dog,” by Tom Zummer; a book-length loose-leaf anthology of writings by a diverse group of contributors, including PD members; an equally diverse tape anthology of video works; an audio cassette of music by Dick Robinson (side one) and Michael Century (side two); a computer disk with a hypertext (“Genetis”) authored in Story Space by Richard Smyth. The kit is a snapshot of this moment when the media are suspended in their separate technologies, yet brought into virtual contact with one another under the theme that heads the issue: “bodies, dreams, technologies.”

     

    In the same way that some people watch “television” rather than any one particular program, one way to read Perforations is to scan or surf it as a whole: browse through the colored pages of the anthology with the cassette playing in the boombox, the tape going in the vcr, while flipping the screens of “Genetis” on your Mac. The natural medium for Perforations, in other words, might be cd-rom, with all the pieces hyperlinked to bring out the pattern that emerges from the wholistic reading. The title suggests the nature of this pattern (the interface of bodies-dreams- technologies) but not the specific quality–the feel or effect–of the collection. Rather than trying to name that effect, I want to follow a personal thread that forms the whole into a constellation for me.

     

    My point of entry is Richard Smyth’s “Genetis.” Smyth, who just completed his Ph.D. in the cultural studies program at the University of Florida, has been testing the genre of mystory that I introduced in Teletheory as a support for electronic reasoning. To see how Smyth adapts mystory to his own purposes and how it looks in the context of Perforations clarified for me some of the outstanding questions about electronic style. “Genetis” (self-described as a “rhizography”) is arranged in five “plateaus” (alluding to Deleuze and Guattari)–myth, parable, allegory, legend, theory. The “legend” plateau refers to the “Florida School” experimental approach to cultural studies–the search for the institutional practices of schooling appropriate for an electronic apparatus. The shorthand code for these new practices is “dream logic,” extracted from psychoanalysis.

     

    Smyth conceptualizes his dream logic with the help of Deleuze/Guattari’s metaphor of the rhizome, the vehicle of which is any kind of swarming animal or vegetable system (rat dens or crab grass). The basic point of the rhizome as an interface metaphor, however, is best seen in Deleuze’s use of the orchid/wasp relationship as an example for conceptualizing an alternative to representation. Instead of the semiotic idea of signs as icons, indexes, or symbols, the rhizographic notion of signifying relationships is that of the symbiotic interaction of two different species systems (orchids and wasps). Meaning circulates in the manner of the exchange between two systems which has to do with fertility and not with signs. The part of the vehicle activated in this metaphor is that of the passage from one system to another. Smyth organizes “Genetis” in terms of the co-presence in different dimensions of his experience of the psycho-dream theme. These dimensions include the major discourses of the “popcycle”–family, school, academic discipline, and entertainment or popular culture.

     

    The dream-body-technology theme recurs throughout the kit, beginning with “Brain-Dead Dog,” which, having been brained by a flying brick, somehow obtains access to the electro-magnetic spectrum, where it fuses with a virtual robot. Descriptions of dreams appear in many of the texts, as in Chea Prince’s introduction (dumped like a tangled parachute into a tree by a pink cloud of energy, he finds many other people there discussing a similar experience). As in “Genetis,” the texts move freely through the different discourses of the popcycle. The legitimated theories of the academic disciplines are well represented throughout, but the peculiar quality of this kit is the emphasis it gives to various kinds of denigrated knowledge — pseudo-knowledge from the scientific point of view — such as everything having to do with para-psychology, the para-normal. Thus there is a piece by Mark Macy, “When Dimensions Cross,” about the astral body and making contact with the spirit world. The crucial element in this piece is the role that electronic technologies play in attempts to make contact with the dead. The spirit world makes use of the physics of radio, television, computers, to send messages into the world of the living. Another way this theme recurs is in the figure of the Golem, introduced in Michael Century’s “Quartet for a Solo Piano,” entitled “The Chela of Golem.” The program note refers to the ancient tales in Jewish mysticism about an “artificial person” (a kind of automaton) created by chanting various combinations of letters. Goethe’s “Sorcerer’s Apprentice” is a variant of this story.

     

    At one level, the juxtaposition of academic theory with the discourses of denigrated knowledge has the effect (recalling surrealism) of separating out “research” as a formal activity, to feature “research” in terms of its own artistic properties. E. K. Huckaby, for example, authors “Two False Studies,’” concerning “some relationships B-tween Semen & Ectoplasm.” The cumulative result of the many readings dealing with the paranormal, linking technology with various spiritualisms, fantasies, legends, and dreams, is to establish an allegorical commentary effect. The allegory suggests that electronic equipment is the prosthesis not of the analytical mentality, in the way that print turned out to be, but of this wild desire for knowledge outside the logical, rational, empirical restrictions of the legitimate disciplines. The computer is the prosthesis of the body, capable of harnessing, managing, organizing, manipulating into a dream logic the desires that have sustained a fascination with the bodily mysteries of life, death, and the after-life. The implication of the electronic apparatus, with hypermedia writing, is that we now have equipment capable of fusing the analytical resources of print culture with the emotional resources of audio-visual entertainments.

     

    Foregrounding the denigrated knowledge of mystical matters is a symptom of a boundary crisis (in this case, the boundary dividing what discourses and objects are “proper” for study). This territory of the boundary is in fact the one staked out for exploration and experimentation by this journal. The significance of the name for the journal– “Perforations“–is clarified in the interview with Prince and Cheatham about the PD project on “the Doll Universe.” “It is with the proliferation of ostensible boundary conditions that a condition of perforation sets in,” Cheatham observes. “Sort of like a hyper-dimensional cluster of interpenetrating soap bubbles. In Deleuze and Guattari’s term, more ‘lines of flight’ begin to appear just as a (virtual) function of these intersecting boundaries.” The doll universe concerns those two most problematic boundaries–the one separating the living and the dead (animate and inanimate) and identity (separating the inside from the outside of the person). “Technology seems to be developing certain chiasmatic qualities here.” The apparatus is a “social machine,” and this kit evokes the emerging cyborgization of experience, approached from the side of arts, letters, imagination, fantasy, desire.

     

    The problematics of death and identity engage that part of the apparatus concerned with subject formation (subjectivation). To return to “Genetis,” Smyth structures the relationships or boundary crossings of the popcycle by analogy with the twin spirals of DNA. The fertilizing crossing that interests him in particular is between his disciplinary knowledge of poststructural psychoanalysis and his personal experience of a dysfunctional family that led to his breakdown. The structuralist principle embodied in Smyth’s use of the DNA spiral is that any two systems when juxtaposed create a commentary effect in which each explains the other. The effect is generative rather than representational: it is not that sound explains color, but that their correspondences create a pattern that produces intelligibility. Smyth helps clarify what is at stake in the kit as a whole–how to write the unconscious.

     

    According to the theory there is such a thing as thinking with the unconscious, but by definition this thinking is not accessible to the thinker. Freud himself had no analyst, but through a process of self-analysis he devised a method for moving between dreams and theory. The mystorical genre that Smyth employs is more closely related to Freud’s self-analysis than to the institutionalized method that resulted from it. In “Genetis” Smyth shows something to himself, using not the talking cure but a written one. Nor is “cure” an appropriate term, since there is nothing clinical about this practice. Rather, this kit evokes what it is to write with the emerging “middle voice” theorized by the French, neither active nor passive (it is the boundary crisis of this distinction) but in which the writer receives what is addressed elsewhere. This boundary writing makes possible a new level of experience (just as alphabetic literacy made possible the experience of selfhood, as Eric Havelock has argued)–an experience that is not without risks.

     

    The effect of the mystory is to set in motion a flow across boundaries (perforations), to write across the division separating inside from outside (personal from collective, private from public)–to bring into visibility the situation of the person within the social order (the imbrication of the imaginary in the symbolic). Gilles Deleuze theorized this interface zone between the heights of propositional discourse and the depths of the body in terms of the logic of sense. Deleuze learned from Nietzsche not to be “satisfied with either biography or bibliography; we must reach a secret point where the anecdote of life and the aphorism of thought amount to one and the same thing” (The Logic of Sense 128). Later Deleuze phrases this convergence in terms of limit experiences, thinking of F. Scott Fitzgerald’s alcoholism, with reference to the impossible experience of death:

     

    Are we to speak about Fitzgerald’s and Lowry’s alcoholism, Nietzsche’s and Artaud’s madness while remaining on the shore? Are we to wish only that those who have been struck down do not abuse themselves too much? Are we to take up collections and create special journal issues? Or should we go a short way further to see for ourselves, be a little alcoholic, a little crazy, a little suicidal, a little of a guerilla–just enough to extend the crack, but not enough to deepen it irremediably? (157)

     

    Here is the challenge of the new writing emerging in the electronic apparatus, somewhere between knowing and doing (the opposition and dilemma of creativity ever since the ancients split theory and practice into separate concepts). The destruction of the body and its social consequences, as in alcoholism, resonates with the dysfunctional family in Smyth’s mystory. This resonance in turn brings to mind perhaps the single most brilliant piece in the kit, “The Hidden World of the Visual Analogue,” an excerpt from The Iconography of Abuse, by Stevens Seaberg (Seaberg’s book is distributed as a Fort?/Da! book by Public Domain). The complete book is described as “over 100 pages of text and 200 illustrations showing the transformation of feelings resulting from child abuse into emblematic, metaphoric and allegorical forms as they appear in the works of artists like Michelangelo, Durer, Hogarth [etc] . . . .” Using the analogy of how the puppeteer’s gestures are repeated in the movements of the puppet, Seaberg traces a pattern linking the striking arm of the abuser and the defending arms of the abused to a series of images, scenes, designs, and works of all kinds.

     

    What interests me in this thread that I have been following through the kit is the way it brings into focus something reported to me by several people who have experimented with mystory, which is that the experience can be very disturbing. The nature of the form/method is that it allows one to write without thinking–to write things that are precisely not thinkable. Each part of the whole is written separately (each plateau of the popcycle is entered into the data base). When the parts are arranged into a pattern (lining up the perforations, the way Alan Turing cracked the code of the Nazi enigma engine during the World War by lining up the holes punched in the tapes) the experience of the middle voice begins, for the authors recognize themselves in a portrait-without-resemblance (the wasp finds its orchid). Public Domain approaches this risk at a more collective level, having in mind the work of Georges Bataille. Bataille’s General Economy was designed to teach the capitalist world to shift from the individual point of view from which it made sense to accumulate wealth, to the general point of view of death (of being already dead) from which vantage point the waste of life could be appreciated, and the uselessness of accumulation.

     

    At the core of “bodies, dreams, technologies,” then, is an ancient bit of wisdom, and an age-old desire. The shaman’s power, after all, was the ability to cross over into the realm of the dead (which anyone could do, of course); but the shaman could return again to the living and make use in this world of what had been learned from the dead. Perforations 5 suggests that this shamanistic method is still operative in the forces producing the electronic apparatus. What is the computer really for? For going into this zone between, this perforated region of crossings, which until now only a few special individuals were able to negotiate–shamans and artists and crackpots. The promise of the emerging electronic equipment–presuming the invention of the enabling institutionalpractices and individual behaviors and attitudes–is the massification, popularization, general availability to the ordinary citizen of writing death. The prosthetic shaman–that is one purpose, one possibility, of the computer.

     

    Meanwhile, the “call for stuff” for Perforations 6 has been issued, under the title “the Uncanny Refutation of the Apocalyptic: Ghosts, Leaks, Stains.” The latter part of the title refers to that which may be overturning the traditional “human/nature/divinity” as we move to the technological era’s version of a millennium. Contact Public Domain for further information.

     

  • From Technology to Machinism

    Brent Wood

    Methodologies for the Study of Western
    History and Culture
    Trent University
    bwood@trentu.ca

     

    Conley, Verena Andermatt, ed., on behalf of Miami Theory Collective. Rethinking Technologies, Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1993.

     

    Rethinking Technologies is a collection of twelve essays inspired (at least nominally so) by Miami University’s 1990 colloquium “Questioning Technologies.” The volume is dedicated in memoriam to Felix Guattari, whose writings on technology and ecology the editors single out as specifically inspirational for much of the work it contains. Guattari’s thought is represented by his essay “Machine Heterogenesis,” perhaps the most difficult in the volume, in which he seeks to go beyond Heidegger by showing how machines manifest not Being but “multitudes of ontological components” (26). We humans, according to Guattari, participate in this “ontological reconversion” merely by accepting what it is that the machines offer us.

     

    The majority of the essays in the volume relate directly or indirectly to Heidegger’s “The Question Concerning Technology”; some refer also to other of his works. Ingrid Scheibler’s “Heidegger and the Rhetoric of Submission” focuses almost exclusively on a defense of Heidegger’s work against criticism it has endured from Jurgen Habermas. Heidegger’s major contribution to the discourse of technology was to ask that we think of technology not in terms of applied science but instead in terms of a representational “enframing” that prevents us from encountering the Being of beings; editor Conley suggests that “it may be possible to rethink technologies in terms other than enframing” (xi). Conley sees the collection of essays that make up Rethinking Technologies as an attempt to go both “through” and “beyond” Heidegger, a move required primarily by two late twentieth-century developments: global ecological crisis and the “transformation of subjectivities” (xiii) brought about by the proliferation of communication technologies.

     

    The essays are nominally organized into four groups: “Questioning Technologies,” “Technology and the Environment,” “Technology and the Arts,” and “Technology and Cyberspace.” These groupings, intended as “markers for the reader” (x) are largely specious. Francoise Gaillard’s essay “Technical Performance: Postmodernism, Angst or Agony of Modernism” seeks the roots of the apparent political anemia of the arts under late capitalism, all but ignoring technology in the process. Three other essays, Scott Durham’s “The Technology of Death and Its Limits: The Problem of the Simulation Model,” Alberto Moreiras’s “The Leap and the Lapse: Hacking a Private Site in Cyberspace,” and Avital Ronell’s “Our Narcotic Modernity,” look to literature for advice on the problems posed by the clash of the human and the technological, yet only Durham’s is grouped under the banner of “Arts.” The only case in which there is a productive dialogue between the grouping and the interior of the essay is that of Teresa Brennan’s “Age of Paranoia.” Brennan’s essay traces a metaphorical connection between the urge, in the infant, for control of the mother’s breast and modernity’s overstress of the visual and tendency to commodify (and, implicitly, degrade) the earth as a source of life.

     

    Presented with such a motley collection of ideas, one can proceed in either of two ways: take only what is useful to one’s own field of study and dismiss the rest, or labour to make connections between the pieces that (hopefully) result in further insight, which may be still more heterogeneous with regard to the original collection. There is also the possibility that the latter approach may result in nothing but a headache and a subsequent recoiling to the safety of a good novel. At the risk of sounding disrespectfully flip, I suggest that this state of affairs may have been the founding moment of the three “appeals to literature” described above. It ought to go without saying that there is nothing dishonourable about such a move, in which art ceases to be mere illustration for theory and begins also to motivate and to define it.

     

    In terms of the hard-core theory exemplified by contributors Guattari and Virilio, the three “appeals to literature” may appear marginal. I prefer to see them as the epitome of the “interplay” which Conley feels we ought to find within Rethinking Technologies. I take the bold step of forming my own provisional groupings for the purposes of “making sense” of the heterogeneity of the collection. I would wish to imply all the standard logocentric disclaimers applicable to the previous statement were I not, in highlighting these three essays, making words the sort-of-center of my critique. Perhaps I might venture to call it a “blind spot” as opposed to a “sort-of-center” in order to point out the absence of “words” as an explicit subject of discourse in the volume, for it appears that they are always lurking just over the authors’ and editors’ shoulders.

     

    Ronell focuses her essay around a meta-fictional passage linking Flaubert’s Madame Bovary with America’s contemporary “war on drugs.” Ronell equates the writer with the addict, and literature with drugs. She begins with a reference to the presence of drugs in Heidegger’s Gestell (enframing) and Dasein (Being). Addiction, in Ronell’s reading of Heidegger, is a response to a vital urge, but in the end an inauthentic one: “addicted, Dasein goes nowhere fast” (60). Ronell provisionally accepts Heidegger’s assimilation of addiction under technology–“a certain type of ‘being-on-drugs’” (62)–in order to deconstruct it. Derrida’s supplement pokes its head into the picture as an explanation of the literature-drugs analogy; each is an attempt to compensate for an absence that seems to have always been there. Ronell argues that the two share a common and parallel history contemporaneous with modernity. Moreover, literature itself has always worked to tell us about the very strictures of law with which both it and its intimate, drugs, have had an ambiguous love-hate relationship: “Flaubert’s book went to court: it was denounced as a poison” (64).

     

    It is through the figure of Emma Bovary that Ronell demonstrates her thesis: that the “structure of addiction” is “metaphysically at the basis of our culture” (64).

     

    As I read the documents I realized that [Emma] was the body on which these urges started showing almost naturally, prior to the time the technological prosthesis became available on the streets. . . . She declared a war on the real, this unknown horror, she put out a call for a drug culture. She worked out of her own abysses, hunting down the imaginary phallic supplement. (68-69)

     

    Ronell’s open-ended essay allows one to conclude that it is not contradictory to see literature and drugs both in terms of Heidegger’s enframing and in terms of Derrida’s supplement–if one sees modernity itself as in some sense a product of the enframing. The word, in cybernetic terms, as commandis in an ambiguous position in its literary function, part of a control system that is nonetheless Other to the Law.

     

    From modern literary control system we move to Scott Durham’s postmodern simulation model. Durham’s essay is inspired by J. G. Ballard’s novel Crash, one of the original harbingers of cyberpunk. Durham contrasts Siegfried Giedion’s illustration of the hog slaughterhouse as a paradigmatic encounter between technology and organic life with Ballard’s use of crash-test dummies to alter that very opposition. Giedion’s vision is a modern one that is fated to “untimeliness”: it can only appear in a retrospective in which the organic appears as an “irreducible living presence” precisely at the moment of its death in the mechanized slaughterhouse of a technologized modernity. Ballard’s is a postmodern one in which Baudrillard’s reversal of the dependence of simulation on actuality is presaged. By implication, Durham’s use of Ballard to replace Giedion also means a bracketing of Heidegger.

     

    In Ballard’s novel the power of the word as an effective cog in a technological apparatus reaches new heights when viewed as an analog of the simulation model. That the model is of human death prevents us from appealing to mortality to highlight human “life” as unique from technological “life.” Our deaths are now just as much a product of social engineering as our day-to-day routines. Durham argues that Baudrillard’s hyperbole–“a certain phantasy of postmodernity as a totally operational system”–is most important not for its own truth or falsehood, but rather for “the effects of truth it exerts on those who entertain it” (161). Crash‘s protagonist, as a believer, dreams “of a fatal collision with Elizabeth Taylor that would launch him into a permanent afterlife on the far side of the screen” (163). Durham recalls J. L. Austin as he characterizes the ensuing accident as a “misfire”: Ballard’s hero’s planned “accident” is interrupted by a “real” accident in which he crashes (ironically) into a busload of tourists. In Durham’s eyes, the attempted enactment of Baudrillard’s hyperreality results merely in the displacement of the real/simulation opposition it might have sought to resolve. For Durham this implies that in postmodernity the “real” is lived not merely as “that which it is possible to give an equivalent reproduction” but also as that which “withdraws absolutely from reproduction” (166). This echo of Heidegger is analogously ironic.

     

    Alberto Moreiras takes Durham and Ronell one step further, gathering together Heidegger and Derrida, the word and the letter, analogy and cybernetics, and extrapolating them into the world of virtual reality through Jorge Luis Borges’s story “El Aleph.” The “Aleph” in Borges’s tale is a mysterious site of revelation which Moreiras uses as an analog of cyberspace. It is “one of the points in space containing all points” and also “the site of encounter where ‘modern man’ meets robotic control of reality” (195). In this scheme, the Aleph is “a radical place of disjunction, where language breaks down” (195). Since the Aleph can never be expressed but merely indicated, and since it contains every point and therefore must contain itself, it is the place where the “ground of analogy breaks in excess” (196). Moreiras likens this crisis of analogy to what occurs when virtual reality, as the evolutionary end-product of a “calculative-representational enframing of the world” (194) –an utterly enveloping representation–throws representation itself into question. Once again we are presented with the “real” as “withdrawing excess.” The place where this withdrawal is experienced is the “private site” of the essay’s title.

     

    An Aleph is also, Moreiras notes, “the first letter of the alphabet of the sacred language” (198). We must then, by analogy, deal with cyberspace in terms of the the Derridean concept of writing as both excess and lack. As one attempts to “hack” one’s way into cyberspace, encountering only the concurrent withdrawal of the real, one finds oneself, as Moreiras puts it, “engag[ing] cyberware as a writing machine” (198). Here Moreiras’s own sloppiness with cyberlingo comes back to haunt him. In the proliferation of “cybertech,” “cyberexperience,” “cyberexcess” and “cyberware” in addition to “cyberspace,” “cybernetic” and “cyborg,” a consistent meaning for the object of his analogy is lost. His traditional recourse to kybernetes (“pilot or governor of a ship”) as the root of “cybernetics” does not help; the “control” function is alluded to once and never again, giving way to discussion of the “lapse” and the “leap” of writing.

     

    The role played by control in critiques of technology, and especially of “cybertech,” cannot be overstated. N. Katherine Hayles’s excellent essay “The Seductions of Cyberspace” appeals to the “cybernetic literature” of William Gibson, Thomas Pynchon, William S. Burroughs and Vernon Vinge, but in the end its principal source of motivation is another kind of science fiction: Norbert Wiener’s Cybernetics. Wiener, in fact, occupies a place in Rethinking Technologies not so very far from Heidegger’s. One is tempted to see the two thinkers as fraternal twins: complementary interpretations of an original union between humanity and technology. Hayles highlights the “fetishistic drive for control” that is at the base of cybernetics and, though it is not as often admitted, at the base of cyberspace. This latter is evident in a reading of Gibson, the originator of the term “cyberspace.” Hayles quotes from Autodesk’s John Walker, who, inspired by Gibson, defines a cyberspace system as “a three-dimensional domain in which cybernetic feedback and communication occur” (176). Hayles makes the implicit connection between the drive for control over the physical world and the desire to escape the results of this drive by occupying virtual space.

     

    Here we must examine the multiple meanings of the word “virtual,” which are the source both of the term’s appeal and of its contradictory implications. In English, “virtual” has two connotations: one optical and one mechanical. A virtual world is one that exists, from the user’s perspective, on the other side of the mirror: the illusory “place” which Ballard’s hero seeks. At the same time, it is thought of as “virtual” reality; that is, the illusion is so strong that we can behave as if it were “reality.” The French virtuel, however, often translated simply as “virtual,” offers yet another angle. The “virtual” in this case is contrasted with the “actual”: virtuality is potentiality. The gathering together of these meanings in a single term guarantees that it will be slippery and not admitting of a univocal conclusion when put into question. As Hayles notes, it is fallacy to believe that by entering a virtual “space” we will be able to escape the problems that will continue to plague our physical surroundings. Nevertheless, she is unable to resist the temptation to interpret cyberspace as “opening up new vistas for exploration” (188), even while she warns us of the power of the cybernetic system over human behaviour. This, it seems to me, is the most important “seduction” of cyberspace. Hayles suggests we (dominant Westerners) take the opening up of cyberspace as an opportunity to “extend lessons learned from postcolonialism” (188). We ought at the same time to bear in mind the lesson Ronell learns from literature: “drugs, as it turns out, are not so much about seeking an exterior, transcendental dimension . . . as they are about exploring fractal interiorities” (62). If “cyberware” constitutes, as Moreiras suggests, “a writing machine,” or even if, as it seems to me, it puts the Derridean distinction between writing and speech into question, then it is vital that the option of silence be left open for us, and not dismissed as a technophobic desire to return to a pre-technological world.

     

    Silence is in fact the theme of Scheibler’s defense of Heidegger. Scheibler seeks to rescue “silence” from the connotation of submission or resignation, especially in light of Heidegger’s acquiescence to National Socialism. Making reference to several of Heidegger’s works, she reinterprets silence as meditation, a way of being and thinking that frees us from the objectification of the world (and ourselves) that is the result of representational thinking. Meditative thinking, writes Scheibler, “is the way in which human beings are involved directly and immediately in Being” (126). She quotes from John Anderson, who suggests that “meditative thinking begins with an awareness of the field . . . an awareness of the horizon rather than of the objects of ordinary understanding” (127). This type of silence is not submissive to authority but rather outside of authority; it is outside word and outside writing. It is interesting that while “putting on cyberspace” appears to be an opening up of the horizon, it is only accomplished by a shrinking-in of our awareness. It is an inverse relation of the sublime that we feel here: to comprehend the function of “cyberspace systems” within our own minds is an impossible task. The Aleph, the point in space that contains all points, it turns out, is within us, and it expels our contemplation with all the force of a magnetic field. The contemplation of the function of the word within results in a flurry of exteriorized words in ecstasy and defense.

     

    In the end, it appears that only Felix Guattari himself is capable of what Conley advocates as the mission of Rethinking Technologies: to go through and beyond Heidegger. Guattari begins by invoking both Heidegger and Wiener; he proposes that both these perspectives be avoided in an attempt to “discern the thresholds of ontological intensity that will allow us to grasp ‘machinism’” (13). Machinism is Guattari’s “object of fascination,” not technology as it is defined by Heidegger, by Wiener, by Derrida, or by Baudrillard. Guattari raises the all-important question of machinic autopoiesis, but insists that this not be thought of in terms of “vital autonomy according to an animal model,” but rather in terms of “enunciative consistency” (14). Neither are machines to be related to their material manifestations. For Guattari the machine is a complex apparatus of enunciation that does not obey the structure of the Signifier. Echoing Austin once again, he asserts that machinic autopoiesis is characterized not by signification but by “effects, products . . . [and] particular services” (14). Echoing Wiener, Guattari suggests that this autopoiesis is demonstrated through a seeking of disequilibrium. Following Francisco Varela, Guattari notes that one function of autopoietic machines is to reproduce themselves; breaking with Varela, he suggests that autopoiesis ought to be thought of as a kind of life “specific to a mecanosphere that superimposes itself on the biosphere” (17). In this vision, machines exist co-extensively with their biological components.

     

    The machinic in Guattari’s essay seems to occupy a position similar to that occupied by schizoanalysis in his other work. Here he is able to trace machinic orderings through dimensions of asignifying semiotics (related to cybernetics but also surpassing it), technological, biological and even human components. The machine is a figure of heterogenesis which challenges our habit of thinking in terms of ontological homogeneity. This is the underlying thrust of Guattari’s analysis of machines. It is even a seduction to call these heterogeneric orderings “machines”; this verbal component, following the intuition that Guattari is seeking to access the heterogeneity of which he writes, is itself part of a functioning machine whose access to our thought is through the word “machine” itself. Guattari’s article does not tell us anything about technology. Its function is to instruct our thought about its own structures by forcing it to strain against them. As an enunciation Guattari’s work is neither writing nor speech, but a sinister attempt to reorient the belongingness of our own enunciations to a system of control.

     

    I have focused only on half the essays that comprise Rethinking Technologies not through a prior process of choosing but merely because they fell this way as I attempted to “make sense” of the heterogeneity which with they presented me. In this respect I am guilty of attempting to unify difference through recourse to the essential unit of control–the word. Mea culpa. This is my own cross to bear. Other contributors include, in addition to the aforementioned Brennan, Virilio, and Gaillard, Patrick Clancy (“Telefigures and Cyberspace”), editor Conley herself (“Eco-Subjects”), and Jean-Luc Nancy (“War, Law, Sovereignty–Techne“). In utterly pragmatic terms, I recommend the book as useful reading for Graduate students as well as senior undergraduates preparing for Graduate school. It is also useful for any philosopher or cultural theorist pursuing questions posed by the clash between technological proliferation and either ecology or shifts in our conception of subjectivity.

     

  • Late Soviet Culture: A Parallax for Postmodernism

    Vitaly Chernetsky

    Comparative Literature and Literary Theory Program
    University of Pennsylvania
    vchernet@mail.sas.upenn.edu

     

    Lahusen, Thomas, and Gene Kuperman, eds. Late Soviet Culture: From Perestroika to Novostroika. Durham: Duke University Press, 1993.

     

    In an essay recently published in October (no. 63, Winter 1993), Hal Foster uses a suggestive metaphor for the study of contemporary artistic production–he speaks of “postmodernism in parallax.” Foster’s astronomical metaphor (“parallax” [from Greek para-, “beside, beyond,” and allassein, “to change”], in astronomy, means “the difference in [position and] direction of a celestial body as measured from two points on the earth”) furnishes a possibility of salvaging the discourse on postmodernism from becoming a passing fad (a danger Foster highlights in his essay) by reaching beyond the spatial coordinates in which it has been primarily operating (the industrialized West), that is, by effecting a shift in the position from which it is contemplated.

     

    This agenda seems to have been on the mind of the editors of Duke University Press’s Post-Contemporary Interventions series, which over the course of its five years has brought out such titles as Postmodernism and Japan and The Caribbean and the Postmodern Perspective. Late Soviet Culture is the series’ first volume to focus on the former Soviet Union–a territory which for various reasons has been conspicuously absent from many

     

    If for many observers postmodernism itself is still a very contradictory and “fuzzy” concept, this is even more true in the case of Russian, or Soviet postmodernism: is it really possible to speak of a postmodern cultural condition–which, if we follow most of the theorists of the postmodern, is defined as a product of commodity culture, new electronic technologies (computers, video, etc.), new “geopolitical aesthetics”–in the former Soviet Union, a totalitarian empire that has disintegrated into medieval style micro-states in which the most basic commodities are in shortage? It is admittedly problematic to apply to late Soviet culture those theories of postmodernism that view it primarily as the cultural condition of the developed Western societies, characterized by the ecstasy of consumerism and commodity culture, and the proliferation of new technologies (video, cyberspace, etc.). However, the striking similarity between certain cultural products emerging in recent decades from both the Western world and the late Soviet Union suggests that the putative “postmodernism” of the latter is more than merely a symptom of Western myopia. Such theories of postmodernism as develop Georges Bataille’s notions of general economy of expenditure, excess and waste, for example (theories usefully discussed in Arkady Plotnitsky’s recent study Reconfigurations: Critical Theory and General Economy [Gainesville, 1993]), would seem to indicate legitimate moments of linkage and overlap. Postmodern Culture itself has been a pioneer in the discussion of Russian postmodernism, publishing a symposium on the topic in the January 1993 issue.

     

    The editors of Late Soviet Culture chose not to enter the debate headlong. To be exact, only two out of the fifteen essays included in it directly discuss the notion of a Russian postmodernism. However, the book in its entirety (being as it is a very heterogeneous collection–which is typical of the genre of post-conference volumes to which it belongs) is an excellent contribution to cultural studies: it offers a “slice” across the many aspects of late Soviet culture (to be exact, Russian Soviet, for the cultural condition of other former Soviet republics is never addressed, with the one possible exception of Evgeny Dobrenko’s essay). For the expert, the book has many insights and provocations to offer; a Slavic scholar would find it worth reading cover-to-cover. But the collection could also serve as a very good introduction for a non-Slavicist to Soviet culture at the times of perestroika and glasnost, grounded in the context of some crucial precursory phenomena. Soviet postmodernism has many dissimilarities from its Western cousin; and the essays in this volume both analyze its emergence in terms of the inner logic of the development of Russian culture and contrast it with that of the West.

     

    In their introduction, the editors of the volume note that “it appears today that positions, theories, and ideas become obsolete almost at the moment of their utterance” (v). Indeed, the contributions to Late Soviet Culture have all been written from the position of Soviet Union still intact, if about to collapse. A new, different “Russian postmodernism” is emerging today, and some of the pieces in the collection now have primarily the value of documents for an archeologist of the “Soviet postmodern” of the last years of the old empire. This is especially true of the two opening texts, an optimistic account by the novelist Mikhail Kuraev of the changes brought about by glasnost, and a comment by Boris Kagarlitsky–a rare example of a Russian politician whose program is rooted primarily in the writings of the contemporary Western left–on the re-emergence of the categories of political right and left under perestroika and the particular twists this binarism has taken.

     

    The essays that follow contextualize the discussion of late Soviet culture through a backward glance. Sidney Monas explores a parallel between the Gorbachev era and Russia’s “Great Reforms” of the 1860s, which launched the society’s rapid modernization, and which, incidentally, brought the terms “glasnost” and “perestroika” into wide circulation for the first time. Monas briefly draws attention to the paradoxical statement of one of Russia’s most fascinating and controversial nineteenth-century intellectuals–Petr Chaadaev–that Russia “has no history” and “has contributed nothing but the occupation of space” (37-38), implying that Russia is totally extraneous to the teleological narrative of Western European history. It is left to the reader, though, to speculate on the possibilities of tying Chaadaev’s maxims with Russia’s present cultural situation, where, as Mikhail Epstein notes in his contribution to the volume, the temporal sequencing has broken down and cultural artifacts from at least the past two millennia entertain a peculiarly synchronous and spatialized coexistence. Paul Debreczeny’s contribution offers an analysis of the formation and functioning of one of Russia’s key national myths–that of Pushkin, the nation’s poet–up to the outcry caused by the “blasphemous” act of opening the country’s first McDonald’s on Moscow’s Pushkin Square; he avoids, though, discussing the recent literary battles surrounding the Pushkin myth, mostly connected with Andrei Sinyavsky’s irreverent book Strolls with Pushkin (the English translation of which was published in 1993 as well).

     

    The next cluster of essays in the volume deals with the totalitarian culture and mindset of Stalin’s Soviet Union. Renata Gal’tseva and Irina Rodnyanskaya consider it in the light of the twentieth century’s great dystopian texts (Russian as well as foreign)–which also reached Russia post factum, in the 1980s, and propose the individual human being as the obstacle that triggers the breakdown of utopian/totalitarian projects, consistently engaged in attempts at effacing the individual. Maya Turovskaya analyzes the role of cinema as a cultural institution under Stalin. Her focus is not as much on the dramatic history of the regime’s brutal control over the cinematic production, but on moviegoing as a practice “within the context of a general shortage of entertainment” (95, Turovskaya’s emphasis). She compares the situation in the Soviet Union to the similar, but much more shrewd cultural policy of Nazi Germany: while in the Soviet Union the regime adopted “a homogeneous model of a propagandistic (didactic), quasi-popular cinema” (105), in Germany it combined the production of ideologized blockbusters with more or less mindless entertainment. One of the fascinating facts not much known in the West is that the German-made films of the latter category fulfilled their “safety valve” function in both regimes: the Soviet “generation of victors” throughout the 1940s was actively consuming “trophy” films like the German 1944 musical Die Frau meine Traume, whose star Marika Roekk became a cult figure. Turovskaya ends her essay with a coda on the stratification of cultural tastes in the late empire, with the state, the masses, and the intellectuals favoring completely different products. She stops short, though, from considering the “perverse” practices of the younger generation, when totalitarian classics are consumed as the material for simulacric “remakes.”

     

    The next two essays in the book focus on the production end of the stalinist cultural machine. Evgeny Dobrenko offers a generic study of the literature of “the Zhdanov era” (1945-1953)–an era which “classic” literary histories refer to as a “desolate scene” and a “monotonous plain,” and which the more recent revisionist texts, such as Boris Groys’s The Total Art of Stalinism (1992), view as a peculiarly postmodern phenomenon avant la lettre. Dobrenko turns his attention away from judgments of taste to the study of the cultural (more narrowly–literary) model itself. This period of socialist realism’s “established existence” is, he underscores, the primary target of the subversive projects of the Soviet postmodern (which he refers to as “the Russian post-avant-garde” 109), and as such it requires close scrutiny. It is situated, he postulates, in the “zero time” of catastrophe, when there is something before the event (in this case, the regime’s violent suppression of independent thinking) and something after the event, while the event itself seems to be missing. What we face in this case, according to Dobrenko, is a “system of mytho-production and recoding of reality in the direction necessary for power” (110), a static system which “by its nature is incapable of self-development and reacts only to external impulses” (111-12), conducted through criticism which “did not serve as a self-regulator, but rather as both the means and the object of various external manipulations” (112). An analysis of this cultural machine, Dobrenko believes, can enable us to discern the “fundamental lexicon” of totalitarianism. He offers insightful and witty readings of samples of its formulaic products, especially its quasi-utopian idylls of collective farm prosperity and workers’ consciencious attitude, populated not with human beings but with functions, with “cogs and wheels” of the totalitarian system–whose crumbling monuments are still with us. Dobrenko’s general analysis is supplemented by Thomas Lahusen’s case study of a particular Zhdanovite novel–Vasily Azhaev’s Far from Moscow, a powerful illustration of the functioning of this cultural machine. This text showcases the construction of an oil pipeline in the Russian Far East shortly after the German invasion of the Soviet Union, presented as an example of everyday heroism and devotion to the nation. The amazing “secret lining” of the book is that its author was an ex-labor camp prisoner, and that it contains clues by which the pipeline can be identified as an actual construction project of 1941-42, but one which was carried out by prison labor. The history of the text itself is also peculiar, for it underwent continuous rewriting and retouching through its many editions during the author’s lifetime, adjusting to the current ideological demand, while clandestinely Azhaev was writing another novel, The Boxcar, in which he was trying candidly to portray the tragedy of stalinist terror: a macabre, Orwellian example of “doublethink.”

     

    In the next contribution to the volume, Michael Holquist draws attention to a survivor of stalinism who has became particularly influential in literary and cultural studies–Mikhail Bakhtin. Holquist begins by cautioning against the tendency of treating Bakhtin “as if his utterances were a mere writing, as if he were simply one more name in the deracinated ecriture of current metacriticism,” of treating him as “a stateless thinker” (155). Holquist situates Bakhtin within the Russian critical tradition, providing a lucid summary account of Russian nineteenth-century debates on aesthetics and the nature and social role of literature and of their evolutionary connection with the work of Bakhtin’s contemporaries, the Formalists. In dwelling on Bakhtin’s critical dialogue with the Formalists in his 1920s writings, Holquist notes that while the latter insisted on literature’s autonomy and on the study of its inner logic, Bakhtin, “like the radical critics of the 1860s, [was] obsessed by the problem of how art can be related to life” (166). He believes that for Bakhtin, there exists “a connection between the two in a material poetics that takes a form of a body-based systematics” (166). Holquist further explores the role of the body in Bakhtin’s texts, noting his interest in biology (which, among others, provided him the term “chronotope”). He disagrees with Ken Hirschkop, who sees “mechanical physics” as a major influence on Bakhtin. “What matters about bodies for Bakhtin,” writes Holquist, “is not only that they are there, but that they are alive” (170). It is not a particular biological model that attracts Bakhtin: his work is pervaded with what Holquist calls “biological thinking” (171). The body is important for Bakhtin’s work, as Holquist notes, also because of his acute realization of his own corporeality: his suffering from osteomyelitis, which led to an amputation of one of his legs, and his arrest and exile in the 1930s (167). This emphasis connects Holquist’s essay with another recent work on Bakhtin and the body, Mikhail Ryklin’s brilliant “Bodies of Terror” (published in English in New Literary History, vol. 24, no. 1 [Winter 1993]), in which he dubs the Rabelais book an “autotherapeutic text,” a “codified drama of a representative of Russian intelligentsia who found himself in the ‘unthinkable’ situation of terror and expansion of the collective corporeality that assumed a dominating function” (Ryklin, Terrorologiki [1992], p. 34, my translation).

     

    The contribution by Valery Leibin is an excursus into the brief history of psychoanalytic study in the Soviet Union in the 1920s and its later brutal suppression. By contrast, Valery Podoroga’s essay is a post-Deleuzian reading of the key texts of one of the leading Russian modernists, Andrei Platonov (whose major works were published only recently, first abroad and then in Russia, and who is still relatively unknown in the West, partly because of the difficulty of translating his peculiar language). Podoroga begins by drawing attention to a peculiar statement from Platonov’s novel Chevengur (written 1927-1930): “within the person there lives a little spectator: he participates in neither actions nor suffering–he is always cool and unchanging. His function is to see and to be a witness, yet he is without the right of voice in the person’s life, and it is not known why this solitary presence exists. This corner of the person’s consciousness is lit day and night, like the porter’s room in a large building.” Platonov names this spectator/ observer “the dead brother” and “the eunuch of the human soul” (187-188). This observer, writes Podoroga, guides the reader through Platonov’s texts, creating “a special field of textual meanings–of negative bodily signs” (190). It registers only the external signs of events (which fact can be interpreted with the help of the opposition between the seeing eye and the knowing eye, advanced by the Russian avant-garde artist Pavel Filonov [199]). Podoroga quotes another startling passage from Chevengur, in which the protagonist feels that the material objects surrounding him suddenly start penetrating his body, even to the point that he fears his skin will burst open: a depiction of the clinical experience of schizophrenia, the result of the loss of the connection between subjectivity and the bodily image itself. To read Platonov, he postulates, is to feel this shift of the boundary between the inner and the outer, and desire in this externalized form is indissolubly connected with death. The relationship of time and space is also transformed: the text expresses the “beginning of the end of time”; “freed from human time (history), space acquires maximal dynamics–its grows through the defiguration of the world” (196). Podoroga draws parallels between the role of the eye in Platonov and in Gogol and Vertov, developing the notion of a “disembodied eye” (201-208). He asserts again that the “eunuch of the soul” is “a schizo-eye: he sees in this way for he is unable to see in any other way–and what he sees is monstrous precisely because his vision is natural, lacking elements of coercion or rationality” (210). Podoroga’s insightful analysis of Platonov’s texts offers another entry into the system of coordinates of the Soviet postmodern: there is something acutely contemporary in his narratives of schizophrenic disjunction, aggressive spatiality, and transformative language.

     

    The next essay, by Helena Goscilo, sheds light on another important aspect of the Soviet postmodern–the renewed importance of underrepresented social groups, most especially women. She addresses the paradoxical situation of the unprecedented prominence of women in all spheres of Russian culture and their unabashed critical depictions of their situation, combined with frequent hostility to Western feminist theory and essentialist conflation of socially constructed gender roles with biological sex. Goscilo provides an informative summary of the institutionalized concepts of gender in Soviet society (the area where, perhaps more than anywhere else, Stalinist propaganda has been truly successful) and the status of feminism within that structure. She stresses the reemergence of the women’s movement in the years of glasnost, and then considers in some detail the work of three influential contemporary women writers, Tatyana Tolstaya, Lyudmila Petrushevskaya, and Valeriya Narbikova, “the subversive trio” (244). These three women’s texts are very different from one other: Petrushevskaya’s works, frequently first-person narratives, are powerful explorations of human vulnerability in contemporary society, and impart a flavor reminiscent of gloomy naturalism; Tolstaya is a master stylist with a keen eye for “tasty” tropes who constantly engages in language play, parody, and subversion of stereotypes; finally, Narbikova produces texts that meditate on the nature of language itself, playing with cliches, producing sequences of paradoxical associations and ambivalent references, and employing a wordy, repetitive, fragile style reminiscent, in certain respects, of Gertrude Stein. Narbikova’s texts also extensively–if euphemistically–depict bodily experiences (including sexual acts, which prompted Russian critics to quickly–and wrongly–name her a writer of erotica). One is invited to conclude that the critique of established paradigms of representation that is marshalled in these women’s texts also enables a critique of the institutions of gender and sexuality, which serves as yet another point of contact with Western postmodernist cultural practices.

     

    The next two essays in the volume directly engage the notion of a Soviet postmodernism. Mikhail Epstein’s contribution, “After the Future,” is one of the key paratexts of Soviet postmodernism, one of the most significant attempts to date to theorize the late Soviet cultural situation, a part manifesto, part analysis. In the first part of the essay he perceptively registers the symptoms of a paradigmatic shift in cultural consciousness effected by the end of the 1980s. “Suddenly it became evident that communism had been accomplished in our country,” writes Epstein, “the end has already arrived” (257). The metanarrative of “progressive development of the mature socialism” was no more. The cultural practices of the epoch are realized in the “post-,” rather than “anti-” genre: “post-utopia, post-communism, post-history” (259). This is the “last” literature, “not because of the moment of its appearance, but because of its . . . essential ‘beyondness’” (258); it is the literature which, “like Proteus . . . is capable of almost anything; like Narcissus, it desires only itself” (259). The character of a “superfluous man” of the Russian nineteenth-century classics is supplanted by an entire world that has become superfluous. The writers of the younger generation stand outside the polarization of “city” vs. “village” literature, of “Westernizers” and “liberals” vs. “populists” and “men of the soil.” “While they are personally committed to liberal values,” writes Epstein, they “nonetheless see almost nothing in those values that could inspire them and which they could serve with their work” (268). Instead of ideological divisions Epstein registers differentiations of style. One group, whom he calls “meta-realists,” focuses on the intensity of perceptive emotion or metaphysical transcendence. Another, the conceptualists, engages in a demonstration of the essential emptiness of linguistic signs by exploring the language itself in their simulacric reproductions of socialist realist and nineteenth-century “realist” classics, or of the linguistic environment of a Soviet “everyman.” Between the extremes of these two groups stand the writers engaged in ironic games of allusions in the polymorphous chronotopes of their texts, where “the vulgar stereotypes of Soviet everyday life suddenly become the depths and merge with projections of other epochs into an ample mythopoetic polyglossia” (267).

     

    The middle part of Epstein’s essay is the most disputable and is strangely dissonant with his other arguments. In it, he moves to argue that “nothing is new under the sun,” and attempts to construct “a periodic table of the elements of Russian literature” (268; the table itself is on pp. 276-277). He singles out three cycles that Russian literature has undergone since the eighteenth century, each consisting of four phases, the “social,” the “moral,” the “religious,” and the “aesthetic.” Within this table, contemporary writers just occupy the final phases of the third cycle, to be succeeded by a fourth. The entire model is crudely reductionist, with each writer or movement assigned a set of tags carrying one-word definitions; and the sequencing is forced as well, often at odds with actual chronology. Paradoxically, Epstein then proceeds, in the final part of the essay, to stress the breakdown of temporal sequencing within the contemporary Russian cultural situation, where the postmodernists operate simultaneously with Solzhenitsyn, Joyce, Chaadaev, and the four evangelists (275). He emphasizes the retrospective orientation of contemporary writing, which he dubs “rear-guard” (278). The post-apocalyptically oriented literature is frequently nothing but a flow of writing, a stream that can be entered at any random point. Epstein notes that metonymy is the privileged principle of organization in the syntagmatic chains of associations of these texts, the primary examples coming from Valeriya Narbikova’s writings. Metonymy, though, seems merely to stand for simplicity for Epstein, while it might be productive to consider these texts in the light of theories of feminine writing, in which, as Luce Irigaray has suggested, metonymy is the leading structuring trope.

     

    Epstein concludes his essay with reflections on the relationship between the Russian “post-future” and Western postmodernism. He emphatically asserts the legitimacy of talking about a Russian postmodernism (even taking into consideration the aborted history of modernism in Russia), noting the domination of simulacra, the “propensity for quotation,” and the deconstructive impulse as the defining features of contemporary Russian texts (284-285). Late capitalism, he believes, is only one possible ground for emergence of a postmodern culture. The difference between the Russian/Soviet and Western civilizations, according to Epstein, is that the first is “logocentric” (“linguacentric” would, I believe, be more correct here), while the latter privileges “the silent values of gold and [iconic] representation” (287). The Soviet Union was a society of voracious consumption of utopian narratives and ideological signs, and its “post-future” is for Epstein “perhaps the most radical of all existing variants of postmodernism” (287).

     

    The essay by Katerina Clark that comes next in the volume problematizes Epstein’s model of the history of Russian literature. The focus of Clark’s argument is the Russians’ propensity for tripartite historical paradigms, where the current situation is interpreted through analogies with two previous ones (e.g. Hellenic Greece, French Revolution, 1917). This is the cause for Clark’s skepticism: “while we can see no lack of evidence,” she writes, “of the ways in the late eighties writers began deconstructing the long-standing official genealogies for 1917, we should be wary of seizing upon even the most radical versions of this as an evidence that Soviet literary sensibility had at long last become ‘postmodernist.’” Although “gestures in this direction have been made,” contemporary Russian writers, for Clark, “are not postmodernists,” for “in their texts, not all narratives are equal; inter alia, the Hegelian story of the progress of Geist is privileged” (304, Clark’s emphasis). Epstein’s “periodic table” can serve as supporting evidence for Clark’s claim “what we saw in the late eighties was business conducted largely as usual” (304): the Hegelian underpinnings of his model are obvious. However, his arguments in the other parts of his essay offer a challenge to Clark’s “de-postmodernizing” of contemporary Russian literature, especially since the writers Clark reads in her essay operate within more traditional aesthetic paradigms than does someone like Narbikova or the conceptualists.

     

    Late Soviet Culture ends with a coda in the form of Donald Raleigh’s eyewitness account of the active breakdown of the Soviet machine during and immediately after the August 1991 events. Raleigh is optimistic; he sees a potential for Russia to break the chains tying it to the past. The sincere optimism of his and Kuraev’s contributions may seem at odds with the situation of deepening crisis the post-Soviet states have been experiencing, in culture no less than in economy. But behind the troubled picture of today’s former Soviet Union it is possible to perceive the first sprouts of a new society. Does it mean that a new coil of the Hegelian spiral, envisioned by Epstein and Clark, is about to begin? Perhaps so. We should recall that even in Lyotard’s rather bleak Postmodern Condition, the postmodern crisis of metanarratives serves as a ground to “sketch the outline of a politics that would respect both the desire for justice and the desire for the unknown.”

     

  • Forward Into The Past

    Jim Hicks

    English Department
    University of Massachusetts, Boston
    hicks@umbsky.cc.umb.edu

     

    Latour, Bruno. We Have Never Been Modern. Trans. Catherine Porter. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1993.

     

    Illich, Ivan. In the Vineyard of the Text. A Commentary to Hugh’s Didascalicon. Chicago: U. of Chicago, 1993.

     

    In his 1985 recension of the debate on postmodernism, Gianni Vattimo suggests that the arguments of each then major figure (Lyotard, Habermas, Rorty) are determined (and undermined) by an illegimate appeal to “the state of things”–some version or other of the postmodern present (Vattimo 105). Whether or not metanarratives have been invalidated, whether the project of modernism is down but not yet out, and whether or not philosophy has lost its role as the unifier and arbiter of knowledge, the question is in some sense the same: where are we now and where do we go from here? Although Vattimo’s own attempt to respond to such questions (which suggests “piety,” “weakness,” and “mourning” as key elements to a truly pomo stance) seems either intentionally perverse or downright funny, his reminder that “condition,” “project,” and “consensus” are each present-tense nouns remains a good place to begin, even in a now much-widened debate. Two recent books which should be of particular interest to readers of Postmodern Culture deliver additional stories about the state of things at present. Clearly not your common or garden variety contributions to this field, both works suggest that the present and future of Western civilization ought to be found in recalling our premodern past.

     

    As an intervention into the contemporary critical fray, the book by Bruno Latour is the more direct. His title, We Have Never Been Modern, would seem to suggest his basic rhetorical strategy: “Stop all the bickering, whining and posturing . . . modernism, postmodernism, modernity, it never happened, it’s all a joke, it never happened.” Such an unfriendly tone, such an obvious attempt to grab the spotlight (and to foreclose the careers of so many, in so many fields), coming from someone other than a sociologist and historian of technoscience, from someone less beloved by those postmodern critics who have already made his acquaintance, from someone who wasn’t speaking, after all, in the name of Science, would no doubt cause only a ripple, passing through the critical pool as an instant of uncomfortable silence, a few heavy, disturbing seconds before the subject is changed. But when Science talks, people listen. When Science talks, we wait for an explanation.

     

    It is, of course, precisely such expectations in regard to science that Bruno Latour has long opposed. In a marvelous series of books, including Laboratory Life (with Steven Woolgar, 1979), Science in Action (1987) and The Pasteurization of France (1988), Latour argues that neither science nor society can be studied in isolation, that both are determined by means of the complex web of translations which join them together. Thus, science, when it does speak, is heard only by subscribers to its network: a favorite analogy of Latour’s is to the termite, whose existence is impossible outside of its tunnels. We Have Never Been Modern is explicitly a work which elaborates such translations (between “the emerging field of science studies” and “the literate public” [ix]), thus marking at most a new deviation in his work. Latour justifies this turn, in part, by telling a story about the present.

     

    That story begins with Latour himself, engaging in the act which he characterizes as “modern man’s form of prayer” (2), i.e. reading our daily paper. The stories that he finds there are familiar: the ozone hole, Professor Gallo’s laboratory, frozen embryos, and others. (If Latour had picked up an American paper, he might have pointed to stories about big business, condoms, guns and bible studies in our public schools, animal rights, pornography and sexual harassment, etc.) Diverse as they are, such stories have in common the manner in which they knot together nature and culture:

     

    A single thread links the most esoteric sciences and the most sordid politics, the most distant sky and some factory in the Lyon suburbs, dangers on a global scale and the impending local elections . . . . The horizons, the stakes, the time frames, the actors–none of these is commensurable, yet there they are, caught up in the same story. (1)

     

    Not that there’s anything wrong with such stories; on the contrary, according to Latour the imbroglio’s the thing. As he tells it, such “hybrid articles” are the best evidence of where we are–of the current crisis.

     

    Implicated in this crisis is, among other things, the most essential characteristic of modernity: that critical stance which divides and conquers hybrids, purifying them of their monstrous quality through disciplinary ghettoization. Given the chance, “the analysts, thinkers, journalists and decision-makers will slice the delicate network . . . into tidy compartments where you will find only science, only economy, only social phenomena, only local news, only sentiment, only sex . . . . By all means, they seem to say, let us not mix up knowledge, interest, justice and power” (3). Hybrids themselves are nothing new; Latour credits premodern cultures with the rigorous, even obsessive, thinking through of hybrids (a focus, he suggests, which explains why their production in such cultures is limited successfully). On the other hand, the will to purify–which of course cannot operate or develop without a constant fresh supply of hybrids–is for Latour the mark of the moderns; their most fundamental purification is the dichotomy between nature and culture. This separation, a refusal to acknowledge networks of mediation, both creates new hybrid objects and makes them available for purification. (Latour’s key example, borrowed from Steven Shapin and Simon Schaffer, is Boyle’s air pump; the first “nonhuman witness” in modern science’s “theater of proof,” the air pump is for Latour “the hero of the story” which created a new experimental community–one independent of both God and the Republic–at the time of the Emglish civil wars.) The nature/culture dichotomy also allows a modern to believe that the production of new hybrids, because they belong to the natural order, is without consequence for that of society–a dream from which to be modern is never to wake up.

     

    Once again, it would seem that the tone of Latour’s title, as well as that of his book, is clear. “Reason has been sleeping, and breeding monsters, for three or four centuries now. Wake up! Wake up!” The author himself assures us otherwise:

     

    There is no false consciousness involved, since the moderns are quite explicit about the two tasks [of purification and hybridization]. . . . The only thing I add is the relation between those different sets of practices. (40)

     

    To do otherwise, Latour is well aware, would be to participate in the logic of accusation, denunciation and revolution–discourses that are familiar by now, and extremely productive, but also quintessentially modern. Instead, he proposes that we investigate the modern period with an anthropologist’s eye, to write about ourselves with the ethnographic habit of “dealing calmly with the seamless fabric of . . . ‘nature-culture’” (7). Latour notes that “in works produced by anthropologists abroad, you will not find a single trait that is not simultaneously real, social and narrated” (7). Again it is the present state of affairs that enables this writerly position, this anthropology of the modern; modernism has become a “victim of its own success” (49), saturated by the hybrids that it has caused to proliferate.

     

    Such an anthropology, Latour argues, would elaborate rather than anatomize relations between nonhumans and humans, between people, words and things. To be collected, sorted and followed rather than ghettoized and covered, the world would be seen as populated with “quasi-objects” and “quasi-subjects,” the former as well as the latter viewed as actants in the networks of nature-culture. On the one hand, since nature and culture are not now, and never have been, separate, we have “never been modern” (at least not in the way the moderns would have it). But on the other hand, we must still learn to stop being modern, i.e. to stop trying to be, since “we have never really begun to enter the modern era” (47). In the place of such efforts is a new form of democracy, or perhaps its only real form, a “nonmodern Constitution” in which “we have committed ourselves to providing representation for quasi-objects” (139). Nonmodern, Latour makes very clear, has nothing to do with the antimoderns:

     

    Always on the defensive, they consistently believed what the moderns said about themselves and proceeded to affix the opposite sign to each declaration. . . . The values they defended were never anything but the residue left by their enemies. (134)

     

    Indeed, when, in concluding, Latour sketches out such a Constitution, premoderns, moderns, and postmoderns all contribute–only the antimoderns get left out. This section, the most praiseworthy (but also the most hurried) in this short, dense book, will likely be elaborated in response to the polemics Latour’s essay will assuredly incite.

     

    In my attempt to present somewhat carefully both the premises and the conclusions of We Have Never Been Modern, what has been left out is most of its contents. Awaiting its readers, in addition, are an explanation of modern productivity, a sorting through of continental philosophy from Hobbes to Habermas and Lyotard, a defense of “relative relativism” vis-a-vis nature-cultures, and a salutation of co-travelers as diverse as Michel Serres, Charles Peguy, and Donna Haraway. I should also add a warning-label for the disciplinarily over-identified: Latour reserves some of his best barbs–full of language that sounds nothing if not denunciatory–for postmodern theorists; he considers postmodernism “a symptom, not a fresh solution” (46), one which mistakenly takes the moderns at their word, and is characterized at best by “intellectual immobility” (61). But equally important, and nearly as numerous, are the occasions on which Latour attributes positive effects to postmodern practice (a practice to which, I imagine, some have even accused him of contributing).

     

    In any case, the real strength of Latour’s analysis in this book, and a substantially new elaboration of his thought (also see, however, Irreductions), is his emphasis on the determining, as opposed to determined, nature of the object during the modern period–particularly his demonstration of the hybrid character of that object. Latour’s analysis also displays the vices of its virtues; on occasion he retains the metalanguage of modern science as a ground for his investigations (e.g., “[modernity] is much more than an illusion and much less than an essence. It is a force . . .” [40]). A thinker such as Latour, who in Science in Action gives a powerful display of the network which connects the military-industrial complex to life in the laboratory, must at times feel constrained by that language which links science, war and the movement of capital. Outside of science studies–i.e. through the door to women’s studies and transnational studies that Donna Haraway, Ashis Nandy, and others have wedged open, there is of course a myriad of other documentation of the effects of modernist hybridization. It may be that both the angels in the house and the barbarians at the gate (i.e., humans seen as nonhumans) have other words to add to the nonmodern Constitution, representations that they will provide themselves, given a place at the table. Having read Latour, and finding ourselves somewhat less reverent before the glow of modern technoscience, we may finally be ready to tune in.

     

    It would also be possible, although parochial, to fault Latour for beginning his analysis of the moderns with Boyle and Hobbes, thus granting them too quickly that forefather status which is already an old story within the annals of modernism. Having never been modern, the West would be better revealed by focusing on a period where it didn’t believe that it was. The second book under review here, an extended essay by the medieval historian, contemporary social critic, and all-around visionary Ivan Illich, does just that, with a twist. Illich offers a meditation on the history of the book, conceived as an investigation into the symbolic gathering that shapes both reading practices and textual technologies. The twist is that he does so as an intervention into the current push toward computer literacy. The specific object of his analysis is Hugh of St. Victor’s Didascalicon (c. 1128), a work which Illich calls “the first book written on the art of reading” (5). Directed at what Illich sees as a watershed moment for Western thought, the shift from a culture of the book to that of the information-based “bookish text,” his commentary is also rich in insight into that historical moment. Illich offers this meditation “in the hope that the transition from monastic to scholastic reading may . . . throw some light on a very different transition now” (4).

     

    An earlier book by Illich, Shadow Work, also contains an essay on Hugh–entitled “Research by People” (76-95). There Illich argues that Hugh provides a historical precedent for an alternative to “research for people” (i.e. “R & D . . . conducted by large institutions–governments, industry, universities, clinics, the military, foundations” [77]). Unlike Bacon (a key precedessor of “research for people”), Hugh envisions science as a remedy for our fallen nature, not as a means to subjugate Nature; Hugh also includes the mechanical arts within his understanding of science, thus in some measure making him a precursor to the technoscience studies of Latour. Illich’s commentary on the Didascalicon, by focusing on the text as “object par excellence” (116), also parallels that of Latour; both in fact demonstrate that “by centering our analysis on the object we turn this object into a mirror reflecting significant transformations in the mental shape of western societies” (Vineyard, 5).

     

    One of the most fascinating aspects of Hugh’s writings as discussed by Illich is the medieval theologian’s concept of the role of memory training in pedagogy. Distinct from its later popularization in the Renaissance, Illich suggests that “Hugh seems to have been the first one to seriously revive classical memory training, and was then the last major figure to propose memory as the sole or principal means of retrieving information” (45). Not merely an eccentric or unusually skilled disciplinarian, Hugh was also unique in his application of such training: the De arca Noe, his memory book for experts, taught the construction of a complex, multicolored, almost monstrous, three-dimensional ark–“a space-time matrix built within the mind of the student and modeled on Noah’s ark” (37). The layout of this “moral and mystical ark,” according to one scholar, would require 220 square feet of paper for a still readable blueprint (37-8). Unlike the classical memory palaces, this mnemonic aid was not simply architectural–its function was to embody historia–and to provide a “mental home” for the student, thus become an intellectual pilgrim. According to Illich, “The Ark stands for a social entity, a process that begins with creation and continues to the end of time, what Hugh calls ‘the Church’” (46-7). In effect, it is a virtual cathedral; for “the construction of cathedrals,” no less than that of Hugh’s Ark, “can be understood as a public creation of a symbolic universe of memoria: the solemnly celebrated reminiscence of historia” (38, n.30). Latour would no doubt note the seamless fabric of nature-culture in such an achievement (as well as the rigorous, almost obsessive, thinking through of hybrids).

     

    For Illich, Hugh’s arca also marks a liminal moment in the history of the text. With his construction of a “mental home” for the scholar, Hugh has begun to sever the text from the page, creating, in effect, a treasure chest which is also a floating signifier, a coffin from which the modern concepts of person and text will arise. In his Didascalicon, Hugh also makes evident the tremendous distance between his experience of the book and that form of studium which immediately followed him, created within the sanctuaries of the modern university. Monastic reading was a “strenuous exercise” proscribed for the “frail or infirm” (57), a dictated and mumbled rehearsal of those voces paginarum which commanded each of the interior senses as well: “When Hugh reads, he harvests; he picks the berries from the lines” (57); “For Hugh, . . . the act of reading with the eyes implies an activity not unlike a search for firewood, his eyes must pick out the letters of the alphabet and bundle these into syllables” (58); not merely an activity, for Hugh reading is “a way of life” insofar as recitation both accompanies daily toils and organizes the day according to its various incarnations (59); the book was “swallowed and digested” by Hugh “through the careful attention paid to the psychomotor nerve impulses which accompany the sentences being learned” (60). This sensurround experience of the book passes away along with Hugh, rooted out in the development of a bookish text. As for Illich’s intention in retelling this story, it is difficult not to see an uneven parallel with a comment he makes about Hugh: “At the last moment of the old regime of the book, he proposes the studium legendi as a new ideal, a civic duty, and universal learning as a gratuitous, celebratory, leisurely intercourse with the book” (84). As readers of Illich are aware, he has frequently written on the devastating effects of literacy on those outside the schools; the “threat of computer literacy” (5) is clearly more than a new and improved version of the same (see also Mirror 159-81 and 182-201). On the other hand, it seems to me that if today, “outside the educational system . . .there might be something like houses of reading . . . where the few who discover their passion for a life centered on reading would find the necessary guidance, silence, and complicity of disciplined companionship” (3), subscribers to Postmodern Culture, if anyone, must know where to find them.

     

    The story of the development of the bookish text also contains Illich’s principal thesis: that, in the hundred or so years after Hugh’s death, the book as object underwent a fundamental transformation and that “the effect of this reformatting of the page and book on the ethology and semantics of reading and, hence, on thought, was more fundamental than that of print” (114). “The principal effect of the latter invention,” according to Illich, “was to mechanize the procedure by which the twelfth- or thirteenth-century page is still reproduced today” (114). Among these innovations, a “set of about two dozen new graphic conventions” (119), Illich describes the invention of alphabetical indexing, the recording of vernacular tongues alongside of Latin script, the shift towards silent reading and self-penned texts, various changes in layout (which made distinct the various contribution to book-making by author, editor, and critic), and the development of the portable book. Illich makes a strong case against either the technodetermination or the sociodetermination of this “scribal revolution” (116), arguing instead that “an eminently suitable and complex device already available within a society will be turned into a tool only at that historic moment when this task acquires symbolic significance” (72). (That he is here speaking of the circumstances surrounding the emergence, in Latour’s terms, of a new hybrid or nature-culture, is made clear by an earlier gloss on the “symbol”: for Hugh, “a symbol is a collecting of visible forms for the demonstration of invisible things” [32]; citing Gerhart Ladner, Illich emphasizes an opposition between symbols and mere psychoanalytic or cultural “myths.” On the contrary, for Hugh symbols are “facts and events, phenomena in and beyond nature and history” [Ladner, as cited by Illich 32]).

     

    The import of this thesis is startling, and worth emphasizing. Applied to the present, it would suggest, for example, that the invention of comic books and Baedekers might well have marked a more fundamental change than, say, that of the Macintosh or cable TV. Like Latour, Illich’s purpose is to deflate easy, and disciplinarily safe, explanations by both constructivists and realists in the writing of history. For those that are familiar with Illich’s other writings, it is this emphasis which makes clear the connection between his work as medieval historian and that as radical social critic. To provoke a perspectival shift, one which challenges the most naturalized assumptions of a given field, is a longstanding, self-described role for his interventions: Ivan Illich, intellectual samurai and heretic for hire (see, for example, his comments in Mirror 10).

     

    At the risk of letting this essay devolve from a book review into that most hated of primary school assignments, the book report, I have presented the above material from In the Vineyard of the Text rather directly, without what is perhaps the usual degree of critical intervention. My intention in doing so has been twofold. First, to advance, without unnecessary injury, the seduction of Illich’s endeavor; whereas Latour attempts to dismantle the modern mindset, Illich lures his reader towards another. My second motive, less laudable, was more influential; not born even into the era of the bookish text, not to mention that of the culture of the book, I also wished to conceal my ignorance.

     

    I will turn, by way of conclusion, to an important point which my quasi-neutral presentation of Illich’s arguments has enabled me to sidestep. There exists an obvious opposition between the two books which I have thus far presented together: Latour wants to put an end to talk of our radical isolation, to appeals based on our unique difference as moderns; he doesn’t believe in historical revolutions any more than in those of epistemology. Illich, on the other hand, appears to offer just such an appeal; epistemological breaks are part and parcel of his sense of history. In fact, by reading these books together, I suggest my own sense of the present: I/we live in a moment where both positions are relevant (and revealing). If, as both Latour and Illich argue, the present is indeed a moment of crisis, Latour’s sense of possible futures is nearly as important as Illich’s search for precedents in our past. In the end, though, I side with Illich, with that wondrous vocation which has called him to intervene, not just in studies of technology and society, but in the history of education, gender, art history and architecture, policy making, philosophy, and more, always with the intention of shaping the future by “lampoon[ing] the shibboleths of the year” (Mirror 10). In any case, if Latour’s most recent book, and today’s newspapers, are any indication, the future–both ours and Latour’s–may ultimately be found in our premodern past.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Illich, Ivan. In the Mirror of the Past. New York: Marion Boyars, 1992.
    • —. Shadow Work. Boston: Marion Boyars, 1986.
    • —. In the Vineyard of the Text. A Commentary to Hugh’s %Didascalicon%. Chicago: U. of Chicago, 1993.
    • Latour, Bruno. The Pasterization of France and Irreductions. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1988.
    • —. Science in Action. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1987.
    • —. We Have Never Been Modern. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1987.
    • Latour, Bruno and Steven Woolgar. Laboratory Life: The Construction of Scientific Facts. Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP, 1986.
    • Shapin, Steven and Simon Schaffer. Leviathan and the Air- Pump: Hobbes, Boyle and the Experimental Life. Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP, 1985.
    • Vattimo, Gianni. “Postmodernita e fine della storia.” Moderno postmoderno. Ed. Giovanni Mari. Milano:

     

  • Metaphoric Rocks: A Psychogeography of Tourism and Monumentality

    Gregory Ulmer

    English Department
    University of Florida, Gainesville
    glulmer@nervm.Nerdc.Ufl.Edu

     

    An earlier version of this work was published in The Florida Landscape: Revisited, a catalog for an exhibition curated by Christoph Gerozissis, Lakeland, Florida: The Polk Museum, 1992. An electronic predecessor was included, with the assistance of Anthony Rue, in a cultural studies World-Wide Web project at the University of Florida called Re:WIRED.

     

    “Tradition is like spring-water that wells forth from the ground, flowing on forever. It is no abstract doctrine”

    Mysteries of the Dream-Time

     

    Project for a New Consultancy

     

    The State of Florida has asked for advice. Debilitated by the recession, embarrassed by its ranking as 43rd most livable state in America (based on categories such as income, crime rate, graduation rate, suicide and taxes), Florida is giving renewed attention to its leading industry–tourism. The 1991 Legislature created the Florida Tourism Commission charged with devising a strategy for promoting tourism. One of the first acts of the Commission was to hire the New York consulting firm of Penn & Schoen which, for a fee of $250,000, will assess what role the state should play in tourism promotion.

     

    The Florida Research Ensemble (FRE–a faculty group at the University of Florida that practices an experimental approach to arts and letters) took this situation as a good test for its new consultancy project. What knowledge resources are available for dealing with a state problem? If there is an agricultural problem the Institute for Food and Agricultural Sciences at the University of Florida is called on for advice. But when there is a cultural problem, why does no one ask the experts in culture at the University for advice? Why is the expertise of a public relations firm, and a New York firm at that, thought to be relevant to the issue of tourism in Florida, while the expertise of professors in the liberal and fine arts is not considered relevant? This question is addressed as much to the professors as to the state agency, of course, since the arts and humanities disciplines traditionally have not thought of the culture industry as the applied dimension of their specializations.

     

    A review of newspaper reports of planning thus far indicate that the “improvement of tourism” is being framed as a matter of advertising. The local tourism boards formed in response to the legislative initiative have been most concerned with “how and when to advertise and how to get the attention we need.” Perhaps because Florida already attracts over 40 million visitors a year, less attention has been given to “what facilities and resources may be magnets for visitors.” An early example of what to expect is the campaign commissioned by the State Commerce Department. During the winter of 1992-1993, an agency monitored bad weather in northern cities, placing full-page ads in newspapers following a blizzard: a photograph of a piece of toast with the words, “just a reminder that it’s nice and toasty in Florida.” To this reminder we might add the rider: “safer than Egypt.”

     

    Assuming that these efforts did indeed focus touristic attention on Florida, FRE offers to consult with the Tourism Commission about how to improve the experience itself of the visitors to our landscape. FRE’s first step is to challenge the assumptions about cognitive jurisdiction, about what knowledge is relevant to which problems (Star Wars belonged to physics, tourism to public relations). The fact is that when it is a matter of invention, history shows that innovation almost always comes from outside a specialization. One definition of invention could be “a process by which the status of an idea is transformed from irrelevant to relevant.” FRE is not “competing” with Penn & Schoen for the PR job; we offer a different expertise, which until now has not been applied to tourism except in the negative mode of critique. Our disciplines have said a great deal against tourism; the challenge for FRE is to apply our knowledge to the design of an improved tourism.

     

    From Tourism to Solonism

     

    There are many significant points of overlap between the arts and tourism. Take for example the case of Solon, one of the wisest of the Ancient Greeks, who is said to be both the first theorist and the first tourist. “The Greeks,” Wlad Godzich explains,”designated certain individuals to act as legates on certain formal occasions in other city states or in matters of considerable political importance. These individuals bore the title of theoros and collectively constituted a theoria. They were summoned on special occasions to attest the occurrence of some event, to witness its happenstance, and to then verbally certify its having taken place” (Godzich). Others could see and make claims, but these would have merely the status of “perceptions”; only the report of the theoria provided certainty, certifying the attested event such that it could be treated as fact. “What it certified as having been seen could become the object of public discourse.”

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 1]

     

    Travel was an essential element of archaic theoria. Herodotus noted that theoria was the reason for Solon’s visit to the ruler of Lydia. “Originally theoria meant seeing the sights, seeing for yourself, and getting a worldview,” E.V. Walter comments. “The first theorists were ‘tourists’–the wise men who traveled to inspect the obvious world. Solon, the Greek sage whose political reforms around 590 B.C. renewed the city of Athens, is the first ‘theorist’ in Western history” (Walter). This theoria “did not mean the kind of vision that is restricted to the sense of sight. The term implied a complex but organic mode of active observation–a perceptual system that included asking questions, listening to stories and local myths, and feeling as well as hearing and seeing. It encouraged an open reception to every kind of emotional, cognitive, symbolic, imaginative, and sensory experience.” Nor was the travel of a theoros always a response; it could also be a probe. The motive for Solon’s visit to Lydia, where he went “to see what could be seen,” was “curiosity”: “and it was just this great gift of curiosity, and the desire to see all the wonderful things–pyramids, inundations, and so forth–that were to be seen that enabled the Ionians to pick up and turn to their own use such scraps of knowledge as they could come by among the barbarians” (Burnet).

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 2]

     

    Let us take Solon, then, as the emblem of the FRE consultancy on tourism: in an improved tourism, the tourist will be a theoros, whose collective practice will constitute a theoria. It might be useful to coin a neologism to name this new vacationing–“soloning”–and its practitioners–“solonists.” The solonist is a tourist functioning as “witness.”

     

    Tourism as Invention

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 3]

     

    A “nation” is an idea–an idea with a history. There was a time before nations, and there may come a time after and without nations. Meanwhile, the idea of “the United States” is undergoing a change, as evidenced by the confusion about how to commemorate the Columbus quincentennial. The arrival in St. Augustine from Spain of the replica Columbian flotilla in April, 1992, was a magnet not only for tourists but for protesters. It could have been an occasion to test the special gaze of the solonists, supporting an alternative to the opposition between unity and separatism. At this post-colonial moment, American national identity is being revised, in a process whose difficulties may be traced in the debates surrounding multiculturalism, political correctness, and hate crimes. The tourist as solonist will travel to see what is to be seen in order to reinvent our national identity. But what will be the nature of this site seeing?

     

    Tourism has already played an important role in the creation of representations that have shaped American national identity. A review of the history of two of the most important embodiments of American identity shows why the Florida Tourism Commission turned to a public relations firm for advice, since PR played a crucial role in these symbolic inventions. Both originated with booster groups as ways to increase and improve tourism in a specific place.

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 4]

     

    The first vacation spots in America were spas where people went to “take the waters.” This custom, borrowed from Europe, led eventually to the discovery of sea-bathing as a leisure activity. Atlantic City, New Jersey, is one of the sites where this new recreation evolved. There were only seven houses there when the railroad arrived in the 1850s (Sutton). By 1900 over ten million dollars had been invested in hotels. In 1920, looking for a way to keep tourists at the beach through Labor Day, the Business Men’s League decided to sponsor a Fall Frolic, which in 1921 introduced a beauty pageant. The first such contest had been held at Rehoboth Beach, Delaware, in the 1880s, but was not repeated. Herb Test, a reporter hired to handle publicity for the Atlantic City version, decided to call the winner “Miss America.” “It was decided in committee that newspapers in the Atlantic City trading area would be approached with the suggestion that they use the beauty contest at Atlantic City as a gimmick to increase circulation” (Deford). The association with national identity was established from the beginning, with the first winner (a fifteen year old named Margaret Gorman) setting the pattern of a preference for the “civic beauty” of the “amateur” over the “brazen femininity” of professional models and actresses. It may be worth noting in the context of solonism that the early pageants were presided over by the figure of King Neptune, the god who was the protector of Atlantis.

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 5]

     

    Mount Rushmore, also known as the “shrine of democracy,” offers a second example of booster inventiveness serving national identity. If “Miss America” was meant to be the embodiment of our national ideal of womanhood, the Rushmore monument “signifies the achievements of the United States as symbolized by the four great national leaders. Washington represents the founding of the Union; Jefferson, the Declaration of Independence and the Louisiana Purchase; Lincoln, the preservation of the Union; and [Teddy] Roosevelt, the expansion of the country and the conservation of its natural resources” (Tour Book: North Central, American Automobile Association).

     

    In the early 1920s, Doane Robinson, State Historian for South Dakota, began thinking of ways to lure tourists to his state. Having read of the work of Guzton Borglum (carving a monument to the Confederacy on the face of Stone Mountain, Georgia), Robinson was giving a speech to a tourist promotion group when it struck him that a monument could be carved in the granite of the Black Hills. He proposed the idea on the spot, suggesting that the principal figure be Chief Red Cloud, supported by other heroes of the Old West such as General Custer (Smith). Booster clubs in the area were enthusiastic, although they considered the idea impossible. Borglum was recruited to the project, and changed its theme to the “Founding Fathers,” to better realize his aim of “a monument dedicated to the meaning of America.” After some twenty years the carving was completed, and today it attracts over two million visitors annually.

     

    The Monument as Rhizome

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 6]

     

    The FRE consultancy concerns the design of the “magnet of attraction” for solonists. The lesson of Atlantic City and Mount Rushmore is that there exists a “monumental” tourism–an activity whose motivation is economic but whose effect is symbolic, involving a visit to a place marked by a thing or an event that represents a collective value. It might be helpful to generalize from these examples, in order to discover their relevance to our own situation.

     

    Rushmore and Miss America are products of what Gilles Deleuze and Felix Guattari call an “abstract machine”–a generative or inventive idea. To convey how such machines operate, the theorists use the metaphor of the rhizome, of which one of their favorite examples is the relationship between the wasp and the orchid. The relationship that plants form with insects, animals, people, the wind, in order to propagate, is a rhizome. Joseph Beuys used a similar example to express his understanding of creative thinking, stating that people make thought the way bees make honey.

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 7]

     

    Let us continue the analogy, to say that tourism is rhizomatic–that it makes national identity the way bees make honey (the social function of the WASP, extended now to include all ethnicities).

     

    Make a map, not a tracing. The orchid does not reproduce a tracing of the wasp; it forms a map with the wasp, in a rhizome. What distinguishes the map from the tracing is that it is entirely oriented toward an experimentation in contact with the real. The map does not reproduce an unconscious closed in upon itself; it constructs the unconscious. . . . the map is open and connectable in all of its dimensions; it is detachable, reversible, susceptible to constant modification. It can be torn, reversed, adapted to any kind of mounting, reworked by an individual, group, or social formation. It can be drawn on a wall, conceived of as a work of art, constructed as a political action or as a meditation. Perhaps one of the most important characteristics of the rhizome is that it always has multiple entryways. (Deleuze and Guattari, 12)

     

    If tourists use maps, solonists are maps, or map-makers. Tourism,then, becomes a “map” to post-columbian America.

    Solonism as Social Sculpture

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 8]

     

    The purpose of “Florida Rushmore” is to introduce the tourist to solonism. This introduction should include some further suggestions for solonistic activities. To accomodate this need,there might be established at the site of the electronic monument a Museum of Cultural Inventions, with displays tracing the contribution of Arts and Letters to American traditions, such as Washington Irving’s invention of the myth of “Columbus,” or Owen Wister and Frederick Remington’s invention of the “Cowboy.” The museum will sponsor exhibits from the history of the liberal and fine arts that might serve as models showing solonists how to become inventors themselves.

     

    A series of projects by the German performance artist, Joseph Beuys, exemplify the nature of such exhibits. Beuys developed the strategy of a politically therapeutic “social sculpture” in environmental works such as Show Your Wound, in which he set up an installation in an ugly, dangerous place–selected as representative of a sick spot in the urban environment–the underground pedestrian area between two streets in Munich (Tisdall). In Tallow he selected a similar site in Munster, which he used as a cast for a giant sculpture using twenty tons of mutton and beef fat. This line of work led to his proposal for a Free International University to be established in Belfast, to function as an arts consultancy for resolving the dilemma of Ireland.

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 19]

     

    It is typical of Beuys to seek out a wound, a sore spot, which is also a very concrete representation of the wider context of social failure. It is equally typical that the artist does not simply use this sore spot for a denunciation, but applies to it his own kind of dialectic. He attempts to heal the place (Laszlo Gloser, in Tisdall).

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 20]

     

    The more a place is set apart for free play, the more it influences people’s behavior and the greater is its force of attraction. This is demonstrated by the immense prestige of Monaco and Las Vegas–although they are mere gambling places. Our first experimental city would live largely off tolerated and controlled tourism. Future avant-garde activities and productions would naturally tend to gravitate there. In a few years it would become the intellectual capital of the world and would be universally recognized as such. (Chtcheglov)

     

    The situationist inventors of psychogeography wanted chance to play a part in the creation of situations, as the “tourist” wandered aimlessly or drifted through the urban landscape. One experimenter in this vein used a map of London to explore an area of Germany with which he was unfamiliar. In conventional tourism, getting lost is at best inconvenient, and at worst dangerous. The Museum of Cultural Invention will have a “Tourist Hall of Fame” commemorating tourist sacrifices to chance, such as the Dutch tourist who happened to be in Paris when the Commune took over the city at the end of the Franco-Prussian war. Because of his resemblance to one of the leaders of the rebellion, this tourist was executed on suspicion of being a communard (Mercer).

     

    When tourists add theoria (witnessing) to their itinerary, they expose a problematic dimension of the environment to a new kind of attention whose function would not be “spectacle” but “healing.” The solonists might not rely only on chance to bring them to a sorespot. They would take advantage of maps, such as the one suggested by an Alachua County Commissioner, “alerting residents to crime-ridden areas that need to be avoided.” The Commissioner explained her proposal, motivated by the recovery of a murder victim’s body in Gainesville, “that certain wooded areas are havens for prostitution, selling drugs and other criminal activity.” Ordinary citizens use these same woods “to walk and meditate.”

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 21]

     

    The point of solonism is that such places–all the forgotten and denied places, the leftovers (the unconscious)–must be put on the map and even visited if the landscape is to become a rhizome for national self-knowledge. We already have a place in Florida that advertises itself as “an adventure without risk.” Solonism is an alternative to, a supplement of, this conventional tourism, and the solonist who tours places like those sore woods in Gainesville is working more in the tradition of adventurers who accepted the risks of travel into the unknown. What might be the effect of this gaze, or of the circulation of this testimony preserved in home videos, snap-shots, and anecdotes? A post-columbian America cannot forget that adventurers are responsible for its existence, for better and for worse.

     

    The solonists in their theoria might constitute a Columbus 500 years the wiser, knowing something about the karstification of culture. In their visit to Florida they learn that the idea of “America” is not “granite” (not igneous, however ingenious), but limestone, soluble in water, and with the rains becoming more acidic every year.

     

    Florida Rushmore

     

    It is possible to formulate a specific proposal for the FTC, based on the above discussion. The proposal is based on the following steps of reasoning:

     

    1. the state desires not only to promote tourism, but to improve it.
    2. monumental practices (including events and celebrations as well as memorials) are magnets attracting tourists to specific sites.
    3. tourism and monuments form a rhizome that in practice “constructs the unconscious” of a culture.
    4. the state issue after 1992 concerns the revision of American national identity in the new post-colonial era of multiculturalism.
    5. solonism names a new style of tourism as theoria, in which the process of cultural invention through tourism becomes self-conscious, reflective, and hence “critical.”
    6. critical tourism would allow citizens to participate directly in the continuing invention of “America.”
    7. conclusion: FRE could improve tourism by designing a monument that exposes tourists to the experience of solonism.

     

    Our proposal is to build an electronic version of Mount Rushmore in Florida, a version that will be in effect a revision and supplement of the original. The theoretical rationale for this choice is based on the psychological function of monuments, known as “mourning.” The rhizomatic nature of tourism and monuments is due to the reciprocal relationship between the formation of individual and collective identity. The entry points to the network of American identity are marked by monuments.

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 9]

     

    In psychoanalytic terms, “mourning” refers to the process by which the self is constituted as a distinctly separate person yet part of the larger whole of society. The “loss” of unity with the mother’s body is mourned by internalizing (introjecting) an image of the parents in the unconscious (and eventually other figures with whom the self identifies, forming what is known as the “superego”). The loss is compensated for by the symbolizing power (language) associated with such introjections. Collective entities such as nations maintain their identity through a similar process of symbolization, mourning the loss of one generation of citizens after the other, back to the Founding Fathers. As the following citation suggests, monuments are to a nation what the superego is to an individual.

     

    The oedipal resolution also governs the creation of a superego:

     

    And here too we find an important relation to the work of mourning and the elegy. At the most obvious level, we recall Freud’s suggestion that the superego is made up of the “illustrious dead,” a sort of cultural reservoir, or rather cemetery, in which one may also inter one’s renounced love-objects, and in which the ruling monument is the internalized figure of the father. (Sacks)

     

    An electronic Rushmore produces a mourning identification that is flexible and diverse rather than one that is “carved in stone.” A Holographic Monument “Florida Rushmore” uses the technology of holography and computers to create a continuously changing image of a face, projected in 3-D at the same scale as the Rushmore heads (60 feet high).

     

    Technology

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 10]

     

    Holography is a method of lensless photography in which the wave field of light scattered by an object is recorded on a plate as an interference pattern. When the photographic record–the hologram–is placed in a coherent light beam like a laser, the original wave pattern is regenerated. A three-dimensional image appears. Because there is no focusing lens, the plate appears as a meaningless pattern of swirls. Any piece of the hologram will reconstruct the entire image (Wilber).

     

    Composite Photography

     

    Nancy Burson’s computer-generated portraits are the model for the faces represented in “Florida Rushmore.”

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 11]

     

    Burson has extended the technique of composite photography, invented by Francis Galton in 1877, to the medium of digital computer graphics. Using software developed by Richard Carling and David Kramlich, Burson essentially reinvented photography. Her technique of amalgamating and manipulating images has been used by the FBI to update photographs of missing children, and by PEOPLE magazine to project the effect of age on celebrities. Composites of everything from a lion/lamb through the heads of state of the nuclear powers to an oriental/caucasian/black (with features weighted according to current world population statistics) are said “to explore themes as universal as sexuality and race and concerns as common as beauty, celebrity, and political power.”

     

    That her technique is especially suited to psychogeography has to do with the historical affinity between psychoanalysis and photography. Walter Benjamin said that photography is to the visible world what psychoanalysis is to the mind. Freud himself drew upon Galton’s composite technique to describe the logic of dreams. “What I did was to adopt the procedure by means of which Galton produced family portraits,” Freud wrote, explaining the effect of condensation in one of his own dreams. “Namely by projecting two images on to a single plate, so that certain features common to both are emphasized, while those which fail to fit in with one another cancel one another out and are indistinct in the picture. In my dream about my uncle the fair beard emerged prominently from a face which belonged to two people and which was consequently blurred; incidentally, the beard further involved an allusion to my father and myself through the intermediate idea of growing grey” (Freud).

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 12]

     

    A Mystorical Questionnaire

     

    Tourists visiting the monument would have an opportunity to fill out a questionnaire designed to elicit information indicative of the figures with whom they identify–figures that represent their “personalized” or internal Rushmores. The questionnaire uses the formula of a genre called “mystory” (a neologism derived from “history”), that is a discursive equivalent of a composite photograph. A mystory condenses into one account information from the four main discourses used by Americans: family anecdotes, school history textbooks, popular media, and disciplinary expertise. The computer uses the tourist’s responses to the questions to identify four figures–one from each discourse area (family history, public history, entertainment, and career field)–as a representation of the individual’s superego. In my own case, for example, a paper version of the mystory suggested that the heads on my personal Rushmore are Walter Ulmer (my father), George Armstrong Custer, Gary Cooper, and Jacques Derrida.

     

    The computer collects in its memory the composite face of each tourist’s personal Rushmore, randomly selecting a new one every fifteen minutes to be projected as the face of “Florida Rushmore.” As Andy Warhol said, in media America, everyone will be famous for fifteen minutes. Thus the Rushmore of an electronic, post-colonial America will be as diverse as the population of the nation itself. The tourist may purchase a graphic printout of his/her composite as a souvenir. A tourist whose superego is projected as the national monument is awarded a commemorative hologram. Burson’s work has been praised for creating utterly believable faces “like the faces in our dreams, struck from life but recast by our concerns. It is an instrumental imagination, manifesting human inner vision.” “Florida Rushmore” puts this imagination to work on the task of representing the continuing dream of a democratic, free America. Part of its purpose is to remind citizens that “America” is precisely a “dream.” A nation, like an individual, can come to know itself better by learning how to remember its dreams. The externalization of the psychological process of identification (mourning) demonstrated in the monument will make “Florida Rushmore” the founding site of solonism.

     

    Location: The Devil’s Millhopper Sinkhole. Doane Robinson’s idea for a monument on Mount Rushmore was inspired in part by his love for the landscape of the Black Hills, especially the granite cliffs protruding above the forested hills. The geology of South Dakota, in fact, was suited to the fixed concept of the nation common in the America of Robinson’s era. But the psychogeography of America has changed in the postmodern era, for which the limestone aquifer of Florida is a better metaphor than is the bedrock of the plains and foothills of the North. As children sometimes write in their social studies reports, “we should not take our freedom for granite.”

     

    An excellent location for “Florida Rushmore,” then, is the sinkhole known as “The Devil’s Millhopper,” where the flux of the electronic portraits figures the instability of the land itself.

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 13]

     

    Two miles northwest of Gainesville is the State Geological Site (the only one in Florida), “The Devil’s Millhopper,” exemplifying one of the most unusual features of the Florida landscape–the sinkhole. Formed nearly 20,000 years ago, the sink is nearly 120 feet deep and 500 feet across at the top. Since 1976 a 221-step wooden stairway takes the visitor to the bottom of the hole. “The sink got its name after fossilized bones and teeth were found there, and visitors termed the hole the lair of the devil” (Marth).

     

    “In general, sinkholes are the result of the action of water on the porous limestone substrate underlying northern Florida, which is characterized by countryside riddled with shallow, interweaving networks of caves. When the ceiling of an underground cave has worn too thin from dissolution, it simply cannot support its own weight and collapses” (Stubbs). Sinkhole formation continues today, accelerated by human activity such as the heavy pumping of ground water. In the Gulf coast city of Dunedin, just since 1990 more than 172 homeowners reported structural damage because of sinkholes, causing an insurance company to discontinue homeowner insurance for the entire city. In 1981 a hole opened in Winter Park, Florida, developing within a few hours into the size of a football field and as deep as an eight-story building, causing two million dollars in damages to swallowed and sunken property. Within days the hole ranked as a major tourist attraction, and many people were seen wearing “Sinkhole 1981” T-shirts.

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 14]

     

    A sinkhole is just one of several features of karst topography, which includes poljes, dolines, caverns, lapies, and the variety of plants, animals, and human habitation associated with such formations. The term “karst” originated as the proper name of the northwestern part of Yugoslavia, including Croatia, and was then generalized to refer to any area similarly rich in soluble limestone rock. The ethnic warfare underway in that region since the collapse of the Soviet Union represents a warning, of which karst may serve as a reminder, of one possible alternative to national identity. The value of locating “Florida Rushmore” at a sinkhole is that the karst geology may serve as a good analogy in a psychogeographical metaphor–the underground movement of water, “following the line of least resistance (greatest permeability) through fractures and cavities,” creates the surface features of the landscape, analogous to the way the workings of the unconscious are manifested in symptoms. Symptoms, in turn, are said to be personal monuments to forgotten traumas.

     

    The geology itself, in other words, could be used to help tourists become solonists, by using landscape displays as allegories for social and psychological processes. Freud himself used landscape as an explanation of his “structural” model of the psyche–divided into ego, superego, and id.

     

    Let me give you an analogy; analogies, it is true, decide nothing but they can make one feel more at home. I am imagining a country with a landscape of varying configuration–hill-country, plains, and chains of lakes–, and with a mixed population: it is inhabited by Germans, Magyars, and Slovaks, who carry on different activities. . . . A few things are naturally as you expected, for fish cannot be caught in the mountains and wine does not grow in the water. Indeed, the picture of the region that you brought with you may on the whole fit the facts; but you will have to put up with deviations in the details. (Freud, in Erdelyi.)

     

    The analogy is picked up in Deleuze and Guattari’s notion of “faciality,” having to do with the effects of power in the relationship of a state to its citizens. In terms of signification–as an abstract machine–a “face” is a system created by the relationship of black holes to white walls (Deleuze and Guattari). Power circulates in this system through such facial rhizomes as the mother/child, two lovers, the celebrity/fan, the politician/voter. What the face is to the body, the landscape is to the environment (a system of surfaces and holes organized into significance, expressing relations of power).

     

    Although the original plans for Mount Rushmore called for the sculpting of the whole bodies of the figures, the final embodiment of the idea in the four heads relates the monument to the talking heads of the electronic era (anticipated by the “close-up” shot in cinema). “The face is produced only when the head ceases to be apart of the body, when it ceases to be coded by the body.” Identification with this “face,” that is, makes one not the member of a family, but the subject of a state. The karst topography of Florida, with its multitude of flooded sinks, is a setting ideally suited to teaching the facial implications of landscape.

     

    Metaphoric Rocks

     

    For our monument we will modify Freud’s analogy to fit our case: let “Florida” represent the American psyche. It remains to be worked out how to fit the tenor to the vehicle in this metaphor, how to assign the divisions of the population (Caucasian, Hispanic, African-American, Native American) and the economic activities (agriculture, mining, tourism) to the divisions of the structural model of the mind. But as Freud said, there is a certain disorderly mixing among all these components, whether as nation or psyche.

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 15]

     

    We might begin with the old bones found at Millhopper that could be associated with the themes of mourning (the bones found in a grave or tomb). For tourists to perform theoria does not require their full awareness of the method of metaphors from which are composed the myths holding together a nation. They do not need to be “experts” or “linguists” of national identity in order to become monumentally inventive. Rather, monumentality is a kind of writing whose school is tourism. The matrix of geology, technology, and culture existing in the Millhopper landscape make it an ideal location for bringing this symbolic practice (written mourning) into visibility.

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 16]

     

    Freud compared psychoanalysis to archaeology, with the analyst sifting through the products of the unconscious the way an archaeologist penetrated the surface of the landscape to reconstruct the facts of a buried city, like Schleimann at Troy. Contemporary archaeology includes the use of satellites and remote sensing technology, as in the discovery of the city of Ubar, “a major hub of the frankincense trade that vanished beneath the desert sands of southern Oman two millenia ago.” The city perished in a disaster around A.D. 100. “Evidence at the Oman site indicates that much of the settlement fell into a sinhole created by the collapse of an underground limestone cavern” (Bower). Indeed, Florida is in the same latitudinal belt as great deserts such as the Sahara and the Arabian Desert, but being a peninsula and the proximity of warm ocean currents makes it one of the nation’s wettest states.

     

    The link between Florida and Ubar rests on more than the shared karst topography. Researchers found the city by tracing ancient desert roads detected beneath the sand in pictures taken by the radar and optical cameras carried by the space shuttle Challenger in 1984. The shuttles, of course, are launched from Florida (including the spectacular, catastrophic explosion of Challenger in 1986). This link suggests that a second version of “Florida Rushmore” could be added to the Astronauts Memorial located at Spaceport USA, Cape Canaveral.

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 17]

     

    Lawrence of Arabia referred to Ubar as “the Atlantis of the Sands,” thus associating the destruction of Atlantis with a sinkhole collapse. As the part of the continent to emerge most recently from the ocean, Florida might be thought of as a natural Atlantis (which was expected to rise again). Some of the early maps of the New World, in any case, identified as “Atlantis” the place Columbus discovered. This allusion returns us to Solon, who told the story of Atlantis in Plato’s Timaeus.

     

    Plato used a karst feature–a cave–as the setting for his famous allegory of enlightenment. Many commentators on this allegory have observed that if Plato were writing today, he would use the popular institutions of cinema and television instead of the fire and shadows to represent the world of the cave. In Florida we might associate this allegory with our own “Sunshine Law,” thus mapping a matrix of public access to information, sun bathing, and the representative of “the Good” in the physical world (old Sol).

     

    Project Pleasure-Dome

     

    Another association between Florida karst and electronic technology involves the writings of the first and most famous “tourist” visitor to Florida (one who came sheerly out of curiosity). William Bartram travelled to the Alachua Savanna in 1773, a karst polje now called “Payne’s Prairie,” that is part of the same local formation in Alachua County that includes the Devil’s Millhopper. “It is a level green plain, above fifteen miles over,” Bartram wrote, “and scarcely a tree or bush of any kind to be seen on it. It is encircled with high sloping hills, covered with waving forests and fragrant Orange groves, rising from an exuberantly fertile soil. The towering Magnolia grandiflora and transcendent Palm, stand conspicuous amongst them” (Bartram). The indigenes called the Prairie “Alachua,” meaning “big jug,” referring to the stream that disappeared into a sinkhole, “into which the Indians saw the waters continually flow without filling it.”

     

    It is said that Samuel Taylor Coleridge’s reading of Bartram’s Travels (one of the most popular books of its day) influenced the dream that led to the writing of the poem, “Kubla Kahn,” about the place “Xanadu,” in which “did Kubla Khan / A stately pleasure-dome decree: / Where Alph, the sacred river, ran / Through caverns measureless to man / Down to a sunless sea. / So twice five miles of fertile ground / with walls and towers were girdled round” (Coleridge).

     

    Ted Nelson, credited with coining the term “hypertext,” named his plans for an “electronic literature” “Project Xanadu.” Both the network of underground rivers of Florida Karst, and the on-line computer network designed by Ted Nelson, may be recognized as “rhizomes.” “The Xanadu system,designed to address many forms of text structure, has grown into a design for the universal storage of all interactive media, and, indeed, all data; and for a growing network of storage stations which can, in principle, safely preserve much of the human heritage and at the same time make it far more accessible than it could have been before” (Nelson).

     

    What is the metaphoric lesson available at Devil’s Millhopper? The limestone of Florida–the aquifers, with their underground rivers, sinkholes, and springs–provide an immense reservoir for storing the groundwater essential to physical life in the region. The monuments of America similarly store the mythologies (the invented traditions) that are essential to the spiritual life of the nation. But don’t forget the fates of Atlantis and of Ubar, which resonate with the story of the empire evoked in “Kubla Khan,” subtitled, “A Vision in a Dream.”

     

    As if this earth in fast thick pants were breathing, A mighty fountain momently was forced: Amid whose swift half-intermitted burst Huge fragments vaulted like rebounding hail, Or chaffy grain beneath the thresher’s flail: And ‘mid these dancing rocks at once and ever It flung up momently the sacred river . . . And ‘mid this tumult Kubla heard from far Ancestral voices prophesying war!

     

    Heeding this prophesy, associated in the poem with a classic feature of karst topography (a river that appears and disappears, as does the Santa Fe River at O’Leno State Park, in Alachua County), FRE proposes to add a school of monumentality to the pleasure-dome of Florida tourism.

     

    (IMAGE)
    [Figure 18]

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Bartram, William. Travels of William Bartram. Ed. Francis Harper. New Haven: Yale, 1958.
    • Bower, B. “Desert Sands Yield Ancient Trading Center.” Science News 141 (Feb.15, 1992): 100-101.
    • Burnet, John. Early Greek Philosophy. London: A. and C. Black, 1963.
    • Burson, Nancy, Richard Carling, and David Kramlich. Composites: Computer-generated Portraits. New York: Beach Tree, 1986.
    • Chtcheglov, Ivan. Situationist International Anthology. Ed. Ken Knabb. Berkeley: Bureau of Public Secrets, 1981.
    • Coleridge, Samuel Taylor. The Portable Coleridge. Ed. I. A. Richards. New York: Viking, 1950.
    • Deford, Frank. There She Is: The Life and Times of Miss America. New York: Viking, 1971.
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Felix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism & Schizophrenia. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota, 1987.
    • Erdelyi, Matthew Hugh. Psychoanalysis: Freud’s Cognitive Psychology. New York: Freeman, 1985.
    • Freud, Sigmund. The Interpretation of Dreams. Trans. James Strachey. New York: Basic Books, 1955.
    • Godzich, Wlad. “Foreword: The Tiger on the Paper Mat.” The Resistance to Theory. Ed. Paul de Man. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota, 1987.
    • Marth, Del and Martha J., Eds. Florida Almanac: 1992-1993. Gretna, LA: Pelican, 1992.
    • Mercer, Charles. Legion of Strangers. New York: Holt, 1964.
    • Nelson, Theodor Holm. Literary Machines: The Report on, and of, Project Xanadu. Edition 87.1. Published by author, 1987.
    • Sacks, Peter. The English Elegy: Studies in the Genre from Spenser to Yeats. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins, 1985.
    • Santner, Eric L. Stranded Objects: Mourning, Memory, and Film in Postwar Germany. Ithaca: Cornell, 1990.
    • Smith, Rex Alan. The Carving of Mount Rushmore. New York: Abbeville, 1985.
    • Stubbs, Tom. “Devil’s Millhopper.” Florida Wildlife (Feb, 1972).
    • Sutton, Horace. Travelers: The American Tourist from Stagecoach to Space Shuttle. New York: Morrow, 1980.
    • Tisdall, Caroline. Joseph Beuys. London: Thames and Hudson, 1979.
    • Walter, E.V. Placeways: A Theory of the Human Environment. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina, 1988.
    • Wilber, Ken, Ed. The Holographic Paradigm. Boulder: Shambhala, 1982.

     

    Illustration Acknowledgements

     

    • Figure 1 J. V. Luce, The End of Atlantis.
    • Figure 2 TW Recreational Services, Inc.
    • Figure 3 Paul Herrmann, The Great Age of Discovery.
    • Figure 4 Frank Deford, There She Is: The Life and Times of Miss America.
    • Figure 5 National Park Service.
    • Figure 6 South Dakota School of Mining and Technology.
    • Figure 7 Hammond Nature Atlas of America.
    • Figure 8 Kathleen Ulmer.
    • Figure 9 Sigmund Freud, New Introductory Lectures on Psychoanalysis.
    • Figure 10 Pierre Mion, National Geographic 165 (1984).
    • Figure 11 Nancy Burson, Richard Carling, David Kramlich, Composites.
    • Figure 12 Composites.
    • Figure 13 State of Florida Department of Natural Resources.
    • Figure 14 State of Florida Department of Natural Resources.
    • Figure 15 Andrew Ortony, Ed, Metaphor and Thought, (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1979).
    • Figure 16 R.C. Benson and R.A. Glaccum, Radar Surveys for Geotechnical Site Assessment, (1979).
    • Figure 17 Amedeo Gigli, in Giovanni Caprara, Space Satellites, (New York: Portland House, 1986).
    • Figure 18 Ken Marsh, The Way the New Technology Works, (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1982).
    • Figure 19 Ute Klophaus, Wuppertal.
    • Figure 20 Ute Klophaus.
    • Figure 21 Benson and Glaccum.

     

  • Important Pleasures and Others: Michael Palmer, Ronald Johnson

    Eric Selinger

    Department of English
    George Washington University
    SELINGER@gwis.circ.gwu.edu

     

    Are the pleasures of experimental poetry important? 1 William Wordsworth certainly thought so. The “experiment” of Lyrical Ballads was published, he tells his readers in the “Preface,” in the hope that it “might be of some use to ascertain, how far, by fitting to metrical arrangement a selection of the real language of men in a state of vivid sensation, that sort of pleasure and that quality of pleasure may be imparted, which a Poet may rationally endeavour to impart” (153). Such pleasure is not, he hastens to add, “a matter of amusement” or mere “taste.” Rather, the “immediate pleasure” that the Poet is to supply is an “homage” to “the grand elementary principle of pleasure, by which [man] knows, and feels, and lives, and moves.” The pleasure of poetry testifies to the beauty of the universe and the dignity of man; it inculcates the linked Romantic values of social comradeship and natural inquiry. “We have no sympathy,” the poet tells us, even with those in pain, “but what is propagated by pleasure”; likewise “we have no knowledge, that is, no general principles drawn up from the contemplation of particular facts, but what has been built up by pleasure, and exists in us by pleasure alone” (166-7).

     

    It’s hard for me not to play Oscar Wilde to these earnest pronouncements. How are you, my dear William? What brings you to experimental poetry? Oh, pleasure, pleasure! What else should bring one anywhere? It’s still harder not to read them as historical artifacts, relics of an aesthetic and a psychology that Poe, Dostoevsky, Lautreamont, and Freud, among so many others, have debunked, and which research into the brain’s endorphin reward-system has yet to revise and reinscribe into general repute. But if his talk of pleasure sounds a little out of date, Wordsworth’s insistence on the social and political importance of “experimental” poetry still echoes in academic accounts of such verse (and prose) in the last decade. 2 Peter Quartermain thus speaks of the “moral imperative” that underwrites a tradition of “disjunctive poetics” from Stein and Zukofsky to Susan Howe; and he quotes William Carlos Williams’s warning that while “It is difficult / to get the news from poems,” people “die miserably every day / for lack / of what is found there” (20). Jerome J. McGann, in a polemical moment, declares that the variety of experimental verse called Language poetry “does not propose for its immediate object pleasure,” but rather exposes the “illusions of pleasure” that capitalist culture has “constructed,” thus allowing readers to “gain a certain freedom from their power” (“Response,” 312). 3 Even the cheery and skeptical Marjorie Perloff, who opens her volume Poetic License by describing postmodern “poe(t)heory” as “a very pleasurable activity,” closes it with a stern reminder of the task at hand: “What [Susan] Howe calls the ‘Occult ferocity of origin’ is an obstacle only a persistent ‘edging and dodging’ will displace,” she tells her readers, “if we are serious about ‘Taking the Forest’” (5; 310). 4

     

    There’s something suspect about pleasure, after all. The “text of pleasure,” in Barthes’ terms, “contents” us; it “comes from culture and does not break with it, is linked to a comfortable practice of reading” (14). Comfortable? The shame of it. Such a comfortable practice reduces poetry to what Wordsworth called “a matter of amusement . . . as indifferent as a taste for Rope-dancing, or Frontiniac or Sherry” (166), and what Michael Palmer has more recently disparaged as “a kind of decor in one’s life . . . the kind of thing for hammock and lemonade” (127). In an “age of Media” (Perloff) when pleasure has become a “cultural commodity” (Gilbert 249), in a period when “no writing,” so it’s said, “can offer a comfortable place to be” (Reinfeld 152), how much more important seems Barthes’ “text of jouissance, the text that imposes a state of loss . . . that discomforts . . . [and] brings to a crisis [one’s] relation with language” (14, my emphasis). 5 The pleasure one takes in such loss, discomfort, and crisis–such threat, anxiety, and terror, to borrow three terms from Palmer’s “Conversation”–seems less to be stressed than the “profound human risk” it involves, the way reading and writing return to sublime status as confrontations with “the mysteries of reference” (126-7). These are the pleasures of what’s difficult, a struggler’s just rewards.

     

    I have a certain sympathy for this rhetoric of risk and mystery. But since Wordsworth justified the difficulties of Romantic experimental poetry by invoking the political and epistemological importance of pleasure, it seems oddly incomplete to justify the difficulty of postmodern experimental work through invocations of disruption, subversion, and mystery–threats to, overwhelmings of, our knowledge and our power–while leaving the matter of pleasure to languish, all-but unaddressed. 6 (Even Burke, after all, calls the test of the sublime delightful horror.) Not all experimental poetry gives the same pleasures, of course. Not all pleases, or even aims to please. But it seems time to reopen the question of pleasure, and not simply in the terms that the poets themselves have articulated. In this essay, therefore, I explore two texts, Michael Palmer’s Sun (1988) and Ronald Johnson’s long poem ARK (c. 1970-1990), which have not only given me pleasure, but also brought me to reflect on the sources and the implications of that enjoyment, the degree to which it comes from reading against the poet’s grain. Like Wordsworth’s “experiment,” with its violation of the “formal engagements” expected by the public, both texts require readers to “experience an evacuation and failure of their customary reading privileges,” at least those connected to straightforward syntax, narrative structure, and a coherent speaking subject (McGann, “Response,” 312). But I find that both also restore me, eventually, to a sense of my readerly capacity, though they do so in the names of very different, even opposed, aesthetic and ethical traditions. Palmer is a poet of the sublime, if of that limited sublimity of shock which Lyotard finds at the heart of the postmodern. Johnson, by contrast, is a poet of the beautiful. A rare vocation in experimental verse, at least in the last twenty years. And, perhaps, an important one as well.

     

    What are the pleasures of Michael Palmer’s work? According to Mr. William Logan in his New York Times review of Sun, “reading Mr. Palmer’s poetry is like listening to serial music or slamming your head against a street-light stanchion. Somewhere, you’re sure, masochists are lining up to enjoy the very same thing, but for most people the only pleasure it can possibly have is the pleasure of its being over.” 7 Four years earlier, in the same publication, Palmer had found a more insightful and more sympathetic critic: perhaps one of the “masochists” that Logan has in mind. For while Rosemarie Waldrop found Palmer’s First Figure to be “a meditation on language that will not stay within the range of comfort,” she still finds that the poems there “seduce us immediately,” in part because of the way the poet attends to “the wounds inflicted by consciousness,” and to “the fault within our perception, our language, our mind.” The “acute intelligence” of his investigations gives pleasure, apparently, as does the poet’s willingness to confess and explore the way that language fails us. She quotes two lines from “French for April Fools”: “Once I could not tell of it / and now I cannot speak at all” (14).

     

    In Sun the poet continues to seduce through his attention to faults and wounds and incapacities. But the unspeakable and dumbstriking “it” of the earlier book takes on a political cast, as Palmer moves to write a poetry as responsive, in some sense, to Adorno’s stern dictum about art after Auschwitz as it is to the horrors of war. This was, in retrospect, perhaps to be expected. Like the work of so many other poets in the 1980s, Sun evinces a “return to history, politics, and the social as vital concerns” for American verse after the well-mannered domestic epiphanies of the Ford and Carter years (Gilbert 247-8). And, like other poems written in the decade’s disjunctive “period style . . . with all its exaggerated dislocations and shifts of reference,” it displays an “urge to make the pleasures of poetry somehow answerable to the intransigent realities of the social and political world” (243). But unlike most of the poetry of “textured information” that Gilbert describes, Sun does not range a plethora of skittery local pleasures against a nagging political conscience, with pleasure “given the decided advantage” (265). The balance swings decisively in favor of concience, making the pleasure one takes in the resulting moral double-binds more nervous, more thoughtful, more significant.

     

    Palmer has long been interested in the way politics might inhabit poetry as something more than subject matter, particularly when by “politics” we mean something like “atrocity.” In an interview from the mid-eighties, for example, Palmer disdains the “poets’ shuttle down to Nicaragua and so on to get material, everyone acting like La Pasionaria or something–which seems to me ultimately a complete betrayal of what is to be meant by the political,” since in such work the poets “appropriate” their material and are “more than anything else, announcing in stale poetic language, ‘Look how much human feeling and fellow feeling I have’–self-congratulatory in that regard” (“Dear Lexicon” 12; 26). We might think of Sun as a counterpoint to efforts like Carolyn Forche’s The Country Between Us, which however shocking in its subject matter may be said to soothe us in its familiar grammar, forms of reference, and moral compass; enough so, in fact, for the book to appear as a telling allusion on the series thirtysomething. 8 “There is pleasure and pain and there are marks and signs,” Palmer writes (84). Too easy, too descriptive a movement from the first to the second would seem, for him, to belie them both; too great a distance, as when the artist keeps his eye only on aesthetic reflexivites, “closing Mr. Circle with a single stroke,” and the project is equally worthless (83).

     

    The book thus aches. It’s torn between the desire to “leave the initiative to words,” in Mallarme’s lovely phrase, and a sense that words are “dumb,” now, and “mangled by use,” although somehow, somewhere else they might yet find their power again (37; see Yenser 296). “What matters is elsewhere,” a voice here says: “is other fires, with words streaming from faces before those fires. Actual words elsewhere. Objects elsewhere and the words to revive them” (33). The reader often catches references to a horrific, political world “elsewhere”: “a necklace burning” (44); “a woman bent double in the street / screaming Money Money” (69). We read of what seem to be African famine victims– “the dead” who are “amid sand the few fragments / / bowl bread violet / curve swollen outward / / of flies gathered / at lips and eyes” (20)–and that desolate nature morte returns in a later horrific simile, where the pages of a book are, we’re told, “spread out / before you in the sun / curled like leaves / black as tongues” (43). But the relationship of tongues to pages spread out in Sun, the fragments of lives to the fragments of verse, is deeply vexed, both because of the way that such horrors are experienced by the poet, and because of what he has called “a certain level of violence in all areas of address”: that is, I take it, a certain guilty and appropriative aspect to naming and represenation itself (“Dear Lexicon,” 12).

     

    Let me begin with the first of these vexations, the poet’s experience of “the political.” In many poems of the last decade, as Gilbert observes, “the world of social and political struggle presents itself . . . in a heavily mediated, prepackaged form, as information in a news broadcast” (268). While the primal scene of watching TV is rarely as visible in Palmer as in Gilbert’s example, Robert Hass’s “Berkeley Eclogue,” and while Palmer will not deploy Hass’s lyrical or self-critical “I,” the two Bay Area poets share a keen moral consciousness of the distance between their private lives and poetic work and those “other fires” and “actual words elsewhere” (Sun 33). Wanting not to “mis-appropriate” the political pain of others, Palmer has said, he tries instead “to allow them a presence that’s more reflective of the way they do occur in our–I don’t know if you’d call it image-bank or simply day to day experience, which is not an experience of those things but which is an experience of the images of those things” (“Dear Lexicon,” 13). The dead who “multiply / far from here” are piled “(as words this high)” (20); or they flicker into our lives through “the glass box” of TV, on whose screen “everything is named difference, and is always the same for that reason, since you’ve watched it many times before, counting the limbs” (35).

     

    And the media’s mediation goes yet deeper, if one may use metaphors of psychological depth in this flattened postmodern context. For while Carolyn Forche can and will insist on a clear distinction between what Williams called “the news from poems,” in which the “stress on close reading, irony, and the fiction of textual depth” will “open up more complex visions of historical circumstance” than the “degenerate form of art, neither wholly fact nor wholly fiction, never true to objective truth or subjective reality” that is “the news” broadly speaking, Palmer cannot (12). Any would-be “poetry of witness” in Sun finds itself already infected by political and cultural cliches, the “words that come from within” inflected by, drawn from, entangled in a social and linguistic world that refuses to be held at a safe and critical distance (Bernstein, 39). The “impure poetry” of our messy media age must confront, not the sweat and smoke, urine and lillies, stains and shames that Neruda describes in his essay of that name (128), but a more troublesome impurity of self. In “the image-base / where first glyphs are stored,” Palmer observes, “Lucy and Ethel, the Kingfish / Beaver and Pinky Lee / are spoken, die and undie / for you”; and this linguistic and vampiric resurrection for our sakes is immediately compared to “a war viewed from poolside / by philosophers and sheiks, / / senators and dialectician-priests” (74)–a series of targets drawn, I find, from the entry for “Superior, Unaffected Observers” in a dictionary of images recues.

     

    When we look into our hearts and write, what we see there was broadcast before. Indeed, part of the disdain that Palmer feels for the “Anglo-American empirical tradition” of poetry–that tradition where “a poem is a place in which you tell a little story” that “easily mirrors a shared emotional experience” in “a sort of consumer verse . . . where the function of the work and the mechanisms of the poem do not admit a certain level of mystery” (“Conversation,” 126)–may stem from the way that such “little stories” construct and constrict our emotional lives by invoking a series of “conventional affective signs” we no longer recognize as, in fact, conventional (“Dear Lexicon,” 27). 9 Those stories that surface in Sun are therefore quickly interrupted, often in order to draw the reader’s attention to the shared language and imagery that does not so much produce as replace “experience” when one tunes in to the externalized common consciousness of television (see Birkerts 61). “A word is coming up on the screen,” one poem in Sun begins:

     

    In the meantime let me tell you a little something about myself. I was born in Passaic in a small box flying over Dresden one night, lovely figurines. Things mushroomed after that. My cat has twelve toes, like poets in Boston. Upon the microwave she sits, hairless. The children they say, you are not father but a frame, waiting for a painting. Like, who dreamed you up? Like, gag me with a spoon. Snow falls–winter. Things are aglow. One hobby is Southeast Asia, nature another. As a child I slept beneath the bed, fists balled. A face appeared at the window, then another, the same face. We skated and dropped, covering our heads as instructed. Then the music began again, its certainty intact. . . . (31)

     

    What I learn about this speaker tells me mostly about my own familiarity with the skittering, flash-cut movement, not just of “channel surfing,” but of any televised discourse. “Flying over Dresden? Wait– I thought it was Passaic… What? Oh, yes, look at those lovely figurines.” The very eagerness with which I seize on “mushroomed,” as in mushroom clouds, “twelve toes,” as in mutations, “winter” and “aglow,” as in a nuclear winter, “Southeast Asia” and “dropped, covering,” a childhood in the sixties, suggests how pre-processed my ideas of what a baby-boomer autobiography would look and sound like have become. Later mentions of “the Union dead,” of Freud, of a Levi-Straussian “discourse in the tropics,” prompt the same unsettling response, as I note both the literary and critical references and my glad response at their discovery. “Does the central motif stand out clearly enough?” the speaker demands. Impatient for the restoration of certainty, for the music to begin again, one succumbs to the lure of words already on “the screen”: perhaps the same one through which, elsewhere in Sun, “words / pass unrecognized, thinking us” (73).

     

    Facing the “34,000 words spread out before me / words like incarnadine, tide and cheer,” Palmer watches, as his readers do, the language of Shakespeare slip into the language of advertising (65). But unlike Eliot or Mallarme, he has no hope to purify the language of the tribe; and unlike Ashbery or Bernstein he will not revel in the “Klupzy” possibilities of cliche and mediate discourse. A poet who changed his own name after college, Palmer is instead haunted by the “mysteries of reference,” the problem of naming-as-such (see Reinfeld 96-7). Words in this book will say things on their own, as when “lace” whispers out of “necklace” (15), but words never say Things, in a Rilkean, Orphic sense of the phrase, and the fact that they do not is frequently remarked on and deeply felt. (Indeed, Rilke’s Dinggedichte, Thing-poem “The Panther” shows up in a quick, sad, snapshot address: “Panther, You are nothing but a page / torn from a book”; while the first imprecation “Don’t say things / (You can’t say things)” comes from Eurydice, who thus admonishes Orpheus in Palmer’s version of the Rilke poem “Orpheus. Eurydike. Hermes” [12; 24].)

     

    Palmer’s exploration of “the sign itself” is, in part, political. In its exploration of “the mystery of how words refer and how they can empty out of conventional meanings and acquire meanings that threaten the very way that we talk to each other,” he has said, poetry can expose a deep and conflicted level of language, thus “giv[ing] the lie to political rhetoric” and enacting a form of liberation, “even when [the poem] is not thematically a ‘Workers, throw off your chains’ poem” (“Conversation” 127; 136). One might argue with the logic here: a scrupulous, demanding, naive faith in reference gives the lie to political rhetoric far more quickly and effectively than this deconstructive strategy, although it pays for that efficacy with risks of its own (see Argyros 81). But in his concern Palmer exposes one of the central shames of contemporary poetry: a sense that the old Romantic ideal of authentic naming, like that of Wordsworth’s “real language of men,” has become the facile lingua franca of the talk show; or, worse, that it simply reinforces the old master narratives and their “discourse of power” (“Interview” 6). 10 As he worked on the “Baudelaire Series” which makes up the second part of Sun, Palmer observed a growing “recognition of a certain level of violence in all areas of address . . . whether that be erotic address or a more discursive form of address and so on . . .” (“Dear Lexicon,” 12). Against Rilke’s hope that “perhaps we are here in order to say: house / bridge, fountain, gate, pitcher, fruit-tree, window,” to “say them more intensely than the Things themselves / ever dreamed of existing” and thereby display “how happy a Thing can be, how innocent and ours” (“The Ninth Elegy,” 201), Palmer might thus be said to pose the familiar qualms of Foucault. “We must conceive discourse as a violence that we do to things,” Foucault writes in “The Discourse on Language,” “or, at all events, as a practice we impose on them” (229). We may make Things “ours” through words, as Rilke says, only in the guilty mode of appropriation (229).

     

    Palmer locks horns with this dilemma in a number of ways, but most notably by insisting on the incorrigible arbitrariness of the sign, of “words / the opposite of names” (“Sign,” First Figure, 43). In the place of Rilke’s intimate, authentic naming here we find an ungrounded “calling.” What “we” have written is “something called the Human Poems” (5); “clouds” are “called crescent birds” (9); “This is a hazardous bed / called perilous night” (14). The long penultimate poem called “Sun” begins with insistant and slippery callings, and closes with equally pluralized signatures:

     

         Day One is called Tongues (62)
    
         Day One is called Trace (63)
    
         Call it Alpha in Lyre
         Call it Ceterae or Last Nights,
    
         The Blue Guide, Grid, The Private
         Experience of the Blinking Man
    
         Call it Ones (split open)
         Call it A Scratch Band from Duluth (63-4)
    
         ................................
    
         because the words disgusted me why write?
         signed Schelling, signed An Arm or A Door, signed
              The Desert to the West
    
         ________
    
         This is how one pictures the angel of history
         signed Series B, signed A or letter of A, signed
                  Bakhtin's Names
    
         ...............
    
         This was the trouble with the sun-dial or saint
               dial
         signed Writing Itself  [77]

     

    The poem that follows, also called “Sun,” may thus begin with stark commands to name one’s acts: “Write this. We have burned all their villages / Write this. We have burned all the villages and the people in them” (83). But within a few lines what Palmer calls the “mysteries of reference” reassert themselves, complicating both the act of writing and our sense of what is to be named.

     

         Write this.  We have adopted their customs and their manner
                   of dress
    
         Write this.  A word may be shaped like a bed, a basket of
                   tears or an X
    
         In the notebook it says, It is the time of mutations,
         laughter at jokes, secrets beyond the boundaries of speech
    
         I now turn to my use of suffixes and punctuation, closing 
         Mr. Circle with a single stroke, tearing the canvas from its
         wall, joined to her, experiencing the same thoughts at the
         same moment, inscribing them on a loquat leaf (83).

     

    The poem cannot simply indict, or witness to, American actions in southeast Asia–a location signaled by the loquat leaf, the burning villages, and later references to a “Plain or Jars of Plain of Reeds” and “Neak Luong”–for to do so, to name them, would be both to “mis-appropriate” them for the poet’s purposes and to collaborate in a mode of representation in which naming and power are uncomfortably allied. Yet the text cannot interrogate writing itself, the very shapes of words, without risking mere evasiveness, its linguistic turn from the burnt villages to the use of suffixes revealed as a form of escape. The trace of self-loathing in that reference to “closing Mr. Circle” echoes similar moments from elsewhere in the text, as when, in the previous poem called “Sun,” a speaker’s direction “Let’s call this The Quiet City / where screams are felt as waves” soon turns to smug self-congratulation: “My speech explaining the layers went very well” (61).

     

    To name the damage, to “Say Things,” is perforce to speak the language of the Fathers. To be silent, or simply aesthetical, would prove just as complicitous (see “Dear Lexicon” 13). The affective appeal of Sun, at least to me, lies in its teasing-out of this uneasy double-bind. I find the heart of the volume in a short poem, the tenth section of the “Baudelaire Series,” that takes the ambivalence of Palmer’s project as its subject. The poet calls it, in an interview, “the Adorno poem” (“Dear Lexicon,” 31), but I read it as his “Mozart, 1935”: a poem written to investigate his deep suspicion of beauty, for which his recurrent trope is music. You’ll recall Wallace Stevens’s original: “Poet, be seated at the piano. / Play the present, its hoo-hoo-hoo, / Its shoo-shoo-shoo, its ric-a-nic, / Its envious cacchination.” But where Stevens implores the poet to “Be thou . . ./ The voice of this besieging pain” (131-2), Palmer sees no such option:

     

         A man undergoes pain sitting at a piano
         knowing thousands will die while he is playing
    
         He has two thoughts about this
         If he should stop they would be free of pain
    
         If he could get the notes right he would be free
             of pain
         In the second case the first thought would be
              erased
    
         causing pain
    
         It is this instance of playing
    
         he would say to himself
         my eyes have grown hollow like yours
    
         my head is enlarged
         though empty of thought . . .

     

    Do the “enlarged” head and “hollow” eyes mirror the swollen bellies and hollow eyes of the suffering, or simply display a vapidity “empty of thought” because the notes have been gotten right at last? Would an end to the performance not negate the pianist himself? Would a halting, stumbling performance, which would end no pain at all, somehow redistribute it, perhaps more justly? “Such thoughts destroy music,” the poem concludes; “and this at least is good” (19).

     

    Palmer’s mistrust of music, of beauty, allies him with a broad range of postmodern aesthetic theory, for which Jean-Francois Lyotard is perhaps the most eloquent spokesman. For Lyotard beauty lapses into kitch, while all true art is known by shock and contradiction, by its limping imperfection. “Every writing worthy of its name wrestles with the Angel and, at best, comes out limping,” he writes in Heidegger and “the jews” (34). Adorno, too, according to Lyotard, “understands well that to make beautiful art today is to make kitsch; that even authenticity is precluded. . . . It is important, very important, to remember that no one can–by writing, by painting, by anything–pretend to be witness and true reporter of, be ‘equal’ to the sublime affection, without being rendered guilty of falsification and imposture through this very pretension” (34; 45). 11 What we have, in effect, is a sad sublimity, an art boiled down to that simmer of deprivations from which we “do not experience a simple pleasure,” but rather at best “an ambivalent enjoyment” (Lyotard, “The Sublime and the Avant-Garde” 206). Palmer’s repeated references to jazz, especially to pianist Thelonious Sphere Monk, suggest the bluesy, sweet and sour pleasure to be had. If Sun features divided characters called “A-against-Herself” and “G for Gramsci or Geobbels,” after all, it also claims a character called “T. Sphere” who “speak[s] in the dark with [his] hands,” perhaps playing the tune that Palmer cites whose “name is Let’s Call This” (85).

     

    The broken beauty of Monk’s playing is an apt model for Palmer’s acheivement. And yet my pleasure in catching this musical allusion, like that I have taken in pointing out his references to Rilke, to the “Human Poems” of Peruvian poet Cesar Vallejo, and, in a faltering allusion to someone “by the name of Ceran / or Anlschel,” to the Jewish poet Paul Celan (whose “Death-Fugue” appears in a later reference to “black milk, golden hair /. . . / and a grave in the air” [21; 78-9])–all this pleasure in context is remarkably unmixed, which suggests that, as a reader, I’m at home here after all. 12 This is, perhaps, a problem. If the “text of jouissance” that Barthes describes “unsettles the consistency of our tastes, values, and memories” (14), Sun, for me, does nothing of the sort. Instead of “that other music, sort of gasped out now by the synthetron” (35) I hear the myth of Orpheus, broken but replayed throughout the text; I hear the saving humor, get the jokes, I thematize discontinuities. The “we” that confesses “Write this. We have burned all the villages and the people in them” doesn’t really implicate the poet or his readers, I can’t help but feel, but rather people like the “Senator . . . proud and erect” who “want[s] desperately to read” certain moaning poems, but will not let himself (32), or like the speaker who objects to Palmer’s gestures at the unpresentable in a condescending tone: “How lovely the unspeakable must be. You have only to say it and it tells a story” (37). 13 And as Rosemarie Waldrop intimated of the poems in First Figure, even Palmer’s sense of the failures of language, of poetry, give pleasure. There’s a pathos to them, as though he were the rightful ruler of some troubled land, who tells us how he’d love to help, just with a word– but can’t.

     

    My reading of Sun is admittedly partial. I have made little of the two central sections, the poems called “C,” and, more important, I have hemmed in much of the possibility that Palmer’s poetic struggles to maintain, collapsing the expansive and mysterious wave of significations here into a single and quite limited performance of the text. In so doing I have, in effect, transformed Sun from a resistant, disjunctive text, one that offers a sublime intensification of the sense of being through its elements of shock, into a source of what Pierre Bourdieu calls “cultivated pleasure,” which “feeds on . . . intertwined references, which reinforce and legitimate each other, producing, inseparably, belief in the value of works of art,” including, in this case, works of art which ostensibly unseat cultivation and intellectual privilege (499). I have, more than likely, displayed that “paradoxical relationship to culture made up of self-confidence amid (relative) ignorance and of casualness amid familiarity, which,” as Bourdieu remarks, “bourgeois families hand down to their offspring as if it were an heirloom” (66). Be that as it may, my reading has also, I hope, revealed something else. In addition to the pleasures of Palmer’s diction–the way, for example, he plays off a resonant (not to say portentous) hoard of words like “house” and “sky” and “rain” and “sun” and “words” against unexpected addresses to “King Empty,” “Mr. Duck and Mr. Mouse,” and “Fred who fell from the trapeze / / into the sawdust / and wasn’t hurt at all” (6)–and alongside the pleasures of aesthetic liberation that are so great a part of any experimental art’s appeal–the sense that restraints on one’s own conceivable new work have been lifted, including restraints one had not known were there; the pleasures of “permission given,” as Grenier says of Stein (204)–Sun offers a pleasure that even William Logan might appreciate: that of inventing coherence and assigning value, of exercising those mental faculties that allow one to build and inhabit a meaningful world.

     

    This stress on explicatory and contextualizing readings, on matters and pleasures of “meaning,” may seem to go against Palmer’s experimental grain. (Somewhere at my back I hear Ed Dorn’s laughing Gunslinger: “Mean? / Questioner, you got some strange / obsessions, you want to know / what something means after you’ve / seen it, after you’ve been there…. / … / How fast are you / by the way? [28-9].) On the one hand, Palmer seems to call for such a reading, so long as it does not aspire to closure or absolute authority. “When that structural rigidity of a closed form begins to tremble and we begin to feel the anxiety of losing structure,” he says in his “Conversation” with Lee Bartlett, “it can be a terrifying experience. To be resolved, it calls for a dwelling in the poem. You have to decide what your relationship to the poem is. It is a kind of poetry that insists the reader is part of the meaning, that the reader completes the circuit” (127-8). I take it that he means, therefore, that the terror is to be resolved, the circuit thus completed, though not closed. Sun itself, on the other hand, takes a more critical stance toward my (admittedly) traditional and academic reading: my picking out of references; my efforts at explication; my displacement of local language events in the name of “central” themes. As I savor the final lines about a “village . . . known as These Letters–humid, sunless,” I may quickly note in the margin one last evasion of Rilkean naming (“known as”) and a bit of wordplay that reinforces the distance between signs and signifieds (even those villages known as “These Letters” are “sunless,” unreached by Sun itself). But such marginalia, and the critical ease they suggest, sit poorly with the evident longing and unhappiness of the text. The resonant Biblical allusion that closes out the book weighs this sort of “relationship” between reader and text, this sort of resolution, and finds it wanting. I am judged for my very ability to know that I am judged, and certainly for any pleasure I may take in that recognition. Is it only such worry and unsettlement that proves one’s readerly “dwelling”? “The villages are known as These Letters,” Palmer writes. “The writing occurs on their walls” (86).

     

    I’ve said that Sun aspires to the sublime–at least to that sublimity described by Lyotard, which “does not say the unsayable, but says that it cannot say it” (Heidegger 47). Yet how fallen, how changed a sublimity this is! Lyotard’s definition gives no sense, as in Longinus, that sublimity “is a kind of height and conspicuous excellence in speeches and writings,” and that emotions like “lamentation, pain, and fright” stand far below it (8; 50). For Longinus, a sublime passage shows its author’s greatness, and rather than passing judgment on listeners might lead them to greatness as well. Asyndeton, hyperbaton, abundance, breaking off in the middle of a statement–all of these rhetorical techniques, familiar from Sun, have their place in this older conception, but angst is not their object, however much it may lead to a chastened, desirable “dwelling.” We need not look back as far as Longinus for examples of this older and encouraging sense of the sublime, in which terror leads to a resurgent and invigorated, rather than chastened, brio of being. In this strain Emerson writes of the sublime poet Milton that “The Fall of Man was the subject of his Muse, only as a means whereby he might help to raise man again to the height of his divine nature and proportion” (“Ethical Writers,” Early Lectures 362). That lift would be a rather different pleasure from the sorts I’ve explored so far, its importance clearly different as well. And we may find it in the work of Ronald Johnson.

     

    I introduce Johnson through Milton because in the last twenty years he has written an epic called ARK over which his poem Radi Os, a rewriting-by-excision of Paradise Lost, rests like a cathedral’s dome. In Radi Os and the Foundations, the Spires, and the Ramparts of ARK we find an experimental poet still committed, for all his difficulties, to coherence, completion, a blend of sublime “too-muchness” and a beauty of resolution. Where Palmer is a “versionary” poet, uneasy with naming and reference as they take part in the discourse of power, Johnson is an unabashed visionary: one who finds that language and art do not impose on human or even inhuman nature, but rather grow out of the world of “things” themselves, since “lawful utterance is a natural as well as human phenomenon” (Finkelstein, Utopian Moment, 92). “Matter delights in music, and became Bach,” Johnson explains in one “Beam” of ARK: The Foundations (Beam 7). Or, as he plucks his theme out of Milton in Radi Os: “O / Tree / into the World, / Man / the chosen / Rose out of Chaos: / Song.”

     

    Johnson is only eight years Palmer’s senior, but his epic strikes one as something closer to a generation older, a fine example of the “immanentist” postmodernism of the 1960s. It shares that older faith in a Wordsworthian “high argument” for the exquisite fit between the mind and external world; it remains untroubled by the “urgent and deeply anxious desire” to reconcile pleasure and politics characteristic of the 1980s (see Altieri 29-49; Gilbert 243). Indeed, its most urgent and axious desire seems to be to answer to the world that Johnson sees described by contemporary science: a world as occluded as that of politics by the “scenic mode” of the later 1970s. As he wrote Radi Os, the poet explains, “I was taken over by Blake, but with my vision of the physical universe and . . . able to try to figure out how we order the universe now. Blake couldn’t even look at Newton. I felt if I were to do this I would have to be a Blake who could also look at what we know of modern cosmology.” The results, which I have explored at length elsewhere, bear out the poet’s sense that “instead of being a rather flippant work of just simply putting lines and cutting out words,” it is “a cosmology of the mind”; but it is in ARK: The Foundations that the poet most clearly brings together his passions for the natural and the human sciences (“Interview,” 84).

     

    Beam 1 of the Foundations thus begins with this sunrise:

     

                            Over the rim
    
         body of earth                      rays exit sun
    rest to full velocity to eastward pinwheeled in a sparrow's
    
                                 eye
              --Jupiter compressed west to the other--
    
        wake waves on wave in wave striped White Throat song
    
                   ...............................
    
                       as if a several silver
                           backlit in gust

     

    The centering of these lines, their evident poise, their less-evident numerical balancing (three lines of three words, one of ten, one of one, one of six, then ten once more), enact a world of more than just bilateral symmetries. They invite, also, those basic questions of meaning that Dorn’s Gunslinger mocks one for. Why the paradox of rays that “rest to full velocity”? Well, photons will “rest” at the speed of light, and must be hindered or slowed to keep them from doing so; and the sun will fire out photons when electrons in its constituent atoms, raised to a higher quantum level by the impact of one photon, “rest” to a lower energy level as the atom sends out another. Some sunrays are “Pinwheeled” because they enter the pinwheel-shaped iris of the bird’s eye, while others, reflected back to Earth from Jupiter, are “compressed” or refracted by the earth’s atmosphere as the other planet sinks below the horizon. (Since a sparrow’s eyes are on the opposite sides of its head, “able to see the seed beneath its bill–and at the same instant the hawk descending,” as Beam 4 explains, the bird may see both eastward and westward sights at the same time.) The “wake” of those rays, which are themselves waves, or wavicles, wakes an answer in the sound waves of the White Throat song, so that as each bird joins in separately–“several” meaning “relating separately to each individual involved”–it is as though spots of silver “backlit,” or reflected, lit-back the sunlight. They do so “in gust,” or keen delight, as well as in gusts, or surges of melody; and human song, poetry, which sings from the electrically sparkling “nervetree,” is by extension an equally natural and reflective pleasure, since “out of a stuff of rays, particles, and pulses” comes the poet who notes down and writes up the scene, himself “the artificer of reality” (Beam 12). 14

     

    It’s from such links and correspondences, sometimes direct, sometimes a poet’s licenced stretch, that Johnson builds his ARK. They are not new connections. His little rhyme, “Perceive, perceive! Reality is ‘make’ believe” (Beam 8) puts “make” in quotes to remind us that the real is what makes us believe in it, as well as what we make through our belief; but that’s a thought we find in Coleridge. Though the biology and physics he invokes will mark him as of our time, this invocation is itself predicted by Wordsworth’s “Preface,” with its insistence that the Poet “converses with general nature with affections akin to those, which, though labour and length of time, the Man of Science has raised up in himself” (168). Finkelstein calls Johnson an “unquestionably traditional, even derivative” poet (Utopian Moment 91); and indeed, he finds he can draw on other visionary poets and mystics with only minor revisions, as when his vision of a holy fire “where the inner regions, tangled along polarized / garland, run faster than the outer” (Beam 3) gives a Copernican and atomic cast to Dante’s cosmology, revising with a quick, corrective twist.

     

    Like Palmer, Johnson eschews both the grand, Romantic “I” and the oral, organic forms Romanticism sponsors. But where Palmer dwells on, or in, the “mysteries of reference,” moving through threat, anxiety, and terror on his way to the ambivalent enjoyments I have already discussed, Johnson turns to such modes as concrete poetry, quilt, and collage in order to celebrate a different mystery: the way that “things” may be “said” or sung or troped into being. In ARK: The Foundations we find any number of shattered words and squared off blocks of print, that is to say, but none prompt much threat or fret. In Beam 5, paradoxically entitled “The Voices,” we find

     

                          o
                         moon
    
                    %in%m%in%d%in%
    
                a e a e a e a e a e
               w v w v w v w v w v

     

    while in Beam 13 we find a vision of creation-as-division, of flux transfigured by the efflux of a fiat lux, embodied in the luxurious and luminescent square–

     

         f lux f lux f lux f
         lux f lux f lux f l
         ux f lux f lux f lu
         x f lux f lux f lux

     

    –and in Beam 24 we warm ourselves at the comforting strobe of

     

         earthearthearth
         earthearthearth
         earthearthearth
         earthearthearth
         earthearthearth
         earthearthearth

     

    where the eye picks out “hearth” and “heart” and “ear the art” in what the curmudgeonly William Harmon calls “a harmlessly moralizing telegram of values” (221). I’ve already mentioned Radi Os, in which Johnson writes a poem by erasing, or etching away, in an “infernal reading,” most of the first four books of Paradise Lost. In “Beams 21, 22, 23” of ARK: The Foundations, subtitled “The Song of Orpheus” and opening with seven lines from Radi Os, Johnson similarly ventilates the Book of Psalms in order to discover an Orphic tale hidden within. 15 In Beam 25, subtitled “A Bicentennial Hymn,” Johnson plays Charles Ives, stitching snippets from the “Battle Hymn of the Republic” into “I have seen Him in the watchfires / full sail, the Ruffles and Flourishes / sifting out a glory / loosed lightning to answer / arching on.” To match a Spire of Prospero’s songs to Ariel, “snipped from Roger Tory Peterson’s A Field Guide to Western Birds” (ARK 37) there is an answering “invisible spire” of Ariel’s songs in response, which “consists of a tape recording” of spliced and altered birdsongs, including “a nocturne for loon and full orchestra” and an “adagio for thrushes and woodpecker quartet” (ARK 38). Despite the poet’s desire to build “a poem which needs no reference except itself,” other “invisible” elements to be found outside the poem include surprisingly relevant illustrative quotes in the OED (“Planting,” 2). Look up “caryatid,” for example–since light’s angels are in Beam 1 named as “caryatid / to the tides of day”–and you’ll find a quote from Tennyson: “Two great statues, Art and Science, / Caryatids, lifted up / A weight of emblem”: a fit figure for Johnson’s work. Look up daimon (from Beam 10’s Kabbalistic cum Leibnitzian couplet “daimondaimond Monad I / Adam Kadmon in the sky”), and you’ll find Thoreau: “It is the same daimon, here lurking under a human eyelid.”

     

    At a somewhat lower level than its announced architectural design, ARK is structured, like Palmer’s Sun, along a highly decentralized network of connections. The hand-print that forms Beam 18 displays the whorls of fingerprints, a “rhyme” for earlier references to the whorl of galaxies and to a snail’s spiralled shell. The first stage of a cell-division diagram, found in Beam 25, the “Bicentennial Hymn,” looks like a sunrise, and ends with twin cells pressed against each other like two hemipheres of the brain, or like the “balanced dissent” of the United States, of matter and anti-matter, and of other divided, procreative pairs mentioned elsewhere in the text. “Prosper / O / cell,” that Bicentennial Beam begins: a bit of wordplay that reminds one of, among other things, the many lions in the text, each one an Ari-el, or Lion of God. These are linked to the initial figure of the sun–the lion’s mane recalls the sun’s corona–and they are linked to the many flowers here as well, both because “where the bee sucks, there suck I,” and because many flowers have a corona of petals which unfold in answer to sunlight, so that the “answering chrystanthemum” of Beam 12 is as much a reflection as birdsong and the poet’s verse. The “Beast” of “SPLENDOR” is “mil- / lion-hued” (Beam 14); and near the end of the poem Johnson mentions the Leonids, a shower of shooting stars that fall in mid-November from the constellation Leo: a reference that looks back to and glosses lines from the start of the book, where falling stars were said to “comb out” the moon’s “lumen / horizon / in a gone-to-seed dandelion” (Beam 1).

     

    I could run a riff like this from Sun as well. Stephen Yenser all but does so in his review for Poetry. But it wouldn’t be as satisfying, since, while Palmer’s net is set to trap the Fathers, Johnson’s threads out past the bounds of his text, connecting with the “link and bobolink” of the world at large (Yenser 298, 300). 16 Even when it is not a comfortable read–and many passages, especially in the later or “higher” sections, still keep me at a distance, at least when I read to trace connections and work up “meanings” ARK is nonetheless an unabashedly comforting one. This self-described “darkling Lion” of a poet, like Thomas Hardy’s “darkling thrush,” gives “Carolings of such ecstatic sound” that we may well think there “trembles through / His happy good-night air / Some blessed Hope, whereof he knows” and Palmer’s unaware. That hope seems less specifically religious than it is a faith in the coherence and complexity of the world described by the physical sciences, where “trees, coastlines, and clouds” share their fractal structure with our lungs, bowel-linings, and neural networks, where “the golden mean appears to describe bronchial architecture as well as it does the proportions of the Parthenon,” and where other biological forms are built from the pattern of a Fibonacci series (Argyros 341-2). The threat and anxiety one may confront when faced with the mystery of reference are matched here–overmatched–by a possibility more “truly deserving of our awe and terror”: “the possibility,” as Alexander Argyros observes, “that beauty may be a perfectly natural occurence,” and that the perceiving and reflective mind may itself be a “real, emergent feature of a resourceful universe” (287; 352, note 2).

     

    Argyros speaks of awe and terror, both elements of the sublime. Yet “what we gain from such an understanding,” he goes on, “is a deeply satisfying sense of connectedness with the rest of the natural world” (287): a sense more properly associated with the beautiful. It is just this vision of nature as a Cosmos, of a world where beauty and complexity bootstraps its way out of chaos, that overwhelms and (in a crash of thunder and flash of lightning) spurs the poet, mid-life, into song:

     

               The circumambient!
    
              in balanced dissent:
         enlightenment -- on abysm bent.
    
                  Angels caged
    
                 in what I see,
               externity in gauged
                   antiphony.
    
         (Mid-age.  Brought to my knee.)
                     1935-70
    
                  The altitude
                     unglued
    
                A god in a cloud,
    
                      aloud
    
              Exactitude the flood.
                     (Beam 2)

     

    The lawfulness and “exactitude” of lightning, and our ability to know and describe it, is as dazzling as the bolt itself. And such lines implicitly promise that our experience of the poem to come will be a similar interweaving of shock and comprehension, of brilliant and even excessive immediate impressions that will answer to reflection and systematic inquiry. But such rational activity, such successful efforts to know and to describe, do not pluck us out of the transient material world into a supersensible realm, or show the supersensible to be our final destination, as Kant tells us that sublimity will do. Rather, the sublime here seems not opposed to, but a constituent part of the experience of beauty: a conjunction that, of classic theorists, only Wordsworth will allow.

     

    So far I have dwelt on the Foundations of ARK, for in them the poet sets out “all themes necessary to the work ahead, to have room to turn around in over the years” (“Planting,” 3). As ARK goes on, its movement seems increasingly self-referential, with less space given to reflecting on specific matters of perception and more to publishing the banns of this engaging spousal verse, with its “Strains / legion and ingenious / put to the uses of blessing” in which “s h / a p e / s / abound enobled” (ARK 46, Fountain I). The earlier concern with cosmic and evolutionary detail has hardly been abandoned–we are, are we not, the ennobled “a p e / s” who abound near the fountain–but as we ascend through the Spires to the Ramparts we also find a number of poems in the imperative mode, instructions to us and to the poet himself compressed into such elegant depictions of the project as the Herm of ARK 40:

     

             Man-
            oeuvre
           artillery:
    
         (hand-work &
          art-skill)
           askance
    
           full act,
             exact
           as skull.
    
             Dance
            howbeit
           about us,
    
              ply
           'nocount'
             Abyss
    
             plumb
             crazy
             core

     

    Such moments help keep ARK from foundering on its own Romanticism, if only by reminding one of Johnson’s commitment to the poem as object: a pattern of sound to which what I have called “meaning” is, if not irrelevant (that does the poet a disservice), then certainly only a partial experience of the “hand-work & / art-skill” at hand. (Johnson’s teacher in this is Zukofsky, rather than Wordsworth.) Their frequent vernacular humor reminds us that linguistic self-reference need not be at the service of disruption or anomie, but may rather be a form of self-creation, a fractal flowering.

     

    Like few other contemporary poets, Johnson seems to me what Robert Duncan called an “artist of abundancies.” He has built a poem in which “every particular is an immediate happening of meaning at large,” and in which “the old doctrine of correspondences is enlarged and furthered in a new process of responses, parts belonging to the architecture not only by the fittings . . . but by the resonances in the time of the whole in the reader’s mind, each part as it is conceived as a member of every other part.” Certainly Johnson “delites in puns, interlocking and separating figures, plays of things missing or things appearing ‘out of order’”; and as Duncan would lead us to expect, he does so not because these throw us back on the enforced mediation of language or force us to confront the mysteries of reference per se, but because such strategies “remind us that all orders have their justification in an order of orders” beyond the poetic work (ix). What Johnson adds to Duncan’s vision, drawing his faith from the world of physics, is that this “order of orders” has its own methods of self-reference, which the poet’s most self-conscious and reflexive work may thereby faithfully address. Palmer’s Sun is still invested in a version of the Fall, in which consciousness and nature, language and being, are at odds. This is a lasting myth, one that answers to an evident and ineluctable psychological fact that we may call alienation, nausea, or melancholia, depending on our theoretical bias. But as ontology it may have run its course. Nature, far from being mute and mournful (see Benjamin 329-30), may be more-than-metaphorically linguistic, as self-organizing and self-referential, as woven from airy nothing, as we are.

     

    I have been, I recognize, essentially uncritical regarding Johnson’s use of science. The poet’s tone invites such naivete. Johnson can be corny as Kansas in August, as when he builds an Arch of the names for groups of animals, “a tribe of goats / a sculk of foxes, a sett / of badgers, riches of martens,” and so on, and then in a charming and inevitable gesture ushers them into his ARK: “a shrewdness / of apes, labour of moles / all in the same boat” (ARK 83, Arches XVII in ARK: The Ramparts, 185). He can’t resist a pun, it sometimes seems, or the way one word can turn to another with a flip of vowel or consonant. “No mapped puddle skipped a pebble,” he writes in ARK 47, and we watch the doubled “p” of “mapped” turn a series of playful cartwheels. I suspect that these two immediately recognizable features of his work are linked, and that what joins them is a willingness to embrace both a shameful, infantine joy in rhymes and tongue-twisters, and the equally somatic pleasure children find in having their expectations, including their expectations of order and coherence in the world, raised and answered, even surfeited. In the same issue of Acts as Palmer’s “Dear Lexicon” interview, after all, appears a little poem called “My Cat,” taken from Johnson’s “The Imaginary Menagerie”: “I have a cat named Chaos / I teach to dance / crisscross, toss, and loss / across expanse. / / Chaos in the corner, / Chaos on its head. / / Order out of Chaos — / hanging by a thread” (106). This is not one of Johnson’s major works. But it exemplifies the older poet’s lack of embarassment over both nursery-rhyme simplicity and a child-like love of the enticingly coherent.

     

    Johnson’s ability to make the sublime serve the purposes of Beauty, rather than standing as an end in itself, may have something to do with this embrace of the embarassing or shameful, as opposed to the abject (see Turner, Beauty, 1-2; 17-32). It certainly puts him at odds with much modern experimental verse. “Beauty is difficult,” says Beardsley to Yeats at several points in the Cantos (see 74 and 80). “Beauty is easy,” Johnson reponds. “It is the Beast that is the secret” (Beam 14). He can have a hard time with that Beast, with making his poem, as he himself puts it, “a mirror held / to the horror.” If he gives us Prospero and Ariel, there’s no Caliban or Sycorax in sight, and the monsters that Thoreau says we must dare to suckle–this in Beam 15, a quoted “Cornerstone”–seem to me rather few and far between. Guy Davenport finds a “brave innocence” in the poet’s willingness to avoid the roles of “conscience,” “political guide,” and adviser on “contemporary and fashionable anxieties.” “Mr. Johnson might just as well be writing in any century you might arbitrarily name,” he observes,” for all the mention he makes of his times” (“Geography” 194). Other critics have been less approving. 17 In either case, here too he is unusual. We need to look beyond Anglo-American poetry to find his spiritual kin, since the modernist he most calls to mind, as Palmer recalls Rene Char, is the Spanish poet Jorge Guillen, whose Cantico (Canticle) is, like ARK, at once a hymn to light and to the triumphant pleasures of finding oneself “invented” by a world that makes us its “legend,” a “well-made” world that calls us to its praise (see “M_s all_” [“Beyond”] and “Beato sill_n” [“Blessed Armchair”], respectively). Cantico and ARK have both been accused of a tendency to slight the social, to sidestep history–a charge that Guillen responded to in poems and essays for much of his later career (see the “Introduction” to Affirmation, 22), and one that Johnson steadies himself for when he explains that “unlike other long American poems of the century, ARK was conceived to be a poem without history. A dangerous undertaking . . .” (“Planting” 2). Dangerous, at least in part, because without personal or social history for ballast, the poem may seem merely aesthetic, not important, a pleasure with nothing at stake, since by and large we no longer trust with Whitman that “passionate friendship” mirrors a “harmonic universe” (Davenport, “Whitman” 15) or with Coleridge that “‘Tis the sublime of man, / Our noontide Majesty, to know ourselves / Parts and proportions of one wondrous whole!” and that “This fraternises man, this constitutes / Our charities and bearings” (“Religious Musings,” 107; ll. 44-48).

     

    We may be wrong in this mistrust–it may yet prove, as Frederick Turner claims, that “what William James called ‘the will to believe’ is written in our genes,” that “teleology is the best policy,” and that, “paradoxically, it is utopian to attempt to do battle against our natural idealism,” the instinctive itch that leads us “to expect more order and meaning in the world than it can deliver,” and therefore to change the world to meet our expectations (100). With its faith in the order and beauty of the world Johnson’s poem leads the reader to expect more coherence and meaning in it than the poem often allows at first glance, and as the text is “changed” through annotations and efforts at close reading it more than requites one’s patient, puzzling scrutiny. I doubt that this aesthetic exchange has much of a social effect, just as I doubt Palmer’s meditations on the mystery of reference have; but ARK rewards, rather than judges, a reader’s effort to make it cohere, leaving the mouth and ear satisfied in its music, and the intellect, also, new and tender and quick. Two stanzas from Guillen’s “Mas alla” capture this surge of narcisstic satisfaction:

     

         Todo me comunica,
         Vencedor, hecho mundo,
         Su brio para ser
         De veras real, en triunfo.
         Soy, mas, estoy.  Respiro.
         Lo profundo es el aire.
         La realidad me inventa,
         Soy su leyenda.  -Salve!18

     

    Such pleasures are certainly utopian, as Finkelstein explains, offering a critical purchase on the world (98-101). But I suspect that breathing in that “brio para ser” is its own reward, that it corresponds to a movement through a crisis when the world felt as inalterably other and abject, a crisis Palmer and Lyotard help us envision, into the exaltation and confirmation of self that Longinus describes, where one feels that “nature did not decide that man would be a low or ignoble animal; but leading us into life and into the whole cosmos as if into a kind of world’s fair to be, in a way, its observers, and to be lovers of the esteem which comes to those who compete” (177)–in this case who compete by “wrestling the old ineffable” into experimental verse (Johnson, Beam 30).

     

    Palmer and Johnson often seem to me halves of a single, greater poet: one who would unite, not Innocence and Experience, that old Mutt and Jeff, but Emerson’s duo: Experience and Intellect. “Every thing is beautiful seen from the point of the intellect, or as truth,” Emerson writes in “Love.” “But all is sour, if seen as experience. . . . In the actual world–the painful kingdom of time and place–dwell care, and canker, and fear. With thought, with the ideal, is immortal hilarity, the rose of joy” (328). Dante wrote from in both worlds, as did Eliot, Pound, and Guillen. Chartres to Johnson’s Watts Towers, James Merrill’s epic of love and science, The Changing Light at Sandover, is the nearest that contemporary poetry comes to this inclusiveness. (I suspect that its use of narrative is central to that accomplishment, although it would take another essay to make the argument.)

     

    But we need not push for such a synthesis. If there’s little of Johnson’s holy light in Sun or Palmer’s sweet, Hebraic ache in ARK, the aesthetics of the second book suggest that we may yet have an experimental poetry that aspires to Beauty, to the reader’s satisfaction–a poetry that starts from something remarkably close to the world-view of the Natural Classicists, that is to say, without yielding their New Formalist results. This seems to me, whatever its ethical import, an important aspiration, for it gives a ringing answer to Barthes’ sense that we are kept at a distance from the “keen” pleasures of reading “the work,” as opposed to those of playing out “the text,” by the “rather depressing knowledge” that “today, one can no longer write ‘like that’” (80). In its assurance of a link between the self-referential construction of the poem and the mathematical coherence of the natural world, Johnson’s work reminds us that the stochastic, “shit happens” poetics of what Gilbert calls “textured information” may be at least as much of an imposition on the ordering impulse of the human mind as linguistic structure and closure are a human imposition on the buzzing, booming chaos of events. And in its restoration of pleasure as a “grand and elementary principle” nearly thirty years after Lionel Trilling declared that “the ideal of pleasure has exhausted itself, almost as if it had been actually realized and had issued in satiety and ennui,” leaving an ideal of experiences that lie beyond the pleasure principle in its wake, ARK nags us with the thought that the pursuit of sensations of self-awareness, though they lie in pain, may be as specialized and privileged a pursuit as the one it disdains, the Enlightened, echt American pursuit of happiness.

     

    On the news this early evening, after all, I will hear about villages burning. Out my window, by nothing but an accident of birth, I will see a scene far closer to Johnson’s Spire on the Death of L.Z. (ARK 34):

     

               bees purring a
                  cappella
         in utter emerald cornfield
             till the cows come
                 purple home
              this is paradise

     

    The “mysteries of reference” in Palmer’s poetic can better accomodate my experience of imaged awfulness than the revelatory epiphanies of Johnson. Yet somehow the mysteries of construction invoked throughout ARK offer a way through my not-uncommon sense of shame at such juxtapositions, into a response equally proper to the world I inhabit, to the work I have at hand, and to the life and work those burned-out villagers ought also by rights to enjoy. Perhaps we need not, like the proverbial Englishman, mistake discomfort for morality, as though only through guilt and struggle could our pleasures be excused (85). To say at death that “head wedded nail and hammer to the / work of vision / of the word / at hand,” the L.Z.elegy goes on, “that is paradise.” There is still work–beautiful, wild work–to be done.

     

    Notes

     

    1. This essay grows out of my discussion of Johnson and Palmer at the 1992 MLA Poetry Division panel, chaired by Robert van Hallberg, on the question, “Are the Pleasures of Experimental Poetry Important, and When?”

     

    2. I will leave aside, for now, the history of this anhedonism. But it is worthy noting that in 1965 two essayists remarked on its importance. “Our contemporary aesthetic culture does not set great store by the principle of pleasure,” Lionel Trilling writes in “The Fate of Pleasure,” “and it may even be said to maintain an antagonism to the principle of pleasure.” Susan Sontag, thinking of a slightly different set of artists, observes that “in one sense, the new art and the new sensibility take a rather dim view of pleasure,” since “the seriousness of modern art precludes pleasure in the familiar sense–the pleasures of a melody that one can hum after leaving the concert hall, of characters in a novel or play whom one can recognize, identify with, and disset in terms of realistic psychological motives,” and so on. She hastens to add, however, that in another sense “the modern sensibility is more involved with pleasure in the familiar sense than ever,” since it “demands less ‘content’ in art, and is more open to the pleasures of ‘form’ and style” (302-3).

     

    3. The key tension in McGann’s “Response to Altieri” seems to me not that between capitalism and Language work, but rather between pleasure and freedom: a distinction that places him in a broad tradition of thinkers for whom, as Trilling says of Dostoevsky, “disgust with the specious good of pleasure serves as the ground for the affirmation of spiritual freedom” (76).

     

    4. To be fair, I should mention Perloff’s essay on “The Word as Such: L=A=N=G=U=A=G=E Poetry in the Eighties,” which stresses the aural enjoyment of “Language” work: “Words, that is to say, are not dependable when it comes to signification, but the play of their sounds is endlessly pleasurable” (The Dance of the Intellect, 232). In her most recent book, Perloff returns to the discourse of pleasure, since if we are willing to “‘go with it’” we may be “amused” by Language work, and find such poems “elaborately sounded . . . appealing in their music” (Radical Artifice, 205). Yet I am struck, once again, by the way Perloff feels impelled to close out Radical Artifice on a horatorical note, describing John Cage as “preoccupied with . . . ultimately political topics.” As her clinching comment on his work this observation anticipates an audience for whom the “aural,” “visual,” “dialectic,” “semantic,” “or for that matter, literary” paths through Cage’s work are less important than his underlying political concern.

     

    5. “Pleasure / Bliss,” writes Barthes: “terminologically, there is always a vacillation I stumble, I err. In any case, there will always be a margin of indecision; the distinction will not be the source of absolute classifications, the paradigm will falter, the meaning will be precarious, revocable, reversible, the discourse incomplete” (4). That said, however, Barthes makes good use of his perpetually faltering paradigm; and handled with all due lightness, the pair prove a useful heuristic.

     

    6. This inattention to pleasure is hardly limited to those who write about experimental verse. As Barbara Packer has argued, “the analysis of mechanisms of delight, which used to be as important a part of the old rhetorical education as moral improvement, has been pushed to the margins of critical discourse,” so that professors of English lack a sophisticated and respectable language for deliberating the pleasures of Chaucer, as well as Charles Bernstein (26). When pleasure is mentioned, as when Roger Gilbert finds that the sentences of Ron Silliman’s What “give pleasure . . . through their wit, their allusiveness, their visuality, their phonetic texture, their descriptive precision, or their sheer unlikeliness,” delight is still writ small, a matter of local “fun” rather than a “grand elementary principle” (261).

     

    7. I quote this in the knowledge that Palmer can give as good as he gets. In 1987, when Sulfur published a review by Sven Birkerts critical of John Ashbery’s Selected Poems, then invited masthead members to respond, Palmer called the article “diffuse and pointless,” and wrote that he heard in its accusations of an Ashberian “nihilism” “the all-too-familiar whine of the bourgeois subject, threatened with the loss of its delights, its constituted meanings and its empty identity” (154).

     

    8. The fact that Michael Steadman had been too busy with his job at the advertising firm DAA to read Forche’s collection was meant to reinforce our sense that he was being drawn inexorably away from the political concern of his youth in the 1960s–and also from his emblematically named wife, Hope.

     

    9. Palmer’s distrust of telling a little story–his distrust, it is safe to say, of narrative–may also be illuminated by McGann’s comments on the non- and anti-narrative impulse in Language poets. “Narrativity is an especially problematic feature of discourse, to these writers, because its structures lay down ‘stories’ which serve to limit and order the field of experience, in particular the field of social and historical experience. Narrativity is, in this view, an inherently conservative feature of discourse, and hence it is undermined at every point” (“Contemporary Poetry” 267). For a convincing counter-argument in favor of narrative, however, see Argyros’ chapter “Narrative and Chaos” (307-322).

     

    10. Perloff’s chapter “The Changing Face of Common Intercourse: Talk Poetry, Talk Show, and the Scene of Writing” (Radical Artifice 29-53) is perhaps the best available exposition of the first of these embarrassments, especially in her withering reading of Philip Levine’s poem “To Cipriano, in the Wind.” I am not sure, however, that a poetry of moderate artifice–say a poetry that embraces the traditional artificialities of meter, rhyme, and theatrical or performative selfhood, of the sort we find in Merrill or Pinsky–would prove less cogent a response than Perloff’s radical poetics to this “changing face.”

     

    11. In the “Acts” interview, it is worth noting, Palmer calls “A man undergoes pain . . .” the “Adorno poem” (“Dear Lexicon” 31).

     

    12. Palmer has written and spoken of Vallejo and Celan as poets who evince “a politics that inheres” (“The Flower of Capital,” 164). They are vital proof that “political significance can manifest itself in the most deeply privatized–apparently–work,” and that one can write a poetry in which the political world does not become “decor” and which is itself not “ultimately self-congratulatory, in that you get to say you’re on the right side, and then sell it” (“Dear Lexicon” 14, 12). Although I attribute these “Human Poems” to Vallejo, since a collection by that name was translated by Clayton Eshleman and published by Grove Press in 1968, according to Eshleman’s 1978 retranslation of the same posthumous texts “there is no evidence that Vallejo himself even contemplated such a title as Poemas humanos” (xx): a buried slipperiness of naming that echoes a key theme in Palmer’s text. In Celan, it is also worth noting, Palmer finds “a kind of . . . rebuke to Adorno” (“Dear Lexicon” 14). The poet discusses his work as a “network of quotation” in the “Dear Lexicon” interview: “I don’t go around expecting everyone to have a footnoted edition of my works. On the contrary, I could footnote it myself if that were the intent. I’m not just setting up an industry of ‘seeking out,’ though I’m delighted by the surprise of someone . . . finding out where I’ve stolen this or that” (18).

     

    13. While I’m tempted to add that Senator to my earlier list of easy targets, Palmer has been subject to absurd objections from those in power, his poetry “officially condemned by a committee of Texas congressmen as pornographic” (Reinfeld 99).

     

    14. Johnson does not segregate his literary and scientific ranges of reference. The line “All night the golden fruit fell softly to the air” interweaves Yeats’s “golden apples of the sun” and the fall of photons into the gravity well of the earth, and takes note of the fact that the silver apples of the moon are the golden ones, reflected. In this “reeled world” (Beam 1) all things pun one another, and poets, who get to know and articulate their correspondences, are themselves shaped from “Linkings, inklings, / around the stem & branches of the nervetree–/ shudder and shutterings, sensings,” beings for whom “SENSE sings” (Beam 8).

     

    15. This ventilation, called “PALMS,” composed from at least one word from each psalm, quoted in order, retells the myth of Orpheus and Euridice as it recapitulates a number of key images and passages from the rest of the Foundations. For example, the opening imprecation to “Be / the man that walk in the way of day and night / like a tree of water . . .” helps us gloss an otherwise obscure reference to “one” who is “water to touch, all knowledge” in Beam 1. Since the brain’s “wrinkled lobes of flesh are more sensitive than the surface of water” (Beam 12), it seems we are that aqua-tocatta. Johnson’s Bible, like “Orpheus’ Sermon” in Dickinson’s poem 1545, has “a Warbling teller” in more ways than one.

     

    16. I take this phrase from John Shade, in Nabokov’s Pale Fire, for whom “It sufficed that I in life could find / Some kind of link-and-bobolink, some kind / Of Correlated pattern in the game, / Plexed artistry, and something of the same / Pleasure as they who played it found” (ll. 811-15; 36-7). In the last beam of Ark: the Foundations, we find a “bobolink / sphericling the hereabouts” (Beam 33).

     

    17. Norman Finkelstein notes that Johnson’s work can “seem too naively exalted, lacking in an awareness of specifically social conflicts” (Utopian Moment 94). Harmon, too, comments that “given Johnson’s cosmic scale, the human race . . . hardly registers in any historical, political, social, or psychological details” and “shows up only as the inventor of language” (219). Wordsworth once more: “The knowledge both of the Poet and the Man of Science is pleasure,” we read in the “Preface” to Lyrical Ballads; “but the knowledge of the one cleaves to us as a necessary part of our existence, our natural and unalienable inheritance; the other is a personal and individual acquisition, slow to come to us, and by no habitual and direct sympathy connecting us with our fellow beings” (168).

     

    18. Julian Palley translates these lines as “Everything yields / to me — victor, made world — / its determination / to be triumphantly real. / / I am; I am here and now. / I breathe the deepest air. / Reality invents me. / I am its legend. Hail!” (31).

    Works Cited

     

    • Altieri, Charles. Enlarging the Temple. Lewisburg, PA: Bucknell UP, 1979.
    • Argyros, Alexander. A Blessed Rage for Order: Deconstruction, Evolution, and Chaos. Michigan UP, 1991.
    • Barthes, Roland. “From Work to Text.” Textual Strategies: Perspectives in Post-Structuralist Criticism. Josue V. Harari, ed. Ithaca, NY: Cornell UP, 1979: 73-81.
    • —. The Pleasure of the Text. Richard Miller, trans. New York: Hill and Wang, 1975.
    • Benjamin, Walter. “On Language as Such and on the Language of Man.” Reflections. Peter Demetz, ed. Edmund Jephcott, trans. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1978: 314-332.
    • Bernstein, Charles. “Stray Straws and Straw Men” The L=A=N=G=U=A=G=E Book. Bruce Andrews and Charles Bernstein, eds. Carbondale: Southern Illinois UP, 1984.
    • Birkerts, Sven. The Electric Life: Essays on Modern Poetry. New York: William and Morrow, 1989.
    • Bourdieu, Pierre. Distinction: A Social Critique of the Judgement of Taste. Richard Nice, trans. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1984.
    • Davenport, Guy. The Geography of the Imagination. New York and San Francisco: Pantheon, 1981.
    • —. “Whitman a Century after His Death.” Yale Review 80 (4), October 1992: 1-15.
    • Dorn, Edward. Gunslinger. Durham and London: Duke UP, 1989.
    • Duncan, Robert. Bending the Bow. New York: New Directions, 1968.
    • Eagleton, Terry. The Ideology of the Aesthetic. Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1990.
    • Emerson, Ralph Waldo. The Early Lectures of Ralph Waldo Emerson. Vol. 1. Stephen Whicher and Robert Spiller, eds. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1959.
    • —. Essays and Lectures. Joel Porte, ed. New York: Library of America, 1983.
    • Finkelstein, Norman. “The Case of Michael Palmer.” Contemporary Literature 29 (4), Winter, 1988: 518-537.
    • —. The Utopian Moment in Contemporary American Poetry. Revised Edition. Lewisburg: Bucknell UP, 1993.
    • Forche, Carolyn. “Twentieth Century Poetry of Witness.” American Poetry Review, March / April 1993: 9-16.
    • Foucault, Michel. “The Discourse on Language.” The Archeology of Knowledge. A.M. Sheridan-Smith, trans. Irvington, 1972.
    • Gilbert, Roger. “Textured Information: Politics, Pleasure, and Poetry in the Eighties.” Contemporary Literature 33 (2), Summer 1992: 243-274.
    • Grenier, Robert. “Tender Buttons.” The L=A=N=G=U=A=G=E Book. Bruce Andrews and Charles Bernstein, eds. Carbondale: Southern Illinois UP, 1984: 204-207.
    • Guillen, Jorge. Affirmation: A Bilingual Anthology, 1919-1966. Julian Palley, trans. Norman, OK: U of Oklahoma P, 1968.
    • Harmon, William. “The Poetry of a Journal at the End of an Arbor in a Watch.” Parnassus 9.1 (1981): 217-232.
    • Johnson, Ronald. Ark: The Foundations. San Francisco: North Point Press, 1980. N.P.
    • —. ARK 50: Spires 34-50. New York: Dutton, 1984.
    • —. ARK: The Ramparts (Arches I-XVIII). Conjunctions 15, Spring / Fall 1990: 148-189.
    • —. “Interview.” Conducted by Barry Alpert. Vort 9, 1976 (Johnson / Davenport issue): 76-85.
    • —. “The Planting of the Rod of Aaron.” Northern Lights: Studies in Creativity. 2, 1985-86: 1-13.
    • —. Radi Os. Berkeley: Sand Dollar Press, 1977. N.P.
    • Logan, William. “Ancient Angers.” Review of Blood and Poetry, by Thomas Kinsella and Sun, by Michael Palmer. The New York Times Book Review, May 28, 1989: 24.
    • Longinus, Dionysus. On the Sublime. James A. Arieti and John M. Corssett, trans. New York and Toronto: Edwin Mellen Press, 1985.
    • Lyotard, Jean-Francois. Heidegger and “the jews”. Andreas Michel and Mark Roberts, trans. Minneapolis: Minnesotta UP, 1990.
    • —. “The Sublime and the Avant-Garde.” L. Liebmann, G. Bennington and M. Hobson, trans. The Lyotard Reader. Andrew Benjamin, ed. Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1989: 196-211.
    • McGann, Jerome J. “Contemporary Poetry, Alternate Routes.” Politics and Poetic Value. Robert von Hallberg, ed. U of Chicago P, 1987: 253-276.
    • —. “Response to Charles Altieri.” Politics and Poetic Value. Robert von Hallberg, ed. U of Chicago P, 1987: 309-313.
    • Nabokov, Vladimir. Pale Fire. New York: Berkeley Books, 1968.
    • Neruda, Pablo. “Some Thoughts on Impure Poetry.” Passions and Impressions. Margaret Sayers Peden, trans. New York: Farrar, Straus, Giroux, 1983: 128-129.
    • Packer, Barbara. “Browsing Happiness.” ADE Bulletin 100, Winter 1991: 26-30.
    • Palmer, Michael. “Conversation.” Interview by Lee Bartlett. Talking Poetry: Conversations in the Workshop with Contemporary Poets. Lee Bartlett, ed. New Mexico UP, 1987: 126-143.
    • —. “Counter-Poetics and Current Practice,” Pavement, VII (1987), 1-21.
    • —. “‘Dear Lexicon’: An Interview by Benjamin Hollander and David Levi Strauss.” Acts 5, vol. 2 (1), 1986: 8-36.
    • —. First Figure. San Francisco: North Point Press, 1984.
    • —. “Interview with Michael Palmer.” Conducted by Keith Tuma. Contemporary Literature 30 (1), Spring 1989: 1-12.
    • —. “Response to Birkerts.” Sulfur 19 (Spring 1987), 153-4.
    • —. Sun. San Francisco: North Point Press, 1988.
    • Perloff, Marjorie. The Dance of the Intellect. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1985.
    • —. Poetic License: Essays on Modernist and Postmodernist Lyric. Evanston, IL: Northwestern UP, 1990.
    • —. Radical Artifice: Writing Poetry in the Age of Media. Chicago: Chicago UP, 1991.
    • Quartermain, Peter. Disjunctive Poetics: From Gertrude Stein and Louis Zukofsky to Susan Howe. Cambridge UP, 1992.
    • Reinfeld, Linda. Language Poetry: Writing as Rescue. Baton Rouge & London: Louisiana State UP, 1992. Selinger, Eric. “I Composed the Holes: Reading Ronald Johnson’s Radi Os.” Contemporary Literature 33 (1), Spring 1992: 46-73.
    • Stevens, Wallace. The Collected Poems. New York: Vintage Books, 1982.
    • Turner, Frederick. Beauty: The Value of Values. Charlottesville and London: Virginia UP, 1991.
    • —. Natural Classicism: Essays on Literature and Science. New York: Paragon House, 1985.
    • Vallejo, Cesar. The Complete Posthumous Poetry. Clayton Eshleman and Jose Rubia Barcia, trans. Berkeley: California UP, 1978.
    • Waldrop, Rosmarie. “Calling All Ants.” Review of First Figure, by Michael Palmer. The New York Times Book Review, Dec. 1, 1985: 36.
    • Yenser, Stephen. “Open House.” Review of Sun, by Michael Palmer. Poetry. Aug. 1989: 295-301.

     

  • Historicizing Derrida

     

    Steven Helmling

    Department of English
    University of Deleware
    helmling@brahms.udel.edu

     

    Always historicize!

     

    –Fredric Jameson

     

    Accounts of Derrida stress his work’s diversity, and handle it in various ways; but none that I know of narrativizes this diversity, whether to relate it to its historical period, or to consider it as a corpus with a development, a record of internal tensions or contradictions–in short, a history–of its own. I want in this essay to initiate such an account, and my gambit will be to confront early Derrida with late (or later), which, for my purposes here, means Derrida before 1968 and after. Such a consideration of the whole Derrida phenomenon seems to me long overdue. Apart from the difficulty of Derrida’s work itself, various cultural circumstances have combined to frustrate or discourage such an account: in America, notoriously, we pay little attention to history generally, but a historically informed awareness of Derrida has been further hindered for us because Derrida’s work became available in translation here only in the late ’70s, so pre-’68 work mingled with post- in ways that blurred the differences between them. I want here to “historicize” not only Derrida’s oeuvre and career, but also its reception, its success and influence. If Derrida is some sort of sign of the (postmodern) times, what does that say not only about him, but about the times?

     

    One of Derrida’s latest books, Given Time, interrogates a problem that has been a chronic anthropological preoccupation in the West, “the gift”; and it devotes a chapter to Marcel Mauss’s classic “Essai sur le don.” Mauss was attracted to this theme, Derrida notes, because the gift seems to promise an exception to, or a suspension of, the normally inflexible laws of “economy.” In a system of exchange, the gift, the free offering made with no expectation of return, seems to gesture outside the system. Predictably, Derrida deconstructs Mauss’s construction of “economy,” and the binaries of “inside/outside” and “gift/sale” (or “/purchase”) sustaining it; his point is to force on Mauss a question Mauss evades: can the gift actually ever be a gift? For on Mauss’s own showing, gift-giving always implies obligations and paybacks (Mauss’s own preferred phrase, “gift-exchange,” says it all) that thus reinscribe “economy” itself–and only the more forcibly for its terms being implicit, internalized by the participants (here Derrida even deploys a quasi-Lacanian vocabulary), rather than rendered explicitly in the alienated workings of a cold cash nexus. Against the tendency of his own analysis, Mauss idealizes the “potlatch” of savages as a humane and generous alternative to the iron laws by which “economy” reigns over the human condition. (In thus apotheosizing “economy,” Mauss wistfully observes, capitalism and Marxism are one.)

     

    Mauss’s desire for an escape from “economy,” a transit “beyond” the structures that constrain the way we live, act, think, and feel, a break-out from the (to him) Hobson’s choice between Marxism and capitalism is a version of the central problematic of not only Derrida’s work, but of much “theory” generally (pragmatism, hermeneutics, Ideologiekritik, the foundationalist-antifoundationalist argument, and so on): if our language, our belief systems, our very subjectivities, are constructed by social forces, is it possible to get outside them, outside their system (or “economy”), to escape their constraints, to glimpse possibilities they exclude, foreclose, repress?

     

    Much “theory” (though by no means all) answers this question in the negative, especially since the disillusion following the late ’60s generally, and in France, mai, soixante-huit in particular. Despair is obligatory, a sign of political vigilance, when hope is constructed as “ideological”, a false and politically pernicious consolation–“an imaginary solution to a real contradiction.” Derrida himself is one of the most potent enforcers of this (postmodern) sense of entrapment in a “system” or “economy” of semantemes enforced by the “logocentrism” of “Western metaphysics” since Plato. (For many devotees of Derrida, this sense of a “system” we cannot escape is eclipsed by his potent thematic of that ineradicable differance no system can master; the politics of this reading of Derrida is another thing I will try to “historicize” at this paper’s close.) Constrained and conditioned by the “closures” of “system,” we find ourselves “inside” a vast social-historical-sexual-economic construct we cannot escape, cannot get “outside” of. There are variations on this theme, as when the “outside” is not the interdicted place we long for in vain, but rather the exile into which our “ideology” has cast some excluded “other”; then, Derrida more righteously “deconstructs” the values or valorizations (the good/bad binaries) sustaining the exclusion, to suggest that the “outside” does not exist, that “the other” is only by way of ideological distortion projected as “other,” and denied the status of “the same.” This is, politically, a more hopeful operation, but its bottom line remains that there is no “outside,” or if there were, it would only prove to be “the inside” again, more of “the same.” The “outside” remains a construction, perhaps a delusion, but in any case inaccessible. If theory were a prison-break movie, Derrida would be the guy who dopes out the architecture of the Big House in search of possible escape routes– the ventilation ducts, the sewer tunnels, the depth of the foundation walls, etc.–but since the early ’70s, the point of Derrida’s blueprint has been less to assist escape, than to demonstrate that escape is impossible. We’re all lifers here in the prison-house of language: we may deconstruct, but we can never escape, its determinations, its reason(s), its meanings.

     

    This is, of course, a thematic or problematic quite specific to our postmodern historical moment. A generation ago, in the time of Sartre and Beckett, “meaning” was the object of the existential hero’s quest (so was “identity”), rather than (as today) exactly what the quester is fleeing. (And yesterday’s quest was an affair of action rather than, as is the case today, of intellection–“critique,” “deconstruction,” “theory,” etc.–of making tracks, rather than assaying “traces.”) The “meaningless,” a.k.a. “the absurd,” was the donnee, the point de depart of any such quest; today, the “escape” from “meaning” is the point, the destination–and as impossible of attainment, usually, as the Holy Grail itself. (Derrida himself declares that “absurdity has always been in solidarity with metaphysical meaning” [Positions, 14].) In writers as otherwise diverse as Roland Barthes, Fredric Jameson, Richard Rorty, Jean-Francios Lyotard, Harold Bloom, as well as Derrida, yesterday’s “absurd” tends to become today’s “sublime,” a transport (variously a jouissance, as in Barthes, or a terror, as in Jameson) “beyond” representation into unrepresentabilty, unfigurability, unsymbolizability. (A recent collection of papers on deconstruction elevates Derridean differance–what always “escapes” or “exceeds,” defers and makes [self-] different, the mere “letter” of the text–to nothing less than [the volume’s title] The Textual Sublime.) 1

     

    There is a pathos to this distinctively “postmodern” predicament, and Derrida’s encounter with Mauss underlines its historicity. Mauss’s contradiction, and the ease with which he holds it, exemplifies an intellectual economy more elastic in his generation than is ours today. (Mauss’s dates: 1872-1950; “Essai sur le don” appeared in 1925.) For that matter, Derrida’s own career enacts a transit from a hopeful (even apocalyptic) sense of possibility to the steady-state pathos, the “frozen dialectic,” of his maturer writing: before ’68, Derrida’s “free play” and “infinite interpretation” were projects of liberation; and the excited (and exciting) prose of De la grammatologie (1967) conjured an imminent Aufhebung of writing over speech, implicitly (despite floridly elaborated reservations about Hegel) on the model of Hegel’s master and slave; the book’s program chapter bore the breathless title “The End of the Book and the Beginning of Writing.” The point: whereas Derrida has staged deconstruction for a couple of decades now as an “impossible” or “intransitive” project whose critique of logocentrism, since it is obliged to use logocentrism’s language, can only reinscribe logocentric closures, he initially proposed it (and many still take it) as something very different: a new and uniquely potent instrument for rending the veils of various kinds of (false) metaphysics, and hence, false consciousness–Derrida even acknowledged the lineage of Heideggerian Abbau and Destruktion–all of which sustained the early excitement about Derrida, and still sustains those who would use deconstruction “politically,” in the service of Ideologiekritik. 2

     

    I will shortly contrast these pre-’68 excitements with Derrida’s differently inflected projection of “writing” in later, post-’68 texts. But I pause here for some necessary caveats on procedure. As any reader of Derrida knows, there can never be any question of calculating Derrida’s “position” in a given text (or moment in or passage of a text), and its distance from the “position” assumed in some other (text, moment, passage). The preceding paragraph, for example, discerns a political prospect, a quasi-prophecy of imminent cultural and social change, in Derrida’s Of Grammatology, and I am about to argue that this promise is cancelled or reduced or sharply qualified in Derrida’s later writing, after 1968. But already, in a 1967 interview, Derrida advises, as if to prevent just the sort of reading I am proposing here, that

     

    one would be mistaken in coming to the conclusion of a death of the book and a birth of writing from that which is entitled “The End of the Book and the Beginning of Writing.” One page before the chapter which bears this title a distinction is proposed between closure and end. What is held within the demarcated closure may continue indefinitely. If one does not simply read the title, it announces precisely that there is no end of the book and no beginning of writing.(Positions, 13)

     

    One notes here how “end/beginning” shift to “death/birth” and back again; remembers, again, how silly one might have been, confronted with a locution like “The End of the Book and the Beginning of Writing,” to have read “simply” (die a thousand deaths!), and thereby to have missed that “it announces precisely that there is no end of the book,” etc. (there are moments when the pleasures of Derrida’s text can make you feel like William Bennett); and one reflects, again, that it would take a Borges to imagine the sort of alternative universe in which an interviewer asks Derrida a question in the form, “So, then, you are saying X, Y, and Z?” and Derrida replies, “Yes; exactly; quite so.”

     

    But let’s take Derrida’s hint, and reread the “Exergue” that precedes “The End of the Book and the Beginning of Writing”; a quotation in extenso will illustrate the difficulties as well as the allure facing the reader of, and a fortiori the commentator on, Derrida:

     

    this exergue must not only announce that the science of writing–grammatology–shows signs of liberation all over the world, as a result of decisive efforts. These efforts are necessarily discreet, dispersed, almost imperceptible; that is a quality of their meaning and of the milieu within which they produce their operation. I would like to suggest above all that, however fecund and necessary the undertaking might be, and even if, given the most favorable hypothesis, it did overcome all technical and epistemological obstacles as well as all the theological and metaphysical impediments that have limited it hitherto, such a science of writing runs the risk of never being established as such and with that name. Of never being able to define the unity of its project or its object. Of not being able either to write its discourse on method or to describe the limits of its field. For essential reasons: the unity of all that allows itself to be attempted today through the most diverse concepts of science and of writing, is, in principle, more or less covertly, yet always, determined by an historico-metaphysical epoch of which we merely glimpse the closure. I do not say the end. The idea of science and the idea of writing– therefore also of the science of writing–is meaningful for us only in terms of an origin and within a world to which a certain concept of the sign (later I shall call it the concept of sign) and a certain concept of the relationships between speech and writing, have already been assigned. A most determined relationship, in spite of its privilege, its necessity, and the field of vision that it has controlled for a few millenia, especially in the West, to the point of being now able to produce its own dislocation and itself proclaim its limits. (Grammatology, 4)

     

    Granted that the bulk of the passage emphasizes the difficulty, indeed the impossibility, of a “science of writing”; still, its opening move is to “announce” that this nascent grammatological science “shows signs of liberation all over the world”–and not merely as a Zeitgeist-effect, a mere epiphenomenon of some “historico-metaphysical” political unconscious, but “as a result of decisive efforts.” Nowhere does the passage take this back; rather it orchestrates a powerful rhythm, a sort of ideational surf, of breakers in and riptide out, between phrases whose implication is to hold open prospects of such a “liberation” (“fecund,” “necessary,” “overcome”) and others whose motion acknowledges the “technical and epistemological obstacles as well as all the theological and metaphysical impediments that have limited it hitherto.” Midway through, grammatology cannot “describe the limits of its field”; at the close, it can “itself proclaim its own limits”: from pathos to paean in under two hundred words. This is a prose concerned with largeness of effect, not precision of statement. The passage opens with “liberation all over the world,” and it closes with an affirmation, despite all the difficulties, of having arrived at a point where the speech/writing binary can at last, “now,” after so much history (“a few millenia”), “produce its own dislocation and itself proclaim its limits.”

     

    Between these two cathexes comes the distinction Derrida insists on in the interview, between “closure” and “end.” The motif is by now a familiar one: “closure” as a (spatial) domain that is finite but unbounded (however fissured and ruptured), as against a temporality in which change can occur, and ends and beginnings are possible. Beginnings and ends, Derrida implies here (for the moment), occur only within a closure; and a closure is that for which, again, there can be no beyond–even if this paragraph ends by affirming the possibility of proclaiming, within this closure, phonocentrism’s “limits.” In the following paragraph Derrida goes on to reaffirm his project as

     

    a way of thinking that is faithful and attentive to the ineluctable world of the future which proclaims itself at present, beyond the closure of knowledge[my italics].

     

    “The ineluctable world of the future” sounds positively anthem-like; but Derrida goes on (I cite the passage to its finish) to end on, again, a suitably dark and ominous note:

     

    The future can only be anticipated in the form of an absolute danger. It is that which breaks absolutely with constituted normality and can only be proclaimed, presented, as a sort of monstrosity. For that future world and for that within it which will have put into question the values of sign, word, and writing, for that which guides our future anterior, there is as yet no exergue. (Grammatology, 4-5)

     

    As I hope these lengthy quotations illustrate, Derrida’s prose does not occupy “positions” so much as it surges between them, toward and away from them, in a ceaseless agitation of assertion and qualification, saying and unsaying.

     

    So for the commentator on Derrida, it is less pertinent to speak of “positions” than of emphases, or effects–or, to borrow a phrase from a very uncharacteristic piece of Derrida’s (“The Ends of Man,” Margins, 109-36), “dominant motifs”–a phrase Derrida resorts to in an argument requiring broad-brush summarizations of Husserl, Heidegger and Sartre. 3 But to conclude this (I hope not overlong) digression: in speaking of Derrida before and after 1968, I must seem to speak of “effects” as if they had “thetic” force or substance, and the inevitable binaries that will present themselves will overflow the temporal bar (1968) supposed to separate them. My predicament will precisely illustrate Derrida’s “sublation” of Hegel, according to which stress falls less on what Aufhebung “cancels” than on what it “preserves,” what persists, and thus qualifies the passage, from thesis to antithesis to synthesis. I cannot, in short, state my case without overstating it–less because Derrida’s “statement” is inevitably more subtle than mine, than because Derrida invests so much (and so effectively) in problematizing, sometimes altogether evading, the logic of “statement.” Even to characterize his work as a protracted campaign against “the thetic” risks making it seem too single-minded, too serious, risks missing the play Derrida can make of his ingenious and interminable game of “Fort!” and “Da!,” with the thetic.

     

    So, to resume: I was speaking of Derrida before 1968, of his vigorous talk of “The End of the Book and the Beginning of Writing,” of “liberation all over the world,” etc. These “apocalyptic” pre-’68 excitements (to call them that), and their damping-down, a displacement of emphasis elsewhere–a shift in the “dominant motif,” indeed, from “end” to “closure”–is discernible in the essays (which date from both before ’68 and after) collected in 1972 in Marges de la philosophie. The richest example is the left-hand column (i.e., the part written by Derrida) of the volume’s opening meditation on the ambitions of deconstruction, “Tympan,” in which Derrida obliquely announces that his project henceforth must be conducted “obliquely,” as the hammer-bone of the inner ear beats obliquely on the eardrum (the “tympan”), both transmitting to it, but also protecting it against, the violences of sound. Deconstruction “on the oblique” must take care

     

    to avoid frontal and symmetrical protest, opposition in all forms of anti-, or in any case to inscribe antism and overturning, domestic denegation, in an entirely other form of ambush, of lokhos, of textual maneuvers. (Margins, xv; Between the Blinds, 153-4)

     

    A footnote here quotes a lyric of Artaud, but the prose of “Tympan” itself, full of puns, word-plays, paradoxes, etc., will already have advised the reader expecting the expository panache of Grammatology, or Writing and Difference, that here “an entirely other form of ambush, of lokhos, of textual maneuvers” prevails. (Lokhos is Greek for “ambush”; it puns, of course, on logos; also on another term at play here, Greek loxos, whence “luxation,” a “dislocation,” as of a bone out of its socket, a figure for the deconstructive aspiration to “dislocate” the joints or junctures, the articulations of philosophy as usual, to “displace philosophy’s alignment of its own types.”) One phrase in “Tympan,” a sentence fragment, summed up the point of this verbal play and quickly became a kind of slogan among devotees of deconstruction: “To write otherwise” (Margins, xxiv; Between the Blinds, 164).

     

    I have called “Tympan” a “meditation” on deconstruction’s ambitions, but “conjuration” might be a better word. Even more than our pre-’68 examples above, prose like “Tympan”‘s–Derrida invites us to call it “perverformative” (Post Card, 136)–less articulates an argument than it floats, and agitates, an array of motifs. Derrida’s practice of metaphor is calculated to maximize, as he often enough tells us, a multiplicity or dissemination of “meanings” that defeats “constative” habits of reading and writing. It is an index of Derrida’s uncanny success that so many of his readers are ready to grant that “to write otherwise,” Derrida-wise, is a large ambition, and one with “political” force. (There are dissenters, of course: Marxists like Jameson and Eagleton who consider that making “critique” simply a “kind of writing” reduces it, rather than specifying its uses relevantly; or Christopher Norris, who has been working for years to rescue Derrida from such merely “aestheticizing” or “pragmatist,” Richard-Rortyesque readings of him, arguing doggedly that this is not how Derrida asks to be read. 4)

     

    But the ambition “to write otherwise” incurs the infinite regress (mise en abime) always imposed by the question of the “other”: can any writing ever be written other-wise? Can any writing, however ingenious, ever exempt itself from the force of social (and other) constructionisms that dictate, that have “always already” dictated, the reinscription of “the same” in every effort at “otherwise-ness”? In the years to follow, Derrida’s writing will suffer the pathos of the inevitably negative answer to these questions. Increasingly, “writing” will appear as not merely another arena of, but as Derrida’s own inevitable and recurrent figure for, the fatedness of “repetition.”

     

    So whereas Derrida first proposed “writing” as a vehicle, or agent (not, of course, a “subject”), of liberation from the ideological programs inscribed in “speech,” he has for a couple of decades now, even while continuing to dissolve speech into writing, proceeded on (or toward) the sadder-but-wiser premise that those ideological programs had “always already” been “inscribed” in “writing,” too: a sort of dialectical backfire of Grammatology‘s critique of “phonocentrism,” for if speech is “always already” writing, then writing can neither supervene upon speech from “outside” it, nor operate a “sublation” of it from “the inside.” On the contrary, in the course of Derrida’s career from the middle ’60s to the present, “writing” has passed from at least potentially an agent (or figure) of change, revolution, ends-and-beginnings, to another figure or enforcer, another inscription, of the ideological closure in which we languish. It seems to me peculiar, and telling, that this massive ideological shift has gone unremarked by expositors of Derrida.

     

    Early and late, Derrida projects our condition as a vast text governed, indeed, constituted by an extensive network of tropes, figures, meanings–a “system,” or “economy,” to invoke two of Derrida’s usual figures for it. He sympathizes with the desire to escape this “economy,” and in his early work, he entertains a variety of hopeful possibilities for doing so. But after 1968, intellectual scruple compels him to renounce any such hope, for increasingly his every “deconstruction” of the “system” or “economy” of meanings within which we are constrained sees through the constraints only to reinforce them. It is as if Derrida’s way of honoring the desire to escape the ideological closures of logocentrism is to magnify the power, the totality, of those closures; as if the measure of deconstruction’s ambition can only be the impossibility of what it attempts. Derrida explains the matter quotably, and relates it to our question here of inside/outside, other/same, in a recent (or late) text, “Psyche: Inventions of the Other” (1987):

     

    the most rigorous deconstruction has never claimed . . . to be possible. . . . For a deconstructive operation possibility would rather be the danger, the danger of becoming an available set of rule-governed procedures, methods, accessible approaches. The interest of deconstruction, of such force and desire as it may have, is a certain experience of the impossible: that is . . . of the other–the experience of the other as the invention of the impossible, in other words, as the only possible invention. (Between the Blinds, 209)

     

    The one thing “impossible”–impossibility itself, as Derrida might say, with the knowing smirk at the problematic of “the itself”–is to utter the meaningless, to achieve the “outside” or “other” of that vast intellectual and ideological network (or “prison-house”) of semiosis, Derrida’s usual synecdoche for the entrapments of culture generally.

     

    That is why Derrida’s standard operating procedure requires a rigorous enforcement of this “economy” of meaning. No less than Freud does Derrida insist on meaning; no more than Freud does he permit anything not to “mean,” not to signify, and to signify everything that he, with all his formidable ingenuity, can coerce it into signifying. No figure of speech however casual, no idiom of expression however conventional, is allowed not to mean as much as he can make it mean. (In Given Time, he goes on for pages when Mauss writes, in an aside, “Je m’excuse” rather than “Excusez-moi,” and with no acknowledgement that in writing, as distinct from speech–and who more than Derrida has insisted on this distinction?–the imperative, “Excusez-moi,” would be anomalous.) The meaningless is, has “always already” been, ruled out ex (or ante) hypothesi, persisting spectrally only as “non-sense,” a sort of utopian, and therefore impossible possibility, a mirage projected by a noble but vain, and therefore pathos-laden desire. 5 Language is a game with rules, and Derrida makes himself a virtuoso of enforcing them with a “rigor” intended to shake the whole structure. Compare Habermas, for whom “the rules,” the self-normativizations of “language games,” are a last hope for (“communicative”) reason; for Derrida they figure the fatality of reason as such. Habermas makes reason a good, but difficult of attainment; Derrida makes it an evil, and impossible to escape. Derrida enacts the entrapments of “economy” only to protest them, of course. What a dance!–but dancing in chains, the spectacle our postmodern (i.e., post-’68) “libidinal economy” demands.

     

    I have so far “historicized” Derrida by positing a divide in his work, before and after 1968. As an enforcer of semantic “rigor,” though, as a meaning-cop, holding every text strictly to the letter of its letter (so to speak), Derrida could be as strict before 1968 as after. But whereas Derrida now blows the whistle on all “ideological” hope as such, back in his own more hopeful days he would enforce this operation much more selectively. Compare, for example, his 1963 essay on Foucault, “Cogito and the History of Madness” (Writing and Difference, 31-63) with his 1967 essay on Bataille, “From Restricted to General Economy: A Hegelianism Without Reserve” (Writing and Difference, 251-77). At stake in both is the question whether and how “escape” from a historically given “system” or “economy” of meanings might be possible. Foucault’s audacity, staking virtually all on the sheer force of an impassioned, lyrical and poetic prose, provokes Derrida to a wildly conflicted critique of Folie et deraison that aspires, both in argumentative sweep and as fancy writing, to out-Foucault Foucault–with questionable consequences: to me, at least, Derrida’s appropriation of Foucault’s points against Foucault seem rather to confirm than contest them (see especially Writing and Difference, 55-7).

     

    The essay on Bataille, by contrast, is much more sedate, a celebration, not a “deconstruction,” of Bataille’s notion of useless, non- (or anti-) utilitarian “expenditure.” (We Anglophones, with Oscar Wilde in our kit, might think Bataille a couple of generations out of date on this.) Derrida doesn’t remark that Bataille’s recommendation of “expenditure” as a deliverance from “restricted economy” to what Bataille calls “general economy” reinscribes “economy” in just the way that Derrida’s “rigor” disallowed with Mauss. For Bataille, all it takes to escape “economy” is a little sex and violence. Today, we’re likelier to regard sex and violence as “part of the problem,” to the extent that “the system” has routinized its co-optation or commodification of violence, sex, and deviance generally, marketing the high-gloss simulacrum even while making political capital out of moralizing against “the real thing”–hence, again, our “postmodern” despair: the potentially subversive is reinscribed within what it would subvert. But my point here is that the pre-’68 Derrida does not blow this particular whistle on Bataille. (Nor does Derrida bother noticing that the essays in question, in which Bataille conjures with war, blood, mutilation, and killing–all the Sadean virtues–appeared in print almost exactly contemporaneously with the advent of Hitler to power in 1933.) He credits Bataille’s originality–another version of getting “outside” the closures erected by precursors–as a “simulated repetition,” a sort of parodic exorcism of “the same” rather than (what Derrida later insists is all seeming originality can ever amount to) “repetition” pure and simple. (And doesn’t the word “simulated” reinscribe the issue of authorial intent, and thus the whole phenomenology of self-consciousness?–reinscribes them, furthermore, as part of the solution, rather than part of the problem.) 6

     

    How to account for these so-different responses to Foucault and Bataille? Derrida himself seems to invite an “anxiety of influence” speculation in his opening to “Cogito and the History of Madness,” paying fulsome homage, as “disciple,” to his “master” Foucault in preparation for the onslaught to follow. Granted, Foucault makes a fiercer Covering Cherub than Bataille, who, both as intellect and as writer, is a much smaller figure than either Foucault or Derrida (a fuller discussion would need to take up Foucault’s own homage to Bataille, and Derrida’s relation to it). But the “death of the author” motif in contemporary “theory,” and the bias against “subject-centered” paradigms generally, discourage any such psychologizing approach to “intertextuality” (even when the occasional exception can be as impressive as Barbara Johnson’s “The Frame of Reference: Poe, Lacan, Derrida”), 7 and I propose no such “anxiety of influence” reading here, if that must mean a lit-crit psychoanalysis that puts Derrida himself on the couch–though the taboo against authors on couches has recently been flouted by Derrida himself, in what I think his most extraordinary text to date, the autobiographical and confessional “Circumfession.” 8 Rather, I want to “historicize” Derrida’s creative anxieties, by inquiring into how the ambitions they power and betray are implicated in the larger, transindividual, historically determined “libidinal apparatuses” operative in our historical period–an approach that brings into play a tangle of questions sortable (loosely) as follows:

     

    1) “genre,” the “kind(s) of writing” in which Derrida invests or masks, cathects or decathects, the energies and anxieties of his ambition,

    2) underwriting these genre distinctions, the philosophy/literature binary that Derrida recurrently deconstructs and(thus) reaffirms, and so

    3) in place of Bloom’s one-on-one “agon” between Titanic individuals, that Streit der Fakultaten announced by Kant, the “contest of faculties” among whose current manifestations is “the emergence of that new type of discourse called theory” that Fredric Jameson takes as itself an important sign of “the postmodern,” 9 and in which Derrida is, on anyone’s account, so central a figure.

     

    The first “historicizing” index to note here is that Foucault is Derrida’s near-contemporary, whereas Bataille (1897-1962), five years dead by the time Derrida writes his essay, had long been in eclipse as a relic of a bygone era, a footnote to surrealism, a minor figure of the entre deux guerres. In Harold Bloom’s account of the “anxiety of influence,” the anxiety is about the past; Bloom ignores, and in places actually rules out, the anxiety generated by contemporaries. But Derrida’s most “anxious” responses are to contemporaries: Foucault, as we’ve seen; Lacan (whose construction of “system” Derrida challenges in Lacan’s axiom that “a letter always arrives at its destination”; Derrida’s quarrel with this seems to maintain the possibility of transit “beyond” or “outside” the system, but the “dead letter office” of La Carte postalecloses that aperture); Levinas (whose construction of the “other” as by definition “beyond” the closure of “our” paradigms, and incorporable within them only through a “violence of the concept,” poses the “beyond” or the “outside” not as a vain projection, but as a sacred mystery that is, alas, inaccessible–another way of putting the “outside” beyond reach).

     

    Why is Derrida’s creative anxiety stirred by contemporaries rather than, as in Bloom’s model, by precursors? Why does Derrida sweat bullets confronting a mere Foucault when he can be so cocky stepping into the ring with Hegel?

     

    One “historicizing” answer involves philosophy’s status in our current historical moment in the West. Here the “contest of faculties” motif appears, and with it the philosophy/literature opposition, to the extent that Bloom’s construction applies to poetry (i.e., “literature”), whereas Derrida’s territory is “philosophy.” For two centuries and more, Western culture has worried that poetry, or “imaginative” literature generally (and in most versions of this anxiety, religion, too), must lose power as modernity advances. The fortunes of philosophy in the modern world are similarly troubled, but philosophy, at least the tradition of it Derrida belongs to, has in our time found a potent new theme, the critique of “presence,” that permits a Derrida to challenge giants of the past like Hegel or Heidegger with all the sangfroid of a man shooting fish in a barrel. Not so with a Foucault, who not only shares the anti-“presence” ambition, but was one of its pioneers.

     

    The attack on “presence” is usually staged–less by Derrida than by those he has influenced (itself a telling symptom)–as a repudiation of the “enlightenment project.” From the point of view just elaborated, though, it can equally appear, quite contrary to its usual “postmodern” self-description, as the latest chapter in the story of the “enlightenment project” rather than a repudiation of that story and (as in Lyotard) of “story” itself: another version (or repetition) of the secularizing, antitheologizing drive from Voltaire’s “ecrasez l’infame” through Nietzsche’s “God is dead” to the proliferating terminalities or terminations (end of narrative, end of the author, end of the self, of “man,” of history, of philosophy, of ideology, totality, literature, ontotheology, etc.) variously announced, pronounced, denounced by so many “postmodern” voices. The later, post-’68 Derrida has treated this “end of” motif with mild sarcasm, as another symptom of the vain hope or expectation of a closure giving way to an aperture, a break or rupture out of the old into something new–though precisely this had been the, shall we say, “narrateme” encoded in Of Grammatology‘s opening formula, “The End of the Book and the Beginning of Writing”; earlier still, in the 1964 essay on Levinas, “Violence and Metaphysics,” Derrida not only evoked the “death of philosophy” motif, but gave it a Messianic inflection, with philosophy not merely dead or dying, but suffering its hour on the cross. In later Derrida, the closure of the old cannot be closed (ended)–“What is held within the demarcated closure,” as we have seen, “may continue indefinitely” (Positions, 13)–but remains perpetually, fatally, open, and thus tainting, compromising, “always already” assimilating or having assimilated the potentially new to its paradigms, its syntagms, its readings, its “reason(s).” And on this reading the contemporary chapter of the history of philosophy narrates not (its own official theme) the late twentieth-century “death” or “end” of philosophy, but rather its triumph among the disciplines–a narrative eventuality which philosophy must deny, for reasons that are themselves best understood historically; Derrida’s own condescension to the “death of philosophy” motif notably eschews any suggestion of philosophy’s triumph. 10

     

    But to resume what I have staged above as the “Foucault/Hegel,” problem, i.e., Derrida’s anxiety about contemporaries versus his composure about precursors: it is not merely that the author of “Cogito and the History of Madness” (1963) was a 33 year-old unknown, whereas the writing on Hegel, in Marges de la philosophie (1972; trans. 1981) and preeminently in Glas (1974; trans. 1986), was the work of the newest and most brilliant star, a man already widely proclaimed as a culture-hero. More pertinent, for Derrida’s continuing and changing ambitions, is that “Hegel” means “philosophy,” “Foucault” means “literature”; in Glas itself, for example, the left-hand column, on Hegel, proceeds expositorily, in sharp (and highly deliberate) contrast with the hyper-“perverformative” right-hand column on Genet. Such “inter”-effects, effects between philosophy and literature, are almost always at play when Derrida uses the double-column format; he gets like effects by putting similarly dissonant texts inside the covers of the same book–in The Truth in Painting, for example, between the material on Kant and Hegel in “Colossus” on the one hand, and the diary or postcard (“Envoi”-like) format of “Cartouches” and the dialogue of “Restitutions” on the other; or in Margins itself, the contrast between “Tympan” and such pieces as “White Mythology.”

     

    Here, again, a helpful marker is the 1968 divide that marks and inaugurates the break between the “apocalyptic” Derrida of Writing and Difference and Of Grammatology and the later “perverformer” whose deconstruction-from-within increasingly works to confirm rather than to rupture the closure of logocentrism. I have already associated this break with “writing” in two different senses, and it is necessary here to discriminate them sharply:

     

    1) “writing” as Derrida’s figure, first for the historical antagonist of “speech” and phonocentrism, later for the fated “reinscription” of phonocentric logocentrism itself;

    2) “writing” as a foregrounded feature of Derrida’s own prose, the sort of prose that results from the ambition “to write otherwise”–the ambition, in short, to write in what is ordinarily taken to be a “literary” rather than a “philosophical” way.

     

    These two very different senses of Derridean “writing”–“writing” as grammatological theme, “writing” as “perverformative” practice–encode the philosophy/literature binary as it is enacted in the course of Derrida’s career, in his passage from a writing that is philosophical and about philosophy (“against” philosophy, of course, but in critical, i.e., philosophical ways), to a writing that calls a “literary” kind of attention to itself, and thus both stylistically and thematically, even (almost) “thetically,” announces the dissolution of “philosophemes” into their textual determinants–of “philosophy,” that is to say, into “literature.” More paradoxically, this “writing” also offers–though without quite claiming–to dissolve “the thetic” itself into stylistic “textual effect,” what Derrida variously calls the “tone” and/or demarche of a text (“what [the text] does as much as what [it] says, in [its] ‘acts,’ if you will, no less than in [its] objects” [translation altered]). 11

     

    It is “writing” in this second sense, the kind of “perverformativity” we have glanced at it in “Tympan,” that I want to turn to now, interrogating and, where possible, “historicizing” its motivations and its success–the work it does not only for Derrida, but also for us, to the extent that “we” subscribe to (or for that matter, reject) what Derrida makes it entail.

     

    And I’m afraid my first answer can’t help sounding a bit moralistic: “perverformativity” diffuses the political application, or ambition, of Derrida’s work. Recall the metaphorics of “Tympan”: to “stick it” in philosophy’s ear, to rupture philosophy’s eardrums, to deafen it, or at least leave its ears ringing, to put its bones out of joint, even to put it to sleep with excurses on obsolete printing technology–these wittily sadistic-sounding proposals stop well short of murdering their victim wholesale, or even attempting to convert (or “reeducate”?) him. (Him? Yes.) “Tympan” lowers, or registers a lowering, of the stakes for philosophy, and for “critique” at large, from the high ambitions projected in Of Grammatology; in it, writing is an act of resistance against the prevailing cultural surround, but only of resistance; there is no longer any promise, as in Of Grammatology, of writing as (at the very least) a sign of revolution, of change, of “the end of the book,” or of metaphysics, logocentrism, phonocentrism, or anything else, let alone for “the beginning” of something new, different, “other.” More crucially: in “Tympan,” the “writing” in question is Derrida’s own writing, or Derrida-esque writing (if there is such a thing)– writing that is written “otherwise.” A special writing, an elite or avant-garde writing, a writing whose whole point is to be different from (or “other” to) writing in general, writing at large, writing-as- usual–precisely not, in short, a gramme about which a “grammatology” would be possible. (Compare the cognate wobble in the axiomatics of Paul de Man between “language as such” and specifically “literary language” as distinct from other kinds.)

     

    It seems a version of a thematic as old, in Western Culture, as the book of Job, if not of the Iliad, the conflict between collective salvations and individual ones. In Derrida, this shift between two senses of writing has, as “textual effect,” consequences encoding a politics. The Aufhebung of speech/writing proposed in Derrida’s early work was projected as belonging to the future (or at minimum, a future). By contrast, the point of “perverformativity” is its immanence in the “letter,” ideally indissociable from, and hence to be consumed in, the “present” of the reading experience itself, without any remainder of “the thetic” or any “thematization” importing anything for, or importable into, a future. The future, the hyphenated Heideggerian Zu-Kunft becomes, as we have already seen anticipated in the “Exergue” of Grammatology, the future anterior, a “will have been,” a future determined by what preceded it, by the logic of “event” and of “outcome”–a continuity of present and future that makes the future, inescapably, “the same” as the present, thus foreclosing any possibility of change, revolution, rupture, etc., that would make it “different” from or “other” to the present. (Even in Derrida’s pre-’68 work, though, a similar continuity or “same”-ness obtains between past and present. In the early work the word “history” and its cognates– “historicity,” etc.–appear much more frequently than later, but with curiously unhistorical import, seeming to figure, rather like T.S. Eliot’s “ideal order,” as a gigantic spectre the closure of whose seamless simultaneity–its contemporary weight or force, not to say its transtemporal “presence”–is much more to the point than the narrative courses of its changes, developments, contradictions, ends-and-beginnings. Hence in any exercise at “historicizing Derrida,” Derrida must generally be the object, almost never the subject, of that participle.)

     

    Later Derrida’s foreclosure of the future (“perverformative” and “thetic” at once) is also a foreclosure of history and of “dialectic” itself–which prompts such politically committed critics as Eagleton and Jameson to dismiss Derrida as apolitical, or depoliticizing. Derrida’s post-’68 ecriture makes the verb of deconstruction, deconstruire, no less than ecrire itself, a verbe intransitif; and the flamboyant jouissance of Derrida’s writing adds insult (for Marxists, bourgeois insult!) to the injury of its antidialectical Weltanshauung. 12 Politically oriented critics can only regard such “perverformativity” as a (false) compensation for the no-exit condition it deconstructs–an “imaginary solution to a real contradiction,” and thus “ideological” in the classic “false consciousness” sense. Many others, though, experience Derrida’s post- ’68 writing as political, because (or to the extent that) they hear in its tone a clear protest against this steady-state world. To recur to the prison-house metaphor, the argument here is between those who think Derrida has settled too complacently into a deluxe, V.I.P.-prisoner suite, and those who hear in his work an insistent rattle of the tin cup against the bars. 13

     

    There are some cross-purposes to untangle in this difference over Derrida. The later Derrida’s diminution or renunciation of political ambitions has indeed, I think, been masked or compensated by the manifest enlargement of his ambitions as writer: the darkening of the theme of writing has been obscured (as well as compensated) by Derrida’s prose style, by his practice of writing. This, together with the tone of protest, continuous between early Derrida and late, has on the one hand kept Derrida’s fans from seeing how Derrida’s political import has been displaced after 1968, and on the other blinded his politically-minded critics to such politics as his pre-’68 work did actually entertain. But even granting that Derrida himself shies away from putting deconstruction to political use, it seems churlish not to acknowledge that his method, in other hands, has proved enormously useful for a variety of oppositional criticisms–feminist, gay/lesbian/queer, minority, postcolonialist, etc. 14

     

    But I would grant that “perverformativity” is indeed “ideological” to the extent that it functions as a response, and implicitly a kind of solution, to the confining “economy” of meaning that Derrida so compulsively elaborates and protests. Earlier avant- gardes–the “ideal type” here would be Dada–sought to escape the oppression of semiosis by assaying a direct lunge out of it, into non-sense; Derrida’s effort is to “shake” or “make tremble” (sollicitare) the structure of meaning from within, exploiting its own differance, or “dissemination,” to multiply meanings, to invoke every possible sense of a word against (or “on the oblique” to) the others, to make these possibilities stymie (if not altogether cancel) each other, thus short-circuiting the regulating mechanisms of “context” whereby we ordinarily collaborate in meaning’s tyranny over us by recognizing which of a word’s senses to admit and which to reject. Wayne Booth once summarized interpretive tact in the formula “knowing when to stop”; Derrida’s game is to refuse to “know” any such thing. (One thing there is no “end of” in Derrida’s purview is deconstruction itelf: in principle, at least, deconstruction never stops.)

     

    What I want to adduce here is the link (antithetical, if not dialectical) between this “shaking” of meaning and the “rigorous” enforcement of it that we have seen Derrida operating on Mauss. “Perverformativity” exempts Derrida from the penalty Derrida enforces on Mauss. To put it another way, the “economy” of meaning is something Derrida may enforce against a particular writer, or against “meaning” itself. As meaning-cop, Derrida holds a Mauss, or a Foucault, to the letter of their letter, but enacts his “perverformative” style of ecriture, of “writing otherwise,” to liberate itself/himself (as well as a few personal idols of his for whom he cuts slack, e.g., Nietzsche, and some of Heidegger) from the letter. I am trying to specify a signal contradiction in Derrida: if “meaning” is something we want to evade, we cannot, because “meaning” is inevitable; if on the other hand, it is something we want to achieve (either to state some “meaning” of our own with precision, or to ascribe, via interpretation, some “meaning” to a text), we cannot, because “meaning” is impossible. You can neither say what you mean (or mean what you say), nor can you speak (or remain silent) without “meaning” something. I regret any implication here of the expose, of ideological unmasking; my purpose is not to hoist Derrida with the petard of this “contradiction,” but to point out (by way of “historicizing” Derrida) that Derrida is very much in the style of our postmodern period in conducting himself on the premise that a critic’s job is not to resolve or mediate contradictions, but to dramatize them–which, in practice, often means enlarging, even exaggerating them.

     

    However–and this next point does take on something of the ideological expose–it seems to me that this contradiction, and such political force as it registers, is too easily lost on many devotees of Derrida and of deconstruction. Derrida’s warmest admirers too often prize his “perverformativity” as enacting that “free play” (“infinite interpretation” as the end of definitive or authoritative control of language) proposed programmatically in Derrida’s pre-’68 work, without seeing Derrida’s decisively different construction, after ’68, of the constraints (the closure) within which that “free play” prolongs itself. Such connoisseurs of Derrida’s “perverformativity,” such celebrants of Derrida’s ingenious dancing in chains, see the dance, but fail to see the chains. They foreground the motifs of differance and “dissemination” triumphally, to eclipse the obdurate “prison-house” closures of metaphysics against which Derrida protests–as if to “deconstruct” the illusions of semiosis and identity thinking were to anull them as well in one fell (deconstructive) swoop; as if abolishing ideological closure were as simple as calling false consciousness “false.” Ravished by the pleasures, even les jouissances, of the encounter with Derrida’s writing, such readings mean to honor the hopes of ’60s counter-culture politics, that revolution and the pleasure principle might join forces in a permanently liberating coalition. But it is not simple “Left puritanism” to reject such a valorization of Derrida as making everything, and politics especially, too easy.

     

    Whether Derrida’s own practice makes it too easy is a judgment for the eye of the beholder. For myself, the later Derrida’s “perverformativity” does often seem facile–not “easy,” exactly (not in prose like that!), but complacent, even insouciant, and, often, arrogantly so. (Nobody takes it as a form of critical modesty.) For some people, I am here merely confessing that my literary/intellectual palate is too coarse for any fine and discriminating apprehension of the exquisitely subtle and nuanced velleities of Angst agitating Derrida’s writing. Perhaps so: the texts of Derrida’s that have moved me most–“Envois” and “Circumfession”– are those in which such anxieties are rather manifest than latent. As to politics, Derrida’s work seems to me always to be at least allegorically political–not merely susceptible of, but quite soliciting, a political reading; this, indeed, is my chief, almost my only, way of being interested in it. And (to put it in language that revives phenomenologies deconstruction proscribes), I take this political allegorizing as entirely conscious on Derrida’s part: it seems the better part of valor to be circumspect in diagnosing in Derrida’s work the symptoms of any particular unconscious, but of “the political unconscious” most (almost) of all.

     

    Manifestly, Derrida’s work delivers the questions, conflicts, contradictions of aesthetics and/against politics to an impasse. This impasse–our need for it, our “compulsion to repeat” it in our reading and writing of “critique,” our imperative to enlarge, augment, amplify it, ratchet it up to the highest possible pitch of contradiction and paradox, cathect it, in short, to the max–all this, too, is very much a “period” phenomenon, a sign of the postmodern times generally, and of the “emergence of that new type of discourse called theory” in particular. Derrida evokes the force of that impasse most acutely in the conflict between what seems to me the genuine, even if “aesthetic,” politics of his work, and the still-potent political moralism exemplified by, say, a Terry Eagleton. But here, to “historicize” a hard contemporary question can only be to acknowledge, not to answer it.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Hugh J. Silverman and Gary E. Aylesworth, eds., The Textual Sublime: Deconstruction and its Differences (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1990).

     

    2. “Metaphysics” as analogy of or synecdoche for “ideology” seems to me the self-evident premise of any “political” deconstruction, though only Michael Ryan, so far as I know, has made this premise explicit, in Marxism and Deconstruction: A Critical Articulation (Baltimore and London: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1982), and not until chapter 6, “The Metaphysics of Everyday Life”: “The deconstruction of metaphysics can be integrated with the critique of ideology because metaphysics is the infrastructure of ideology” (117). For more bibliography on the politics of deconstruction, see note 4 below.

     

    3. “The Ends of Man,” originally a lecture, is pointedly dated “May 12, 1968”; in the course of its printed version Derrida specifies that the lecture was written in April, 1968 (“the weeks of the opening of the Vietnam peace talks and the assassination of Martin Luther King” [Margins, 114]), as the crisis that would culminate in May was developing. The piece has an interest simply for having been written right at the moment that I have evoked as a sort of temporal hinge or fulcrum for thinking of Derrida’s work in before-and-after terms. “The Ends of Man” seems to me “uncharacteristic” because (at least in its opening sections [Margins, 111-23]) it is one of the very few texts in which Derrida himself mounts a historical (or historicizing) argument. His point is to correct or reproach Sartre (without naming Sartre) and others for their “mistinterpretation” of Heidegger’s “fundamental ontology” as a kind of “humanism”; but he also accounts for this “misinterpretation” historically, as a “first reading” (since which “some progress has been made” [Margins, 119]), in terms of Heidegger’s reception in France, the dates at which his various books were translated, and the development of Heidegger’s own career (Derrida here subscribes to the notion of the Heideggerian “Kehre”), as well as the reception in France of phenomenology generally–the influence of Kojeve’s introduction of Hegel, the accessibility or not, and the state of understanding, of various works of Husserl’s, the discovery of Marx’s 1844 manuscripts, etc. It is a kind of argument Derrida usually takes pains to avoid making: trafficking in “dominant motifs,” or “the empiricism of [taking a] cross-section” (Margins, 117)–as opposed to his famously “rigorous” practice of “close reading”– offends his intellectual conscience (to put it in terms Derrida would discountenance).

     

    4. Jameson wrote respectfully, or warily, about Derrida in The Prison-House of Language (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1971), but has since sounded dismissive, treating Derrida only in glancing asides. Eagleton lumps Derrida together with Barthes as a bourgeois hedonist luxuriating in a bath (or wetdream) of jouissance; see, e.g., “Frere Jacques: the Politics of Deconstruction” (1984), rept. in Against the Grain (London and New York: Verso, 1986), 77-87. As for Norris, see Derrida (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1987), or any of his books with the word “deconstruction” in the title; but he has argued his anti-anti-foundationalist view of Derrida elsewhere as well, e.g., What’s Wrong With Postmodernism (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1990); Spinoza and the Origins of Modern Critical Theory (Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1991); Uncritical Theory: Postmodernism, Intellectuals, and the Gulf War (Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1992). Rorty’s best-known essay on Derrida is “Philosophy as a Kind of Writing” (1978; rpt. in Consequences of Pragmatism: Essays 1972-1980 [Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1982], 90-109); but see also “From Ironist Theory to Private Allusions: Derrida,” in Contingency, Irony, and Solidarity (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1989), 122-37; and “Deconstruction and Circumvention” (1984), in Philosophical Papers, 2 vols. (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1991), 2:85-106, “Two Meanings of ‘Logocentrism’: A Reply to [Christopher] Norris” (1989), ibid., 107-18; and “Is Derrida a Transcendental Philosopher?” (1989), ibid., 119-128. Also to be noted in such a summary as this: Michael Ryan, Marxism and Deconstruction (see note 2 above) and “The Marxism-Deconstruction Debate in Literary Theory, New Orleans Review 11, 1 (Spring 1984), 29-6; Frank Lentricchia, “History and the Abyss,” in After the New Criticism (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1980), 157-210 (especially 164-88); Gayatri C. Spivak, “Revolutions That As Yet Have No Model,” in Diacritics 10, 4 (Winter, 1980), 29-49; Stanley Aronowitz, “Towards a New Strategy of Liberation,” in The Crisis in Historical Materialism: Class, Politics and Culture in Marxist Theory (South Hadley: J.F. Bergin, 1981), 123-36; Edward W. Said, “Reflections on American ‘Left’ Literary Criticism,” in The World, the Text, and the Critic (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1983), 158-77; Barbara Foley, “The Politics of Deconstruction,” in Rhetoric and Form: Deconstruction at Yale, Robert Con Davis and Ronald Schleifer, eds. (Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1985), 113-34; Jonathan Arac, Critical Geneologies: Historical Situations for Postmodern Literary Studies (New York: Columbia Universty Press, 1987), 299-305.

     

    5. John D. Caputo finds the inverse of the structure I indicate here: “meaning” as a boon cruelly denied to certain bits of excluded language that have been denigrated as “nonsense,” and which Derrida appoints himself to dignify with meaning, even to “liberate” into meaning. See “The Economy of Signs in Husserl and Derrida: From Uselessness to Full Employment,” in John Sallis, ed., Deconstruction and Philosophy: The Texts of Jacques Derrida (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1987), 99-113; the protopolitics of Caputo’s argument (“Liberation is what I think Derrida is all about . . .” [108]) are clear in his title. Apropos of the pre-’68/post-’68 divide, however, I’ll note that Caputo argues from Derrida’s pre-’68 La Voix et le phenomene, the passage in which Derrida finds sense in phrases (“green is or,” “abracadabra”) that Husserl had cited as “nonsense.” When Caputo read his paper at a 1985 conference with Derrida in attendance, Derrida objected to the word “liberation” from the floor, “to the extent,” Caputo explains, “that it implied optimism, utopianism, some kind of metaphysics of the future in which all will be free” (112n10).

     

    6. For some later “problematizations” of these matters, see Derrida on “iterability” in “Signature Event Context” (1971) and “Limited Inc a b c…” (1977) in Limited Inc, trans. Samuel Weber and Jeffrey Mehlman (Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1988), especially 70-7. (“Signature Event Context” also appears in Margins, 307-30.) Also cf. remarks on “parody” in the sections of Spurs: Nietzsche’s Styles (1978; trans. Barbara Harlow, [Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1979]), called “Simulation” (66-71) and “Positions” (95-101).

     

    7. (Yale French Studies 55/56 [1977], 457-505; rpt. in John P. Muller and William J. Richardson, eds., The Purloined Poe: Lacan, Derrida, and Psychoanalytic Reading [Baltimore and London: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1988], 213-51).

     

    8. “Circumfession” is Derrida’s contribution to Geoffrey Bennington and Jacques Derrida, Jacques Derrida (Chicago; University of Chicago Press, 1993). My review of this and a few other Derrida books–Given Time, Between the Blinds: A Derrida Reader, and Acts of Literature, ed. Derek Attridge (Routledge: New York and London, 1992)–is forthcoming in Kritikon. I will add here that I read Derrida’s “Interpreting Signatures Nietzsche/Heidegger” (in Diane P. Michelfelder and Richard E. Palmer, eds., Dialogue and Deconstruction: The Gadamer-Derrida Encounter [Albany: SUNY Press, 1989], 58-71) as, in part, an “anxiety of influence” speculation.

     

    9. Fredric Jameson, Signatures of the Visible (New York and London: Routledge, 1992), 68; see also Postmodernism, or, the Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism (Durham: Duke University Press, 1991), 391-9.

     

    10. One of the more interesting things I’ve read on these questions–“historicizing” the “end of philosophy” motif as an affair of Hegel-and-after, i.e., as “modern,” not “postmodern”–is Stephen Melville, Philosophy Beside Itself: On Deconstruction and Modernism (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1986).

     

    11. On “tone,” see “Of an Apcalyptic Tone Recently Adopted in Philosophy,” trans. John P. Leavey, Jr., Oxford Literary Review 6, 2 (1984), 3-37; for “demarche,” see “Freud’s Legacy” in The Post Card, 295. In the passage I’ve quoted on “demarche,” the translation (by Alan Bass) has the pronouns referring to Freud, but they can also refer to “the text,” as in my altered translation. Note that “tone” and “demarche” are issues raised in nearly contemporaneous texts: “Of an Apocalyptic Tone” began as a lecture in 1980, the same year that saw the publication of the writings on Freud in La Carte postale; elsewhere, both before and after, Derrida largely avoids discussion of such issues, perhaps because they complicate, or imperil, his procedural adherence to “the letter” of whatever text he is considering. There is also, of course, a problem of theorizing “tone” without raising (phonocentric) issues of “voice.” Another text of this period, Spurs: Nietzsche’s Styles (1978), affects to foreground “the question of style,” but only, it turns out, to provide, via etymology (“stylus,” pen), an access to the metaphorics of the phallus, sexual difference, “the woman,” etc.

     

    12. For more on this dilemma of “Left puritanism,” see my “Marxist Pleasure: Jameson and Eagleton,” in Postmodern Culture, v. 3, n. 3 (May 1993). A slightly expanded version, adding some pages on the issue of postmodernism, appears in Eyal Amiran and John Unsworth, eds., Essays in Postmodern Culture (Oxford university Press: New York, 1993), 239-63.

     

    13. Michael Ryan notes Derrida’s increasing hospitality to Marxism over the course of his career: having first dismissed it as a “closed” and “totalizing” dogmatic “system” of official Soviet ideology (Ryan’s villain here is less the PCF than Lenin himself), Derrida later welcomes the possibility of an “open” or “critical” Marxism with aims and methods compatible with his own (Marxism and Deconstruction, xiv-xv, 45-6).

     

    14. For a brief but incisive survey of these, see “The Story of Deconstruction,” chapter 2 of Jay Clayton, The Pleasures of Babel: Contemporary American Literature and Theory (New York: Oxford University Press, 1994), 32-60.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Derrida, Jacques. Between the Blinds: A Derrida Reader. Ed. Peggy Kamuf. NY: Columbia UP, 1991.
    • —. Given Time: I. Counterfeit Money. Trans. Peggy Kamuf. Chicago: Chicago UP, 1992. Originally Donner le temps. Paris: Editions Galilee, 1991.
    • —. Margins of Philosophy. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago UP, 1982. Originally Marges de la philosophie. Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1972.
    • —. Of Grammatology. Trans. Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak. Baltimore and London: Johns Hopkins UP, 1976. Originally De la Grammatologie. Editions de Minuit, 1967.
    • —. Positions. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago UP, 1981. Originally Positions. Editions de Minuit, 1972.
    • —. The Post Card: From Socrates to Freud and Beyond. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago UP, 1987. Originally La Carte Postale: De Socrate a Freud et au-dela. Paris: Flammarion, 1980.
    • —. Spurs: Nietzsche’s Styles. Trans. Barbara Harlow. Chicago UP, 1979. Originally Eperons: Les Styles de Nietzsche. Flammarion, 1978.
    • —. Writing and Difference. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago UP, 1978. Originally L’Ecriture et la difference. Paris: Editions de Seuil, 1967.

     

  • Three Poems

    Alice Fulton

    Department of English
    University of Michigan
    alice.fulton@um.cc.umich.edu

     

    ==

     

         It might mean immersion, that sign
                 I've used as title, the sign I call a bride
         after the recessive threads in lace ==
         the stitches forming deferential
                         space around the firm design.
                                 It's the unconsidered
    
         mortar between the silo's bricks == never admired
                                 when we admire
         the holdfast of the tiles (their copper of a robin's
                 breast abstracted into flat).
    
                 It's a seam made to show,
         the deckle edge == constructivist touch.
                 The double equal that's nowhere to be found
                                 in math.  The dash
                 to the second power == dash to the max.
    
         It might make visible the acoustic signals
         of things about to flame.  It might
    
                   let thermal expansion be syntactical.  Let it
         add stretch
    
                                 while staying reticent, unspoken
         as a comma.  Don't get angry == protest == but a
    
         comma seems so natural, you don't see it
         when you read: it's gone to pure
         transparency.  Yes but.
                                         The natural is what
    
         poetry contests.  Why else the line == why stanza == why
                 meter and the rest.  Like wheels on snow
    
                         that leave a wake == that tread in white
                                 without dilapidating
                                 mystery == hinging
                         one phrase to the next == the brides.
    
         Thus wed == the sentence cannot tell
         whether it will end or melt or give
    
                          way to the fabulous == the snow that is
         the mortar between winter's bricks == the wick that is
    
                                 the white between the ink
    
        

     

    Southbound in a Northbound Lane

     

         A fetish is a story masquerading as an object.
                                       --Robert Stoller
    
         Her anatomically-correct smile 
         turned to frown when she turned
         upside down:  the inflatable naked woman
         the student body tossed, cum laude,
         through the graduating bleachers.
         Like gossip, a bubble bred for turbulence,
                         she tumbled
         to the Ph.D.'s, who stuffed her
         under their seats. 
                 I think the trick to falling is never landing
                 in the palm of someone's hand.
         The lyric, which majored in ascent,
         is free now to labor and cascade.
         What goes up must ==
                                         Waterfalling
         means the story visits tributaries
         at a distance from itself.  Consider
         what it takes to get us off
         the ground:  what engines laying waste
         to oil.  I'd rather hit the silk
         from a span
         and let gravity enhance my flight.
         Though the aerodynamics of jets are steadystate
         and can be calibrated,
         I'd rather trust a parachute,
                         which exists in flux and can't be touched
         by mathematical fixations.
                 In what disguise will she arrive --
                 whose dissent is imminent yet unscripted --
                 offensive as necessary?
                 Whose correct context is the sky.
         Arrive like something spit out of a prism
         in a primary tiger bodice.  Be modern
         as an electronic vigil light, precisely
         delicate as nylon,
         the ripstop kind, that withstands
         40 pounds of pull per inch.
                 Spectators, if we jump together,
                 we'll bring the bleachers down.
         "I was frightened.  My flesh hissed
         and I thought I'd perished,
         but the sensation of descent vanishes
         once the body stops accelerating.
         It's astonishing how nothingness
         firms up.  Air takes on mass.
         The transparent turns substantial.
         I stretched out on that dense blue bed 
         until the canopy expanded
         like a lung shoved from my body,
         plucking me off the nothing matt.
         What held me up was hard to glimpse
         but intimate as mind or soul.
         I sensed it was intensely friendly.
         I almost thought it cared for me."
                 If you can't love me, let me down gently.
                 If you can't love me, don't touch me.
         If we descend together
         like Olympic skydivers or snowflakes    
         we can form patterns in freefall. 
         Like a beeswarm, we can make a brain
         outside the body.
         When falling is a means of flying,
         the technique is to release.
                 How many worlds do you want,
                 my unpopular bodhisattva?
                 Let's sneak one past the culture's
                 fearless goalies, be neither one
         nor the other, but a third
         being, formerly thought de trop.
         Before I throw my body off, my enemy
         of the state, I'm going to kneel
         and face the harsh music
         that is space.
    
        

     

    Call the Mainland

     

         Nature hates a choir.  Have you noticed
                 the lack of chorus in the country every dawn?
         The birds spent the night looking down on earth
                 as that opaque, unstarred space. 
         The vivacious soundscape they create at day 
                 must be their amazement
         that the planet's still in place.
    
         No wait.  Time out and whoa.  There I go --
         coating the birds' tones with emotion,
         hearing them as my own.  I know, I know. 
    
                 Yet I can't say birds aren't feeling
         in their hollow bones some resonance of glad
                         that night has passed.
                 I can't claim their hearts don't shake
         when the will to live another day
                         in the cascade of all that is
                                 is strong.  Emotion
    
                  makes its presence felt in flesh.
         Maybe you've noticed -- the body speeds
         its reflexes and is moved.  It moves.  It makes
    
                  the heart, lungs, and gut
                    remember their lives
         like sleepers between bouts of sleep.
                  While more serene delights
         are intellect selective, without cardiac effect:
                    the mind sparks
         at a Borges story or elegant proof in math,
                 a bliss that doesn't shift
                         across the blood-
         brain barrier.  Such heady pleasures
                  are never for the birds.
                               To be key
         rather than bit player, of independent means -- 
         to sound your own agenda in polyphonic overlay
         as day takes shape == as day takes shape
    
                 the birds begin their final take.
         They'll never know themselves as symbols
                 of the sublime.  Transcendent
         messy shrines == whose music won't stoop
                   to unison or climax:
                   tell them I said hi.

     

  • Clockwork Education: The Persistence of the Arnoldian Ideal

    Geoffrey Sharpless

    Department of English
    University of Pennsylvania

     

    For boys follow one another in herds like sheep, for good or evil; they hate thinking and rarely have any settled principles. . . . it is the leading boys for the time being who give the tone to all the rest, and make the School either a noble institution for the training of Christian Englishmen, or a place where a young boy will get more evil than he would if he were turned out to make his way in London streets, or anything between these two extremes.

     

    –Tom Brown’s School-days, 151

     

    “What’s it going to be then, eh?”

     

    –A Clockwork Orange, 1

     

    Critics conventionally position Burgess’s A Clockwork Orange within the sub-genre of futuristic dystopias without considering its nostalgia for a version of masculinity best understood as typical of the Arnoldian public school. This misprision is natural, since the Russianized argot and Dionysian “ultra-violence” of Alex the droog do not immediately evoke Tom Brown’s School-days–or any other portrait of the public school boy. Nonetheless, juxtaposing these narratives, which are separated by more than a hundred years, throws important illumination on A Clockwork Orange, and redirects critical attention to the persistence of Arnoldian masculinity in twentieth-century British literature.

     

    “Arnold’s Rugby” achieved such astonishing conceptual closure over elite education that it must be considered a unique chapter in the history of Western culture. Rightly or wrongly, Thomas Arnold is usually credited with four innovations in pedagogical praxis: the introduction of competitive sports, uniform dress, and science in the curriculum, and an emphasis in schools on “moral scrutiny” or “character.” Thomas Hughes emphasizes this last feature, writing in Tom Brown’s School-days, “In no place in the world has individual character more weight than at a public school” (TBS, 151). Whether Rugby School ever existed as portrayed by Hughes, or any of his adherents, or even whether Thomas Arnold would have considered it faithfully Arnoldian is moot. The artistic, intellectual, legislative, commercial, and martial activity of its broad alliance of graduates–the ideal schoolboys of “Arnold’s Rugby”–became an unsurpassed tool by which to produce and measure masculinity and culture, as well as a means to govern their mutuality. This class of public school males succeeded, for generations, in representing its interests as the general interest in Britain and around the world–thus fulfilling a Marxian prescription for political dominance (Marx, 53).

     

    Burgess’s critics might have been more alert to Alex’s matriculation in an Arnoldian program had they considered more carefully Time for a Tiger, the first piece of Burgess’s Malayan trilogy. This novel, about the difficulty of exporting Rugby-like schools to the minions in Britain’s empire, depicts an educator who abandons the Arnoldian ideal, and is absorbed by the exotic country he goes to convert. This might itself have been sufficient to establish that Burgess had an overt interest in public school pedagogy. The hero of A Clockwork Orange, however, is an unequivocal practitioner; even his resistance is characteristic. Indeed, Alex’s remarkable fraternity with the Arnoldian product suggests a complete triumph for the latter’s pedagogy. This similarity holds even for the most optimistic and influential version of the public schoolboy, Tom Brown, whose story “made the modern public school” (Mack & Armytage, 100).

     

    This pairing of Tom and Alex would be unusual if only because Alex seems to be one of the most evil representations of boyhood ever forwarded popularly and Tom–for another era–one of the most virtuous. As Coleridge observed, however, opposites are but farthest apart of the same kind–and, rather than incommensurate, prove to be the two sides of the same coin. Reading Alex and Tom as twins, it does not take long to discover even in Hughes’s happy fantasy of Rugby that his Arnoldian telos of self-control, heterosexual love, moderation, and upright morality is interpenetrated with perversity, pederasty, a fetishization of style, Machiavellian management training, an interest in hand-to-hand combat and blood-letting, and, ultimately, a conviction that adult heterosexual manliness smacks of death.

     

    Forgetting the debt that modern British versions of masculinity owe to Arnoldian culture has led to the consistent claim that A Clockwork Orange indicates a terrifying rupture in history. “There is something about the novel so frightening that it demanded a new language,” observes Petix (Bloom, 88). In this view, Burgess’s Jeremiad about the end of civilization is redeemed by its concomitant invitation to wage war on what Devitis calls Britain’s “socialized nightmare” (Devitis, 106). Droogery then becomes a reasonable response to the mediocritized, globalized, televisionized welfare state, where all traditional British values have been abrogated and the heroic individual exiled to the streets, as Hughes feared. Hugh Kenner, for example, reflecting on a street brawl he recently witnessed in London, seizes on the novel’s popularity as itself proof that British society has absorbed the apocalyptic “ultra-violence” of Burgess’s vision (Kenner, 242). Thus the true shock of the novel is its demonstration that a new man is already here; like Pogo’s herald, we have met the enemy and he is us. Put more formally, A Clockwork Orange compels not because it transgresses, but, like most dystopias, because its image of the future is shockingly familiar.

     

    Burgess’s own comments on A Clockwork Orange suggest the size and subtlety of the Arnoldian shadow cast over him. A prolific writer and interview-giver, he can be found struggling with the text’s incongruities. On one hand, he reinforces its anarchistic non serviam. In his revealing essay, “Clockwork Marmalade,” Burgess pairs his work with the dystopic 1984, and expresses his hope that A Clockwork Orange “takes its place as one of those salutary literary warnings . . . against flabbiness, sloppy thinking and overmuch trust in the state.” (Bloom, 129). Similarly, he warned in a 1973 interview in the Paris Review that “governments are what I try to ignore. All governments are evil” (Aggeler, 49).

     

    On the other hand, that salutation to anarchy stands alongside his professed embarrassment over the book’s “moral simplicity.” Burgess was ahead of his critics in complaining that the book–rather than brilliantly occupying a barely-imaginable, anarchic, Nietzschean world beyond good and evil–is, if anything, too moralistic and simplistic. The point of the novel, according to Burgess and critics eager to echo his “Manichean philosophy,” is “the weary traditional one of the fundamental importance of moral choice.” Burgess sees the novel as “being too didactic to be artistic” and as flawed because its message about the necessity of moral choice “stick[s] out like a sore thumb” (ACO, x).

     

    Burgess’s inability to decide whether the novel is anarchistic or moralistic has appeared not only in his un- Joycean interventions in the novel’s exegesis, but in the publication of different versions of the text. As first issued, the novel had twenty chapters; conceived and written, the novel had twenty-one chapters, that number standing, in what Burgess called his “arithmology,” for the age of adulthood. In most readings the excluded twenty- first chapter is taken to address precisely the question of the story’s final moral position, as expressed in an acceptance of adulthood.

     

    In the first seven chapters, Alex and his droogs are in the raptures of a criminal adolescence; the next seven chapters follow Alex’s two years in prison where he murders a cell-mate, snitches on his fellows, and jumps at a chance at early release, not realizing that he is to undergo a personality-warping conditioning. In the final third of the book, Alex is unable to commit violence. His former victims repay him by beating him repeatedly. Burgess leaves Alex to be tortured to death by music, a stimulus designed to sicken him. Deranged, Alex leaps from a window to kill himself, but does not “snuff it.” He wakes up in a government hospital, unprogrammed, and announces he is ready to return to his ultra-violence, “carving the whole litso of the creeching world with my cut-throat britva . . . I was cured all right” (ACO, 179). So ends the shorter version.

     

    The most recent Norton edition includes the twenty- first chapter. In it, Alex finds himself once again sitting around with his droogs, chanting, “What’s it going to be then, eh?” This mantra begins each of the three main sections, as well as appearing intermittently throughout– reminding readers that the droogs still drift in the currents of casual murderous impulse. But something has changed–something purposefully kept unclear and distinct from any feature of Alex’s will or choice. A biological mystery of mortality and maturation has begun to affect Alex. Bored and hopeless, he refuses to buy everyone drinks, reluctant to throw away his “hard-earned pretty polly” (183); then, caught carrying a photograph of a baby around, dreams of himself as “a very starry chelloveck . . . an old man, sitting by a fire” (186). An image of his future son comes to him and he waxes poetic.

     

    Yes, yes yes, brothers, my son. And now I felt this bolshy big hollow inside my plot, feeling very surprised too at myself. I knew what was happening, O my brothers. I was like growing up. Yes yes yes, there it was. Youth must go, ah yes. But youth is only being in a way like it might be an animal. . . . Being young is like being like one of these malenky machines. (ACO, 190)

     

    The difference between these two endings underscores the philosophical conflict that structures Burgess’s novel. Does Alex’s story end with chapter twenty’s return to sexual perversity, demonized youth, and validation of violence? Or should it end with Alex’s abandoning the criminal pleasures of droogery, embracing melancholy “normal” adult values, and recapitulating his own father’s petit-bourgeois condition of wife, family and household?

     

    While a critical claim can be heard that there is, or at least should be, a consensus that the shorter version is more interesting, each ending poses a conundrum. In neither ending is evil punished, nor is Alex shown to repent or regret his atrocities. Neither ending answers whether the conscious conditioning by the state is any more or less moral than the unconscious conditioning by family, economy etc. Neither ending reveals if conditioning is better or worse that makes us peaceable or allows us to be violent, or if we can ever be more than merely clockwork. Both endings are thoroughly and equally ambivalent about the point Burgess claims the novel makes entirely too obvious–about moral choice. Similarly, the point that Burgess himself can be heard prefering the shorter ending, and that we should credit this obiter, is also dubious. Burgess calls the shorter version “sensational” but “not a fair picture of human life,” and then, undoubtedly savoring the irony, defends the longer version via Pontius Pilate’s “Quod scripsi scripsi” (ACO, xi).

     

    That Burgess himself does not know whether he wants this text to end by celebrating the perverse pleasures of boyhood or the muted satisfactions of adult masculinity reflects the very contradiction that mobilizes Tom Brown. Suspended between an Arnoldian disdain for boys’ “wickedness,” and Hughes’s hopeful fantasy about the utopia of boyish pleasure, both A Clockwork Orange and Tom Brown’s School-days relate the importance of resisting adulthood, and retaining the pleasures of remaining in a timeless, childish perversity. Both versions of ACO and TBS are significantly structured by their concern, as Matthew Arnold put it, that “faith in machinery is . . . our besetting danger” (Culture and Anarchy, 10). Both texts are deeply–almost furiously–nostalgic for a moment of health and wholeness that never existed. Thus, when Alex is implicated in the Arnoldian tradition of schoolboy Eros, this does not return the narrative to a lost simplicity, because that tradition is itself subject to the contradictions that animate A Clockwork Orange. Alex’s brutal conditioning, his strange language and dress, his savage sexuality, his wickedness, cruelty, and sadism, his devious sensitivity to the ebb and flow of group power, were in fact essential to Arnold’s Rugby School, and helped catapult it into international prominence as an unsurpassed institution of man-making.

     

    The Arnoldian pedagogy engages and activates the Victorian concern with the male body as a locus of political power. The nineteenth-century British schoolboy doctrine that athletic contests like rugby and football formed the character of the man derives significantly from Tom Brown. His popularity was crucial to teaching the world that the public school virtues of strong character, self-dependence, readiness, and pluck were “best learned on the playing field” (Haley, 161). Moral health, Arnoldian Victorians like Hughes believed, was profoundly implicated in physical achievement. The notion of moral health came to include physical courage: unless one was willing to assume physical risk, one could not hope to achieve moral salvation.

     

    The famous aphorism that “the Battle of Waterloo was won on the playing fields of Eton” reveals the relation of this philosophy of athleticism to the practical exigencies of empire. The promotion of physical courage was taken as a necessity for a nation needing soldiers, and breaking a leg or rib or head in the playing-field at Rugby prepared one for the rigors of a battlefield somewhere else. “Meet them like Englishmen!” Hughes’s narrator cries to the creatures of his own imagination. Thus the narrator of Tom Brown’s School-days describes the climactic School-house match (an early form of rugby) in terms that would today be considered scandalous:

     

    My dear sir, a battle would look much the same to you, except the boys would be men, and the balls iron, but a battle would be worth your looking at for all that, and so is a football match. (TBS, 103)

     

    Yet when the health of the Empire thus was seen to depend on the physicality of schoolboys, athletics acquired an importance–even a holiness–that carried indisputable moral weight.

     

    The modern public school, as invented through Tom Brown’s School-days, manifested the Victorian obsession with the physical body’s perfectability and corruptibility. While Hughes repeatedly praises Thomas Arnold in the text, he also unconsciously reveals that the headmaster, in his treatment of the bodies of his students, enacted his morbid identification with Christ’s physical suffering. Hughes wishes to portray school rituals like boxing, football–and even fagging and bullying–as expressing the unalloyed joys of youthful play. Yet School-days also reveals Dr. Arnold’s abhorrence of the liminal and transgressive body of youth. The book’s textual and graphic representation of the body illustrate Arnold’s theory that to educate boys is to turn them from beasts into Christians–to re-enact the moral development of human society: moral ontogeny recapitulating moral phylogeny.

     

    Where Hughes differs from Arnold is in his attitude towards boyhood. Arnold sees boyhood solely as a condition to be mortified and overcome; Hughes agrees that in the end it must be left behind, but relishes the opportunity it offers for maximizing the pleasures of the body. Without reference to any moralizing process, he concludes his paean to rugby with a remarkable claim about the proportionate value of sport to everyday life:

     

    This is worth living for; the whole sum of school-boy existence gathered up into one straining, struggling half-hour, a half-hour worth a year of common life. (TBS, 106)

     

    The interpretation of the school’s physical harshness as a source not only of mortification but also of ecstasy has, according to Hughes, deep roots in English culture and history. He makes this point explicit in an important episode placed in a country fair, a “veast.” Here, the narrator delights in a brutal contest called backswording that involves two men trying to draw blood from each others’ scalps with cudgels. “The weapon is a good stout ash stick,” Hughes tell us, “the players are called ‘old gamesters’ . . . and their object is to break one another’s heads.” The game is over when the blood flows “an inch anywhere above the eyebrow” (TBS, 40). The climacteric is pleasurable for all: “‘Blood, blood!’ shout the spectators as a thin stream oozes out slowly from his hair” (TBS, 41).

     

    Hughes goes on to regret the passing of this event, and ends with a disquisition on the relationship of the body of the boy to the body politic, including a discussion of class conflict, reform and capitalism. He observes that such violence is essential to reformers, who won’t

     

    really lay hold of the working boys and young men of England by any educational grapnel whatever, which hasn't some bona fide equivalent for the games of the old country 'veast'; something to try the muscles of men's bodies, and the endurance of their hearts, to make them rejoice in their strength. (TBS, 46)

     

    The rage for “bloodsports” that comes to dominate British education for a hundred years begins here. Hughes asserts that this is part of moral reform–in effect that such violence is in the service of molding martyrs for the state. But his pleasure in physical violence is not far from a sheer carnivalesque interest in the grotesque body that characterizes the popular reading of A Clockwork Orange.

     

    Though Hughes periodically reminds us that violent play is good for the state, Tom Brown loves it for its own sake. Alex’s passion for “the old ultra-violence,” while notched higher in damage inflicted, reflects the same celebration of the pleasures of the incoherent body that characterize Tom Brown’s matches in the mud and blood of the close. Alex never tires of detailing the propensity of adult vecks to turn into porous gore and blood when beaten. The droogs describe blood as “our dear old droog”; “red-red vino on tap and in all the same places, like it’s put out by the same big firm” (ACO, 22); “Then out comes the blood, my brothers, real beautiful” (ACO, 7); “A fair tap with a crowbar . . . brought the red out like an old friend” (ACO, 10); and “then it was blood, not song nor vomit, that came out of his filthy rot. Then we went on our way” (ACO, 14).

     

    These separate confirmations that bodies are never discrete entities, but oozing, porous and liminal, precede a gang-fight that culminates in a glorious extrusion of blood. Having enhanced the ecstasy of this bloodletting by taking “milk with knives” to “sharpen” his sensations, Alex’s success in piercing the body of the other droog makes him rhapsodic:

     

    [Billyboy] was a malenky too slow and heavy in his movements to vred anyone really bad. And, my brothers, it was real satisfaction to me to waltz--left two three, right two three--and carve left cheeky right cheeky, so that like two curtains of blood seemed to pour out at the same time, one on either side of his fat filthy oily snout in the winter starlight. (ACO, 17)

     

    Reversing the direction of our analysis about the culture of Rugby School and the managed violence of the playing-field, we can locate the culture at work in this scene of droogish anarchy: we can not only find the violence in the gentleman; we can find the gentleman in the violence. The “curtains of blood” in the above passage do not herald the apocalypse, but evoke a sportsman’s appreciation for the results of good technique that borders on the aesthetic. We hear Alex’s pride in his team–the captain’s sense of the players’ movements around him. He details with pleasure his own movements, and the violence softens into a gentleman’s dance, with the expert’s assessment of the opponent’s weaknesses, and of proper footwork.

     

    The measured cadences of sporting play-by-play include a dramatic cataloguing of the players’ skills and equipment. For this particular fight “Dim had a real horrorshow length of oozy or chain round his waist, twice wound round, and he unwound this and began to swing it beautiful in the eyes or glazzies. Pete and Georgie had good sharp nozhes, but I for my own part had a fine starry horrowshow cut-throat britva which, at that time, I could flash and shine artistic” (ACO, 16). The cutting and the bleeding do not provoke Dionysian horror in Alex or in the reader. Neither does Alex’s confrontation with the grotesque pig-like body of the other signal the devolution of man into beast. Instead, an appreciation of the sportsman’s style, cool observation, and a studied ability to execute with grace materialize under the pressure of battle.

     

    The emphasis on style–even in the middle of marked danger–would seem to sharpen the subversive point of Alex’s pleasure in flouting the conformity expected of the Arnoldian male body. Like Oscar Wilde’s dandy–another response to the certitudes of public school masculinity– Alex uses style as a declaration of independence. Thus, when Alex recalls his fight scene with Billyboy, he remembers that his droogs looked marvelous; Alex proudly observes that his droogs were “dressed in the heighth of fashion” (ACO, 2). For Alex, his clothes assert that he controls his own body, and he uses the image he presents to the public as a “semiotic guerilla warfare,” in Eco’s phrase.

     

    By reducing male physical difference to nothing but broad shoulders, garish neckties and odd crotch-protectors, Alex’s fashion statement displays his ironic relation to normative masculinity. The droogs wear “waisty jackets without lapels but with these very big built-up shoulders (‘pletchoes’ we called them) which were a kind of mockery of having real shoulders like that.” They wear “off-white cravats which looked like whipped-up kartoffel or spud.” Most noticeably, however, they wear a pair of “very tight tights with the old jelly mould” on the crotch which draws attention to their genitalia (ACO, 2).

     

    Alex’s personal style of dress seems at first to indicate his resistance to power. But when Alex appropriates fashion as a means of asserting his identity he is building a new temple on the site of the old. Instead of forwarding himself as a new man, his preoccupation with style and taste above all else renders his portrait as an “old boy” strikingly clear: Alex disdains those who do not follow his idea of fashion.

     

    That Alex, in insisting on irony and rebellion, is merely recreating a conformist world in microcosm, appears most readily in his confrontation with Dim. For example, “Poor old Dim” does not know or care that Alex’s ostensible punkishness engages a high-culture seriousness toward aesthetics yoked to his own political ambition. Alex approves of the genital designs of his droogs Pete, who has a hand, and Georgie, a flower, on his groin, but finds himself in a perplexing spot for an anarchist when he finds Dim’s choice of a clown’s face in bad taste–evidently too close to naming “the clown he was” (ACO, 6). Such an overt image lacks the tension and irony Alex requires to see himself and his droogs as beings of superior taste. Alex feels demeaned by his association and fellowship with such a philistine as Dim. This conflict is the first suggestion that Alex’s idiosyncratic style, which at first seems to be a marker of his resistance to British culture, has roots in the traditional mechanisms of class.

     

    The antagonism brought on by Alex’s conviction of his own superiority to Dim increases throughout the novel’s first section. Noting the lost opportunity that Dim’s name–like the symbol on his jelly mould–affords for an ironic or subversive gesture, Alex regretfully observes that “Dim really is dim.” This includes Dim making a display of proving he can read, a gesture which Alex finds distasteful (ACO, 7). Dim’s lack of moderation, too, marks him as no proper droog of Alex’s–or of Tom Brown’s. He “goes too far, like he always did” (ACO, 6). When he fights he always gets “dirty and untidy, like a veck who’d been in a fight . . . you should never look as though you have been” (ACO, 11). After a break-in, Dim is “going to dung” on the carpet, and Alex stops him; though amused by bleeding, Alex does have a standard of bodily purity that, for example, forbids scatological transgressions. Later, Alex finds he smells bad, “which was one thing I had against old Dim” (ACO, 26).

     

    Alex’s conflict with Dim recasts a class distinction central to the ideology of Tom Brown’s School-days. Certain readers, noting that the emotional peaks of the novel involved athletic prowess, used the term “muscular Christianity” to accuse Hughes’s hero of excessive interest in the physical body. The writer responded, in his sequel Tom Brown at Oxford, by offering to distinguish his protagonist from the debased “muscleman.” He writes that “the muscleman seems to have no belief whatever as to the purposes for which his body has been given him . . . Whereas, so far as I know, the least of the muscular Christians . . . does not hold that mere strength or activity are in themselves worthy of any respect or worship, or that one man is a bit better than another because he can knock him down, or carry a bigger sack of potatoes than he” (Hughes, TBO, 113). Alex shows a muscular Christian’s disdain for Dim, a mere muscleman.

     

    Alex would have had no trouble following Hughes’s lesson. Alex’s exquisite sensitivity to class distinctions would have made him at home at Rugby, where an entire social hierarchy could be constructed upon the most minute sartorial propriety. When Arnoldian reform implemented uniform dress codes, they became, ironically, an important medium for schoolboys to express and control their own lives. Refusing to allow uniforms to reduce their individuality, as well as class difference, the boys instantly re-deployed them for their own use. Within the officially prescribed regulations, they developed a complex code for proper attire. Often as subtle as showing a bit of a handkerchief, or leaving a button undone, these points of style, self-enforced, became a powerful way to indicate and control the hierarchy of schoolboy life. Thus style–even when used against a totalitarian standard–did not promise a liberation; rather it facilitated a transference of power that guaranteed the authoritarian lesson. The older and more powerful boys themselves found they had a stake in enforcing the Arnoldian principle that the ruling class must control semiotics.

     

    Tom Brown’s first encounter at Rugby emphasizes that violating standards of style and taste carries an ineffable–even an unthinkable–danger. During Tom’s first day at school, his cicerone, Master East, glances at Tom and immediately begins the necessary indoctrination:

     

    'This'll never do--haven't you got a hat?--we never wear caps here. Only the louts wear caps. Bless you, if you were to go into the quadrangle with that thing on, I--don't know what'd happen.' The very idea was quite beyond young Master East, and he looked unutterable things. (TBS, 87)

     

    Like Tom, Alex has to come to the very end of his narrative before he thoroughly grasps the political lesson of this difference: inevitably, fraternizing with those beneath one’s class drags one into trouble. At first Alex tolerates Dim, who, “for all his dimness was worth three of the others in madness and dirty fighting” (ACO, 15), but Alex, after “slooshying and viddying Dim’s vulgarity,” finally excoriates him. Exploding in the idiom of the Arnoldian schoolboy, Alex strikes Dim and says, “Bastard, filthy drooling mannerless bastard” (ACO, 28). When Alex’s right to deliver such a remonstrance is questioned, he defends his authority, like a praepostor facing a schoolboy insurrection. “Dim has got to learn his place,” Alex says, “There has to be a leader. Discipline there has to be. Right?” (ACO, 29). The mutinous answer he receives is not the one he hopes for, and leads to his ruin: Dim beats Alex and leaves him for the police.

     

    Understanding how richly both Alex’s and Arnold’s traditions are invested in disciplining their subjects through semiotic codes of dress and fighting allows us to re-appraise the text’s distinctive language, Nadsat. The decadent flavor of this invented language, though reminiscent of the playful ambiguity of Carroll’s “Jabberwocky,” has been taken to signal the end of civilization as we know it. Certainly Burgess’s work on Joyce substantiates the modernist inclination to prove that one linguistic knot can derange our normal concept of identity. Thus, in A Clockwork Orange, Alex is “a law” or “a word” but also “without law” or “without word”; “horrorshow”–via a Russian root–means good. Placing this Freudian interest in the antithetical meaning of words alongside the infantilisms of “appy polly loggies,” “skolliwoll,” “purplewurple” (for apologies, school and purple), suggests Nadsat’s antic linguistic inventiveness is related to Alex’s repetitious interest in rape and murder. The suggestion is that Alex’s refusal to grow up into normal or healthy morality expresses itself in a macaronic verging on a criminal glossolalia.

     

    Reading Alex as an Arnoldian schoolboy, however, helps to correct the interpretive error that Nadsat signifies postmodern chaos and anarchy: in fact, the words always have a direct and obvious referent. The teen dialect through which Alex refracts his developmental narrative is not designed to make the reader accept that the apocalypse is already upon us, nor does it confirm “the break-down of consensus in the post-war period” (Hebditch, 17). On the contrary, Alex is the most determined of literalists, whose bid for linguistic authority leaves him operating, however paradoxically, in the positivist Arnoldian tradition his slang ostensibly replaces. He does not speak Nadsat because the modern youth of the day don’t know any better. His use of Nadsat is a cultural achievement in the same sense that his fashion statements are: both enhance his own authority. He does not just narrate the story, but authors himself as the subject who knows. The reader, by contrast, becomes the cultural exile. If you cannot figure out what Alex means, your existence–at least as a reader–is marginal.

     

    Recognizing the power of language, Alex has learned to talk very well indeed. He is a student of different dialects of his society, and notices when words are alien; he remembers the words of an older prisoner’s slang he cannot fathom, and makes sure to point out that this superannuation has made the speaker powerless. He hears two younger girls in a record shop “who had their own way of govoreeting” (ACO, 50), and immediately gets the idea to seduce them. He comments on this encounter, which consists primarily of Alex’s sadistic sexual attacks, that “they must still have their education. And education they had had” (ACO, 54). His familiarity with the allusive patterns that determine appropriate speech can become quite humorous; here, in an ironic improvisation, he speaks a Shakespearean language of the duel: “How art thou, thou globby bottle of cheap stinking chip-oil? Come and get one in the yarbles, if you have any yarbles, you eunuch jelly, thou” (ACO, 15). He also believes that he can shift his shape through the proper words, and, when trying to get out of prison, he imitates a sycophantic “gentleman”: “‘Sir, I have done my best, have I not’ I always used my very polite gentleman’s goloss govoreeting with those at the top. ‘I’ve tried, sir, haven’t I’” (ACO, 81). Even the lyrical idioms of traditional Eros are accessible when he needs to escape the nausea he is programmed to feel when experiencing violent impulses towards women:

     

    O most beautiful and beauteous of devotchkas, I throw like my heart atyour feet for you to like trample all over. If I had a rose I would give it to you. If it was all rainy and cally now on the ground you could have my platties to walk on so as not to cover your dainty nogas with filth and cal. (ACO, 128)

     

    To celebrate Nadsat as verging on a perverse interior gibberish misses that Alex demands that language be meaningful enough to free him from an inner exile. Nadsat represents a rupture with “normal” teleologies only if you ignore its conventional referentiality. Similarly, even the intermittent triumphs of Alex’s perversity, whether linguistic or physical, do not manage to forestall his inevitable graduation into an Arnoldian version of adult health–at least in the longer version of the book.

     

    The final destination for Alex’s narrative sublates the book’s beginning, which details the droog’s first attack, on a “starry school-master type veck.” That this elderly pedagogue is carrying books about science recalls that introducing science into the curriculum was one of the innovations with which Arnold was credited. The victim is also carrying sweet love-letters, whose sentimentality harkens back to a different ethos of manliness. They accuse him of sexual perversity and filthiness, tear up his books, steal and mock his letters, yank out his false teeth and crush them, kick him in his “pot,” and strip him to his underwear. From the droogs’ point of view, he has so little money–or capital, one might say–that they do not even steal it–they just throw it in the street.

     

    Though in the opening the droogs mock his “teacher- type goloss” (speech), the schoolmaster gets the last word; his losses are temporary and his triumph final. After being programmed to sicken at violent impulse, Alex again comes across this doddery veck. This time, along with his fellows in a library, the old man beats Alex severely, and turns him over to the police. The punishment Alex suffers as a result of his youthful transgression against this pedagogical authority hasten Alex into adulthood–at least in the longer version–as Dr. Arnold justified floggings to “hasten” his schoolboys out of youthfulness. That the narrative restores the schoolmaster’s power to punish, even after Alex’s attempt to disempower him, reflects Burgess’s enrollment in the Arnoldian ideal of manliness. In effect, both versions of Clockwork portray a world that has become a globalized Rugby School. Britain has not declined, but become rarified, more clearly itself: a state machine producing itself in and through its males. As Alex’s conglomerated language reveals, the imperial machinery of man-making has overcome antiquated national boundaries. Alex has not been interpellated as Euro-trash by “enemy” culture–the Russian of the cold war. Instead, he is a star pupil of an international macaronic, and his mastery of it enables his personal imperialism. The longer version–Burgess’s original conception–confirms the Arnoldian narrative even more persuasively, as the temporary reign of droogish play and perversity gives way, harmlessly and naturally, to the traditional image of the gentleman.

     

    The irony of Burgess’s ambition to replace the droog with the Arnoldian schoolboy is that they have always been thoroughly integrated; Alex’s wickedness and cruelty are as much the stuff of empire-building as is the Arnoldian gentleman’s phantasy of morality. In effect, though Rugby’s classrooms are now called Correctional Schools, State Jails, and conditioning laboratories, and the playing fields have become the London streets, Alex’s education terminates in the same phantasized ideal of adult masculinity that Tom’s does. Burgess has not overturned a public school idea of proper masculine development, but fulfilled Thomas Arnold’s ambition to write his pedagogy across the face of the world.

     

    [I would like to thank Eric Rabkin for his generous comments on this essay while in progress.]

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Aggeler, Geoffrey. Anthony Burgess: The Artist as Novelist. Tuscaloosa: Alabama UP, 1979.
    • Arnold, Matthew. Culture and Anarchy. New York: Chelsea House, 1983.
    • Bloom, Harold., ed. Anthony Burgess. New York: Chelsea House Publishers, 1987.
    • Burgess, Anthony. A Clockwork Orange. New York: Norton, 1986.
    • Haley, Bruce. The Healthy Body and Victorian Culture. Cambridge, Mass: Harvard UP, 1978.
    • Hughes, Thomas. Tom Brown’s School-days. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1967.
    • —. Tom Brown at Oxford. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1967.
    • Kenner, Hugh. A Sinking Island: The Modern English Writers. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1987.
    • Mack, Edward C., and W.G. Armytage. Thomas Hughes. London: Ernest Benn Ltd., 1952.
    • Marx, Karl. The German Ideology. Ed. C.J. Arthur. London: Lawrence and Wishart, 1970.

     

  • Remembering the Shuttle, Forgetting the Loom: Interpreting the Challenger Disaster

    Ann Larabee

    Dept. of American Thought and Language
    Michigan State University
    21798ANL@msu.edu

     

     

    As in a play, the nation rises again
    Reborn of grief and ready to seek the stars;
    Remembering the shuttle, forgetting the loom.

     

    Howard Nemerov
    On an Occasion of National Mourning

     

    Lifepod

     

    In 1993, in the wake of the World Trade Center bombing, a made-for-TV American movie called Lifepod depicted brutal, claustrophobic conditions in a small space craft, containing a handful of survivors from the terrorist bombing of a much larger space transport. Looking very much like the ocean liner from one of the first large-scale disaster films, The Poseidon Adventure (1972), the large space transport holds not enough “lifepods” for its passengers, and the one vessel that does escape is in bad repair and not sufficiently stocked with food or water. Furthermore, its design is inadequate for space navigation, and its pilot, trapped in a small chamber without solar shields, dies a slow and gruesomely pustulous death from radiation bombardment. The rest of the survivors fight with each other and their depleted technological surroundings until only two remain to be saved.

     

    Blaming the survivors’ harsh conditions on a vaguely belligerent, self-serving, and inefficient governmental authority, Lifepod contains a lesson about preparedness, with imagistic references to the Cold War’s abandoned fallout shelters and the exploding Challenger space shuttle, which carried no escape vehicles. Lifepod depicts a hostile technosystem that controls air, food, and water, as the survivors pant, sweat, bleed, freeze and starve, at the mercy of their drifting enclosure. While this psychologically tense, physically urgent, claustrophobic existence throws body-technology relationships into sharp relief, the film argues that preparedness–the prediction of all exigencies under any conditions–is possible and necessary. Unlike the negligent lifepod, a well-designed, well-stocked escape vehicle would maintain technological transparency–that is, its inhabitants would take its smooth functioning for granted, and the border between body and machine would be translucent, the oar an extension of the arm. Evoking crisis in post-industrial cultures, cybernetic relations would be stabilized in the ideal lifepod.

     

    A symbol of preparedness and accurate prediction, the lifeboat is both a physical and psychological escape from technocultural terrors and, more ambiguously, a condensed version of that same technoculture. In a radioactive, terrorist, and generally chaotic world, one can only plan a move to a smaller, safer box–ideally the enclosed world of the harmoniously functioning and disaster-resistent spaceship. While enthusiasts herald the spaceship as a lifeboat, a way of escaping a doomed planet and sowing the seeds of homo sapiens across the universe, the Challenger space shuttle explosion on 28 January 1986, demonstrated that increasingly scaled-down lifeworlds are not especially life-sustaining. Like the unfortunate inhabitants of the negligent lifepod, the Challenger seven lived to experience a gruesome drift, the long descending spiral to the ocean where pressure crushed the crew cabin. Later, critics of NASA would ask why there were no lifeboats on the shuttle, no means of escaping a relatively untested, inevitably disastrous technology, comprised of over 700 critical components, any one of which might cause a fatal accident. One of the lessons of the Challenger disaster was that in complex closed environments, catastrophe is inescapable and its victims–even friendly school teachers–have no viable means of ejection. This televised spectacle of claustrophobia and futility riveted millions, who helplessly viewed the exploding microcosm of post-industrial life. Gregory Whitehead writes that the media’s construction of the Challenger disaster was a “thanaturgical excess of fire & fire & light,” a Futurist’s necrodrama provoking dread and shock.1

     

    The 1980’s witnessed an unprecedented number of such media-fed disasters–core breeches in nuclear reactors, sinking ships, oil spills, chemical leaks. With a nearly continuous spectacle of large-scale technological calamity–the Bhopal Union Carbide Plant’s emission of methyl isocyanate (December 1984), the Challenger Space Shuttle explosion (January 1986), the Chernobyl nuclear reactor core explosion (April 1986), the Exxon Valdez oil spill (March 1989)–the mass media declared the 1980’s, the “age of limits.” As Charles Perrow wrote in the wake of the Challenger disaster, the culture of high-risk technologies had made a “habit of courting disaster.”2 Perrow, in Normal Accidents, suggests that uncertainty and error are normal in a complex, “tightly coupled” system.3 In such a system, many components are highly interdependent, so that the failure of one component quickly escalates into total catastrophe. The unfolding of these catastrophes can neither be predicted nor prevented. While Perrow carefully frames certain “systems”–nuclear power plants, petrochemical plants, aircraft and airways, genetic engineering–he uses metaphors that suggest a broader cultural paradigm. In his tale, “A Day in the Life,” he describes “your” apparently familiar encounters with overheated coffeepots, lost keys, bus strikes, faulty automobile parts, all interacting in unpredictable ways to undermine “your” daily schedule.4 Intended as a parable to illuminate complex, tightly coupled systems, “A Day in the Life” implies that normal accidents comprise the very texture of post-industrial culture. The plugged tea kettle is more than a simile for a nuclear plant’s core meltdown, it is a component of the relentless, complex, uncertain technological composition of postmodern life. Similarly, the many interpretations of the Challenger disaster not only sought to find the cause of the accident, but to make some broader statements about artificial life and its organization. The Rogers Commission investigation of the accident, and the interpretations that followed, attempted to restore safety and transparency to body-technology relations in the lifepod.

     

    The Rogers Commission determined that the shuttle exploded because of the hot gas breach of a seal, essentially comprised of putty and rubber washers (O-rings). Those parts, assembled by Morton Thiokol and familiar to anyone with a leaky faucet, were the central focus of testimony from engineers, who described evidence from earlier shuttle flights of “blow-by”–the leaking of hot gases from the booster seals. “Blow-by” was indicated by the presence of soot, ranging in color from gray to black. According to Morton Thiokol engineer and whistle-blower, Roger Boisjoly, black, which appeared when the seal was subjected to cold temperatures, indicated that the seal was going “away from the direction of goodness.”5 When the Challenger was launched under cold temperatures on the morning of January 28, the seal failed completely, and the shuttle caught fire. The Rogers Commission verified suspicions that the poorly designed seal of the right solid rocket booster was the technical cause of the accident. But it also accused the managers of NASA and its contractor for the solid rocket boosters, Morton Thiokol, of not heeding early warnings from engineers about the faulty seals.

     

    Consisting of five published volumes, including 1700 pages of testimony and numerous appendices containing charts, graphs, and parts lists, the Rogers Commission report resembles product liability trials that set out to identify the responsibility for the technological failures of daily life–faulty wiring, exploding gas tanks, toys small enough to choke infants. According to Elaine Scarry, the product liability trial is a “cultural self-dramatization. The courtroom is a communal arena in which civilization’s ongoing expectations about objects are overtly (and sometimes noisily) announced.”6 Here, a narrative of disaster is constructed in order to restore civilization:

     

    Implicit in this mimesis of restorability is the belief that catastrophes are themselves (not simply narratively but actually) reconstructable, the belief that the world can exist, usually does exist, should in this instance have existed, and may in this instance be “remakable” to exist, without . . . slippage.7

     

    Part of this remaking is enacted through compensation for bodily damage, a healing of technological wounds through judgment and financial reward.

     

    Like the judge and jury in a product liability case, the Rogers Commission was certainly engaged in a remaking of civilization and its projects. The trial was enacted before the public eye, a national demonstration to restore the narrative of technological progress with testimony from scientific experts. The commission’s broad mandate was to “investigate the circumstances surrounding the accident” and “develop recommendations for corrective or other action.”8 And this mandate was framed by a “firm national resolve” to restore the space program–a program that has reified cultural identity around a supposedly common endeavor that transcends cultural differences.9 In the many reiterations of the steps that led to disaster, in the meticulous documentation of the shuttle components’ performance and NASA decision-making hierarchies, the Rogers Commission report sought to reinvent the Nation–and indeed all human making–without blow-by and slippage.

     

    The most spectacular moment in the Rogers Commission’s testimony was when Commission member and eminent physicist Richard Feynman dropped a bit of O-ring material into a glass of ice water to prove its lack of resiliency under cold temperatures. Immediately picked up by the press, who lionized Feynman, this simple impromptu experiment seemed to cut through the waffling, confusing, jargon-riddled rhetoric of the NASA decision-makers’ testimony. But perhaps more important, the experiment demonstrated that catastrophic failure occurs in basic technological parts and everyday household experience. As engineer Roger Boisjoly later claimed, “most failures occur because some minor subsystem gives: 25-cent washers, $2.50 bolts, $25 clevis pins.”10 The press claimed whistle-blowers Feynman and Boisjoly as heroes precisely because they seemed to expose the simple truth about quotidian life in the technological age. Our most familiar objects carry incipient, unforeseen, body-threatening dangers: in his discussion of technological accidents, sociologist Ron Westrum writes, “A computer chip smaller than a thumbtack can send an airliner crashing into a hillside.”11 The preface to the Rogers Commission report states:

     

    The Commission construed its mandate somewhat broadly to include recommendations on safety matters not necessarily involved in this accident but which require attention to make future flights safer. Careful attention was given to concerns expressed by astronauts because the Space Shuttle program will only succeed if the highly qualified men and women who fly the Shuttle have confidence in the system.12

     

    As a public hearing on body-technology relations, the Commission report attempted to restore confidence in even minor sub-systems, to reinstate a national faith in technological existence, made safe through vigilance and the most minute surveillance, down to the thumbtacks.

     

    Disappearing Bodies

     

    What is most strikingly absent from the remade world of the technocractic Rogers Commission report is any effort to reconstruct and assess bodily damage. While it opens with the now famous photograph of the smiling shuttle astronauts and payload specialists in their shiny sky-blue space suits, posed with an American flag and a toy model of the Challenger, the report contains no discussion of the bodies. The corpses were found in March by salvage divers, working on their hands and knees in low-visibility conditions, feeling about in the debris until one spotted a space suit.13 The Rogers Commission took testimony until early May, but almost no forensic evidence was given, nor did the commission publicly express any desire for such evidence. The only exception lies in the testimony of FBI special agent Stanley Klein on February 7, who reported that:

     

    we do have human hair, Negro hair, Oriental hair, and hair from two different brown-haired Caucasians, and what is interesting, according to the laboratory, is that there were no signs of heat damage to any of the hair, which was surprising. The hair came from face seals, fragments of helmets, and helmet liners, and headrests.14

     

    This reduction to anonymity of NASA’s highly-touted racially and ethnically diverse shuttle crew was quickly passed over in favor of a discussion of possible laser terrorism by Libyan dissidents and Puerto Rican pro-independence groups.

     

    The Rogers Commission followed NASA’s lead. NASA’s official position in the disaster’s aftermath was that the astronauts and payload specialists had died instantly, an assumption easily accepted by television viewers who had watched the fiery explosion. And yet careful study of footage from the explosion clearly revealed that the forward fuselage containing the crew compartment hurtled to the ocean intact. Neither NASA nor the Rogers Commission were very willing to admit this dangerous fact as they attempted to restore public faith in technology. Indeed, while NASA now displays the Challenger’s barnacled, carefully arranged debris in a hangar at the Kennedy Space Center, the crew compartment is not part of the reconstruction.

     

    The strict control of information surrounding the bodies of the lost Challenger astronauts and payload specialists had purposes beyond delicacy and respect for the crew’s loved ones. Their relatively long and horrifying deaths had to be suppressed in the interests of continuing manned space flight. With two eminent astronauts–Sally Ride and Neil Armstrong–participating, the presidential investigative committee remained committed to manned spaceflight, hearing from other astronauts who testified that “man can do many wonderful things in orbit.”15 However, former Challenger pilot Paul Weitz suggested that:

     

    Every time you get people inside and around the orbiter you stand a chance of inadvertent damage of whatever type, whether you leave a tool behind or whether you, without knowing it, step on a wire bundle or a tube or something along those lines.16

     

    While the enormously complicated technologies of the space shuttle might, in ideal circumstances, provide a secure enclosure for experimental human and animal bodies, those bodies are marked by mundane clumsiness, inadvertent behaviors, everyday chance and uncertainty.

     

    Furthermore, bodies are not especially suited for life in space. On long flights they are subject to muscle and bone deterioration and weight loss, and ubiquitous radiation may damage reproductive organs. As NASA consultant Harry L. Shipman has explained in his book about the future of space flight after the Challenger accident, bodies pollute spacecraft, transforming them into smelly “urine dumps.”17 While male astronauts in the good old days used catheters and plastic bags, the presence of women requires more elaborate plumbing–the shuttle’s zero-gravity toilet, the “slinger,” gave “serious problems in actual use and . . . required a good bit of cleaning.”18 During the May 1985 flight of the Challenger, twenty-four rats and two squirrel monkeys being tested for their responses to weightlessness produced an unanticipated “flood” of feces, so that the uncomfortable crew had to wear face masks.19 The scatological body, especially the female or animal body, mars the strictly hygienic myth of the clean machine. A dead body is even worse.

     

    The fundamental question in the decades-long argument over manned space flight is whether bodies need to be present at all. As the eminent physicist James A. Van Allen wrote in the wake of the Challenger disaster, “all the truly important utilitarian and scientific achievements of our space program have been made by instrumented, unmanned spacecraft controlled remotely by radio command from stations on the earth.”20 Thus, the loss of the Challenger seven called into question NASA’s commitment to the “man-machine mode” in space travel. In its The Human Role in Space (THURIS) study, NASA laid out its theory of cybernetics, its rhetoric vacillating between technological mastery and autonomous technology:

     

    There is no such thing as an unmanned space system: everything that is created by the system designer involves man in one context or another; everything in our human existence is done by, for, or against man. The point at issue is to establish in every system context the optimal role of each man-machine component.21

     

    THURIS created a taxonomy for human-machine interactions: manual (hand tools), supported (manned maneuvering units), augmented (power tools, microscopes), teleoperated (remote control systems), supervised (computer functions with human supervision) and independent (artificial intelligence). These categories do not make much sense in themselves–clearly some manual manipulation is required for power tools and microscopes, wrenches and hammers augment and support human capabilities. But the taxonomy inscribes a fossil record, a technological evolution towards “self-actuating,” “self-healing,” independent machines.22 The THURIS authors hoped that such independent machines would require “human intervention” and attempted to describe uniquely human contributions to largely automated space enterprises. Humans, they argued, possess the unique capacity for visual evaluation, motor coordination appropriate to complex assembly, and mental powers of interpretation, innovation, deduction, and judgment. (Recent developments of artificial neural networks and fuzzy logic call even these “human” powers into question.) According to THURIS, the least important aspect of human intellect is memory: “Man’s memory, of all intellectual capabilities, is the one most easily duplicated and surpassed by computer activities.”23 Memory, the basis of culture, becomes unnecessary when humans function to service the machine.

     

    THURIS did not present a particularly attractive justification for the human presence in space, especially in the midst of virtual reality’s popularization. If humans on Earth can operate finely sensitive space robot arms and eyes or drift remotely through hallucinatory worlds more fantastic than alien planets, why are their bodies necessary in space? In NASA’s continuing efforts to sell its programs, bodies were inscribed with socially charged markings of liberal democracy. The Challenger seven crew consisted of a social studies teacher, an electrical engineer, a physicist, and a corporate representative from the Hughes Aircraft Company. Malcolm McConnell observed that Christa McAuliffe was “a little chubby” and that Greg Jarvis “could have easily lost ten or fifteen pounds.”24 The Challenger crew represented a populist presence in space. Dwarfed by the massive shuttle, their mission was to mediate the machine for a young television audience–Christa McAuliffe was to have taken her remote students on a video field trip around the Orbiter. After the explosion of the homey, domestic world presided over by a teacher mom, psychologists and grief specialists raced in to erase the spectacle of graphic technological violence and the imagination of Christa McAuliffe’s body. In the discourse of the Challenger disaster, the bodies of the shuttle crew had to remain behind the technological veil, in the interests of continuing manned space flight.

     

    However, folklore scholars have noted that the many popular jokes emanating from the Challenger disaster often involved those bodies in quite graphic ways. These jokes present the body/technology interface as a spectacularly violent one, as opposed to the cultural ideal in which interaction between the human body and the machine is a flow state.:

     

    Q: What do you call a burnt penis on the Florida shore?

    A: A shuttlecock.25

     

    Q: What was the last thing that went through Christa McAuliffe’s head?

    A: A piece of fuselage.26

     

    Q: Why didn’t they put showers on the Challenger?

    A: Because they knew that everyone would wash up on shore.27

     

    Based on familiar rhetorical patterns and cycles, these “sick” jokes have been called political cynicism, a rebellion against the mass media’s pompous reverence, a critique of national institutions, and an alleviation of death anxieties in the nuclear age.28 Don Ihde has written that we expect our technologies to be transparent so that ideally we are scarcely aware of the machine’s presence. For example, we expect our telephones to bring us the voices of our loved ones as if they were really present, rather than coded into energy impulses in fiber-optic cables. Skilled operators are supposed to become one with their machines; distinctions between the organic and the technological disappear in harmonious signal and response. Technological disaster shifts the terms of that interaction, for here technology violently entraps, penetrates, and chars the body locked in its embrace. It is this possibility that evokes both national efforts at repression and the return of the repressed through the joke cycle. In a national spectacle of disaster, the body is the pain of technological violence that can never be represented, but only displaced by word and image. Thus, the body is reconstructed within an organizational safety model, a new lifepod, that denies any further possibility of collapse.

     

    Groupthink

     

    The Rogers Commission Report made it clear that NASA’s organizational decisions were to blame in the decision to launch the space shuttle, despite icy weather and faulty booster seals. Thus, NASA’s management, as well as failed machine parts, became an object of study. NASA’s organization was represented in the Rogers Commission report as a self-regulating system without external surveillance or intervention, a situation sociologist Diane Vaughan credited, in part, to NASA’s secret military projects.29 An effective external regulator would have had access to classified materials, an unacceptable risk in the Cold War climate. Without external reality checks, many critics suggested, NASA had become isolated in its own delusional can-do ideology, derived from its Apollo mission successes. Furthermore, media coverage of the Rogers Commission hearings displayed the homogeneous make-up of NASA administrators and its corporate engineers–all middle-aged white men with a life-long devotion to NASA and the aerospace industry. Observing the “shocking” and “rancorous” displays of agency in-fighting at the hearings, the New Republic suggested that NASA itself seemed to be experiencing a “mid-life crisis.”30 The modern organizational man was exposed and displayed through the figure of the NASA administrator, locked in a decaying air-tight compartment of his own making and possessed of the “wrong stuff.”

     

    In the scientific press, especially in the first assessments of the disaster, some attempt was made to blame NASA’s rank and file. A few weeks after the disaster, Science magazine twice reported that an internal review of the shuttle had found “relaxed workplace standards” including “worker inexperience, lack of motivation, and faulty equipment.”31 Furthermore, it indicated that NASA’s investigation included speculation that workers had forgotten to plug a hole in the faulty booster after a leak test.32 Despite the search for “inadvertent damage” caused by flawed workers, blame was soon leveled at NASA’s and Morton Thiokol’s decision-makers who came to represent a nation-wide corrupt power-elite, now open to investigation. Charles Perrow, whose study of accidents in complex systems would often be evoked in discussions of the Challenger, decried the “Pentagon effect” at NASA that created a climate of managerial self-aggrandizement and toadying to corporate and military sponsors and the media.33 Journalist and long-time NASA observer, Malcolm McConnell, wrote that “the rank and file people in NASA are among the hardest-working, most productive, and most talented employees in the federal government.”34 McConnell blamed ambitious policy makers engaged in “the political intrigue and compromise, the venality and hidden agendas” that led to disaster.35 In another account, Joseph J. Trento also called the disaster a political failure, quoting shuttle mission specialist John Fabian on the Challenger investigation: “It just unraveled like Watergate.”36 Thus, discussions of the Challenger disaster spread beyond mechanical error to wide critiques of post-industrial capitalists, skilled at political manipulations in a secretive high-tech world.

     

    The mass media harkened back to NASA’s glory days, benevolent and safety conscious, suggesting that the organization had devolved, degenerated, decayed from a golden age of right rule–benevolent and safety-conscious. The same space journalists who attacked a highly politicized NASA, rhapsodized about the pride and the glory, the “heroic neoclassical elan of the moon race.”37 Little connection was made to NASA’s ever-recurring technical failures, including the horrifying Apollo space capsule fire that entrapped three screaming astronauts in a fiery furnace and melted them into a nylon puddle. Nor was much mention made of NASA’s origins–the “Rocket State” developed in tandem with nuclear weapons, ignited by Nazi rocket scientists, and fueled by Cold War paranoia.38 This lack of a thorough cultural critique left a way open to NASA’s salvation.

     

    The vision of NASA as a once-effective, decadent organization was very appealing to academic theorists who set about to “fix” the agency, using it as a research model. In the flurry of sociological studies that followed the Challenger disaster, NASA’s homogeneity and in-group ambience, its hidden agendas, political maneuvering, and back-stabbing, came to signify the internal workings of all corporations. Social theorists searched for ways to explain and heal the breach in organizational systems, dissected and exposed in a public hearing, fanned by a nationally televised tragedy. Academia, in itself a largely homogeneous entity with its own industrial and military affiliations, responded to the Challenger disaster with a corporate consultant’s enthusiasm.

     

    Ensconced in university government documents sections, the five-volume, disembodied Rogers Commission report provided an easily accessible text for applications of organizational theory and systems models, based on information flow within conveniently closed circuits. According to organizational theorists, NASA was, like the space shuttle itself, a malfunctioning, but correctable, system with faulty components–namely, NASA’s and Morton Thiokol’s managers, and NASA’s external and internal regulatory units. NASA had experienced blow-by and slippage in its communication linkages: some of Morton Thiokol’s engineers had attempted to voice their fears about the faulty booster seals and cold-temperature launches to their bosses, who had essentially ignored what they considered unproven speculations.

     

    Many theorists attributed the communications failure to NASA’s fall from grace. According to this scenario, NASA once had “a less hierarchical and flexible matrix structure” that relied on “nurturing consensus.”39 From these days of childhood innocence, the agency had grown increasingly isolated, streamlined and pressurized, indulging in overweening bureaupathological fantasies about its abilities, despite budget cuts. In addition, NASA’s components had become highly specialized in their activities, languages and fundamental world-views so that, for example, the professional ethics of engineers did not match the expedient decisions of managers.40 Isolated from engineers, NASA’s management engaged in “groupthink,” driven by fantasies of invulnerability and a need for unanimity and cohesion.41 Thus, the decision to launch the Challenger was a technocracy’s “major malfunction.”

     

    Despite rumblings in the media that the space agency was in its last hours after an apocalyptic failure, academic theorists accepted NASA’s continuing existence at face value. Like the shuttle, it was a machine that could be repaired through better interactions and linkages among its components. The machine was wearing out, but it could be restored through an overhaul. Engineers and managers could be realigned. Better brakes could be put on quick decisions. Communications and regulatory valves could be cleaned of soot and debris. The processing system could be repaired to allow the correct flow of information energy, to prevent lacks or excesses of data, to turn away maladaptive codes. Then, tires kicked, the ship would be ready to sail to Mars with human and animal bodies safely enclosed.

     

    The Challenger disaster provided organizational theorists with an opportunity to show that the systems model applied equally well to machines and human societies. Using Charles Perrow’s work on accidents in complex systems, Diane Vaughan wrote that technological failures could not be separated from organizational failures, and that the language of systems applied to both. NASA “malfunctioned” because: “The failure of one component interacts with others, triggering a complex set of interactions that can precipitate a technical system accident of catastrophic potential.”42 The use of systems theory in critiques of post-Challenger NASA was disputed by G. Richard Holt and Anthony W. Morris using Yrjo Engestrom’s “activity theory,” acknowledging that human “activity” is “‘messy,’ disorganized, seemingly chaotic, and hence endlessly fascinating.”43 To ensure safer space flights, Holt and Morris argued, NASA had to accept the internal contradictions and wide possible outcomes inherent in such activity. While the authors exposed gaps in systems models of NASA, their aim was to fix the agency as an information processing system, a contradictory position in itself.

     

    The Challenger catastrophe threatened political mythologies of the final frontier, and, in a larger sense, cast doubt on systems theories and the entire cultural project of systems building. In his Evolutionary Systems and Society, Vilmos Csanyi writes that systems models, despite their predictive value, can only approach the “ontological complexity” of nature, but “the interactions of matter . . . are infinite and immeasurable.”44 Thus, the systems model can only represent a semiotic, self- referential complexity. The models of organizational theorists reflected the strict methods of disciplines and vested interests in the national space program. A radical sense of discontinuity, uncertainty, potentiality, and violence–the ontological complexity of catastrophic events–threatened the fundamental order of disciplines, apparatuses, and methods. Charles Perrow put this in the strongest terms reminiscent of the 1960s radical left: “Risky systems are full of failures. Inevitably, though less frequently, these failures will interact in unexpected ways, defeat the safety devices and bring down the system.”45 Thus,the academic response to the Challenger explosion was an effort to restore stable systems, and, in an entirely self-referential mode, to reassure its academic audience that their systems, ideologies, disciplines, and bodies were still in place and all was right with the world. There might yet be a teacher in space.

     

    To the Stars

     

    One of the outcomes of the Challenger disaster was a massive public relations campaign by space enthusiasts to resell the idea of manned space flight. The National Commission on Space, appointed by Ronald Reagan, produced a strategic planning report in 1986 on the future of space ventures that included renewed shuttle flights, construction of space station Freedom, increased space surveillance of the biosphere, and human settlement on the moon and Mars. In 1989, George Bush called for a lunar settlement by 2004 and a manned trip to Mars by 2019. In 1990, the U.N. endorsed 1992 as International Space Year (ISY), the quincentennary of Columbus’s landing, inflaming the usual cant among U.S. politicians and space enthusiasts about human destiny, pioneering spirit, and life on the new frontier.

     

    In that same year, Philip Robert Harris, a “management and space psychologist” and NASA consultant, published Living and Working in Space: Human Behavior, Culture and Organization, an attempt to justify the use of the behavioral sciences in space settlement design, using James Grier Miller’s living systems theory. The book was introduced by Jesco von Puttkamer, a NASA program manager and strategic planner, who briefly described the post-Challenger NASA as rejuvenated, ready to “penetrate the new frontier of space.”46 Von Puttkamer argued that the Challenger explosion had provoked a public outpouring of support for manned space flight because of an “unconscious, unspoken feeling that we are dealing here with evolutionary forces at work.”47

     

    In behavioral science, evolutionary biology, and artificial intelligence research, systems theory proposes that the biosocial world is comprised of systems with interactive components, allowing flows of information and energy.48 According to these theorists, a natural, intuited law dictates that systems evolve into more and more complex entities: for example, molecules-cells-organisms-ecosystems-biospheres, or cells-organisms-groups-societies–supranational systems. The evolution of Earth systems under the influence of matter, energy, and information flows has resulted in a global, biocultural, technologically regulated super-system. Thus, the world-wide cybernetic information exchanges of the post-industrial world are seen as the result ofthermodynamic, evolutionary processes leading to higherorganizational levels.

     

    Systems theorists associated with space programs see human expansion into space as the next organizational level beyond the biosphere. Thus, von Puttkamer writes that manned space travel allows “Man,” “Earth,” and “Space” to be “one single creative system,” an “intricately closed-loop feedback system, a super-ecology.”49 In addition, the formation of extra-planetary biospheres will be designed for what von Puttkamer predicts will be a new cybernetic species, a weightless species, floating in a space womb, transcending gravity and “entropic deterioration.”50 These ideas of evolutionary expansion into space reflect the principle of plenitude, a persistent idea in Western culture that God created life to reproduce richly and diversely and fill the Void. Thus, John Allen, creator of Biosphere II, the desert amusement park disguised as a scientific experiment in space living, explains that his project will expand life’s quest to fill all available econiches, hedging its bets against catastrophe.51

     

    The idea of an impending catastrophe, by nuclear war, environmental disaster, or cometary collision is the favored reason for human extra-planetary expansion. During International Space Year, Charles D. Walker, assistant to the president at McDonnell Douglass and president of the National Space Society, explained his support of manned space exploration:

     

    Human survival. Political and economic survival in technical competition within the global economy, sure. But more than that: All human creation, all life as we know it, is here on earth. All our eggs are in one basket, one planet. But our embryonic resources are diminishing, and our nest becoming fouled. Our technological nature has given us the means to remove that risk.52

     

    Here, haunted by the specter of catastrophe, the dreams and aspirations of the postindustrial knowledge class 53have been given the shape of science fiction and justified through the nineteenth-century language of “evolution” and “nature” and the twentieth-century language of systems. The rhetoric of eggs and nests reminds us of the dinosaurs, now popularly recognized as warm-blooded, egg-laying, and nurturing creatures wiped out by a cometary collision that brought nuclear winter to the earth. Frequent evocations of “eggs,” “embryos,” “cradles,” and “wombs” reinscribe sexual reproduction within an entirely mechanical environment, a protective exoskeleton of metal plates that will protect, control and manage the human body, and ensure the genetic continuation of the Chosen spacefarers. Ironically, human sexual reproduction in space may actually be impossible, under weightless, radioactive conditions.

     

    The political and social meanings of this consensual future are quite apparent in the imagined space settlements of Living and Working in Space. Philip Robert Harris refers to the expansion of the human species, the global human family, into the solar system, fulfilling a natural urge for frontier exploration. But his space settlements are built and inhabited by only a segment of that family, the postindustrial knowledge class, envisioned as a cross-disciplinary group of scientists, engineers, technicians, corporate managers, psychologists, sociologists, anthropologists, physicians, teachers, journalists, lawyers, politicians, architects, film makers, and designers. Harris writes:

     

    the colonists to the New World during the eighteenth century were largely poor, ill-used white artisans and indentured servants, as well as African slaves. The prospects are that the space colonists of the twenty-first century will be more affluent and self-directed, better educated and chosen. Expertise is required of specialists in cross-cultural relocation and living in exotic environments to design systems for deployment and support of spacefarers.54

     

    Thus, the Challenger disaster provided the text for the post-catastrophe survival of the knowledge class, constructed and maintained through systems theories. The Challenger disaster suggested that technological and organizational systems were ever on the verge of collapse; the massive public relations campaign for space settlements imagines a safe new biosphere, a closed ecology, for academics, civil servants, and corporate managers, freed from environmental disaster, atmospheric impurity, starvation, poverty, disease, and gravity. Harris suggests that this cross-disciplinary community will result in a transformation of human consciousness, a spirit of collaboration that will trickle down to the problematic Earth populations left behind.

     

    A compendium of recent work in space settlement planning, Living and Working in Space promotes the use of the behavioral sciences in mediating a technological environment for human habitation. As part of the space team, anthropologists, psychologists, and sociologists will maintain continual surveillance of human bodies, studying reproduction, sleep cycles, time sense, physical and mental stress, and the effects of weightlessness, isolation, and noise. “Artificial life” may produce time sense warps, “psychotic reactions,” “spatial illusions,” interpersonal conflict, depression, boredom, “anger displacement,” a “need for dominance,” motion sickness, water retention in the face, and a loss of body mass.55 In addition, conflict among disciplines, cultures, and ethnic groups might arise.

     

    The answer to controlling these human disturbances in techno-utopia is the application of James Grier Miller’s “living systems theory,” a complex symbol language of subsystems and processes. In a space environment, bodies become ingestors, distributors, converters, producers, extruders, and decoders, components in a bio-technical system for control of matter, energy, and information flows.56 Thus, differences are transcended as humans become synergistic, ergonomically conditioned components in the metamachine. Here, the “informating” of knowledge workers in a postindustrial economy based on instantaneous communications, erosion of managerial hierarchies, the formation of strategic alliances and teams in electronic exchanges, the potential for “virtual” universities and corporations, is given stability under the rubric of mission success and safety.57 Living systems theory provides the paradigm for a new, entirely planned macroculture that will determine every facet of a spacefarer’s existence, from decor to diet, from language to sex, for harmonious system functioning. For example, Living and Working in Space, sounding much like an L.L. Bean or Land’s End catalogue, extols space shuttle fashion: a “custom-fitted, cobalt blue, soft cotton, line zipper jacket and pants with coordinated blue shirts,” having the functional attraction of being fireproof; other suits are of “light and heat reflecting metallic mylar which also serves to protect from meteorites.”58

     

    Still, cobalt-blue, fireproof uniforms did not save the interdisciplinary, ethnically and racially diverse Challenger seven from utter destruction. Thus, in its designs for the space station, NASA has considered emergency escape vehicles. Jerry Craig, head of NASA’s Crew Escape and Reentry Vehicle planning office, has suggested that the space station have enough “lifeboats” for everyone. In answer to critics who feel that the space station should be made safe enough to do without lifeboats, Craig says, “That’s kind of like saying the Titanic would never sink.”59 Still, space planners are not especially interested in discussing escape vehicles, for then they would have to admit that space travel is overwhelmingly dangerous and that their dreams are as fragile as the Hubble telescope and the Mars Observer, notoriously failed systems. Since space settlements are promoted as lifeboats in themselves, lifeboats for the lifeboats seem superfluous and lack political weight. Instead, space planners stress the safety of their rationally managed synthetic biospheres which include “storm shelters” for protection against solar flares.60

     

    In this Thorstein Veblein fantasy of a postindustrial army in space, fears of impending accidents make all cultural expression a safety function. Indeed, space planners have invented a culture of catastrophe based on faith in prediction. Catastrophe provides the rationale for subsuming the disciplines under “spaceology,” the transformation of the body into a stable energy-matter-information channel, and the continual mapping and surveillance of system biotechnical components. This national vision of the human future counters (and is thus dependent on) the construction of the thrilling and threatening mass media cyborg, imaged as the Terminator or Robocop, who perform destabilized and penetrated social identities.61 Furthermore, the national science fiction of space travel seems reassuring next to the spectacles of disaster in the 1980s and 1990s, not only the real life disasters of leaking toxic chemicals and exploding machines, but those designed for entertainment: graphic nuclear holocausts with shriveling humans in flames; raging dinosaurs ripping men in half; artificially intelligent computer systems trapping and suffocating workers; buildings exploding and falling into gaps in the earth, crushing their inhabitants; planes crashing in an elegant bloody montage of flying shrapnel. Space planners reassure us that catastrophe is our origin and our nature: the Earth-crossing asteroid or comet that destroyed the dinosaurs “allowed a tiny creature, the ancestral mammal, to grow, differentiate, and fill vacated ecological niches, giving rise eventually to homo sapiens.”62 Those asteroids can now be mined for hydrogen, carbon, and nitrogen to feed the transcendent bio-technical organism of the postindustrial knowledge class, emptied of troublesome memory, safe at last.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Gregory Whitehead, “The Forensic Theatre: Memory Plays for the Post-mortem Condition,” Performing Arts Journal 12 (Spring 1990): 100-101. For a discussion of the Futurist tradition of the self-destroying machine, see William Leiss, “Technology and Degeneration: The Sublime Machine,” in Degeneration: The Dark Side of Progress, ed. J. Edward Chamberlain and Sander L. Gilman (New York: Columbia University Press, 1985).

     

    2. Charles Perrow, “The Habit of Courting Disaster,” Nation 11 (October 1986): 329.

     

    3. Charles Perrow, Normal Accidents: Living with High-Risk Technologies (New York: Basic Books, 1984): 3.

     

    4. Perrow, Normal Accidents, 5-9.

     

    5. Testimony of Roger Boisjoly, Report to the President, U.S. Presidential Commission on the Space Shuttle Challenger Accident (Washington, D.C.: The Commission, 1986): 784-5.

     

    6. Elaine Scarry, The Body in Pain (New York: Oxford University Press, 1985): 304.

     

    7. Scarry, 298.

     

    8. William P. Rogers, “Preface,” Report to the President:1.

     

    9. Report to the President, 1.

     

    10. Roger Boisjoly, “Interview with Tony Chiu,” Life 11 (March 1988): 22.

     

    11. Ron Westrum, Technologies & Society: The Shaping of People and Things (Belmont, CA: Wadsworth, 1991): 259.

     

    12. Report to the President, 1.

     

    13. E. Foster-Simeon, “Picking up the Pieces,” All Hands (June 1986): 22.

     

    14. Testimony of Stanley Klein, Report to the President, 213.

     

    15. Testimony of P. J. Wietz, Report to the President, 1437.

     

    16. Testimony of P.J. Weitz, Report to the President, 1437.

     

    17. Harry L. Shipman, Space 2000: Meeting the Challenge of a New Era (New York: Plenum, 1987): 315.

     

    18. Shipman, 331.

     

    19. Anastasia Toufexis, “Good Data and a Feces Crisis,” Time 13 May 1985: 61.

     

    20. James A. Van Allen, “Myths and Realities of Space Flight,” Science 30 (May 1986): 1075.

     

    21. Stephen B. Hall, ed., The Human Role in Space: Technology, Economics and Optimization (Park Ridge, NJ: Noyes, 1985): v.

     

    22. Hall, 63.

     

    23. Hall, 38.

     

    24. McConnell, Challenger: A Major Malfunction (New York: Doubleday, 1987): 94.

     

    25. Collected by Elizabeth Radin Simons, “The NASA Joke Cycle: The Astronauts and the Teacher,” Western Folklore 45 (October 1986): 269.

     

    26. Simons, 272.

     

    27. Collected by Willie Smyth, “Challenger Jokes and the Humor of Disaster,” Western Folklore 45 (October 1986): 244.

     

    28. Simons; Smyth; Patrick D. Morrow, “Those Sick Challenger Jokes,” Journal of Popular Culture 20 (Spring 1987):175-185; Elliot Oring, “Jokes and the Discourse on Disaster,” Journal of American Folklore 100 (July-September 1987): 276-287; Nicholas von Hoffman, “Shuttle Jokes,” New Republic 24 (March 1986): 14.

     

    29. Diane Vaughan, “Autonomy, Interdependence, and Social Control: NASA and the Space Shuttle Challenger,” Administrative Science Quarterly 35 (June 1990): 232.

     

    30. Robert Bazell, “NASA’s Mid-Life Crisis,” New Republic 24 (March 1986): 12.

     

    31.Science 14 (February 1986): 664; Science 28 (February 1986): 911.

     

    32. Science 28 (February 1986): 911.

     

    33. Perrow, “The Habit of Courting Disaster,” 354.

     

    34. McConnell, ix.

     

    35. McConnell, x.

     

    36. John J. Trento, Prescription for Disaster (New York: Crown, 1987): 4.

     

    37. McConnell, 12.

     

    38. Dale Carter, The Final Frontier: The Rise and Fall of the American Rocket State (New York: Verso, 1988): 6-7.

     

    39. Barbara S. Romzek and Melvin J. Dubnick, “Accountability in the Public Sector: Lessons from the Challenger Tragedy,” Public Administration Review 47 (May/June 1987): 227-238. See also Howard S. Schwartz, Narcissistic Process and Corporate Decay: The Theory of the Organizational Ideal (New York: New York University Press, 1990): 107-126; C.F. Larry Heimann, “Understanding the Challenger Disaster: Organizational Structure and the Design of Reliable Systems,” American Political Science Review 87 (June 1993): 421-435.

     

    40. Michael Davis, “Thinking Like an Engineer: The Place of a Code of Ethics in the Practice of a Profession,” Philosophy and Public Affairs 20 (Spring 1991): 150-168. See also Vaughan, 252.

     

    41. Gregory Moorhead, Richard Ference and Chris P. Neck, “Group Decision Fiascoes Continue: Space Shuttle Challenger and a Revised Groupthink Framework,” Human Relations 44 (June 1991): 539-551.

     

    42. Vaughan, 225.

     

    43. G. Richard Holt and Anthony W. Morris, “Activity Theory and the Analysis of Organizations,” Human Organization 52 (Spring 1993): 101.

     

    44. Vilmos Csanyi, Evolutionary Systems and Society: A General Theory of Life, Mind, and Culture (Durham, NC: Duke University Press, 1989): 15.

     

    45. Perrow, “The Habit of Courting Disaster,” 354.

     

    46. Philip R. Harris, Living and Working in Space: Human Behavior, Culture and Organization (New York: Ellis Horwood, 1992): 9.

     

    47. Puttkamer, in Harris, 9.

     

    48. This work stems from Ilya Prigogine’s hypothesis that chaotic systems may take up energy and begin to manifest orderly behavior. See Ilya Prigogine and I. Stengers, Order Out of Chaos (New York: Bantam, 1984).

     

    49. Puttkamer, in Harris, 17-18.

     

    50. Puttkamer, in Harris, 22.

     

    51. Jim Robbins, “Biosphere II: Our Western Home in Outer Space,” American West 24 (August 1987): 42.

     

    52. Charles D. Walker, “International Space Year,” special insert, Ad Astra 4 (January/February 1991): 7.

     

    53. Daniel Bell predicted that the industrial labor force would be replaced by workers skilled in the production and dissemination of information in The Coming of Post-industrial Society: A Venture in Social Forecasting (1976; New York: Basic Books, 1973). For a discussion of the cybernetic goals and fantasies of these knowledge workers in the late twentieth-century, see Grant H. Kester, “Out of Sight is Out of Mind: The Imaginary Space of Postindustrial Culture,” Social Text 35 (Summer 1993).

     

    54. Harris, 68.

     

    55. Harris, 95.

     

    56. Harris, 102. James Grier Miller and Jesse L. Miller, “Living Systems Applications to Space Habitation,” in Space Resources: Technological Springboards into the 21st Century, ed. M. F. McKay (Houston: NASA Johnson Space Center, 1992); James Grier Miller, Living Systems (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1978); James Grier Miller, “Applications of Living Systems Theory to Life in Space,” in From Antarctica to Outer Space, ed. A.A. Harrison, et al. (New York: Springer-Verlag, 1991): 177-198.

     

    57. The term, “informate,” was first used by Shoshana Zuboff to describe the computer’s effects on mid-level professionals. See her In the Age of the Smart Machine (New York: Basic Books, 1984). For the managerial view of the growing information economy, see Stephen P. Bradley, Jerry A. Hausman, and Richard L. Nolan, eds., Globalization, Technology, and Competition: The Fusion of Computers and Telecommunications in the 1990s (Boston: Harvard Business School Press, 1993).

     

    58. Harris, 130.

     

    59. Quoted in Karen Boehler, “Lifeboat to Safer Shores,” Ad Astra 1 (March 1988).

     

    60. National Commission on Space, 71-2.

     

    61. Cynthia S. Fuchs, “‘Death is Irrelevant’: Cyborgs, Reproduction, and the Future of Male Hysteria,” Genders 18 (Winter 1993): 114.

     

    62. National Commission on Space, 65.

     

  • An Other Frontier: Voyaging West with Mark Twain and Star Trek’s Imperial Subject 1

    Valerie Fulton

    Department of English
    Colorado State University

     

    “In the twenty-fourth century, there will be no hunger, and there will be no greed.”

     

    –Gene Roddenberry, to actor Jonathan Frakes

     

    Following in the footsteps of another primetime television drama, Northern Exposure, which has featured both Franz Kafka and Federico Fellini in recent programming, Star Trek: The Next Generation bridged its 1992 and ’93 seasons with a cliffhanger that meshed the cast of fictional Star Fleet officers with another “real-life” historical figure, Samuel Clemens. This trend of having writers and avant-garde film makers appear in popular t.v. series suggests not so much an acceptance of the sort of cultural criticism going on in academia today as it does an appropriation of high cultural figures by the corporate television industry. The industry “sells” Kafka and Fellini to the viewer, complete with the signifying props that have come to denote intellectualism–dark clothing, moodiness, an aura of mystery–all of which serve to take the place of any real attempt to engage the potentially subversive ideas expressed either in Kafka’s fiction or in Fellini’s films. Such strategies of appropriation are particularly important to a show like Northern Exposure, whose success depends less on the images of alternative living it presents than on the standard t.v. equation of thriving capitalism–its main characters include an ambitious doctor, a millionaire entrepreneur, and a restaurant owner–with Kantian altruism, here reenforced by the program’s background cast of righteous but predominantly voiceless Native Americans.

     

    This process by which commodification finally stifles alternative discourse is described well in Susan Willis’s study, A Primer for Daily Life. Willis uses the California school system’s promotion of “earthquake kits” to demonstrate how consumer packaging can result in a series of items’ “complete condensation to the commodity form” (165). She differentiates between camping out, which relies on articles developed for military use yet can also be used to stage anti-military protests, and the earthquake kit itself, the contents of which merely “embody the simulated remembrance of how they might have been used if purchased for a camping trip, but . . . do not give access to social practice or its guerrilla theatre reversal” (168). The process by which high cultural figures become reduced to t.v.’s commodity form differs only in the sense that few Americans are aware of the originary ideas behind a signifying figure. When a friend once defended Northern Exposure to me on the ground that “a show that quotes Nietzsche can’t be all bad,” she hit on the central problem. We live in a culture where “Nietzsche” is a metonym for intellectual thought much in the way that “Kleenex” is a metonym for something to wipe one’s nose on: to appreciate, even identify with, the t.v. character who quotes from Beyond Good and Evil, one hardly needs to have read or even to know of the text. Networks can thus extend their appeal to (and in the process help define) the “thinking American,” whose pleasure comes from seeing the metonymic association in this unfamiliar context, while at the same time risking neither their mainstream audience nor their corporate sponsorship.

     

    The appearance of Samuel Clemens on Star Trek: The Next Generation confirms the idea that intellectual thought can be reduced to the least common denominator of the commodity form. Moreover, Clemens’s appearance on the show underscores the extent to which t.v. programs themselves may unintentionally reproduce ideological assumptions that we consume, store, and later regurgitate. Star Trek: The Next Generation, a show about the future’s altruistic exploration of life on other planets, tacitly helps to perpetuate the conventional U.S. wisdom that acts of imperialism by our government against third world nations are benevolent rather than self-serving, benign rather than aggressive. Clemens’s appearance on the episode in question as an inquisitive and bothersome fixture of the western American frontier situates him firmly in a past where the imperial self was a fixture both dominant and heroic. This portrayal does more than belie the strong anti-imperialist tenor of Clemens’s later work. In being asked to consume the writer as a frontier artifact we are not only encouraged to believe that Star Fleet Command–and, by extension, the television viewer–has progressed beyond the sort of “frontier mentality”2 Americans have come to associate with acts of wrongful acquisition; we are simultaneously discouraged from practicing the kind of intellectual self-scrutiny that might produce alternative modes of discourse and lead toward social change.

     

    I. to boldly go where no one has gone before

     

    Star Trek: The Next Generation‘s U.S.S. Enterprise, the flagship for an entire fleet of Federation vessels, has as its “continuing mission” a duty to “explore strange new worlds” and to “seek out new life forms.” Since it also has the weapons capacity to annihilate a small planet, crew members sometimes find themselves obliged to reassure species from less technologically advanced worlds that, remarkable as it may seem, the arsenal is for defensive purposes only. Unlike the incredulous life form who believes weapons are made to be used, American t.v. viewers have little trouble accepting the show’s nonviolent premise–in large part because we are accustomed to the routine stockpiling of nuclear and other advanced weapons for the protection of our country’s “national security.” Yet the program itself, which pretends to see through twentieth-century self-deceptions by presenting our time in retrospect as avidly militaristic, provides its viewers with still another rationale. The Federation’s Star Fleet officers are not inclined to act aggressively, Star Trek tells us, because everything they need is already at their disposal. In other words, the show relies on Marx’s early notion that human nature is bound to the mode of production to explain how future generations have become more “civilized” and “humane.” The material substances used to reenforce this notion are, not coincidentally, food and energy.3 Here human agency has been removed from the mode of production altogether: “food replicators” provide all crew members with abundant, effortless, computer-generated meals, while the “warp coil” draws on a fictitious energy source to power the Enterprise through space. When not burdened by the exigencies of frontier travel, Star Trek‘s crew is free–with some help, of course, from the Holodeck’s simulated landscapes–“to hunt in the morning, fish in the afternoon, rear cattle in the evening, criticize after dinner, . . . without ever becoming hunter, fisherman, shepherd or critic” (Marx, 53). Nor is this multiplicity of roles limited to recreational practice. Although there is an ostensible division of labor among the program’s main characters, Star Fleet commanders not only manage to avoid disaster by employing the critical methodologies or expertise of absent crew members, they also pool information to discover unified solutions to most of the emergencies that threaten their ship.

     

    But if Star Trek implies that the future will liberate us from alienating modes of production, the program is finally unable to conceive a community based on Marx’s notion of mutual ownership rather than on the principles of state control. Star Fleet is, after all, a military organization, and like all military organizations its order of command follows a strict hierarchy. The crew members’ willingness to obey their superiors is so routine, in fact, that Star Trek‘s writers appear to have become bored with it; their invention of the renegade “Q,” a representative from a “nearly omnipotent” life form, allows for the intrusion of Byronic skepticism without the threat of a specific challenge to the status quo. For instance, “Q” mocks the egalitarianism which prompts Captain Jean-Luc Picard to call his first officer “number one” by reminding Commander Riker that he is, in the established order, no better than “number two.” Yet “Q” himself, who wields seemingly infinite power for personal rather than altruistic reasons, does not present a more attractive alternative to Star Fleet’s hierarchical model. In fact, his character suggests that to be freed from the controlling mechanisms of an “illusory community” (Marx, 83) is to become capricious, childlike, and unresponsive to the rights of others.

     

    That Star Trek portrays an ideal future community in which humans have surpassed twentieth-century greed and aggression while at the same time relying on recursive models of the state apparatus is an unavoidable paradox; the show can, after all, do no more than pretend to know a future we have yet to live. For that reason, I will not question its least probable expedients–that all aliens converse in perfect English, that humans can interbreed with alien life forms, that most planets seem atmospherically conducive to human life, etc…4 Rather, I concentrate on the show’s central paradox, the fact that its future orientation coincides with the exploration of “strange new worlds,” something Americans perceive as a completed historical task. As I have already suggested, the erasure of the present moment from this formulation helps to direct viewer attention away from the fact that exploration, conquest, and colonization continue to be routinized parts of twentieth-century American economic policy. Just as important, however, is the extent to which this erasure reveals the future’s dependence on and connection with the past. Frontier travel can never signify an absolute departure, since not only does this idea imply that our invention of new experience or of new means of socialization is possible; it suggests that we are able to describe otherness without reverting to the language and ideological constructions of the same. As Derrida argues in “Psyche: The Invention of the Other,” “invention does not create an existence or a world as a set of existents”; it “discovers for the first time . . . what was already found there” (338, original emphasis). Moreover, while invention “presupposes originality,” it will “only receive its status of invention” when it is “protected by a system of conventions that will ensure . . . its belonging to a culture: to a heritage, a lineage, a pedagogical tradition, a discipline, a chain of generations” (316, original emphasis).

     

    Tzvetan Todorov, writing about Columbus’s voyage to the Caribbean, provides a means to address these ideas in relation to a logic of frontier exploration. Because guided by a system of absolute conventions and beliefs, Columbus “knows in advance what he will find; the concrete experience is there to illustrate a truth already possessed” (17). Thus, confronted by natives who tell him that Cuba is an island rather than part of the Asian continent, “he decides to eliminate” this information and “challenges the quality of his informants” (21) instead of altering his initial hypothesis. He is likewise unable to register diversity in language; the “only two possible” ways he can behave when forced to communicate with Indians are “to acknowledge [their foreign tongue] as a language but to refuse to believe it is different; or to acknowledge its difference but to refuse to admit it is a language” (30). As Todorov argues, Columbus’s inability to perceive otherness stems from his belief that Spanish language and culture do not constitute “one convention among others, but [are] rather the natural state of things” (29). Such foundational thinking is central to most notions of frontier exploration and conquest.5 Consider, for instance, the statement of purpose used to introduce Star Trek: The Next Generation. The Federation’s goals are both “to seek out new civilizations” and “to boldly go where no one has gone before”–missions that clearly contradict each other unless read through the lens of frontier ideology, which grants new civilizations existence only to the extent that the originary culture has “found” them.

     

    II. “Prime” Surveillance

     

    In carrying out their mission of frontier exploration, Star Fleet officers are at all times bound to obey the “Prime Directive,” a policy designed by Star Trek‘s writers to underscore the future’s first commitment to justice and humanity. The ordinance, which prohibits all Federation personnel from interfering with the cultural development of less advanced worlds, bears a striking resemblance to the mandate now issued at federal parks and wilderness areas throughout the U.S., usually in the form of a sign cautioning against the destruction of a “fragile ecosystem” and requesting that visitors leave everything as they found it. Because the Federation takes an anthropological interest in developing cultures, but is prevented by the Prime Directive from openly engaging in their study, research teams descend to the planet under investigation and conceal themselves either behind an electronic blind or within surgically altered bodies; like the twentieth-century field biologist, their objective is to collect observable data without disturbing subjects or taking them outside their natural habitat.

     

    These measures bear a less obvious but important resemblance to current naturalist strategies in the extent to which both justify surveillance as the necessary precondition for scientific research and, ultimately, the greater good of humanity. I do not wish to suggest that the surveillance of wilderness areas or game preserves is in itself problematic, but simply to point out how readily a logic of “stewardship” translates into a logic of imperialism.6 On a recent episode of Star Trek: The Next Generation entitled “First Contact,” Commander Riker has been disguised and sent on a recognizance mission to determine whether a species about to attain warp drive is ready to assume to the sort of responsibilities Federation officials deem necessary in using such advanced technology. Unfortunately, Riker is hospitalized on the planet’s surface; the surgeons who operate notice his strange internal structure and conclude that he is a different species from themselves. Although this series of events might easily have led to a critique of Star Fleet surveillance practice, the episode focuses instead on the threat these aliens’ recognition of Commander Riker poses to the Prime Directive, which Picard must violate if he wishes to save his first officer’s life. The show encourages us to identify with Picard’s “human” dilemma before we consider the inconsistency presented by his “away team”‘s surveillance procedures, in large part because it portrays the aliens themselves as xenophobic–so much so that they resolve to postpone warp drive testing until they can face a universe in which their culture is neither dominant nor central. This resolve, culminating in a refusal to join the Federation alliance, reconstitutes the marginal and particularly non-human status of the alien race; unlike their leading scientist, who prefers to accompany the crew of the Enterprise rather than live among outmoded ideas and technology, the others are content to remain behind. That Picard’s largesse permits them this freedom, moreoever, obscures a more pressing issue–the impossibility of their ever regaining the cultural autonomy they seek. Like the earth’s remaining predators, which roam our wilderness parks while human advocates tag them, keep track of their procreative habits, and lobby for their protection, the aliens have already been inscribed within Star Fleet’s cultural heritage. They have been seen, regardless of whether they choose to see.

     

    In “The Eye of Power,” Michel Foucault evokes the “Panopticon” as a conceptual model for the Enlightenment’s more general goal, first to erradicate “any zones of darkness . . . established by the privileges of royal power or the prerogatives of some corporation,” and then to realize “the dream that each individual, whatever position he occupied, might be able to see the whole of society, that men’s hearts should communicate, their vision be unobstructed by obstacles, and that opinion of all reign over each” (152). Instead of the social attainment of this goal, however, what emerges is a disciplinary system in which authority becomes “a machinery that no one owns” and “class domination can be exercised just to the extent that power is dissasociated from individual might” (156). Foucault’s rejection of “ownership” as the primary means of attaining and inscribing power is especially pertinent to a discussion of Star Trek: The Next Generation, since most property on board the Enterprise is collective, and money no longer exists as a form of exchange within the Federation’s economic system. In fact, one might argue that the bodies of the crew members themselves have become the abstract property (in Deleuze’s sense of “abstract machinic” arrangements)7 of the moral capital established at the interface between Federation members and the all- encompassing surveillance mechanism within which they live and work. This device, the ship’s computer network, no longer represents the strictly visual surveillance that Foucault theorized, but is instead a kind of “infosensorium” internalized in the body-as-computer, with the result that the frontier of the body itself becomes “colonized” as a self-monitoring machine.8

     

    Not surprisingly, and despite the fact that the computer is used as frequently to obtain information about Federation staff as it is to investigate other, possibly hostile life forms, Star Trek viewers are discouraged from making an overt connection between the constitution of power relations and the surveillance of crew members. Instead, they are asked to see the computer as a direct extension of benign human agency, a tool no better than the individuals responsible for its use. Potential anxiety about the dangers of surveillance technology is further minimized– while, ironically, the process by which the body becomes machinic is advanced–by giving the computer a human counterpart. Ship’s counselor Deanna Troi, a genetic mixture of the human and Betazoid races, has inherited powers of mental telepathy that enable her to bring others’ hidden emotions to light much in the same way that a computer probe can determine their physical structure.9 However, the counselor escapes becoming the mere agent of surveillance practice in large part because, as she is also portrayed, she is a feminine woman who loves chocolate, gossip, and romantic settings. Channelled through this familiar and nonthreatening human personality, Troi’s telepathic powers emerge as little more than a refined form of “female intuition.” Thus, while the television viewer may be able to trivialize her role as a Federation officer, it is almost impossible to imagine Troi as an alien endowed with the potential to “access” human minds.

     

    As these examples suggest, surveillance technology intersects frontier ideology at the level of the distinction between self and other. The concept of an “imperial self” is especially important: regardless of a given Star Fleet officer’s race, that officer’s success as a member of the Federation is contingent on how closely his or her actions correspond to the specifically human ideals of hard work, loyalty, and compassion; aliens, on the other hand, are those who do not willingly subordinate their cultural impulses to the dominant model. For the American television viewer, this ought to be a familiar concept, since it is directly analogous to the commonly held belief that marginalized peoples should be accepted only to the extent that they assimilate white, middle-class notions of culture and value. Dissent among Star Fleet officers, when it occurs, is thus an effect not of bad Federation policy, but rather of covert intrusions from the outside which conspire to make Federation personnel “other”–much in the same way that rising suburban crime rates are thought to result not from discriminatory U.S. economic policies, but instead from the immigration of ethnic minorities into predominantly white neighborhoods. Likewise, aliens who serve as members of Star Fleet Command must continually prove their allegiance to the Federation, usually through confrontations with their native cultures that are designed to reconfirm the superior ideological position they have adopted. For instance, the program’s Klingon Security Officer, Lieutenant Commander Worf, has not merely chosen to join the Federation; his father has been wrongly denounced as a traitor by the Klingon High Council, a mistake that makes Worf “alien” to his own people while at the same time showcasing the autocratic, rash, and narrow-minded impulses of the Klingon race.

     

    Ultimately, characters like Worf allow Star Trek‘s writers a convenient means of circumventing the Prime Directive, since all such characters engage in a continual conversion to the Federation’s higher goals and principles. Moreover, as the figure of one-of-a-kind android Data suggests, the conversion must take place even when there are no originary cultural impulses to challenge those of the Federation. Lieutenant Commander Data’s ambition to become “more human” in particular belies the facile multiculturalism implied both by ordinances like the Prime Directive and by Star Fleet’s ready tolerance of other cultures’ cursory habits of mind–their holidays, foods, ornamental objects, etc.. Designed to resemble an anatomically correct Caucasian male, Data is a perpetual human drag show whose attempts at imitation result in a series of comedic postures. Despite the fact that they may initially suggest multiplicity or play,10 Data’s approximations reaffirm, in the long run, the forces of social hegemony on board the Enterprise, since, of course, these gestures signify each time the dominant rather than suggest an alternative ideological commitment. Data’s choice to become the same thus points once again to the surveillance mechanisms that, in a Foucauldian sense, constitute disciplinary power: by watching, acting, imitating, Data demonstrates how “the effects of power” circulate “through progressively finer channels, gaining access to individuals themselves, to their bodies, their gestures and all their daily actions” (Foucault, 151-2).

     

    III. High Plains Data

     

    In all the ideological assumptions that Star Trek: The Next Generation and its American television viewers share, a complex and contradictory notion of individualism predominates. Just as we are encouraged to “be ourselves” and are at the same time bombarded by stimuli that ensure dominant forms of mimetic desire, just as we are trained to believe that “all people are created equal” while at the same time asked to compete in an economy that routinely discriminates against women and minorities, so does Star Trek‘s position contend that individualism is both desired and improbable. I have already suggested the extent to which the program’s tacit imperialism complicates notions of autonomy and difference. Here, I would like to comment on Star Trek‘s attitude toward radical individualism. On the one hand, the program advocates personal achievement and self-determination, two individualistic qualities necessary for movement within the Federation’s ranks. Captain Picard, for instance, has achieved his dominant status precisely because he is willing to take risks and work outside the strict parameters of the law. It is important to realize, however, that Picard’s autonomy is contingent on an ideological commitment to and ideal understanding of the status quo so strong that even his insubordination constitutes obedience to the Federation’s larger goals and principles; in attaining the highest position of power, Picard has become synonymous with power and its agencies alike. By constrast, the radicial individual invariably poses a threat to both ship operations and the cooperative efforts of Star Fleet Command. Frequent episodes demonstrate that individual crew members who have succumbed to the invasive influence of some alien culture or identity must be subdued, brought back in line; moreover, given the extent to which Federation culture is meant to exemplify the most advanced stage in a strict teleological progression, individuals who evince revolutionary or renegade tendencies often come to be associated with the past.11

     

    “Time’s Arrow,” the two-part episode which features Samuel Clemens, is readily able to engage this process by which radical individualism is marginalized and suppressed, since the story’s premise involves travel to a time which most U.S. citizens recognize as one of vigilantes and solitary gunmen. The first episode in particular draws on the American frontier’s symbolic resonance to construct a contrast between past and future habits of mind. It begins with the discovery that archaeologists have unearthed android Data’s decapitated head from a cavern beneath twenty-fourth century San Francisco alongside “several artifacts from the 1800s–a watch, eyeglasses, a gun.”12 That Data’s positronic circuitry should be placed alongside items which Federation technology has rendered obsolete makes immediately clear the juncture between past and future. But the decision to focus on Data is also more subtly significant. Data’s state of Deleuzian “human- becoming”13 places the android in a perfect position to confront the frontier past, since not only do self- fashioning and a lack of feeling define both the android’s and the Hollywood outlaw’s %modus operandi%; Data’s unique status as a life form makes him the ideal candidate to assume a guise of radical otherness.

     

    In fact, the first part of “Time’s Arrow” features Data as a type of the “man with no name” persona Clint Eastwood has popularized in westerns like High Plains Drifter. Having unwittingly followed a group of aliens through the time portal that connects the planet Devidia Two with nineteenth-century Earth, Data finds himself on the streets of frontier San Franscisco armed with nothing but his clothing and Star Fleet communicator badge. He immediately uses the latter as collateral in a poker game, earning him both the means to continue researching the mystery of his anachronistic “death” and the admiration of bellboy Jack London, who becomes his faithful sidekick. Data’s success in manipulating the economic resources around him to serve his own interests and his ability to command respect despite the fact that he occupies a position of complete anonymity are only two features he shares with Eastwood’s nameless drifter. Though motivated by a sense of urgency ostensibly unrelated to the concerns of those around them, both figures form a temporary alliance with certain of these others in order to overpower a common enemy. Thus, Data’s search for the cause of his own destruction becomes inextricably bound with Star Fleet’s investigation into a series of deaths on nineteenth-century earth; these deaths, attributed to cholera but really the work of aliens from the planet Devidia Two, give common, humanitarian cause to Data’s mission while at the same time displacing the role of radical otherness from the android to the parasitic Devidians, who have travelled back in time to feed on human energy.

     

    That Lieutenant Commander Data’s presence in frontier America can be justified only when the android undermines his claim to individuality finally separates him from the character Eastwood portrays in High Plains Drifter. The drifter, a ghost who has returned for the most personal of reasons–to avenge his death–can never transcend the limitations of this condition to join the citizens with whom he has organized; the spectre from some existential spirit world, he must remain adrift and solitary. The android’s limitations, on the other hand, guarantee that he reacts impersonally even to his own death. In fact, far from sensing a need to vindicate himself, Data considers his disembodied head to suggest a point of commonality between him and the humans he emulates; he “seems to take solace in the fact that he is now mortal” (6). The obvious point is that androids cannot feel for themselves. It is also worth noting, however, that Data has been cast in the role of Hollywood outlaw not so much because of his facile resemblance to this figure, but because he is the character least able to carry the role to its logical conclusions. Just as Data can do no more than approximate the actions of his human counterparts, so can he do no more than signify an image of radical individualism already contained and commodified by American consumer culture.

     

    IV. The Viewer “Sitting in Darkness”14

     

    Data is not the only figure in “Time’s Arrow” to occupy a commodified position. The two-part episode also features a representation of Samuel Clemens that relies heavily on the writer as a familiar cultural icon. Despite the fact that Clemens left San Franscisco in 1866, at the age of thirty-one, the show depicts him in the guise of the white-haired, white-suited curmudgeon whom Americans readily recognize–in large part because a white-haired, white-suited automaton “Mark Twain”15 greets millions of visitors each year to Disney’s Frontierland. Representations like Disney’s serve to foster an image of the writer as presiding over and to some extent creating our frontier past; that Clemens has come for so many Americans to signify this past may account for Star Trek‘s willingness to make him–rather than a sheriff, mayor or other politician–the proper authority to negotiate between the time travelers and their nineteenth-century ancestors. However, Star Trek grants this position of unprecedented power to a literary figure only on the condition that Clemens remain a commodified cultural object. The program’s underlying message is that oppositional thought, like radical individualism, must either be suppressed or contained within the dominant ideological structure.

     

    Interestingly, Clemens enters the program’s narrative as an oppositional and potentially disruptive force. After eavesdropping on a conversation in which he discovers that Data is an “invader” from the future, Clemens explains to a San Franscisco reporter that he “wrote a book about” time travel which “chronicles the tale of a man of our era who fouls Sixth Century by introducing newfangled gadgets and weapons, all in the name of progress” (9). This frankly anti-imperialist gloss of A Connecticut Yankee in King Arthur’s Court16 typifies Clemens’s initial response to the Federation, whose motives he compares to those of the Spanish, Dutch, and Portugese (11). Skeptical about whether the U.S.S. Enterprise can really be a “ship of peace,” the writer objects that this is “what all conquerors say” (11); he also resists Star Fleet operations by stealing into Data’s hotel room, sabotaging the android’s “time-shift detection device,” threatening members of the crew’s “away team” at gun point, and thwarting Picard’s entry back through the time portal.

     

    Insofar as Clemens works to undermine what he perceives as a threat to “all humanity” (9), his actions are not unlike the patriotic resistance efforts of General Washington, Joan of Arc, and deposed Phillippine leader Emilio Aquinaldo, whose ideals Clemens thought should be “held in reverence by the best men and women of all civilizations.”17 Far from seeming heroic, however, Clemens’s solitary efforts to save his race are made to appear intrusive and wrong-headed. His chief mistake, the episode makes clear, lies in an inability to see the “real menace” (9). “Newfangled gadgets and weapons” are not the problem; as one of the Enterprise crew explains to Clemens, technological advances have led to “the end of poverty and the cooperative ways of the United Federation of Planets” (11). The problem is instead the Devidians, who have used advanced technology for the purpose of harvesting, storing, and consuming human energy. The Devidians–not members of the U.S.S. Enterprise–are the “real” imperialists; even the fact that the deaths for which they are responsible have been attributed to cholera suggests a comparison with North America’s first European colonists, who spread this and other communicable diseases to the native population. That the aliens have traveled to nineteenth-century San Francisco in order to obtain their “only source of nourishment” (11), moreoever, suggests that imperialist activity is somehow particular to America’s frontier past. Certainly, this is the lesson Samuel Clemens learns. “Slightly less cynical” by the program’s end, the writer not only claims that his discovery of the twenty- fourth-century time travelers constitutes his “greatest adventure”; he thanks Data “for helping a bitter old man to open his eyes and see that the future turned out pretty well” (12).

     

    By priviledging an image of Clemens as the teller of “great adventures” and displacing his anti-imperialist sentiments with expressions of vaguely patriotic optimism, Star Trek encourages its viewers to contextualize his work in a way that undermines the full complexity even of those aspects it engages. And insofar as the process by which Clemens evolves from “bitter old man” to advocate for an enlightened future relies on the substitution of one discrete ideological position for another–insofar as it relies, that is, on the substitution of a “mistaken” position for the “truthful” one–the program actually neglects to engage one of the most salient features of his late work, its Nietzschean skepticism. According to Clemens, no one group or civilization may claim the right to dominate another on the ground that it occupies a superior ethical position; each is instead alike in “knowing it has the only true religion and the only sane system of government,” and “each [is] proud of its fancied supremacy.”18 He also dismisses outright the concept of altruism, one of those qualities to which we have attached a “misleading meaning.” Charity, benevolence, and self- sacrifice exist for Clemens only to the extent that they serve to gratify individual “self-approval”; a man must content “his own spirit first–the other person’s benefit has to always take second place.”19

     

    These ideas go far toward explaining Clemen’s specific objections to imperialist policy. Consider, for instance, the following passage from his essay “To the Person Sitting in Darkness”:

     

    The Blessings-of-Civilization trust, wisely and cautiously administered, is a Daisy. . . . But Christendom . . . has been so eager to get at every stake . . . that the People who Sit in Darkness . . . have become suspicious of the Blessing of Civilization. More, they have begun to examine them. This is not well. The Blessing of Civilization are all right, and a good commercial property; there could not be better, in a dim light. (286)

     

    He continues by noting that this package of exported “blessings”

     

    is merely an outside cover, gay and pretty and attractive, displaying the special patterns of our Civilization which we reserve for Home Consumption, while inside the bale is the Actual Thing that the Customer Sitting in Darkness buys with his blood and tears and land and liberty. (287)

     

    Clemens not only shows how imperialists commodify values like “Love,” “Gentleness,” and “Mercy” (286) in order to manufacture a fair business exchange out of what might otherwise be seen as the exploitation of another culture; he also suggests that for the “Person in Darkness” to accept the “Blessings-of-Civilization” package, she must learn to value “mere outside covers” more than “actual things.” Thus Clemens considers ideology–not “progress” or “newfangled gadgets”20–the imperialist’s most powerful tool of oppression. That is why, at the conclusion of A Connecticut Yankee in King Arthur’s Court, all Hank Morgan’s firepower and “civilizing” inventions together cannot undermine the foundations of Catholicism; that is why, at the end of “The War Prayer” (1904-5), the “aged stranger” who asks those around him to reconsider their use of Christianity as a justification for violence is dismissed as a “lunatic” by the rest of the congregation (682). Clemens would have been especially wary of a society like the United Federation of Planets, which claims that advanced weapons and technology have enabled altruism, since for him all “material advantage” amounts to “the same thing”; it cannot change the fact that human beings “seek the contentment of [a] spirit” which is “indifferent to . . . man’s good” and is intent only on “satisfying its own desires.”21

     

    In “To the Person Sitting in Darkness,” Clemens acknowledges not only that successful strategies for marketing a benevolent American identity are necessary “for the sake of Business,” but that it is the skillful communicator’s duty to “arrange [the other culture’s] opinions for [it]” (291). What was once the imperialist’s imperative is now, in today’s “global economy,” the duty of those corporate agencies that manufacture televisual and other mass-produced representations for the purpose of securing control over the world’s consumer marketplace. A recent trend in cultural studies has been to suggest that such representations can produce a wide spectrum of possible responses, including those conducive to the exploration and transformation of our routinized selves. This assumption, formulated in part to counter the belief that film, television, and popular fiction are “low” media, the opiate of an easily manipulated mass audience, has yielded a great deal of useful material.22 Nonetheless, I think it is possible to overstate the progressive impact televised subject matter has on individuals, regardless of their socio-economic status or educational background. The danger lies in focussing too much on the cultural critic’s attempt to rescript an isolated representation or set of representations for the purpose of empowering marginal discourse, while at the same time downplaying the economic dominance of those managerial forces responsible for placing the representation in its original televised context. For instance, Constance Penley’s article “Feminism, Psychoanalysis, and the Study of Popular Culture” demonstrates how fanzine versions of the relationship between Captain Kirk and Mr. Spock reconceptualize ways of looking at gendered and sexual identity in order to serve interests not addressed by the Star Trek series.23 However, the fact that certain fans have rescripted the show’s intended parameters by no means changes Star Trek‘s patriarchal treatment of women or its dismissal of romantic relationships in favor of such male gendered themes as aggression and conflict. Nor does Penley’s article explain why the same fans whose stories transform Kirk from a womanizer into Spock’s willing sex partner feel that the feminist agenda implicit in the transformation is one they must repudiate. One might in fact argue, as Penley herself suggests,24 that the tension between these two marginal discourses–“slash lit” and feminism–effectively reveals the power of hegemonic ideological representations not only to dominate the mainstream, but also to make difficult any form of sustained collective resistance to it.

     

    But it is also important to realize the extent to which dominant managerial positions can retain their power even though they learn to “sell” marginal representations, a point that becomes apparent when the discussion moves from naturalized gender roles on the first Star Trek series to naturalized versions of the imperial self on Star Trek: The Next Generation. The product of two distinct historical periods–one in which the Women’s Movement had not yet begun to gain a popular American audience, the other in which “Reaganomics” owed its success to arms’ proliferation and U.S. intervention in third-world countries such as Panama and Nicaragua–each television series may be said to contain ideological concerns that reflect and generate contemporary anxieties about the infiltration of a potentially disruptive “other” into the mainstream.25 Where the two differ is in the degree to which they see both the marginalization of women and the colonization of consumer subjects as necessary for corporate capitalism’s growth and perpetuation. While it is possible to coopt women into the system as producers, and therefore to enfranchise interests like feminism, women as a group are just one target in corporate capitalism’s ongoing need to colonize a subject, whatever its provisional “frontier.” Star Trek: The Next Generation‘s reconstitution of an imperialist ideology thus mirrors the more general process by which television programs work to colonize, represent, and even produce consumer interests. The containment and commodification of alternative discourse–especially that which, like Clemens’s, questions the nature of capitalism itself–is a necessary part of the process. Given this conundrum, one thing is certain: although cultural critics must continue to examine the progressive possibilities that exist in popular social texts such as Star Trek, we must also align our analyses of diverse cultural representations with an examination of the monolithic cultural capital that commodifies diversity for profit, while threatening to manage our critical attention as well.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Many thanks to the readers at Postmodern Culture, and to Paul Trembath, for helping with the revision of this essay.

     

    2.The latest Gene Roddenberry spin-off, Star Trek: Deep Space Nine, suggests a resurgence of interest in the frontier as a place both of infinite possibility and of violence, hardship, and continual strife; this change from Star Trek: The Next Generation‘s view of space as predominantly colonized, ordered, and governed may reflect the U.S.’s recent swing from years of Reagan prosperity to the current economic recession and a renewed interest in libertarian politics.

     

    3.The threat of world hunger and the depletion of our natural resources pose two of the greatest challenges to the environmental, economic, and humanitarian policy of our century.

     

    4.Recent episodes have attempted to provide an explanation for some of these phenomena. For instance, the preponderance of humanoid life forms in the galaxy is the result of one ancient species’ having centuries ago seeded several planets with its own DNA; thus, there is a “real,” not merely coincidental, genetic kinship among the Cardassian, human, Klingon, and Romulan races. Similarly, the Enterprise computer’s “universal translator” is responsible for making sure that all communication on board the ship is conducted in English. These justifications are merely cosmetic, however, and do little to explain the show’s decidedly anglo-centric bias, a condition that is behind the program’s decision to designate English as the Federation’s official language in the first place. Other evidence for the bias includes our solar system’s designation as sector “001,” and the fact that the Federation’s prestigious Star Fleet Academy is housed not just on planet Earth, but in the city of San Francisco.

     

    5. Thinking about the frontier remains foundational as long as one assumes that the progression from “here” to “there” is unilaterally one-dimensional. New writing on the frontier discards this belief, stressing instead what Gayatri Spivak calls the “interanimating relationship” between margin and center. In the forefront of such work is Gloria Anzaldua’s Borderlands/Frontera: The New Mestiza (San Francisco: Spinsters-Aunt Lute, 1987). The Frontier Experience and the American Dream: Essays on American Literature, edited by David Mogen, Mark Busby, and Paul Bryant (Texas A & M University Press, 1989) also works to challenge traditional notions of the frontier by approaching the idea of “new territory” from a number of possible angles, including canon formation and ethnic studies.

     

    6. Just a few of the many recently published books which consider the ethics of wildlife and resource management are Walter Truett Anderson’s To Govern Evolution (N.Y.: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1987); Alfred W. Crosby’s Ecological Imperialism (N.Y.: Cambridge, 1986); Bill Devall’s and George Session’s Deep Ecology (Salt Lake City: Peregrine Smith, 1985); and Rosemary Rodd’s Biology, Ethics, and Animals (N.Y.: Oxford, 1990). Views on the subject range from Anderson’s belief that it is lamentable but imperative that people act on the behalf of other species to Devall’s and Session’s call for human beings to assume a decentered subject position in relation to the world that both surrounds and encompasses us.

     

    7. For an explanation of this sense of the word “machinic,” see Gilles Deleuze and Felix Guattari, Anti- Oedipus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia, trans. Robert Hurley, Mark Seem, and Helen R. Lane (Minneapolis: U of Minnesota Press, 1983), 36-41; for a discussion of “abstract” machines see Ronald Bogue, Deleuze and Guattari (New York: Routledge, 1989), 131-5 and 145-9. For a critique of Foucault’s “panoptic” view of power as it can apply to Star Trek‘s computerized re-centralization of power in Federation bodies, see Jean Baudrillard, Forget Foucault (New York: Semiotext(e), 1987), 11-12, and Arthur Kroker and David Kook, The Postmodern Scene: Excremental Culture and Hyper-Aesthetics (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1986), 170-81. In the terms of this paper, Deleuze and Baudrillard are uncharacteristically compatible, since both Deleuze’s notion of “machinic arrangements” and Baudrillard’s notion of “dead power” theorize power as a field of immanence which is neither centrist nor diffuse, but rather effected in the collective attentions of bodies themselves. Such a view of power explains the absolute coextensivity of computer monitors to Federation bodies aboard the Enterprise–a coextensivity within which power is so all-pervasive it virtually disappears into the experience of “life” itself.

     

    8. For a discussion of the body as a kind of “frontier” whose power to affect and be affected is always open to decoding and re-territorialization–particularly in the alluring presence of capital–see Gilles Deleuze, “Capitalism,” in The Deleuze Reader (New York: Columbia U Press, 1993), 241-44.

     

    9. There is in fact some claim for describing Troi as the computer’s offspring–at least insofar as the same actress who plays Troi’s mother (Majel Barrett) also speaks the part of the Enterprise’s voice-activated computer.

     

    10. Butler, for instance, suggests that “drag implicitly reveals the imitative structure of gender itself–as well as its contingency” (137).

     

    11. For this reason, both Federation uniforms and Federation equipment are pictured as sleek, spare, and antiseptic. The self-willed Klingon “warrior,” by contrast, assumes a Beowulfian guise and inhabits a ship the contents of which are as dark and labrynthian as any medieval hall’s.

     

    12. Quotations from “Time’s Arrow: Part One” (teleplay by Joe Menosky and Michael Piller) and “Time’s Arrow: Part Two” (teleplay by Jeri Taylor) are taken from John Sayer’s synopses of both episodes in Star Trek: The Next Generation: The Official Magazine 23 (’92-’93 season): 6-8; 9-12. The current citation comes from page six. All future references to either episode will appear parenthetically.

     

    13. See Deleuze’s and Parnet’s chapter, “A Conversation: What is it? What is it for?” (1-35), for a discussion of “becomings.” Although Star Trek defines the goal to become human as a goal to become the same–and as such precludes the Deleuzian possibility of an invention of “new forces” (5)–the program constantly exploits Data’s non-human status to produce multiple plots, multiple variations on a theme, multiple encounters, so that there is what might more productively be called the constant illusion of Data’s becoming.

     

    14. Clemens’s essay “To the Person Sitting in Darkness” (1901) was a response to America’s role in the Boxer Rebellion.

     

    15. To mention Clemens’s famous pseudonym is implicitly to acknowledge the extent to which the writer commodified his own identity in order to facilitate the sale of his work. Throughout this essay, however, I have not only deliberately avoided noting the many, sometimes glaring inconsistencies between the opinions Clemens expressed in the form of political satire and the actions of his daily life; I have also attempted to engage the writer only at the level of his work. Not surprisingly, Star Trek collapses Clemens’s ideas and life into a single “personality.” At their farewell meeting, Picard expresses a wish that “time would have allowed [him] to know [Clemens] better,” to which the writer replies: “You’ll just have to read my books . . . . What I am is pretty much there” (12).

     

    16. Star Trek‘s reading of A Connecticut Yankee in King Arthur’s Court again illustrates the program’s tendency to simplify Clemens’s work. In fact, as Werner Sollors points out, the novel is not easily reduced to a clear or stable interpretation; it has been “embattled by interpreters” who question whether it constitutes “light and humorous praise of worthy progress” or is instead “a bitter and gloomy anticipation of the century of nuclear holocausts and mass genocides” (291).

     

    17. Samuel Clemens, “Thirty Thousand Killed a Million,” 52.

     

    18. Samuel Clemens, “What is Man,” 399.

     

    19. “What is Man,” 352, 342.

     

    20. Clemens, in fact, was fascinated by inventions and “newfangled gadgets.” As John Lauber notes in the preface to his biography of the writer, he was even “an inventor in a small way, patenting a self-pasting scrapbook and a self-adjusting vest strap, copyrighting a game to teach historical facts, even imagining microprint” (xi).

     

    21. “What is Man,” 394, 393.

     

    22. For just a few of the many examples of work that rescripts dominant representations in the service of a more progressive agenda, see Patricia Mann’s work on agency, Micro-politics: Agency in a Postfeminist Era (Minneapolis: U of Minnesota Press, 1994), Jane Tompkins’s Sensational Designs (New York: Oxford U Press, 1985), and John Ernest’s “Economies of Identity: Harriet E. Wilson’s Our Nig,” PMLA (Vol. 109, No. 3: May 1994), 424-438.

     

    23. Penley’s argument focusses on the phenomenon of “slash lit,” or the reconceptualization of the platonic friendship between a televisual “buddy” pair like Kirk and Spock in the form of a sexually explicit gay relationship.

     

    24. She comments: “We would indeed love to take this fandom as an exemplary case of female appropriation of, resistence to, and negotiation with mass-produced culture. And we would also like to be able to use a discussion of K/S [the “slash” relationship between Kirk and Spock] to help dislodge the still rigid positions in the feminist sexuality debates around fantasy, pornography, and S & M. But if we are to do so it must be within the recognition that the slashers do not feel they can express their desires for a better, sexually liberated, and more egalitarian world through feminism; they do not feel they can speak as feminists, they do not feel that feminism speaks for them” (492).

     

    25. The shift from naturalized representations of gender to naturalized representations of the imperial self is announced even in each program’s introductory remarks. While the crew of Star Trek‘s Enterprise embark on their voyage of discovery “where no man has gone before,” the postfeminist members of The Next Generation venture “where no one has gone.”

    Works Cited

     

    • Butler, Judith. Gender Trouble. New York: Routledge, 1990.
    • Clemens, Samuel. “Thirty Thousand Killed a Million.” The Atlantic Monthly 269 (April 1992): 52-65.
    • —. “To the Person Sitting in Darkness.” The Complete Essays of Mark Twain. Ed. and with an introduction by Charles Neider. New York: Doubleday, 1963.
    • —. “The War Prayer.” The Complete Essays of Mark Twain. Ed. Neider. Doubleday, 1963.
    • —. “What is Man?” The Complete Essays of Mark Twain. Ed. Neider. Doubleday, 1963.
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Clair Parnet. Dialogues. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara Habberjam. New York: Columbia, 1987.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “Psyche: The Invention of the Other.” Acts of Literature. Ed. Derek Attridge. New York: Routledge, 1991.
    • Foucault, Michel. Power/Knowledge: Selected Interviews and Other Writings. Ed. Colin Gordon. Trans. Gordon, Colin, Leo Marshall, John Mepham, and Kate Soper. New York: Pantheon, 1980.
    • Lauber, John. The Invention of Mark Twain. New York: Hill and Wang, 1990.
    • Marx, Karl, and Frederick Engels. The German Ideology. Ed. and with and introduction by C.J. Arthur. New York: International Publishers, 1988.
    • Penley, Constance. “Feminism, Psychoanalysis, and the Study of Popular Culture.” Cultural Studies. Ed. Grossberg, Lawrence, Cary Nelson, and Paula Treichler. New York: Routledge, 1992.
    • Sollors, Werner. “Ethnicity.” Critical Terms for Literary Study. Eds. Lentriccia, Frank, and Thomas McLaughlin. Chicago: Chicago U P, 1990.
    • Todorov, Tzvetan. The Conquest of America. Trans. Richard Howard. New York: Harper, 1984.
    • Willis, Susan. A Primer for Daily Life. New York: Routledge, 1991.

     

  • Cinema, Capital of the Twentieth Century

    Jonathan Beller

    Literature Department
    Duke University

     

     

    The exact development of the concept of capital [is] necessary, because it is the basic concept of modern political economy, just as capital itself, of which it is the abstract reflected image, is the basis of bourgeois society.

     

    –Karl Marx, Grundrisse

     

    Cinema 3: Towards a Dialectical Film of the Cinema (Books)

     

    What is cinema? By posing the infamous question yet again I mean to set forth the task of thinking the development of the concept of cinema and of cinema itself in terms of political economy and social organization.

     

    Let me begin this kind of thinking about cinema with a quick discussion of the “Capital Cinema” shown and shown up by the Coen brothers in their 1992 film, Barton Fink. In the film, Capital Cinema is the name of the late 1930s pre-war Hollywood production studio which, according to the story, makes cinematic expression possible. This company, as a representative of the studio system, is used by the Coen brothers to demonstrate that cinema is at once a factory for the production of representation and an economic form, that is, a site of economic production. As factory and as economic system cinema is inscribed in and by the dominant mode of production: specifically, industrial capitalism and its war economy. As a factory of representation Capital Cinema dictates limits to the forms of consciousness that can be represented, but as an economic form inscribed by the larger cultural logic, Capital Cinema dictates limits to forms of consciousness per se.

     

    The film Barton Fink, in which the Jewish writer Barton (John Turturro) falls from celebrated playwright to abject existentialist hack as he tries to make the shift from New York playwrighting to Los Angeles screen writing, is about the spaces and sensibilities which fall out of (are absent from) a cinema which is a fully functioning component of the capitalist economy. The movement from New York to Los Angeles marks the movement for Barton, but also for representation in general, into a new era. The climax of the film occurs when the film confronts the limits of its own conditions of representation.

     

    Indeed, the thesis of Barton Fink is that there remains an unrepresentable for cinema: experience that refuses commodification. Although such unrepresentability of experience occurs in the film via specific instantiations of race (Jewishness), gender (the wife who has written all of her alcoholic husband’s books), sex (the homoerotic tensions in the hotel room scenes) and class (the inner life of the encyclopedia salesman), it is perhaps even more interesting to think about invisibility as a general case in capital cinema–a predicament of disenfranchised elements in others and in ourselves. The writer Barton is trying to create a script about the real man, about “everyman,” but when the film finally encounters everyman’s never told biography, the biography of the failed encyclopedia salesman (John Goodman) and the biography that Barton, being preoccupied with his script, has not had the time to listen to, the encounter is and can only be indirect, off-screen as it were, and that, as a crisis. At the moment of the encounter between cinema and the experience of “everyman,” a conflagration erupts. Inside the frame the film set is burnt, while outside the frame in the space beyond the film the very edges of the frame burst and flame–the medium literally self-destructs as the reality principle of the film is destroyed in the confrontation of its limits.1 As a film steeped in the protocols of profit, the particular experiences of Goodman’s mad encyclopedia salesman, that is, the myriad experiences of failure in capitalism, fall below the threshold of knowing possible in capital cinema and are precipitated only as effects. These effects, much like a labor strike, confront the mode of production as a crisis and halt its smooth functioning. The experience of Everyman, nearly uncommodifiable by definition, cannot be represented in Capital Cinema.2 Its emergence threatens to destroy the medium itself.

     

    If consciousness in late capitalism, generally speaking, functions like (as) cinema–relatively unable to think beyond the exigencies of capital, then it is important to note at the outset that cinema as consciousness is overdetermined by capital regulation. Cinema, as money that thinks, fuses the protocols of representation and capitalist production. This claim remains relatively unproblematic until one takes cinema not only as a form of representation but as consciousness itself. The idea, simply put, is that something like the Coen brothers’ Capital Cinema manufactures not just films, but consciousness in general, complete with its possibilities and lacunae.3 This consciousness can be shown to be hegemonic if what I call the cinematic mode of production has fully infiltrated (some aspects of) our minds and converted them into money that thinks. Such thinking money is money of a special form, not money as a mere medium of exchange but, in short, money as capital. The screenwriter for the studio, like the professor for the university and the citizen for the state must be a source of profit. Capital consciousness has a variety of perceptual possibilities, thresholds and limits. In explaining this idea more fully it will be useful to turn to the cinema of Deleuze’s cinema books, that is, to a cinema conceived as consciousness par excellence. Although Deleuze does not dwell on the relationship between cinema and consciousness per se, cinema, at least in its incarnation in the masterpiece, is for him the ur-form of consciousness which challenges state-forms, the very process of mechinic assemblage. No longer a consciousness pared down and limited by the constraints of a body, of a subject, of a state, and no longer a consciousness taken as ideal, cinema in the cinema books is expanded consciousness, consciousness unbound–free-ranging, multi-perspectival and rigorously material– consciousness itself.

     

    My present motivation for such an inquiry into the political economy of consciousness and hence of cinema, as well as for an inquiry into the Cinema of Deleuze, is suggested by the idea of “cultural imperialism.” In as much as the phrase suggests not just “culture,” but “imperialism” as well, and in as much as we keep in mind that imperialism is an economic undertaking as well as an ideological and libidinal one, this phrase today remains an incomplete thought. I mean to suggest here that whatever the project of imperialism was, it does not cease in the presence of the fantasy called Postcoloniality.4 Rather, as world poverty indexes readily show, the pauperization process is intensifying. The “expiration” of national boundaries and the so-called “obsolescence” of the nation state only imply that these national forms are being superseded (sublated) even as they continue to do their work.5 The thesis here is that cinema and cinematic technologies– television, telecommunications, computing, automation–provide some of the discipline and control once imposed by earlier forms of imperialism. Furthermore, the media work to organize previous forms of discipline and control, which remain extant. Transnationalism, which finds its very conditions of possibility in computing, telecommunications and mass media, implies that these media are playing a fundamental role in new modes of value production and value transfer. The cinema, I shall be arguing, is a first instance of these other “higher forms” of mediation. With the globalization of capital it may turn out that economic expansion is presently less a geographical project and more a matter of capturing the interstitial activities and times between the already commodified endeavors of bodies. Every movement and every gesture is potentially productive of value. I am speaking here of media as cybernetics, of capital expansion positing the body as the new frontier.

     

    We are thus dealing with two distinct yet interactive sets of relations here. In the first set, capital cinema regulates perception and therefore certain pathways to the body. It is in this sense that it functions as a kind of discipline and control akin to previous methods of socialization by either civil society or the labor process (e.g., Taylorization). The second moment, related yet distinct from the first, is the positing by capital cinema of a value- productive relationship which can be exploited–i.e., a tapping of the productive energies of consciousness and the body in order to facilitate the production of surplus value.

     

    Before turning to Deleuze I would like to sketch in brief some of the basic characteristics of the larger project upon which I am currently working, provisionally entitled The Cinematic Mode of Production, and then to show how such a project might occasion a rethinking of Deleuze’s cinema books. My argument with respect to Deleuze is that the cinematic mode of production as a world historical moment is already implicit in Deleuze’s work; it is immanent. However, in the name of and desire for a “non-fascist politics,” he represses the concept of the mode of production generally in and as the concept of “the machinic assemblage.” Though it is immanent, Deleuze refuses to think cinema in dialectical relation to capital.6

     

    The Cinematic Mode of Production

     

    The Cinematic Mode of Production proposes a situation and a name for the dominant mode of production during the historical period that begins at the turn of our century and is just now drawing to a close. During this period capitalism and its administrators organize the world more and more like a film: modern commodity production becomes a form of montage. Much as film stock travels along a particular pathway, eventually to produce a film-image, capital travels along its pathways to produce commodities. As in the assembly of films, capital is edited while moving through its various determinations in commodity production. Today, with the convergence of the once separate industries for image and other forms of commodity production (in advertising, for example, the image is revealed as the commodity par excellence), we are in a better position than ever before to see the global dynamics of the cinematic mode of production and to reckon some of its consequences.

     

    The key hypotheses and claims of my work are:

     

    1) Cinema simultaneously images and enacts the circulation of economic value. It images the patterns of circulation of economic value itself (capital).7

     

    2) This circulation of value in the cinema-spectator nexus is itself productive of value because looking is a form of labor. I should emphasize here that all previous forms of capitalized labor remain intact; however, looking as labor represents a tendency towards increasingly abstract instances of the relationship between labor and capital, a new regime of the technological positioning of bodies for the purpose of value extraction. Though this tendency is becoming dominant, which is to say that the relationship between consciousness and the state is more important than ever before, all previous forms of exploitation continue. When a visual medium operates under the strictures of private property, the work done by its consumer can, like ground rent, be capitalized and made to accrue to the proprietor of the medium. In other words, some people make a profit from other people’s looking. The ways in which this profit is produced and channeled fundamentally defines the politics of cultural production and the state.

     

    3) Such a revolutionary method for the extraction of value from the human body has as profound an effect on all aspects of social organization as did the assembly line–it changes the dynamic of sight forever, initiating what can be thought of as a visual economy. As I shall sketch briefly, this economy has been developing for some time.

     

    4) Understood as a technology capable of submitting the eye to a new disciplinary regime, cinema may be taken as a model for the many technologies which in effect take the machine off the assembly line and bring it to the body in order to mine it for labor power (value).8

     

    5) The advent of such a new method of value-transport and value-extraction demands a new contribution to the critique of political economy.9

     

    The hypothesis that vision, and more generally human attention, are today productive of economic value can be supported by showing that the labor theory of value, especially as discussed by Marx, is a specific instance of a more general hypothesis which is possible concerning the production of value. This I call the hypothesis of the productive value of human attention, or the attention theory of value. It is derived from the way in which capital process occupies human time in the cinema and in other media. Assuming for the moment that human attention is a value-adding commodity sought by capitalized media, it can be shown that if to look is to labor, then at least a partial solution to the dilemma posed to the political economist by the very persistence of capitalism presents itself. We should recall that for the radical political economist today, capitalism thrives in apparent violation of the labor theory of value and the law of the falling rate of profit. These two limitations on the expansion of capital cause Marx, Lenin, Luxemburg and others to predict a critical mass for capital–a catastrophic point beyond which it cannot expand. Unable to expand and hence unable to turn a profit, fully globalized capital, remember, was expected to self-destruct. The law of value was to have been overcome and a world in which any of us, should we so desire, could hunt in the morning, fish in the afternoon and criticize at night was to have come into being. Clearly, and despite the globalization of capital, this auto-annihilation has not happened. I am suggesting that, from the standpoint of capital, as geographical limitations are in the process of being fully overcome by capital, capital posits the human body as the next frontier.10

     

    In order to follow the developmental trajectory of ever expanding capital (of which cinema is so crucial a part) one must give thorough consideration to the cyberneticization of the flesh–what Virilio calls “the habitation of metabolic vehicles.”11 Like the road itself (the productive value of which Marx intuited but never showed), such machine-body interfaces clearly shift the distribution of the body over its machinic linkages, opening up many more sites and times for the production of value, multiplying, as it were, the number of possible work sites. Capital expands not only outwards, geographically, but burrows into the flesh. This corkscrewing inward has profound consequences on life-forms. Seeing how modern visual technology tools the body for new labor processes during the twentieth century suggests parallel studies of other arts, technologies and periods, past, present and future. Art as cultural artifact is interesting, but art and culture as technology shot through with historical, libidinal and visual necessity promises a more compelling account of human (cybernetic) transformations. The technologically articulated body does not undergo transformation in order to merely reflect new social relations or express new desires; the retooling it undergoes is endemic to the economics of social production and reproduction–a necessary development of social relations.

     

    Because cinema as a perceptual medium is nothing less than the development of a new medium for the production and circulation of value, a medium no less significant in the transformation of human relations than the railroad track or the highway, human endeavors generally grouped together under the category “humanities” and (perhaps) once experienced as realms of relative freedom can be, and are being figured as economically productive. The entire history of cinema remains as a testament to this practice; advertising, television and culture generally today testify to it.

     

    Certain relationships between looking and value already are and will continue to become sites of extensive legislation and political struggle. The Mapplethorpe photos, the pink triangle, English words in French advertising, and images of sex in American films shown in the Philippines are examples of some of these relationships; others include corporate competition for industry standards in High Definition Television, satellite communications and computing. Here, at the most general level, I am speaking about the commodification of culture and mediation, about culture as an interface between bodies and the world system. Much work has already been done on this problem of the commodification of culture, but none is fully conscious of the problem of the quantitative as opposed to the merely qualitative or metaphorical capitalization of culture.12 A sense of the quantification of cultural value as capital proper begins to shed light on how radical indeed the qualitative shifts in culture have become. The corollary here is that academic, philosophical, historical and aesthetic concerns are essential aspects of socio-economic transformation– haptic processes that integrate the body with social production in general. The amalgamation of the labor involved in such process as the production of cultures, identities and desires, is already and will continue to be the way in which political blocs, however ephemeral, are formed and persist in postmodern society.

     

    The Movement-Image13

     

    As I mentioned, we might imagine for a moment that at a certain point in history (Taylorism and Fordism) the world began to be organized more and more like a film.14 As Geoffrey Nowell Smith points out, the form of assembly line production easily invokes montage–hence, the French phrase chaine de montage, but the circulation of capital itself may as well be thought of as a kind of cutting.15 Much as film stock is edited as it travels along a particular pathway to eventually produce a film-image, capital travels along its various pathways to produce commodities–it is edited as it moves through its various determinations in assembly line production. Like the screen on which one grasps the movement of cinematic production, capital is the standpoint or frame through which one can see the movement of value, the scene in which emerges a moment in the production process. Capital provides the frame through which one observes economic movement. The finished commodity or image (commodity- image) results from a “completed” set of movements. Cinema, then, is already implied by capital circulation; dialectical sublation is a slow form of film.16 Thus Marx’s Grundrisse, a Nike sneaker, and a Hollywood film all share certain systemic movements of capital to create their product/image.

     

    We can trace proto-cinematic technologies even further back in historical time. The standardized production of terra-cotta pots, the Roman minting of coins, the Gutenberg press and the lithograph mentioned by Walter Benjamin in “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction” could all be taken as early forms of cinema.17 Like shutter, frame and filmstock, each technology mentioned above repeats a standardized and standardizing act while striking an image that subjugates the eye to a particular and consequential activity. From the recognition of money to the reading of print, these activities place the eye within the discipline of a visual economy which corresponds to the type and speed of the mode of production. For each mode of production there necessarily exists a particular scopic regime. With the advent of cinema and the speeding up of individual images to achieve what is called “the persistence of vision” (that is, the illusion of a smooth continuity of movement among individuated images) there was an equally dramatic and corresponding shift in the relation of the eye to economic production. From the historical moment of the viewer circulating before the paintings in a museum to the historical moment of images circulating before the viewer in the movie house, there is an utter transformation of the visual economy, marked not least by the movement from what Benjamin called “aura” to what today postmodern theory calls “simulacra.” This movement was accompanied by a changeover from yesterday’s ideology to today’s spectacle. With the increased speed of its visual circulation, the visible object undergoes a change of state. In apprehending it, the textures and indeed the very properties of consciousness are transformed.

     

    The Greek casts for terra-cottas and coinage, the woodcut, the printing press, the lithograph, the museum, all of which Benjamin elaborates as pre- cinematic forms of mechanical reproduction, are also all technologies designed, from one point of view, to capture vision and to subjugate it to the mechanics of various and successive interrelated economies. These forms of mechanical reproduction, with their standardized mechanisms and methods of imprinting are, in effect, early movies. That upon its emergence the “aura,” which Benjamin theorizes, is found not on the visual object but in the relationship between the perceiver and the perceived (it accompanies the gaze, the gazing) is consistent with Benjamin’s dialectical thesis that the sensorium is modified by the experience of the modern city. The development of film, like the development of the metropolis, is part of an economy which has profound effects on perception.18 That modernization modifies perception is also consistent with the dialectical notion that in the production and reproduction of their own conditions human beings modify themselves. Perception’s aura, I suggest, is the subjective experience of the objective commodification of vision.

     

    Because of the increased intensity of the image’s circulation, the simulacrum produced by mass media is, far more than the painted masterpiece, utterly emptied out and means only its own currency in circulation. The “original” and hence any possibility of the “copy” are liquidated in the frenzy of the circulation of the postmodern image.19 With the pure simulacrum, we are looking at the pure fact of other people’s looking at a particular nodal point in media flow. The simulacrum is primarily an economic image; a touchstone for the frenetic circulation of the gaze.20

     

    Aura as “a unique distance” never was anything other than the slow boiling away of the visual object (the painting, for example) under the friction of its own visual circulation. The painting in the museum becomes overlaid with the accretions of the gazes of others on its surface. This statement is merely a reformulation in visual terms of Lukacs’ analysis of commodity reification: “underneath the cloak of a thing lay a relation between men [sic].”21 With the painted masterpiece, which, as a unique object, has been seen by so many others, the viewer’s image of it is necessarily measured against all other imagined viewers’ images. That is, his or her perception of it includes his or her perception of the perceptual status of the object–the sense of the number and of the kind of looks that it has commanded. This abstracted existence, which exists only in the socially mediated (museum reproductions, etc.) and imagined summation of the work of art’s meaning (value) for everyone else (society), accounts for the fetish character of the unique work of art. The relations of production in the production of the value of art are abstract and hence, because they have heretofore lacked a theory, hidden.22 Because the visual fetish emerges when one cannot see the visual object in its totality (the totality of looks in which it has circulated), we may grasp that part of the object’s value comes from its very circulation. The fetish character intimates a new value system; the aura intimates visual circulation in a visual economy. As I have proposed, this circulation is productive of value in the classical terms of the labor theory of value.23

     

    What Benjamin understood as “information”–that is, events, “shot through with explanation”–the rise of which coincides with the fall of the story, the decline of experience and the dawning of modernity, is now recognizable as a predominant feature of new forms of mediation in the capitalist economy.24 In the intensification of the logic of capitalist information society, the pure and immediate visible object becomes ever more recondite, the oceanic bond with it ever more distant. As the distance between the eye and the originary visual object approaches infinity, aura passes into simulacrum.25

     

    As with information, which must appear “understandable in itself,” and the coin, so with binary code and the media byte.26 The media byte is media understood in two determinations: 1) as its particular content, mediation in its synchronic form, and 2) as part of a system of circulation. As with all objective forms that must be reified (taken out of capital circulation, at least conceptually) in order to be constituted as objects, the media byte travelling at a certain speed (in the form of a nineteenth-century painting in the nineteenth century, for example) has a fetish character or aura. As the image accelerates, the aura undergoes a change of state and becomes simulacrum. Simulacra travel so fast, circulate among so many gazes, that the content (as context, as socio-historical embeddedness) is sheared from the form, making the history of their production ungraspable. Indeed, to a certain extent the category “history” no longer applies to them. The simulacrum has value and nobody knows why. This result should be taken as a gloss on the famous phrase “the medium is the message.” The aura, in its conversion to simulacra, means the regime of mediation. The specter of the visible (aura) has become the substance of the visual (simulation). In the visual arena as well, exchange- value overtakes use-value, forcing vision itself to partake directly in the dynamics of exchange. Hence today there is an almost palpable integument overlaying society. This integument can no longer properly be described as “ideology” (since ideology is a concept welded to a narrative and therefore quasi- historical core), but is more adequately denoted by the term “spectacle.”27

     

    Aura, then, is to ideology as simulacrum is to spectacle. In the simulacrum, the particular content of a message, its use value, is converted into nothing but pure exchange value. The amplitude of the message itself is liquidated under the form that it takes. Media bytes realize their value as they pass through the fleshy medium (the body) via a mechanism less like consciousness and more like the organism undergoing a labor process–call it an haptic pathway. New synapses uniting brain and viscera are cut and bound. Internal organs quiver and stir. We arise from our seats in the cinema and before our television sets remade, fresh from a direct encounter with the dynamics of social production and reproduction.

     

    Properly speaking, contemporary media bytes do not have an aura, but have become simulacra. The term aura is better reserved for the painting hanging on the gallery wall–its circulation among gazes transpires at a slower speed. As I noted, the painting’s aura derives from the gap between what one sees and its status as a work of art in circulation. One covets the authentic knowledge of an object that is slowly boiling away under the gazes of passers-by only to be reassembled as an abstraction of what the many eyes that have gazed upon it might have seen. The painting becomes a sign for its own significance, a significance that is an artifact of its circulation through myriad sensoriums. Simulation occurs when visual objects are liquidated of their traditional contents and mean precisely their circulation. Liquidated of its traditional consents and intimating the immensity of the world system, the affect of the visual object as simulacrum is sublime.

     

    Put simply, the aura is Benjamin’s name for the fetish character of vision.28 It is the watermark of the commodification of sight. The frustratingly mystical properties of the aura are due to the fact that it is the index of the suppression of the perception of visual circulation. The aura is the perception of an affect and indicates the moment where the visual object is framed by the eye with the desire to take it out of circulation. Like the fetish, it marks the desire to convert exchange value into use value, to free the object from the tyranny of circulation, and to possess it. The fetish character of the commodity is the result of capital’s necessary suppression of the knowledge of the underbelly of production, i.e., exploitation; it is the mystification of one’s relationship to the products for consumption. Here, this mystified relation, expressed most generally, is our inability to think the production of value through visual means, that is, our inability to thoroughly perceive the properties and dynamics of the attention theory of value in the production of aesthetic, cultural and economic value. The fetish marks the independent will of objects, their monstrous indifference to our puny desire, their sentience, that is the registration of their animation in circulation. Commodity fetishism is the necessary ruse and consequence of free enterprise, and its sublimity is the antithesis of social transparency. This sublimity is further intensified (as is social opacity) with simulation in the postmodern.29 The aura, as the visual component of the fetish, specifies the character of representation, visual and otherwise, under capitalism during the modern period. Simulation, which occurs at a higher speed and greater intensity of visual circulation, specifies the character of representation in the postmodern period.

     

    The Time-Image

     

    It is important to think for a moment that for Deleuze cinema is to our period what capital was to Marx’s. Of course the parallel is not strict since, if you will allow me to misrepresent both thinkers slightly, Capital is for Marx a matter of development, while Cinema is for Deleuze an ontological condition. However, I put it this way not because I want, with Deleuze, to posit cinema as consciousness par excellence, but because I want, against Deleuze, to make an historical claim for cinema as the consciousness par excellence of twentieth century capitalism.

     

    For Marx, Capital posited a universal history of which capital the idea was the culminating moment, in that it allowed us to grasp universal process. The name of the work, Capital, is the hypostatization of the machinic logic that had the world in its grip: a process as a thing (capital), which, when actualized as process (movement) unlocked the secret dynamics between the historical construction of the world and of consciousness. Capital the idea, with its ability to deploy the concepts developed in Capital, was precisely the consciousness of capitalism, at once the realization and representation of the material and conscious processes of capital itself: its specter, if you will. Cinema 1 and Cinema 2 can be taken also as names for modes of production, spectral projections of cinematic circulation in the discourse of philosophy.

     

    If “cinema” as the process and the sign for the dominant mode of production does not immediately have the same resonance as “capital,” one need only begin to think of cinematic relations as an extension of capitalist relations–the development of culture as a sphere of the production line. Thus cinema is at once a sign for itself as a phenomenon and its process, as well as a sign for capital as a phenomenon and its processes. Cinema here marks a phase in the development of capitalism and capital’s utter modification (metamorphosis) of all things social, perceptual, material.

     

    The cinema for Deleuze is nothing if it is not a force of deterritorialization. So too, we must remember, was capital for Marx: simultaneously the most productive and destructive force unleashed in human history. But the cinema, for Deleuze, is an industrial strength modifier of consciousness capable, in its strong form, of unweaving the most arborescent and solidified of thought formations, the most reified of perceptions–it annihilates traditional thought forms as well as tradition itself. Hence its attraction for philosophy. Cinema, like capital, is also a relentlessly material practice which can be recapitulated in the movement of concepts. Deleuze works “alongside” the cinema, producing cinema’s concepts in order to deploy cinema’s deterritorializing forces within the discourse of philosophy. This way of working is to be taken at once as a kind of representational verisimilitude, a performance of cinematic movement/time in the discourse of concepts, and also as a polemic against philosophy that takes on the statist forms purveyed by Freud, Lacan, Marx and other theorists whose work excises from the realm of possibility certain kinds of movements (desires) and blocks their becoming. Deleuze is interested here neither in ideology critique nor in psychoanalysis, the two dominant modes of film theory at the time of writing; he builds his assemblages around the work of auteurs, whom he takes as machines who produce certain distinct kinds of forms.

     

    To write cinema as an agent of deterritorialization, Deleuze eliminates most of it. He makes a distinction at the beginning of Cinema 1 between the work of the great directors–who are to be compared “not merely with painters, architects and musicians, but also with thinkers,” and all the rest of cinema’s products, what he calls, “the vast proportion of rubbish in cinematic production.”30 We will have to consider all of cinema, but for Deleuze, “We are talking only of masterpieces to which no hierarchy of value applies.”31 This leaves him one or two hundred directors at most, and their commentators. We are left to assume that the rest, the producers of “rubbish,” recapitulate state forms.

     

    The translators of Cinema 1 say that “[t]he book can . . . be seen as a kind of intercutting of cinema and philosophy,” but even given that cinema is a force for the unweaving of existing structures, conceptual and otherwise, Deleuze must keep philosophy itself from arborescence, that is, from becoming a reterritorializing practice that would undo the cinema and put the breaks on desire.32 However, this means that Deleuze must write, as it were, without history. As I have noted, to accomplish this unweaving he conceptualizes filmmakers as other great philosophers, painters, and writers have been conceptualized by the New Critics and their legacy, that is, as auteurs, geniuses. Desire, the animus of movement, is to Deleuze what Power, the animus of immobilization, is to Foucault: the name for praxis, the ether of relations, the field of the event. To release desire (that is, the becoming molecular of the molar, the destratification of the stratified) and to weave by unweaving is precisely the desire of Deleuze. How then but through the debunking of history to keep philosophy from producing a field of stratification, from undoing the work Deleuze sees performed by cinema and that he would himself perform in the force field of philosophy (and again in the world) by filming cinema with his numerous and extraordinary descriptions/abstractions of its relations? In short, how to keep philosophy from becoming a state form?

     

    The difficulty of the cinema books is a partial answer to these questions. The fact that there is only one periodization in the books provides another answer. Their concepts are neither hierarchized nor even serialized. Although the concepts emerge from each other and draw on each other, they are not locked into any strict array. Yet, for all that, they have the aura of a profound interdependence. As do the films he writes about, the movement of Deleuze’s concepts sets up alternate economies of forces. These alternate economies are economies of movement, of time, of knowing, which are not/have not yet been produced on a massive scale. This refusal of stratification, the refusal of concepts to become knowledge in Foucault’s sense of the word, makes Deleuze’s concepts of the cinema as difficult to understand within their “system” as it is to understand the “system” itself. His “system,” if one had but world enough and time, would, I fear, end up like the proverbial Chinese emperor’s map of the kingdom that is as big as the kingdom itself–not much of a map for the Chinese emperor, not much of a system for the philosopher. The system is manifest rather as a mode of production–one learns one’s way around by following a path and by wandering about. Deleuze is not building a system, he is making pieces, pieces for us to use in our own constructions, pieces at once so delicately, precisely and precariously placed that as soon as we touch them, they become something else. Cinema is for Deleuze a machine that makes machines. Deleuze machines concepts from cinema’s flows. The consistency of the flow of Deleuze’s concepts one from the other, their complex yet ultimately undecidable relations to an unconceptualizable whole of Cinema (hence Cinema 1, Cinema 2), negates what for Deleuze is fascistic understanding, an understanding that takes the form of recognition, of history. This recognition which for Deleuze and Guattari confirms the cliches of pre-fabricated thought, prevents the encounter.33 The ostensible consistency of method in the cinema books, a consistency that withstands a thousand variations of angle, illumination and content, is here at once the sign of the game of philosophy and its undoing as a state form in Deleuze’s terms.

     

    This fluidity then is very much like the Grundrisse, the first draft of Capital, with one important (historical) difference: it is “post- dialectical,” non-hierarchical and non-totalizing. Like the cinema books, the Grundrisse is also not a solid; it is as well precisely a representation of production process. In the Grundrisse one cannot understand the commodity form without understanding the entire process of exchange. One cannot understand exchange without understanding circulation and production. One cannot understand circulation and production without understanding money. One cannot understand money without understanding wage labor. One cannot understand wage labor without understanding necessary labor time and surplus labor time. One cannot understand these without understanding the falling rate of profit and so on until one can see the grand functioning of all aspects of the model, each mutually interactive and as a result mutually defined. The constituent concepts of capital flow into each other to create an image of social totality similar in form to the grand spiral that Deleuze sees in Eisenstein. Deleuze’s concepts, on the other hand, all precisely defined and interactive, create discrete images of a totality that are individuated and non- interdependent. As with Marx, the process of this totality occurs off-screen, as it were, but unlike with Marx its architecture cannot, even in theory, be grasped in its entirety. For Deleuze the process of consciousness is unremittingly material but can never be fully conceptualized. The concepts abstracted from the materials that make up a filmic thought arise from the way the elements combine with each other, but then fall away, necessarily positing a world outside. However, unlike a dialectical logic, the logic embedded in the concept tells us nothing final about what is beyond the frame: hence the plateau, the auteur, the assemblage. The method here is not differentiation and sublation, but differentiation and transgression. One moves across, not through and beyond. But the necessity of moving across the infinity of proliferations, the tireless press of movement, becomes a beyond–quantity becomes quality, even for Deleuze. This beyond is precisely the conditions of possibility for the time-image. Even though he does not write “in the name of an outside,” an outside appears. The precision of Deleuzian concepts, taken together with the impossibility of finding an underlying logic which explains them in their totality, makes them figurations of the fact of a beyond: they are sublime.

     

    Recall the way each of the sections in the cinema books ends–with phrases like “the three time images all break with indirect representation, but also shatter the empirical continuation of time, the chronological succession, the separation of the before and after. They are thus connected with each other and interpenetrate . . . but allow the distinction of their signs to subsist in a particular work”34 or, “It is these three aspects, topological, of probabilistic [sic.], and irrational which constitute the new image of thought. Each is easily inferred from the others, and forms with the others a circulation: the noosphere.”35 What I am interested in here is the motion of the phrasing. In the cinema books a summary of what came before is already a going after. These are examples of the Deleuzian cut, which as it finishes something off, begins it anew in another key. Always leaving something behind, always moving on to something else, the Deleuzian cut is always, infinitely in between.

     

    The mode of production in the cinema books is well described in A Thousand Plateaus. In the chapter entitled “How do you make yourself a Body without Organs?” Deleuze and Guattari say:

     

    This is how it should be done: Lodge yourself on a stratum, experiment with the opportunities it offers, find an advantageous place on it, find potential movements of deterritorialization, possible lines of flight, experience them, produce flow conjunctions here and there, try out continuums of intensities segment by segment, have a small plot of new land at all times. It is through meticulous relation with the strata that one succeeds in freeing the lines of flight, causing conjugated flows to pass and escape and bringing forth continuous intensities for a BwO. Connect, conjugate, continue: a whole 'diagram,' as opposed to still signifying and subjective formations. We are in a social formation; first see how it is stratified for us and in us and at the place where we are; then descend from the strata to the deeper assemblage within which we are held; gently tip the assemblage, making it pass over to the plane of consistency.36

     

    Deleuze understands such occupation and tipping as characteristic of the cinema. Whether in the dialectical yearning of the image he notes in Eisenstein, the interval he expostulates in Vertov, the free and indirect discourse of Pasolini, the duration of the time-images from the films of Ozu, the effect present in the masterpiece is one of an actual retreading of perception and hence of thought. Cinema “connects, conjugates and continues,” making us pass over into something else. For as Deleuze says, “Cinema’s concepts are not given in cinema . . . . Cinema itself is a new practice of images and signs whose theory philosophy must produce as a conceptual practice.”37 For Deleuze, this practice checkmates pre-fabricated thought and releases desire, either pushing thought beyond itself into its own unthought, or, as Deleuze puts it by paraphrasing Artaud, making thought aware that it is “not yet thinking.”38As the body undergoes new forms of viscerality, new forms of thought are produced.

     

    I am suggesting that the encounter with the paralysis of thought, the encounter with the immensity of the not yet thought that results for Deleuze in an encounter with the sublime, marks at once a moment in the retooling of our sensoriums and cinema’s encounter with the immensity of, for lack of a better term, the world system. The retooling of the sensorium that occurs in the encounters with the unrepresentable occasions in the work of Deleuze a retooling of philosophy. Though I can only suggest it here, it should turn out that the experienced events in the cinema are from the standpoint of capital experiments about what can be done with the body by machines and by the circulation of capital. Not all of these visceral events turn out to be equal. The structures and intensities of surrealism, for example, seem thus far to have had greater possibilities for capital expansion (e.g., MTV) than those of suprematism. Deleuze’s conceptualization of these events (the encounters between machines, value and minds) is, as he himself admits, a finding of concepts for forms. Cinemas 1 and 2, it seems to me, grapple in the language of concepts with the Darstellung of cinema in a manner similar to the way in which Marx’s Capital, or better, the Grundrisse (because there one sees the thought happening) grapples with the Darstellung of capital. Deleuze’s books are at once an attempt to translate the logic of cinema into an explicitly conceptual language, and an excrescence of cinema. With respect to the body, geography, labor, raw material and time, one might well imagine cinema to have become the most radically deterritorializing force since capital itself.

     

    To show the relevance of Deleuze’s cinema to the visual economy and the cinematic mode of production, I have noted that there is really only one explicitly historical thesis in the cinema books, a thesis which at once unifies and divides the two volumes.

     

    "Why," asks Deleuze, "is the Second World War taken as a break [between the movement image and the image, between Cinema 1 and Cinema 2]? The fact is that in Europe, the post war period has greatly increased the situations which we no longer know how to react to, in spaces which we no longer know how to describe . . . . [These] situations could be extremes, or, on the contrary, those of everyday banality, or both at once [Deleuze's exhibit A is the neo-realism of Rossellini]: what tends to collapse is the sensory-motor schema which constituted the action image of the old cinema. And thanks to this loosening of the sensory-motor linkage, it is time, 'a little time in the pure state', which rises up to the surface of the screen. Time ceases to be derived from the movement, it appears in itself . . . .39

     

    The emergence of what Deleuze calls the time- image is a result of the increase in the number of situations to which we do not know how to respond. For Deleuze it leads directly to the sublime, and he produces it as such. That the time-image is also a response to the informatics of culture and to informatics itself, to what Benjamin called in “The Storyteller” a decline of experience, should also be clear: “Was it not noticeable after the [first world] war that men returned from the battlefield grown silent–not richer, but poorer in communicable experience.”40 Shock, whether from war, from modern life in the metropolis, or from the profusion of information, severs organic (low speed, traditional, non-metropolitan) human relationships. Deleuze notes that, “The life or afterlife of cinema depends upon its internal struggle with informatics.”41 Here in Cinema 2 Deleuze, again very close to the Benjamin of “The Storyteller,” writes with the desire to ward off the categoricality of capital-thought, that is, the degradation (reification) of thought and experience which comes with the mass communicational regime–information’s procrustean bed. For Deleuze the category of the time-image, with its attendant sublimity, its ability to cancel or bully thought and identification, names a multiplex of forms that cinema (the ultimate Body without Organs) as contemporary consciousness actualizes as resistance to molarity, to the field of stratification, to the plane of organization of which a key player is capitalism and its perceptual order. This perceptual order is marked by the stratification (reification) essential to capital process. Its overcoming (as well as its recoding) must be taken as a form of labor. Indeed such overcomings and recodings take place all the time. In the social sciences they are referred to as informal economy or disguised wage-labor.42

     

    Elsewhere in Cinema 2, cinema’s struggle with the informatics of capitalism is made more explicit:

     

    The cinema as art lives in direct relation with a permanent plot, an international conspiracy that conditions it from within, as the most intimate and indispensable enemy. This conspiracy is that of money; what defines industrial art is not mechanical reproduction but the internalized relation with money. The only rejoinder to the harsh law of cinema--a minute of image which costs a day of collective work--is Fellini's: 'When there is no more money left, the film will be finished.' Money is the obverse of all images that the cinema shows and sets in place so that films about money are already, if implicitly, films within the film or about the film . . . .43

     

    Deleuze argues that the film within the film is in one way or another a film about the film’s economic conditions of possibility. One should take the citation from Fellini at once literally (when the filmmaker runs out of money his film is finished) and absolutely (when and if the money form becomes obsolete film will be outmoded, which in a way it is). Though Deleuze says disappointingly little about film’s direct relation with “a permanent plot, an international conspiracy that conditions it from within,” it is clear that for him cinema as forms of thought is locked into a dire struggle with capitalism. The cinema of masterpieces is at once enabled and threatened by the schizophrenia of capital. For Deleuze the criteria of the masterpiece is the schizophrenic relation to hegemony.

     

    After writing that “the cinema confronts its most internal presupposition, money,” Deleuze goes on to claim that in cinema “we are giving image for money, giving time for image, converting time, the transparent side, and money, the opaque side, like a spinning top on its end.”44 Though one might be tempted to claim that this is not for Deleuze an implicit recognition of the dialectical relationship between cinema and money–on the contrary, the relationship between time and money, with respect to cinema, is one of reciprocal presupposition, a reciprocal relationship that is not dialectical but, as Deleuze emphasizes, “dissymetrical”–I should note here that Deleuze’s example to illustrate the dissymetricality of the relationship between cinema and money is Marx’s expression M-C-M, which he contrasts to C-M-C. The formulation C-M-C, Deleuze writes, “is that of equivalence, but M-C-M is that of impossible equivalence or tricked dissymetrical exchange.”45 Though for Marx it is the very mystery of the dissymetrical relationship money-commodity-money which produces for him a critique of political economy (that the second “money” is greater than the first “money” raises the whole question of the production of value), for Deleuze this dissymetricality produces the category of the unthought, “money as the totality of the film.”46 “This is the old curse which undermines the cinema: time is money. If it is true that movement maintains a set of exchanges or an equivalence, a symmetry as an invariant, time is by nature the conspiracy of unequal change or the impossibility of equivalence.”47

     

    “It is this unthought element which haunts the cinema of the time-image (e.g., Citizen Kane and the unthought and unthinkable Rosebud which conditions the chrono-logical unfolding of the film).”48 Taking Citizen Kane as a point of analysis, there are three things that I would like to establish here. First, in refusing to think political economy, or rather, in flirting with the idea of political economy in order to do something else, Deleuze is playing a game–his internal struggle with informatics. He ends the section on M-C-M and dissymetrical exchange not by invoking the mysteries of the production of value, but by repeating the line from Fellini, “And the film will be finished when there is no more money left.” At once, in the next section, he begins his writing of cinema anew–the film is not yet finished. Second, Deleuze’s flirtation with political economy takes the form of his concept of cinema–his flight from political economy follows what he believes cinema itself to be accomplishing. The unthought or the unthinkable that drives the time-image is, for Deleuze, the non-differentiated condition of consciousness–it is that which cannot be made conscious. For example, the investigation into “what is the thing (the being) called Rosebud”49 drives Citizen Kane, and causes it to deploy for Deleuze what he calls “sheets of past.” “Here time became out of joint and reversed its dependent relation to movement; temporality showed itself as it really was for the first time, but in the form of a coexistence of large regions to be explored.”50 Deleuze continues:

     

    In relation to the actual present where the quest begins (Kane dead) they [the sheets of past] are all coexistent, each contains the whole of Kane's life in one form or another. Each has what Bergson calls "shining points," singularities, but each collects around these points the totality of Kane or his life as a whole as a "vague nebulosity."51

     

    As is nearly always the case with Deleuze’s Cinema, the metaphysics posited by the masterpiece in question are the metaphysics of cinema generally–the film functions as an allegory for cinema. In the passage above, Kane stands in for cinema: his being, “the totality of Kane or his life as a whole,” is given by the being of cinema which culminates this time in a “vague nebulosity.” In a new key the vague nebulosity which the sheets form marks again the totality that exceeds mapping of which I spoke earlier; it is in the glowing rhizome of cinema in general that Deleuze finds the “shining points,” the concepts. By using the films as figures of the concepts he is describing, Deleuze shows that the films are the concepts. “The hero acts, walks and moves; but it is the past that he plunges himself into and moves in: time is no longer subordinated to movement but movement to time. Hence the great scene where Kane catches up in depth with the friend he will break with, it is in the past that he himself moves; this movement was the break with the friend” (italics in original).52 The fact that this movement was the break with the friend is the demonstration that in the cinema of the time-image movement is subordinated to time since in effect the movement renders the time of the break. Hence my second point, that Deleuze’s flirtation with political economy takes the form of his concept of cinema, is confirmed because a more general rule applies: Deleuze’s flirtation with everything that the cinema touches takes the form of his concept of cinema. Cinema is composed of homologies of Cinema. It is in the search for Rosebud, and in cinema itself, and finally in reality itself as well (“temporality showed itself as it really was”), that the sheets of past are all coexistent. Thus for Deleuze the film figures an ontological (ahistorical) condition. Film itself achieves the ability to mime the being of time, and Deleuze mimes the film. It is because he puts film in the tradition of art and philosophy and because, in spite of himself, he finds truth there, in the forms set forth by Spinoza, Bergson and Peirce, that he does not see the temporal relations deployed by Citizen Kaneas an emergent historical condition.

     

    Cinema is composed of homologies of Cinema, yet certain homologies are discarded. Here, in order to make my third point with respect to Citizen Kane and the cinema books, that the unthought of the cinema books is production itself, it will be useful to recall that Rosebud, the unthought in Citizen Kane, embodies the matrix of desires which inaugurated Kane’s empire building–Rosebud is the repository of desire for and by the forces of capitalist production, the originary formation in the biography of Kane’s libidinal economy. It is also a question: How does this Rosebud, which is at once forgotten, a child’s toy, an eternally blossoming flower, and an anus, relate to Kane’s libidinal economy? Are Kane’s libido and economy fused in the intensity with which the object must be held onto even in the face of the final and necessary letting go, or in the eternal return of a dissatisfaction caused by the cessation of movement which must necessarily occur at the bottom of a hill, or, again, in the hidden and ever renewing promise of a mobility dependent upon a generalized homogenization of the landscape and brought about by a snow that brings with it mobility across all obstacles as well as communion with a certain childhood bliss? Though one could extend this list of questions to include questions about technology and speed and the constitution of childhood, whatever constellation of anality and the holding on to things, and release, of the rhythm of circulation, of the homogenizing and mobilizing effects of money one decides upon, it is perhaps most important at this point to remember that the empire which Kane builds is a media empire. Rosebud, the unthought, is at the core of a capitalist media project.

     

    The fact that all of Citizen Kane‘s great temporal gyrations through sheets of past are not about presenting the mystery of anyone but precisely of Citizen Kane, the capitalist media mogul, and his relation to Rosebud, that obscure object of his desire, is not in itself sufficient proof to show that the time-image has at its core an inadequately explored economic component. Nor can we take Deleuze’s using the formula M-C-M to explain cinema’s dissymetrical exchange with money as adequate evidence for the necessity of doing a political economy of cinema, and therefore as adequate evidence for the need to posit something like the attention theory of value. Even if such an account might help to explain what Deleuze cannot: namely, cinema’s sheer existence as an industry, but also its presence at the provenance of the transformation of the terms of production via new forms of mediation; and even if Deleuze’s many other flirtations with cinema as the formal equivalent of capital formations tempt us to think that cinema is capital of the twentieth century; we can conclude only that a line of thought is cut off in the cinema books. Deleuze writes, “What [Welles] is showing–already in Citizen Kane–is this: as soon as we reach sheets of past it is as if we were carried away by the undulations of a great wave, time gets out of joint, and we enter into temporality as a state of permanent crisis” (italics in original).53 However tempting it might be to suggest that the transformation of temporality in cinema is much more akin to Lukacs’ concept of the spatialization of temporality in “Reification and the Consciousness of the Proletariat” or to Ernst Bloch’s synchronicity of the nonsynchronous in “Nonsynchronism and the Obligation to Its Dialectics”54 than is here admitted, or however much the undulations of great waves and the state of permanent crises sound like descriptions of capital’s cycles of boom and bust, we can only conclude that Deleuze ignores this line of inquiry because he operates with an idee fix that cinema, that is the masterpieces of cinema, operate in excess of capital, are indeed its unthought. This unthought is for him at once the dissymetrical exchange with money, and outside of political economy. My suggestion here is that it is precisely in the region of excess, in the overloading of forms, that we find the creation of new possibilities for production.55 The synchronicity of the nonsynchronous is only one of them.

     

    If Deleuze’s cinema books are to be taken as an enactment of the organizational possibilities of cinema in the discourse of philosophy, then his Cinema is within Cinema; it is a film within a film and therefore, even by his own logic, a film about money. The philosophical praxis which goes under the name of Cinema is a sign of the world system–a projection in the arena of philosophy of the cinematic mode of production. What remains to be done here is to suggest the role of cinema in political economy.

     

    Cinema 3: The money-image

     

    New German Filmmaker Wim Wenders films the cinema as such in his explicitly multinational and hence self-consciously contemporary work, Until the End of the World. There, optical machines interfaced with computers and the human sensorium allow the blind to see through the eyes of another person. This other person, the filmmaker, so to speak, must go out to see things and then during the playback of the images remember them with the feelings he had for them in order that the images may pass through his consciousness and into the consciousness of the blind. The filmmaker’s role, in a manner a la Vertov and Kino-Eye, is to aid those who, in post-industrial society, cannot see because of their bio-historical restrictions. The filmmaker does not, however, as in Vertov, have to create an image of totality, simply an image rooted to the world by passing through a human and humanizing mind.

     

    But in the late capitalism of Until the End of the World, visual representation and the unconscious are portrayed on a convergent course. Furthermore, they are impacted in a third term, the commodity. In a new innovation, the same technology which allows the blind to see is used to record and replay an individual’s dreams by cutting out the filmmaker- other. One of the characters involved in the research on this new technology develops an addiction to the ghostly colored electronic shadows of her own pixilated dreams that flicker then vanish only to coalesce once again as, for example, liquid blue and yellow silhouettes walking hand in hand on a blood red beach. Endlessly she watches the movement of the abstracted forms of her desire mediated and motivated only by technology and her own narcissism, rather than seeking an encounter with the outer world through another visual subject. Her addiction feeds on her dreams and her dreams feed on her addiction. This video within a film is capital’s shortest circuit–an environment where the individual immediately consumes her own objectification. Staring endlessly at video, only breaking off in order to sleep, she is immersed in the time of the unconscious and cannot be reached from outside. The time of the unconscious secreted on the screen is taken also as the Ur-time of late capitalism–a temporality resulting from the infinite fluidity and plasticity of a money that responds to desire before desire can even speak, and a desire which, no matter what else it is, is desire for money, the medium of the addiction. As emphasized by the setting, a James Bond style cave full of high tech imaging equipment staffed by aboriginal people in the middle of the Australian outback, the strange outcroppings of capital circulation are under scrutiny here. In late capitalism three strands, representation, the unconscious and the commodity, tend to converge in the image.56

     

    A different filmmaker might have ended such a history of the world and its cinema here, with a time- image marking the end of the world, but Wenders, who has always painfully yet often beautifully believed in the world, ends the film with a knowing farce: Returning not exactly to Earth, but to the logical time of official world history, the video junky kicks the habit and gets a little perspective on the planet by working in an orbiting shuttle for Green Space. Despite Wender’s partial yet inadequate ironizing of such “political” alternatives which utilize the money- consciousness system with a little perspective, I think that we can take Until the End of the World as exemplary of Deleuze’s argument that “the cinema confronts its most internal presupposition, money, and the movement-image makes way for the time-image in one and the same operation [italics his]. What the film within the film expresses is this infernal circuit between the image and money . . . . The film is movement, but the film within the film is money, is time.”57 In the strange temporality of Until the End of the World, the plot breaks down where the video starts. The video interludes drip with the temporality of pure mediation. Locked into the circuits of economic flow, the time-image is a money-image as well.

     

    The time/money-image that reveals the end of thoughtful action and the impetus to the narcissism of philosophy (or even to the masochist’s elation in sublimity) is not, as Deleuze might have us think, the sole province of the latter half of the twentieth century. Nor, I should add here, is it the only form of the money-image–only the most philosophical of them. In The Time Machine of H.G. Wells, which is contemporary with the beginning of cinema, we have another harrowing time-image of the end of the world: The lonely time traveller sits in his now ancient time machine on the last beach at the end of the world, a cold thin wind arising as the giant red sun, gone nova, droops into the final sky. To avoid the giant crabs that slowly close in on him at the end of eternity, he first moves on a hundred years only to find them still on the beach, so he moves forward a few million more. The giant crabs are gone and the only living creature to be seen is a black sea- dwelling football-like animal that takes a single leap out of the dark ocean. The thin wind blows and in the twilight snow falls. This scene suggests that the forces of reason capable of producing the time traveller’s time machine are also capable of hailing the foreclosure of the human species. Wells’s time- image at the end of the nineteenth century as well as Wenders’s at the end of the twentieth put forth two images of time and its ruins, or better, its ruining, at the end of the world. This “a little time in its pure state” is at once a meditation on the consequences of rationality, and equipment for living. If we reconstitute ourselves in the presence of the sublime, perhaps we become inured to it as well. In our responses, conscious, unconscious, visceral, what have you, we incorporate the terms and protocols of the new world as it incorporates us.

     

    What do the time machines of H.G. Wells and of the cinema have in common? Is not Wells’s late nineteenth-century time machine already a form (in Deleuze’s terms) of “post-war” cinema, a device for the utter severing of the sensory-motor link? I am suggesting that the cinema machines this severing, that it is not a mere response to an objective historical situation that can be reified under the sign of the war. Rather, such a severing ought be thought of as a tendency of convergent logics and practices. Antonio Gramsci, recall, in his essay “Americanism and Fordism,” predicted the necessary emergence of a psycho-physical nexus of a new type in which sensation and movement are severed from each other.58 One must consume such severing to produce it in oneself. After all, like the spectator, the time- craft just sits there utterly motionless as night and day alternate faster and faster, as the solid buildings rise and melt away, and then, still accelerating, as everything goes gray and the sun becomes a pale yellow and finally a red arc racing around the sky. The Time Machine‘s bleak registration of the infinite extensionality of a time which yields only emptiness and extinction emerges only out of the theory and practice of a scientific rationality which we know that Wells associated with specialization, capitalism and imperialism. The time machine is the consciousness of these formations. In many ways the story of The Time Machine works much like Max Horkheimer’s assertion in “The End of Reason” that the concentration camps are the logical result of instrumental rationality.59 Rationality to the point of irrationality; Temporality to the point of extinction–these are the trajectories emerging out of a cultural logic which the very form of Deleuze’s ultimately aestheticizing thought elides.

     

    In processing the time-image we produce our own extinction, a necessary condition for many of today’s employees.60 In capitalism our labor confronts us as something alien, as Marx said. Today we work (consciously and unconsciously) to annihilate our own constitution as subjects and make ourselves over as information portals able to meet the schizophrenic protocols of late capitalism. Just as in one era at the behest of social organization we built ourselves as consolidated subjects, in another mode of production we dismantle and retool.61 Today we are schizophrenics.

     

    If cinema is a time machine then perhaps its sublime is precisely the image of our own destruction (as subjects, and therefore, in the “free world,” as a democracy). The pleasure we get as we consume our own annihilation marks a contradiction as absolute as that which emerges, for example, from the awe inspired by the latest I-max film (an excellent name for a late- capitalist medium), Blue Planet. As our eyes, like those of Wenders’ video junkie, experience the exhilaration of digging deeper and deeper into the infinite resolution of six story tall images of entire continents shot from outer space, the film proposes with far less irony than Wenders’s Green Space that space observation might aid in saving the visibly eroded planet still-swirling majestically below us. This proposition conveniently elides the notion that the present condition of an earth that requires saving is a direct result of the very technology (optical, military, communicational–and the economics thereof) which offers us such breathtaking and “salvational” views. The message of the universal project of Science (which can here be understood to be one with the universal project of “good” Capitalism) is reinforced by the moving image of the awesome and eternal Earth. If in the time images of Deleuze’s “masterpieces” we confront the many forms of our own annihilation, “the impower of thought,” and elsewhere, “the destruction of the instinctive forces in order to replace them with the transmitted forces”62, and if in the time images of our popular culture we confront the apotheosis of production/destruction dynamic of capitalism, then we must confront the question of the significance of the aestheticization and philosophization of sublimity in lieu of a political economy of the time-image. We must question the aestheticizing reception of modernists. And if, as Fredric Jameson says, the spectacle which we consume in late capitalism is the spectacle of late capitalism itself,63 we must challenge the aestheticizing reception of the postmodernists as well. As today’s images hold us rapt, it is our own sensory-motor responsiveness which is being retooled and replaced with an aesthetic and aestheticizing function. What future society might emerge from an apt political economy of aesthetics?

     

    Politics

     

    Could we rethink the hold of the cinema on our eyes by producing another way of thinking about it which at once takes seriously the sublime, the internalized relation of the cinema with money, the function of cinema as time machine, and yet which does not reproduce either aesthetics or philosophy or repeat the work of ideology critique or of psychoanalysis?

     

    I believe it is possible. One might begin to think, for a moment, of cinema not only as an aesthetic or philosophical occasion, but as a variation of other media like the road or the railroad track or money: a mental pavement for creating new pathways of commodity flow. Marx never resolved the question of the productive value of the road.64 Cinema presents an occasion where the question of the productivity of the road and the question of mediation in general take on new forms. As an instrument capable of burrowing into the body and connecting it to new circuits, cinema and mass media in general are deeply imbricated in economic production and circulation in the world system. Indeed, cinema performs a retooling of the sensorium by initiating a new disciplinary regime for the eye.

     

    It should come as no surprise that the labor necessary to produce the manifold forms of our systemic compatibility is our own. On an immediate level this claim implies that we work for big corporations when we watch their advertising, but more generally, our myriad participations in the omni- present technology fest are, in addition to whatever else they’re doing, engaged in insuring the compatibility of our sensoriums with prevailing methods of interpellation. These interpellations reach us not only by calling us into identification in the Althusserian sense but by calling us to rhythms, to desires, to affects. Daily we interface with machines in order to speak the systems-language of our socio- economic system. The retooling of ocular and hence corporeal functions is not a one time event; retreading vision, sensoria, and psyches requires constant effort. It is important to note that we are thinking of organic transformation channeled not only through discourse, but through visual practice. (One must, of course, at this point acknowledge the ear as well.) Though certain hardware remains standard for a time, even the screen, for example, has undergone many modifications in its movement from movie to TV to Computer. Today the screen is again being superseded by virtual reality–in the so-called “fifth generation” of computer technology we will be inside information.65 However, micro-adjustments and calibrations of the practices of concrete bodies are being made all the time: as fashion, as sexuality, as temporality, as desire.

     

    I would like to recapitulate briefly two propositions concerning the question of value: 1) The perception that images pass through the perception of others increases their currency and hence their value. Vision adds value to visual objects. Often this value is capitalized. Inevitably this value changes the form or the character of the image, not least because this value is the bio-technological placing of the image in circulation, its very mediation. If circulation through sensoria creates value (recall the painted masterpiece) then this value is the accruing of human attention on the image. Because the images circulate in regulated media pathways (channels), the media itself becomes more valuable as its images do.

     

    2) In what the sociologists might call informal economy, value is produced by viewers as they work on their own sensoriums. In other words, some of the effort in the near daily remaking of the psyche is provided by the labor time of the viewer. This tooling of the body to make it amenable to commodity flow–to make it know how to shift times and to operate at the different speeds that the non-synchronicity of late capitalism demands, to make it address certain ideologies and desires, to elicit certain identifications–requires human labor time and is productive of value.66 Thus at a formal level the value of media and of images is increased, while at an informal level we work on ourselves so that we may work in the world. Though it is important never to forget that in the present regime of sensorial production, all earlier forms of exploitation (wage labor, slavery, feudalism) coexist with the visual and the sensual production of value that I have described, if to look is to labor, then one finds the possibility of such labor accruing to circulatory pathways of our own choosing or even making rather than pathways chosen for us. Where we put our eyes makes a difference. If we look at things normally obscured, or if we rechannel our perceptions and our perceiving via our own intellectual production, we might–through endeavors such as alternative video, writing, performance, etc.–build some of the circulating abstraction that make possible confrontational cultural practice. The labor of revolution is, after all, always an effort to reorganize the production and distribution of value. It is an attack on the presiding regimes of value in order that we might create something else.

     

    One might think of the cinema as an instrument (along with radio, television, telecommunications) that has, without our really noticing, been the harbinger of a new regime for the production and circulation of economic value at a new level of economic practice as well as of economic conceptualization. Aesthetics and philosophy would then be secondary media (access roads) activated by the cinema. Other cinematic attractions, for example, narrative, circus acts, street shows, identity politics and terrorism, imply other cinematic methods for the harnessing of human attention potentially productive of value; we would do well to follow up the hypothesis of the productive value of human attention.67

     

    If we can dare to think that human attention is productive of value, all of the non-masterpieces of cinema could then be brought back (as well as those of radio and TV) and scrutinized for the multifarious ways in which they have begun a global process of repaving the human sensorium, opening it up to the flow of ever newer and more abstract commodities. At the same time, because we have all been converted into performers and multitudes, they have rendered anything like what used to be meant by democracy utterly and literally unthinkable. The “masterpieces” could also be studied for their participation in certain visuo-economic practices and their resistance to others, though their interest (and status) might dwindle for many. And, I should add, new canons of masterpieces would be (are being) produced by people with different market shares, people who labor and are enfranchised by circuits for the circulation of capital partially antagonistic to the dominant.68 We witness (and participate in) these alternate circuits in the amalgamation of the attention of blocks of viewers in, for example, gay cinema, cinema of the African diaspora, or third world cinema.

     

    What if one thought of cinema not so much as a factory for the production of concepts, but as a factory for the production of a consciousness more and more thoroughly commodified, more and more deeply integrated in a world system? In a world organized like cinema, consciousness becomes a screen on which the affects of production are manifest. What if one thought of cinematic technologies, with their ability to burrow into the flesh, as a partial solution to the problem of expansion faced by the full globalization of capital? In a fully globalized situation, capital expands not outward, spatially and geographically, but into the body, mining it of value (Videodrome). In this schema, television viewers work in a sort of cottage industry performing daily upkeep on their sensoriums as they help to open their bodies to the flow of new commodities. When we come home from work and flip on the tube, our “leisure time” is spent paving new roads. The value produced (yesterday and elsewhere by labor time, but in advanced societies by human attention) accrues to the shareholders of the various media. It is tabulated statistically in what is called ratings and sold to other employers (advertisers) at a market value. But if, for example, we put our eyes elsewhere, or rechannel our viewings into different media, we might build some of the circulating abstractions which make possible medium scale confrontational cultural practice.

     

    Vision becomes a form of work. Bodies become deterritorialized, becoming literally machinic assemblages, cyborgs. The extension of the body through the media, which is to say the extension of the media into the body, raises myriad questions about agency, identity, subjectivity, and labor. Question for the next century: Who (what) will control the pathways in which our attention circulates? Technologies such as cinema and television are machines which take the assembly line out of the space of the factory and put it into the home and the theater and the brain itself, mining the body of the productive value of its time, occupying it on location. The cinema as deterritorialized factory, human attention as deterritorialized labor. Global organization as cinema–the potential cutting and splicing of all aspects of the world to meet the exigencies of flexible accumulation and to develop new affects. Consciousness itself as cinema screen as the necessary excrescence of social organization. Cinema as a paradigm of corporeal calibration. Each body- machine interface may well be potentially productive of value–how else could there have been a Deleuze?

     

    Notes

     

    The author wishes to thank Eleanor Kaufman, Paul Trembath, Jeff Bell, Jonathan Beasley, and Jim Morrison for their helpful comments on the manuscript while in progress.

     

    1. By “reality principle” I mean the set of logics, conventions and strategies by which the film creates the reality effect of the narrative and the mise en scene. The term is particularly apt since it is the eruption of various repressions in the form of walls dripping ooze and sinister sounds which in the film threatens the integrity of the reality principle before its final catastrophe. Sigmund Freud’s elaboration in Beyond the Pleasure Principle of the reality principle as that principle which replaces the pleasure principle and works “from the point of view of the self-preservation of the organism among the difficulties of the external world” coincides precisely with my thesis here that consciousness in its dominant forms is the cinematic excrescence of social organization. To put it very crudely, capitalist production, organized more and more like movie production, produces certain difficulties and contradictions which must be resolved in cinema/consciousness. Sounding somewhat like Max Weber, Freud tells us that “Under the influence of the ego’s instincts of self-preservation, the pleasure principle is replaced by the reality principle [italics Freud’s]. This latter principle does not abandon the intention of ultimately obtaining pleasure, but it nevertheless demands and carries into effect the postponement of satisfaction, the abandonment of a number of possibilities of gaining satisfaction and the temporary toleration of unpleasure as a step on the long indirect road to pleasure.” In his development of this formulation Freud could well be describing the representational strategy of Capital Cinema: “In the course of things it happens again and again that individual instincts or parts of instincts turn out to be incompatible in their aims or demands with the remaining ones, which are able to combine into the inclusive unity of the ego [or in this case, the film]. The former are then split off from this unity by a process of repression, held back at lower levels of psychical development and cut off, to begin with, from the possibility of satisfaction.” That Freud uses the trope of cutting is perhaps no accident. If the “incompatible” instincts succeed “in struggling through, by roundabout paths, to a direct or to a substitutive satisfaction, that event, which would in other cases have been an opportunity for pleasure, is felt by the ego as unpleasure . . . . Much of the unpleasure that we experience is perceptual unpleasure [italics Freud’s]. It may be perception of pressure by unsatisfied instincts; or it may be external perception which is distressing in itself or which excites unpleasurable expectations in the mental apparatus–that is, which is recognized by it as ‘danger’.” The ego here can be seen at once as the psychic consequence of a repressive social order pitted against a polymorphously perverse body and as a theater of perception. As a matrix of mediation it occupies the bio-social space which during this century has been overtaken by cinema in the special sense of the word which I attempt to develop here. All of the above citations of Freud come from Beyond the Pleasure Principle, trans. James Strachey (New York and London: W.W. Norton, 1961); pp. 4-5.

     

    2. This point can be made more forcefully still if we see, with Walter Benjamin, the category of experience fundamentally at odds with the commodification of culture during a certain historical juncture. Experience and narrative are in decline because of the emergence of rationality as shock and information. See “The Storyteller,” in Walter Benjamin, Illuminations (New York: Schocken Books, 1969), pp. 83-109.

     

    3. As I have noted elsewhere, during the twentieth century the world is organized more and more like a film; commodity production becomes a form of montage. Commodities, the results of the cutting and editing of materials, transport systems, and labor time take on the status of filmic objects which are then activated in the gaze on the screen of consciousness. The transformation of consciousness, wrought by the cinematic organization of production and the transformed status of objects, is tantamount to consciousness’s full-blown commodification.

     

    4. By the fantasy of postcoloniality I mean fantasy in the same spirit in which it appears as “the First World fantasy of the Free World” in Neferti Xina M. Tadiar’s essay “Sexual Economies in the Asia-Pacific Community,” in What Is In a Rim: Critical Perspectives of the Pacific Region Idea, ed. Arif Dirlik (Boulder: Westview Press, 1993), pp. 183-210. Tadiar notes that the First world fantasy of the Free World is “the shared ground upon which the actions and identities of its participants are predicated–it is a field of orientation, an imaginary determining the categories and operations with which individuals as well as nation-states act out their histories” (183). My use of the term encompasses a somewhat smaller constituency, intellectuals in the humanities and social sciences. Nonetheless it derives, as does Tadiar’s from Slavoj Zizek, for whom a fantasy construction “serves as a support system for our ‘reality’ itself: an illusion which is structuring our effective, real social relations and which is masking thereby some insupportable, real, impossible kernel” (205, n. 1). In this case the kernel is the persistence of the processes of colonialism itself which are the very conditions of possibility for the institutional construction and deployment of the fantasy of postcoloniality.

     

    5. One need only think of the crucial role borders and passports continue to play in regulating immigration. Precisely because people can’t move, capital, with its ability to cross borders, can pit one national population against another as they compete to sell themselves ever more cheaply than their neighbors. For an excellent discussion of the new form of the nation state see Arif Dirlik’s essay, “Post-Socialist Space Time: Some Critical Considerations,” in Global/Local: Cultural Production and the Transnational Imaginary, eds. Rob Wilson and Wimal Dissanayake (Duke University Press, 1994 [forthcoming]).

     

    6. In thinking the relationships between cinema and capital there is, to my mind, plenty of room to disagree with Deleuze about the fascistic, statist, stratifying, “outcome known in advance” character of Marxism. Despite the lessons of Deleuze and Guattari about the mode of analysis requisite for the combatting of fascism, Antonio Negri, with his emphasis on radical autonomy and revolutionary subjectivity, provides one alternate example, while Gramsci, whom Deleuze never ventures to touch, provides another.

     

    7. For a more complete discussion of this sketch of an idea see my essay “The Circulating Eye,” Communication Research (Sage Publications, vol. 20, no. 2, April 1993), pp. 298-313.

     

    8. See my essay on Robocop 2 entitled “Desiring the Involuntary,” which discusses the cyberneticization of the flesh as a further realization of what cinema has been doing to its audiences all along, in Global/Local: Cultural Production and the Transnational Imaginary (cited above).

     

    9. Two related lines of thought: First, that the new technologies for mining economic value from human flesh produce a new type or class of worker equipped to meet the protocols of flexible accumulation (by this logic, all TV viewers are involved in “cottage industry”); and second, that an elaboration of the dynamics, properties and economic relations of “infomercial” labor will help to theorize other kinds of informal economies.

     

    10. I develop this idea in an essay on S. Eisenstein, I.P. Pavlov and F.W. Taylor, “The Spectatorship of the Proletariat.”

     

    11. Paul Virilio, Speed and Politics (New York: Semiotext(e), 1986).

     

    12. I am thinking here of the work of Pierre Bourdieu, Jean Baudrillard, and Jean-Francois Lyotard as well as that of Walter Benjamin, Theodore Adorno and other members of the Frankfurt School. More recently, the very interesting work of Jennifer Wicke, Mark Seltzer and Anne Friedberg has addressed the commodification of vision and visual culture. It is my contention that though all of these thinkers see the logic of commodification at work in the articulation of cultural forms, commodification remains for them largely metaphorical, a code.

     

    13. I should note here that my use of the term “movement-image” differs somewhat from that of Deleuze’s use of the term. My critique of his work necessarily demands an adaptation of certain aspects of his language and a refusal of other aspects. Though I accept the category “movement-image” just as I accept the category “cinema,” I cannot argue with Deleuze at every point along the way, at every point along his way, if I am to say what I want to say even in this preliminary way. To show the dialectical aspects of the movement-image I need to tell another story–one that does not find the movement-image in the masterpieces, but the masterpieces in it.

     

    14. In David Bordwell, Janet Staiger and Kristin Thompson, The Classical Hollywood Cinema: Film Style and Mode of Production to 1960 (New York: Columbia University Press, 1985), Janet Staiger has noted that “Hollywood’s mode of production has been characterized as a factory system akin to that used by a Ford plant, and Hollywood often praised its own work structure for its efficient mass production of entertaining films.” Though I do not disagree with this I am arguing the opposite as well: rather than cinematic production copying Fordism, I would argue that it is an advance over Fordism. Cinematic production uses the practices of Fordism but begins the dematerialization of the commodity form, a tendency which, more than anything else, characterizes the course of economic production during this century. Rather than requiring a State to build the roads that enable the circulation of its commodities, as did Ford, the cinema builds its pathways of circulation directly into the eyes and sensoriums of its viewers. It is the viewers who perform the labor that opens the pathways for new commodities.

     

    15. Geoffrey Nowell Smith points this out in his introduction to Eisenstein Volume 2: Towards a Theory of Montage, eds. Michael Glenny and Richard Taylor (London: BFI, 1991).

     

    16. In the cinema, the technologies for the organization of production and of the sensorium converge. Film/Capital is cut to produce an image. Today, the convergence of the once separate industries for image production and for other forms of commodity production (in advertising, for example, the image is revealed as the commodity par excellence) realizes a new and hybridized form: the image-commodity.

     

    17. Walter Benjamin, Illuminations, pp. 217-251.

     

    18. “The film is the art form that is in keeping with the increased threat to his life which modern man has to face. Man’s need to expose himself to shock effects is his adjustment to the dangers threatening him. The film corresponds to profound changes in the apperceptive apparatus–changes that are experienced by the man in the street in big-city traffic, on a historical scale by every present day citizen” (Illuminations, p. 250, n. 19).

     

    19. Deleuze, in a characteristic and brilliant reading of Plato, provides an analysis of simulation and suggests that it has always haunted the house of philosophy. What I find characteristic about this essay is that in locating the need for idealism to banish simulation in Greek philosophy, Deleuze elides the historical problem of simulation: Why is it possible to make this analysis now? See “The Simulacrum and Ancient Philosophy,” in The Logic of Sense, ed. Constantin V. Boundas (New York: Columbia University Press, 1990).

     

    20. Instead of withering away like the State, the fetish character of vision, the mystical warping of the visual field surrounding the visual object of perception called “aura,” has achieved, in the situation of televisual reproduction under capitalism, a change of state on par with the change in the status of the object itself: today’s equivalent of aura is the simulacrum. This change of state in the object’s specter raises questions about the changing characteristics of mediation and the historical causes thereof.

     

    21. Georg Lukacs, “Reification and the Consciousness of the Proletariat,” in History and Class Consciousness (Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1971).

     

    22. Here it is is important to note that I am speaking about the production of value generally. Whether or not this value will be capitalized depends upon a variety of factors, including how pervasively capital has prevaded the arena of the work of art’s “consumption.”

     

    23. That Benjamin at one point extracts the aura from the solitary seer’s gaze upon a tree branch serves only to prove that the supplemental excess of vision that is the aura is not particular to any one moment in an economy of vision, but is distributed along all nodal points in the economy of sight. That which Benjamin called “distance” is actually the irreducibility of the visual object into a static object free from the visual circulation which eventually annihilates the visual object as an object of sight. This finally is as simple as the fact that we cannot look at the same thing forever and that things impel us to look at other things. The way in which our gaze moves is directly related to the way in which our bodies and our eyes are plugged into the economy itself. “Distance,” then, is a form of vibration between the two determinations of mediation. Like the commodity, the object of vision occupies two states simultaneously, it is at once a thing, a use value, and a place holder in the syntax of an economy of vision, an exchange value. The experience of unbridgeable distance registers the impending disappearance or submergence of any visual object back into the regulated circulation of vision itself. Distance, that is, aura, is the poignant registration of the visual object’s oscillation between its two determinations: an object of vision, and a moment in the circulation of vision.

     

    24. Illuminations, p. 89. Benjamin notes in “The Storyteller,” the essay from which this citation is taken, that “It is half the art of storytelling to keep a story free from explanation as one reproduces it,” (Illuminations, p. 89). Storytelling in the essay is pitted against the production of events designed for easy consumption, that is, what Benjamin presciently calls “information.” The clash of storytelling and information in this wonderful essay stages the confrontation of two modes of production which also clash in “The Work of Art,” the pre-industrial and the modern.

     

    25. Information, as it turns out, has less use-value outside of the circuits of the market than did storytelling. It is not knowledge really; to function it must remain in channels. It is important here to distinguish between mediation per se, as in the mediation of events by a medieval manuscript or the transportation of sugar cane on a barge, and mediation in its self-conscious form; that is, media as media that, like the commodity in circulation, has both a particular component (use value) and an abstract component (exchange value) in every “byte.” To understand media thus is to argue that each infinitesimally small slice of media has value both in its content, its information, and in its form as media itself. Media as media always posits and refers back to the circulatory system in which it has and is currency.

     

    26. Illuminations, p. 89.

     

    27. What Benjamin only peripherally perceives about the phenomenon that he dubs aura is that it is an artifact of a visual economy. His perception of it marks a shift in the speed of the circulation of visual economy. The aura, as observed and constructed by Benjamin, is a primordial form of the exchange value of the visual object produced by the systematic circulation of looks, and hence of “images,” in an emerging economy of sight. The labor power accreting to the visual object gives it a certain palpable agency; that is why compelling objects look back. In the moment of their looking at us, we encounter the indifference of the value-system to our own being. In the postmodern, objects look back at us with such intensity that they see through us. In their indifference to our individuality is their sublimity. Benjamin records earlier experiences of this kind of event. Quoting Proust, he transcribes, “Some people who are fond of secrets flatter themselves that objects retain something of the gaze that has rested on them,” adding, “(The ability it would seem, of returning the gaze.)” As Benjamin notes, “To perceive the aura of an object we look at means to invest it with the ability to look at us in return.” In his effort to define the auratic he quotes Valery as well: “To say, ‘Here I see such and such an object’ does not establish an equation between me and the object….In dreams, however, there is an equation. The things I see, see me just as much as I see them” (“On Some Motifs in Baudelaire,” in Illuminations, pp. 188 and 189). The concept of the aura is the semi-conscious acknowledgement of the work or image as simultaneously commodity and currency–as being at once itself (an object) and a moment in the circulation of vision. As with storytelling itself, which for Benjamin becomes a topic on the eve of its extinction, the aura becomes observable as soon as there is a transformation in the status of objects. Visual objects, like the events that are no longer held in an organic relation by storytelling but instead appear as information, appear via a new mode of production in the modern. This mode of production functions at a new speed.

     

    28. Through the eye one may grasp the dynamics of circulation in general. Because such disappearance of authenticity is at once more clearly marked in the realm of the visual (Benjamin, Berger, Baudrillard) and, simultaneously, at present more characteristic of late capitalism, I will here restrict my comments to the visual component of aura.

     

    29. If one takes the fetish as an intimation, to the abject individual, of the power of the world system, then it could be said that simulation as spectacle is a dim version of the sublime; it occurs when the shutter on the lamp of the unrepresentable is just barely open. If simulation is an excess of reference without a clear referent, then the sublime is an excess of referent without adequate reference. All the simulation in the world cannot represent the world system, even though the sublimity of such a spectacle evokes its ominous presence. This dual inadequation between a symbolic which cannot represent its object and an object which cannot find its symbolic representation defines the semantic field of the postmodern condition.

     

    30. Gilles Deleuze, Cinema 1: The Movement-Image, trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara Habberjam (Minneapolis: The University of Minnesota Press, 1986), p. xiv.

     

    31. Cinema 1, x.

     

    32. Cinema 1, xii.

     

    33. Gilles Deleuze and Claire Parnet, Dialogues, trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara Habberjam (New York: Columbia University Press, 1987).

     

    34. Gilles Deleuze, Cinema 2: The Time-Image, Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Robert Galeta (Minneapolis: Minnesota Press, 1989), p. 155.

     

    35. Cinema 2, 215. Deleuze defines the noosphere as follows: “The noosphere is the sphere of the noosign–an image which goes beyond itself towards something which can only be thought” (Cinema 2, 335).

     

    36. Gilles Deleuze and Felix Guattari, A Thousand Plateaus, trans. Brian Massumi (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press), p. 161.

     

    37. Cinema 2, 280.

     

    38. Cinema 2, 167

     

    39. Cinema 2, xi. For a thumbnail sketch with which to see the difference between the movement-image and the time-image, think of the difference between Griffith and Antonioni, or between Eisenstein and Tarkovsky.

     

    40. Illuminations, 84.

     

    41. Cinema 2, 270.

     

    42. See The Informal Economy: Studies in Advanced and Less Developed Countries, eds. Alejandro Portes, Manuel Castells and Lauren A. Benton (Baltimore: Thge Johns Hopkins University Press, 1989). I am suggesting that in the humanities such informal practices occur in the sphere of literature, film, criticism, television, style, politics, etc., in short, culture. The negotiation of value at the level of consciousness is at once socially necessary labor and unregistered in the GNP.

     

    43. Cinema 2, 77.

     

    44. Cinema 2, 78.

     

    45. Cinema 2, 78.

     

    46. Cinema 2, 77.

     

    47. Cinema 2, 78.

     

    48. For this comment I am indebted here to the readers at Postmodern Culture whose valuable suggestions are to be found doing their work throughout this paragraph, the previous one, and the one that follows.

     

    49. Cinema 2, 105.

     

    50. Cinema 2, 105. In the context of another discussion, this sentence might well describe the relationship between history (historical sheets) in the spatialized present of the postmodern. I add this thought because my project in this section is to show the historical conditions of possibility for Deleuze’s thought and for the resonance of this thought in us. To argue that what Deleuze finds uniquely in the cinema is at present part of a generalized perceptual bathosphere seems to me to be a precondition for the suggestion I am making here concerning media’s pre- eminent place in political economy. Political economy is the unthought of media theory even as it is the empirical if mystified practice of media itself.

     

    51. Cinema 2, 105-6.

     

    52. Cinema 2, 106.

     

    53. Cinema 2, 112.

     

    54. Ernst Bloch, “Nosnsynchronism and the Obligation to Its Dialectics,” trans. Mark Ritter, New German Critique, no. 11, 1977 pp. 22-38.

     

    55. Though Deleuze would most likely agree with this statement, he would not however be in accord with the idea that production as such can be productively thought about in terms of political economy. The machinic assemblage, for example, is for him precisely a mode of production that avoids what he takes to be the Oedipalizing tendencies of Marxism which returns all variations to the law of value. Whether or not Deleuze is correct on this matter I leave to readers to decide. Here I would only like to suggest that the philosophical sources upon which Deleuze draws so heavily in the cinema books, namely Henri Bergson and Charles S. Peirce, particularly with respect to their work on quality–which arises from a certain excess and manifests itself in time–might be analyzed using the strategy adopted by Georg Lukacs in his analysis of Kant. By posing the question, what has capital done to perception and consciousness, or alternately, how are models of perception and consciousness and the consciousness they depict utilized by capital, the work of these philosophers might take on a new significance. Peirce defines thirdness, the category that in part gives rise to Deleuze’s category of the time-image, as “that which is what it is by virtue of imparting a quality to reactions in the future” (Philosophical Writings of Peirce, ed. Justus Buchler, New York: Dover Publications, 1955; p.91). This idea of a guiding persistence manifest in such formulations as “Not only will meaning always, more or less, in the long run, mould reactions to itself, but it is only in doing so that its own being consists” (91), might well be considered in the light of the emergence of organizational relations which inflect the construction and the circulation of objects, i.e, developments in capital circulation which orchestrate the temporality of objects and thus change the character of their significance. Such affects might be briefly classed as aura, fetish, or the ideology of private property, but their variety might be, finally, as diverse as affect itself. Bergson too, who claims that “our perception . . . is originally in things rather than in the mind, without us rather than within” (Matter and Memory, trans. Nancy Margaret Paul and W. Scott Palmer [Garden City: Doubleday, 1959], p. 215), might be studied in light of the diminishing agency of subjects and the increasing agency of things.

     

    56. The flattening out of the space between the unconscious and representation is precisely the argument implicit in a variety of socio-linguistic analyses from Orwell to Baudrillard: things are as they appear, all of the would-be contradictions, yesterday’s contradictions, are on the surface, and since they are on the surface they are no longer contradictions. The space of the fold that registers alienation has all but disappeared. When dystopia is no longer recognizable as such, we are in the postmodern; as in much of the work of Tarkovsky, we are the unconscious. To the Orwellian Trinity WAR IS PEACE, FREEDOM IS SLAVERY, IGNORANCE IS STRENGTH, we may add a maxim for the theorist: CONSCIOUSNESS IS UNCONSCIOUSNESS.

     

    57. Cinema 2, 78.

     

    58. For Gramsci, Americanism implied not only a routinization of work experience, but the concomitant necessity of “breaking up the old psycho-physical nexus of qualified professional work, which demands a certain active participation of intelligence, fantasy and initiative on the part of the worker, and reducing of productive operations exclusively to the mechanical physical aspects” (302). “It is from this point of view,” Gramsci tells us,

     

    that one should study the "puritanical" initiative of American industrialists like Ford. It is certain that they are not concerned with the "humanity" or the "spirituality" of the worker, which are immediately smashed . . . . "Puritanical" initiatives simply have the purpose of preserving, outside of work, a certain psycho-physical equilibrium which prevents the physiological collapse of the worker . . . . American industrialists are concerned to maintain the continuity of the physical and muscular-nervous efficiency of the worker. It is in their interests to have a stable skilled labor force, a permanently well-adjusted complex, because the human complex (the collective worker) of an enterprise is also a machine which cannot, without considerable loss, be taken to pieces too often and renewed with single new parts. (303)

     

    Hence, for Gramsci, Americanism implied not only a reorganization of work, but a reorganization of cultural forms. Antonio Gramsci, “Americanism and Fordism,” in Selections From the Prison Notebooks, ed. and trans. Quintin Hoare and Goeffrey Nowell Smith (New York: International Publishers, 1971), pp. 277-318.

     

    59. Max Horkheimer, “The End of Reason,” in The Essential Frankfurt School Reader, eds. Andrew Arato and Eike Gebhardt (New York: Continuum, 1987), pp. 26-48.

     

    60. See Noam Chomsky, “Notes on Nafta: The Monsters of Mankind,” in The Nation, March 29, 1993, pp. 412- 416. Chomsky argues that the necessary condition of transnational corporations is the destruction of democratic consciousness. In any case they are acting as if it didn’t exist and putting policy into place to insure that it doesn’t exist at least at the level of representation. How much more effective when the mass media engages the microcosms of our own sensibilities to work in tandem with the macrocosmic interests of transnational capital.

     

    61. This is the basic mise en scene of cyberpunk.

     

    62. In the program of the masochist from A Thousand Plateaus, 155.

     

    63. Spoken from the podium during the conference Visions From the Post-Future, Duke University, Spring, 1993. The idea here is, as I understand it, also one of the central theses of The Geopolitical Aesthetic (Bloomington and Indianapolis: Indiana University Press, 1992).

     

    64. Marx thought that the road was built with surplus labor time (surplus value) that was somehow taken out of circulation in its use as road and hence ceased to be capital. Elsewhere, however, it is clear that the roads are necessary for capital circulation, i.e., that they are constituted with what should be necessary labor time. Clearly, surplus labor cannot be necessary labor without forcing the implosion of the labor theory of value since capital is built, that is, realizes a profit, precisely on this split. Marx couldn’t decide if roads were profitable or not. By taking cinema, and more generally mass media, as higher forms of the road, some of these problems begin to resolve themselves precisely because of the increase in intensity of circulation and in the increasing frequency of the production of “roads.”

     

    65. As a citation in Howard Rheingold’s Virtual Reality says, “Computer programming is just another form of filmmaking.” Rheingold describes the generational development of computers as a slow meshing of human intelligence with artificial intelligence, a gradual decreasing of the distance between the mind and the machine. At first one handed punched cards to an operator. Then one could input information oneself. Then there was a switch from base two to primitive code words, and after that more common language and the screen. In the fifth generation (VR) we will be inside information, able to fly through information spaces, making simple physical gestures, such as pointing, which will then activate complex computerized functions.

     

    66. I would venture as well that it is this unrecognized value producing activity along with other kinds of informal economy (attention) described as disguised wage labor, both in third world economies by political scientists and in patriarchal economies by feminist socio-linguists, that make up the bulk of the unacknowledged maintenance of the world.

     

    67. To repeat, such a theory should in no way obscure the plight of workers whose exploitation continues to take on the forms already visible at the beginning of the industrial revolution. As Einstein’s equations reduce to Newton’s at low velocity, so too ought the attention theory of value reduce to the labor theory of value at low velocities of monetary circulation, that is, at velocities lower than the speed of cinema.

     

    68. Canons are themselves excellent examples of the kind of institutional entrenchment possible by garnering the value produced by attention. The existence of a canon, already and obviously a politics, is one of the myriad forms in which attention is organized and which continues to organize attention.

     

  • Selected Letters from Readers: Response to Jonathan Beller’s Essay, “Cinema: Capital of the Twentieth Century”

    Jeff Bell

    Dept. of History and Government
    Southeastern Louisiana University, Hammond
    FHG$2395@ALTAIR.SELU.EDU

     

    Jonathan Beller has set forth an interesting and provocative account of the relationship between cinema and what he takes to be the condition for the possibility of cinema–i.e., capital. Beller draws upon many resources to support this thesis, from the film Barton Fink to the work of Gilles Deleuze, and generally the arguments are well thought out and thought-provoking. In particular, Beller argues, and rightly I believe, that with cinema capital extends its domain onto and into the conscious attention of individuals, and with this a new form of exploitation is made possible. As Beller puts it, capital cinema can be used to tap “the productive energies of consciousness and the body in order to facilitate the production of surplus value” (par. 7). Or again, “some people make a profit from other people’s looking” (par. 10). The basic argument is Marxist, yet Beller supplements it by stressing the significance of human attention as a form of labor, a labor that is productive of value, and hence productive of surplus value when exploited under capitalism.

     

    In support of this basic argument, Beller brings in an enlightening discussion of the transition from aura (following Walter Benjamin) to simulacra. In both cases human attention constitutes value. In looking at a work of art, for example, there is what one actually sees, and there is the fact that many others have seen this same thing. The gap between what one sees and the circulation of this artwork among many other gazes defines, for Beller, the “aura” of this work, an aura which gives value to the work. A simulacrum, on the other hand, results when “visual objects are liquidated of their traditional contents and mean precisely their circulation” (par. 23), and this liquidation is the result of a speeding up of the circulation of these visual objects. Value in this case is nothing more than the circulation of the object among many gazes, and thus value is cut free from anything having to do with the object itself. In the words of a recent television commercial, “image is everything!”

     

    I do not have much to add to Beller’s fine discussion of these issues, and for the most part I agree with what he says. What I want to respond to is Beller’s use of Deleuze’s Cinema books to support his arguments and his effort, through a critique of this work, to distance himself from Deleuze. More precisely, I want to respond to Beller’s three chief criticisms of Deleuze’s theory of cinema. The first and most important criticism is that Deleuze, according to Beller, ignores and “refuses simply to think” the fact that cinema is a capitalist industry. A second and related criticism is that Deleuze only discusses the masterpieces of cinema while ignoring everything else. And finally, Beller claims that Deleuze’s “aestheticizing thought” overlooks the cultural logic wherein the time-image leads to extinction, schizophrenia, and the pathological severing of senory-motor links. By responding to these charges on behalf of Deleuze, I hope to clarify some of the central issues that are at stake in Beller’s work and contribute to the important discussion which this work has begun.

     

    Although Deleuze, according to Beller, refuses “to think political economy,” he does flirt with it. Such flirtation becomes clear when Deleuze cites Fellini: “When there is no money left, the film will be finished.” Beller finds in Fellini’s remark, and in Deleuze’s treatment of it, evidence for the claim that cinema is always “in one way or another a film about the film’s economic conditions of possibility” (par. 38). This is only a flirtation, however, for Beller believes Deleuze says “disappointingly little” about cinema’s own conditions of possibility–i.e., capital. Deleuze may not say much about the economic conditions of possibility in his Cinema books, and perhaps he is to be faulted for this, but much is said on these matters in Deleuze and Guattari’s book Anti-Oedipus. Central among their claims in this book is that capitalism is a functioning assemblage of processes, interactions, codings and overcodings; however, the raison d’etre of capitalism is the decoding of flows. In other words, the pursuit of surplus value hinges upon creating new markets, new values, needs, etc. (i.e., the “new and improved” syndrome of capitalism); and yet to do this requires decoding or deterritorializing existing markets, existing values, needs, etc. To return to Beller’s example discussed above, the transition from aura to simulacra entails the decoding of value, a value which is tied to the “traditional contents” of art (i.e., qualities of the visual art object itself), so that new values and needs can be created–i.e., value as tied only to the circulation of the object among many observers. This example betrays the very process of capitalism for Deleuze and Guattari, and for that reason they would agree with Beller’s analysis. But capitalism, and this is the crucial point, must continually avoid complete deterritorialization, complete decoding; in short, it must avoid schizophrenia. Consequently, every process of decoding and deterritorialization entails a simultaneous recoding and reterritorialization. Without this capitalism could not function. On this point, Deleuze and Guattari are quite explicit: “one can say that schizophrenia is the exterior limit of capitalism itself or the conclusion of its deepest tendency, but that capitalism only functions on condition that it inhibit this tendency, or that it push back or displace this limit, by substituting for it its own immanent relative limits, which it continually reproduces on a widened scale.”1 Thus, although simulacra result from a decoding of aura, simulacra are nevertheless set forth as new values, as new standards and codes.

     

    With this in mind we can see that yes, for Deleuze and Guattari that capitalism as decoding and deterritorializing process (or what Deleuze refers to in the Cinema books and elsewhere as the “genetic,” “differentiating” element) is the condition of possibility for cinema. However, this unthought and unthinkable differentiating condition is also the exterior limit of capitalism and cinema, the limit which must be pushed back. Consequently, capitalism and cinema find themselves recoded and reterritorialized upon existing values, existing standards, existing relative limits. On this basis we can understand Deleuze’s treatment of Fellini’s statement. Just as capitalism itself requires the reterritorialization of its deterritorializaing tendencies, so too does cinema’s deterritorializing process require reterritorialization, and it is precisely money which fulfills this role and which Fellini laments. The deterritorialization of a Fellini film does not go unchecked, but is reterritorialized by the financial backers of the film with their budgetary constraints. There is thus a double role of money which needs to be stressed here, for although Deleuze and Guattari emphasize the deterritorializing aspects of money and capital, they also point out the reterritorializing and stratifying processes associated with money, and it is the latter process which Deleuze is referring to when he claims that “cinema as art lives in a direct relation with a permanent plot, an international conspiracy which conditions it from within, as the most intimate and most indispensable enemy. This conspiracy is that of money . . . .”2 Put more simply, cinema as art, as a process which creates new values, new ways of looking at the world, etc.; this cinema confronts the demands of financial backers who want to see a profit from a film, who don’t want something new so much as something that sells. And we need not look far in the history of film to find a successful film that is widely imitated with the hopes of “cashing in” on its success. This is the reterritorializing conspiracy of money, a conspiracy filmmakers who are not in the “mainstream” constantly confront (such as Fellini, Orson Welles, Antonioni, etc.)

     

    This brings me to the second of Beller’s criticisms–i.e., Deleuze’s emphasis upon the masterpieces of cinema at the expense of everything else. For Beller, recognizing that human attention is productive of value leaves open the possibility that “all of the non-masterpieces of cinema could then be brought back” (par. 58). They could be brought back because human attention, even of the non-masterpiece variety, is assumed to be capable of creating new ways of seeing, valuing, etc. Deleuze’s point is not that new values are produced only within the work of a few “recognized” masters; rather, his point is very Nietzschean in that he claims that all new values have been produced and created away from the marketplace. From what we have said above, we can see that this does not mean that new values, in particular new values associated with cinema, must be produced in isolation from capital and capitalism, but only that these values always entail a process of deterritorialization, and this occurs apart from, and at odds with, the reterritorializing conspiracy of capital and capitalism. When something new is said, or when a film shows us a different way of looking and feeling, this happens, for Deleuze, because of a deterritorialization of existing values and codes; but these films are always exceptional for Deleuze, because for the most part films are made on the basis of the security of what is already known to sell (i.e., money as reterritorializing). That this tendency is especially so with respect to cinema as art, in contrast to the many other arts (e.g., painting, sculpture, poetry, etc.), should be obvious: i.e., it takes a large capital investment simply to make a film. Investors are subsequently more apt to back the film which has the greater chance of returning their initial investment with a profit. To capitalize on cinema, therefore, takes roughly one of two tracks: either the financial backers act on the basis of what is already known about public taste, etc., in order to decide which project will be profitable; or they risk losing their investment by supporting a project that is novel and yet risks not being accepted. It should be clear that the first track is the more common, and yet, and this is Deleuze’s point, masterpieces always result from the second approach. This is not to say that all films made from this second approach are masterpieces; to the contrary, and again Deleuze is explicit on this point, if a masterpiece truly says something new it will be at odds with the reterritorializing tendencies of capital, but it does not follow from this that every film that is at odds with these tendencies does say something new.

     

    In reference to literature, though we could apply this to cinema just as easily, Deleuze makes some comments which get to the heart of Beller’s concerns as well as his difficulties with some of what Deleuze is arguing. In an article titled “Mediators” in his book Pourparlers, and in a section of this article titled “The Conspiracy of Imitators” (which should recall the conspiracy with which cinema as art is confronted, the conspiracy Beller claims is discussed “disappointingly little”), Deleuze claims that “Fast turnover [of books, but equally films] necessarily means selling people what they expect: even what’s “daring,” “scandalous,” strange and so on falls into the market’s predictable forms. The conditions for literary creation, which emerge only unpredictably, with a slow turnover and progressive recognition, are fragile.”3 What the market is interested in, or what capital as reterritorializing is interested in, is what is predictable; and it is precisely this conspiracy of imitators which authors and filmmakers, if they are interested in creating something new (i.e., in deterritorializing predictable forms and codes), run up against.

     

    This brings us finally to Beller’s final criticism that Deleuze’s “aestheticizing thought” overlooks the cultural logic wherein the time-image leads to extinction, schizophrenia, and the pathological severing of senory-motor links. On the one hand, Beller is certainly correct to make this claim. The time-image does indeed entail the possibility of leading to extinction. Deleuze often recognized this possibility, however, and in Thousand Plateaus for example he pointed out the dangers of making one’s self a body without organs. The danger is that to make one’s self a body without organs one must deterritorialize themselves, but if this deterritorialization goes too far this could lead to our self-destruction and extinction. In a reference to Carlos Castaneda’s distinction between the nagual and tonal, which corresponds roughly with the distinction between deterritorialization and reterritorialization, they claim that “the important thing is not to dismantle the tonal by destroying it all of a sudden. . . . You have to keep it in order to survive, to ward off the assault of the nagual.”4 In other words, to deterritorialize, and this is just what Deleuze believes the time-image does, is also to risk deterritorializing too much, with the result being the extinction and destruction of self with which Beller was concerned.

     

    The time-image, or deterritorialization, if it can avoid the black hole of self-annhilation by holding on to some reterritorialization, can then create something new, can produce new values. To create a new way of seeing the world with cinema is therefore a very risky affair. One risks either succumbing to the conspiracy of imitators who will only financially back a film which imitates a given formula for success; or one risks deterritorializing given values and standards too much with the result that the film, and consciousness which was Beller’s concern, collapses into the black hole of self-destruction and extinction. Deleuze was quite aware of both dangers and yet argues that if we are going to change the way things are we must face these dangers nonetheless. Deleuze would agree wholeheartedly with Beller’s following claim: “The labor of revolution is, after all, always an effort to reorganize the production and distribution of value. It is an attack on the presiding regimes of value in order that we might create something else” (par. 56). Deleuze’s thought and work is motivated by just this type of revolutionary concern; however, Deleuze cites the dangers inherent in revolutionary activity. Every revolution, whether in politics, economics, or cinema, risks collapsing into the stratifying stranglehold of tyranny and fascism, the conspiracy of imitators; or it risks exploding into the chaos of anarchy and self-destruction. Deleuze would agree with Beller’s call for revolutionary change, but would caution us to beware of its dangers.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Anti-Oedipus. Translated by Robert Hurley, Mark Seem, and Helen R. Lane (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1983), 246.

     

    2. Cinema 2. Translated by Hugh Tomlinson and Robert Galeta (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1989), 77.

     

    3. Pourparlers (Paris: Les Editions de Minuit, 1990), 175. Translation mine.

     

    4. Thousand Plateaus. Translated by Brian Massumi (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1987), 162.

     

  • The Superhero Meets the Culture Critic

    Christian L. Pyle

    Department of English
    University of Kentucky
    uk00028@ukpr.uky.edu

     

    Reynolds, Richard. Super Heroes: A Modern Mythology. Studies in Popular Culture. Jackson: University of Mississippi Press, 1994.

     

    Although the “superhero” has been a staple of American mass media since the emergence of Superman in 1938, a definitive study of the genre has not appeared. Therefore, I greeted the American edition of Reynolds’s book (first published in London by B. T. Batsford in 1992) with enthusiasm. Its potential seemed substantial, as suggested by the back cover copy:

     

    The popular figure known as the superhero has exerted such a strong and mushrooming influence upon society, morality, and politics that a mythology now pervades our culture. . . . Here is a study of this superhuman creation, revealed as a proliferating symbol whose dimensions over sixty years of comic book history have been rendered to satisfy the demands and expectations of the popular audience. This fascinating book shows how the superhero has become a vivid figure in the mainstream of modern culture.

     

    This is a description of the book that popular culture scholars and postmodernists have needed: a wide-ranging yet detailed study of the proliferation of the superhero myth. Regrettably, Reynolds’s Super Heroes, while it has several merits, is not that book.

     

    Reynolds begins with “a first-stage working definition of the superhero genre” expressed in seven criteria:

     

    1. The hero is marked out from society. He often reaches maturity without having a relationship with his parents. 2. At least some of the superheroes will be like earthbound gods in their level of powers. Other superheroes of lesser powers will consort easily with these earthbound dieties. 3. The hero's devotion to justice overrides even his devotion to the law. 4. The extraordinary nature of the superhero will be contrasted with the ordinariness of his surroundings. 5. Likewise, the extraordinary nature of the hero will be contrasted with the mundane nature of his alter-ego. Certain taboos will govern the actions of these alter-egos. [By taboos, Reynolds will explain further on, he refers to myths in which the hero gains strength through abstinence.] 6. Although ultimately above the law, superheroes can be capable of considerable patriotism and moral loyalty to the state, though not necessarily to the letter of its laws. 7. The stories are mythical and use science and magic indiscriminately to create a sense of wonder. (16)

     

    Rules 1 and 3 are accepted facets of the American hero, as true of Natty Bumppo and Huck Finn as they are of Superman and Batman. Rules 4 and 5 are also familiar and straight-forward (although rule 4 could use a footnote regarding heroes who alternate between mundane surroundings and fantastic realms, such as outer space, Asgard, or astral planes). Rule 2, however, is flawed in a way that points to a major weakness of Reynolds’s book: its forshortened historical perspective.

     

    Parallel to the “earthbound god” tradition of costumed heroes stemming from Superman is the “masked man” tradition of heroes with no real “superpowers.” The best-known comic book example is Batman, but he was preceded by other comic book heroes (the Crimson Avenger), pulp fiction heroes (the Spider, the Black Bat), and radio heroes (the Lone Ranger, the Green Hornet). Batman, the subject of three sections within Super Heroes, is obviously in Reynolds’s mind when he refers to “superheroes of lesser powers.” One could argue that Batman’s above-average intelligence, athletic ability, weaponry, or fear-instilling costume are “powers,” but Reynolds does not go into that. Instead he defines the super-ness of such heroes in terms of their interaction with the Superman crowd. This idea, as well as Reynolds’s lengthy discussion of continuity later in the book, depends upon the existence of a “universe” in which all the characters owned by a particular company inhabit the same fictional world. However, the idea of a fictional universe is more recent than Reynolds seems to realize. He links it to superhero teams (37-38), but, prior to the emergence of Marvel in the 1960s, the adventures of superteams were isolated from the solo adventures of the teams’ heroes. (I don’t mean to be overly pedantic, but one could ask if the Green Lantern appearing in All-American Comics is the same character as the Justice Society member appearing in All-Star Comics, just as we ask if the Quentin of The Sound and the Fury is the same character as the Quentin of Absalom, Absalom!). The formation of a universe in which casual allusions are made between titles really only began with Marvel and was integrated into DC only recently.

     

    The failure to consider how the genre has changed over time is the central flaw of Reynolds’s study. A perusal of the dates of texts he selects for close readings (1938, 1940, 1977, 1979, 1981, 1986, 1986-87, 1987) shows that his real interest/background is in the comics of the 1980s. However, Reynolds does not qualify his generalizations as to which parts of comics history they apply. Also, he makes no attempt at delineating critical periods of the genre except for references to the “Golden Age”/ “Silver Age” distinction used by fans, a distinction which is useful for separating, say, the “Golden Age Flash” from the “Silver Age Flash,” but which lacks a scholarly foundation.

     

    Reynolds’s best points tease us because, though fascinating, they remain always underdeveloped. For example, in his chapter on costumes, Reynolds discusses how costumes function differently depending on the hero’s gender:

     

    The costumed heroine may be frankly the object of sexual attraction, and therefore (for many male readers) will constitute the object of their gaze, as well as the subject or protagonist through which they engage with the action of the text. So, whilst for the superhero the transformation into costume can best be achieved with something as instantaneous as Billy Batson's "Shazam," which calls forth the invincible Captain Marvel, for the superheroine the process can (at least potentially) be viewed as the performance of an uncompleted striptease. And thus the (male) reader is called upon to 'read' both heroines and villainesses as objects of desire--'good girls' and 'bad girls' maybe, but objects of the same rhetorical logic. (37)

     

    Before we can accept this point as valid, we need a detailed comparison of typical transformation scenes of heroes and heroines. The issue is further complicated by the use of an atypical strip tease (from The Sensational She-Hulk) as an illustration for the section. If the gender discussion were expanded, Reynolds would also have to deal with the homoeroticism question, especially since superwomen in skintight outfits are considerably less popular with the primarily male readership than supermen in skintight outfits. Anyone familiar with the critical literature will know that the question has been a major issue since Frederic Wertham asked it in Seduction of the Innocentin 1954. By asserting that the gaze is exclusively heterosexual, Reynolds evades the homoeroticism issue altogether.

     

    Another major issue of the Wertham era was the implied fascism of the superhero, who (coincidence?) was born just as the Nazi “supermen” were marching across Europe. In his sixth criterion for the genre, Reynolds refers to the potential “patriotism” of the hero. Here he may be thinking of all the early 1940s covers with heroes toting flags, fighting alongside troops, or selling war bonds. While he doesn’t really deal with the fascism question, he discusses the conservativism of the genre:

     

    A key ideological myth of the superhero comic is that the normal and everyday enshrines positive values that must be defended through heroic action --and defended over and over again almost without respite against an endless battery of menaces determined to remake the world for the benefit of aliens, mutants, criminals, or sub-aqua beings from Atlantis. The normal is valuable and is constantly under attack, which means that almost by definition the superhero is battling on behalf of the status quo. Into this heroic matrix one can insert representatives of any race or creed imaginable, but in order to be functioning superheroes they will need to conform to the ideological rules of the game. The superhero has a mission to preserve society, not to re-invent it. (77)

     

    Having made this relatively straightforward point, Reynolds then teases us once again with a more provocative argument that he never fully elaborates. In a somewhat tentative fashion, and using what seem to be nonrepresentative (and mostly quite recent) texts, he suggests that “nuances and subtleties which function as irony and satire” can undercut the superhero’s tendency toward political conservatism (79). One would have liked Reynolds to go further here, but he chooses rather to evade what perhaps seems to him too complex and highly-charged a topic.

     

    A third evasion in Super Heroes is that of the role of corporate mass production and commodity culture in the genre. Superheroes are not just fictional characters, they are registered trademarks. Reynolds considers how continuity constrains the creativity of writers and artists in the superhero industry, but he does not deal with the role of the editor whose concerns include sustaining sales and maintaining a corporate image.

     

    A final flaw of Reynolds’s book is that it does not reference or discuss previous works which make similar points. Reynolds’s discussion of continuity, for example, would be enriched by a consideration of Umberto Eco’s well-known 1972 essay “The Myth of Superman.” Reynolds argues that “intertextual and metatextual continuity create a subsidiary world in which the process of time can be kept under control. While this process does not exactly abolish history from superhero comics, it does divorce the superheroes [sic] lives from their historical context” (44). But Eco had already announced this divorce twenty years ago. He explained that if Superman stories were true narratives, placing their events in real time, Superman would be, like the rest of us, “consumed” by events until he would eventually grow old and die, a fate which cannot befall a mythic figure (333-334). To avoid this, observed Eco, Superman stories “develop in a kind of oneiric climate–of which the reader is not aware at all–where what has happened before and what has happened after appears extremely hazy” (336). This is by no means the only instance where Reynolds fails to make the obvious reference. Another example is his discussion of the superhero costume as a fetish, which runs along lines very similar to those of Gillian Freeman’s argument in her study of pornography (the last chapter of which is devoted to superhero comics).

     

    The strength of Reynolds’s study is its emphasis on close readings of specific texts–often, indeed, of specific pages and panels. Most of the previous studies of superheroes have prefered to analyze the basic premise of a series rather than a specific story. Reynolds’s “key texts” chapter is especially strong in this regard. Its detailed readings of The Uncanny X-Men, Batman: The Dark Knight Returns, and Watchmen draw attention to the distinctive skills of particular writers and artists. In reference to reprinted X-Men pages, for example, Reynolds describes how penciller John Byrne “employed a style of sequential art that was ‘cinematic’ in the sense that it constantly interpreted each panel and each segment of the narrative from an implied and subjective point of view” (86). The detail of Reynolds’s analyses makes up in depth for what they lack in breadth.

     

    In the last few years, the University Press of Mississippi’s Studies in Popular Culture series, under the general editorship of M. Thomas Inge, has placed several worthy volumes on the bookshelves of comics scholars, including Joseph Witek’s Comic Books and History, Inge’s own Comics and Culture, and a reprint of Coulton Waugh’s The Comics. Reynolds’s contribution does not measure up to the tradition those predecessors established, but it does offer a promising starting point for the scholar who wants to write a more thorough and definitive study.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Eco, Umberto. “The Myth of Superman.” Diacritics 2 (1972): 14-22. Rpt. in Contemporary Literary Criticism: Modernism Through Poststructuralism. Ed. Robert Con Davis. New York: Longman, 1986. 330-344.
    • Freeman, Gillian. The Undergrowth of Literature. The Natural History of Society series. London: Nelson, 1967.

     

  • Postmodern Jeremiads: Kruger on Popular Culture

    Kevin J.H. Dettmar

    Department of English
    Clemson University
    dkevin@clemson.edu

     

    Barbara Kruger. Remote Control: Power, Cultures, and the World of Appearances. Cambridge: MIT Press, 1993. 251 pp. $19.95 (cloth), $10.95 (paper).

     

    In some ways, Barbara Kruger’s photomontage texts–red-blocked captions slapped across black & white photographs which they ironically reinscribe, like ransom notes, holding those images and their ideology hostage–make an ideal starting point for an examination of the postmodern impulse in the contemporary arts. The desire for such a point of entry has been on my mind a lot lately as I prepare again to teach an interdisciplinary humanities course on postmodernism this fall, to a classroom of majors from all across campus. There’s nothing especially subtle or coy about Kruger’s verbo-visual texts, but their power is never in question, even for students majoring in Packaging Science, Ceramic Engineering, and Parks, Recreation, and Tourism Management. I can always count on at least half of my students to vent undisguised hostility at Andy Warhol’s postmodern chameleon pose, or Kathy Acker’s post-feminist pornography with a (teensy-weensy but oh-so significant) difference; but Kruger is an artist with something urgent to say, and students have no problem figuring out where she stands vis-a-vis her texts. No cool memories here, no undecidable postmodern irony, no death of the author, no Sir: here’s art that speaks to the complexity of life in contemporary America in a powerful, and relatively straightforward, way. Call it sincerity; in the eyes of my students Kruger has rediscovered the importance of being earnest in an age of “anything goes,” and in the wake of Marcel Duchamp’s ready-mades, John Cage’s chance operations, and Brian Eno’s oblique strategies, they’re mighty grateful for it.

     

    Of course Kruger is a postmodern artist, being, along with Jenny Holzer, a major supplier of those po-mo slogans that grace so many t-shirts and trendy greeting cards: “Your gaze hits the side of my face,” “Your body is a battleground,” “I shop therefore I am.”1 In fact, when Dag in Douglas Coupland’s novel Generation X complains that “the world has gotten too big–way beyond our capacity to tell stories about it, and so all we’re stuck with are these blips and chunks and snippets on bumpers,” he would seem to have Kruger squarely in mind.2 But Kruger’s postmodern slogans have always been anti-sloganist, if not indeed anti- postmodernist, in tendency. She would agree with another Generation X character, Claire, who says that “it’s not healthy to live life as a succession of isolated little cool moments,” and that “either our lives become stories, or there’s just no way to get through them.”3

     

    Remote Control, Kruger’s latest text, collects her occasional writings over the past fifteen years, the largest group having previously been published in Artforum; there are no visual images here, outside the rather striking one that graces the cover. Here we have Kruger the teller, rather than Kruger the show-and-teller; and if Kruger the show-and-teller sometimes inclines toward the didactic, Remote Control for long stretches is almost unbearably preachy. Kruger too much enjoys what Sacvan Berkovitch has called the American Jeremiad; and while her work in photo-montage almost of necessity strikes a balance between mimesis and diegesis, the essays in Remote Control never err on the side of giving the reader too much credit. Hence the paradox that one of our most scriptible visual artists turns out to be a resolutely lisible writer, and these turn out to be fundamentally modernist texts about postmodernism. Quelle drag.

     

    At its worst, Kruger’s prose sounds like a ditto prepared for Postmodernism 101: “History has been the text of the dead dictated to the living, through a voice which cannot speak for itself. The ventriloquist that balances corpses on its knee, that gives speech to silence, and transforms bones and blood into reminiscences, is none other than the historian. The keeper of the text. The teller of the story. The worker of mute mouths.”4 This text, published with Philomena Mariani in 1989, sounds as if Hayden White and Michel Foucault had never written: Kruger seems to think she has suddenly stumbled upon the notion that history is a narrative, and is as such subject to narrative laws. Few would today dispute such a claim; but that’s exactly why the strident tone of the essay rings slightly false. For whom does Kruger write? On the other hand, the enigmatic photomontage of the legs of standing and seated businessmen, in their suit pants and loafers, sprawled against the backdrop of a livingroom carpet (high-ball glass just visible in the foreground), which Kruger captions “You make history when you do business,” gets at the same idea, the same “truth,” much more elliptically and provocatively.5

     

    If much, perhaps too much, of Remote Control consists of somewhat tendentious postmodern propaganda (and I’ll leave aside the question of whether postmodern propaganda is really possible), it is not without many shrewd and amusing moments. Kruger is at her best, I think, when talking about television (the section called “TV Guides”) and when theorizing about the postmodern, even if she rejects the term (“that vaporous buzzword, that zany genre with legs: post-modernism” [3]). Her analysis of the Jerry Lewis telethon, for instance, is absolutely, savagely on-target: “Perhaps Jerry Lewis is about a kind of abjection; a glistening knot of anger and petulance marinated in a soup of vindictive disingenuousness. (Write him for the recipe)” (66). When Kruger takes TV seriously, her observations are fascinating; like Cultural Studies avant la lettre, Kruger deigns to take low culture (The Care Bears, The Price is Right, The Home Shopping Club) on its own terms, and uses these texts to read the culture that both produces and consumes them. Perhaps this is the contemporary version of Colonel Kurtz’s Horror: looking into the heart of darkness and seeing Jerry Lewis there, the embodiment of “outrageous schticksterism, oozing with every show-biz cliche, every bad dream of what it might mean to be an ‘entertainer’” (67).

     

    But unlike most proponents of the new Cultural Studies, Kruger doesn’t seem to “love to hate” Jerry, or Maddie Hayes and David Addison (Moonlighting), or Robin Leach (Life-styles of the Rich and Famous)–she just hates them. One begins to suspect that with Kruger, the game’s been fixed: low culture is allowed to play, but it’s never allowed to win. I’m tempted to say that Kruger’s a cultural critic in the way Allan Bloom was a cultural critic, but that’s not quite fair; after all, Kruger at least reads the texts of our culture, and reads them with great care and prodigious intelligence, before pronouncing them banal. But she is no more amused by these texts than Bloom was.

     

    The reason for Kruger’s dyspepsia, it seems to me, is splashed across the cover: for though we (viewers) may think we wield the remote control, in fact, says Kruger, we are the ones controlled: “To those who understand how pictures and words shape consensus, we are unmoving targets waiting to be turned on and off by the relentless seductions of remote control” (5). Sound familiar? At the heart of Kruger’s collection is the unvoiced assertion that television is the root of all contemporary American evil; TV is, to paraphrase Baudrillard, the evil demon of images. “We don’t have to think about anything once television lulls us to sleep,” Kruger drones, “and begins its dictations. Like a mad scientist of global proportions, it elects presidents, conducts diplomacy, and creates consensus: a consensus of demi-alert nappers caught halfway between the vigilance of consciousness and the fascinated numbness of stupor” (49).

     

    Is it just me? I had thought the discourse about the American media, and about the reciprocal flow of ideology into and out of the TV tube, had progressed somewhat beyond this. Foucault, to take just the most prominent example, has rendered such a simplistic theory of power and hegemony entirely untenable for the contemporary culture critic. But Kruger’s hostility to popular culture is more than just a matter of an out-of-date or vulgar-Marxist theoretical apparatus. Her refusal of pop pleasures seems as willed and unrelenting, as theoretically unnecessary, as Theodor Adorno’s. In fact, I’ll bet even Adorno would have enjoyed Three’s Company more than Barbara Kruger does.

     

    If there’s a thread that connects the writings collected in Remote Control, it’s the philosophy of social constructionism: the notion that our individual experiences are hemmed-in by the ubiquitous, often understated or implicit, narratives of our culture(s). This is a familiar theme in postmodern texts; one thinks, for instance, of Jack Gladney, in Don DeLillo’s White Noise, who (believing he is about to die) wanders into his kids’ bedroom in the middle of the night to say his final goodbyes: “I moved quietly through the rooms on bare white feet. I looked for a blanket to adjust, a toy to remove from a child’s warm grasp, feeling I’d wandered into a TV moment.”6 You think you’re feeling something, but suddenly realize that Vicks, or AT&T, or Coke, or the Carpenters have been there before you. You’re not saying your goodbyes, you’re quoting someone else’s. Quelle drag encore. In “Talk Normal,” Laurie Anderson meditates on the inconvenience of being robbed of her own identity by her media persona: “I turned the corner in Soho today and someone / Looked right at me and said: Oh No! / Another Laurie Anderson clone!”7 Laurie Anderson is accused of being a Laurie Anderson wannabe; DeLillo’s Jack Gladney confesses that he is “the false character that follows the name around.”8

     

    What distinguishes DeLillo’s and Anderson’s treatment of this theme from Kruger’s, however–and, I would argue, renders if far more supple and subtle–is their realization that the simple recognition of the socially constructed nature of reality doesn’t automatically produce its transcendence. In Kruger, too often, it appears to; that we are thrall to images, to narratives, is for Kruger a sign of our postmodern, almost post-Reagan/Bush, condition, and she suggests that through consciousness raising we might attain to an illusion-free Reality. “Seeing is no longer believing,” Kruger writes in the collection’s opening essay. “The very notion of truth has been put into crisis. In a world bloated with images, we are finally learning that photographs do indeed lie. In a society rife with purported information, we know that words have power, but usually when they don’t mean anything (as Peggy Noonan and Co. have so ably demonstrated)” (5). Though she was certainly good at it, Peggy Noonan hardly invented political rhetoric; “Seeing is no longer believing,” Kruger complains–but when was it? What are the good old days to which Kruger harks back? Plato didn’t believe that seeing was believing, and certainly put the notion of truth into crisis long before Nietzsche. “To put it bluntly,” Kruger continues, “no one’s home. We are literally absent from our own present. We are elsewhere, not in the real but in the represented” (5). Here Kruger sounds eerily like Habermas: everything was hunky dory before postmodernism, or the cultural logic of late capitalism, descended upon us–the storm cloud of the late twentieth century; Kruger’s perverse twist on this all-too-well-known story is that, paradoxically, only postmodern art and theory can rescue us from the postmodern condition.

     

    All of which begs the question, for Kruger as well as for any politically engaged postmodern artist: If we’re all patsies of the simulacrum, how can we choose a political program? How does one slip out from under “remote control” in order to make decisions with any but false consciousness? In U2’s recent Zoo TV Live From Sydney video, for instance, we see the song “The Fly,” from the Achtung Baby CD, staged against a backdrop of video monitors flashing words, phrases, and slogans at almost subliminal speed, à la Jenny Holzer’s truisms: “DEATH IS A CAREER MOVE,” “EVERY THING YOU KNOW IS WRONG” (Firesign Theater?), “AMBITION BITES THE NAILS OF SUCCESS,” “ENJOY THE SURFACE.” But the song’s “punchline” is twenty seconds worth of one phrase, repeated on the video monitors dozens and dozens and dozens of times: “IT’S YOUR WORLD YOU CAN CHANGE IT.” Jeepers, guys. How? The sentiment of this closing “truism” seems to come from the U2 of The Joshua Tree who still hadn’t found what they were looking for; but according to the logic of the new, postmodernized U2, such an unproblematic, positivistic assertion of the individual subject’s ability to shape her world seems unsupported by the visual and verbal rhetoric of the song’s performance. Equally problematic, for similar reasons, is the video monitors’ warning that “SILENCE=DEATH,” or the band’s use of live satellite video from war-torn Bosnia during other concert dates, or their trademark blurb to “Join Amnesty International” that appears in the liner notes of even the Zooropa CD.

     

    How can we steer a middle path between the naive voluntarism suggested by U2’s “IT’S YOUR WORLD YOU CAN CHANGE IT” and a kind of philosophical quietism acceptable to almost no one? Kruger’s piece called “Repeat After Me”–a sort of twelve-step program for the treatment of modernist nostalgia–insists that we wrap our voices around a number of propaganda bites: “That ‘we’ are not right and ‘the enemy’ wrong. . . . That God is not on our side. . . . That TV and print journalists should begin to acknowledge and understand their ability to create consensus and make history” (223). (This must be at least the sixth time in the collection we’ve been reminded that TV makes history.) But then the symptomatic punchline, the culminating slogan: “empathy can change the world” (223). I hate to be so damn cynical, but doesn’t that sound a litle like “Visualize World Peace”? Shouldn’t it go on a bumper sticker somewhere? Kruger’s work, like that of U2, can display all the trappings of postmodernist thought and then blithely ask us to place our hope in the most stale and familiar of liberal causes.

     

    Kruger may have rebounded off the wall of postmodernity and ended up–like U2, like Baudrillard–a kind of neo-modernist, but at least she, has not settled into the comforts of cynicism. (Recall that our word “cynicism” is derived from the Greek word for dog; philosophy, taken in a certain direction, results in a despair which leads one to give up all hope and ambition and to lie in the street like a dog.) Indeed, to overcome cynicism Kruger seems prepared to credit the notion of postmodern voluntarism. And why not? Like Jean-Francois Lyotard, she believes that when the Great Narratives of enlightenment can no longer be believed, it is time for us to write smaller narratives of our own.9 That at least is how I would want to read the passage from Kruger’s essay “Quality” where she calls for “an esthetic of qualities rather than the singularity of quality. I think I could go for that esthetic. I think I could second that emotion” (9). Even the allusion to Smokey Robinson seems promising: popular culture employed lovingly for once rather than dismissively. “Shredded totalities,” Kruger writes toward the end of the volume, “go the way of highly classified documents which disappear and take their secrets with them. Maybe” (231). But nature abhors a vacuum, and an unnarrated cultural space cannot stay uninscribed for long. Power doesn’t lie simply in the hands of the evil Wizards of Madison Avenue, or the Rockefeller Center; we can’t but live in the realm of the represented, rather than the real, and we’re never at a loss for representations to whose magic we might become enthralled. Razing the totalizing, repressive grands recits clears a space upon which we must rebuild quickly; we can build on it ourselves, or let someone else do it, but it won’t stay vacant for long, for someone’s sure to pave paradise and put up a parking lot. “Either our lives become stories, or there’s just no way to get through them.” Perhaps enough of the demolition is now accomplished that we might think about what we’d like to put up here.

     

    Notes

     

    1. A great many of Kruger’s images are conveniently reproduced in Kate Linker’s Love For Sale: The Words and Pictures of Barbara Kruger (New York: Harry N. Abrams, 1990).

     

    2. Douglas Coupland, Generation X: Tales for an Accelerated Culture (New York: St. Martin’s, 1991), 5.

     

    3. Generation X, 8.

     

    4. Barbara Kruger, Remote Control: Power, Cultures, and the World of Appearances (Cambridge: MIT Press, 1993), 12. Subsequent references cited parenthetically in the text.

     

    5. Linker, Love For Sale, 68.

     

    6. Don DeLillo, White Noise. (New York: Penguin, 1985), 244.

     

    7. Laurie Anderson, “Talk Normal,” Home of the Brave (Warner Bros. 9 25400-2, 1986).

     

    8. DeLillo, White Noise, 17.

     

    9. See Jean-Francois Lyotard, The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge, trans. Geoff Bennington and Brian Massumi (Minneapolis: Univ. of Minnesota Press), 1984.

     

  • Permanence and Change in the Global Village

    Thomas Benson

    Edwin Erle Sparks Professor of Rhetoric
    Pennsylvania State University
    t3b@psuvm.psu.edu

     

    Garry, Patrick M. Scrambling for Protection: The New Media and the First Amendment. Pittsburgh: University of Pittsburgh Press, 1994.

     

    The economy, the technology, and the regulatory infrastructure of communications are undergoing rapid change, with unpredictable but probably important social consequences. In his brief and readable book, Scrambling for Protection, Patrick Garry proposes that policy and law guiding the developments in new media industries should be governed by a reconstructed understanding of the press clause of the First Amendment of the United States Constitution. The First Amendment of the Bill of Rights addresses issues of freedom of religion, speech, press, assembly, and petition:

     

    Congress shall make no law respecting an establishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise thereof; or abridging the freedom of speech, or of the press; or the right of the people peaceably to assemble, and to petition the government for a redress of grievances.

     

    Garry argues that changes in media technology, as well as changes in the press and its public reception, render outmoded an existing patchwork of doctrines that have evolved through a historical process of case law and ad hoc regulation. Newspapers have increasingly become monopolistic creatures driven by large conglomerates remote from the local communities they serve. Journalism has changed from an organ of community information and opinion formation into a scandal-mongering, adversarial, investigative enterprise open to only a few professional journalists and a small band of experts. As a result of these changes in the press, the public, disenfranchised by journalism, is increasingly hostile and apathetic towards both the press and the political system. Meanwhile, information delivery systems have blurred the distinctions among the largest media industries–press, phone, broadcast television, radio, cable–and there is every indication that further blurring is on its way.

     

    Garry proposes a way to solve the problems of the press and the public by guiding the coming changes in information technology from the perspective of the press clause of the First Amendment. But this requires, as well, a re-definition of the press clause. According to Garry, the most attractive feature of the new information technologies is that, with their vastly increased bandwidth and the new social practices they are tentatively exercising on the internet, media consumers have now become active–and interactive–media participants. If we could restore participation as a feature of journalism, argues Garry, we could restore a sense of community, giving American media and government back to the people. How would such a change be brought about in a consistent way? Here is where Garry attempts his reconstruction of the press clause, arguing that the best features of the new media are precisely consonant with what the authors of the Bill of Rights meant to protect with the press clause.

     

    Garry argues that the Bill of Rights was not meant to protect the press, as such, and certainly not journalism as it has evolved over the past two hundred years, but rather that it was meant to protect certain practices and principles that were embodied in the American press of the late 18th century. Garry distinguishes between freedom of speech and freedom of the press by arguing that “while the speech clause protects individuals in their act of speaking, the press clause protects the dissemination of those views and assures an open forum for communication in society and for democratic political dialogue” (115). The framers meant to protect three primary values: (1) the attainment of truth through the open clash of antagonistic views; (2) the promotion of democratic government by rendering the government more rational in its decision making and the public more energetic in the formation of political coalitions; (3) the promotion of democratic society through the development of social bonds that help to “create a common social world” (113). These values, writes Garry, and not the press itself, were the objects of protection.

     

    What follows from Garry’s redefinition of the press clause is that in developing law and policy for the changing media infrastructure, the courts and agencies should be guided not by any attempt to prefer the press as it now exists, and not by outmoded attempts to preserve distinctions among major media and media industries, but to regard all the agencies of dissemination as, essentially, “the press,” and to enact policies that favor participation, democracy, community, and the open clash of political views.

     

    There is much to admire in Garry’s argument, which I have attempted to summarize in a manner sympathetic to his views. But since so much is at stake, it might also be well to entertain some misgivings.

     

    In redefining the press clause of the First Amendment, Garry resorts to a peculiar mixture of historically rooted original-intentionism and transcendental essentialism. On the one hand, Garry appeals to a description of “the press” as it existed in late 18th-century America, where entry to the arena was relatively cheap for a printer-publisher, making for a crowded and diverse marketplace of ideas; where most of the content of a newspaper was partisan political argument submitted by readers; and where local interests played a strong role in defining press content. Pressing the historical analogy between the 18th-century press and contemporary computer systems, Garry claims that “essentially, colonial newspapers were bulletin boards for their communities; they were both subject to and responsive to the wishes of colonial society” (98). But Garry wants to go beyond historical comparison–he wants us to accept as fixed and transcendent a set of values he abstracts from his description of the colonial press.

     

    Garry’s distinction between “speech” and “press” is also troublesome, creating a neat and tidy dichotomy that overly limits what is called “speech” and that appears to leave out of the circle of protection a variety of communicative enactments that appear to be neither “speech” nor “press” as he defines them. When he assigns to “press” the whole range of institutions and activities having to do with dissemination, Garry reduces “speech” to the act of individual utterance (or analogous symbolic action). But this reduction of speech to individual behavior fails the very historical test to which Garry puts “press,” since in the late 18th century “speech,” including public speaking in churches, courts, legislatures, and public assemblies, was a major institutional formation that (with the press) enabled the creation of resistance, the fomenting of revolution, and the building of a constitutional democracy. Freedom of speech protects not merely individual utterance but shared social communication. Further, to reduce speech to individual utterance and to confine the protected zone of the press to that which promotes political community would seem to endanger the expanding range of freedom to disseminate communication of all sorts, including the arts, without having to justify their freedom on the basis of their right to communicate political ideas. Speech and press are not so easily dichotomized on historical, theoretical, or constitutional grounds, nor would they remain, if reduced to Garry’s formulation, a sound basis upon which to protect communicative freedoms generally.

     

    At many points, Garry seems overconfident of his ability to penetrate matters of causation in the empirical realm. For example, though there are legitimate grounds to argue that the Fourth-Estate model of the press, in which professional journalists of the post-Watergate era specialize in adversarial and investigative attacks on the political realm, contributes to political alienation, it seems unlikely that such changes can be attributed to a simple cause-effect model, and it seems even more unlikely that we could predict the results of adopting social policies designed to destroy the Fourth Estate. The complexity of the interactions of press, politics, and public, within the context of society as a whole groping its way through history, makes it very difficult to assign the sorts of cause and effect upon which Garry’s argument depends. Garry’s book abounds with such extravagant claims about causation, with abbreviated and facile historical analogies, and with extraordinarily optimistic projections of the ability of computer bulletin boards to salvage democracy.

     

    Despite these misgivings, Garry’s book is a brisk, optimistic, confident, and provocative work that deserves broad discussion and debate. Garry is unwavering in his search for an open, democratic society; he does a skillful job of condensing a broad argument, sketching his evidence, and outlining the consequences of accepting his view. Readers interested in the interaction of media and democracy will be prompted by Scrambling for Protection to consider the challenges it poses to the construction of the media of the next century.The clarity, brevity (only 195 pages), and force of Garry’s bookmake it suitable for adoption as a text (though its $29.95 price tag will discourage some); the book seems well designed to stimulate spirited discussion.

     

  • Blurring the Lines: Art on The Border

    Jonathan Markovitz

    Department of Sociology
    University of California, San Diego
    jmarkovi@weber.ucsd.edu

     

    La Frontera/The Border: Art About the Mexico/United States Border Experience. Organized by the Centro Cultural de la Raza and the Museum of Contemporary Art, San Diego. The exhibit will be on display at the San Jose Museum of Art from October through December 1994. This review is based on the showing in San Diego in May of 1993.

     

    The first thing to note about La Frontera/The Border: Art About the Mexico/United States Border Experience is that the exhibit’s title is a bit misleading. The various pieces of work in the exhibit make it perfectly clear that there is no such thing as “the . . . Border Experience.” Instead, while it is possible to draw out some common themes, the exhibit represents an extremely diverse multiplicity of “border experiences.” But even this phrasing would make for a somewhat misleading title, because one of the central concerns of the project is to problematize the notion of “border” in a variety of ways. Borders between Mexico and the United States are only one set of oppositions which are interrogated, and to some extent (I’ll conclude this review by questioning to what degree), broken down. The various art works in this exhibit also challenge the borders that divide: art and criticism; production and reception; public and private; religion and entertainment; communication and imperialism.

     

    One of the outstanding works in the show, Yolanda Lopez’s “Things I Never Told My Son About Being A Mexican,” is a collage made up of various items from popular culture. Newspaper articles are interspersed with a bag of “Batman tortilla chips” and a Wonder Woman comic book the cover of which shows Wonder Woman eating cafeteria-style rice and beans. According to the accompanying blurb, the work “highlights the otherwise subtle and persistent means by which the mass media defines Mexican American Identity. . . . [It] exposes racist subtexts in seemingly neutral expressions of contemporary popular culture.” This description is worth examining, since the collage itself presents the various items to us without any accompanying commentary, and it is not clear how we would know that the work “exposes” racism if the blurb did not tell us so. The blurb in fact is part of the larger apparatus by means of which the exhibit attempts to construct its audience.

     

    The first thing to note in this connection is that while the collage as a whole is clearly about Mexican-American identity, many of the individual artifacts are not. Many people looking at the Wonder Woman comic would not, for example, pay any attention to the food’s cultural history. Identity is “highlighted,” therefore, only by juxtaposition of the various elements. Seen together, the different items yield a common theme. But this theme is racism only to the extent that a prior agreement or orientation toward Lopez’s collage has been established among the audience–only to the extent that racism has already somehow been designated the object of attention.

     

    One of the ways this prior orientation is established is through reviews of the exhibit, nearly all of which have focused on racism, imperialism, or border-zone policing practices. Then, for those few who manage to come in to the exhibit without having seen any of the reviews, there are plaques on display at the museum’s entrances which mention the same constellation of concerns. And finally, in addition to placing a descriptive/prescriptive blurb beside Lopez’s piece, the exhibitors have surrounded it with other pieces which depend on similar aesthetic strategies and are described in similar terms. My point here is that the piece only “works” as a statement on the racism of popular culture if (and because) the viewer has absorbed certain lessons in how to view it. This is as it should be: an exhibition of emergent artistic practices must fulfill the pedagogical function of training a suitable audience. But in this case the organizers’ desire to establish “racism” as the audience’s primary term of reference may have the effect of prematurely foreclosing some alternate readings.

     

    These questions aside, there is much to applaud in the Frontera exhibition. Lopez’s collage in particular succeeds in challenging some deeply entrenched oppositions, or conceptual borders. To begin with, the artifacts she has collected will tend to disrupt any presumed border between high culture and low, art and trash. Moreover, while individually the items might be examples of “naturalized” racism, collectively they can represent a syncretic appropriation of racist notions. In this sense, the piece is simultaneously an indictment of domination, and a gesture toward something different. There are other examples of “border crossings” within this piece, but I want to stop here, because I think that the notion of artistic syncretism is particularly useful for an understanding of the work adjacent to Lopez’s, Cesar Augusto Martinez’s “Amor a la Tierra en el Sur de Tejas,” or “Love of the Land of South Texas.”

     

    Martinez’s piece appears to be a simple landscape–pretty, but not terribly interesting. On second glance, however, the work takes on an entirely new dimension. It turns out that the piece is painted on a “No Trespassing” sign, an the accompanying text tells us that the sign is from the border. The text goes further to say that “by painting over a No Trespassing sign, Martinez presents the despair of immigrants who come with hope to an unwelcoming land.” While this may be true, Martinez is surely representing something other than, and beyond, despair. The land is clearly unwelcoming, but Martinez seems to be saying that it makes its appeal to him anyway. Moreover, by transforming a hostile border sign into an artwork (an object that has already furthered his professional reputation), Martinez has managed to turn the very symbol of his unwelcome and alien status to his advantage on this side of the border. I do not want to trivialize the despair that the blurb refers to, and I’ll note that many of the other works in the exhibit make it perfectly clear that lots of people are not able to cross the border at all, and that many of those who do are forced to suffer extreme hardships. But it is precisely for this reason that Martinez’s work most clearly marks a moment of artistic syncretism. If it is only because of the problems of domination that Martinez needs to appropriate a border sign, then the work is syncretic in that it moves beyond appropriation and into creation of new forms and possibilities for cultural transformation. In the process of appropriation, Martinez has posed a serious challenge to the notion of borders.1 The work makes it possible to see the border not as a line marking containment, but as just one more piece of canvas. Repressive politics or transformative art? Martinez poses the possibility that the border might be both at once.

     

    David Avalos deals with a similar set of issues in his “San Diego Donkey Cart.” This piece focuses on tourism in border towns as a way of putting into question the prevailing norms of U.S./Mexican relations. The work is, in Avalos’s words “a simulacrum of a Tiajuanan Donkey Cart.” These hand-drawn carts with photos of “friendly Mexicans” are popular border attractions. Avalos’s sculpture substitutes a drawing of a “border patrol agent arresting an undocumented worker” for the traditional photo. The result is that “Tiajuana and San Diego’s tourist trade is thus juxtaposed with the socioeconomic reality that underlies it and upon which it depends for its survival.” This is perhaps the one work in the exhibit best suited for a discussion of syncretism as a process.

     

    The “original” border town donkey carts were already simulacra, appropriations of Mexican culture for the purposes of a U.S.-dominated tourist industry. (Donkey carts were used for transportation before they were used for tourism). Moreover, construction of the tourist cart relied on a previous Northern appropriation and construction of Mexican identity, in the form of the stock figure of the “friendly Mexican.” Avalos’s work is merely the next step in the process–a further re-construction. But the exhibit is quick to note that the process did not end here.

     

    Avalos’s original donkey cart was a life-sized sculpture commissioned as a public work, and placed in front of a San Diegan federal court house in 1986–a site from which it was quickly removed. A judge ordered it confiscated (a further act of “appropriation?”) because of the “threat that it posed to public safety.” The work that’s in the exhibit is, therefore, a reproduction of Avalos’s original simulacrum. Avalos, however, refused to allow the judge’s actions to go uncontested, and enlisted the aid of the ACLU to fight for the cart’s release and reinstatement. The case was ultimately dismissed, but Avalos has now gathered the judge’s statements along with magazine articles and various court documents into a booklet that has become an intrinsic part of the current exhibit. Appropriation and transformation are unending. The “original” donkey cart now provides the occasion for a whole series of discussions that problematize U.S./Mexican borders, public/private distinctions, and individual/government relations.

     

    This last of these oppositions is important because it is bound up with the categories of “tourist” and “friend.” Avalos’s work clearly links both of these generalized individuals to their respective governments. “Tourist” becomes “U.S. tourist,” and “friend” becomes “Mexican friend.” This was of course, always the case, but forced recognition of the nationality of both categories (even in Mexico, tourists can see “U.S.” as an invisible norm) denies the presumed innocence of the former. Moreover, “friendship” is high ighted as an economic, rather than as an emotional relation, one which Mexicans must take up as a strategy of survival.

     

    Though the exhibit includes far too many works for me to discuss or even describe, the three I’ve mentioned exemplify the kinds of border-crossing gestures that comprise it. Virtually everthing in the exhibit is concerned to transgress or transform boundaries and to resist all efforts at containment. The question I’d like to end with, however, is this: What does it mean to group all of these works together, and contain them within the “borders” of museum walls?2 What is the relationship between the exhibit’s various critiques of socio-cultural borders, and the borders of the institution in and through which the exhibit has its existence? There is an effort here to produce what bell hooks calls a space of “radical openness;” but is it not the case that this openness is brought to a kind of closure after all by the physical and social limitations of the museum’s space? These are not trivial questions, yet nor are they easily decidable. We must bear in mind that cultural syncretism is an ongoing process whose effects, or lack thereof, cannot reliably be extrapolated from current arrangements. Whatever its institutional position, the cultural work on and of the border represented by the La Frontera exhibition warrants our closest attention.

     

    Notes

     

    1.I don’t want to go too far here. Undocumented workers provide cheap labor which is essential for many United States industries. Despite political posturing and an ever increasingly abusive immigration system, employers rely upon, and are secure in their ability to maintain access to, this labor pool. In a very real sense then, border crossings (and appropriations of border markings) challenge very little.

     

    2.One piece of art that is referred to in the exhibition’s catalog was, in fact, never contained by museum walls. “Arte Reembolso/Art Rebate” by Elizabeth Sisco, Louis Hock and David Avalos was more explicitly interactive and public than a museum would allow. The artists applied for an NEA grant, and used the money to print up certificates for undocumented workers to sign. Attached to these certificates were $10 bills (which were also NEA money). When workers signed the certificates, they received the money. The idea I think, was to give back some of what was due, and to point out that, rather than an economic drain, these workers were actually vital parts of the U.S. economy. Needless to say, the NEA was not very pleased with this use of their funds. The resulting debates (in the mass media and within government circles) are ongoing. This piece, however, was commissioned to appear in conjunction with, and not as part of, the exhibition.

     

  • Theory That Matters

    Jeffrey Nealon

    Department of English
    Pennsylvania State University
    jxn8@psuvm.psu.edu

     

    Butler, Judith. Bodies That Matter: On the Discursive Limits of “Sex”. New York & London: Routledge, 1993.

     

    Editor’s note: readers may also be interested in the PMC-MOO discussion of this book, archived here .

     

    — JU

     

    Judith Butler has certainly produced a body of work that matters. It matters not only because it takes “theory” into the realm of difficult socio-political analysis, but also because it does so without sacrificing the complexities, hesitations and difficulties that necessarily surround such a project. For Butler, theory matters precisely as practice, as material response to specific (and often horrific) political situations: it is an analysis of how these situations have come to be structured as they are, and how they can be changed without simply reinstituting the very same normative interpellating discourses that gave rise to such situations in the first place. In Bodies That Matter, Butler takes up “the notion of matter, not as site or surface, but as a process of materialization that stabilizes over time to produce the effect of boundary, fixity, and surface” (9, italics removed). And it is precisely in accounting for identity as the product of still-conflicted exclusionary normative practices that Butler asks us to consider the possibility of reinscribing “our” heterogeneous present and future. While categories of identity certainly cannot and should not be abandoned in such a project, Butler nonetheless argues for the theoretical and political necessity “to learn a double movement: to invoke the category, and, hence, provisionally to institute an identity and at the same time to open the category as a site of permanent political contest” (222). It is because her work has this relentlessly dual focus–calling for concrete responsive action in the present while preserving the possibility, indeed necessity, of a reinscribed future–that Butler’s work matters so singularly and crucially. Bodies That Matter is a book very much written in the margins of 1990’s Gender Trouble, itself a kind of feminist rewriting of Butler’s vastly underrated (or at least underquoted) book on Hegel and contemporary French thought, Subjects of Desire (1987). There is, in other words, a great deal of Bodies That Matter devoted to correcting or complicating certain (mis)readings of Gender Trouble, especially those readings that took it to be arguing for an understanding of gender as a performance. As Butler writes, if she were arguing that gender was a performance, “that could mean that I thought that one woke in the morning, perused the closet or some more open space for the gender of choice, donned that gender for the day, and then restored the garment to its place at night” (Bodies, x).1 But as Butler makes clear time and again in Bodies That Matter, her notion of gender as performative is not simply equatable with understanding gender as a performance; “The reduction of performativity to performance,” she writes, “would be a mistake” (234).

     

    But how, then, are we to understand this crucial distinction? Drawing from Foucault’s work on discursive formation, Derrida on speech act theory and iterability, and Eve Sedgwick’s work on queer performativity, Butler fashions a notion of performative identity that “must be understood not as a singular or deliberate ‘act,’ but, rather, as the reiterative and citational practice by which discourse produces the effects that it names” (2).2 According to Butler, because the subject is the product of specific constraining normative frames, it cannot simply choose its gender as actors pick parts in plays; but, at the same time, because these compulsory normative frames never merely determine a subject without simultaneously opening spaces of resistance (in other words, because interpellation sometimes fails), agency is made possible and efficacious precisely because of and within these frames. “And if there is agency,” Butler writes, “it is to be found, paradoxically, in the possibilities opened up in and by that constrained appropriation of the regulatory law, by the materialization of that law, the compulsory appropriation and identification with those normative demands . . . Moreover, this act is not primarily theatrical” (12).3 The subject, in other words, is itself a product of interpellating codes, and therefore it cannot simply enforce a critical distance between itself and these codes. If there is to be subversion of identities, it must be subversion from within, a reinscription rather than a supposed remaking ex nihilo.

     

    As the book’s subtitle might suggest, Butler’s theoretical apparatus is quite specifically constructed out of a consideration of the category “sex” within the normative frames of compulsory heterosexuality. As Butler argues, “sex” is itself such a performative or citational practice:

     

    “Sex” is always produced as a reiteration of hegemonic norms. This productive reiteration can be read as a kind of performativity. Discursive performativity appears to produce that which it names, to enact its own referent, to name and to do, to name and to make. Paradoxically, however, this productive capacity of discourse is derivative, a form of cultural iterability or rearticulation, a practice of resignification, not creation ex nihilo. . . . [W]hat is invoked by the one who speaks or inscribes the law is the fiction of a speaker who wields the authority to make his [sic] words binding, the legal incarnation of the divine utterance. (107)

     

    As speech-act theory argues, performatives seem to found a situation that they merely cite: the judge’s “I now pronounce you man and wife” or the midwife’s “It’s a girl” pretend to be the “legal incarnation of the divine utterance,” when on further examination either speech act is actually “a form of cultural iterability”: such performatives iterate interpellating codes; they do not somehow found a wholly new state. A subject is, then, always cited into an identity, but, in what is only a seeming paradox, it is precisely the necessity of repeating these interpellating citational codes–of constantly identifying oneself before the law–that offers possibilities for subverting or rearticulating identity. The necessity of repetition opens the possibility of repeating these codes with a difference: “I now pronounce you man aswife” or “It’s a lesbian.” As Butler writes, “Since the law must be repeated to remain an authoritative law, the law perpetually reinstitutes the possibility of its own failure” (108).

     

    If this were as far as Butler’s work went, it would certainly be a valuable enough contribution to feminist theory–which remains, on Butler’s reading, mired in an unproductive and divisive essentialism/constructionism debate. Certainly a notion of citational performativity allows us to see past the limiting binarisms of this debate to explore the ways in which particular historical and social interpellations give rise to specific subjectivities; likewise, and perhaps more importantly, it allows us to see the ways in which those interpellations contain the very terms of their own reinscription. If Butler’s work were to stop here, however, it would leave open the question of how one gets from a notion of the citational construction of identity to the subversion or reinscription of that identity; it would leave unanswered the question of how one gets from interpellation to resistance–or, more accurately and pressingly, how one gets from the possibility of resistance to its actual activation or articulation.

     

    And it is precisely her intricate and nuanced consideration of this question that makes Butler’s Bodies That Matter not merely timely, incisive, and challenging reading, but essential reading. Bodies That Matter certainly clarifies Gender Trouble‘s arguments about an identificatory citational interpellation that carries the possibility of its own subversion; however, in Bodies That Matter Butler goes a step further, taking up the

     

    critical question of how constraints not only produce the domain of intelligible bodies, but produce as well a domain of unthinkable, abject, unlivable bodies. The latter domain is not the opposite of the former. . . ; the latter is the excluded and illegible domain that haunts the former domain as the spectre of its own impossibility, the very limit to intelligibility, its constitutive outside. . . . To claim that sex is already gendered, already constructed, is not yet to explain in which way the ‘materiality’ of sex is forcibly produced. (xi, italics removed)

     

    Butler here asks us to take a step past the platitudinous understanding that “everything is socially constructed,” and move toward an examination of the specificexclusions by which social construction secures identities. As she writes, “thinking the body as constructed demands a rethinking of the meaning of construction itself” (xi), and such a rethinking entails accounting not only for the production of normative identities, but the simultaneous production of unlivable, abject identities–though such sites may turn out, in a painful paradox, to be primary among the potential sites for normative identity’s subversion.

     

    In other words, while it is certainly important and productive to point out that “‘sex’ is a regulatory ideal … that will produce its remainder, its outside” (22), it is another matter altogether to account for the ways in which such “remainder” subjectivities are produced in specific historico-cultural situations as abjected, produced as by-products of the violent exclusions that secure normative identities. As Butler writes in the service of that project:

     

    there is an ‘outside’ to what is constructed by discourse, but this is not an absolute ‘outside,’ an ontological thereness that exceeds or counters the boundaries of discourse; as a constitutive ‘outside,’ it is that which can only be thought–when it can–in relation to that discourse, at and as its most tenuous borders. The debate between constructivism and essentialism thus misses the point of deconstruction altogether, for the point has never been that ‘everything is discursively constructed’; that point . . . refuses the constitutive force of exclusion, erasure, violent foreclosure, abjection, and its disruptive return within the very terms of discursive legitimacy. (8)

     

    The upshot of Butler’s notion of performativity, in other words, is not that everything is structured, but rather that everything is dependent on structures–linguistic, institutional, political–that are cited and recited in any specific case; and, she argues, it is precisely an attention to the material specificity of the “constitutive ‘outside’” in any particular case that would allow us to respond to and reinscribe the multiple exclusions that make an identity possible or livable, while making other identities impossible or unlivable. The constructionism debate, in other words, needs to pay attention to the specificity of the restrictions that make possible the social construction of a particular normative ideal; as Butler insists, for example, an analysis of the workings of contemporary homophobia is notequal to or simply metaphorizable as an analysis of contemporary racism (18).

     

    In fact, Butler argues that feminism itself is necessarily founded on similar exclusions, and loses much critical force if it does not engage its own grounding restrictions (29). For example, Butler takes up bell hooks’s thematization of the drag balls portrayed in Jennie Livingston’s Paris is Burning as misogynist. Butler points out that with this charge hooks “makes male homosexuality about women.” In turn, this reduction of the specificity of drag offers a troubling “way for feminist women to make themselves into the center of male homosexual activity” (127). In other words, such feminist readings of Paris is Burning misfire when they read it solely in terms of a supposed male-identified femininity, rather than as a multiple, conflicted renegotiation or “site of the phantasmatic promise of a rescue from poverty, homophobia, and racist delegitimation” (130).4 Similarly, Butler argues that Irigaray’s work runs a parallel risk when it reads the exclusion of the feminine as the master or paradigmatic exclusion in philosophical, cultural or political life. While Butler affirms the importance of Irigaray’s feminist reading of Plato, she nevertheless hesitates, asking after the multiple exclusions that secure normative identity in Plato’s texts:

     

    There are good reasons, however, to reject the notion that the feminine monopolizes the sphere of the excluded. . . . This xenophobic exclusion operates through the production of racialized Others, and those whose ‘natures’ are considered less rational by virtue of their appointed task in the process of laboring to reproduce the conditions of private life. . . . Irigaray does not always help matters here, for she fails to follow through the metonymic link between women and these other Others, idealizing and appropriating the ‘elsewhere’ as the feminine. But what is the ‘elsewhere’ of Irigaray’s ‘elsewhere’? (48-49)

     

    It is this “metonymic link between women and these Others” that Butler’s text helps us to form. While it would seem that feminism loses critical force and focus if it concerns itself with exploring exclusions other than the exclusion of the feminine, Butler persuasively argues that the opposite is the case–that feminism is doomed to inefficacy unless it takes up the multiplicity of exclusions that actually form the seemingly totalized category “feminine.”

     

    While such collective identifications under common-cause signifiers (“woman,” “queer,” “African American”) are indispensible for the project of recognition within a conflicted democracy, Butler argues that

     

    the persistence of disidentification is equally crucial to the rearticulation of democratic contestation. Indeed, it may be precisely through practices which underscore disidentification with those regulatory norms by which sexual difference is materialized that both feminist and queer politics are mobilized. Such collective disidentifications can facilitate a reconceptualization of which bodies matter, and which bodies are yet to emerge as critical matters of concern. (4)

     

    Again, Butler here reemphasizes the importance of a kind of double movement: the necessity of identification coupled with the necessity that this identificatory movement be open to reinscription. As she insists throughout Bodies That Matter, there is no stable identificatory site of “femininity” or “queerness,” and, in fact, ensuring the multiplicity of such identificatory sites is critical to feminist and queer body politics. I take the upshot of Butler’s discussion here to be that feminism, for example, cannot protect its identificatory sites from being inhabited by drag queens, Phyllis Schlafly, James Joyce or whomever. In fact, to turn a Foucaultian phrase, Butler asks us to consider what it costs us to protect such seemingly stable sites of contestation from contestation itself? In other words, what normativizing practices are reified and extended in protecting a site of stable identificatory femininity? This is perhaps Butler’s most poignant question to identity politics; as she writes, “it seems important, then, to question whether a political insistence on coherent identities can ever be the basis on which a crossing over into political alliance with other subordinated groups can take place, especially when such a conception of alliance fails to understand that the very subject-positions in question are themselves a kind of ‘crossing,’ are themselves the lived scene of a coalition’s difficulty” (115).

     

    However, and just as importantly, Butler’s is not merely an empty celebratory gesture toward a contentless “postmodern” multiplicity.5 As she writes, “one might be tempted to say that identity categories are insufficient because every subject position is the site of converging relations of power that are not univocal. But such a formulation underestimates the radical challenge to the subject that such converging relations imply” (229-30). How is it, we might ask, that simply recognizing the multiplicity of possible identificatory sites (or is that cites?) “underestimates the radical challenge to the subject” that Butler wants to pose? To answer this question, perhaps we need to turn to Butler’s continuing engagement with Lacan. Butler takes very seriously Lacan’s Freudian vocabulary of “foreclosure” as the suturing constitution of the subject. Such foreclosure, of course, creates both the subject and the exclusions that she calls us to attend to throughout Bodies That Matter. For example, Butler points out that within the constraints of Lacan’s compulsory heterosexuality, the “feminized fag and phallicized dyke” become the uninhabitable positions which are foreclosed in the taking up of compulsory heterosexuality, “a move that excludes and abjects gay and lesbian possibilities” (96). But what happens, Butler asks, when those abjected sites, by and through their very exclusion or foreclosure, become sites of subversive desire and identification? What happens, in other words, “if the taboo becomes eroticized precisely for the transgressive sites that it produces” (97)? Certainly, Lacan would have taught us that this is just how desire works (98ff), but what happens when we subject the Lacanian analysis of sexual difference to a kind of symptomatic Lacanian reading?

     

    What happens (if I can try to extrapolate from an intensely nuanced, sustained and careful reading) is that the monologizing Lacanian Oedipal law of signification–expropriation from the real into the symbolic under the threat of castration–loses its absolute privilege. Certainly, as Butler notes, Lacan’s version of resistance to interpellating norms–desire necessarily cathecting onto forbidden objects, the power of the imaginary to resist the law of the symbolic–has proven productive for his feminist readers. In fact, the imaginary has proven to be the productive hinge by which to read Lacan against Lacan’s own foreclosure of other economies. As Butler writes:

     

    this version of resistance has constituted the promise of psychoanalysis to contest strictly opposed and hierarchical sexual positions for some feminist readers of Lacan. But does this view of resistance fail to consider the status of the symbolic as immutable law? And would the mutation of that law call into question not only the compulsory heterosexuality attributed to the symbolic, but also the stability and discreteness of the distinction between symbolic and imaginary registers within the Lacanian scheme? It seems crucial to question whether resistance to an immutable law is sufficient as a political contestation of compulsory heterosexuality, where this resistance is safely restricted to the imaginary and thereby restrained from entering into the structure of the symbolic itself. (106)

     

    Here, Butler argues that we must pay attention to the specificity of the subject’s foreclosures and the resistances that they enable; in other words, resistance to the law of the father is to be found in inhabiting and reinscribing specific abjected subjectivities rather than simply lamenting the necessity of such foreclosures–reading them as necessary if regrettable symptoms of the law of the father–or concentrating on the imaginary spaces of freedom that such foreclosures seem to allow. Finally, Butler suggests that this resistance of and to foreclosure breaks down the wall between the Lacanian symbolic and imaginary: “if the figures of homosexualized abjection mustbe repudiated for sexed positions to be assumed,” she argues, “then the return of those figures as sites of erotic cathexis will refigure the domain of contested positionalities within the symbolic” (109).

     

    The key concept that Butler wants to rescue from Lacan is that of resistance, or more precisely, of the resistance to foreclosure through desire. While Foucault and Derrida are helpful in the project of enabling resistance–showing how it is possible if not inevitable–it seems that for Butler, Lacan allows us to demonstrate how resistance happens, how it is engendered and made concrete through foreclosure itself. Butler departs from Lacan, however, by questioning his reduction of all such response or subversion to the very terms of the originary loss or foreclosure of the real: in other words, Butler questions the monologizing reduction in Lacan of all laws to the symbolic law of failure, lack, and expropriation from the real. For Butler, Lacan (and, for that matter, Slavoj Zizek) reduces all resistance to a symptom of Oedipal expropriation–reduces all laws to the law of lack–and thereby reduces the complexity of specific historical and cultural power relations that foreclose specific identities at specific times to pave the way for normativity. In Lacan and Zizek, the consistent failures or misrecognitions of the subject all point to the same monologizing drama of Oedipal expropriation. For Butler, such subjective misrecognition calls to be read otherwise, not as a symptom of the Law of the Father but as the condition of its subversion. As she writes, “the resignification of norms is thus a function of their inefficacy, and so the question of subversion, of working the weakness in the norm, becomes a matter of inhabiting the practices of its rearticulation” (237, originial emphasis removed). If there is a notion of Lacanian failure or “lack” running through Butler’s work, it is, perhaps, “failure” as that which enables and calls for another reading, another response, another movement. Misrecognition is the moment or movement of critique in Butler’s work–the exposure of the weakness or inefficacy of the negative or normative; but it is this other or second move–working that weakness by reinscribing it–that makes Butler’s work so decisive and important. It is this movement that takes Bodies That Matter a step beyond Gender Trouble.6

     

    Based on this theoretical ground, which I have only rather idiosyncratically begun to sketch here, Butler goes on to supply a series of painstakingly careful analyses of identity, race and gender in a wide range of discourses and texts–Lacan, Paris is Burning, ACT UP, Willa Cather, Nella Larsen, Slavoj Zizek, queer theory. It is here, with these specific analyses, that Butler makes a decisive intervention: a critical, insightful, necessary intervention. An intervention that matters.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See, for example, Seyla Benhabib’s critique of Gender Trouble in Situating the Self (New York & London: Routledge, 1992): “Along with the dissolution of the subject into yet ‘another position in language’ disappear of course concepts of intentionality, accountability, self-reflexivity, and autonomy. The subject that is but another position in language can no longer master and create that distance between itself and the chain of significations in which it is immersed such that it can reflect upon them and creatively alter them. The strong version of the Death of the Subject thesis is not compatible with the goals of feminism. . . . If we are no more than the sum total of the gendered expressions we perform, is there ever any chance to stop the performance for a while, to pull the curtain down, and only let it rise if one can have a say in the production of the play itself?” (214-15).

     

    2. The linchpin figure here is Derrida, specifically his reading of performativity and speech act theory in “Signature Event Context” (in Margins of Philosophy. Tr. Alan Bass. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1982, 307-30). As Derrida writes, “Every sign . . . can be cited, put between quotation marks; thereby it can break with every given context, and engender infinitely new contexts in an absolutely nonsaturable fashion. This does not suppose that the mark is valid outside its context, but on the contrary that there are only contexts without any center of absolute anchoring” (321). For Derrida, one can’t play substantives against performatives precisely because citational performatives make the supposed plenitude of substantives possible in the first place: “the condition of possibility for these effects is simultaneously, once again, the condition of their impossibility, of the impossibility of their rigorous purity” (328).

     

    3. Compare Butler’s Gender Trouble (New York & London: Routledge, 1990): “The subject is not determined by the rules through which it is generated because signification is not a founding act, but rather a regulated process of repetition that both conceals itself and enforces its rules precisely through the production of substantializing effects. In a sense, all signification takes place within the orbit of the compulsion to repeat; ‘agency,’ then, is to be located within the possibility of a variation on that repetition” (145).

     

    4. Butler’s point, we should note, is certainly not that drag is unproblematically subversive: as she writes, there is “no necessary relation between drag and subversion” (125). See also 231 on this question.

     

    5. As Butler writes about this kind of postmodern pragmatist constructionism, “it is important to resist that theoretical gesture of pathos in which exclusions are simply affirmed as sad necessities of signification” (53). Butler likewise remains suspicious of the “liberal” multiculturalist position which would ask us to walk a mile in the other’s shoes: “sympathy involves a substitution of oneself for another that may well be a colonization of the other’s position as one’s own” (118).

     

    6. Certainly, Gender Trouble formulates the questions before us in Bodies: “theories of feminist identity that elaborate predicates of color, sexuality, ethnicity, class, and able-bodiedness invariably close with an embarrassed ‘etc.’ at the end of the list. Through this horizontal trajectory of adjectives, these positions strive to encompass a situated subject, but invariably fail to be complete. This failure, however, is instructive: what political impetus is to be derived from the exasperated ‘etc.’ that so often occurs at the end of such lines?” (Gender Trouble 143). Gender Trouble, it seems to me, gestures toward such readings, but does not actually supply them. Bodies That Matter goes on to demonstrate precisely the “political impetus” of a certain “failure.” This would, however, also be the point at which one could open a dialogue with Butler concerning the problematic Hegelian legacy of this notion of lack or misrecognition. In pursuing this question, which there is no time to do here, we could perhaps turn to Blanchot’s work on the weakening of the negative in Hegel (see, e.g., “Literature and the Right to Death” in Blanchot’s The Gaze of Orpheus. Tr. Lydia Davis. Barrytown, NY: Station Hill, 1981, 21-62; and Le pas au-dela. Paris: Gallimard, 1973).

     

  • Black Modernisms / Black Postmodernisms

    Russell A. Potter

    English Department
    Colby College
    rapotter@colby.edu

     

    Tricia Rose, Black Noise: Rap Music and Black Culture in Contemporary America (Wesleyan UP/ UP of New England)

     

    Paul Gilroy, The Black Atlantic: Modernity and Double-Consciousness (Harvard UP)

     

    The mid-nineties are unquestionably a signal point in the development of the cluster of intellectual and political movements that move variously under the banners of Postmodernism, Cultural Studies, Black Studies, Women’s Studies, Gay and Lesbian Studies, and American Studies. In one sense, they have been almost too successful in gaining academic currency–some academics, it seems, have embraced them before they even quite knew what they were, happily tacking these new rubrics over the departmental doorframe in hopes that they would work the magic of keeping up with the theoretical Joneses. And yet, at the same moment, these new fields have been attacked with unusual virulence by such veterans of the academy-bashing circuit as Roger Kimball and Shelby Steele. Black Studies, both in the U.K. and the U.S., has in particular felt this crisis, continuing to serve as a favorite target for the self-declared traditionalists even while it comes under pressure from newer “Studies” competing for the same academic niches. Earlier debates, such as those over the questions of canon and curriculum, are now overshadowed by far deeper and more ominous rumblings, as internal divisions have erupted in an academic left that was perhaps never as unified as its conservative critics liked to believe. And, just to turn up the flame a little higher, college and university budgets have begun to shrink, forcing many of the new generation of academic mavericks and activists into arguments over who will get how big a slice of the dwindling pie–or who will get no slice at all. The distant laughter of the conservative critics of the academy adds a sense of lurking despair to this morose game of musical chairs.

     

    Meanwhile, back in the “cultures” that these fields ostensibly study, the wheel of new subcultural formations and their commodified doppelgangers has been spinning with increasing speed. While this acceleration has been marked in rapid changes in video, film, multimedia, and hypertext, one of the most visible sites of change has been music; yesterday’s rhythms of revolution are today’s pricey national concert tours, and tomorrow’s instant retrocompilation CD’s. Under such circumstances, academics who cast their hats into the ring of “popular culture” or “cultural studies” had best be prepared for a fast-forward free-for-all; if they emerge with something more than a handful of someone else’s hair, they probably ought to get some sort of medal. The battered academic Volvo suddenly finds itself caught between sound-system-loaded Jeeps blaring Ice Cube on the one side and air-conditioned Lexuses with the radio tuned to Rush Limbaugh on the other. It’s culture wars with a vengeance, and yet it’s also a time when there is an opportunity, however fleeting, for voices from within the academy to perform potent acts of cultural translation, acts which, even if they can’t resolve the cacophony, can at least articulate what’s at stake, and perhaps finally break through the strained dichotomies between “intellectual” and “popular” culture, and perhaps even take account of the interpenetration of such categories. That, after all, was supposed to be one of the benefits of the post-structuralist critiques that pried open this door in the first place; it seems strange that, a generation after Barthes, people should still be discovering the mythologics of culture as though this were something never heard of before.

     

    A large part of the problem lies, ironically, in the very discourses post-structuralism has deployed to describe itself. As bell hooks put it back in the first issue of Postmodern Culture:

     

    The contemporary discourse which talks the most about heterogeneity, the decentered subject, declaring breakthroughs that allow recognition of otherness, still directs its critical voice primarily to a specialized audience, one that shares a common language rooted in the very master narratives it claims to challenge. If radical postmodernist thinking is to have a transformative impact then a critical break with the notion of "authority" as "mastery over" must not simply be a rhetorical device, it must be reflected in habits of being, including styles of writing as well as chosen subject matter.1

     

    Hooks’s rejoinder reflects not only the tendency of postmodern critiques to ignore or tokenize black expressive artforms, but also the long-standing–and oftentimes justified–suspicion on the part of black writers and philosophers over what (if anything) postmodernism could possibly offer for the kinds of critical histories they were engaged with constructing. As recently as 1989, it was possible for Cornel West to allow, in his essay “Black Culture and Postmodernism,” that “the current ‘postmodernism’ debate is first and foremost a product of significant First World reflections upon the decentering of Europe.”2 West, as one of the leading black philosophers of our time, saw both the parochial and ludic elements of postmodernism as signs of its insufficient engagement with black culture, even as he gestured toward “a potentially enabling yet resisting postmodernism.”3 Yet in the light of critiques and analyses by scholars such as Henry Louis Gates Jr., Eric Lott, and Paul Gilroy, it has become increasingly evident that what had earlier been articulated primarily as the subcultural resistance of black artforms has in fact had a long and intimate relation with the founding dialectics of “Western” modernism, and consequently of “postmodernism” as well. Now, at last, it seems possible to begin to acknowledge the manifold ways in which black studies, and the histories and arts that it has engaged, have been and continue to be absolutely central to the questions raised by contemporary theory, and consequently to the numerous appropriations and figurations of blackness that have (in)formed modernist and postmodernist thought (as well as of the black artists and writers who have claimed and reclaimed a place in the genealogy of avant gardes).

     

    Still, both Gilroy and Rose, though for somewhat different reasons, tend to eschew the term “postmodern”: Gilroy prefers “anti-modern” or “counterculture of modernity”; Rose uses the more materialist-inflected “post-industrial.” Gilroy has a healthy suspicion of the simplistic relativism of some avatars of postmodernism, and prefers to see these black cultural formations as oppositional modernities, rather than postmodernities. Interested primarily in reclaiming the territory of the modern as a movement instigated by the historical experiences and philosophical implications of black slavery and diaspora, he looks dimly on the kind of glib postmodernism of writers such as Jameson, whose academic “we” never feels the need to account for its own racial, sexual, and gender presuppositions. Rose, for her part, never directly addresses the implications of postmodern theory, though she makes ready use of many of its strands. Her commitment to a thoroughly materialist account of the roots of black expressivities makes her suspicious of some of these strands, but she confines her critique to one or two writers who exemplify its worst qualities. Both Gilroy and Rose are right, I think, to be wary, but at the same time their work raises questions which are absolutely fundamental to postmodernist theory and practice, and indeed draw forcefully on some of the same decentering discourses as some of the more political postmoderist texts.

     

    I will discuss Rose’s book first since, despite the fact that it does not explicitly engage with the questions of (post)modernity, it works within a certain characteristic bind of one genre of academic postmodernism. For, both with “high” cultural formations (such as the writings of Derrida or the post-Haraway theorists of cyberspace) and with so-called “popular” formations (hip-hop, grunge, rock videos), the most common tone taken up by public intellectuals is that of the “bluffer’s guide.” What should we know about hypertext? What’s the latest word on street culture? To audiences for whom such questions elicit a potent mixture of curiosity and anxiety, there is an endless hunger for articles or books that will give them a ready grip on the latest cultural movement. Academic writers, especially those who like to work as activist public intellectuals, implicitly address this broader audience, and yet in their desire to fulfill its wishes for a synoptic overview of a critical issue, they often serve reductive ends. This is partly the doing of reviewers and readers, who are looking for ready-made rhetorical handles, but it is also part of academic writers’ desire to enjoy a spotlight broader than the private accolades of students or colleagues.

     

    The crucial question is that posed by Michel de Certeau in Heterologies: “From what position do the historians of popular culture speak? And what object do they constitute as a result of that position?”4 For it is rarely in the interests of “insurrectionary knowledges” (such as hip-hop) that the historians or chroniclers of “culture,” as constituted by the knowledges of semiotics, anthropology, or literary theory, have spoken. Those on the right, informed by an (at times unarticulated) subtext of “the decline and fall” from a Norman Rockwell past into a Piss Christ present, explicitly oppose all insurrectionary arts; intellectuals on the left, unfortunately, have seemed more interested in making academic capital of the popular than in articulating to a broader audience just what the value of such insurrections might be. When it comes to books whose explicit subject matter, rap music, is among the chief targets of the moral panicists of the right, as well as a phenomenon frequently held up by those on the left as a sign that artistic political resistance is alive and well, the exemplary questions of the public intellectuals of the left and right go toe-to-toe, each trying to claim hip-hop as a centerpiece of their social agenda. It’s a fight to the finish, as one critic’s nihilistic gat-toting hoodlum is another’s organic intellectual. As rappers say, “It’s on.”

     

    And Tricia Rose, for one, is ready for the battle. Black Noise is the kind of book you would like to send in a plain brown wrapper to everyone who dismisses rap music as a long-lived fad, mindless posturing, or minstrelsy for the ’90s. She provides ample evidence for skeptics of the development of rap music, its place within hip-hop culture and black American culture in general, and its efflourescence in the face of all kinds of direct and indirect attacks. Her opening chapter, “Voices from the Margins,” effectively summarizes rap music’s cultural imbrication at the level both of its production (she uses rap video as an example here) and of its consumption, with the associated questions of performance, audience, and technology. This segues nicely into the second chapter, “All Aboard the Night Train: Flow, Layering, and Rupture in Postindustrial New York,” where she provides a detailed social history of the South Bronx as the primary site of the emergence of hip-hop culture. The history is crucial, and ought to be required reading for critics such as David Samuels or C. Delores Tucker, clarion-callers of the “rap is a white plot” conspiracy theory. And, while writers such as David Toop or Stephen Hagar have given more detailed accounts of the musical developments in the years leading up to hip-hop’s ascendancy, Rose offers an account that clearly demonstrates the links of all the musical and artistic dimensions of hip-hop culture to the material situation of young black and Latino Americans in New York City in the late 1970’s and early ’80’s.

     

    The latter part of this chapter extends Rose’s arguments, attempting to link certain productive hip-hop tropes, such as “flow” and “breaking,” to the cultural histories she details. Here, however, she seems to founder a bit, as she comes up against the age-old musicologist’s conundrum of how to link form and content in a structure that is, to a large extent, not representational (or, on the verbal level, never simply representational). And, as attractive as it is to categorize rap music’s formal features, unless such accounts explicitly address the material histories at stake, they quickly dissipate into hazy generalities (just what is “flow,” anyway?). Rose seems to sense this, as she quickly moves into a discussion of hip-hop culture’s holy trinity of writing, breaking, and rapping, for each of which she offers succinct and suggestive accounting. As in other parts of the book, one has the sense that Rose is more at home supplying cultural contexts than she is in producing close analyses of particular rap lyrics or hip-hop creations.

     

    Rose’s next chapter, “Soul Sonic Forces,” takes a second drive by the same territory, and is considerably more successful. Rose performs a difficult balancing act between those who would link hip-hop to pre-modern African-American or African traditions, and others who would rather see it as a wholly new innovation dependent on technology. For the most part, she is able to delineate the ways in which rap music partakes of both orality and technology, without being limited by the paradigms of either. Unfortunately, as I alluded to earlier, she tends to see those who read rap as a “postmodern” artform as necessarily moving away from the materialist grounding of black studies, and does not allow for the possibility of a materialist postmodernism. Nonetheless, she acutely cuts down to size those who disembody hip-hop, taking it as a postmodern machine without a driver, and thus forgetting the actual black communities who have produced and consume it.

     

    At the same time, she is concerned to connect hip-hop’s aesthetic with the questions of originality, production, and commodification that have long been points of contention among critics of African-American music. At least since Adorno’s attempt to trash jazz as mindless musical repetition–up there with religion as an opiate of the masses–critics have argued over the social implications of music and other artforms “in the age of mechanical reproduction.” Rose neatly sidesteps Adorno, quite accurately observing that he assumes that “mass production sets the terms for repetition and that any other cultural forms of repetition, once practiced inside systems of mass production, are subsumed by the larger logic of industrialization” (72). On the contrary, Rose asserts, repetition, precisely because it antedates and post-dates industrial capitalism, is an ideal mode of resistance, both because it can re-appropriate and hijack technological machinery, and because it in fact makes a very potent agent for denaturalizing dominant cultural assumptions about what constitutes art.

     

    This offers Rose another smooth segue into the question of sampling, which she quite accurately identifies as central to hip-hop’s technological practices and aesthetic values. I wish that she would have taken up the critical ways in which, as she richly suggests, sampling challenges notions about originality and intellectual property, but she chooses instead to focus on the specific techniques which some of rap’s best-known producers–such as Eric “Vietnam” Sadler–use to “bring the noise.” Her interview with and analysis of Sadler is fascinating, but at the end the theoretical issues raised by such practices are only touched on in passing. Rose does, however, offer a salient critique of some of the past scholarship on sampling, again moving to complicate the all-too-easy dichotomies of technology versus community, or fragmented versus whole, that tend to underpin many analyses.

     

    The central chapter, “Prophets of Rage: Rap Music and the Politics of Black Cultural Expression,” finally enables Rose to free herself from the work–necessary, but to some extent deadening–of sketching in the sociological and musical contexts of hip-hop; having made her points about the material situation of the music, she is free to assess its larger cultural engagements. And, at the beginning, she is forceful in articulating the intense, inevitably contradictory power of rap music in society. She offers a model–of “public” and “private” transcripts–which suggests the doubleness, the coded nature of rap lyrics. And as far as this analysis goes, she’s right on the money. Yet it’s odd, given the substantial work done on the black tradition of Signifying, that Rose seems to eschew this model, choosing instead a rather generalized model that does not resonate as strongly as it might with other critical work in the larger field of Black Studies. Nonetheless, the point is substantially the same, which is that rap lyrics play with what its listeners know (or don’t), drawing them in even as it shape-shifts through tropological sequences that let out a long line of ambiguity, only to yank it back to ‘hook’ its listeners like an angler snagging a trout.

     

    Rose here offers critical readings of four hip-hop lyrics–Paris’s “The Devil Made Me Do It,” KRS-One’s “Who Protects Us from You?,” L.L. Cool J.’s “Illegal Search,” and Public Enemy’s “Night of the Living Baseheads.” Her readings, while uneven in places, certainly demonstrate the potency of these lyrics, as well as their rhetorical fluidity. Yet just at this point, where there is the greatest opportunity to analyze how rap lyrics work on the tropological level, Rose instead reads all four lyrics in a basically narrative sense, comparing them with anecdotes from her own life, hypothetical reflections on the class dimensions of L.L. Cool J.’s status as a wealthy entertainer, and a scene-by-scene analysis of the video for PE’s “Baseheads.” There are salient social points in every reading, but only scattered observations on exactly how these raps managed to bum rush the mass-media stage, or on the promised “politics” of black expression. There is also, for the most part, no close reading of the tropological moves that structure these raps: it’s rather like reading an account of a boxing match that talks only about strategy without offering any blow-by-blow details.

     

    Again, de Certeau’s question comes to mind: in presenting analyses of larger cultural movements, what is at stake? However much academic writers would like to eschew the role of talking heads, their commentary spliced in between footage of current or past events, is there another, more fully engaged role open to them? Rose is clearly struggling with these questions, as anyone who writes such a book must, and expectations perhaps run too high. Hip-hop is too vast to lend itself to ready analysis in any one book, as Rose herself notes frankly in her preface, and however detailed or full her readings, they can’t stand in for hip-hop culture as a whole. Still, the modality of object and analysis, of the critic as commentator, suffuses much of this book, and gives it at times a frustrating distance from what it tries to bring most closely into view. Rose is at times, it seems, uncertain just where to set the dial between the rhetorical distance of conventional criticism and the ready familiarity and engagement of a fan of the artform. Having to explain every reference at every point can be deadening, and yet dropping allusions left and right risks leaving many readers scratching their heads.

     

    Rose, however, is aware of all these difficulties, and is at her best when she can use specific material histories or social trends. Her analysis of the politics of the decline in large-arena rap venues, which makes up the balance of her “Prophets of Rage” chapter, is compelling, and brings together numerous sources to make evident the repressive but often behind-the-scenes politics of large concert venues. Yet this analysis, as acute as it is, does not quite fulfill the chapter’s promise of an accounting of the politics of black musical expression, since it does not address studio recordings, magazine and newspaper attacks on rap, show-trials such as those of Biz Markie or 2 Live Crew, or the problem with rap’s lack of radio exposure, all of which are at least as significant as the politics of live concerts–perhaps more, given that rap music today is primarily produced and consumed via recordings, despite its reliance on dialogic structures which remain fundamentally linked to acts of reception, call-and-response, and interlocution.

     

    Rose’s final chapter, “Bad Sistas,” is in fact her strongest, bringing together as it does her ability to read social structures–such as sexism and homophobia–not simply alongside but within the discourses of rap lyrics and media hype. She rightly rejects the sort of identity politics that thinks it solely the job of women rappers to answer male rappers’ misogyny, or for that matter assumes that a woman rapper is necessarily a feminist rapper. She denounces the implicit heterosexism of many champions of hip-hop (in particular Houston A. Baker, Jr. and Nelson George). Yet she does more than simply call such bias out on the carpet, but goes further, situating critical discourses over rap in relationship to the uneasy alliances between bourgeois, predominantly white feminism and black women whose struggles, while allied in a general sense with those of this feminism, have had to be contested within very different social and economic structures. She moves astutely from this analysis to a series of examples drawn from the raps and videos of artists such as Salt-n-Pepa, Roxanne Shante, and MC Lyte, demonstrating the ongoing and complex verbal play via which women rappers dramatize their own multiple and at times contradictory positions in relation to their lovers, their rivals, and their homegirls. Finally, she offers a refreshingly candid account of the ways in which black women’s sexuality manages to be both openly expressive and resistant to objectification, a kind of feminism that, though reluctant to name itself as such, clearly has a potent and complex contribution to make to feminist theory and practice. Ultimately, Rose implies, the vernacular ethos of black women struggling against sexism and racism is the root and ground which feminism–particularly academic feminist theory–tends to overlook, even as it continually invokes its name. There are valuable grounds here for analysis of the larger relations between academic discourses and vernacular artforms and social structures: though there is no space in the book to develop them, I hope that Rose (and others) will continue to do so.

     

    Black Noise, despite its shortcomings–and some are inevitable in any book that tries to tackle a vibrantly living and changing artform–is without question the best book on rap music and hip-hop culture yet to appear. Even though much of its time is spent detailing the backgrounds of the music, such backgrounding is an inescapable necessity when writing about a cultural formation so often attacked, distorted, and hyped within both the academic and the popular press, and about which there is so much misinformation and sheer ignorance. Rose, admirably, does not try to over-simplify her topic, and at its best her book offers a snapshot of hip-hop with all its urgent and yet at times contradictory messages and tactics intact. With the appearance of Rose’s book, it is to be hoped that hip-hop critics inside and outside the academy will be able to move on toward a more detailed engagement with the numerous political, social, and aesthetic issues it raises, without having at every turn to stop and explain the basic issues and histories at stake.

     

    One aspect of this work, inevitably, will be to situate hip-hop within the larger histories of black expressive arts, and still more broadly, within the critical debates over culture, identity, and (post)modernity that have helped define the terms for the social and intellectual struggles of the ’90’s. Rose, concerned primarily with defending hip-hop as a cultural movement, only gestures toward these broader issues, and while identifying hip-hop as a “postindustrial art,” she does not address exactly what that might mean from the point of the historical development of black arts. Here the work of Paul Gilroy offers an apposite yet wholly supportive counterpoint; working with what seems at the outset an impossibly broad brush, Gilroy sets out to demarcate the histories of what he calls “the black Atlantic,” in the process sketching out the fundamentals of a new, trans-national, yet non-reductive model of the interrelations between black diasporic cultures. And, while it is hard to compete with the dust-jacket accolades showered upon Gilroy’s book by critics such as Anthony Appiah or Hazel Carby, it is impossible to overstate the importance of his work to black studies, or to cultural studies as a whole. A radical scholar who nonetheless has a passion for carefully balanced observations, Gilroy’s book is forty theses on the door of cultural studies, and if the folks inside neglect to read them, they do so at their peril. Few writers–maybe none–can combine as Gilroy does a series of potent, historically articulated textual epiphanies with the broad yet meticulous brush of synthesis. Precisely because the book is so thoroughly grounded in the particularities of black histories and artforms, there is no way to review it without attending to each of Gilroy’s specific investigations in turn–and yet to do this is to be reminded (as I suspect Gilroy would want us to be) of the complexity as well as the continuity of black diasporic artforms.

     

    Central to Gilroy’s thesis is the claim that modernism(s) cannot be conceived of as European, that in fact the genealogy of modernism is from the outset bound up with black histories, cultural forms, and the historical experience of slavery. Gilroy bases this claim not on a sweeping monumental survey, but on an incisive tropological tour through the tutor-texts of modernism, among which he includes not only Hegel, Nietzsche, and Benjamin, but Douglass, DuBois, and C.L.R. James. But before making these specific cases, Gilroy wants first to sketch in the problematics of contemporary cultural studies, within which blackness and modernity orbit in circles both of contest and exchange. Gilroy’s chronotope here is that of a ship, undertaking multiple transatlantic crossings, carrying slaves through the immeasurable horror of the Middle Passage, and in later times carrying the speech, song, and spirit of what Gilroy sees as a fundamentally transnational black Atlantic culture. As a sort of shot over the bow, Gilroy fires the first of many broadsides at those whom he calls black “particularists” and “exceptionalists,” and, rebel without a pause, directs an equal volley at the ostensibly allied fleet of the anti-essentialist position. Black culture, he argues, need not answer the call to (mis)represent itself as wholly unified and ethnically absolute, nor need it disperse to the four winds of assimilation, appropriation, commodification, and reification. It can, in fact, very well claim for itself both roots and routes (Gilroy’s favorite trope, and one that resonates throughout this book)

     

    Yet in order to make such claims, Gilroy must first do what very few in his position have done, and that is to critique the very field of cultural studies within which he stands. For, while in the U.S. black studies came up through the academy within a fairly consistent humanistic paradigm, in the U.K., black studies has been shaped by a long alliance with left intellectuals in the field of cultural studies. Now that cultural studies itself has become such a popular U.K. export, Gilroy has something to say about the nature of its cargo. He notes the conspicuous absence in the histories narrated by British Marxists of the anti-colonial struggles of previous centuries, which plays into the pernicious and yet rarely explicit assumption that to be “British” was (and is) to be “white.” As Gilroy tells it, it’s striking how the ostensibly revolutionary sentiments of British cultural studies at times partake as intensely of a kind of nostalgic nationalism as the far more reactionary ideologies of the most stodgy conservatives. This same nationalism underpins the logic of “American Studies” in the U.S., and Black Studies as well; African-American culture is held forth as the paradigm and fons sacrae of blackness, against which what Gilroy calls “U.K. Blak” or the polymorphous Black cultures of the Caribbean are all too often marginalized. Like Marxists before them, critics within cultural studies seem blind to their own reliance on precisely the sort of nationalistic frames which erode their claims to larger mass formations. In the case of black diasporic cultures, this tunnel vision is particularly costly, as Gilroy demonstrates forcefully in the chapters that follow.

     

    Much of the balance of the first chapter–“The Black Atlantic as a Counterculture of Modernity”–are devoted to an analysis of the writings of Martin Delany which, while valuable, seems peripheral to Gilroy’s project. Gilroy’s analysis of Delany as a foundational force in the linkage of black masculinity and patriarchy to black national identity is forceful, but represents only one aspect of the ethos Gilroy seeks to define. His threefold model of black consciousness is only sketched here, but it is highly pertinent: black modernisms have been edged on either side by a kind of longing for the “anti-modern” past and an anticipatory yearning for a postmodern yet-to-come” (37). Delany works well as an exemplary thinker of the “past” element in this triad, but to lay out the other end of the spectrum Gilroy turns to black music. For as he pointedly observes, music both forces an accounting with the extra-textual world and takes account of the performative vernacular dimensions of black culture, for which heavily literary accounts of black culture have so often failed to account, and yet which are so central. Music, furthermore, serves as a force of continuum, reaching back to draw from African melodic and rhythmic roots, even as it is shaped by its own transatlantic routes of transmission, as when American R&B traveled to Jamaica and was reborn as Ska, which in turn gave rise to rock steady, Reggae, and dancehall (each of which in turn has traveled both to and from the UK and US). Whatever the textual and literary arguments Gilroy makes–and they are compelling in and of themselves–music is his trump card, as it offers the clearest framework within which his thesis of the black Atlantic as the “counterculture of modernity” can be materially demonstrated.

     

    Gilroy follows this provocative opening with a sudden (and at first, rather obscure) movement back to a discussion of Hegel, and the central role of the master-slave dialectic in his philosophy and those of his peers and followers. It’s a different tack (to maintain the nautical tropology), and yet a strategic one. All too often, the deep-seated racialism of Hegel and those who wrote in his wake is glossed over, or (perhaps worse) admitted as though it were an incidental blot on an otherwise unblemished cloth. On the contrary, as Gilroy insists, it is fundamental to the philosophical turns which led directly to modernism. Slavery, he notes, was for a great period of time considered as a problem internal to the European “West”: it was only after the moral campaign against it that it was jettisoned as if it were some sort of awful accident. The relation of slave and master changes and fundamentally shapes the subjectivities of slave and master–on this, both slavery’s defenders and the first generation of its critics could agree: if it became at times an abstraction, its material presence was never far away. Gilroy embodies this potent material corollary in stunning readings both of the narrative and life of Frederick Douglass and the case of Margaret Garner (which Toni Morrison used as the basis for Beloved); the experience of escape–failed or successful–from the psychological bonds of slavery emerges as a kind of limit-experience which tests the very foundations of subjectivity. And more: Douglass, for one, emerges as a signal modernist figure, not simply a self-made man, but a self made via a particular kind of struggle, foreshadowing all modernist smithies of the soul.

     

    Gilroy’s next chapter finally addresses the central question of black music, and in many ways it’s the most free-ranging and compelling reading in the whole book. It’s refreshing to read a critic who knows the music thoroughly, whether he’s writing about the Fisk Jubilee Singers, Miles Davis, or Eric B. and Rakim. There is none of the usual critical hand-wringing over 2 Live Crew et. al.–Gilroy knows enough to know that’s not where it’s at–nor is there the kind of list-of-names vertigo of a critic who’s trying to link everything with everything. Gilroy treats musicians as artists on their own terms, and finds linkages in their thought and performance that are the mortar of his larger claims. The Fisk Jubilee Singers form one trope, with their extensive European tours making a signal moment for the European dimensions of black arts, even as they return later in the book to represent blackness to a young and still very northeasterly W.E.B. DuBois. Their modern counterparts have far more compact means of transportation, as the chronotope of the turntable replaces that of the ship, and the triangulation between UK Blak, US soul and R&B, and Caribbean musics is traced with attention to the ways in which it refutes any simplistic notion of Africa (or the U.S., or anyplace) as the point of origin, even as it structures and propagates truly synthetic and recognizable black styles. By examining instances of transatlantic fusion such as those of Soul II Soul, Ronnie Laws, and Apache Indian, Gilroy articulates what he sees as a cultural formation that is both “constructed” and yet has (a) “soul,” an essence if you will, a musical spectrum both whole and heteroglot, connected and fragmented.

     

    It’s a shame that Gilroy doesn’t develop this particular thesis further, and it is a potent corrective to the kind of reductive musical nationalism practiced by many black critics, even as it squarely claims for black music a “counterculture of modernity” which must be met on its own terms. Still, while music is vital to his argument–forming, as he notes, a crucial mode beyond textuality and simple representation–Gilroy has far broader ambitions, specifically the (re)clamation of black Atlantic formations in literature, sociology, anthropology, and philosophy. To this project, his re-examinations of DuBois and Wright are of the utmost importance, and not simply because of their travels and exiles (DuBois to Germany as a young man, and to Africa as “The Old Man,” and Wright’s move to France), but because they enable Gilroy to rewrite the genealogy of blackness itself.

     

    Gilroy’s analysis of DuBois takes a twofold focus: a detailed re-examination of The Souls of Black Folk, and a reading of some of DuBois’s long-neglected polemical novels (which, though fascinating, there is not room to discuss here). In the background of both, Gilroy posits a surprising–even scandalous–connection: the thought that DuBois’s nationalism owed something to the German nationalism he encountered while studying in Germany. Yet at the same time as the power of national identity impressed itself on DuBois, he could not fully follow the kind of black particularism espoused by precursors such as Martin Delany or Alexander Crummel, for the simple reason that he was particularly aware of the ways in which national and racial identities were formed and informed by a complex and often conflicting set of historical urges. Gilroy sorts these out into three stages, which he associates with the three sections of The Souls of Black Folk: the struggle against the institution of slavery, the struggle to win bourgeois rights and liberties, and the pursuit of spaces of black community and autonomy. He notes that the battle against racism is necessarily different in each of these phases, and also that the ways in which these stages overlapped each other led to the coexistence and conflict of what were, on a tactical level, very different struggles. The falling out between DuBois and Washington, for instance, is newly intelligible in this light, as education had a radically different role to play in the first two of these phases. The third stage–with all its attendant anxieties of assimilation and particularism–is, Gilroy argues, the moment for the emergence of oppositional black modernisms:

     

    The third stage characteristically involves a deliberate and self-conscious move beyond language in ways that are informed by the social memory of the earlier experiences of enforced separation from the world of written communication. A countercultural sense of the inability of mere words to convey certain truths inaugurates a special indictment of modernity's enforced separation of art and life as well as a distinct aesthetic (or anti-aesthetic) standpoint. Music is the best way of examining this final aspect. (123-124).

     

    The special significance of black spiritual songs for DuBois, as well as the ongoing refiguration of black musics as the representative cultural productions of the black Atlantic, emerges at once in this passage, and suggests a still more potent claim. Perhaps it is not, in fact, at the level of intellectual vanguards that the final phase of black struggle needs to take place, but precisely at the vernacular level. Gilroy, however, leaves this possibility hanging as he offers a strong reading of The Souls of Black Folk: while there is no space to reiterate his argument in the detail it deserves in the scope of this brief review, suffice it to say that it reveals strong and all-too-often neglected undercurrents, which militate toward a skeptical rejection of the broadconcept of “progress” or “progressivism” with which DuBois is conventionally associated. The DuBois who emerges in these readings has a richer and more complicated engagement with all three phases of black struggle, and his model of “double consciousness” marks not a flaw but a prophetic pointer toward a different kind of vision, a “second sight” which looks far beyond the fuzzy humanism of most modernist thinkers and toward the postmodern possibility of seeing split subjectivity as a critical asset.

     

    Gilroy follows up on this reading with a compelling look at Wright’s career, focusing on his years in France. Wright was faulted by many for his move to European turf, and to this day the books he wrote in France have been disparaged and neglected for failing to represent the kind of realist, experiential models of race that were central to the positive reception accorded his earlier novels. Again, Gilroy discovers an unexpected Wright, a person engaged with European modernity not via the margin, but from the very questions that formed its center. Wright’s interest in Nietzschean affirmation via negation (as one example of which Wright offered the “Dozens,” the verbal ancestor of today’s hip-hop disses), his engagement with existentialism, and his deliberate refusal of the simplistic representational terms which critics and publishers held forth as the condition for their renewed interest in his work, all become newly meaningful in Gilroy’s reading. For Wright, to claim modernism as his own was a serious task, and grew as strongly and deeply from the same experiences as earlier had led him to write Native Son. In a compelling passage, Gilroy quotes Wright’s comments on the subject, which might well be addressed to all of the detractors of his later work. Wright claimed, in fact, that double consciousness–which he called “split subjectivity”–gave him a particular and potent slant on the crisis of modernity:

     

    I've tried to lead you back to the angle of my vision slowly . . . My point of view is a Western one, but a Western one that conflicts at several vital points with the present, dominant outlook of the West. Am I ahead of or behind the West? My personal judgment is that I'm ahead. And I do not say this boastfully; such a judgment is implied by the very nature of those Western values I hold dear. (qtd. 172)

     

    It’s a shame that Wright’s angle of vision has not received the kind of critical attention it deserves, and Gilroy offers a number of compelling readings of Wright’s later work which will, hopefully, renew interest in his later writings.

     

    The final chapter, “Not a Story to Pass On: Living Memory and the Slave Sublime,” offers a fitting culmination of the book’s syntheses, though Gilroy is quite clear that his book only sketches the barest outline of black Atlantic roots ‘n’ routes. The title epigraph, drawn from Morrison’s Beloved, underlines the double valence of tradition in black cultures; it is the bearer both of “jewels brought from bondage” and of the unspeakable imprint of slavery. The bitter intertwining of pain and pleasure, so graphically evoked by Morrison in the scene where Paul D traces out the “chokecherry tree” of scar tissue of Sethe’s back, is brought into critical focus as Gilroy traces the debates between fragmented and whole racial selves, between constructivist and essentialist polarities, and again brings forth a new possibility. Gilroy shuns the “spurious security” of melaninism, and is critical of some of the more historically oversimplified versions of Afrocentricity. And yet, nonetheless, he historically situates the appeal of these discourses, and in fact demonstrates compellingly the role of the yearning for such stability in the production of the heteroglot yet synaptically linked expressions of black diasporic experiences. The “catastrophic rupture” of the middle passage finds its compensation in acts of creation from materials at hand, from vernacular syntheses of speech and music, and in the deliberate engagement of these discourses with the European modernities whose ideology and aesthetics make for unexpected points of resonance. Music, in particular, has the capacity both to “tell the history” (as Jamaican DJ Prince Buster puts it) and to bear the unbearable, extra-linguistic dimensions of what Gilroy comes to call the “slave sublime.” Music, furthermore, is a profoundly temporal art, and in its rhythmic unfolding builds a time for community. The trope of time, as instanced in the Nation of Islam’s question “What Time Is It?,” and its multiple diasporic answers (Sun Ra: “It’s after the end of the world”; The Last Poets: “Time is running out”; Flavor-Flav’s gargantuan timepieces), both embody and transcend historical time by, as Gilroy puts it, “asserting the irreducible priority of the present” (202). Because of this ability, music is capable of bearing the historical pain that is the legacy of black diasporic cultures, and Gilroy offers a suggestive reading of Percy Mayfield (“Hit the Road, Jack”; “Please Send Me Someone to Love”) as a synecdoche of this transvaluative engagement with melancholia and pain.

     

    This gives Gilroy the segue for his final and bold movement, an accounting of the historical borrowings and transformations that have linked black cultures in all corners of the Atlantic to Jewish beliefs, traditions, and intellectual syntheses. The most obvious vernacular link is of course the landscape of black Spirituals, whose talk of bondage in “Pharaoh’s Land” and dreams of “Crossin’ the River of Jordan” draw from the Old Testament histories which slaves encountered in the Caribbean and the Americas. Their previous systems of belief fragmented and eroded by the violence of the middle passage and the experience of slavery, black slaves’ appropriation and use of the Jewish experiences of slavery constitutes, without a doubt, one of the most profound “transvaluations of all value” ever accomplished. This early legacy formed the ground for later returns to Jewish religious and political thought, in the process of which aspects of Jewish nationalism, and the idea of black culture as “diasporic,” grew readily. Black Atlantic religious practices such as those loosely coalescing about Rastifarian religion are a testament to the vernacular potency of these connections; all the mythology of a return to Ethiopia, the figure of Sellasie as Messiah, the myth of the Black Star Liners which would carry Desmond Dekker’s “Israelites” back to the Promised Land, can be traced to this potent conjunction. Gilroy gives a succinct and suggestive account of one person, Edward Wilmot Blyden, an influential black Caribbean writer and historian, and one of the founding fathers of Pan-Africanism. Yet despite some of the patriarchal and parochial qualities of his work, Blyden’s engagement with Jewish thought was, as Gilroy shows, full and complex: Blyden learned Hebrew and studied Jewish history with David Cardoze, a rabbi on the island of St. Thomas. It was Blyden who made the historical connections between Jewish and black experiences of slavery and dispersal, which were revived with the start of the Negritude movement in France in the 1930’s.

     

    All this, of course, brings Gilroy face to face with the claims of both black and Jewish particularists, each of whom asserts that their collective experience is untranslatable, and that (for some) even to compare the two does violence to the sanctity and integrity of memory. Gilroy does not offer a detailed critique of these claims, but makes a passionate and very compelling argument for renewed and continuing dialogue, a dialogue which might begin to theorize more fully the “redemptive power produced through suffering” as it works in a variety of very different historical circumstances. Finally, Gilroy, reflecting once more on Morrison’s Beloved, looks outward and onward to the ethical and artistic power of history recovered and told via a process of “imaginative appropriation.” It is at this level, indeed, that the questions Gilroy raises become especially pertinent, since he clearly values some appropriations more than others. Having voluntarily deprived himself of both the cudgel of anti-essentialism and the mystic unifying power of black particularism, Gilroy cannot offer any ultimate criterion by which we might know which appropriations we ought to value. In any case, as he readily acknowledges, the complex hybridities and recurrent transits of the black Atlantic render any such judgments temporary at best; what counts is an engagement with the questions they raise, and a refusal to trade the richness of uncertainty and heterogeneity for what Gilroy sees as the poverty of dogmatic certainties. It’s a difficult struggle, but one to which Gilroy’s own work makes an immeasurable contribution. Cultural studies, it is to be hoped, will never be the same in the wake of the passage of Gilroy’s revolutionary work.

     

    Notes

     

    1.bell hooks, “Postmodern Blackness,” Postmodern Culture 1.1

     

    2.Cornel West, “Black Culture and Postmodernism,” in Barbara Kruger and Phil Mariani, eds., Remaking History (Seattle: Bay Press, 1989): 87-98.

     

    3.West, 96.

     

    4.Michel de Certeau, Heterologies: Discourse on the Other (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1986): 129

     

  • Prehistory and Postmodernism

    Andrew Levy

    Department of English
    Butler University
    Levy@Butler.edu

     

    Labor Day Weekend, 1984. Erik Huber signs a “drive-away” contract with a man from Queens to drive his car to Reseda in the San Fernando Valley in two weeks time. Erik then lets nine days lapse, packs his college belongings in the back of the car, and offers to show me Los Angeles, the Pacific Coast Highway, and the “eating tour” of San Francisco, Oakland and Berkeley. Across the country, there was a record heat wave that week. We drove during the days, drinking six packs of warm diet coke to keep us nervous. At night, we slipped into campgrounds with our headlights off, spread sleeping bags under the stars and between the Winnebago campers, sipped from a bottle of Jack Daniels, and whispered conjectures about what invisible landscape would materialize around us in the morning light: strawberry fields in Missouri, a giant red rock in New Mexico.

     

    On the third or fourth day, driving a high mountain highway in Arizona, we saw a tall, slender pole rising in the horizon. Amid the aged pines and desert landscape that neither of us had ever seen before, we assumed that the pole was an Indian totem. As we approached, we made out a vaguely human icon atop the pole. As we approached nearer, we recognized the figure: it was Fred Flintstone. We drove through twenty more miles of pristine desert, and found Bedrock: a campground, tourist shop, and restaurant modelled after the cartoon, a place to sit in a Flintstone car, sleep in a Flintstone home, eat a Brontoburger, shake hands with one of the two unlucky individuals dressed in bulky Fred and Barney costumes in the Arizona heat, and buy postcards or t-shirts.

     

    We bought postcards. They flew out the car window on a long downhill several miles out of “town”; we stopped the car in the middle of the road, ran back to where the cards lay unmoving in the road, and looked up, horrified, to see a gasoline truck mount the top of the hill above us and begin its hurtling descent toward our parked, purring, borrowed car. We raced back, pulled the car onto the shoulder, and listened to the peeved whistle of the skidding truck, its driver too stunned to curse as he passed.

     

    We drove on to Barstow and Los Angeles. Erik had so laden the back of the car that the exhaust pipe had been skipping against the highway for three thousand miles, sending out sparks in our absurd trail. In Reseda, we saw that we had worn the exhaust pipe down to a sliver. We listened to the car’s owner complain about the pipe, all of us confused about what might constitute adequate compensation, and then drove our rental car back into Los Angeles.

     

    There we got drunk, relieved and giddy about being in California, about not having started a conflagration in Arizona over a couple of Flintstone postcards, and about not having to drive anymore. Late at night, we wandered through downtown, and came across the La Brea tar pits, a dark hole behind a chain-link fence amid the skyscrapers of central Los Angeles. Erik explained how fossils would periodically rise to the surface, where paleontologists would retrieve them, and set to work determining how the new find altered our modern vision of prehistory. I looked through the chain link fence, and saw a sculpture of a saber-toothed tiger being pulled down into the pit with a graphic look of displeasure on its face.

     

    Nobody should ever be too proud of their practical joke ideas, but I can’t seem to forget the one that Erik and I devised that night in Los Angeles. We would return to Bedrock, get those Fred and Barney costumes, stuff them with medical school skeletons, and toss them at night over the chain link fence into the tar pit, just so, for a few moments at least, the researchers at the La Brea site would have to say to themselves, and to the world: the Flintstones are not fiction; prehistoric man wore a tie and punched a time card.

     

    Meanwhile, six thousand miles away in Paris (picture a camera panning at great speed over desert, heartland, ocean, and stopping in an oaken office with ostentatiously Parisian monuments prominently displayed outside its windowsill), the philosopher Jean Baudrillard was composing his own kind of practical jokes, in the manner of postmodern French philosophers. Throughout the 1980s, Baudrillard released a series of slim volumes of playful, iconoclastic philosophy, published in the Semiotext(e) Foreign Agents Series and bearing titles like Simulations or The Ectasy Of Communication. In these works, which by the end of the decade would become a philosophy of choice for many American academics, graduate students, cyberpunks, and consciously hip adolescents, Baudrillard wrote of the shifting relationship between what has previously been called “the real,” and its many reproductions in mass media. For Baudrillard, the postmodern age was marked by the rise of the “hyperreal,” mediated experience that is more ‘real’ than the authentic experience from which it is generated, and which is, in turn, used as the model for the production of further authentic experience. The map, to use Borges’ and Baudrillard’s famous metaphor, does not mimic the territory anymore; the territory mimics the map.

     

    In an era where a Presidential candidate overtly emulates the glamorous media image of a previous President, and becomes President himself, the presence of the “hyperreal” in our daily lives surprises nobody. It is useful, perhaps, that Americans look to France for intellectual authority, that Derrida and Foucault and Lyotard and Baudrillard find larger, more spirited audiences in our country, just as Jerry Lewis, Clint Eastwood, and Edgar Allan Poe have found smaller, more respectful audiences in theirs. It might be more useful, however, not to wait for foreign recognition of our more unlikely sources of genius, a tedious process that leaves a persistent gap between what we choose to teach in schools, and what our students, still untutored in the ways of professional education, psychology, and literature, might choose to understand.

     

    I have wanted to write this essay for a long time, frustrated for nine years by the nagging fact that Erik Huber and I never tossed those faux Flintstones into the La Brea tar pits, that we never forced the official guardians of the distant past, those sun-bronzed Californian paleontologists, to admit even momentarily what we, in our hyperreal way, already knew: that we really were descended from the Flintstones. I have not written this essay because the channels of intellectual authority in America leave little room to maunever: one can attempt to write about a cartoon, and face derision for choosing such low brow subject matter; or one can choose an scholarly pedestal from which to discourse, Popular Culture or Child Psychology for example, and then write an aggressively jargoned and analytical essay that anyone who ever enjoyed an episode of the show would recognize as bizarre and even hostile to the program’s intent. This is an especially awkward situation, given the fact that most of the teachers, academics, psychologists, and other professional assessors of culture under forty in America today received much of their early intellectual development in front of a TV screen. I learned about the hyperreal from Fred and Barney, not from Jean. We are Flintstone intellectuals; we should act like Flintstone intellectuals.

     

    As with most inexpensively made cartoons, the Flintstones seem like a child’s primer to Cubism. Wilma and Betty, the two wives, each wears her hair parted, and the part faces the audience no matter whether the character is facing left or right profile. They are, of course, impossibly slim: Wilma wears a three-pearl necklace beneath which her neck disappears, and their legs, rarely apart except when running or walking, taper down into tiny feline feet. The men are several times wider than the women: they wear cylindrical animal skins, although they have no shoulders that might support the garments. Their heads, which seem to float above their animal skins, remain perfectly level as they walk, although their bodies move up and down. Height seems irrelevant: although Barney is several times wider than Betty, he is also several times shorter, anatomical details that probably explain why the couple had to adopt.

     

    They live in a place called Bedrock, which takes on the characteristics of either a large city (a stone-age Los Angeles, it seems) or a small town, depending on the dramatic demands of the episode. In Bedrock, every proper name contains at least one reference to some mineral object: Rock, Slate, Stone (it would be as though every name in our own era, the Atomic Age, bore some reference to nuclear technology). When modern celebrities appear, their names are altered appropriately: Ann-Margaret becomes Ann-Margrock, Tony Curtis becomes Stony Curtis, Rock Hudson (who in theory could have made the transition to Bedrock life with his name intact) becomes Rock Hudstone. The Bedrock code of dress is strangely formal, and unutilitarian: the women wear stones on their wrists and necks that are larger than their hands and heads. The men wear ties but no shoes. On formal occasions, they wear spats, but still no shoes.

     

    There are two reasons to watch an episode of the Flintstones as an adult. The first is the show’s amiable spirit; it is among the least dour works of art ever produced in this country. Like its progenitor, The Honeymooners, the Flintstones is noisy, and full of motion. Musical themes and sound effects shift constantly on the soundtrack; on the screen, brightly colored characters move through a visually memorable rock-laden world, sliding down dinosaurs’ backs, bumping into stone impediments, racing into each other’s arms. The characters themselves are cartoon-sized, energetic and elemental. Fred, a loudmouth and a buffoon, possesses a broad capacity for kindness and self-realization; he loves to shout with joy (Yabba Dabba Doo, of course), and dance on his oversized toes. His body, which is sketched just slightly convex of a perfect cylinder to suggest overweight, is surprisingly fluid in movement. Barney, his best friend and neighbor, is a simpleton, but he is also instinctively inclined toward pleasure: his head bounds rapidly up and down inside the cylinder of his animal skin when he laughs. Wilma and Betty, frustrated and wise in the manner of early 60s television housewives, still sing, laugh freely, and live with the consanguinity of women who know they are unconditionally loved. Flintstone episodes do not conclude as ordinary situation comedies do, with difficult situations resolved by the introduction of moral principles; they end when an effusion of good humor rises to the surface and usurps the dilemma. They end in song, in laughter, with babies cackling happily, or with Fred and Wilma “smooching.” In some mythical anthology of American culture, the Flintstones would be winking on the page opposite Ben Franklin and Horatio Alger, telling children not to perfect themselves, but to enjoy themselves.

     

    The second reason to watch the Flintstones is the pleasant buzz of anachronism. It is perhaps only as an adult that one can recognize the clumsy but gentle affection with which the Flintstones’ writers constructed their Bedrockian era. In this stone age, for instance, unlike the one that paleontologists record, dinosaurs and humans roam the earth together. Interestingly, only the docile dinosaurs seem to remain: uncomplaining brontosauruses function as cranes and earth movers, pterodactyls substitute as planes, but there are no tyrannosauruses in sight, no meat eaters except for Fred and Barney, who wolf down giant platters of oversized dinosaur ribs. Similarly, while some Bedrock technology is unquestionably modern–their radios, televisions, and telephones all function normally–most of their machines have been configured to accomodate a world before electricity. Fred starts his car, a redwood and granite sedan, by lowering his feet to the ground, and running for a few yards; the car then glides effortlessly up and down cartoon hills for miles. The Flintstones camera is a box that contains a bird that pecks out a picture on a 3 X 5 square of stone. Their vacuum cleaner is a small, somber wooly mammoth who sucks up dirt while Wilma and Betty converse; like the bird in the camera, or the weary animals that function as sprinklers, lawnmowers, or brooms, he also provides ironic commentary on the actions of the human characters, or shrugs at the camera and tells us something like, “It’s a living.”

     

    Watching the Flintstones, one often suspects that the stone- age technology is the real star. The Flintstones re-invents all the technologies upon which we are most dependent, and makes them at once ludicrous and comprehensible. One wants to say that the show provides childrens’ explanations for complex machinery, but these Flintstone appliances are not purely children-sized: it is likely that more adult Americans are more familiar with the bird inside the Flintstone’s camera than they are familiar with the actual contents of their Kodaks. It is possible that the Flintstones reminds us how technology makes us infants or aborigines amidst our sophistication, dependent upon large, mysterious forces with almost supernatural powers: ATM networks, telecommunications highways in the sky. That is the part of us that watches the television in an entranced and docile spirit. But the Flintstones also startles us back into a sense of wonder about these machines we have created and so easily take for granted. It reminds us instead what we have suspected all along, that our machines have animal hearts and human feet. That is the part of us that refuses to be alienated from, or intimidated by, our technology.

     

    As these machines roil and putter in the background of every Flintstones episode, however, the characters in the foreground are acting out an ancient national drama. The Flintstones seems to have been created by people in a state of infatuation about the success of the American dream: not the big American dream, where we become idealized versions of ourselves living in a City On A Hill, but the little American dream, where the land is rich and forgiving enough that persistent good humor, if nothing else, can save us. As I wrote this essay, friends with children reminded me how impossible it was to get their children to not watch the Flintstones. But friends without children shared with me images they have retained of watching the show: how Fred and Barney snapped their fingers without actually touching forefinger to thumb; the way Wilma’s jewelry seemed to float without touching her body; or the rock group “The Way-Outs,” four Beatlesque mopheads with abdomens that detached into separate tire-shaped pieces during performance epiphanies. All of these images, and the pristineness and affection with which they have been preserved in memory, suggest that the Flintstones was also a kind of primer for living in a world slouching toward Bethlehem: a lesson that there were real pleasures living in a world that was just barely falling apart, or just barely not coming together. Watching the Flintstones, we were ending our careers as modernists, beginning our careers as postmodernists, and we were barely five years old.

     

    We were Flintstone intellectuals; we could have done worse. Entire schools of thought could be founded upon the Flintstones. Traditional archaeology, the archaeology in vogue during the period of the Flintstones production, maintained that primitive man had primitive social structures, was id-driven and animal-like, and was technologically naive. More recent discoveries have suggested that mankind developed at irregular paces in different geographic locations, and developed complex, mannered, and self-conscious social structures while remaining in a state of comparative technological innocence. This is Flintstones archaeology. The Austrian Iceman, frozen suddenly in his everyday dress 5000 years ago and discovered in the Tyrolean Alps in 1991, has given modern researchers an unprecedented opportunity to study Neolithic Man: they found that he wore well-tailored leather clothes, kept his fingernails trimmed, and, just like Betty Rubble, wore a single white stone on a strap around his neck.

     

    There is also Flintstones Child Psychology. According to the US Census, American children rank drugs, pollution, and the environment as the three largest problems facing America today. 62% of all ten year olds worry that a friend might get AIDS, while 84% have used a remote control device. Nearly half of all American boys polled by the Gesell Institute of Human Development believed that they had adequate information about sex, while studies published by Nintendo report that American boys now consider “game prowess” a “fundamental male social marker.” If sentimental (and sometimes academic) Child Psychology holds that childhood is essentially an innocent state, these statistics suggest that contemporary children are growing up wizened and self-conscious, while maintaining aspects of the childlike innocence that most adults still expect. The Flintstones, pumping out of TV screens across the country, is like CNN for five year olds: it gives them an emotional roadmap of innocence and experience, and tells them that the seemingly anachronistic state where those two traits exist in the same person is a natural one. It confirms their image of the world as a place full of absurd but wonderful machines and adults full of unanticipated motion and desire.

     

    It also provides an early lesson in what it means to have free access to the global media village. In Don DeLillo’s novel, Americana (1971), one character remarks that television came over on the Mayflower. What DeLillo’s Pilgrims carried on the Mayflower was not a real television, of course, but the idea of television, or what television, a neutral and faceless device, would become when yoked to the visions of fresh lands and new selves that the settlers brought with them, and which have never left. The Puritans, weaned on infant capitalism and a media revolution of their own, the printing press, took the Bible and, for better or worse, beat back the forest with it; they taught us that the distance between our literature and our landscape was slight by any measure, providing that we had the resolve and the technology.

     

    It should come as no surprise that someone has built a version of Bedrock in the desert in Arizona; Americans have been building visionary communities in the desert from the very start, a fact that suggests that the idea of the hyperreal is not so postmodern after all, or that postmodernism is older than we think. But now we build communities on television as well as land. It is as though we have two countries: the shared space from sea to shining sea, and the cable-equipped television. Both are vague, inchoate, diverse: but, to paraphrase Fitzgerald, only one anymore is commensurate to our ability to wonder. The child perched daily in front of a television screen is face-to- face with something older than television, something older than America, the primal core of all our ingenuity: the sheer beauty of awakening self-consciousness, the epic moment of inventing a new country or the tiny thrill of finding the bird who takes the picture. Watching TV is like watching someone else’s dreams.

     

    Bedrock in Arizona is not a radical utopia, like Plymouth or New Harmony; it is a tourist stop. But Bedrock on television, Bedrock in our homes, in our memories, is something different. Bedrock in Arizona is a parable for the turn of the twentieth- first century. It is a reminder that, for those Americans who have come of age in the last thirty years, the icons of popular culture are not artificial attachments to our conception of what constitutes our real life and our land, but are now integral to those things. Fred Flintstone on a totem pole is exactly right: television is aboriginal and mythic, and its icons flit through our REM sleep (that is, after all, where they came from). Bedrock in the Arizona desert is striking not because it is anomalous, but because it resolves. Television came over on the Mayflower, but it was invented in the Stone Age. And it was invented by children.

     

    Say their names: Rock Derrida, Michel Foucaultstone.

     

  • Differentia

    Lidia Yuknavitch

    nubin@gladstone.uoregon.edu

     

    Women and slaves belonged to the same category and were hidden away not only because they were somebody else’s property but because their life was “laborious,” devoted to bodily functions.

     

    –Hannah Arendt

     

    I talk to myself. When you are out of the room of the world, things speak to one another. Probably they leave you out of the talk altogether when you leave the room. There is truth in that, or something like it, something too small to know. There is a species of logic resting in the space between molecules of air, between white and white, little extraordinary happenings, little meanings between words. There is something obscene about our boxing it all in–conversations, the page, the frame, the caught expression. That is why pictures make you ashamed, that is why movies swallow you up. I know I am babbling. I am only telling you this because I had a premonition about this story. I saw, not unlike a nightmare, what would happen so clearly, so perfectly, I could have touched the facts of it with my tongue. So I guess this is all really like talking to oneself.

     

    What I am talking about now is an image, a single, cannibalized image. I say cannibalized because that is what we did. One image, three writers, three texts, three mouths, three murders committed among species of intellect. We saw something and we did what writers do, we wrote. The problem is that I am stuck and they are not; that is, the two men I know have moved on all right. The air has again filled their lungs, their words are their words, their groins quiver as before, their hands are recognizable to them, they move as if motion were not a series of stilted, jerky, pornographic moves.

     

    It is me that is paralyzed.

     

    I am an intelligent woman. I look for things between seeing and saying, I try to catch them, write them down. But something happened between what I saw and what I wrote. I mean, usually I can take an image right to paper, give or take a day or two, I can bend whatever it is I am feeling toward metaphor and flight. But something different happened to me with this one. There is no other way to do this. I will put you at the scene:

     

    it was from our car driving along a freeway that we saw it. Me and my lover. Two dead horses on the road's shoulder, precisely paralleled in all respects--their brown horse bodies at the same angle, their horse heads and noses pointing at some invisible object long gone and unimaginable, the last thing they saw, sky maybe, because that's all you can see in their too-open dead eyes, their paired gray entrails winding like twin slithers out of the slit and gashed bellies, insides ripped out or spilled on the road, saliva, and again their eyes, unbearably open.

     

    And then the car was past them, our eyes rolling back toward the past and the brain, our breath sucked back into our lungs through our mouths in a gasp, our mouths, unguarded, animal-like, open, tongues lolling, our minds pressed back and in as if by wind. It was not the same as slowing for an accident. With that you know, as all the other cars slowing know, that you are hoping to see carnage, you are hoping to see signs of wrecked bodies. But when you get there it is almost always just smashed-up cars, isn’t it. And don’t our hearts sink a little as we speed back up, weren’t we wishing for something overwhelming?

     

    We could have seen a dead dog, a dismembered deer, a flattened raccoon or mangled cat, anonymous guts even; any one of these would have passed as normal. But not these, looking to us as if they had been deposited from the horse trailer by some expert psychopathic movie director: in scene one they are two beautiful brown velvet asses and black silken tails exposed from within the vehicle meant to transport animals on the move. In the second scene they have spilled carefully out onto the pavement with little to no change, a brilliant shot, cut to the star’s face recording a disfigured horror in the rear-view. No one could have arranged it more perfectly, I mean it was stunning, truly, dead horses.

     

    It wasn’t like sympathy, and I suppose it could not have been empathy, but something closer to the shock of the too-beautiful. What care had been taken! So gently placed. The round curves and swells unmatched on any human, unmatched of course because these were what we call beautiful animals. Bridled or free, dead seems wrong for these. You know what I mean, too much. Think of the movie The Black Stallion, or back to your first viewing of National Velvet. Or how many times have we winced when, in the western, the horses are seen falling down a hillside when the rider is shot?

     

    You have to understand, we were in a car, traveling at perhaps seventy or so. At seventy there is no stopping, no slowing down to question. Like the time we passed two neon horse-sculptures on highway five and spent the next week trying to figure out what in the world we had seen. It wasn’t until the newspaper verified our sighting–an artist had planted them in a farmer’s field–that we knew. Strange comparison. Their open eyes, their necks alongside one another, the soft warmth and fuzz between the nostrils, the memory of them running head to head, manes whipping, snorts, or grazing docile and mighty, all this from movies and television. Images that stick in your brain like they happened, ripping up through the thing itself with flashes of color, sound, light, shape and particle over what can be said was seen. Dead horses.

     

    In the film version of Equus, Richard Burton loses his mind to the desire of a boy. There is a horse, a magnificent heat and flesh quiver, there is writing and god too close to the drama. Anyone who has seen the movie has been convinced by the scene: the boy naked legs splayed on the bare back of the sweating dip of muscle the ritual chanting the perversion of speech the movement of words into body his body its body the roaring sweat the bleeding grown the bit at the mouth the foam the release . . . who among us can bear it away? It is easy to picture a man losing his mind to the desire of a boy. It is easy to see action killed, the sheer temperature and senseless beauty of desire.

     

    He, the man I love, was only giving me a lift to meet another man. It was a ride from one man to another, no one meant any harm, the man I lived with transporting me to the man I worked with, and me between them, me the journey between them. My lover and I, the other man, writing, three writers. Both men carried weight. Can I say they were like words? Yes, words have convulsed me before. When a woman has a mind, she is compelled to ask, from where and why? This passion, ideas, what orbit have I chanced to cross which drives me to think and spins me into this world? A woman has to ask, which me is it today, this year? And in relation to what? Only then can she dress as before and move around as always. And so it was that in our driving our talk froze in our throats and ears, because the horses stopped all conversation in the cab of the blue pick-up truck, the dash instruments filled the dead air with the silence of their functioning, stupid. I think we commented or said oh. Up against the slobber of excess one often comments. I don’t remember what he was saying before the horses. I can almost say he was telling me about performance art, the visceral, the raw materiality, about the way Arnold Swartzkogler’s dismembering his own member or some other man’s crawling naked on his belly over broken glass or some woman pulling a scroll from her vagina put you inescapably at the site of your own body. It preceded the horses in effect anyway. His mouth, my mouth, the words out of the mouth.

     

    I am certain that I was listening before we were struck with the blow of two sentences in both our minds: that cannot be what it looks like, and, that is exactly two perfectly paired dead horses on the side of the road. And then we were gone. In the nothing of that image whatever our words were were stolen, escaped me now. What I remember is that we said nothing.

     

    So it was that he drove me, me dizzy but of course carrying on like anyone would, to a meeting with the other man. As if this were every day. He drove me up to the door of a cafe so familiar I didn’t recognize it. I opened the blue metal car door, I saw the metal arms and shapes of the car door innards, I gave him an intimate glance, he blew me a kiss, I slammed the door, the sound, harsh and horribly familiar, I raised my hand to wave, familiar, he drove away, I was through the cafe door and into the room and over to a table and down in a chair and the other man across the table from me greeted me, as you would expect, everything was as expected. A series of prepositions directed me entirely, the background music in the cafe could be either classical, minor notes with decrescendo, or perhaps modern, disconnected and dissonant jazz.

     

    You must be aware that this was a necessary meeting, for some reason, some particular reason one could definitely articulate, one knows one’s work after all. It had to do with my writing, some place where we, me and the other man I mean, intersected. He was my teacher. I learned what steps to take a little clearer every time we met. The thing is, on a literal level, I really had learned to despise this man, his too-groomed black hair slick as a record album, his sculpted, lightly browned skin, his black eyes, his unbelievably dough-like mouth, almost pliable. His hands waving around, his words filling the air. Me breathing all this in, regurgitating most of it back, so as to metaphorize into brilliance like his.

     

    Occasionally I stole words, used what he said when I wrote. This seemed pleasing to him. I am certain that I have used some of his words here, or else they were mine but in the cycle of his producing and consuming and my reproducing them they were sucked into this. That’s what an intelligent woman understands.

     

    We ordered cappuccino, or maybe it was some other coffee drink which has been designed cleverly away from labor and heat and broken backs. Disfigured beauty. Maybe it was cafe au lait. We were talking about some topic as if a cellular division had occurred, we carried the trace of a shared thing in our voices, or, we were simply copying each other. This doubling is quite ordinary, really, and also quite necessary for the growth of a woman’s intellect, but not her body, ironically. For example, when my lover speaks to me about performance I feel the urge to strike him, but instead I stroke some part of his flesh, touch him, skin on what appears to be kin, or more, mouth on the image of mouth, maybe we even make love eventually. My legs up against his shoulders, his hands kneading the swells of my body, the thrusting, the yielding, the necks straining, all the curves in flux and pulsing as in a race or contest. At any rate, he speaks and I am touched by our inability to be one another, a moment of pure violence which is what I take to be love. I would never say the things he is saying to me and I am glad, I am full and spilt over with our samelessness. I live for it. I run home to it at night, I ache to feel it inside me, I am sorry to slam the car door and hear the truncated difference severed by metal.

     

    So I’m missing my lover even in the cafe because the echo of the car door slamming has worked like a palimpsest, I am making love after conversation and I am seeing the horror-vision, pulses pounding against thin epidermis, sweat producing itself, saliva collecting in the pockets of the mouth, heart begging amplification over voice, or blood surging inside veins and ears as if to say forget words all together–we said, of course, nothing of this. So it was that all I could feel in my mind as this ridiculously brilliant man spoke to me was the urge to fuck my lover, or worse, the urge to write it all down.

     

    As has always been like truth to me, sex follows violent images words sounds scenes rather consistently. But within this clearest of desires, I mean, the fatal image of the horses and the unfiltered wanting, this repulsive, beautiful man was filling the space between us with duplications of his own persistent face, hands, eyes, thoughts. He was saying something about writing and mirrors, and I heard the word mirror, I swear to god I heard it, and I saw like the face in front of me what I saw in the moment after the horses: I saw the words, objects in mirror are closer than they appear, because of course my rear-view mirror was my only access to the past. The words, dead horses, shrinking and blurring into distance and light.

     

    I don’t know what he said but I am certain that I was listening, that I nodded my head as he did, that I raised my hand toward my chin and rested my head there, which he followed, that I creased my brow either as his or preceding his brow creasing, that I responded with a pre-arranged face and body made up of all the writing he had told me to read and all the writing I was, and he repeated me, or I him, and then again the same whatever he said, I said. The word, conversation was an indivisible movement between us, the words, a series of cafe gestures endlessly repeated over the course of an hour. None of this noticed in the moment. But you would have, had you been there, you would have been struck by the two mimes. Two too sculpted heads, two pairs of shoes or watches or colognes which carried prices over and above the salaries of those serving, those subjects of literature and art and what to do about them. His white shirt and his black echoed in my black blazer and white chemise, in my cornea, in the typed words on the menus, in the condiments, everything following everything else as if one thing were the other. We were talking about writing and writing made us in its own image. Poor black and white copies mimicking every word they’d ever felt in their lives. Somewhere in the very back of my mind I was thinking of something I wanted to write down when I got home.

     

    Once in an argument my lover asked me why I always wrote about sex, was I a fucking whore or something. He had unwritten permission to speak to me this way because of love. Anyway, in the instant before I answered I saw a ticker-tape answer jerking in front of my eyes like a waking dream that said, yeah, I am, and all the language I had been learning for the last twenty-eight years flew out of my brain and a new language blew out: Sex is death. Sex is life. Sex is oxygen. Sex is poison. Sex is prison. Sex is gism on your lip. Sex is in someone's ass, cunt, mouth, any hole you can get into and come. Sex is a silver blade slicing open your worst fear you paranoid fuck like maybe a deep gash across your cock or scrotum or from your balls to your rectum which is the same as your dumb little need to be in control, to be on top of things. Sex is you hitting me with your stupid little question and me getting a black eye and telling all your friends. What would you say it is? I'll try not to laugh. After you have answered, why don't you explain it to me because I can be a very good listener what you think sex should be for me too. Then everything will be clear and hunky-dorey like spam. O.K.? And then of course I snapped out of it and realized that all that was a little excessive an answer to the small innocence of a question asked out of jealousy and anger. So all I said was, actually, I have yet to write about real sex and yes, I was once a prostitute as an effect of my first marriage. By the way, I love you out of my mind.

     

    Beautiful–we say that word over and over again between us in the cafe over the white tablecloth stretched like a stage between us, sometimes for or to literature and art, or to ourselves, or to the deserts we have ordered which are red and oozing some thick sweet liquid and also in flames, set on fire and brought to our table as the impossible delicious combination of life and death that they are. The beautiful desert, we salivate and anticipation drips our faces. The unexpected, the tortured but silent red and swollen forms being burned alive, just plain old strawberry flambe. The beautiful desert, the beautiful poem, the beautiful lover, his beautiful hands or skin, your own beauty, even the waiter’s blue black skin and the way he slides across the black and white checkered floor, effortlessly (having been trained and paid in small medium wage increments to do so), and most of all the way the waiter says cahn ah get you anythin ils, trinidadian or something like that, the white and the black in a decade where everyone is supposed to be enlightened, all are beautiful. Everything and one and word is reflected in every other thing and one and word. The cacophony of words too loud, and I am able to think to myself, most likely because of the tear the dead horses have made, I am able to articulate in my mind’s eye that this is work. Work is making the unbearable beautiful. Work is the repetition of this man’s words and clothes and hair and eyes and smell and writing exactly on top of me, and I am up and through everything he is, whether or not my hating him enters the picture or not, and all this makes perfect sense to me.

     

    If I have not learned how to become this man fully it is only because the dead horses and moments like that have always interrupted the Xeroxing. Strange saviors. If I become him, I will be in his image, I will be the black words on the white page, I will be the black skin of the waiter and the white tiles and napkins, the teeth, the tablecloth, I will be reflexive with anything I see. Beautiful.

     

    The meeting thus far begins to seem successful to me because I have realized quite by chance even in the midst of the transfusion that what I want is power, the power of work, of writing, of him. I was the star all along and only pretending to be the underdog. But what I want to do when I get there is attack from the inside out, be the maggot eating the dead thing, turning rot into alive. I also realize that the reason I hate him is that I am not actually him yet and this comforts me. He keeps trying to convince me that he has desire for me but I don’t want him I want to be him and then kill him and let all the waiters and horses and women talking to themselves into the tower for a big party. I look into the waiter’s eyes longingly, I know I could love him.

     

    And then I’m looking down into my dark brown liquid and of course it’s the horses again, that is the way an intelligent woman’s mind works, did they suffer, was the death instantaneous, what speed were they traveling at, perhaps seventy, like us, what shock does a horse feel, does it, as a very brilliant man once explained to me, lose its horse soul and what if there exists no shaman, no magic to retrieve it? Is horse shock the convulsion that it is to us, do their minds spasm as their bodies realize impossibility, what are “dead horses?” I am immediately sad and tragic inside and I want my lover inside this cavity, this literal chasm where verisimilitude masquerades. I want his man echo. I am writing a journal entry.

     

    I want to hear him reciting to me opposite and unknowable populations of painful difference and people who will remain separate no matter what I do not want to write stories right over their bodies or learn their languages or interpret their art I will not, cannot be them, have them, never ever. I want resistance to win so we can have love. I want my lover to read raw poems to me and not talk about them so that I can know what I am not, so that I can know what I’ve made too much like me, what we’ve made of and into ourselves. And he will, too. He is trustworthy that way. And we will be sucked up in each other’s eyes with the ecstasy of two people who cannot be one another, and our bodies will lunge and devour one another, the words of our love will happen in bursts of semen and wet sticky and spilt estrangement. We will have arrived out of time. I want my lover to read poems to me about the dead and the native and the animal and the criminal and the insane and the violent and the unjust so I can feel.

     

    I swirl my espresso around in the too fragile cup and the man who is teaching me asks me a question. Did I forget he was there for a moment? It is quite possible, though he would not believe it, the dead horse flashbacks are indistinguishable in time. Can I give you a lift somewhere I think is what he said. I can’t be certain that he said this, but I am certain that we left money behind and that I rode in his car. I must have asked for a ride to the library because that is where he began to take me. You must see it, magnified to cinematic proportions, being in a car again with a man, the shape of the windshield shaping vision, or the square frame of the window sectioning off sections of what I could see, one of us driving, one of us a passenger, our moving, our dumb static presence contained inside motion and time, 25 MPH, 30 MPH, 45 MPH until I finally came out with it, said the words which turned the wheels in the direction of the carnage even though I had described very little of what I had actually seen. He followed my words with his hands on the steering wheel and his foot on the pedal and his eyes on the road. He followed me because he too is a writer and he remembers that one cannot look away from an accident. Or perhaps it remembers him. We are all helpless that way.

     

    As that movement, that illogical car movement toward something as if something would be there when you arrive, as that movement carried us the whole cafe conversation finally dawned on me. The further the car mindlessly traveled, like a recording or like vomiting up the previous night the sentences came:

     

    death is the beautiful site or scene of beauty's most powerful moment, death marks its passing, beauty is death and death beautiful, death is the sublime, a paradigm case for the experience of the sublime, the ground itself undoing itself, we are both before and after death always, his love is so powerful it kills her, her death, beauty, even the angles are envious, the poem, his love, his life are produced by death, after all, could this love or beauty happen without death?

     

    Who was speaking?

     

    What happens in returning? What desires drive us and what place do we expect to arrive at? And who are these characters in our minds, A and B, interchangeable, and how is it that A says to B we have no time like the present? Why do we ever bother to write about irony?

     

    For minutes or hours we drove up and down a one mile stretch of road. At some point what we could see was nothing, darkness or night. The more we could not find the horses the more anxious I became, my body again murmured the same utterances, writing itself, pulse, adrenaline. I knew where they had been but because the place was empty, or because sameness and difference were bleeding in my ears, I believed that I had forgotten. We drove back and forth so that I became hysterical, and he kept suggesting his apartment, how he wanted to see me naked, and I was even more hysterical, and he suddenly said you are becoming hysterical.

     

    Each time I looked over at him I was nauseated by his sheer brilliance, his black pant legs on his seat and my black pant legs on mine, his two eyes looking into my two eyes and mine into his, his window and door parodying the window and door on my side. I felt I could strike him. I demanded that he pull the car over at the place where I knew dead horse had wounded the world. We were pulling over. He was asking how I knew this was the place. I got out of the car and slammed the door. He got out of the car like an echo. See the gravel I said, don’t you see where the gravel reveals two bodies were here? I don’t see he said. It just looks like gravel he said. We said the word gravel between us three times. We didn’t have raincoats. It was quite dark. I dropped to my knees. He was very frustrated, he dropped down beside me and said this is ridiculous, there is nothing here. Obviously they have removed them he said. I spread my hands out across the gravel and now mud and moved them around. Oh Jesus he said. Finally some words heaved up from my belly, up from my hands on the gravel and through my palms against the grain of the road, against rocks and cement, after awhile of course the flesh tore, my hands becoming raw and my blood mixing with jagged edged real road made by men. So too my knees came conscious because of the faint pain coming through the weight of me bearing down on them, the gravel puncturing flesh as gravel does. There is a difference between being thrown down onto gravel and the will of slamming and scraping one’s hands again and again on the road for no reason except that reasonability doesn’t make any sense to a crouched figure on the side of the road, bleeding, wiping her face with her sliced hands, crying, the cuts, the red, the dark, the moans. The throwing one’s body out onto the road in front of speeding cars. The man grabbing at you and pressing himself down on top of you through his own uncontained excitement. The vomit. The urine. The come, the blood, the shit. Performance.

     

    I can hear them hear the mutating whinnies of two surprised beasts thrown for an instant into air hear the extraordinary thud of their bulk falling from their man-made trailer to gravel and asphalt can't you hear them can't you smell the shit and piss and spilt blood and heat I can see them each of them as well as both of them together can't you see them ripped open can't you let go of me can't you see them see me is this what it takes how far into my flesh until the anger is in focus not fictionally justafiable just in focus and why can't we just leave it at that that I am a reproduction I am reproducing I am anger and repetition and I am learning to live with it

     

    Cars passing would have seen this in the path of their headlights: two crouched over black and white figures on the road’s shoulder, very much the same, making little if any sense, as if searching for something together, wreckage upon wreckage. Although, you might not make that last observation, having only seen a flash of the two huddled black shapes in your white headlights. I had no choice. People are dying all over the world and we are writing their stories. I clawed at his face until I was blind and unconscious. I have dreams of a bloody face, of the impossibility of human expression.

     

    I am in the hammock on the back porch. It has been unseasonably warm. I have a deep tan, I am brown all over except for where the bandages were. My hands hold tiny white scars. For a time I couldn’t make love: the scabs on my knees reopened every time I bent them, as if the joint itself had changed somehow, as if I was meant to stand. My lover has been reading poems to me. Soon my hands will be healed. The other man has written an essay on memory and pain. My lover is writing a Performance piece concerning the mutilation of flesh. As I remember this, there is massacre in Eastern Europe. As I picture these phrases, the Gaza Strip is bleeding between peoples. My hands are white and smally textured. They repeat themselves uselessly.

     

    The Lover’s Poem

     

    Some bodies stay put
    others 
    release themselves
    like air
    like light
    over the incomprehensible world
    over the 
    small human cities
    over the dumb world.
    
    Some bodies leak radiance,
    letting you 
    think love will wash over you,
    letting you think the night will not penetrate
    the 
    room of thick sweet.
    
    But some bodies are just dead,
    deadening silences dead of 
    the dead
    Deathly afraid of the beauty of death
    Beautiful as a death laid bare 
    like a body before you.
    
    These are love,
    these are what we long for.
    

     

  • Two Poems

    Michael Evans

    mrevans@delphi.com

     

    The Behavior of Bodies, the Motion of Clocks

     

    
    An orbit is a way of keeping time--
                                            not a metaphor
    for life
             together with another life--a body and a body
    at odds with the room's linear constraints.
    
    (The room itself is not a metaphor
                                                       for how we live.)
    
    The bed does not unfold like two hands
    --one circling
                             the other
    and transparent--
    as if loneliness (the beating silence of these days
             he lives without speaking) were enough
    
    to suggest that time and distance are measured
    with the same equation.
                                At night, he sets the clock
    to an hour
                 that already exists
                                          (thinly, as light)
    
    beyond the orbits he understands--
                                   the comings and goings
    of doctors, this routine of pills.
    He listens
    to the elliptical path
                                         of his breathing
    and he knows the universe will not collapse
    in time to save his youth
    
    (for yourself, sir, shall grow old as I am,
    
    if like a crab you could go backward).
    
    He dreams himself a young man,
                                           but wakes to nothing
    less than he is.
    He is not allowed a mirror and does not look
    
    at his hands. Breathing, he counts
    himself to sleep.
        Were he a crab, he would give up this shell.

     

    The Love Songs of Leonardo da Vinci

     

    1 Between the Eye and the Object Seen There is another kind of perspective which, by the atmosphere, in a single line of the same size, is able to distinguish the remotest (as a couple) and represent them in a picture –between my eye and them– more than another and a somewhat equal– them and the same density of them and in a single line make them appear and almost of the same as the atmosphere. There is a perspective which the atmosphere attracts to them– their images exist– and not their forms merely. There is a kindness between them able to make the nearest above and of its same color, the more distant bluer. Between the single line of them, between the eye and moon of them– without suffering– they are the same. Among them, a rose does the same and other perfumes. 2 Spechio In the mirror of the room, these two (their bodies) stand among the others, apart– in the light from a single window, they are the same (equal and almost) –if each should notice the other (their shadows opposite the window) in the mirror above the sofa– should see (as if distance is abbreviation) the other at an angle that is the angle of the body– if each should touch the glass to touch the other, isn’t it the other who will understand this distance between them?– (the other reaching out to touch) the eye of the other (in the mirror) will see him (his finger on the glass) touching his own. 3 On the Cause of Generation No part of the body is always the same. The shadow of the other and of the self like two hands in front of a candle– which one is twice as dark? Which one moved across the body moves more slowly? I will not breathe within the light leaking through the curtain and the reflection of the moon. There is proportion to the breadth of shadow–the nearer, the deeper it appears (as light, only opposite). But if direct, how long before the eye sees at a distance another shadow move the body such that light is of an equal size? At that moment, stars take on the shape of stars and the angle of the skin is impossible to compass. It’s the calculus of living that we need. Touch me. Touch the surface of these bodies placed next to each other– the same and nearly opposite. Come in and mingle with them.

     

  • Cheered By Battleship

    James Boros

    jboros@ravenpress.com

     

    In memory of Kurdt Cobain

     

    (1) Apocalypse Then

     
    It ended in an open shaftway, following LBJ’s example. By designating cauldron 19 as their sauce, mirages (against no odds) vented mighty grams of plenty, and cast visceral tracking smoke in henceforth unforeseen celebrations of danger. Without too much grinding, her inappropriate spasm posed as a lofty cur: negation would only disprove gaiety in instances not involving firecrackers declared insipid by consensual bigotry. Having agonized under lack of stress, the rambunctious turnip sought deadeni ng solids as a means of obtaining “gaslight marginality” amidst dining vocations of porn. Besides, where in Charlie’s hell is there room for another afghan recorder?

     

    They didn’t intend to exclude any (or all) whirlpools, yet commuted out toward superior concomitance as stipulated by the father-in-law-to-be. After choking on phosphorescence, everything seemed easy! But, tagging along in front of her, Olive Branch swor e enmity . . . before being drugged by collared stoolies in layered Indonesian target gear. It took all our strength, and less, to meditate on daisies with their plasma turned inside out until ecumenical cowards could line the streets with surgery.

     

    Plasticity was not one of his least appealing codices; despite eternity, certain amounts of clout swam through, only to find a shortage of beckoning gas bags at their perfectly tuned birthright calamity function. Nodal ‘tater within reach (and gravit y well below norm), it sprung out of action at a pace which would certainly not make a vagrant tough wince twice. Automotive vengeance, at least!

     

    “I am no longer a fatality.” However, as common scents voraciously take dictation, enzyme plagiarism casts the entire apparatus in an elderly light, at least, that is, if “that damned beveller” cheats us out of native opportunities. Eagles did not count: Friday’s children sped toward fate’s waiting mint as if watchmakers were only milling around by the dozen. Caulk? Aggravate us, and find your true butler.

     

    This grieving advertisement put ’em in a vault with lather and resin, and prayed for the delivery of wounds. Would non-systematic complaining prove fruity (or does vinegar bury its weeds)? She tried for the fourth level, but failed to chasten elabo rate pins and needless violence . . . or so they did not think. With a spoke-like jerk, truculent adjectives bogged down in a grimey land war with outlandish paper goods, and delivered kitties’ pauses to the breeze. We sang–and read comfortable pylons- -before drifting off with choice albino zebras, nameless olympic runts with heads like extinguished candle wax.

     

    . . . On and on, reeling in daft plaque via assorted remora directionality . . . . Semblances, forked like brazen espresso wallflowers, logged furiously against the wishes of “kelp,” delegating crap to wealthy bunglers whose pouches struck Mickey as naked. Without releasing her grasp, she slept like a doll, and edited flatware stalks in glowing rapture as fishermen slapped sewage with crazy apoplexy. It was as if . . .

     

    (2) Spokane Joe

     

    Traditions upheld with a pang, we jogged into sunbeams laden with molten beef, and skimmed the celebrants’ Tuscany while dimming flaps destined to be lamp-lit in a superficial vein. Prognoses adhered to rougher points (like sawteeth) despite their h aving been abused in deep water. Without the benefit of “coffee nerves,” switchboards lit up for dour grapplings betwixt elegant sphincters of prostration; when they reached the podium, Bess collapsed with our famous “mmmmmmm” sound. The first and final straw is that old donkey’s reluctance, enough to make any child cry out for shears.

     

    Upon crossing the lumbar nerve, it noted several uranium holster supplements making faces at crossfire emitted from one of the New England states. Her dance resembled that of a thumbprint, water-logged janitors aside. (But couldn’t this money welde r deliver electricity outside of the allotted time?) It was Pele’s turn: without so much as a spitting tundra file, massive media churned bread into wafer-thin rafters, leaving us holding the balloon (and its constituency).

     

    Television sags waywardly as tugboats get a grip on varnished chalices: this much we know. Requests for itty-bitty steam lowered the issue of unwritten swordplay within cloaked banjo sex abbreviations, and the phalanx swung (mercifully) in another d irection. One more planet: will the contest begin?

     

    . . . Had somehow managed to lose its jugular! Like fine wine, scalloped fabric-suckers wagged motorcyclical dumbfoundedness in suggestive napkin agendas christened at the time of Lou’s passing. (Believe it!) A cordial was passed from lip to breast–an d back again–throughout the following daytime, all of which didn’t lead him to wring: “Could gore, bladder bug that it is, send ripples across a translucency hound composed of elemental pragmatics, bracing epidermal survivors?” And on the cross, that ca ve-dweller, in a sort of gin-rummy trance, lit the first cracker of the session. It’s comin’ out of the hovel, fast!

     

    Sassy and brained, she elbowed her wagon train into a fulcrum fire left behind by verticality gone wayward, and saw to it that end table #88 registered at the previous nebula. “Goodness!” Without bravura, and with a bold, medical wavering, our awni ng killed off the worm handler, seeing asylum (for the umpteenth time) as a jiggling puff of glandular boasting. Because of chutzpah . . .

     

    Their elliptical sense of ignorance proved fatal to straw women (for example, NUDGE CEREMONY SCHEDULER PAN). Simplicity’s argonaut selected six of the most bruised erasures, forcing limbo to pulsate with embraceable ruddiness in spite of applause di rected at the Nepalese border. Shunting in a display of granular body-building, and bringing out a budgie with eyes like leptons, expositional tracking patellas sounded the heights of razor, primed elegance with jocular binges, and dragged polarity about by its sweaty atmosphere. Things had never been so good.

     

    (3) Long And Dusty Blow-hole

     

    There was a glob of nymphomania attached to version 0! We wrought ironic fat cells around context-bent westerlies begrudged to one poor, hollow actuarial knight (after jazz depicted Bozo clocking molecular drips with a jigsaw). The picayune inertia so often associated with wobbly plowshares stood between middle-wing smilers and their raving shorelines; ask not what time cannot do for you, but then again, why?

     

    “Kind of false hairline”: connotes temporal gist apparatuses capable of withholding dregs as they blossom forth and back within a minute crevice perturbed by nautilus recession. A cheesy enterprise, fraught with rogue wattage (henceforth “marmot whi z hullabaloo”), and probed willingly by tensile demeanor, landed flat on its batch of troubling documentaries (after we glimpsed thirty-eight softies propping up unborn winches with, of all things, messages from Saint Hoofbeat). If re-routing formerly gr eeted cylinders evoked glistening alarm, they would simply extract wiggly einsteinium after counting aqua vitae as one o’ the boyz.

     

    Phenomenal! Blathering pastiness was responsible for only 27% of xylem lossage, seeing as how everybody clapped like beetle sycophants while the remaining ingot lost gravity in a wilderness to the left of etiolated plane musculature. Cleft in stogi es (bottomed-out speed demonstrators), or parted down the middle (exasperating la-la-land butt), the very fabric of space and/or tiger ankle came forth to be massaged by trench coats laundered in photon brine by dry-mouthed Caucasians. Choices: (945) “Op aqueness delivers”; (11) “Lubricant repletion without sandy booklet”; (2006c) “Memorial explosion truss.”

     

    After a quick seizure, we drilled for newsprint, and attached a wire to symbols of age-old hemorrhage leaps. One should not, however, assume that her Christ-like scissor hold pored over both the cape and intricate powder rhythms quacked out h alf-assedly by tours through attic fan wavelengths.

     

    Without his ukulele, he was like a god, roaming the width of major network tummy-prose, glaring at polar strip joints with nauseating relief. . . . But, despite baseline twitch-amplifier deaths by the dozens of hundreds, it was not enough to knock th e wind into vegetation. Finally, with a warning, they converted to larger sizes, none of which looked like rotund/chalky mammoth residue. (See illustrations in all three telephony starch smolderings, esp. “neglected suitor: magneto.”) OPTIONS STILL AVA ILABLE.

     

    July’s wallpaper left no doubt as to the melody of buried cynicism. Hadn’t there been a choco-lobbyist in that corner? It wasn’t uncouth, but there were brimstones placed metaphorically along the garden airbus . . . what comes up must . . . goes around and down!

     

    “Her majesty” was unable to comply without backing into a hedge, all the while shining well-endowed ash quarters pocked with fashion. Acid reindeer grovelled naughtily regardless of asteroids from Pope, the binging hypochondriac, and his half-witted cardiac mime. Our strength lies deep below this manifold juggler: chowder, regaining stolid spark-nipples as it directed a fierce tai-chi emergency, bowled a 2 and bowed out shrugging.

     

  • Three Poems

    Charles Bernstein

    Dept. of English
    S.U.N.Y. Buffalo
    bernstei@ubvms.cc.buffalo.edu

     

     

    Audio clips here are in the .au format and were originally recorded at a reading by the author in Charlottesville, Virginia (September, 1994). Thanks to Pete Yadlowsky and HACK for conversion from analog to digital form. More digital audio poetry is available here. A sound-player for AIX 3.25 is available here. For Mac users, an .aiff version is available here; for PC-Windows users, a .wav version is available here

     

    Soapy Water

     

    From The Absent Father in Dumbo(Tenerife: Zasterle Press, 1991 — out of print).

    audio clip [.95 MB]

     

     

    You’ve got to be patient sometimes–sounds like an
    anaesthetic, I’ll be the doctor–but jump up
    into the next available hoop–Nick calling
    “Where are my galleys” they can’t be lost
    in the mail because they went Federal Express.
    But something is always not there & if it’s
    not apparent ingenuity (the mind’s perennial
    ingenue) will think of it, rest enskewered.
    These are the saltine days–salty & soggy. The
    struts are finished, the shocks are leaking, &
    like the man says, there’s always a simple solution–
    simple & stupid. With the rug pulled out turns
    out there was no floor. & float, flutteringly
    behind or in bed with what salience has no
    surety. The thing expressed–sounds like some sort of
    pizza franchise, especially with the choices
    now offered–broccoli, zucchini, Belgian sausage,
    seven variety mushroom. No grade like the grade
    that blew the gasket. Turns out to be
    slop corridor, 7 days to shapelier nail filings,
    was there sex before Catholicism?
    It’s not as if an economy of loss is not in–
    you can’t say circulation because it is kind
    of anticirculation: all this nervous
    energy dissipates production & erodes accumulation–
    so you don’t have to get so dramatic, talk
    about death & sex, or so moral, talk about idled
    hours–all that you ever need to lose is wasting away in
    anxiety’s natural spring geysers. So let’s
    bury that knife, & in the morning we can
    eat meat again.

     

    Claire-in-the-Building

    audio clip [2 MB]

     

    There is not a man alive who does not
    admire soup. I felt that way myself
    sometimes, in a manner that greatly
    resembles a plug. Swerving when
    there were no curbs, vying
    nonchalantly against the slot-machine
    logic of my temporary guardians,
    dressed always in damp
    patterns with inadequate pixelation
    to allow for the elan she
    protested she provoked on such
    sleep-induced outings in partial
    compliance with the work-release program
    offered as an principled advance on
    my prostate subjection to
    tales altogether too astonishing to
    submit to the usual mumbo
    jumbo, you know, over easy,
    eat and run, not too loud, no
    bright floral patterns if
    you expect to get a job in such
    an incendiary application of
    denouement. My word! Ellen,
    did you understand one thing
    Frank just said, I mean, the
    nerve of these Protestants, or
    whatever they call themselves
    or I ain’t your mother’s
    macaroni and cheese, please, no
    ice. Is sand biodegradable?
    Do you serve saws with your steak,
    or are you too scared to claim
    anything? No can’t do. “I
    learned to read by watching
    Wheel of Fortune when I was
    a baby.” By the time I was 5
    you couldn’t tell the slippers
    from the geese. That’s right,
    go another half mile up the cliff
    and take a sharp left immediately
    after where the ABSOLUTELY NO
    TRESPASSING sign used to be,
    you know, before the war.
    Like the one about the chicken
    crossed the street because he
    wanted to see time fly or because
    he missed the road or he didn’t
    want to wake up the sleeping caplets.
    A very mixed-up hen. “No, I can’t,
    I never learned.” By the time
    you get up it’s time to
    go to sleep. Like the one about
    the leaky boat and the sea’s
    false bottoms. Veils that part to
    darker veils. So that the fissure
    twisted in the vortex. Certain she was
    lurking just behind the facade,
    ready to explain that the joke had been
    misapplied or was it, forfeited?
    Never again; & again, & again.
    “Maybe he’s not a real person.”
    Maybe it’s not a real purpose.
    Maybe my slips are too much
    like pratfalls (fat falls).
    Maybe the lever is detached from the
    mainspring. The billiard ball
    burned against the slide
    of the toaster (holster). That’s no
    puzzle it’s my knife (slice, life,
    pipe). The Rip that Ricochets around
    the Rumor.
    As in two’s two too
    many. “I thought you said haphazard–
    but if you did you’re wrong.”
    If you’ve got your concentration you’ve got
    just about everything worth writing home
    that tomorrow came sooner than expected
    or put those keys away
    unless you intend to use me and
    then toss me aside like so much worn
    out root beer, root for someone,
    Bill, take a chance, give till it
    stops hurtling through the fog or
    fog substitute.

    Save me
    So that I can exist 
    Lose me
    So that I may find you

    “That’s an extremely unripe plum.”
    “There’s no plum like the plum
    of concatenation.” Plunge & drift,
    drift & plunge.
    The streets are
    icy with incipience.

     

    Mao Tse Tung Wore Khakis

    audio clip [.4 MB]

     

    Who would have thought Paul McCartney would be
    the Perry Como of the 1990s?
    The Thunderbirds gleam end-to-end-to-end
    in the studio backlot. The lions
    have left their lair and are roaming just by
    the subconscious. PP-warning: Illegal
    received field on preceding line.
    Bethel/’94: I just don’t want any
    hippies come in here and steal
    my computer. In my experience
    I often misspell words. Evidently
    Bob Dylan missed the exit and ended
    up in Saugerties. You can sell some of
    the people most of the time, but you can’t

     

  • Seizing Power: Decadence and Transgression in Foucault and Paglia

    John Walker

    University of Toronto
    jwalker@epas.toronto.ca

    From the idea that the self is not given to us, I think that there is only one practical consequence–we have to create ourselves as a work of art.

     

    -Michel Foucault

    Introduction/Apologia

     

    The 1990s have to this point occasioned a new space, a new opportunity for those who are still interested to (re)read the works of French critic/philosopher Michel Foucault. James Miller’s The Passion of Michel Foucault, for instance, a meticulously researched and well considered book, calls into question North American “Foucauldian” scholarship, which he feels

     

    enshrined Foucault as a . . . canonic figure whose authority (the authors) routinely invoked in order to legitimate their own brand of "progressive" politics. Most of these latter-day American Foucauldians . . . are committed to forging a more diverse society in which whites and people of colour, straights and gays, men and women . . . can . . . all live together in compassionate harmony--an appealing if difficult goal, with deep roots in the Judeo-Christian tradition. (384)

     

    Miller finds Foucault’s “progressive” followers to be victims of their own misreadings, willful or otherwise, of a thinker whose transfigurative radicality stretches far beyond “accepted” limits. “Unless I am badly mistaken” Miller writes, “Foucault issued a brave and basic challenge to nearly everything that passes for “right” in Western culture–including everything that passes for “right” among a great many of America’s left-wing academics” (384).

     

    Even more controversial on this issue than Miller is Camille Paglia, whose Sexual Personae has of late caused such a stir in academic circles. In her earlier provocative essay, “Junk Bonds and Corporate Raiders: Academe in the Hour of the Wolf,” a lengthy and often hilarious skewering of postmodern scholarship’s excesses, David Halperin becomes the unlucky symbol of all that has gone wrong (in Paglia’s view) with North American academia. Halperin’s One Hundred Years of Homosexuality is here lampooned as the soppiest sort of politically correct, liberal-humanist scholarship, with actual knowledge and research taking a back seat to the recitation of currently fashionable dogma concerning the fate of the marginalized and disempowered in Western society.

     

    Who is ulimately culpable, in Paglia’s eyes, for the sloppy scholarship of Halperin and others like him? None other than Michel Foucault.

     

    Paglia dismisses Halperin as a mere Foucault acolyte, one of those “well-meaning but foggy humanists who virtually never have the intellectual and scholarly preparation to critique Foucault competently,” but who instead merely rehash the “Big Daddy’s” own shaky (in her opinion) arguments in a quest for personal legitimacy (“Junk” 174). Supporting Paglia’s depiction of Halperin as a self-appointed defender of the Foucauldian faith is his own somewhat petulant criticism of Miller’s book recently published in Salmagundi.1

     

    At first glance, then, it appears that nothing could be more diametrically opposed than the views of Paglia and Foucault: Paglia goes to great lengths to legitimate such a notion, and her most vocal critics often fit snugly (smugly?) into the “American Foucauldian” category delineated by Miller, creating the impression of a sort of binary split between the two camps.

     

    What I have found, however, upon a close reading of key texts by both authors, is the reversal of this idea, a collapsing of the supposed space between the two. My “positive” Paglian reading of Foucault will suggest that, contrary to what Paglia herself has said, Michel Foucault’s work and life are the epitome of the aesthetic propounded in Sexual Personae, an aesthetic which finds its culmination in dandyism: rather than opponents, they are actually comrades in transgression and decadence, fighting what is forever fated to be a losing battle “against nature.”

     

    The Problem with Power

     

    “The soul is the prison of the body” (Discipline 29). It was with this famous line from his critically lauded 1975 opus Discipline and Punish that Michel Foucault solidified his fame among post-Woodstock Rousseauian academics in North America. Rousseau’s theory, as enunciated in The Social Contract and other works, that the human subject was basically an innocent victim of corrupt societal forces, seemed, at least, to dovetail neatly with Foucault’s expressed view that, contrary to Christian theology, what was thought of as the human soul was not something “born in sin and subject to punishment” but was rather a phantom imposed from without by “methods of punishment, supervision, and constraint” and thus a key factor “in the mastery that power exercises over the body,” or “bio-power” (29).

     

    In the Rousseauian/hippie slang of post-1960s radicals, “getting back to the garden” meant isolating and removing these power operations so that the human subject could live in a democratic, mutually caring, “natural” state of equanimity and bliss. “Power” thus became a catch-all phrase for converted Foucauldians, begetting seemingly endless studies isolating the fate of its “victims” within the patriarchal confines of WASP history and literature. Or as Paglia puts it, for Foucault and his supposed coterie of social constructionists, “power becomes a ‘squishy pink-marshmallow word’ which ‘caroms around picking up lint and dog hair’ but ultimately leads nowhere” (“Junk” 225). Paglia’s expression of disdain for utopian liberal theories (she calls Sexual Personae “a book written against humanism” [“Cancelled” 106]) is hardly surprising, coming from an unabashed fan of Nietzsche and Sade. Yet the alignment of Foucault, who claims the same influences, with such theories is quite problematic.

     

    Take, for instance, Foucault’s derisory comments on humanism during an interview in 1971: “In short, humanism is everything in Western civilization that restricts the desire for power: it prohibits the desire for power and excludes the possibility of power being seized” (“Revolutionary” 221-2). Humanism is for Foucault “antiquated,” an “insipid psychology” whose emphasis on the benign goodness of the originary subject constitutes a trap, fixing the individual within a binary good/evil framework which guarantees nothing but continued subjection (Miller 172). In the interview, he goes on to advocate the liberation of the subject’s will-to-power through “desubjectification,” or limit-experience brought about through both political and cultural means, including:

     

    the suppression of taboos and the limitations and divisions imposed upon the sexes . . . the loosening of inhibitions with regard to drugs; the breaking of all the prohibitions which form and guide the development of a normal individual. I am referring to all those experiences which have been rejected by our civilization or which it only accepts in literature. ("Revolutionary" 222; emphasis mine).

     

    This is Foucault’s invocation of the realm identified by Nietzsche as the “Dionysian,” which for humanists may conjure up visions of a pastoral utopia, but, for both Foucault and Paglia, evokes something far more dangerous indeed. “The Dionysian,” as Paglia says, “is no picnic” (“Sexual” 7).

     

    Nietzsche, Apollo, Dionysus

     

    Any “positive” co-reading of Foucault and Paglia must consider Nietzsche, a seminal figure in the (remarkably similar) formative genealogies of both critics. Nietzsche’s reformulation of the Greek myths of the gods Apollo and Dionysus is central to the thought of each. Beginning with The Birth of Tragedy, he organizes existence around two binary drives, the Apollonian and the Dionysian, “formative forces arising directly from nature” which are later depicted by the “human artist” (24). Apollo is for Nietzsche “the god of all plastic powers,” the “principium individuationis” who fixes the limits of self and culture through the illusion of form, an artificer (21-2). Dionysus, on the other hand, represents the entire chaotic realm of eternal motion and flux which form strives to control, obscure, and deny. Transgression into the Dionysian realm risks the disintegration of the individual subject (a state of “madness”) and its subsequent reintegration into the whole: “The mystical jubilation of Dionysus” states Nietzsche, “breaks the spell of individuation and opens a path to the maternal womb of being” (97).

     

    The dichotomy which emerges from Greek culture and continues through the history of the West, then, is a nature/culture opposition: the Apollonian Socrates introduces the “illusion that thought . . . might plumb the farthest abysses of being and even correct it. . . . strong in the belief that nature can be fathomed” (93-4). Western art, as a mirror of the human psyche, becomes in part a record of this basic struggle and the differing responses to it in various epochs. In The Birth of Tragedy, at least, Nietzsche implies that both drives should unfold in a sort of perpetual cycle or spiral: “Only so much of the Dionysian substratum of the universe” he says, “may . . . be dealt with by that Apollonian transfiguration; so that these two prime agencies must develop in strict proportion, conformable to the laws of eternal justice” (145). Later, in response to what he perceives as an imbalance in Apollo’s favour originating with the Age of Reason, Nietzsche places greater emphasis on the Dionysian, equating it with the all-important will-to-power (Hollingdale 198-9).

     

    Both Foucault and Paglia subscribe, with slight differences in emphasis, to this Nietzschean formula. Miller notes Foucault’s basic concurrence with Nietzsche’s binary thesis that “every human embodies a compound of nature and culture, chaos and order, instinct and reason . . . symbolized . . . by Dionysus and Apollo” (69). Almost all of Foucault’s work is concerned on some level with variations on this theme, the Apollonian drive variously taking the names “limit” (i.e., “Preface To Transgression”) and “power” (Discipline and Punish). The Apollonian, in contrast to the timeless, immanent realm of the Dionysian, is a historical force, embedded within our culture in a tangled network of conflicting paths “crisscrossed by intrinsic dangers” (“Space” 249). Characterized by the use of “reason” in the post-Enlightenment era, it actively de-limits the chaotic flux of the Dionysian and produces both society, on the macrocosmic level, and personality, or “the subject,” on the level of the individual. “I think,” says Foucault

     

    that the central issue of philosophy and critical thought since the eighteenth century has always been, still is, and will, I hope remain the question: What is this Reason that we use? What are its historical effects? What are its limits, and its dangers?. . . . If it is extremely dangerous to say that Reason is the enemy that should be eliminated, it is just as dangerous to say that any critical questioning of this rationality risks sending us into irrationality. . . . if critical thought itself has a has a function . . . it is precisely to accept this sort of spiral, this sort of revolving door of rationality that refers us to its necessity . . . and at the same time, to its intrinsic dangers. ("Space" 249)

     

    Within our current Western episteme (or historical period), one characterized by a post-Enlightenment faith in reason and concomitant loss of belief in God, Foucault locates sexual experience as the final borderline lying between Apollonian rationality and the Dionysian realm of the unknown. As we shall see, he valorizes those writers and philosophers whose lives and works reside at the “limit of madness–astride the line separating reason from unreason, balanced between the Dionysian and the Apollonian,” where it is possible to glean information beyond this binary split and then transmit its dissonant content to others (Miller 107). Miller goes so far as to state: “I take all of Foucault’s work to be an effort to issue a license for exploring . . . and also as a vehicle for expressing . . . this harrowing vision of a gnosis beyond good and evil, glimpsed at the limits of experience” (459). As we will see, however, Foucault, unlike Nietzsche, does not end in a full embrace of Dionysus, but instead comes to regard the manipulation of Apollo by the subject as key concept.

     

    Camille Paglia devotes an entire chapter of Sexual Personae to the struggle between Apollo and Dionysus, and explicitly adds an archetypal sexual element to the equation which remains implicit in Nietzsche’s analysis (his comparison of the Dionysian to the “maternal womb” of nature being one example). For Paglia, on the symbolic level, the Apollonian is a masculine swerve away from “mother nature” (no idle cliche for her): the Western construction of identity, of culture, of artifice, emanates from man’s desire to repel the murky, “daemonic” liquidity from which he sprang and to which he must finally return. Paglia’s sexualization of Apollo and Dionysus provides an interesting angle from which to approach Foucault’s own theory and praxis of aesthetic transgression, or “Apollo Daemonized,” as she calls it (Sexual 489-511). This is an Apollonianism at the furthest threshold of extremity, one which runs the risk of a complete implosion back into the Dionysian–nature’s final revenge.

     

    Breaking Down The Subject: The “Experience Book”

     

    Foucault’s path to decadent enlightenment entails a double movement: first, the realization of what I will (somewhat ironically) call “true nature”–the chaos of Dionysus–and the resulting “desubjectification” or dissolution of the subject; secondly comes what Paglia calls the “daemonization of Apollo,” in which the subject seizes control of what Foucault calls the “author-function” and (re)creates itself as pure exteriority–an objet d’art.

     

    For Foucault, “writing,” be it historical, philosophical or literary, in our modern era finds its value in radicality, in contesting the underlying assumptions of Western culture. The momentary dissociation of those lines which constitute and enclose the Western subject or personality is the aim of the “experience-book,” which attempts “through experience to reach that point of life which lies as close as possible to the impossibility of living, which lies at the limit or extreme” (Marx 31). Some of its key agents appear frequently throughout Foucault’s work: Nietzsche, Sade, Bataille. “It is this de-subjectifying undertaking, the idea of a ‘limit-experience’ that tears the subject from itself, which is the fundamental lesson I’ve learned from these authors” states Foucault, underscoring the centrality of this concept for his own work. (31-2).

     

    In early essays such as “Preface to Transgression” and “Language To Infinity,” Foucault, like the poststructuralist version of Roland Barthes, luxuriates in the notion of a textual space composed of a self-referential language liberated from any grounds, exulting the primacy of the signifier, its groundless and irreducible plurality. Such texts, defined in The Order of Things as “heterotopias,” “dessicate speech, stop words in their tracks, contest the very possibility of grammar at its source” (xviii). The heterotopic text, then, is a text at the limits which consistently threatens to violate its ordered Apollonian boundaries. This happens, for instance, at the extremes of Bataille’s erotic prose where language “arrives at its confines, overleaps itself, explodes and radically challenges itself in laughter . . . at the limit of its void, speaking of itself in a second language in which the absence of a sovereign subject outlines its essential emptiness and incessantly fractures the unity of its discourse” (“Preface” 48).

     

    Foucault’s heterotopic “experience-book” is an active agent, a work of “direct personal experience” (including the experience of writing) rather than a dry theoretical exercise (Marx 38). The end result of this experiential process is the knowledge that the “truth” of language and the life it represents is one of pure fictionality, exterior and irreducible to any singular, definable, and immanent reality (which is not the same thing as saying that this “reality” [nature–the Dionysian] doesn’t exist–a key point). Skittering across the surface of the world, the empty bodies of both language and humans create meaning through collision, through the persuasiveness of impact. The ‘experience-book’ thus works simultaneously as both theory and praxis: the author/subject becomes dissociated through the act of creating this heterotopic labyrinth, the result being subsequently transmitted to others as an “invitation . . . to slip into this kind of experience” (Marx 33, 36, 40; see also The Discourse On Language 215).

     

    What we find, I believe, upon examination of some of Foucault’s key works, is that this “de-subjectifying” experience mirrors the processes of mystical schools such as Buddhism which pursue the breakdown of the ego through direct means such as meditation, resulting in the recognition that the material world and the ‘meanings’ we assume inhere within it (including the meaning of the “I,” the ego-self that operates within that world) are maya, or illusion. Foucault remarks in a 1978 interview that the whole problem of de-subjectification is directly related to the operations of “mysticism,” which he feels are analogous to his task of liberating a “kind of glimmering,” an “essence,” through the workings of the experience-book (Miller 305). Miller notes that, when confronted by an audience of bewildered American post-structuralists regarding this realm of “occult”–or literally, “unknown”–essence (surely a sin of the greatest magnitude in their eyes!), Foucault “had trouble specifying” just what he meant, but also refused to back down (305). Yet those so troubled by the philosopher’s stance here only betray their ignorance of his work. Gilles Deleuze, who as Paul Bove points out, “associates Foucault with some prophetic visionary capacity” (“Foreword” xxxii), points out that the nature/culture, rational/irrational, Apollo/Dionysus spiral “from the beginning (was) one of Foucault’s fundamental theses.” For Foucault, he says, there exists a binary split between the ultimately indecipherable forms of “visible” content (nature) and forms of articulable expression (language), “although they continually overlap and spill into one another in order to form each new stratum of form of knowledge” (Deleuze 61, 70).

     

    The strategic avoidance of certain key terms or organizing concepts (such as Apollo and Dionysus, or the language of Eastern mysticism) is, it seems, a central feature of French post-structuralism, obscuring any underlying notions of system and totalization, concepts which the school as a (very loose) whole ostensibly rejects. It also reveals an anxiety of influence, a burning desire to appear wholly original and “difficult” at all times. This in part explains the supposed “gulf” dividing Foucault and Paglia.

     

    Paglia prides herself on verbal directness. Far less obliquely than Foucault, for instance, she places the aforementioned binaries within a mystical framework, correctly pointing out that much of the deconstructive method has previously been “massively and coherently presented . . . in Hinduism and Buddhism” (“Junk” 214). In the religions of the East, she says, “the unenlightened mind sees things in terms of form, but the enlightened mind sees the Void . . . cf. the Apollonian versus Dionysian dichotomy in the West” (“East” 151). Paglia makes connections; Foucault, whose entire premise, as Hayden White points out, is rhetorical (114), obscures them: “Who ever thought he was writing anything but fiction?” Foucault asks (Marx 33). This is why some liberal humanist academics are able to embrace Foucault: they are misled by his deliberate evasiveness. His distaste for the term “nature” (human or otherwise), especially, leads them to believe that he sees life shaped only by an external power which (de)forms pristine, innocent subjects into tattered, deformed victims of power, a totalized Apollonian universe. Paglia, accepting this misreading as accurate, ends up mistakenly pummeling a potential ally.

     

    De-Structuralism: Discovering “True Nature”

     

    In reading Foucault, it is central to differentiate between concept of the unified subject, the self as an Apollonian construct, and a human nature which, in contrast, is revealed to be part of that limitless realm of form-less essence (or “void”) which precedes and follows the material world of bodies (in Eastern mysticism, this essence is called Atman, and the larger realm, Brahman). As he points out in his touchstone essay “Nietzsche, Genealogy, History,” it is the task of the “genealogical historian” to scramble received notions of a “true” self at the base, of a “nature” or “soul” which “pretends unification or . . . fabricates a coherent identity” (81). Through the movements of the experience-book, this “natural self” is revealed not to be a unified, coherent whole, but instead a Dionysian conundrum, a tangled subjectivity; not “a possession that grows and solidifies, (but) . . . an unstable assemblage of faults, fissures, and heterogeneous layers that threaten the fragile inheritor from within and underneath” (82). The body, as “the locus of this dissociated self” and thus inseparable from it, is thus revealed to be “a volume in perpetual disintegration” (83).

     

    Paglia’s view of nature basically coincides with Foucault’s. True nature, or the “chthonian,” is at base is nothing benign, but rather a “grueling erosion of natural force, flecking, dilapidating, grinding down, reducing all matter to fluid, the thick primal soup from which new forces bob, gasping for life” (Sexual 30). This residue from which humanity springs poses a constant threat for a people who confuse societally constructed identities, or personae, constructed in defence, with Dionysian human “nature”: “We speak of falling apart, having a breakdown . . . getting it all together” Paglia says. “Only in the West is there such conviction of the Apollonian unity of personality. . . . But I say that there is neither person, thought, thing, nor art in the brutal chthonian” (104, 73)

     

    Foucault agrees: this search for “the image of a primordial truth fully adequate to its nature” is burst asunder by the genealogist’s revelation that nature contains not “a timeless and essential secret, but the secret that (things) have no essence, or that their essence was fabricated . . . from alien forms” (78). For both Foucault and Paglia, it is this act of fabrication (the “ordering” process which becomes a Foucauldian buzzword: The Order of Things; “The Order of Discourse”) issuing forth not in an isomorphic relation, but in the line of defense and control versus the unknowable, which informs our problematic Western rationalism.

     

    True nature, or Dionysian reality, is thus identified as the “non-place” of mutation, where rules are formed, transgressed, and re-formed. Embracing the language of Eastern mysticism, Paglia notes that ultimate reality is “the space that holds all that happens. . . . sunyata, voidness” (“East” 151). This “void” then, ultimately has no discernible connection to events occurring within it, and its eruptions into the Apollonian sphere are always revolutionary: “Suddenly, things are no longer perceived or propositions articulated in the same way” (Deleuze 85). As a result, “only a single drama is ever staged in this ‘non-place’: the endlessly repeated play of dominations” which strive to arrest its flux, becoming “fixed, throughout its history, in rituals, in meticulous procedures that impose rights and obligations . . . and gives rise to the universe of rules” (“Genealogy” 85).

     

    It is, then, not a question of metaphysics, of uncovering something eternal and true underlying any given set of rules, for true nature can never be deciphered. The philosophy of Nietzsche, the writings of Sade and Bataille, and Foucault’s own genealogical histories thus expose the structures of “civilized” life (including language) as fictions whose successive “interpretations” fix its limits in “the violent or surreptitious appropriation of a system of rules, which . . . (have) no essential meaning” (“Nietzsche” 86). As Paglia explains, this Apollonian power-play is paradoxical: rules and order have proven to be humanity’s greatest defense against the void, serving as the basis for religion, ritual, and art; however, contrary to current politically correct, liberal-humanist thinking, all of these modes, including art, are in no way exempt from the amorality and cruelty inherent in the application of the arbitrary and empty “rules” which are its basis. “Art,” she says,

     

    is a ritualistic binding of the perpetual motion machine that is nature. . . . Art is order. But order is not necessarily just, kind or beautiful. Order may be arbitrary, harsh, and cruel. Art has nothing to do with morality. . . . Before the Enlightenment, religious art was hieratic and ceremonial. After the Enlightenment, art had to create its own world, in which a new ritual of artistic formalism replaced religious universals. . . . The artist makes art not to save humankind, but to save himself. (Sexual 29)

     

    The artist, as a creator of worlds whose laws are self-contained, is thus necessarily engaged in transgression: freeing the subject(ed) through the dispersal of inherited, stultifying rules, s/he must formulate the world anew, impose a new interpretation, a counter-discourse. Rather than deconstruction, I would label this spiral de-structuralism, a movement encompassing both structure and its antithesis.

     

    Astride The Line: Sade

     

    For both Foucault and Paglia, the Marquis De Sade’s work initiates the de-structuralist spiral: his libertines not only realize true nature, but also sow the seeds of the movement “against nature,” resulting in a denaturalized art-world wherein, according to Foucault, “every language that has been effectively pronounced” has been consumed and then “repeated, combined, dissociated, reversed, and reversed once again, not toward a dialectical reward . . . but a radical exhaustion” (“Language” 61-2). For Sade, limits are not defined by religion, as God has been decentered by the emergence of Enlightenment “man,” who now becomes the raison d’etre of the universe. It is thus “man’s” most profound, and ultimately inexplicable, Dionysian experience–sex–which marks the borderline of rationality, where thought and language break down into white noise on the threshold of life and death.

     

    Foucault locates the initial stage of the transgressive movement in Sade’s total affirmation of nature as a state of chaotic flux, a forever dissonant madness which affirms everything (and therefore nothing) at the same time. This is Sade’s “ironic justification” of the “inanity” of Rousseau’s philosophy, with its “verbiage about man and nature” (Madness 283). “Within the chateau where Sade’s hero confines himself” writes Foucault,

     

    it seems at first glance as if nature can act with utter freedom. There man rediscovers a truth he had forgotten, though it was manifest. What desire can be contrary to nature, since it was given to man by nature itself? . . . The madness of desire, insane murders, the most unreasonable passions--all are wisdom and reason, since they are part of the order of nature. (282)

     

    Foucault points out that the Sadean subject’s transgression is not a simple movement of black into white (which would mean its annihilation), but rather a straddling or puncturing of the binary wall. The subject’s outer, societal “self” is momentarily broken down and reintegrated with the Dionysian continuum, finding “itself in what it excludes … perhaps recognizes itself for the first time” (“Preface” 34-6), a move analogous to the nirvanic (re)union of Atman and Brahmanin Eastern mysticism.

     

    “Enlightenment,” then, for the Sadean subject, is this realization of a true nature from which it is nevertheless alien. This essence-less-ness, revealed through Dionysian limit-experience as an “affirmation that affirms nothing” (36), leads to a paradox central to the Foucauldian spiral: for a living subject on the material plane of existence, Dionysus always leads back to Apollo. Every “total” affirmation of nature is thus an anti-affirmation which in turns affirms the exteriority of man; consequently, Sadean “bodies of self and other become objects (rather than sensitive beings) on the threshold between life and death” (During 82), as seen in the following passage from Sade’s Justine:

     

    'This torture is sweeter than any you may imagine, Therese,' says Roland; 'you will only approach death by way of unspeakably pleasurable sensations; the pressure this noose will bring to bear upon your nervous system will set fire to the organs of voluptuousness; the effect is certain; were all the people who are condemned to this torture to know in what an intoxication of joy it makes one die, less terrified by this retribution for their crimes, they would commit them more often. . . . . (443)

     

    This second phase of Sadean transgression thus establishes the subject’s (re)embrace of the Apollonian, this time with the self-conscious realization that the structural “rules” binding it are, at base, empty: the subject realizes its status as an object. Henceforth, “the relation established by Rousseau is precisely reversed; sovereignty no longer transposes the natural existence; the latter is only an object for the sovereign, which permits him to measure his total liberty,” his distance from the void (Madness 283). Having expelled the binary virus, bodies, be they human or textual, take on the appearance of rhetorical tropes, the articulable creating meaning through freeplay on the surface of the visible. Metaphysics becomes phantasmaphysics:

     

    The event . . . is always an effect produced entirely by bodies colliding, mingling, or separating. . . . they create events on their surfaces, events that are without thickness, mixture, or passion. . . . We should not restrict meaning to the cognitive core that lies at the heart of a knowable object . . . we should allow it to reestablish its flux at the limit of words and things, as what is said of a thing . . . as something that happens. ("Theatrum" 172-4)

     

    Paglia calls Sade “the most unread major writer in Western literature,” and analyses his work from a vantage point which sheds light on Foucault’s later move towards dandyism. Sade liberates our true nature from the shackles of a Rousseau-inspired liberal humanism which “still permeates our culture from sex counseling to cereal commercials” (Sexual 2). Especially resonant for Paglia in Sade’s Juliette is the protagonist’s remark that “man is in no wise Nature’s dependent,” but “her froth, her precipitated residue” (237). “Sadean nature, the dark hero of Sexual Personae,” says Paglia, “is the Dionysian or, the cthnonian . . . raw, brute earth-power” (“Cancelled” 105). In nature’s realm, humanity enjoys no favoured status, indeed is no more or less important than a plant.

     

    Acts are thus without any essential meaning or value–within nature’s operations, “marital sex is no different from rape” (Sexual 237). The result of this realization, Paglia explains, is that Sade, as a male steeped in Enlightenment reason, swerves away from this unpalatable truth of ‘mother’ nature, seen in the intricate sexual configurations of his libertines, with their emphasis on sodomy as a “rational protest against . . . procreative nature” (246). Foucault’s subtle remark regarding the “great, sparkling, mobile, and infinitely extendible configurations” in Sade (“Language” 61) finds its humourous echo in the very unsubtle Paglia: Sade’s libertines, she says

     

    swarm together in mutually exploitative units, then break apart into hostile atomies. Multiplication, addition, division: Sade perverts the Enlightenment's Apollonian mathematic. A schoolmaster's voice: if six valets discharge eight times each, how many valets does it take to . . .? (Sexual241)

     

    For Paglia, then, Sade’s perversion of the Apollonian structures–the organizing of “Dionysian experience into Apollonian patterns”–is of critical importance in the evolution of the fin de siecle decadence of the 1890’s which she champions (241). Sade’s characters, after being “plunged into Dionysian sewage” at the point of limit-experience, re-emerge as orgiastic “meat puppets” 2 in which “no mysteries or ambiguities” reside, these having been “emptied into the cold light of consciousness” (237). If sexual activity mirrors the chaos of true nature, Sade’s libertines proceed to render the act distinctly un-natural, each Dionysian transgression generating more Apollonian verbalizing (the de-structuralist spiral): “Learned disquisitions go on amid orgies” says Paglia, “as in Philosophy in the Bedroom, with its rapid seesaw between theory and praxis. . . . words generally sail on through ejaculation (239). Sadean sex and identity are not finally realized in the expression of the libertines’ internal, Dionysian “natural” urges, but in the Apollonian artifice of their own self-theatre or sexual personae, the “‘tableaux’ and ‘dramatic spectacles’ of interlaced bodies” of which both sadomasochism and aestheticism become a logical extension (242-3, 246-7). And it is Michel Foucault, writer of fictive histories, proponent of the experience-book, who takes enacts this Sadean imperative, turning theory into praxis and finally losing his life in the battle against nature.

     

    Decadence As Enlightenment: The Shiny, Empty Subject

     

    What is enlightenment? Aldous Huxley: “To be enlightened is to be aware, at all times, of total reality in its immanent otherness . . . and yet be in a condition to survive as an animal . . . to resort whenever expedient to systematic reasoning” (63). One foot in; one foot out, embodying a state of constant self creation/critique–what the Buddha called paranirvana–is the essence of de-structuralism. To know true nature and be able to live with this knowledge. Foucault, like the Buddha, finally determines that such a state cannot be reached through formulaic means; each person has to find his or her path to “enlightenment” (Miller 283). This does not mean, however, that he is against offering some general ideas re: ways to get there.

     

    In the latter stages of his career, Foucault becomes increasingly concerned with the second, reconstructive movement of transgression, moving beyond the final Nietzschean embrace of the Dionysian and its states of madness and dissolution, back toward a place where a transfigured form of living is possible. In “What Is An Author?,” published in 1969 3, Foucault concurs with the poststructuralist, Barthesian notion that heterotopic fiction, which dissociates and deconstructs the subject-self, has occasioned the death of the author. However, he points out, as with all acts of Dionysian transgression, the Apollonian ordering process quickly seals the gap left by the author’s disappearance: the empirical author may have died, but other control mechanisms fill the void. The author’s name, for instance, functions not like a proper name, but a “name-brand,” indicating not only ownership of the “branded” material, but a certain kind of discourse or product tied to it. And literary critics, aping the methods of Christian exegesis, also act as agents of control by subsuming contradictions, expelling “alien” texts, and generally ordering the disorderly body of the author’s works (105-13).

     

    In the 1979 revised text 4, Foucault adds some subtle closing remarks which hint at his blossoming interest in dandyism. “I seem to call for a form of culture in which fiction would not be limited by the figure of the author” he says. Such a notion is now seen as naive, however, as it discounts the second phase of the transgressive spiral: a pure state of unfettered Dionysiac bliss for textual and/or human bodies is now deemed “pure romanticism” (119) 5. The key, instead, is a transformation of the author-function:

     

    I think that, as our society changes . . . the author-function will disappear, and . . . that fiction . . . will once again function according to another mode, but still with a system of constraint--one which will no longer be the author, but which will have to be determined or, perhaps, experienced (my emphasis 119).

     

    This last statement is typical of the cagey Foucault, an easily glossed-over hint at his developing interest in an Apollonian praxis. What could he mean by this “experience” of the author-function?

     

    If we follow the thought-line of Camille Paglia, the answer gradually comes into focus. The subtitle of Sexual Personae is Art and Decadence from Nefertiti to Emily Dickinson, and to be sure, decadence for her represents the apex of modernity, the culmination of the Apollonian impulse underlying Western culture. For Paglia, decadent art, the logical extension of the total immersion in and subsequent swerve away from nature seen in Sade (ignored by early Romantics such as Wordsworth, with his benign Rousseauism), is embodied in the person of the dandy, who seeks to encompass both movements of the spiral by turning life into art, thereby de-forming and arresting its insidious, deleterious power:

     

    Romantic imagination broke through all limits. Decadence, burdened by freedom, invents harsh new limits, psychosexual and artistic. . . . Its nature theory follows Sade and Coleridge, who see nature's cruelty and excess. Art supplants nature. The objet d'art becomes the center of fetishistic connoisseurship. Person is transformed into beautiful thing, beyond the law. Decadence takes western sexual personae to their ultimate point of hardness and artificiality. It is. . . . an Apollonian raid on the Dionysian, the aggressive eye pinning and freezing nature's roiling objects. (389)

     

    Mark Edmundson points out that, for Paglia, the decadent sensibility is important because of its recognition that “giving up to nature means unconditionally surrendering to the erotic and destructive drives”–ritual and artifice frustrate nature’s grinding powers of decomposition (310). Paglia rightly locates French culture as the spawning ground for literary decadence, beginning with Balzac’s Sarrasine and then flowering in the works of Baudelaire and Huysmans, whose Against Nature is a virtual guide to decadent/aesthetic practice, and finally spreading to Britain in the person and writings of Oscar Wilde.

     

    Logically enough, considering how closely his work follows the Paglian genealogy toward decadence, Foucault finally makes a great effort to place himself within such a lineage, embracing the theories of Baudelaire via Greek ethics in the effort to seize control of the author-function and create a “beautiful life.” In 1983, for example, Foucault explains to Paul Rabinow, editor of The Foucault Reader, his interest in a Greek-influenced personal ethics “beyond the law,” marked by the Apollonian manipulation of the raw Dionysian matter of the self, divorced from the coercions of any external power. “The idea of the bios as a material for an aesthetic piece of art . . . fascinates me” he says. “The idea also that ethics can be a very strong structure of existence, without any relation with . . . an authoritarian system, with a disciplinary structure” (“Ethics” 348). The rules of the game called Art–or artifice–Foucault goes on to explain, must be rescued from the hands of the “experts” he vilifies in Discipline and Punish: “Why should the lamp or the house be an art object, but not our life?” he asks (350).

     

    It should come as no surprise that Camille Paglia propounds the decadent theories of Charles Baudelaire in Sexual Personae; it may, however, discomfit some Foucauldians to see their man doing exactly the same thing in one of his final published essays, “What is Enlightenment?,” which he requested occupy a central position in The Foucault Reader (Miller 332). For, as Paglia points out, Baudelaire is no humanist, no lover of his fellow man or (especially) woman–he equally rejects reformers and do-gooders” and “condemned Rousseauism in all its forms,” a stance enthusiastically shared by Paglia (Sexual 429). Baudelaire’s program of dandysme, especially as outlined in The Painter of Modern Life, is elitist and hierarchical, stressing the need for the artist/dandy to withdraw from society in order to begin the work of self-authorship. Nature is not even granted the status given it by Sade; for Baudelaire it is a virus which threatens the stability of the self-artifact. The Baudelairean dandy thus fulfills Paglia’s “first principle of decadent art”: the (re)creation of the self as a “manufactured object” (391). This use of civilizing power against civilization is deemed a “daemonization of the Apollonian” (489-511).

     

    Baudelaire’s theories find artistic praxis in Joris-Karl Huysmans’ novel Against Nature, whose protagonist, Des Esseintes, remarks that “Nature . . . has had her day. . . . the old crone has by now exhausted the good-humoured admiration of all true artists, and the time has surely come for artifice to take her place whenever possible” (37). Des Esseintes’ rejects the “visible” world of nature for an “articulable,” aesthetic environment: he idolizes Sade and Baudelaire. Huysmans’s depiction here of Baudelaire’s journey through the Dionysiac and (re)emergence as an emptied Apollonian exteriority is acute:

     

    Literature, in fact, had been concerned with virtues and vices of a perfectly healthy sort, the regular functioning of brains of a normal conformation, the practical reality of current ideas, with never a thought for morbid depravities and other-worldly aspirations. . . . Baudelaire had gone further; he had descended to the bottom of the inexhaustible mine. . . . There, near the breeding ground of intellectual aberrations and diseases of the mind--the mystical tetanus, the burning fever of lust, the typhoids and yellow fevers of crime--he had found . . . ennui, the frightening climacteric of thoughts and emotions. He had laid bare the morbid psychology of the mind that had reached the October of its sensations . . . he had shown how blight affects the emotions at a time when the enthusiasms and beliefs of youth have drained away, and nothing remains but the barren memory of hardships, tyranny and slights, suffered at the behest of a despotic and freakish fate. (146)

     

    Past the petty concerns of a stultifying humanism, Baudelaire had plunged headlong into the Dionysian, exhausting its seemingly limitless excitations, emerging purged of all that might have previously been considered “essential” or “natural”: he “had succeeded in expressing the inexpressible,” knowledge gleaned from the limits of experience (Huysmans 148). And it should be pointed out that this knowledge, leading to the rejection of nature, leads also to the rejection of the female gender. “Woman is the opposite of the dandy. Therefore she must inspire horror” writes Baudelaire. “Woman is natural, that is to say abominable” (qtd in Sexual430). Likewise, Des Esseintes suffers a nightmarish vision of woman as mother-nature trying to devour him (105-6) and indulges in affairs with a “mannish” woman and a schoolboy (110-117).

     

    As Foucault points out in “The Right of Death and Power Over Life,” if Sade had shown “man” to nothing more than a meat puppet which had mutated out of the ‘non-place’ of nature, “subject to . . . no other law but its own,” he, as well as Bataille, had failed to complete the spiral back into the Apollonian, a movement crucial for the critique of our present episteme. They, as well as Nietzsche, with his cry “I, the last disciple of Dionysus” at the conclusion of Twilight Of The Idols (110), remain semi-immersed in deadly Dionysian nature, the “society of blood” characteristic of the pre-Enlightenment age (148-50). As a result, though “subversive,” they provide no definitive answers for the problem of an ultra-Apollonian, post-Enlightenment power which seeks to produce subjects so to “normalize” and control them: “a power bent on generating forces, making them grow, and ordering them, rather than . . . destroying them” (136). In “What Is Enlightenment?” (in part a strong reading of Kant’s essay of the same name), Foucault credits Baudelaire and his disciples for bringing the line of thinking begun by Sade to fruition, addressing this contemporary problematic by using “man” as the raw material for an artistic elaboration, for the production of personae, remaking the meat puppet as manufactured object. Typically, Foucault skirts the nature-female issue even as he embraces it, though he does briefly cite Baudelaire’s abhorrence of “vulgar, earthy, vile nature” as a touchstone 6 (41).

     

    For Foucault, Baudelaire’s modern ethos, or “limit-attitude,” encompasses both movements of the transgressive spiral, “beyond the inside-outside alternative” (“Enlightenment” 45). As we saw in Huxley, enlightenment entails a constant awareness of the Dionysian whilst mastering the Apollonian. Just as the dissociated flux of the visible is continually transfigured, framed, and articulated by the decadent artist (as in the experience-book), the body’s ‘perpetual disintegration’ is transfigured through this same ritual application of Apollonian lines, an “ascetic elaboration of the self” which again connects the Foucauldian quest to the operations of mysticism (42). Deleuze identifies this action as a “folding” of outside power relations “to create a doubling, allow a relation to oneself to emerge, and constitute an inside which is hollowed out and develops its unique dimension” (100). This seizure of power “is what the Greeks did: they folded force [and] made it relate back to itself. Far from ignoring interiority, individuality, or subjectivity they invented the subject [and] discovered the ‘aesthetic existence’.” Deleuze cannot overstress the importance of this “fundamental idea” underlying Foucault’s work, that of a “dimension of subjectivity derived from power and knowledge without being dependent on them” (101).

     

    This “seizing of bio-power” over one’s self, then, is the “experience of the author-function” Foucault hints at in the revised “What Is An Author?,” and represents his departure from the thought of his oft-quoted mentors, Sade, Nietzsche, and Bataille. It also goes very much against the grain of the thinking which characterizes present-day North American society: the cult of confession and the clamouring of “victims” of various kinds for equality on Donahue and Oprah (which Foucault sneeringly alludes to as “the Californian cult of the self”) are “diametrically opposed” to dandyism, which stresses creation, not confession (“Ethics” 362). Foucauldian enlightenment thus stands “in a state of tension” with humanism” (“Enlightenment” 44). The Apollonian dandy actually seeks to marginalize him or her self, and rejects any attempts to uncover the soul, which is already known to contain the void. “Modern man,” says Foucault, “is not the man who goes off to discover himself, his secrets and his hidden truth; he is the man who tries to invent himself”. And, he adds ominously, this endeavour has no “place in society itself, or in the body politic,” but can only be “produced in another, a different place, which Baudelaire calls art” (42).

     

    For both Paglia and Foucault, decadence/dandyism constitutes an ironic reversal: it deploys the ultra-Apollonianism of the modern epoch against itself, substituting art-worlds for “real” worlds. The ordering process that subjects bodies is instead used to liberate them through self-creation and containment. Bodies produce not more malleable bodies measured by their use-value in the service of power, but impenetrable, beautifully “useless” art objects–a sterile productivity. Paglia on Sarrasine:

     

    Balzac frustrates sex by deforming nature. Sarrasine reviles Zambinella: "Monster! You who can give birth to nothing!". . . . [but] Zambinella is the first decadent art object. The transsexual castrato is an artificial sex, product of biology manipulated for art. Zambinella does give birth--to other art objects. First is Sarrasine's statue of him/her; then a marble copy commissioned by the cardinal. . . . The sterile castrato, propagating itself through other art works, is an example of my technological androgyne, the manufactured object [who] teems with inorganic seed. (Sexual 391)

     

    Dandyism And Beyond: The Order Of Death

     

    Through the seizure of power on a microcosmic level, dandyism points the way toward new and different modes of being. Here in our own postmodern fin de siecle, in opposition to both humanism and the thriving “Californian Cult of the self,” the decadent impulse has mutated into new and interesting forms. For novelist Kathy Acker (herself a Foucauldian), this has entailed inhabiting the traditionally “male” realms of bodybuilding and tattoo art in the attempt to de-naturalize and “textualize” the body, thereby “seiz(ing) control over the sign-systems through which people ‘read’ her”–the self as counter-discourse. (McCaffery 72). Likewise, the currently flourishing “cyberpunk” movement finds its basis in “the impulse to invent a hyperreality and then live there” (Porush 331). For Foucault, the decadent impulse leads to the “theatre” of gay sadomasochism, which he sees as “a kind of creation, a creative enterprise” in which the body’s biological sexuality can be subverted or “desexualized.” Playing his role against nature to the hilt, Foucault denies that these practices disclose “S/M tendencies deep within the unconscious” but are the “invention” of “new possibilities of pleasure” (Miller 263).

     

    It is doubtful that Foucault really believed this. When Deleuze speaks of dandyism as a state where “one becomes, relatively speaking, a master of one’s molecules” (123), he makes an important qualification. As an advocate of the doctrines of Decadence, Foucault must have surely been aware of another theme inextricably tied to it: the inevitable victory of nature. In the work of Baudelaire, of Huysmans, and in Wilde’s The Picture of Dorian Gray, the scenario is the same: “the self as an artificial enclave. . . which nature secretly enters and disorders” (Sexual 421). The fate of the dandy is most brilliantly critiqued in Huysmans’s novel in the grotesque episode where Des Esseintes acquires a large tortoise and attempts to turn into an objet d’art, painting it gold and encrusting it with jewels. To his consternation, the turtle dies, “unable to bear the dazzling luxury imposed upon it” (62). Later, while sampling his many perfumes, Des Esseintes is overcome by nausea: “discrimination collapses back into nondifferentiation” Paglia notes, and “all the aesthete’s exotic fragrances begin to smell disgustingly alike,” this being the scent of death (Sexual 435). Residing astride the line between Apollo and Dionysus, the enclosed or folded subject risks implosion back into the immanent realm. “It all comes down to syphilis in the end” says Des Esseintes (Huysmans 101), who is finally forced to leave his artificial paradise and return to the world to quite literally save his life.

     

    It was, of course, not syphilis, but AIDS, the postmodern plague, which facilitated nature’s revenge upon Foucault. And when Paglia, in her anti-poststructuralist mode, derisorily remarks that “Foucault was struck down by the elemental force he repressed and edited out of his system” she is absolutely correct (“Junk” 241). But her criticism of him for this implies that, unlike those Decadents she praises in Sexual Personae, Foucault somehow had no idea what he was doing, or what the stakes were. Paglia is being duplicitous if she seriously intends to make such an argument. Her valorization of the gay male, the Sadean sadomasochist, and all those Decadents whose swerve from procreative, liquid nature results in the “world of glittering art objects” found in Western culture should include the embrace of the life and work of Foucault, who, as the evidence shows, knew exactly what he was doing. As Deleuze says, “few men more than Foucault died in a way commensurate with their conception of death” (95). In her zeal to tar all post-structuralists with the same brush, Paglia, so commendable in many other ways and the recipient of a great deal of unfair criticism herself, does a great disservice to Foucault.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See “Bringing Out Michel Foucault” by David Halperin in Salmagundi 97, Winter 1993.

     

    2. The term “meat puppets” is cyberpunk jargon, and is borrowed here from Larry McCaffery’s interview with Kathy Acker, where McCaffery comments that Sade is “using the tools of rationality to reveal what we really are–meat puppets governed by the reality of bodily functions” (76).

     

    3. In Language, Counter-Memory, Practice, 113-138.

     

    4. In The Foucault Reader, 101-120, and in Textual Strategies: Perspectives in Post-Structuralist Criticism, 141-160. Josue V. Harari sees this second version of the essay as marking a shift in emphasis “crucial to an understanding of Foucault’s work” (43); James Miller notes that Foucault’s increasing emphasis on Apollonian power/order occasioned a split with the more Dionysian-oriented Deleuze (287-298).

     

    5. Paglia’s contention that Foucault’s obsession with power was occasioned by the failure of May, 1968, student and worker revolt in Paris is partially correct (“Junk” 216), but as seen in earlier essays such as “Preface To Transgression” Foucault had always been aware of the inevitable nature of the Apollonian: the nature of the transgressive spiral is such that “no simple infraction” can exhaust it; incursions into the Dionysian are always quickly bound in again by order (35).

     

    6. In his otherwise unremarkable new biography of Foucault, David Macey makes two observations crucial for this paper: (1) Foucault, Macey explains, was known for “vehement declarations of his loathing of ‘nature’,” going so far as to turn his back on sunsets to make his point! (60); (2) Foucault also is characterized by some (though not all) of his friends as a misogynist, a side he apparently showed rather selectively (xiv, 55, 455). Both of these points make sense when Foucault is placed in the line of the Baudelairean dandy so admired by Paglia.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Acker, Kathy. “Reading The Body.” Mondo 2000. By Larry McCaffery. Issue No.4, 1991. 72-77.
    • Bove, Paul. Foreword. “The Foucault Phenomenon: the Problematics of Style.” Foucault. By Gilles Deleuze. Trans. and Ed. Sean Hand. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1986. vii-xl.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Foucault. Trans. and Ed. Sean Hand. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1986.
    • During, Simon. Foucault And Literature: Towards A Genealogy of Writing. New York: Routledge, 1992.
    • Edmundson, Mark. “Art and Eros.” The Nation, New York, Vol 250, No. 25, June 25, 1990. 897-99. Rpt. in Contemporary Literary CriticismVol. 68. Ed. Roger Matuz. 309-311.
    • Foucault, Michel. The Archaeology of Knowledge & The Discourse On Language. Trans. A. M. Sheridan Smith. New York: Pantheon Books, 1972.
    • —. Discipline & Punish: The Birth of the Prison. Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: Vintage Books, 1979.
    • —. “Language to Infinity.” Language, Counter-Memory, Practice. Trans. Donald F. Bouchard and Sherry Simon. Ed. Donald F. Bouchard. New York: Cornell UP, 1977. 53-67.
    • —. Madness and Civilization: A History of Insanity in the Age of Reason. Trans. Richard Howard. New York: Vintage Books, 1988
    • —. “Nietzsche, Genealogy, History.” The Foucault Reader. Ed. Paul Rabinow. New York: Pantheon Books, 1984. 76-100.
    • —. The Order Of Things. Ed. R. D. Laing. New York: Tavistock/Routledge, 1989.
    • —. “On the Genealogy of Ethics.” The Foucault Reader. By Paul Rabinow. 340-372.
    • —. “A Preface to Transgression.” Language, Counter-Memory, Practice. 29-52.
    • —. Remarks On Marx. Trans. R. James Goldstein and James Cascaito. New York: Semiotext(e), 1991.
    • —. “Revolutionary Action: Until Now.” Language, Counter-Memory, Practice. 218-234.
    • —. “Right of Death and Power over Life.” The History of Sexuality, Vol. 1. New York: Vintage Books, 1980.
    • —. “Space, Knowledge, and Power.” The Foucault Reader. Trans. Christian Hubert. 239-256.
    • —. “Theatrum Philosophicum.” Language, Counter-Memory, Practice. 165-198.
    • —. “What Is An Author? (1)” Language, Counter-Memory,Practice. 113-138.
    • —. “What Is An Author? (2)” The Foucault Reader. 101-120. Also in Textual Strategies: Perspectives in Post-Structuralist Criticism. Ed. Josue V. Harari. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1979. 141-160.
    • —. “What is Enlightenment?” The Foucault Reader Trans. Catherine Porter. 32-50.
    • Harari, Josue V. “Critical Factions/Critical Fictions.” Textual Strategies: Perspectives in Post-Structuralist Criticism. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1979. 17-72.
    • Hollingdale, R.J. Appendices H. Twilight of the Idols and The Anti-Christ. By Friedrich Nietzsche. New York: Penguin, 1978.
    • Huxley, Aldous. The Doors of Perception and Heaven and Hell. Toronto: Granada Publishing, 1984.
    • Huysmans, Joris-Karl. Against Nature. Trans. Robert Baldick. New York: Penguin, 1959.
    • Macey, David. The Many Lives of Michel Foucault. London: Random House, 1993.
    • Miller, James. The Passion of Michel Foucault. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1993.
    • Nietzsche, Friedrich. The Birth of Tragedy and The Genealogy of Morals. Trans Francis Golffing. New York: Doubleday, 1956.
    • Nietzsche, Friedrich. Twilight of the Idols and The Anti-Christ. Trans. R.J. Hollingdale. New York: Penguin, 1978.
    • Paglia, Camille. Sexual Personae: Art and Decadence from Nefertiti to Emily Dickinson. New York: Vintage Books, 1991.
    • —. “East and West: An Experiment In Multiculturalism.” Sex, Art, and American Culture. New York: Vintage Books, 1992. 136-169.
    • —. “Junk Bonds and Corporate Raiders: Academe in the Hour of the Wolf.” Sex, Art, and American Culture. 170-248.
    • —. “Sexual Personae: The Cancelled Preface.” Sex, Art and American Culture. 101-124.
    • Porush, David. “Frothing the Synaptic Bath.” Storming the Reality Studio: A Casebook of Cyberpunk and Postmodern Fiction. Ed. Larry McCaffery. Durham: Duke UP, 1991. 331-333.
    • Sade, Marquis De. Justine. The Olympia Reader. Ed. Maurice Girodias. New York: Quality Paperbacks/Grove Press, 1965. 407-448.
    • White, Hayden. “Michel Foucault.” Structuralism and Since. Ed. John Sturrock. New York: Oxford UP, 1979.

     

  • ‘Round Dusk: Kojève at “The End”

    Allan Stoekl

    Departments of French
    and Comparative Literature
    Pennsylvania State University

     

    The postmodern moment has been characterized as one of the loss of legitimacy of the master narratives–social, historical, political; Hegelian, Marxist, Fascist–by which lives were ordered and sacrificed throughout the nineteenth and twentieth centuries.1

     

    The demise of the great story, which gave direction and purpose to struggle and violence, has opened a space for a proliferation of conflicting modes of interpreting and speaking. Of course those modes can only be partial: they can never aspire to the horrifying totalization promoted by overarching certainties. And they will likely interfere with each other, cross over, meld and (self) contradict, because the possibility of their autonomy has been given up; at best we can say that they are “language games” now, rules for representation, argument, and analysis; no longer are they the ground of teleology, satisfaction, and self-certainty.

     

    But there is a problem with this kind of argument, as I see it. It’s not that I do not find it “true,” because of some kind of empirical counter-evidence, such as: the old nationalist narratives still hold sway; history is still slouching toward a goal; history isn’t slouching toward a goal, but it is nevertheless still slouching, etc. One can probably develop all sorts of arguments based on empirical observation concerning the postmodern. Or one can just as easily “deconstruct” the master stories from within, by taking them apart while still, necessarily, acting in full complicity with them (for what “space” could be said to open beyond their margins?). The problem, as I see it, is that this kind of argument is closely tied to the “end of history” arguments that were current in the immediate postwar period, and that have recently had a renewed but highly contested efflorescence.2 This is of course immensely ironic, because philosophers such as Lyotard–spokespersons of the postmodern–have informed us that the possibility of a larger teleology is lost for good, along with the knowledge that flowed from it. But there still is a larger knowledge, after all–the one that proclaims the death of the possibility of a larger knowledge. Whether arrived at empirically or logically, this awareness comes at the end of a series of historical actions and tragedies, and the certainty associated with it is no doubt due to lessons derived from those failures. This history will still have the form of a narrative, albeit one that lacks, perhaps, the power of retrospective justification that characterized the Hegelian model. Its lessons might be purely practical, or they might be derived from a study of the incoherences or contradictions of the earlier paradigms. The net result, whatever the means of their determination, development and (self) cancelling, will be a generally valid knowledge that mandates the end of generally valid knowledges. The language games that proliferate, then, in a postmodern epoch will be allowed and encouraged to do so only because the way has been opened by yet another master narrative: the narrative of the end of narratives. The freedom to be enjoyed by the games is the result of the master story’s knowledge–but, to be sure, the games’ actions, their orientations, will not be determined by it. They will be independent of it–but the preservation of their semi-autonomous functioning is nevertheless the goal of a postmodern theoretical project (such as one that affirms adjudication between different, conflicting, games). Further, it is their guarantee that they will participate in a stable postmodern order: without the postmodern narrative and its powers of harmonization, they would risk falling into particularist discourses into which “nationalist” ideologies are prone.

     

    Is this postmodern version of things that different from a theory of the “end of history” that envisages a State founded on the mutual recognition of free subjects? On the surface, yes: the postmodern view concerns itself not with subjectivity, consciousness as productive labor, and the like, but on the recognition of difference between partial discourses and “constructed” cultures. The posthistorical model seems almost quaint with its emphasis on codified law and the State as guarantor of a freedom identifiable with labor and construction. But beyond these evident differences there may be a more fundamental similarity.

     

    Just as the postmodern presents language games as independent of transcendent social reason, so too the posthistorical imagines the moment of the ultimate end of history as a kind of definitive break, after which life will go on, but in which unidirectional history will be supplanted by “playful” activities that may be enjoyable in themselves, but that will by necessity not be recuperable in any larger social or historical scheme. The State at the end of history will be as unconcerned with these ludic activities–sports, arts, love making, and so on–as the postmodern regime will be with justifying the logic of the language games of what we would call the cultures, subcultures, and micro-cultures whose disputes would be subject to its acts of arbitration.3

     

    On the surface of it at least, Alexandre Kojève’s take on Hegel in his Introduction to the Reading of Hegel can be seen as being not an attempt at the ultimate vindication of a “grand” historical and philosophical narrative–the triumph of the end of history and the univocal (self) satisfaction of the entire population of the earth–but instead the surprising mutation of that certainty, that knowledge, into a postmodern generation of discourses and styles.4 History as narrative triumphs, but it also ends: its termination is the opening for the proliferation of poses and play that is literally post modern. Rather than contradicting Kojève, then, or demonstrating the extent to which a Hegelian modernism is null and void, a rigorous postmodern might see itself as deriving from a completion and fulfillment of a dialectical project. It might.

     

    The postmodern, we could argue, has already come part of the way. It has posited a knowledge–the authority of its own text–that in spite of itself stands as a knowledge at the end of a long history of illusions. It takes itself as a stranger to, and grave digger for, the Hegelian tradition. Kojève, on the other hand, at least recognizes the inescapability, the inevitability, of the univocal truth of his own system. But he is blind to the consequences of the termination of history: the proliferation of signs and acts that, by their very nature as partial constructions, challenge the totalizing power of the Concept.

     

    To get any further we will have to look at certain key passages of Kojève’s Introduction. Most often in footnotes and asides, he grapples with the really crucial questions: what does it mean for “Man” to “die”? What will come “after” the end of history? If “Man” is dead, what will remain of human labor? What will be the status of the “Book” in which Knowledge resides? The answers to these questions will enable us to consider in more detail the problem of the relation been posthistory and the postmodern.

     

    According to most historians of French philosophy of the twentieth century, it was Kojève who single-handedly popularized Hegel in France, through a brilliant series of lectures in the 1930s. After decades of idealist neo-Kantianism, the Hegel that Kojève preferred was a welcome change: History could now be seen as a dialectical progression in which Man ineluctably moves toward a social satisfaction in which the desire for recognition–and the recognition of the other’s desire for recognition–is fulfilled. The posthistorical State alone is capable of recognizing Man for what he is: beyond all superstition, all theology, Man is the creative/destructive agent whose labor ends in the recognition of all by all through the mediation of the State. The labor of Hegel’s slave, its destructive and formative action, “transforms” “natural given being”: Man is the “Time that annihilates [nature]” (158). But in the end all transformative labor ceases. History comes to an end because, eventually at least, the labor leading to full reciprocal recognition will have been carried out: at the end of history, there will be nothing new to accomplish.

     

    Now the end of history for Kojève is the ultimate ideological weapon because it justifies, retrospectively, just about anything that went before that made its arrival possible. Man for Kojève is a type: the Master, the Slave, the Philosopher, and, at the end, the impersonal Hegel (and his reader, Kojève), that is, the Wise Man (le Sage). The negativity that made the arrival of the end possible will, in retrospect, be judged moral, no matter how it seemed at the time. And since Man himself is defined as temporality and negation (IRH 160), even the bloodiest violence or the grossest injustice, if necessary for the eventual completion, will be (or will have been) good.

     

    The true moral judgments are those borne by the State (moral=legal); States themselves are judged by universal history. But for these judgments to have a meaning, History must be completed. And Napoleon and Hegel end history. That is why Hegel can judge States and individuals. The “good” is everything that has made possible Hegel, in other words the formation of the universal Napoleonic Empire (it is 1807!) which is “understood” by Hegel (in and through the Phenomenology).

     

    What is good is what exists, the extent that it exists. All action, since it negates existing givens, is thus bad: a sin. But sin can be pardoned. How? Through its success. Success absolves crime, because success–is a new reality that exists. But how to judge success? For that, History has to be completed. Then one can see what is maintained in existence: definitive reality. (ILH, 95)

     

    This is the “ruse of reason”: reason acting in and through History reaches its end in ways that might seem to have nothing to do with accepted (“Christian”) morality. Certainly anyone attempting to judge the morality or immorality of events before the end of history will be incapable of it; only with Hegel (and Kojève) will the true value and morality of actions be evident. Not only do the ends always justify the means, but they do so retroactively, so that agents (“people”) will never be competent to judge the acceptability of their own behavior. The “Owl of Minerva flies at dusk,” to use a Hegelian formulation: only when the outcome is final and its corresponding overview are grasped can all preceding events be fully known.5

     

    But in a way all this is irrelevant: since history for Kojève is already ended, everything that takes place now is a purely technical “catching up” process. The end of History was achieved at the battle of Jena: Napoleon’s conquering forces brought the egalitarian ideals of the French revolution, codified and implemented by the State, to others. From now on History will only be a series of lesser battles of Jena, leading to the implementation throughout the world, by bureaucratic governments, of rights and liberties. What at first might seem to be the ultimate 1930s justification of ruthlessness at any cost (indeed Stalin comes to replace Napoleon for Kojève in the pre-World War II period) leads inevitably, in the late 40s and 50s, to a recognition that the difference between ideologies is largely irrelevant. How one arrives at the “classless” society, the society of the mutual recognition of the desire for recognition, is of no interest to the “Wise Man”: it is a purely technical question. The seemingly great postwar problem of the conflict of ideologies, or the question of the defense of Soviet ideology in the face of American pressure (Merleau-Ponty, Humanisme et terreur, Sartre, Les Communistes et la paix) simply does not exist for Kojève. The end of history is the end of ideology. In a “Note to the Second Edition” of the Introduction to the Reading of Hegel, inserted in 1959, Kojève states: “One can even say that, from a certain point of view, the United States has already attained the final stage of Marxist “communism,” seeing that, practically, all the members of the “classless society” can from now on appropriate for themselves everything that seems good to them, without thereby working any more than their heart dictates” (IRH, 161, note).

     

    Ideology, in the end, is thus utterly unimportant: it too fades away once history is at an end. If it contributes or has contributed to that end it is good, if not bad. Like all means it is justified by the end, but at the end it has no specificity other than its “success.” From the perspective of the end, all bloody action is over: it can be judged, but it no longer is effective. In time and as time Man is free to act, but he does not know; at the end of Time, History is known, but Man can no longer act (he has nothing more to do)–hence he no longer even exists. At the end, there are no longer even any means to be justified. History and its ideologies are a matter of utter indifference.

     

    This leaves an enormous question, one typical of the 1950s. The completion of history is perfectly ahistorical, but ahistory itself is a function of history. True, we are now delivered from history, action, and all the hard–and ambiguous–moral questions. The machine of history has functioned so well that it has erased itself: its mechanism was the unfolding of Truth, but now that we are in the definitive era of Truth, History has ceased to exist, and its moral conundrums are irrelevant. At the end of history, ideology is finished, and so ceases to exist: but “Man” therefore no longer exists either.

     

    The Selbst–that is, Man properly so-called or the free Individual, is Time and Time is History, and only History. . . . And Man is essentially Negativity, for Time is Becoming–that is, the annihilation of Being or Space. Therefore Man is a Nothingness that nihilates and that preserves itself in (spatial) Being only by negating being, this Negation being Action Now, if Man is Negativity,–that is, Time–he is not eternal. He is born and he dies as Man. He is ‘das Negativ seiner selbst,’ Hegel says. And we know what that means: Man overcomes himself as Action (or Selbst) by ceasing to oppose himself to the World, after creating in it the universal and homogeneous State; or to put it otherwise, on the cognitive level: Man overcomes himself as Error (or “Subject” opposed to the Object) after creating the Truth of “Science” (IRH, 160; emphasis in original).

     

    Man dies at this strange juncture point between History and the End (in both senses of the word) of History. In the future, after the end, Kojève tells us that “life is purely biological” (ILH, 387). But this is a, and perhaps the, crucial question for Kojève: if history stops, if Man and Time and negating labor is dead, how then is Man any different from the animals? He had originally constituted himself against Nature (“But Man, once constituted in his human specificity, opposes himself to Nature”); nature for Kojève is timeless and can in no way be incorporated in the dialectic. No “dialectics of nature” can therefore be conceived within the Kojèvian reading of Hegel. 6 But if man is an animal, History itself is not so much completed as dead. It will be–or is now, since History is already ended, in principle at least–as if History had never existed.

     

    Kojève presents two approaches to this problem in the long footnote to his interpretation of Chapter VIII of the Phenomenology (IRH, 158-62), a passage of which I have already cited. First he states that Man indeed is an animal, but a happy one, “in harmony with Nature or given Being.” True, he no longer can engage in productive Historical activity, “Action negating the given, . . . the Subject opposed to the Object.” But he has plenty of other consolations: “art, love, play, etc. etc.–in short, everything that makes man happy” (IRH, 159). This is a “world of freedom” in which men “no longer fight, and work as little as possible.”

     

    It sounds almost too good to be true: the world itself is transformed into a vast, postmodern Southern California, its inhabitants concerned above all with training their bodies and trading their automobiles and art objects. It is here that one recognizes with a start the perfect transformation of a Hegelian modernism into an anti-Hegelian, but soft, postmodernism: at the End of History History is replaced with a heterogeneous collection of lifestyle choices. Indeed we learn, in the footnote added to the second edition of 1959, that Kojève had earlier (in the immediate postwar period, “1948-58”) seen the “American way of life” as the true posthistorical regime–although he also saw the Soviet Union and the Chinese Communists as nothing other than “still poor Americans” (IRH, 161). The only larger coherence is a general lack of coherence: one is free to cultivate one’s own interests and ignore the larger movement by which all personal activities are justified. The new human animals will “recognize one another without reservation,” but this recognition will be of the right of each one to be completely different, in what promise to be mainly physical pursuits.

     

    In a second footnote added in 1959 (the first dates from 1946), Kojève objects to his own theory. Reading his earlier note quite literally, he argues that if all Action is eliminated from Human life, Man will actually be not an American, but an animal:

     

    “If Man becomes an animal again, his acts, his loves, and his play must also become purely ‘natural’ again. Hence it would have to be admitted that after the end of History, men would construct their edifices and works of art as birds build their nests and spiders spin their webs. . . . ‘The definitive annihilation of Man properly so-called‘ also means the definitive disappearance of human Discourse (Logos) in the strict sense. Animals of the species Homo sapiens would react by conditioned reflexes to vocal signals or sign ‘language,’ and thus their so-called ‘discourses’ would be like what is supposed to be the ‘language’ of bees. What would disappear, then, is not only Philosophy or the search for discursive Wisdom, but also that Wisdom itself.” (IRH, 159-60; emphasis in original)

     

    The posthistorical, in other words, must be saved from any threat of animality–that is, of purely unreflected-upon behavior. Kojève does not really consider the consequences of “art, love, play, etc. etc.” because, fortunately, he has another example of activity “after the end of History.” This is, surprisingly enough, Japan: the “American way of life” is now replaced by a model of Japanese culture that has been “at the End of History” “for almost three centuries.” While “American” posthistory is associated with sheer animality, Japanese culture is seen by Kojève as a pure formalism. Unlike the animal, Man continues to be a “Subject opposed to the Object,” although “action” and “Time” have ceased. Forms are opposed to one another, and values themselves come to be “totally formalized“–the Japanese tea ceremony, Noh theatre, even the suicide of the Kamikaze pilot represent an opposition to the Object that, while empty, nevertheless continues to be an opposition: Man is now a snob. It is as if the armature of labor, negation and Historical activity continues to function, but in a void, since there can no longer be any negating or any History.

     

    In this model, “Opposition” continues, and so Man does too. The difference between the two versions (that of ’46 and that of ’59) lies in the fact that while the first proposes an activity that can be purely individual, so long as it is in accord with nature, the second, “Japanese,” entails a struggle for recognition, and therefore derives its power from the earlier, and decisive, Master-Slave dialectic. After all, the purpose of snobbery, of dandyism, is to be recognized by the Other, even if that recognition is totally meaningless. Thus a society is implied, and a culture; this was not the case, finally, for the “animals,” no matter what their “way of life” might have been.

     

    But the larger posthistorical culture–if such a thing can even be written of–will be unthinkable because Absolute Knowing will play no part in it. Kojève inadvertently indicates the irrelevance of the Wise Man–of reflexive consciousness at the end of History–by choosing the example of the Japanese: if they were carrying out posthistorical acts one hundred years before the birth of Hegel, Hegel and his book, and Kojève in their wake, need never have existed. History culminates in perfect indifference to Wisdom. From the other side of the end of History, it now appears clear that the Phenomenology is perfectly pointless. Purely formal activities therefore will take place, and will have meanings, perhaps, within certain posthistorical cultures; those cultures, however, will exist in perfect isolation, without a larger Wisdom to unify them and give them meaning. Here, then, is yet another Kojèvian postmodernism, this time one based not on the particularity of desires but on the multiplicity and radical non-congruence of separate cultures. Absolute knowing finds its completion in a series of social practices or lifestyles which are united only in the fact that as formal activities each one is precisely a lack of knowledge of the whole. The snob’s gesture is a forgetting, willful or not, of the larger significance–or insignificance–of his or her act. Its success can be judged only by its immediate impact: the dandy walking his lobster on a leash can bask only in the recognition given here and now. The act excludes any larger “meaning.”

     

    How then, under these circumstances, can one say that History is ended? It does not seem that, if the Japanese (as represented by Kojève) are to be our models, there can be any history or historical consciousness at all. Elsewhere–in passages and footnotes dating from the original (1947) publication of Introduction la lecture de Hegel–it seems that Kojève himself recognized the necessity of historical memory and historical text–and thus of the writing of the Phenomenology itself–for the ultimate completion of History. A few pages after the footnote that I have discussed, Kojève writes: “It is first necessary that real History be completed; next, it must be narrated to Man; and only then can the Philosopher, becoming a Wise Man, understand it by reconstructing it a priori in the Phenomenology” (IRH, 166). Kojève adds in a footnote appended to this passage (more precisely, to the phrase that ends “narrated to Man”): “Moreover, there is no real history without historical memory–that is, without oral or written Memoirs.”

     

    Here we are back at our earlier problem: if the Japanese constitute an ahistorical end of history, a posthistorical moment that has nothing to do with history, how can they be said to be Human? If Man is determined in and through history, then it would seem that the Japanese, in their sophisticated and useless labor, are no more Human than are the bee-like posthistorical animals that Kojève in 1959 saw as implicit in his earlier footnote (of 1946), and rejected. The Natural–the realm of the inhuman that, for Kojève at least, simply had nothing to do with Human activity, Time, or History–seems to triumph once again. In the case of the simple human-animals we might say that the Owl of Minerva flew, but that its flight seen from a posthistorical perspective was the equivalent of the movement of any other animal, the Owl of Minerva being no different from any owl–no matter how endangered–in the forest. For the Kojèvian Japanese, however, and for all the rest of us who will necessarily emulate them, the Owl of Minerva need never have flown in the first place. Perhaps it did, perhaps it didn’t; in any case it is now stuffed and resides in a European museum, where it is routinely photographed by hurried groups of Japanese tourists.

     

    What, finally, is the status of the Book–the Phenomenology itself as a summation of History and embodiment of Wisdom–at the end of History? This is perhaps the most important question in Kojève’s Hegelianism, and, characteristically, he never poses it explicitly; instead, we must try to formulate an answer on the basis of two elliptic and ironic footnotes. Yet, as we will see, the status of “Self-Consciousness” at and after the end of History will remain very much in question.

     

    The first question, which arises in Kojève’s discussion of the third part of Chapter VIII of the Phenomenology, is the role of the Wise Man, the post-philosopher (or Sage), in the establishment of the posthistorical regime. At one point Kojève writes: “One can say . . . that, in and by the Wise Man (who produces absolute Science, the Science that entirely reveals the totality of Being), Spirit ‘attains or wins the Concept’” (ILH, 413). He soon modifies this, though, in a footnote (ILH, 414). If the Wise Man–Hegel, Kojève, the “authors” of the Phenomenology–are those who “produce” Science, the true end of History and reign of Self-Consciousness will be possible only when mediated by the State. The State, in effect, will guarantee the recognition of the freedom of all by all; the satisfaction it provides will do away with all opposition between Subject and Object, for-itself and in-itself. This clearly implies more than the personal teaching of a single person: rather what is at stake now is the universalization of a definitive doctrine contained in a book. Kojève writes:

     

    To turn out to be true, philosophy must be universally recognized, in other words recognized finally by the universal and homogeneous State. The empirical-existence (Dasein) of Science–is thus not the private thought of the Wise Man, but his words [sa parole], universally recognized. And it is obvious that this “recognition” can only be obtained through the publication of a book. And by existing in the form of a book, Science is effectively detached from its author, in other words from the Wise Man or from Man [du Sage ou de l’Homme]. (ILH, 414)

     

    This is a passage fraught with difficulties, but one that is well worth considering. It is recognition, first of all, that determines truth; the truth of the book is determined by its recognition by the State. The book consists of the words–or literally, the word–of the author, but the book itself, on publication, is detached not only from the Wise Man, but from Man himself. The detachment and recognition of the book is the determination of its truth–which in turn guarantees the universality and homogeneity of the State. The book is detached from Man himself; presumably at this point Man has nothing more to do, and passes from the scene (as we will see in yet another footnote, discussed below).

     

    But note that the “private thought” of the Wise Man is not at stake here. Rather his words are recognized, and this makes them “true”; the same gesture by the State–recognition–makes it a State. Truth and Statehood are generated reciprocally, at the same instant, by the same act.

     

    Now if they are the result of the immediacy of what seems to be a purely formal act, Truth and Statehood cannot be generated out of reading. Kojève never explicitly poses the question, but it is in any case an obvious one: does anybody read this book? Who? Are recognition and reading the same thing? It does not seem likely: reading here does not appear as a social or even physical/psychological phenomenon: it is not a question of the appropriation of the Wise Man’s teaching, the reading of the book on the highest levels of government, its dissemination through the schools, etc. For that is an interminable process: reading necessarily implies interpretation, misinterpretation, questioning, rephrasing, codification. There is none of that here: in a single gesture, in one movement, the book and the State are “recognized.” Recognition, then, has nothing to do with reading–and by reading I mean, on the simplest level, a bare acquaintance with the contents of the book. The word will be “recognized,” it seems, without having to be deciphered.

     

    My interpretation is borne out in another footnote that comes some twenty-five pages before the one I have just discussed. It explicitly links the death of Man to the book as inanimate, and presumably unread, object. Once again this note attempts to face the ultimate problem: the fate of Man “after” the closing of History:

     

    The fact that at the end of Time the Word-concept (Logos) is detached from Man and exists–empirically no longer in the form of a human-reality, but as a Book–this fact reveals the essential finitude of Man. It’s not only a given man who dies: Man dies as such. The end of History is the death of Man properly speaking. There remains after this death: 1) living bodies with a human form, but deprived of Spirit, in other words of Time or creative power; 2) a Spirit which exists-empirically, but in the form of an inorganic reality, not living: as a Book which, not even having an animal life, no longer has anything to do with Time. The relation between the Wise Man and his Book is thus rigorously analogous to that of Man and his death. My death is certainly mine; it is not the death of an other. But it is mine only in the future; for one can say: “I am going to die,” but not: “I am dead.” It is the same for the Book. It is my work [mon oeuvre], and not that of an other; and in it it is a question of me and not of anything else. But I am only in the Book, I am only this Book to the extent that I write and publish it, in other words to the extent that it is still a future (or a project). Once the Book is published it is detached from me. It ceases to be me, just as my body ceases to be mine after my death. Death is just as impersonal and eternal, in other words inhuman, as Spirit is impersonal, eternal and inhuman when realized in and by the Book. (ILH, 387-88, footnote; Kojève’s emphasis)

     

    We see now posthistorical Man as an “animal,” no longer carrying out a task or striving toward self-Consciousness. But “he” is not just an animal–a bee or beaver–because he has the word, the Logos, which guarantees his movement from the Human to a kind of higher-order animality. (This difference is something that Kojève seems to have forgotten when he wrote the 1959 addendum to his long footnote on “animality,” discussed above.) But clearly the Book is not something to be read: there can be no labor of interpretation or inculcation. For that reason the book is explicitly presented as dead, as “inorganic” (i.e., lifeless) material.

     

    The death of Man is not, strictly speaking, the death of self-Consciousness. The latter is externalized, frozen on the pages of a book. The message is absolute: as Kojève states, “The Wise Man who reveals what is through the Word [Parole] or Concept reveals it definitively: for what is thus remains eternally identical to itself, no longer modified by uneasiness [inquietude] (Unruhe)” (ILH, 413). The dead message, moreover, is a dead me (or a dead Man), because it is the highest Wisdom of me (the Wise Man, Hegel, Kojève), preserved intact forever, apparently well beyond the labor of interpretation. The connection between the Book and “my death” is, then, not merely a metaphor: it is both “me” in the sense that it consists of my remains, and at the same time it is not me, or my living project. It is my dead body. And the dead bodies of trees.

     

    If we can understand the role played by the Book in Kojève, we will be able to grasp both the status, and the radical limitation, of Absolute Knowledge as it is both the Book and the Book’s reading.

     

    Time is circular, but it is not cyclical. Hegelian time, according to Kojève, can only be run through (parcouru) once (ILH, 391). This is because the end is a return to the state before which the Human commences: the one in which an opposition between Man and his World does not exist. That opposition, in and through which Man exists (and creates himself) in Time and Action, is History. At the end, the opposition between Man and World is overcome, and ceases to exist: History ends and Man dies. The difference between beginning and end is that at the end, and after it, “Identity is revealed by the Concept. . . . It is only at the end of History that the identity of Man and World exists for Man, as revealed by human Discourse” (ILH, 392).

     

    There is a certain irony in all this, upon which Kojève does not dwell. The end is the “discursive revelation of its beginning”–yet the higher knowledge that is the end, the “comprehension of anthropogenic Desire, as it is revealed in the Phenomenology” (ILH, 392), is a human comprehension (“for Man”) that nevertheless marks the end of Man. In an impossible moment Man both understands and ceases to exist. His understanding and death would seem to have to be simultaneous, as well as definitive. After the end, there is no Man left to whom Discourse can reveal the unity of Man and World.

     

    Hence the strange status of the Book. The Book, we are told, is the “empirical existence of Science” (ILH, 394). Its return is also its definitive termination, because then the “totality of Discourse is exhausted [épuisee]” (ILH, 393). There can only be one book, then, that contains the defunct but definitive Science. As we’ve already seen, Kojève compares this book to a dead body, separated for ever from its consciousness/author.

     

    Discourse as well then returns to Nature; Man is dead, Action is over, and the “empirical existence of Science is not historical Man, but a Book made of paper, in other words a natural entity” (ILH, 394).

     

    But if all this is the case, why would anyone read the Book? If Historical Action is at an end, and if Man is dead, there would be no point in doing so. Yet not to do so would consign all of human History–and Absolute Knowledge–to a kind of Absolute Forgetting. In that case there would be a return to the origin not on the higher level of comprehension, but on the lower level of simple repetition.

     

    That clearly is not an option either, so the Book must be read. The crucial question then is: what is reading? Whatever it is, it will be the task of the posthistorical animal/dandy. Reading is not Action or historically significant labor of any sort–all that is over, ended. And since the cycle only returns to its origin once, it cannot be a reading that entails any individual interpretation or thought: it can only be a sheer repetition of the one, definitive, return of Science and Knowledge. Kojève writes:

     

    Certainly, the Book must be read and understood by men, in order to be a Book, in other words something other than paper. But the man who reads it no longer creates anything and he no longer changes himself: he is therefore no longer Time with the primacy of the Future or History; in other words he is not Man in the strong sense of the word. This man is, himself, a quasi-natural or cyclical being: he is a reasonable animal, who changes and reproduces himself while remaining eternally identical to himself. And it is this “reasonable animal” who is the “absoluter Geist,” become Spirit or completed-and-perfect [achevé-et-parfait]; in other words, dead. (ILH, 394)

     

    The end of history, which had promised so much, with its State as a kind of institutionalized utopia, mediating through law the mutual recognition of the “anthropogenic” Desire of all men, becomes a kind of necrotopia of reading. The Book cannot not be read.7 But what is commonly understood by “reading”–a personal understanding and a perhaps wayward interpretation that can, and does, discover new things in the text–is out of the question here. The Book cannot therefore be read, either–or we must totally redefine reading. Reading in the Kojèvian sense will become an animalistic or dead repetition of Discourse, its exact repetition by the dead. This is the strange end of the Kojèvian mock theology that would replace heaven with the State,8 and of a mock existentialism that would resituate the recognition and reign of death definitively as satisfaction and stasis.9

     

    Reading, then, becomes as “natural” as the Book–it is not an Action in Time; it is not, on other words, a human activity. The Book is an “objective reality,” the only possible realization of philosophy, which must be recognized by all persons–i.e., by the State–in order to be true: mere intention is not enough (ILH, 414, note). It is when Kojève considers the “objective” existence of the Work that we see the problem in his conception of reading, for he can only see publication as subjecting the Work, the Book, to the “danger [that it will be] changed and perverted” (ILH, 414, note). Kojève sees this risk of “perversion”–of interpretation, in other words–as a regrettable consequence of the necessity of the Work to be “the objectively-real that maintains itself”–i.e., to be a Work that is published and circulated as a real, solid object–rather than a “pure intention” that “fades away [s’evanouit]”–i.e., that is an idea beyond appropriation by all of society, or by the State (ILH, 414, note). Kojève, in other words, can only see reading as a function of the passive reproduction of what is “objectively-real”; all deviation from an imagined definitive meaning (or Absolute Knowledge) can only be “perversion.”

     

    In light of this it is hard to see why Kojève makes a strong distinction between the book as mere paper and the act of reading. Reading as the pure repetition of a dead, frozen state will be as “material” as the thudding pileup in a warehouse of the unread copies of a book. Hermeneutics becomes hermetics: the act of reading now is the automatic reproduction of a hermetically sealed text, and of a “Knowledge” so remote that there is no place in it, or around it, for human action: thinking, rethinking, questioning. Cultural reproduction made possible by this reading will be the mere repetition ad infinitum of the assent of the dead, of animals. So much for the paradise on earth that Kojève saw as replacing the bad-faith paradise of all organized religion.

     

    We see here a complete reversal from the position at the outset of history, when man confronted nature and transformed it through his labor. That view presented a radical duality between a dialectical Man and inert nature. 10 Now it is Nature–as the material Book, and as the dead reading of the Book–that has become dialectical, or at least post-dialectical, whereas Man is simply dead. Nature has triumphed, but its triumph is of no concern to the “human animals”–the Americans or Japanese, bees or dandys, it hardly matters–who engage in their fragmentary and formal activities which are of no relevance whatever to the genesis, triumph, or demise of Man.

     

    It is here that we can draw some conclusions about the radical–and significant–difference between the posthistorical and the postmodern. The posthistorical, as we’ve just seen, posits a radical break, an unbridgeable gap, between definitive Knowledge and the freeplay of posthistorical action. The Book can contain nothing of interest to say about the residual uses to which leftover negativity, in the form of human action, will be put “after” the end of History. In other words it has nothing at all to say about the present or the future. Indeed the few pronouncements Kojève makes on this subject are all in footnotes, as if they were tangential to the main body of the text. The postmodern, on the other hand, puts forward a “knowledge” that arrives at its end by recognizing the necessity of the proliferation of what we might call “unbound” discourses and language games. It recognizes its death as definitive knowledge in and of the proliferation of partial knowledges, activities, and languages. Rather than being essentially closed to them, as indifferent as mere paper or rote reading, it is open to and dependent on them: it is the very knowledge of their incompletion that makes its completion–a provisional completion, to be sure, but a completion–possible.

     

    Posthistorical Knowledge always comes too soon–the Owl of Minerva always takes off well before dusk–because it closes off the possibility of, and is blind to, human activity, even though activity will obviously continue, albeit without benefit of Wise Man or Book. Postmodern knowledge, on the other hand, comes too soon as well, but for the opposite reason: because its larger truth must be ignored by the very activities that justify it. If posthistorical Knowledge knows too little, postmodern knowledge knows too much. The postmodern is always already in advance of the partial activities it defines: if those activities were themselves to recognize fully the postmodern, they would simply fall under its aegis: they would be coherent parts of a larger narrative, and thus fully modern, and ultimately posthistorical. And yet these activities, these games, are thoroughly dependent on a postmodern knowledge which they must not know: without the overarching knowledge of the postmodern, they would be indistinguishable from any other human narratives, “primitive” or “modern,” which have nothing whatsoever to do with the postmodern. And without their definitive blindness, at the end of modernity which is the postmodern, they would only be components of a higher Knowledge, fully recuperated by it. They, in other words, in order to be postmodern, must in some sense be as blind to postmodern knowledge as posthistorical Knowledge would be to them.

     

    And yet the Kojèvian posthistorical might be more postmodern than the postmodern. It, after all, is ignorant, locked in its perfect, one-time circularity. It does not, and must not, concern itself with, or know, that which comes after it, in an inevitable but supplementary relation. It is the sheer performance, in other words, of the blindness of partial knowledges and practices that the postmodern can only know. The posthistorical is therefore the enactment of the postmodern in and through its absolutely necessary lack of awareness of itself as postmodern; this lack is nothing more than the a priori failure and completion of postmodern knowledge. The posthistorical will always again come after the postmodern, supplementing it with its radical not-knowing. The posthistorical Owl also always flies too late–well after dusk.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See section 9, entitled “Narratives of the Legitimation of Knowledge,” of Jean-Francois Lyotard’s The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge, trans. Geoff Bennington and Brian Massumi (Minneapolis: The University of Minnesota Press, 1984), pp. 31-37.

     

    2. See, in this context, Francis Fukuyama’s neo-Kojèvian celebration of the New World Order, The End of History and the Last Man (New York: The Free Press, 1992). Jacques Derrida has recently criticized Fukuyama for the incoherence of his approach: either the end of history is a kind of eschatology, a pure logical necessity beyond empirical proof, or it is empirically verifiable, in which case it loses the attributes that give it its necessity, and also its attractiveness. One cannot, however, demonstrate the logically necessary (or the “messianic”) by invoking empirical observations. See Derrida, Spectres de Marx (Paris: Galilée, 1993), pp. 112-20. Derrida, at the end of the same chapter (“Conjurer–le marxisme,” pp. 120-27) also considers some of the Kojèvian footnotes that I discuss in this article. I would argue that one could extend Derrida’s critique of Fukuyama to Kojève himself: for Kojève too history is ended because it is a logical necessity that it end: therefore he is largely indifferent to what comes next. Yet at the same time Kojève points to empirical evidence–America, the Soviet Union, Japan, the defeat of the Nazis–to back up his thesis.

     

    3. On the postmodern and adjudication between language games in conflict, see Lyotard’s The Differend: Phrases in Dispute, trans. Georges Van Den Abbeele (Minneapolis: The University of Minnesota Press, 1988).

     

    4. The Introduction to the Reading of Hegel (New York: Basic Books, 1969) is an English translation (by James H. Nichols, Jr.) of certain sections of Kojève’s Introduction la lecture de Hegel (Paris: Gallimard, Collection “Tel,” 1980). The editor of the English edition, Allan Bloom, has omitted much of the material of the 1938-39 lectures. When possible, then, I quote from the official English translation, giving page numbers from it, following the letters “IRH.” When a citation is not found in the English edition, I provide my own translation and cite the page number of the French edition, following the letters “ILH.” The reader will note that the pagination of the now widely available French edition from which I quote is different from that of the original French edition (Paris: Gallimard, 1947).

     

    5.”One more word about teaching what the world ought to be: philosophy always arrives too late to do any such teaching . . . the Owl of Minerva takes flight only as the dusk begins to fall” (Hegel, Preface to the Philosophy of Right).

     

    6.Kojève could never admit that a dialectics of nature was conceivable. Prior to human desire, there is simple identity. Judith Butler writes: “Kojève views nature as a set of brutally given facts, governed by the principle of simple identity, displaying no dialectical possibilities, and, hence, in stark contrast to the life of consciousness” (Subjects of Desire: Hegelian Reflections in Twentieth Century France [New York: Columbia University Press, 1987], p. 67). Maurice Blanchot rewrites this unreadability in his 1948 novel, Le Tres-Haut. In this fiction the Book becomes the journal of a perfect civil servant of a posthistorical State, a civil servant who is at the same time a subversive challenging the State through the very act of writing. The Book for Blanchot becomes an allegory of the collapse of political allegory, since all writing on the State is both fully recuperable by it, and is also its death, its extinction. Meaning itself is in a twilight zone of perfect representation of the State–so perfect it’s inhuman, or posthuman–but is also, by the very fact that it is a written representation, the death of that State, but a never dying death. (The curse of death is that it cannot die.) Such a text is perfectly circular, but also unreadable: nothing can ever happen in this State, and there is nothing more to be said, and certainly nothing more to read–but this nothing, this self-cancelling law, will be repeated endlessly, in exactly the same form. See my preface to the translation I have done of this novel, entitled The Most High, forthcoming from the University of Nebraska Press.

     

    7.This is a gambit that comes out quite clearly in Kojève’s article “Hegel, Marx, et le Christianisme” (Critique, 1, 3-4 (1946): 339-66. See, for example, p. 358: “Thus–a supremely curious thing [chose curieuse entre toutes]–man is completed and perfected, in other words he attains supreme satisfaction, by becoming conscious, in the person of the Wise Man, of his essential finitude.” Kojève thus links the most profound desire of religion (as he sees it)–to guarantee man perfection and satisfaction–to that which religion most abhors: mortality.

     

    8.As Mikkel Dufrenne notes (p. 397), Kojève’s stress on finitude and mortality establishes his Hegelianism as a revisionary Heideggerianism. See “Actualit de Hegel”–a review of Kojève’s Introduction and Jean Hyppolite’s “Genese et structure de la Phenomenologie de l’esprit chez Hegel”–in Esprit, 16, 9 (1948): 396-408.

     

    9.See note 5, above. Dufrenne for his part sees this duality between a nondialectical nature (the “en-soi“) and dialectical Man the “pour-soi“) as a key inheritance from existentialism–one which poses plenty of problems for philosophers such as Sartre, in Being and Nothingness. How indeed does the “pour-soi” arise if the “en-soi” is closed? How can the two be reconciled beyond a mere “as if”? For Dufrenne, this is the origin of the thematics of failure (échec), anguish and despair in Sartre: “A linear series of failures cannot be taken for a dialectic” (Dufrenne, 401-03).

     

    10.This statement should not be taken as a “criticism” of the postmodern, or an attempt to condemn it by “associating” it with the posthistorical. As is made clear in Blanchot’s novel (see footnote 7, above) there is no logical space outside of the postmodern–or the posthistorical, for that matter–from which such a “criticism” could be carried out.

     

  • Immersion vs. Interactivity: Virtual Reality and Literary Theory

    Marie-Laure Ryan

    Dept. of English
    Colorado State University
    mmryan@vines.colostate.edu

     

    Few of us have actually donned an HMD (head-mounted display) and DGs (data-gloves), and entered a computer-generated, three-dimensional landscape in which all of our wishes can be fulfilled: wishes such as experiencing an expansion of our physical and sensory powers; getting out of the body and seeing ourselves from the outside; adopting a new identity; apprehending immaterial objects with most of our senses, including touch; being able to modify the environment through either verbal commands or physical gestures; seeing creative thoughts instantly realized without going through the process of having them physically materialized. Yet despite the fact that virtual reality as described above is still largely science-fiction, still largely what it is called –a virtual reality–there is hardly anybody who does not have a passionate opinion about the technology: some day VR will replace reality; VR will never replace reality; VR challenges the concept of reality; VR will enable us to rediscover and explore reality; VR is a safe substitute to drugs and sex; VR is pleasure without risk and therefore immoral; VR will enhance the mind, leading mankind to new powers; VR is addictive and will enslave us; VR is a radically new experience; VR is as old as Paleolithic art.

     

    This flowering of opinions is fanned by the rhetoric of the gurus of the technology:

     

    Worldwide, VR is happening in protected pockets of technology; inside giants corporations, universities, and small entrepreneurial start-ups; in Berlin and North Carolina; covering Japan and especially in the San Francisco Bay Area. . . . A rare excitement is in the air, an excitement that comes from breaking through to something new. Computers are about to take the next big step–out of the lab and into the street–and the street can’t wait. (Pimentel and Texeira, 7)

     

    This sense of anticipation permeates all books about virtual reality. They are less concerned with what has been achieved so far than with what will be available in the (we hope or fear) very near future. We may have to wait until the year 2000 to see VR become an important part of our lives, but since it is depicted so realistically by its prophets, and since it exists very much in the popular imagination, we don’t have to wait that long to submit the claims of its developers to a critical investigation. In this paper I propose to analyze VR as a semiotic phenomenon, to place it within the context of contemporary culture and to explore its theoretical implications.

     

    My point of departure is this definition by Pimentel and Texeira:

     

    In general, the term virtual reality refers to an immersive, interactive experience generated by a computer. (11)

     

    While “computer generated” accounts for the virtual character of the data, “immersive” and “interactive” explain what makes the computer-assisted experience an experience of reality. To apprehend a world as real is to feel surrounded by it, to be able to interact physically with it, and to have the power to modify this environment. The conjunction of immersion and interactivity leads to an effect known as telepresence:

     

    Telepresence is the extent to which one feels present in the mediated environment, rather than in the immediate physical environment. . . . This [mediated environment] can be either a temporally or spatially distant real environment . . . or an animated but nonexistent virtual world synthesized by a computer. (Steuer 76)

     

    Far from being restricted to VR, the features of immersion and interactivity can be regarded as the cornerstones of a general theory of representation and communication. The purpose of this paper is to explore the problematics of their textual implementation and to assess their significance for contemporary literary theory.

     

    Immersion

     

    Since immersion depends on the vividness of the display, its factors are closely related to the devices that lead to realism in representation. A factor that comes immediately to mind is the projection of a three-dimensional picture. The introduction of perspective in painting took a first step toward immersion by creating a sense of depth that integrated the spectator into the pictorial space. But because the medium of painting simulates depth on a flat surface the spectator cannot break through the can vas and walk into the pictorial space. In the visual displays of VR the barrier disappears–there is no material plane of projection–and the user feels surrounded by a virtual world which can be freely “navigated” (as a standard metaphor of networking describes movement in cyberspace).

     

    The creation of a 3D effect falls under a more general category that Steuer (81) calls “depth of information.” This depth is a function of the resolution of the display, i.e. of the amount of data encoded in the transmission channel. As the other main source of immersion Steuer mentions the “breadth of information,” a category defined as “the number of sensory dimensions simultaneously presented.” Breadth of information is achieved through the collaboration of multiple media: image, sound, olfactory sign als, as well as though the use of technical devices allowing tactile sensations. VR is not so much a medium in itself, as a technology for the synthesis of all media.

     

    Sheridan (58) proposes another factor of telepresence which stands halfway between immersion and interactivity: control of the relation of sensors to the environment. In order to feel immersed the user must be able to move around the virtual space and to apprehend it under various points of view. The computer tracks his movements and generates the sensory data corresponding to his position in a continuously shifting display. The control of sensors can go as far as a leaving the body, relocating the center of consciousness into foreign objects and exploring in this way places and objects normally inaccessible to humans, such as the inside of a molecule, or the geography of a distant planet.

     

    Insofar as immersion is “the blocking out of the physical world” (Biocca 25), it cannot be experienced if the user remains aware of the physical generator of the data, namely the computer. The “virtual reality effect” is the denial of the role of signs (bits, pixels, and binary codes) in the production of what the user experiences as unmediated presence. It is significant that Pimentel and Texeira title their first chapter “the disappearing computer”: as in the trompe-l’oeil of illusionist art, the medium must become transparent for the represented world to emerge as real. VR represents in this respect the refutation of a popular myth: the personification of the computer as an autonomous mind (a myth fostered by artificial intelligence and its attempt to endow machines with creative thinking). As Brenda Laurel declares in a book stressing the need for aesthetic concerns in the design of software: “Throughout this book I have not argued for the personification of the computer but for its invisibility” (143). Jaron Lanier, a leading developer of VR systems, echoes: “With a VR system you don’t see the computer anymore–it’s gone. All that’s there is you” (Lanier and Biocca 166). The disappearance of the computer–which constitutes the culmination of the trend toward increasing user-friendliness in computer design–requires the replacement of arbitrary codes with natural modes of communication. Binary coded machine instruction once gave way to the mnemonic letter-codes of assembly languages; assembly languages were in turn translated into high-level languages with a syntax resembling that of natural languages. Then arbitrary words were supplanted by the motivated signs of icons on the screen. When machines are enabled to respond to spoken commands, the keyboard will become superfluous. Next to go will be the screen and the sight of the machine: visual displays should occupy the entire field of the user’s vision, rather than forming a world-within-the world, separated from reality by the frame of the monitor. Last but not least, language itself must disappear, at least in those areas where it can be more efficiently replaced by physical actions. In the ideal VR system the user will be able to grab and move objects, to mold them through the touch of the hand, or to change their colors with the stroke of a virtual paintbrush. In this mode of communication there will be no need for the user to translate her vision into sets of precise instructions. Purely visual thinking will be implemented by means of practical, non-symbolic gestures. As Pimentel and Texeira put it:

     

    Simply, virtual reality, like writing and mathematics, is a way to represent and communicate what you can imagine with your mind. But it can be more powerful because it doesn’t require you to convert your ideas into abstract symbols with restrictive semantic and syntactic rules, and it can be shared by other people. (17)

     

    The mystics of ages past (such as Swedenborg, an esoteric philosopher of the XVIIIth century) had a term for this radically anti-semiotic mode of communication. They called it “the language of the angels.”

     

    Immersion and Literary Theory

     

    Through its immersive dimension, VR inaugurates a new relation between computers and art. Computers have always been interactive; but until now the power to create a sense of immersion was a prerogative of art. It is significant that when attempting to describe the immersive quality of the VR experience, the advocates of the technology repeatedly turn toward a metaphor borrowed from the literary domain:

     

    For centuries, books have been the cutting edge of artificial reality. Think about it: you read words on a page, and your mind fills in the pictures and emotions–even physical reactions can result. (Wodaski 79)

     

    The question isn’t whether the created world is as real as the physical world, but whether the created world is real enough for you to suspend your disbelief for a period of time. This is the same mental shift that happens when you get wrapped up in a good novel or become absorbed in playing a computer game. (Pimentel and Texeira, 15)

     

    The concept of immersion promoted by virtual reality bears thought-provoking affinities to recent theories of fiction based on the notions of possible worlds and of game make-believe. The possible-world theories of fiction come in many varieties (i.e. David Lewis, Umberto Eco, Lubomir Dolezel, Thomas Pavel) and I cannot account for all of them; the following discussion is mainly a synopsis of my own approach. Common to all theories, however, is a reliance on the semantic model of a set of possible worlds in which a privileged member is opposed to all others as the one and only actual world. The distinction actual/non-actual can be characterized absolutely, in terms of origin, or relatively, in terms of point of view. In the absolute characterization, the actual world is the only one that exists independently of the human mind; merely possible worlds are products of mental activities such as dreaming, wishing, forming hypotheses, imagining, and writing down the products of the imagination in the form of fictions. VR adds to this catalog of “accessibility relations” a mode of apprehension that involves not only the mind, but also the body. For the first time in history, the possible worlds created by the mind become palpable entities, despite their lack of materiality. The relative characterization of the concept of actuality–advocated by David Lewis–regards “actual” as an indexical predicate: the actual world is the world from which I speak and in which I am immersed, while the non-actual possible world s are those that I look at from the outside. These worlds are actual from the point of view of their inhabitants. Among the modes of apprehension that enable us to contemplate non-actual possible worlds, some function as space-travel vehicles while others function as telescopes. In the telescope mode–represented by expressing wishes or forming conjectures about what might have been–consciousness remains anchored in its native reality, and possible worlds are contemplated from the outside. In the space-travel mode, represented by fiction and now by virtual reality technology, consciousness relocates itself to another world, and recenters the universe around this virtual reality. This gesture of recentering involves no illusion, no forgetting of what constitutes the reader’s native reality. Non-actual possible worlds can only be regarded as actual through Coleridge’s much quoted “willing suspension of disbelief.” The reader of a fiction knows that the world displayed by the text is virtual, a product of the author’s imagination, but he pretends that there is an independently existing reality serving as referent to the narrator’s declarations.

     

    The notion of pretense and the related concept of game of make-believe forms the core of Kendall Walton’s theory of fiction. According to Walton, a fictional text–as well as any type of visual representation–is a “prop in a game of make-believe” (11). The game consists of selecting an object and of regarding it as something else, usually in agreement with other players (author/reader, in the case of fiction.) Just as a stump may stand for a bear in a children’s game of make-believe, the picture of a ship is taken for a ship, and the text of a novel is taken for an account of real facts (an account which may or may not be regarded as accurate, as the case of unreliable narration demonstrates). Players project themselves as members of the world in which the prop is a bear, a ship or a text of nonfiction, and they play the game by “generating fictional truths.” This activity consists of imagining the fictional world according to the directives encoded in the prop. Some of the fictional truths concern the players themselves, or rather their fictional alter ego. The reader of a fiction does not simply generate truths of the type “p is fictional” but also “it is fictional that I believe p.” And if p relates the pitiful fate of a character, it will be fiction al that the reader’s alter ego pities the character. The emotions experienced in make-believe in the fictional world may carry over to the real world, causing physical reactions such as crying for the heroine. The affinity of Walton’s theory of fiction with virtual reality and its concept of immersion thus resides in his insistence on the participation of the appreciator in the fictional world. It is truly a theory of “being caught up in a story.”

     

    Like computer-generated VR, possible-world and make-believe theories of fiction presupposes a relative transparency of the medium. The reader or spectator looks through the work toward the reference world. If the picture of a ship is experienced as the presence of a ship located in the same space as the viewer, it is not apprehended as “the sign of a ship.” If readers are caught up in a story, they turn the pages without paying too much attention to the letter of the text: what they want is to find out what happened next in the fictional world. This reading for the plot focuses on the least language-dependent dimension of narrative communication. And if readers experience genuine emotions for the characters, they do not relate to these characters as literary creations nor as “semiotic constructs,” but as human beings.

     

    The literary devices which create a sense of participation in fictional worlds present many parallelisms with the factors leading to telepresence. One of the factors mentioned above was the projection of a three-dimensional environment. The literary equivalent of three-dimensionality is a narrative universe possessing some hidden depth, and populated by characters perceived as round rather than flat. By hidden depth I mean that the sum of fictional truths largely exceeds the sum of the propositions directly stated in the text. In a virtual world experienced as three-dimensional, the user knows that reality is not limited to what what can be seen from a given position: the outside conceals the inside, the front conceals the back, and small objects in the foreground conceal large objects in the background. Similarly, in a narrative world presenting some hidden depth (let us call it a “realistic world”) there is something behind the narrated: the characters have minds, intents, desires, and emotions, and the reader is encouraged to reconstruct the content of their mind–either for its own sake, or in order to evaluate their behavior. The procedures of inference relating to inner life would be inhibited in the case of the referents of human names in lyric poetry or in some postmodern novels where characters are reduced to stereotypes, actantial roles or allegories. When the reader feels that there is nothing beyond language, inference procedures become largely pointless.

     

    As is the case in VR systems, the reader’s sense of immersion and empathy is a function of the depth of information. It is obvious that detailed descriptions lead to a greater sense of belonging than sketchy narration. This explains why it is easier be be caught up in a fictional story than in a newspaper report. But in purely verbal communication–in contrast with the visual or auditory domains–depth of information may reach the point of saturation and create an alienating effect: the length and minute precision of the descriptions of a Robbe-Grillet, as well as their restriction to purely visual information, constitute a greater deterrent to immersion than the most laconic prose.

     

    Breadth of information is not literally possible in fiction, since we are talking about writing and not about multi-media communication. But insofar as it relays sensations through the imagination, literary language can represent the entire spectrum of human experience. This ability of language to substitute for all channels of sensation is what justifies the comparison of literature with a multi-media mode of communication such as VR.

     

    Another factor of immersion that seems at first glance impossible in textual communication is the control of the sensors. The reader only sees (hears, smells, etc.) what the narrator shows. But to the extent that the narrator’s sensations become the reader’s, fiction offers a mobility of point of view at least as extensive as that of VR systems. The development of a type of narrator specific to fiction—the omniscient, impersonal narrator–has freed fictional discourse from the constraints of real world and pragmatically credible human communication. The disembodied consciousness of the impersonal narrator can apprehend the fictional world from any perspective (external observer point of view or character point of view), adopt any member of the fictional world as focalizer, select any spatial location as post of observation, narrate in every temporal direction (retrospectively, simultaneously, even prospectively), and switch back and forth between these various points of view. Fiction, like VR, allows an experience of its reference world that would be impossible if this reference world were an objectively existing, material reality.

     

    The ultimate freedom in the movement of the sensors is the adoption of a foreign identity. As Lasko-Harvill observes, “in virtual reality we can, with disconcerting ease, exchange eyes with another person and see ourselves and the world from their vantage point” (277). This “exchanging eyes with another person” is paralleled in fiction by the possibility of speaking about oneself in the third person, or of switching between first and third when speaking about the same referent. (Cf. Max Frisch, Montauk.) But there is an even more fundamental similarity between the role-playing of VR and the nature of narrative fiction. As authors strip themselves of their real world identity to enter the fictional world, they have at their disposal the entire range of conceivable roles, from the strongly individuated first person narrator (who can be any member of the fictional world) to the pure consciousness of the third person narrator.

     

    Both VR and fiction present the ability to transcend the boundaries of human perception. Just as VR systems enable the user to penetrate into places normally inaccessible to humans, fiction legitimates the representation of what cannot be known: a story can be told even when “nobody lived to tell the tale.” Of all the domain represented in fiction, no one transcends more blatantly the limits of the knowable than foreign consciousness. As Dorrit Cohn observes: “But this means that the special life-likeness of narrative fiction–as compared to dramatic and cinematic fiction–depends on what writers and readers know least in life: how another mind works, how another body feels” (5-6).

     

    The effacement of the impersonal narrator and his freedom to relocate his consciousness anywhere, at any time and in whatever body or mind conveys the impression of unmediated presence: minds become transparent, and events seem to be telling themselves. The mobility of the sensors that apprehend fictional worlds allow a degree of intimacy between the reader and the textual world that remain unparalleled in nonfiction. Paradoxically, the reality of which we are native is the least amenable to immersive narration, and reports of real events are the least likely to induce participation. New Journalism, to the scandal of many, tried to overcome this textual alienation from nonvirtual reality by describing real-world events through fictional techniques. In the television domain, the proliferation of “docu-drama” bears testimony to the voyeuristic need to “be there” and to enjoy fiction-like participation, not only in imaginary worlds, but also in historical events.

     

    Against Immersion

     

    Theories of fiction emphasizing participation in fictional worlds represent a somewhat reactionary trend on the contemporary cultural scene. Immersion in a virtual world is viewed by most theorists of postmodernism as a passive subjection to the authority of the world-designer–a subjection exemplified by the entrapment of tourists in the self-enclosed virtual realities of theme parks or vacation resorts (where the visitor’s only freedom is the freedom to use his credit card). According to Jay Bolter, immersion is a trademark of popular culture: “Losing oneself in a fictional world is the goal of the naive reader or one who reads as entertainment. Its is particularly a feature of genre fiction, such as romance or science fiction” (155).

     

    As we have seen above, the precondition for immersion is the transparency of the medium. But we live in a semiotic age, in an age that worships signs. Contemporary theories such as deconstruction teach us that the freedom of the mind must originate in a freedom from signs. So does virtual reality, in some respect, but while VR seeks this freedom in the disappearance of signs, contemporary cultural theories regard signs as the substance of all realities and as the prerequisite of thought. Freedom from signs cannot be achieved through their disappearance but only through the awareness of their omnipresence, as well as through the recognition of their conventional or arbitrary character. The aesthetics of immersion is currently being replaced–primarily in “high culture” but the tendency is now stretching toward popular culture–by an aesthetics of textuality. Signs must be made visible for their role in the construction of reality to be recognized. A mode of communication that strives toward transparency of the medium bereaves the user of his critical faculties. The semiotic blindness caused by immersion is illustrated by an anecdote involving the XVIIIth century French philosopher Diderot. According to William Martin, “he tells us how he began reading Clarissa several times in order to learn something about Richardson’s techniques, but never succeeded in doing so because he became personally involved in the work, thus losing his critical consciousness” (Martin 58). According to Bolter, this l oss of critical consciousness is the trademark of the VR experience: “But is it obvious that virtual reality cannot in itself sustain intellectual or cultural development. . . . The problem is that virtual reality, at least as it is now envisioned, is a medium of percepts rather than signs. It is virtual television” (230). “What is not appropriate is the absence of semiosis” (231).

     

    In reducing VR to passive immersion, however, Bolter ignores the second component of the VR experience. If contemporary art and literature are to achieve an enhancement of the reader’s creativity, it should be through the emulation of the interactive aspect of VR, and not through the summary condemnation of its immersive power.

     

    Interactivity

     

    Interactivity is not merely the ability to navigate the virtual world, it is the power of the user to modify this environment. Moving the sensors and enjoying freedom of movement do not in themselves ensure an interactive relation between a user and an environment: the user could derive his entire satisfaction from the exploration of the surrounding domain. He would be actively involved in the virtual world, but his actions would bear no lasting consequences. In a truly interactive system, the virtual world must respond to to the user’s actions.

     

    While the standard comparison for immersion derives from narrative fiction, the most frequently used metaphor of interactivity invokes theatrical performance. The simile captures a largely utopian dream of dramatic art: putting spectators on stage and turning them into characters:

     

    As researchers grapple with the notion of interaction in the world of computing, they sometimes compare computer users to theatrical audiences. “Users,” the argument goes, are like audience members who are able to have a greater influence on the unfolding of the action than simply the fine-tuning provided by conventional audience response. . . . The users of such a system are like audience members who can march up onto the stage and become various characters, altering the action by what they say and do in their roles. (Laurel 16)

     

    Whereas immersion may be a response to a basically static form of representation, interactivity requires a dynamic simulation. A simulative system does not simply respond to the user’s actions by displaying ready-made elements, it creates its data “in real time” according to the user’s directions. Like movies and narratives, a simulative system projects a world immersed in time and subjected to change, but while these media represent history retrospectively, fashioning a plot when all events are in the book, simulation generates events prospectively, without knowledge of the outcome. Taken as a whole, a simulative system does not reproduce a specific course of events, but like a “Garden of Forking Paths”–to parody the title of a short story by Borges–it is open to all the histories that could develop out of a given situation. Every use of the system actualizes another potential segment of history. The simulative system is like an alphabet containing all the books on a given subject, while the simulation itself is the writing of a potential book (except that there is no book left when the writing in completed). In a flight simulator, for instance, the user enacts the story of one particular flight out of a large set of possibilities by operating the keys that represent the control panel of the airplane.

     

    The degree of interactivity of a VR system is a function of a variety of factors. Steuer enumerates three of them, without claiming that the list is exhaustive:

     

    speed, which refers to the rate at which input can be assimilated into the mediated environment; range, which refers to the number of possibilities for action at any given time; and mapping, which refers to the ability of a system to map its controls to changes in the mediated environment in a natural and predictable manner. (86)

     

    The first of these factors requires little explanation. The speed of a system is what enables it to respond in real time to the user’s actions. Faster response means more actions, and more actions mean more changes. The second factor is equally obvious: the choice of actions is like a set of tools; the larger the set, the more malleable the environment. A VR system allowing an infinite range of actions would be like real life, except that in real life our choice of actions in a concrete situation is limit ed by pragmatic considerations. The factor of mapping imposes constraints on the behavior of the system. Insofar as “mapping” is defined in terms of natural response, it advocates the disappearance of arbitrary codes. Far from being associated with passive immersion, semiotic transparency is conceived by VR developers as a way to facilitate interactivity. The predictability of the response demonstrates the intelligence of the system. The user must be able to foresee to some extent the result of his gestures, otherwise they would be pure movements and not intent-driven actions. If the user of a virtual golf system hits a golf ball he wants it to land on the ground, and not to turn into a bird and disappear in the sky. On the other hand, the predictability of moves should be relative, otherwise there would be no challenge nor point in using the system. Even in real life, we cannot calculate all the consequences of our actions. Moreover, predictability conflicts with the range requirement: if the user could choose from a repertory of actions as vast as that of real life, the system would be unable to respond intelligently to most forms of input. The coherence of flight-simulation programs stems for instance from the fact that they exclude any choice of activity unrelated to flying. Meaningful interactivity requires a compromise between range and mapping and between discovery and predictability. Like a good narrative plot, VR systems should instill an element of surprise in the fulfillment of expectations.

     

    Interactivity and Literary Theory

     

    Increasing the reader’s participation in the creative process, and thereby questioning such distinctions as author/reader, actor/spectator, producer/consumer, has been a major concern of postmodern art. This does not mean that without these efforts reading would be a purely passive experience: theorists such as Iser or Ingarden have convincingly demonstrated that a world cannot emerge from a text without an active process of construction, a process through which the reader provides as much material as sh e derives from the text. But the inherently interactive nature of the reading experience has been obscured by the reader’s proficiency in performing the necessary world-building operations. We are so used to playing the fictional game that it has become a second nature: as quasi native readers of fiction we take it for granted that worlds should emerge from texts. This explains why postmodernist attempts to promote active reader involvement in the construction of meaning usually take the form of self-referential demystification. As Linda Hutcheon writes: “The reader of fiction is always an actively mediating presence; the text’s reality is established by his response and reconstituted by his active participation. The writer of narcissistic fiction merely makes the reader conscious of this fact of his experience” (141). The price of this consciousness is a loss of membership in the fictional world. In the narcissistic work, the reader contemplates the fictional world from the outside. This world no longer functions for the imagination as an actual world–this is to say, as an ontological center–but is expelled toward the periphery of the modal system, where it acquires the status of a non-actual possible world. The metafictional gesture of de-centering thus inverts a paradox inherent to fiction. Insofar as it claims the reality of its reference world, fiction implies its own denial as fiction. By overtly recognizing the constructed, imaginary nature of the textual world, metafiction reclaims our “native reality” as ontological center and reverts to the status of nonfictional discourse about non-actual possible worlds. In order to enhance participation in, or at least awareness of the creative process, the metafictional gesture thus blocks participation in the fictional world.

     

    But the reader’s interest is difficult to maintain in the absence of make-believe. The most efficient strategy for promoting an awareness of the mechanisms of fictionality is not to block access to the fictional world, but to engage the reader in a game of in and out: now the text captures the reader in the narrative suspense; now it bares the artificiality of plots; now the text builds up the illusion of an extratextual referent; now it claims “this world is mere fiction.” Shuttled back and forth between ontological levels, the reader comes to appreciate the layered structure of fictional communication, a layered structure through which he is both (in make-believe) narratorial audience in the fictional world, and authorial audience in the real world. One of the most successful examples of this game of in-and-out is John Fowles’ The French Lieutenant’s Woman. The fictional world may be eventually demystified as a textual construct, yet the text succeeds in creating an immersive experience. At times the reader regards the characters as human beings and invests an emotional interest in their fate; at other times he is made to acknowledge their status as literary creations. It is the memory of the immersive power of the text that engages his critical faculties during the self-reflexive moments. The object the reflexive activity is as much the phenomenon of immersion as the artificiality of fictional worlds. But if immersion alternates with an “interactive” stance toward the fictional world and the plural ontological levels embedded in the textual universe, the two experiences cannot occur at the same time. They imply mutually exclusive perspectives on the reference world.

     

    When applied to traditional forms of text–that is, preserved and transmitted in book form–“interactivity” remains a largely metaphorical concept. It stands more for the reader’s awareness of his collaboration with the text in the production of meaning than for personal initiative and decision making. Not surprisingly, the textual mode in which the ideal of interactivity comes closest to literal fulfillment is hypertext, a form of writing made possible by the electronic medium. The idea of hypertext is well-known and I will do no more than summarize it. Organized as a network of paragraphs connected by electronic links, hypertext offers at given points a choice of directions to follow. Each choice brings on the screen a different chunk of text, to which are attached new branching possibilities. Rather than consuming the text in a prescribed sequential order, the reader determines her own path of traversal through the textual network.

     

    Through the initiative given to the reader, hypertext realizes a very basic form of interactivity. As Bolter observes: “The reader participates in the making of the text as a sequence of words” (158). If we equate “text” to one particular traversal of the network, then indeed every reading session generates a new text, and the reader takes an active part in this writing. In this view, “text” is not a static collection of signs but the product of a dynamic encounter between a mind and a set of signs. If the concept of text is indissoluble from the act of reading, the physical interactivity of hypertext is a concrete metaphor for the mental activity required by all texts. While every particular path of navigation through a hypertextual network brings to th e screen different chunks of text, every particular reading of a non-electronic text highlights different episodes, links different images, and creates a different web of meaning. The difference between the experiences of hypertext and of traditional text s is mostly a matter of intensity, of awareness and of having no other source of pleasure than what Nabokov calls “combinational delight” (69). In the absence of the distraction created by a dominating storyline, it is hoped that the reader will devote all of his attention to the tracking of links.

     

    Alternatively, the concept of “text” could be equated to the sum of possible readings, or rather to the written signs forming the common source of these readings. In the case of hypertext, this would mean that the text is the entire network of links and of textual nodes. According to this view, the interactivity of hypertext is not a power to change the environment, as is the case in VR systems, but merely a freedom to move the sensors for a personalized exploration. The reader may choose in which order she visits the nodes, but her choices do not affect the configuration of the network. No matter how the reader runs the maze, the maze remains the same. Far from relinquishing authority (as Bolter has claimed), the author remains the hidden master of the maze. The reader’s actions could only modify the environment if the hypertextual system generated text in real time, as an intelligent response to the reader’s decisions.”1 As I have argued above, this is what happens in simulative systems. The computer calculates the position of the plane according to the user’s input, rather than displaying a pre-calculated position. This will not happen in hypertext until it joins forces with AI–and until AI sharpens its story-generating capabilities. In the meantime, the closest to a hypertextual system operating in real time will be for the user to get on line with the author herself.

     

    The fullest form of interactivity occurs when the reader is invited to contribute text to the network. “2 This invitation may take one of two forms. The first possibility is the user adding text and links which become permanent parts of the system. When this input concerns a specific character, the user is less playing the role of the character in question than taking over authorial responsibilities for the writing of his fate. In other words, the user manipulates the strings of a puppet, playing its role from the outside. The other conceivable form of interactivity is more like playing a game of make-believe such as cops and robbers. The system defines a cast of characters by specifying their attributes. The user selects an identity from this repertory, and plays the role from the inside. She encounters other users playing other characters, and they engage in a dialogue in real time. This dialogue does not count as description of the actions of the character b ut as performance of these actions: the character’s freedom to act is a freedom to select speech acts. Of these two modes of contribution, only the second constitutes an immersive experience. The first may be addictive–as any game, any activity might be–but it maintains a foreign perspective on the fictional world.

     

    Immersion or Interactivty: The Dilemma of Textual Representation

     

    Whether textual interactivity takes the weak form of a deliberate play with signs leading to a production of meaning, or the strong form of producing these signs, one consequence appears unavoidable: in literary matters, interactivity conflicts either with immersion or with aesthetic design, and usually with both. The strong forms of interactivity run most blatantly into the design problem: how can the contributions of the reader-turned-author be monitored by the system, so that the text as a whole will maintain narrative coherence and aesthetic value? An interactive system may be an alphabet for writing books, but the user should be prevented from producing nonsense. As Laurel argues: “The well designed [virtual world] is, in a sense, the antithesis of realism–the antithesis of the chaos of everyday life” (quoted by Pimentel and Texeira 157). Howard Rheingold stresses the need for “scenario control”: “They [VR developers] want a world that you can walk around in, that will react to you appropriately, and that presents a narrative structure for you to experience” (307). The control of a pre-determined narrative script imposes severe limits on the user’s freedom of moves (think of the narrow range of choices in the children’s books “Choose Your Own Adven tures,” where all the branches constitute a coherent story); but without this control the hypertextual network would turn into a multi-user word processor. In the worst case scenario, interactive fiction will be reduced to a bunch of would-be authors e-mailing to each other the fruits of their inspiration.

     

    In the weaker forms of interactivity, design is easier to control, but immersion remains problematic. The reader of a classical interactive fiction–like Michael Joyce’s Afternoon–may be fascinated by his power to control the display, but this fascination is a matter of reflecting on the medium, not of participating in the fictional worlds represented by this medium. Rather than experiencing exhilaration at the freedom of “co-creating” the text, however, the reader may feel like a rat trapped in a maze, blindly trying choices that lead to dead-ends, take him back to previously visited points, or abandon a storyline that was slowly beginning to create interest. The best way to prevent this feeling of entrapment, it seems to me, would be to m ake the results of choices reasonably predictable, as they should be in simulative VR, so that the reader would learn the laws of the maze and become an expert at finding his way even in new territory. But if the reader becomes an expert at running the maze, he may become immersed in a specific story-line and forget–or deliberately avoid–all other possibilities. He would then revert to a linear mode of reading and sacrifice the freedom of interactivity.

     

    It would be preposterous to pass a global judgment on the intrinsic merit of hypertext: whether the maze is experienced as a prison or as the key to freedom depends on the individual quality of the text and on the disposition of the reader. But I would like to advance one general pronouncement concerning the immersive power–or lack thereof–of the genre: a genuine appreciation of a hypertextual network requires an awareness of the plurality of possible worlds contained in the system; but this plurality can only be contemplated from a point of view external to any of these worlds.

     

    The various attempts by contemporary literature to emulate the interactivity of VR thus involve a sacrifice of the special pleasure derived from immersion. The more interactive, the less immersive the text. The texts that come the closest to combining both types of pleasure are those that orchestrate them in round-robin fashion through a game of in-and-out. The textual incompatibility of immersion and interactivity can be traced back to several factors. While immersion depends on the forward movement of a linear plot, interactivity involves (and creates) a spatial organization. While immersion presupposes pretended belief in an solid extratextual reference world, interactivity thrives in a fluid environment undergoing constant reconfiguration. While immersion looks through the signs toward the reference world, interactivity exploits the materiality of the medium. Textual representation behaves in one respect like holographic pictures: you cannot see the worlds and the signs at the same time. Readers and spectators must focus beyond the signs to witness the emergence of a three-dimensional life-like reality.

     

    In computer-generated VR, immersion and interactivity do not stand in conflict–or at least not necessarily. Immersion may offer an occasional threat to interactivity”3, but the converse does not hold. The more interactive a virtual world, the more immersive the experience. There is nothing intrinsically incompatible between immersion and interactivity: in real life also, the greater our freedom to act, the deeper our bond to the environment.

     

    An obvious reason for this difference in behavior is the above-mentioned difficulty for texts to integrate the reader’s input into a coherent narrative macro-structure. VR also experiences this type of problem when it attempts to turn users into the characters of a multi-media dramatic production. It is in very restricted domains regulated by narrowly defined “narrative” scripts–flight simulators, golf, paddle-ball, etc.–or in areas not subjected to the requirements of narrative logic–visual displays, or systems combining visual data with sound and dance–that VR systems achieve the most complete fusion of immersion and interactivity.

     

    But there is a more fundamental reason for VR’s ability to combine the two types of experience. In a textual environment, the tools of interactivity are signs. But signs are not the only mean of action. In the real world we can act with the body by pointing at things, manipulating them, and working on them with tools. We can also use the body as an instrument of exploration by walking around the world and moving the sensors. Virtual reality, as its developers conceive it, reconciles immersion and interac tivity through the mediation of the body. “Our body is our interface,” claims William Brickemp in a VR manifesto (quoted in Pimentel and Texeira, 160). When the reader of a postmodern work is invited to participate in the construction of the fictional world she is aware that this world does not exist independently of the semiotic activity; hence the loss in immersive power. But the user of a VR system interacts with a world that is experienced as existing autonomously because this world is accessible to m any senses, particularly to the sense of touch. As the story of Saint Thomas demonstrates, tactile sensations are second to none in establishing a sense of reality. The bodily participation of the user in virtual reality can be termed world-creative in the same sense that performing actions in the real world can be said to create reality. As a purely mental event, textual creation is a creation ex nihilo that excludes the creator from the creation: authors do not belong to the world of their fictions. But if a mind may conceive a world from the outside, a body always experiences it from the inside. As a relation involving the body, the interactivity of VR immerses the user in an world already in place; as a process involving the mind, it turns the user’s relation to this world into a creative membership. The most immersive forms of textual interactivity are therefore those in which the user’s contributions, rather than performing a creation through a diegetic (i.e. descriptive) use of language, count as a dialogic and live interaction with other members of the fictional world. I am thinking here of children’s games of make-believe, and of those interactive hypertextual systems where users are invited to play the role of characters. These modes of interactivity have yet to solve the problem of design, but they point the way toward a solution of the conflict between immersion and interactivity: turn language into a dramatic performance, into the expression of a bodily mode of being in the world.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Some hypertexts erase certain pathways after the reader has taken them. This seems to be the closest so far to a self-modifying network responding to the user’s input. But the pruning of links is pre-programmed into the text, so it does not constitute a response in real time.

     

    2. This invitation is extended in “HotelMOO, the Hypertext Hotel” (originator and “proprietor”: Tom Meyer of Brown university), a hypertextual network placed in the public space and accessible through the Internet. Users may either visit the hotel as anonymous guests, in which case their limited (inter)activity resides in the freedom to choose a path through the network, or they can enter the system under the identity of a specific character. In this case they are allowed to contribute to the expansion of the network.

     

    3. Following McLuhan, Steuer suggests that the vividness of a virtual world may “decrease a subject’s ability to mindfully interact with it in real time” (90). If a computer-generated environment is so rich in “fictional truths” that its exploration offers great rewards, why would the user bother to work on it?

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Biocca, Frank. “Virtual Reality Technology: A Tutorial.” Journal of Communication 42.4 (1992): 23-72.
    • Bolter, Jay David. Writing Space. The Computer, Hypertext, and the History of Writing. Hillsdale, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum, 1991.
    • Cohn, Dorrit. Transparent Minds: Narrative Modes for Presenting Consciousness in Fiction. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1978.
    • Hutcheon, Linda. Narcissistic Narrative. The Metafictional Paradox. Waterloo, Ontario: Wilfried Laurier UP, 1980.
    • Joyce, Michael. Afternoon, a story. Cambridge, MA: Eastgate Press, 1987. [Computer program].
    • Landow, George P. Hypertext. The Convergence of Contemporary Critical Theory and Technology. Baltimore and London: The Johns Hopkins UP, 1992.
    • Lanier, Jaron, and Frank Biocca. “An Insider’s View of the Future of Virtual Reality.” Journal of Communications 42.4 (1992): 150-172.
    • Laurel, Brenda. Computers as Theater. Menlo Park, Ca: Addison Wesley, 1991.
    • Lasko-Harvill, Ann. “Identity and Mask in Virtual Reality.” Discourse 14.2 (1992): 222-234.
    • Lewis, David. “Truth in Fiction.” American Philosophical Quarterly 15 (1978):37-46.
    • Martin, William. Recent Theories of Narrative. Ithaca and London: Cornell UP, 1986.
    • Nabokov, Vladimir. Pale Fire. New York: Random House (Vintage Books), 1989 [1962].
    • Pimentel, Ken, and Kevin Texeira. Virtual Reality: Through the New Looking-Glass. Intel/Windcrest McGraw Hill, 1993.
    • Rheingold, Howard. Virtual Reality. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1991.
    • Ryan, Marie-Laure. Possible Worlds, Artificial Intelligence, and Narrative Theory. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1991.
    • Sheridan, Thomas B. “Musings on Telepresence and Virtual Presence.” In Papers from SRI’s 1991 Conference on Virtual Reality. Ed. Teresa Middleton. Westport and London: Meckler, 1992.
    • Steuer, Jonathan. “Defining Virtual Reality: Dimensions Determining Telepresence.” Journal of Communications 42.4 (1992): 73-93.
    • Walton, Kendall. Mimesis as Make-Believe. On the Foundations of the Representational Arts. Cambridge and London: Harvard UP, 1990.
    • Wodaski, Ron. Virtual Reality Madness. SAMS publishing, 1993. [User manual for a computer game package]

     

  • The Moving Image Reclaimed

    Robert Kolker

    Department of English
    University of Maryland
    Robert_P_KOLKER@umail.umd.edu

     

    Preface: “The Moving Image Reclaimed” is a twofold experiment. On the level of textuality, it is an attempt to write about films with moving-image examples present and available to be viewed, the way a paragraph from a novel or lines from a poem are available to the reader of literary criticism. But to make this experiment possible, much technical experimentation was necessary. Moving images are packed with detailed information. They are analogue events. Digitizing them is a prodigious task and transmitting them over the Internet is even more prodigious. They are big, ungainly, and consume a lot of computer resources, so you will need to have patience as they come across the network. If you are receiving the clips over a dialup (SLIP) connection, you will need more than patience–you will need something to occupy your time (maybe a good book?). The clips in this essay are in MPEG format, but a Quicktime version is also available (on average, the color QuickTime clips will be at least 50% larger than their MPEG equivalents; black-and-white QuickTime clips may be as much as ten times the size of the MPEG clips). Whatever format you choose, you will need appropriate viewing software installed on your system. If you find that you don’t have such software, you can find some unsupported programs, for various platforms, here. Please note that, in viewing these clips, you may occasionally experience problems with color or frame-rate (if you are using the default MPEG viewer for Windows, you might try choosing “ordered (256)” or “hybrid” under the “dither” menu; you will also find that some clips exceed the size allowed under the free version of the Windows MPEG viewer. We recommend that you support shareware by paying for the full version of that software). All the images will look best on a video-display capable of 16 thousand or more colors: on 256 SVGA and VGA displays there may be a phenomenon called palette flash, where colors look less than attractive. Please also note that, although the QuickTime clips do have a soundtrack, the MPEG clips are without sound (“MOS” they called it in Hollywood, mimicking German filmmakers just gaining a hold of the language: “Mit Out Sound”).

     

    Textual access has been a major problem in the work of cinema studies. Unlike our colleagues in literary and art criticism, film scholars’ access to the text has been absolutely limited to still images, which are often enough not taken directly from the film under discussion. Computer imaging is changing that. With relatively inexpensive video-capture hardware and software, it’s now possible to digitize film images from a videocassette or laserdisc and put them to critical use, making the film as quotable as a novel or poem. Published on-line, with image text and written text wrapped around one another, the work of film and television criticism becomes linked to its source, gives up a certain innocence, and claims a heightened authority (even responsibility). In fact, sources become reversed. The critical act becomes the source for the imagery and its meaning: the imagery is reclaimed, meaning becomes a result of the reclamation process in ways that correct and advance older methodologies of the field.

     

    I recently wrote an essay on Martin Scorsese’s debt to Alfred Hitchcock. Its purpose was to discover a viable structure in Scorsese’s Cape Fear, a film that is part of that other reclamation process I spoke about: a work that calls to itself images from many other films as it plays and teases its audience with them. Cape Fear is many things: a popular film Scorsese made to help pay back a debt to Universal Pictures, the company that supported his earlier work, The Last Temptation of Christ; and a remake of a 1962 film of the same name, which itself owes a debt to Hitchcock’s Psycho. Scorsese has always been interested in reclaiming Hitchcock, and in fact made his own version of Psycho in 1976, called Taxi Driver. But the calls Scorsese makes on Hitchcock in Cape Fear are nested very deeply. Unlike the film’s references to more recent mad killer movies, which audiences readily recognize, the Hitchcockian quotations are coveted. This is celebration as ceremony, allusion as test as well as play. More modernist than postmodern. Cape Fear cites three of Hitchcock’s lesser early fifties films, Stagefright, I Confess, and Strangers on A Train. It cites them and quotes from them, and takes an almost arcane pleasure in secreting them within its own structure.

     

    To talk about them is one thing, and the essay that emerged from my research into the sources of Cape Fear needs, like almost any conventional essay in film studies, a great deal of faith from the reader. Even frame enlargements from the films in question will not adequately prove my assertions or my theorizing about allusion, citation, and quotation in modernist and postmodern practice. Such a discussion needs visual proof, which only the moving images can provide.

     

    To set the scene for Scorsese’s Hitchcockian reclamations, I needed first to address larger notions of cinematic form. Many filmmakers have attempted to absorb elements of Hitchcockian structure in their films–basically because Hitchcock did various formal tropes so well and with commercial success. In Vertigo, to give one instance, Hitchcock solves the problem of how to communicate his main character’s response to heights by creating an elaborate visual effect, which is achieved by simultaneously zooming the camera’s lens in one direction while tracking the camera in the other. Difficult to imagine or even recall from the film. Here is what it looks like:

     

    (VIDEO)
    Vertigo, Alfred Hitchcock, Paramount, 1958 [.6 MB]

     

    Still more difficult to imagine is the that fact that this bit of technique has fascinated a variety of filmmakers, who have tried to improve upon it over and over again. Spielberg does it often. This what it looks like in Jaws, where he attempts to communicate Police Chief Brody’s surprise and anxiety at spotting the shark.

     

    (VIDEO)
    Jaws, Steven Spielberg, Universal, 1975 [.19 MB]

     

    In its most complex version yet, Scorsese recomposes it for a climactic moment in Goodfellas, where the main character is about to betray his friends.

     

    (VIDEO)
    Goodfellas, Martin Scorsese, Warner Bros., 1990 [2 MB]

     

    This interaction of visual and explanatory texts not only proves a scholarly point, but explains intertextuality in an intertextual way. This becomes clearer in my main argument, which is, after all, about an intertextuality so essential to a filmmaker’s style that one film haunts another through the very structure of its images. Strangers on A Train and Cape Fear are films about doubles: evil twins, subjectivities split in two, each one attempting to destroy the other. There is a sequence in Strangers on A Train, in which the mad Bruno, who has committed a murder for his “other,” the tennis player, Guy. Bruno emerges from the shadows, calling to Guy. It is one of the most unnerving things Hitchcock has done, for it presents a character seeing his shadow take on form before his eyes.

     

    (VIDEO)
    Strangers on a Train, Alfred Hitchcock, Warner Bros., 1951 [2.2 MB]

     

    The structural base of this sequence is the shot/reaction shot–a look at the character and a cut to what the character is looking at–the basic way Hitchcock builds a viewer’s comprehension of his character’s situation (a construction basic to all cinema, that Hitchcock used with particular finesse). In Cape Fear, Scorsese keeps returning to the Hitchcockian version of that structure and to the central episode of Guy and Bruno in the dark. Here’s a version of it. Sam Boden, the lawyer suddenly haunted by his past, sees his nemesis, his evil other, Max Cady, as if in a dream.

     

    (VIDEO)
    Cape Fear, Martin Scorsese, Universal, 1991 [.26 MB]

     

    Perhaps the most famous sequence in Strangers on a Train occurs when Guy spots Bruno staring menacingly from the audience at a tennis match. Secret terrors in public places is a favorite Hitchcockian gambit, a way to everyone’s anxiety.

     

    (VIDEO)
    Strangers on a Train, Alfred Hitchcock, Warner Bros., 1951 [2.4 MB]

     

    Scorsese quotes the passage quite directly, using a Fourth of July parade instead of a tennis match.

     

    (VIDEO)
    Cape Fear, Martin Scorsese, Universal, 1991 [1.6 MB]

     

    Scorsese also inverts the Hitchcockian gambit. He takes another sequence from Strangers on a Train, in which Bruno appears to Guy, once again stiff and menacing as his is in the tennis match, but this time in front of the Jefferson Memorial.

     

    (VIDEO)
    Strangers on a Train, Alfred Hitchcock, Warner Bros., 1951 [.95 MB]

     

    Scorsese turns it into another nightmare vision. Sam Boden’s wife, Leigh, emerges from sleep to see Max Cady in a shower of fireworks (yet another Hitchcock quotation, this one from To Catch a Thief) in the dead of night.

     

    (VIDEO)
    Cape Fear, Martin Scorsese, Universal, 1991 [1.2 MB]

     

    There’s a terrific sense of play in Scorsese’s work of reclamation that is now transferred into the critical process. Images created and recalled become images recreated and compared. The imagination of the critic and the filmmaker become commingled. Even enhanced. We now see what the critic is talking about and, hopefully, understand how deeply films grow out of other films.

     

    And it’s quite possible to go beyond quoting images and actually intervene in their structure, inscribing the critical act within the images themselves. This is particularly useful in explaining how a filmmaker articulates narrative structure by framing and moving within a shot. A famous sequence from Welles’s Citizen Kane becomes an animated expression of the complex shiftings of narrative point of view as figures change position and dominate or become recessive in the frame.

     

    (VIDEO) (VIDEO)
    Citizen Kane, Orson Welles, RKO, 1941 [1.3 MB each]

     

    More than critical inquiry, this computer-assisted methodology becomes a kind of performance. The image is shared between filmmaker, critic, and reader, and its former inviolability is replaced by active intervention and presentation. The aura of the inviolable and inevitable text is diminished and the authority of the critic heightened by access.

     

  • Disembodying The Corpus: Postcolonial Pathology In Tsitsi Dangarembga’s ‘Nervous Conditions’

    Deepika Bahri

    School of Literature, Communication, and Culture
    Georgia Institute of Technology
    deepika.bahri@modlangs.gatech.edu

     

    Directing his “attention to the importance of two problems raised by Marxism and by anthropology concerning the moral and social significance of biological and physical ‘things,’” Michael Taussig argues in The Nervous System that “things such as the signs and symptoms of disease, as much as the technology of healing, are not ‘things-in-themselves,’ are not only biological and physical, but are also signs of social relations disguised as natural things, concealing their roots in human reciprocity” (83). If Taussig’s observation with regard to the cultural analysis of an illness and its treatment in the USA in 1978 is extrapolated to a very different scene but not so distant time, the machinations of illness in a fictional case study reveal the usually syncopated socio-personal reciprocity Taussig suggests. The scene is Rhodesia on the brink of its evolution into the nation now named after a ruined city in its southern part. The “subject” under analysis is Nyasha, the anorexic, teenage deuteragonist of Tsitsi Dangarembga’s 1988 novel Nervous Conditions (a title inspired by Sartre’s observation in the preface to The Wretched of the Earth, that the native’s is a nervous condition1). The novel, narrated in the first person by Nyasha’s cousin Tambu, catalogues the struggles of the latter to escape the impoverished and stifling atmosphere of the “homestead” in search of education and a better life, as well the efforts of other women in her family to negotiate their circumstances, offering the while a scathing critique of the confused and corrupt social structure they are a part of. Tambu’s movement from her homestead, which symbolizes rural decay, to the prosperous, urban mission of her uncle introduces us to a cast of characters scarred by encounters with the savagery of colonialism in the context of an indigenously oppressive socius. One of many characters in the novel suffering from a nervous condition, young Nyasha demonstrates in dramatic pathological form what appears to ail an entire socio-economic construct. If “the manifestations of disease are like symbols, and the diagnostician sees them and interprets them with an eye trained by the social determinants of perception” (Taussig 87), and if, as Susan Bordo argues in “The Body and Reproduction of Femininity,” “the bodies of disordered women . . . offer themselves as aggressively graphic text for the interpreter–a text that insists, actually demands, it be read as a cultural statement” (16), Nyasha’s diseased self suggests the textualized female body on whose abject person are writ large the imperial inscriptions of colonization, the intimate branding of patriarchy, and the battle between native culture, Western narrative, and her complex relationship with both. Not surprisingly, Nyasha’s response to this violence on the body is not only somatogenic but it is to manifest specifically that illness which will consume that body.

     

    The pathological consequences of colonization, signaled in the heightened synaptic activity which, according to Fanon, produces violence among colonized peoples, take shape in Nyasha in the need to target herself as the site on which to launch a terrorist attack upon the produced self. According to Sartre, the violence of the settlers contaminates the colonized, producing fury; failing to find an outlet, “it turns in a vacuum and devastates the oppressed creatures themselves” (18). The quest for an outlet takes grotesque forms in Nyasha through the physical symptomatology of disorder. But it would be entirely too simple to attribute her disease to the ills of colonization alone: Nyasha responds not only as native and Other, she responds as woman to the ratification of socially en-gendered native categories which conspire with colonial narratives to ensure her subjectivity. The implication of precapital and precolonial socio-economic systems in the postcolonial state, moreover, makes a simplistic oppositionality between colonizer/colonized meaningless. Her response to Western colonial narratives which enthrall as they distress at a time when she is also contending with her burgeoning sexuality in a repressed society, further complicate any efforts to understand and explain her pathology. Living on the edge of a body weakening from anorexia and bulimia, Nyasha’s involuntary reaction to the narratives competing for control over her, I would suggest, appears to be to systematically evacuate the materials ostensibly intended to sustain her, empty the body of signification and content to make “a body without organs” (BwO) in Deleuze and Guattari’s terminology, and thereby to reveal and dismantle (although never completely) the self diseased by both patriarchy and colonization. As Tambu’s narrative unfolds, the female body as text itself is being rewritten as protest, attempting to rid itself of the desires projected on it, even if hybrid subjectivity prevents it from purging them all.2 The “body talk” invoked in my reading, informed largely by postmodern (despite the “realist” mode of narration) and feminist concerns, also resonates with postcolonial, social, and psychological ones. Many of these approaches are of unlike ilk, and none of them can be explained fully within the scope of this essay. Rather, the interplay of these positions is used to shed light on a case that defies simple theoretical models. Readers will note the use in this essay of Western and non-Western theorists, often with widely ranging positionings: given the “hybrid” culture being described in the novel and the range of apparata necessary to understand Nyasha’s condition in terms that were medical as well as socio-political, feminist as well as postcolonial, physical as well as psychological, it seemed specious to confine the theoretical apparatus to non-Western theory or a particular feminist or postcolonial perspective. More importantly, it seemed less useful. None of these perspectives, however, preclude the analysis of body as metaphor and illness as symbol.

     

    Nyasha’s recourse to a stereotypically Western female pathological condition 3 to empty herself of food, the physical token of her anomie and a significant preoccupation of African life, is ironic and fitting as Dangarembga forces a collocation of native and colonial cultural concerns to complicate our ways of reading the postcolonial. Nyasha’s accusatory delirium, kamikaze behavior and oneiroid symptoms are at once symptomatic of a postcolonial and female disorder whereby the symptom is the cure, both exemplified in her refusal to occupy the honorary space allotted her by colonial and patriarchal narratives in which she is required to be but cannot be a good native and a good girl. This entails her rejection of food (metonymic token of a system that commodifies women’s bodies and labor and sustains male authority), of a socio-sexual code that is designed to prepare her for an unequal marriage market while repressing her sexuality, and of an educational system which has the potential to emancipate women and natives but functions, instead, to keep them in their place and even further exacerbate their ills.

     

    In “Killing the Hysteric in the Colonized’s House”, Sue Thomas has argued for a reading of the novel as a narrative of loss of cultural and maternal affiliations, invoking Grosz’s suggestion that hysteria is a tragic self-mutilation that symptomatizes inarticulable resistance (27). Hysterical overcompliance with domination, she suggests, characterizes all the major characters in the novel. While this is well substantiated in her essay, I will argue that the female body is a very particular space that is marked in ways that narrativize elaborate systems of production, cultural and economic. The recoding of these systems in the text, elaborated in the story of Tambu’s introduction into and misgivings about the cycle, the adult women’s struggles within it, and Nyasha’s articulation of structural imparities is a staging of these narratives in performative terms that bears illustrative witness to the violence done to the female body in the successive scenes of pre and postcolonial Zimbabwe. Nyasha’s war with patriarchal and colonial systems is fought on the turf of her own body, both because it is the scene of enactment of these systems and because it is the only site of resistance available. This reading suggests that the performativity of female resistance needs to be at the heart of a feminist postcolonial politics.

     

    It would be well to acknowledge the centrality of Dangarembga’s feminist agenda before attempting to transpose a postcolonial reading on the novel. In an interview with Rosemary Marangoly George and Helen Scott, the author claimed that her purpose was “to write things about ourselves in our own voices which other people can pick up to read. And I do think that Nervous Conditions is serving this purpose for young girls in Zimbabwe” (312). Tambudzai, the young female narrator’s missionary education tells only of “Ben and Betty in Town and Country” (27), not of her own people; Nervous Conditions is an attempt at telling Zimbabwean girls stories about themselves to counter the lingering narrative in which Zimbabwe remains a remote control neo-colony administered by toadies like Nyasha’s western educated father, Babamukuru and his ilk who are still “painfully under the evil wizard’s spell,” and will continue the colonial project (50). Women’s stories do not easily see the light of day in Zimbabwe because, according to Dangarembga, “the men are the publishers” and “it seems very difficult for men to accept the things that women write and want to write about” (qtd. in George 311). These stories, however, must be told. Early in the novel, Tambu tells us that the novel is not about death though it begins with the ironic admission “I was not sorry when my brother died” (1); rather it is about “my escape and Lucia’s; about my mother’s and Maiguru’s entrapment; and about Nyasha’s rebellion [which] may not in the end have been successful” (1). The postcolonial critic should be wary that any overarching theory proposed be mediated by Dangarembga’s emphasis on the feminist preoccupations of the story for the novel ends with the reminder: “the story I have told here, is my own story, the story of four women whom I loved, and our men, this story is how it all began” (204). That the novel opens with the prefiguring of her brother Nhamo’s death to make way for Tambu’s tale is a poignant reminder of the symbolic starting point of female narrative. Far from making a postcolonial reading less tenable, however, Dangarembga’s feminist proclivities are useful in explaining the dense nature of power relations in the postcolonial world in a way that colonial discourse (including western feminist discourse) typically fails to do.

     

    In Third World Women and the Politics of Feminism, Chandra Talpade Mohanty complains that Western feminists “homogenize and systematize” third world woman, creating a single dimensional picture. They also assume a “singular, monolithic notion of patriarchy” which is reductive. Ultimately, “Western feminisms appropriate and ‘colonize’ the fundamental complexities and conflicts which characterize the lives of women of different classes, religions, cultures, races and castes in these countries” (335). Dangarembga’s representation of women of different ages, classes, educational qualifications, and economic capacities, makes composite and reductive sketches of the third world woman if not impossible, difficult. The women in this novel are neither simply victims, nor inherently more noble than the men; rather, their stories illustrate the difficulty of separating problem and solution, perpetrator and victim, cause and effect. That they are uniquely positioned to bear the brunt of native and colonial oppression, however, is vividly demonstrated: even issues of class and status are ultimately subservient to and informed by a pervasive but complex phallocentric order; this Tambu clarifies when she marvels at “the way all the conflicts came back to this question of femaleness” (116). The patriarchal order is supported by the colonial project, pre and post capitalist economy, and what we may call, for lack of a better phrase, traditional cultural codes. By layering gender politics with the atrophying discourse of colonialism, Dangarembga obliges us to recognize that the power structure is a contradictory amalgam of complicity and helplessness–where colonizer and colonized, men and women collude to produce their psycho-pathological, in a word, “nervous” conditions. What ails Nyasha, then, is not simply an eating problem but a rampant disorder in the socio-cultural complex that determines her fate as woman and native on the eve of the birth of a new nation.

     

    The novel dramatizes the intersections of personal and national history on the one hand 4 and the feminist and postcolonial on the other through Nyasha’s attempts to escape her own assigned narrative as woman and colonized subject. Colonialism, capitalism, and patriarchal national culture conspire to produce an imperiled Nyasha and a nation in crisis. Symptoms of the latter abound in the repetitive images of rural poverty, female disempowerment, and continuing colonialism in educational and economic institutions while Nyasha’s crisis is evident in her hysteric, nervous condition and endangered body. Given this, one could read Nyasha’s story as yet another vignette of victimage, but, apart from Dangarembga’s own criticism of such a narrative, 5 there are other reasons for reading it as a text of possibilities for survival, agency, and re-creation. Several third world feminist critics reject the discourse of victimage in feminist and minority discourse. Mohanty objects in “Under Western Eyes” to the “construction of ‘Third World Women’ as a homogeneous ‘powerless’ group often located as implicit victims of particular socio-economic systems” (338). Spivak complains that “There is a horrible, horrible thing in minority discourse which is a competition for maximum victimization . . . . That is absolutely meretricious.”6 This is not to say that Nyasha is not victimized but to acknowledge that it is quite another thing to cast her as victim. Western feminists also recognize this distinction: Naomi Wolf’s recent Fire with Fire, for instance, issues a call to women to eschew the rhetoric of victimage. Nyasha is conscious of victimization but hardly content to remain a victim; regardless of the caliber or effectiveness of her methods of opposition, she/her body are the enunciation of protest against and the story of victimization. A reading of Nyasha as victim fails for another interesting reason: this is because the text reveals the ways in which she is quite complicit with the oppressive order she so abhors. In this sense, too, she emerges less as victim than as the mediated product of a conflicted narrative.

     

    Reading female praxis as narrative of relative “agency,” in The Beauty Myth Naomi Wolf tells us that anorexia and bulimia begin “as sane and mentally healthy responses to an insane social reality: that most women can feel good about themselves only in a state of permanent semistarvation” (198), although it is not the myth of female beauty alone that contaminates Nyasha–she is rejecting the very basic processes, the business of living in a colonized world where she shares the dual onus of being colonized and female. Wolf also tells us that “Eating diseases are often interpreted as symptomatic of a neurotic need for control. But surely it is a sign of mental health to try to control something that is trying to control you” (198). Nyasha leaves us in no doubt that she is aware of the oppressive forces that seek to bend her to their will. In one of her many pedagogic moments, she warns Tambu that “when you’ve seen different things you want to be sure you’re adjusting to the right thing. You can’t go on all the time being whatever’s necessary. You’ve got to have some conviction . . . . Once you get used to it, it’s natural to carry on and become trapped” and then it becomes clear that “they control everything you do” (117). Hardly, it would seem, is this the language or sensibility of a passive victim. Nyasha’s potential for agency cannot be acknowledged until one understands that the “[body] still remains the threshold for the transcendence of the subject” (Braidotti 151). Through the diseased female body as text is made visible the violence of history, and through its spontaneous bodily resistance, the possibilities for rupturing and remaking that text. Control over the body is a gesture of denial of representative abject/subject status for Nyasha since “the proliferation of discourses about life, the living organism, and the body is coextensive with the dislocation of the very basis of the human subject’s representation” (151).

     

    The teleology of Nyasha’s anorexic and bulimic practices is intimately linked to her revulsion at the mandate to represent herself as good girl and good native in particular instances of infractions against her sense of self in the novel. Tambu speaks of the time Babamukuru confiscates Nyasha’s copy of D.H. Lawrence’s Lady Chatterley’s Lover which is objectionable for its depiction of female sexuality. Appalled at this invasion of her rights, and what might be seen as a persistent barrier to her development into sexual agent rather than sexualized commodity, Nyasha, indicating the etiology of her symptoms, refuses to eat for the first time in the novel (83). Tambu next alerts us to Nyasha’s quiet rejection of her meal when she is scolded by her father for not responding to her primary school headmaster and thereby shaming him; it is Tambu who tells us that her cousin’s behavior stems from her dislike of being spoken in the third person, because “it made her feel like an object” (99). In preparing for her Standard Six exams, too, Nyasha loses her appetite, signaling the much greater apotheosis of internal conflict to follow at her O-levels. Her withdrawal from the family and rejection of food after the confrontation over her late arrival from the school dance, and subsequently on another later arrival from school where she has stayed to study, then, comes as no surprise. Layered in between these specific instances are general references to Nyasha’s disdain of fatty foods in the interest of maintaining a more desirable body shape; this quest for “commodification” as an attractive object is not recognized by her as destructive and, interestingly, is not textually linked directly to starvation or anorexia. Instead, the usually appearance-centered practices of anorexia and bulimia become narrativized as artful, if grotesque, protest that will prevent Nyasha’s maturation into full fledged commodified “womanhood,” even as she embraces the abjection that comes from seeking a “pre-objectal relationship,” becoming separated from her own body “in order to be” (Kristeva 10).7

     

    The question of control is focal and must be located within the matrix of complex power relations to understand the significance of Nyasha’s rebellion. 8 Patriarchal society, colonial imperialism, and capitalist economy function by controlling and commodifying the subject’s body and labor; the female subject in this cultural and social economy, well documented in Nervous Conditions, is assessed by the ability to reproduce (she goes into labor), to provide sexual release (the labors of love), and to work (home, farm, market labor). Prostitution and pimping are extreme representations of the annexation of female labor while the marital institution within oppressive narratives is a quotidian, usually sanctioned, appropriation. Female labor in this novel denotes a woman’s exchange value in the socio-familial and matrimonial economy. It is necessary to understand the role of female labor in the novel and the reason why it is not available as a site of resistance to grasp fully the implications of Nyasha’s default choice of the physical body as the locus for rebellion. Women are not only expected to work and work for men, their value and worth are determined by work, although it does not make them “valuable” in any intrinsic, meaningful sense. In “Re-examining Patriarchy as a Mode of Production: The Case of Zimbabwe,” Cindy Courville explains that “women’s exploitation and oppression were structured in terms of political, economic, and social relations of the Shona and Ndebele societies” (34). Under colonial capitalism, however, women became the “‘proletariat’ of the proletariats, becoming more subordinated in the new socio-economic schemes, and often losing their old and meaningful roles within the older production processes” (Ogundipe-Leslie 108).

     

    Tambu reveals that “the needs and sensibilities of the women in my family were not considered a priority, or even legitimate” (12). Women are intended to enable men to attain value through their labor: Netsai and Tambu, therefore, must labor so their brother Nhamo can attend school. They may not enjoy the fruits of their own labor: “under both traditional and colonial law, they [African women] were denied ownership and control of the land and the goods they produced. It was the unpaid labor of women and children which subsidized the colonial wage” (Courville 38). Nhamo, in fact, steals Tambu’s labor–the maize she has been growing in a scant spare time to buy an education–and squanders it in gifts to friends, while her father steals her prospects by keeping the money Babamukuru has sent him for Tambu’s school bills.9 Interestingly, while the maize does serve to keep her in school, 10 and later allows her admission to the mostly White Sacred Heart Convent, we can assume from her aunt Maiguru’s trajectory and her own pursuit of it that she will continue to be schooled in the ways of a societal economy that will use her labor to support and enable the colonial and patriarchal order which will deny her, as it has Maiguru, the fruits of that labor. Maiguru, the most educated woman in the novel, is just as qualified as her husband Babamukuru (a little publicized fact that surprises Tambu when she learns of it) and just as instrumental in helping to maintain the mission lifestyle that Nhamo and Tambu find so dazzling, but her knowledge and her labor are never acknowledged: they have been annexed to serve a societal order which awards the fruits of that knowledge and labor as well as the associated prestige to Babamukuru, lending him authority, as a result, over the entire extended family, including his older brother. Babamukuru, in effect, has “stolen” her labor to enhance his position. To the untrained eye Maiguru appears to be incapable of suffering because she “lived in the best of all possible circumstances, in the best of all possible worlds” as Tambu says, ironically echoing Candide’s unfortunate and misguided philosopher Pangloss. To this Nyasha replies that “such things could only be seen” (142). Education, then, which might free women like Maiguru from service to capitalism and patriarchy becomes yet another token of exchange, further alienating them from the “home” economy of agricultural subsistence in favor of urban wage service.11 When she and her husband return to their uneducated, struggling relatives, it is to further heighten the impoverishment of the homestead, and the need to escape from it. It is Nyasha who points out that the education of solitary family members will not solve the ills of rural poverty: “there’ll always be brothers and mealies and mothers too tired to clean latrines. Whether you go to the convent or not. There’s more to be done than that,” she tells Tambu who believes that education will “lighten” their burdens (179). Near the end of the novel, Tambu herself wonders, “but what use were educated young ladies on the homestead? Or at the mission?” (199). Admittedly comprehension has only begun to dawn on her at that stage, but a fuller realization seems to be clearly indicated.

     

    Babamukuru, his young nephew Nhamo, and son Chido, however, embrace colonial capitalism and education because they are usually compatible with and in fact, uphold traditional patriarchy. Courville tells us that “the colonial state sanctioned and institutionalized the political and legal status of African women as minors and/or dependents subject to male control” (37). Educational degrees, in this economy, are fodder for men’s appetites for control. Witness the following scene. On his return from England, Babamukuru is comically greeted by a rousing chorus of admirers who extol his abilities, while ignoring Maiguru’s comparable achievements: “Our father and benefactor has returned appeased, having devoured English letters with a ferocious appetite! Did you think degrees were indigestible? If so, look at my brother. He has digested them” (36). Indeed, men can digest degrees as well as the food prepared by women since both sustain their stature while failing to “nourish” the women. Their lot, educational status notwithstanding, is defined by service to and for men. Courville claims that while “some social aspects of African patriarchy were repugnant to European culture . . . colonial authorities recognized the significance of patriarchal power in mobilizing the labor of women” (38). That none of the women in the novel ever refuse their labor is no oddity since we learn that female labor may not be and is not withheld for fear of punishment; Netsai’s failure to carry her empty-handed brother’s bags at Tambu’s suggestion, for instance, results in a sound thrashing and her conclusion that she should have just done it “in the first place” (10). Nor is Nhamo’s behavior unusual; while Tambu acknowledges that “Nhamo was not interested in being fair,” she insists he was not being obnoxious, merely behaving “in the expected manner” (12). Netsai, needless to say, never refuses to carry his bags again. Even Tambu, who appears to demonstrate a keen sense of outrage at the injustice of a patriarchal order while at the homestead, participates in all the labor intensive tasks on the homestead while the men await service. One of the few instances of her failure to be a “good girl,” evident to her uncle in her refusal to attend the Christian ceremony that is to sanction her parents’ otherwise “sinful” marriage of many years–an embarrassing and humiliating proposition to Tambu, is also, predictably, punished with a beating and a sentence of domestic labor; interestingly, before she issues an outright refusal, Tambu confesses to a muscular inability to leave her bed, prompting her uncle to ask if she is “ill” and then to dismiss Maiguru’s affirmative response with injunctions to get the girl dressed; this event is an adroit linking in the novel of its major themes, revealing the nexus of relations between illness, body, labor, colonialism, patriarchy, and the female subject.

     

    Nyasha, too, who is seen laboring on the homestead along with the other women, including Maiguru, at the family’s Christmas gathering, is clearly being prepared for a lifetime of service to the men in her life despite her relatively privileged economic status. Since labor cannot be denied in the phallocratic order–at least not with impunity, the body then becomes the site of conflict for control. I realize that the dichotomy between labor and the body here is problematic since it is the body that labors, but in this instance we need to separate the two to recognize the extent to which Nyasha’s body as text is scripted, and how that text might be reinscribed as protest.

     

    In a certain sense, Nyasha’s understanding of bodily dimensions has been shaped, if not determined, by her brief exposure in England to the Western desire for the “svelte, sensuous” womanly frame (197); she is preoccupied with her own figure and urges her unofficial pupil Tambu not to eat too much (192). Her sense of the ideal self, then, has already been appropriated by an aesthetic that does not recognize the wide-hipped, muscle bound female form as beautiful; this same constitutional African female frame is prized for its capacity to produce labor and to signal the subject’s relatively superior status because it suggests that the subject is well-fed, a beautiful thing in societies that experience food shortages. Tambu and Nyasha’s aunt Lucia, for instance, “managed somehow to keep herself plump in spite of her tribulations . . . . And Lucia was strong. She could cultivate a whole acre single-handed without rest”; these twin attributes qualify her as an “inviting prospect” to Takesure, Tambu’s father, and, Dangarembga hints, Babamukuru (127). Nyasha’s attraction to the Western ideal of femininity must be mediated, then, by her understanding of the exploitative usurpation of the healthy African female body. On a visit to the homestead, Tambu’s mother, Mainini, pinches Nyasha’s breast after remarking that “the breasts are already quite large” and then asking when she is to bring them a son-in-law (130). Nyasha’s pathology and her belief that “angles were more attractive than curves” (135), I would insist, is not simply rooted in her desire for slimness (which it might be) but also in a rejection of the rounded contours of the adult female body primed for the Shona matrimonial and social economy.

     

    The role of food as a pawn in this struggle for control over the body is a crucial one. Wolf notes that “Food is the primal symbol of social worth. Whom a society values, it feeds well” and “Publicly apportioning food is about determining power relations” (189). She concludes that: “Cross-culturally, men receive hot meals, more protein, and the first helpings of a dish, while women eat the cooling leftovers, often having to use deceit and cunning to get enough to eat” (190-91). This pattern is made amply clear at the Christmas reunion at the homestead where Babamukuru and Maiguru provide the victuals. Maiguru jealously guards the meat, insisting that the rotting meat be cooked and served despite its tell-tale green color, but not to the patriarchy who are served from meat that has been stored in the somewhat small refrigerator. The able women at the homestead must cook and serve the dwindling food, eating last and little, typically without complaint. They, in fact, sleep in the kitchen but their labor produced in their assigned space is not theirs to enjoy, except as scraps.

     

    In Babamukuru’s household, women do not eat least although they must wait till he is served. Even here, Maiguru replicates the practices of the homestead, fawning over her husband and eating his leftovers. Babamukuru puts out a token protest at her servility, following it up with a rebuke to Nyasha for helping herself to the rice before he is quite finished. He, nevertheless, prides himself on his table and would have been gratified by wide-eyed and poorly-fed Tambu’s silent observation that “no one who ate from such a table could fail to grow fat and healthy” (69). In this case, however, it is important to note that the ability to provide plentifully gives Babamukuru prestige even though Maiguru’s labor is just as important in accounting for the ample table. Refusal to eat at such a table is tantamount to a direct challenge to his authority. He repeatedly insists that Nyasha “must eat her food, all of it” or he will “stop providing for her–fees, clothes, food, everything” (189). Given this, it may be somewhat easier to understand Nyasha’s inability to stomach the food intended to “develop” her into a valuable commodity for the market, and to serve as a token doled out to enhance her father’s stature and to exercise his control over her, exhibited in multiple other ways as well.

     

    Babamukuru is obsessed with control in general, control over women in particular, and control over his girl-becoming-woman daughter, how much she eats, how she dresses and speaks to the elders in the family, how often and how much she talks with boys, and what she reads, all measures designed to fashion her into a “decent” woman. Perhaps it might be more accurate to add that he is “pathetically” obsessed, being himself implicated in a societal system that puts men of means and education in the slot of caretaker and guardian so he must maintain and improve, juggling old and new ways, or find his own position as “good boy” (defined by a different but no less compelling rubric) jeopardized. Nyasha’s body and her mind, then, are pressed into Babamukuru’s strangely distorted project of asserting his control and preserving his status in society lest it be challenged: “I am respected in this mission,” he announces, “I cannot have a daughter who behaves like a whore” (114). Nyasha’s questionable behavior, punished with a merciless beating, consists of coming in ten minutes later than her brother Chido–who is not subject to the same rules anyway–and cousin Tambu–who seldom challenges her uncle’s authority or taxes him with the need to exert it–from a school dance. The survival of patriarchal ideology, of which Babamukuru is torchbearer, depends on its enactment on Nyasha’s very person. This should not be surprising since, in postcolonial terms, the female body has often been the space where “traditional” cultural practices that ensure male control over it, encoded in words like “decency,” must be preserved. Babamukuru chooses which parts of traditional culture and modernity (represented through colonial education and ways) Nyasha is to adopt and exhibit to maximize his status as colonial surrogate and de facto clan elder–a schema analogous to his acceptance of Maiguru’s earnings (the fruit of her Western education), while insisting on her compliance with the traditional requirement of wifely obedience. The claims of traditional society, of colonial and precolonial modes of production, and of western aesthetics on Nyasha’s body, I would argue, together produce her pathological response. Fanon’s contention that “colonialism in its essence was already taking on the aspect of a fertile purveyor for psychiatric disorders” (249) must be complicated by the observation that it is not only the colonial war Nyasha is fighting on the turf of her body but also a battle with the megalomaniacal patriarchal control represented by Babamukuru of whom she says: “Sometimes I feel like I am trapped by that man” (174). Her “anti-colonial” war, moreover, is complicated by her own collusion with the corrupt system she is fighting–her unwillingness to relinquish the accent acquired from her brief stay in England, her criticism of the racist dominion of colonizers while remaining standoffish with her compatriots at school, and the lack of effort at regaining her native language or contact with homestead relatives–visible to Tambu but unacknowledged, or unknown to her except in her sense of herself as “hybrid,” is also a factor in the war of ideas and values being narrativized on her corporeal bodily space. Nyasha, “who thrived on inconsistencies,” according to Tambu, seems to internalize the conflicts posed by her surroundings till her tongue, body, and mind seem together to want to carry the struggle to a dramatic conclusion (116).

     

    The body under siege, then, is not surprisingly the space for resistance. Moreover, Nyasha has exhausted the options for legitimate engagement with oppression through official means. Having attempted and failed at reasoning with her father, no “usual” recourse remains. In her view, other adult women in the novel offer no viable alternatives. Nyasha is quite certain that her “mother doesn’t want to be respected. If people did that they’d have nothing to moan about” (78-79). Having witnessed her mother Maiguru’s feeble and feckless flutters for freedom, when she briefly runs away to her brother’s only to return five days later,12 Nyasha, who elsewhere concedes that her mother is rather “sensible,” must look for other means of resistance. Maiguru’s state of “entrapment,” foretold for the reader in the very beginning of the novel, and reflected in her admission that she chose “security” over “self,” is precisely what Nyasha is seeking to avoid. Aunt Lucia, too, who is supposed to be an unmanageable free spirit and, commendably, rejects her paramour Takesure’s questionable support, ultimately disappoints Nyasha by resorting to propitiate Babamukuru. To Nyasha’s complaint that “she’s been groveling ever since she arrived to get Daddy to help her out. That sort of thing shouldn’t be necessary,” Lucia pragmatically responds, “Babamukuru wanted to be asked, so I asked. And now we both have what we wanted” (160). Nyasha fails to appreciate that Lucia’s strategies are essential to her. In the final tally, Maiguru, “married” to patriarchy, and Tambu’s mother, too tired and too traditional to engage in a sustained struggle with it, her mind never being hers to make up, remain trapped (153) while Tambu–with her “finely tuned survival system” (65), and Lucia are the ones who will “escape,” both having learned the value of survival and relative empowerment over enactments of dramatic protest, but effecting their escape in different ways. But then Nyasha does not have the benefit of hindsight endowed on the reader by Tambu’s prefiguring of the fate of the women in the story. Her critique of women’s ingratiating and subservient ways, however, is instructive.

     

    The implication of women in oppressive cultural codes–the craft and guile evident in their quest for survival and advancement–is undeniably an issue here. Women provide the mainstay of patriarchal structures. In her novel, Le Pique-nique sur l’Acropole, Louky Bersianik presents a stunning embodiment of female complicity in the image of women as petrified pillars supporting the temple of Erectheion in Athens. Acropolis, the bastion and symbol of traditional Western patriarchal thought is the site of a long male banquet at which women have served as handmaidens. The homestead and the mission, too, are a picnic for men that women will cater. Maiguru, Lucia, and Tambu’s sporadic gestures of resistance are ultimately “permissible” infractions because they are followed by propitiatory gestures consonant with compliant performances of femininity and so do not seriously challenge the extant order; they “play” the system and attempt to prevail within rather than without it, ultimately gaining some modicum of satisfaction by way of security, a job, or an education–none of which, we are being told through Nyasha’s expostulations and actions, is adequate compensation. A propos of this issue, however, is the observation that Nyasha herself seems to decide to give in to Babamukuru’s authority because “it is restful to have him pleased (196). The strategies adopted by Maiguru and Lucia–and on occasion Nyasha herself–are survivalist in nature in contrast to her ultimate recourse to violent and destructive ones. Her seeming acquiescence toward her father–a survivalist tactic–is followed, however, by a more solipsistic, private regimen of rebellion: she tells Tambu “that she had embarked on a diet, to discipline [her] body and occupy [her] mind” (197). The diet and the disease become for her a holy mission; Rudolph Bell in Holy Anorexia “relates the disease to the religious impulses of medieval nuns, seeing starvation as purification” (qtd. in Wolf 189). To borrow Fanon’s words yet again, “this pathology is considered as a means whereby the organism responds to, in other words adapts itself to, the conflict it is faced with, the disorder being at the same time a symptom and a cure” (290).13 Or as Wolf puts it, “The anorexic refuses to let the official cycle master her: By starving, she masters it” (198). Taking recourse to anorexia and bulimia then becomes for Nyasha a pathetic means of both establishing control over her body in the only way possible and relinquishing control by giving in to a learned western pathology.

     

    But let us pause. There are two issues of import here: a.) rejection of food has already been read in terms beyond the vocabulary only of anorexia and bulimia; b.) it is not only food that is being rejected by the bodily organism. With regard to the first, let us remember that Tambu’s mother also abjures food to protest her departure for the mission at first, and then Sacred Heart because she thinks education and English-ness will kill Tambu as it has Nhamo (184). Before her departure for the mission, Tambu speculates that “at Babamukuru’s I would have the leisure . . . to consider questions that had to do with survival of the spirit, the creation of consciousness, rather than mere sustenance of the body,” the latter having been a considerable preoccupation for homestead women (59). That Nyasha can afford the luxury of refusing food is certainly relevant, but it becomes less significant in light of Mainini’s gesture. Refusal to eat is a time honored and cross-cultural form of protest. Gandhi’s program of Satyagraha14 and fasting were pivotal in India’s fight for freedom. It is interesting to pose the case of a teenage girl, hyper-conscious of the territorial offenses against her, along the same spectrum of protest activity that accommodates Gandhi’s lofty project of non-cooperation. The difference is that female lives are usually confined to the private sphere; female protests usually do not find outlet in public ways although one might argue that “the distinction between what is public and what is private is always a subtle one,” especially if one reads the female body as implicated in the economy of male and societal desire (Strachey 66). And lest we overlook the obvious, Nyasha, after all, is only fourteen years old when she begins to stage her gestures of protest.

     

    Her rejection of food is linked to a whole set of other associated unpalatable realities: the anorexic herself tells us that the fuss is about something else altogether, “it’s more than that really, more than just food. That’s how it comes out, but really it’s all the things about boys and men and being decent and indecent and good and bad” (190). Nyasha’s commodity status in the sexual economy, for instance, is exposed implicitly through her anorexic behavior intended to erode the body and prevent its blossoming into womanhood; but it is also exposed explicitly in a discussion on “private parts” between the cousins. The suppression of her sexuality at the same time that she is being groomed for an equipoisal matrimonial market, her fear that a tampon is the only thing that will enter her vaginal orifice “at this rate,” and her recommendations, albeit playful, to Tambu about the relative advantages of losing one’s virginity to the sanitary device rather than to an insensitive braggart, suggest the disbalancement of the market system that would ensue, should the girls choose to transform sexual restriction into abstinence or “devalue” themselves by accidentally rupturing their precious membranes (119; 96). The threat is a potent one because virginity is desirable in unmarried women and functions symbolically, with “the powers and dangers credited to social structure reproduced in small on the human body” (Douglas 11). The vulvic crime Nyasha gestures at has the content of a vaginal betrayal of the patrimonial body of the state–it is the denial of heterosexual exchange, of the preservation of expected social narratives. While there is no textual evidence of her having lost her virginity thus, Nyasha’s larger project of making the body itself disappear by denying it nourishment tacitly promises to accomplish something of the same objective.

     

    Tested, tried, and unsuccessful as “good girl,” it remains for Nyasha to fail as “good native.” Confronted with her “O” level exams, Nyasha transforms a test situation into a veritable trial of the soul, testing the very mettle of history. Attracted and repelled in almost equal measure by colonial educational and cultural systems, Nyasha reacts in a foreseeably conflicted manner to the variety of concerns weighing on her mind: she becomes obsessed with passing the exams which will test her on the colonizer’s version of knowledge even while she is aware that this education is a “gift” of her father’s status, and the “knowledge” itself is questionable. As her body spurns food, her mind is rejecting what the colonizers have called knowledge, and evincing a hysteric, physical revulsion to “their history. Fucking liars. Their bloody lies” (201). Nyasha’s “body language” is as loud and clear as her words for she is tearing her book to shreds with her teeth as she rages. But what is the substitute? Dangarembga explains that “one of the problems that most Zimbabwean people of my generation have is that we really don t have a tangible history we can relate to” (qtd. in Wilkinson 190-91). Not available to Nyasha are the (his)stories heard in whispers from the margins, in the brief accounts given by Tambu’s grandmother15 who speaks of the history that “could not be found in the textbooks” (17), about the “wizards” who were avaricious and grasping and annexed Babamukuru’s spirit: “They thought he was a good boy, cultivable, in the way that land is, to yield harvests that sustain the cultivator” (19). The knowledge she has been fed is less easily digested by Nyasha than it is by the good native, Babamukuru, although he too, incidentally, suffers from bad nerves. Nyasha’s protest transpires exponentially: “They’ve trapped us. But I won’t be trapped. I’m not a good girl” (201). The moral content of “goodness,” like the symbolic content of “womanhood,” are recognized by Nyasha as inherently bankrupt. Her acute sensibility scans “goodness” as a managerial tool, rather than a moral imperative, that keeps women and natives in line. Ironically, Nyasha’s dramatic indictment of colonial education, delivered in the language and in an approximation of the accent of the colonizer, speaks eloquently of an embattled and muddled consciousness attempting to regain control. Nyasha fails in multiple ways as “good native”: both in her failure to accept the totality of colonial education and in her failure to renounce it completely.

     

    Ultimately, then, food is only the metonymic representation of all that Nyasha cannot accept and understand. Her dwindling body boldly enacts the pervasive and aggregate suffering and bewilderment of colonized women caught between opposing as well as joined forces. Clearly, she also does not have the stomach for the deception and lies of the colonial project or the pathetic mimicry of this project by natives like Babamukuru and his confused and endearment mouthing consort, Maiguru. “It’s bad enough,” she laments, “when . . . a country gets colonised, but when the people do as well!” (147). Having learned the discourse of equality and freedom, young and confused though she might be, Nyasha recognizes that the native has failed to adopt the more salubrious aspects of Western humanism. The truth is that natives could learn different lessons from colonial education. Instead, the overwhelming preoccupation with food and food presentation, the “eyeing and coveting” of dresses outside the mission church, Tambu’s visualization of a convent education in terms of a smart and clean “white blouse and dark-red pleated terylene skirt, with blazer and gloves, and a hat” (183), the ritualized attention to hierarchy at gatherings, unbridled materialism and lust for goods and items of “comfort and ease and rest” evident in the mission as Tambu catalogues Babamukuru and Maiguru’s household effects (70), the incongruous adoption of western diet and the presence and prevalence of a servile, laboring class in the very hearth of the mission, among other symptoms of a community in crisis, testify to endemic class divisions heightened by a total capitulation to commodity fetishism. The embrace of selective items of Westernization by Babamukuru and others, even Nyasha, to the exclusion of its more useful possibilities is exposed throughout the novel. The potential for communicating the principles and values of Western education is clear to Babamukuru who does not approve of Tambu’s desire to go to the mostly white school because association with white people would cause girls “to have too much freedom,” a consequence incompatible with their eminently desirable development into “decent women” appropriate for the marriage market (180).

     

    At the same time that the potential for emancipation promised by the colonial encounter is left frustrate by the natives’ refusal to accept the better part of western humanism, the failure of colonizers themselves to exercise those same principles which serve to legitimize their sense of superiority over “less civilized” natives is exposed through Nyasha’s revolt. Nadel and Curtis explain the psychology of colonial dominion in their introduction to Imperialism and Colonialism: “Underlying all forms of imperialism is the belief–at times unshakable–of the imperial agent or nation in an inherent right, based on moral superiority as well as material might, to impose its pre-eminent values and techniques on the ‘inferior’ indigenous nation or society” (1). In The Conquest of America: The Question of the Other, Tzvetan Todorov demonstrates that colonialism exerts its control by extending the principle of equality only when it withholds from its Others the principle of difference. Principles of democracy, freedom, and independence, that fueled the American and French revolutions as well as reforms in much of the Western world did not, for instance, stand in the way of colonialism. Nor did concessions to minorities in the developed world encourage officials to extend the same to colonized subjects. The excesses of African patriarchy, for instance, which repulsed European sensibilities, were tolerated “in the interest of colonial profit” while the condemnation of polygynous marriages resulted not from a concern for women but from a need “for the reproduction of the labor force” (Courville 38). These contradictions are glaringly obvious to young Nyasha. The colonizer’s formula for accommodating the native, as she astutely observes, is to create “an honorary space in which you could join them and they could make sure you behaved yourself” (178); “But, she insisted, one ought not to occupy that space. Really, one ought to refuse” (179).

     

    The net impact of Nyasha’s “refusal” seems less important than that in her, Dangarembga has offered not only a textbook example of the havoc wrought by colonial and patriarchal systems, but a narrativization of the body itself in terms of conflict and resistance and its angry longing for a better, less perplexing world. In bodily terms, Nyasha almost succeeds in destroying herself, in achieving, if not the body without organs–which is admittedly unrealizable anyway, at least a grotesquely unhealthy remainder of her original self. The anorexic, after all, is effectively unwomanned and left a shell of herself: “the woman has been killed off in her. She is almost not there” (Wolf 197). But the woman that dies is the abject self that has never enjoyed the luxury of self-determination, that is no real woman but an insubstantial changeling who functions as token and currency in the labor and matrimonial market. Nyasha’s pathological persona enacts a multi-pronged assault on a complex and interwoven system that involves the body and the mind, patriarchy and the female body, colonialism and history, reinscribing the text of history and psycho-social sexuality, of Corpus and Socius (Deleuze and Guattari 150). Nyasha has attempted an attack on the corporeal to annihilate the symbolic. What is left is the BwO which is “what remains when you take everything away. What you take away is precisely the phantasy, and signifiances [sic] and subjectifications as a whole” (151). Whether the violence of her rebellion has left her more “stratified–organized, signified, subjected” must be determined in light of the only choices that remained; for finding out how to make the BwO is “a question of life and death, youth and old age, sadness and joy. It is where everything is played out” (161;151).

     

    Nyasha’s offensive against her bodily self reenacts the narrative of violence on woman and native while at the same time gesturing at the possibility of agency: signaling from the bathroom and the bedroom (her favorite retreats) that a more pervasive insurgence, a more public and widespread struggle by women for freedom from the patriarchal and colonial order may be soon to follow. This promise is manifested not only in Tambu and Lucia’s “escape,” but in recent campaigns against female abuse in Zimbabwe and organized assistance for abused and disenfranchised women. These struggles must be recognized no matter what shape they are in; a responsible reading must reinstate female praxis to a central place in feminist and postcolonial politics. Given such a reading, one might say that regardless of the fact that Tambu is mildly disapproving of her cousin’s behavior, the text of Nyasha’s “bodybildungsroman” (in Kathy Acker’s memorable neologism) does tell Zimbabwean girls stories about themselves in terms that expose the crises they are likely to encounter. Nyasha’s condition reveals to her cousin her own impending crisis; when the cornerstone of one’s security begins to “crumble,” she admits that “You start worrying about yourself” (199). The import of Nyasha’s theatrics might be measured in terms of its placement within the larger context of female and postcolonial existence in a society struggling to reconcile competing and conflicted narratives. The promise of something gained is evident in the textual arrangement of the narrative as well, in the parting words of Tambu, who had once said “it did not take long for me to learn that they [Whites] were in fact more beautiful [than Blacks] and then I was able to love them” (104), and who at the end of the novel ominously remarks that “seeds do grow” (203) and “something in my mind began to assert itself” (204). The novel, after all, is a kunstler and bildungsroman which catalogues Tambu’s maturation even as she functions as the amanuensis of Nyasha’s performances. Tambu’s changing consciousness is the stuff of hope; it is no less than the promise of a different text, a whole new corpus, in the future.

     

    Notes

     

    1. “The status of ‘native’ is a nervous condition introduced and maintained by the settler among colonized people with their consent” (20).

     

    2. For this last realization, I am indebted to my friend Ritch Calvin\Koons who collaborated with me on a performance dialogue on the novel at the International Conference on Narrative Literature in Vancouver in 1994.

     

    3. Nyasha begins to engage in starvation (anorexic) and purging (bulimic) activities when she is fourteen. Anorexia and bulimia are provisionally being described as Western female pathologies because, according to Naomi Wolf, “Anorexia and bulimia are female maladies: From 90 to 95 percent of anorexics and bulimics are women” and most Western women can be called, twenty years into the backlash, mental anorexics (181; 183). I would suggest that industrialization and development in the ersatz third-world countries and contact with “first world” cultures may be producing a similar profile among women in the developing world although research in this area remains scant. Nyasha’s illness, interestingly enough, is not recognized by a white psychiatrist because “Africans did not suffer in the way we had described” (201). At a conference in November 1993, I heard a graduate student paper on anorexia based on research for her dissertation. The student had been interviewing women anorexics in western countries and was surprised when I suggested that she might investigate instances in the non-western parts of the world. She had never considered the possibility. For the moment, it would appear, anorexia and bulimia remain western preserves.

     

    4. This is noted by Sally McWilliams in her analysis of the novel: “Their [Nyasha and Tambu’s] personal histories are undergoing radical repositioning at the same time as their political histories are altering” (111).

     

    5. In her interview with George and Scott, the author states, “Western literary analysis always calls Nyasha self-destructive, but I’m not sure whether she is self-destructive” (314).

     

    6. Forthcoming interview. See complete reference in “Works Cited.”

     

    7. Kristeva suggests that the ultimate abjection occurs at the moment of birth, “in the immemorial violence with which a body becomes separated from another body in order to be” (10).

     

    8. This paper does not discuss colonialism and patriarchy as pathologies although this aspect of all projects of domination is an important one to bear in mind nor does it investigate the case of Babamukuru as controlled by colonial education and traditional cultural codes–fruitful subjects for quite another discussion.

     

    9. Jeremiah also “steals” his daughter and pregnant sister-in-law, Lucia’s labor when he takes credit for thatching a roof they have been slaving to mend.

     

    10. A White woman in town gives her money for the maize entirely because she misconstrues Tambu’s enterprise for “Child labour. Slavery” (28), the only language available for explaining Tambu’s presence in the city as a seller of green maize. She nevertheless takes pity on Tambu and gives her money for the school fees after Mr. Matimba, her headmaster explains (and exaggerates) her predicament.

     

    11. In the interest of fairness, one must acknowledge that education does not free Babamukuru either from service to patriarchy and neo-colonialism. It is Nyasha once again who recognizes that “They did it to them too . . . . To both of them [Babamukuru and Maiguru] but especially to him. They put him through it all” (200). His positioning within these systems, however, is so different from Maiguru’s that his story, in some ways the same as that of the women, still tells a different tale that would require a significantly different critical model to explain it.

     

    12. Nyasha complains that “she always runs to men . . . . There’s no hope” (175).

     

    13. It may be useful to note at this juncture that both Fanon and Dangarembga were trained in medicine and psychology.

     

    14. Hindi for passive resistance.

     

    15. In her interview with George and Scott, Dangarembga explains her rationale for the grandmother figure:

     

    I didn’t have a grandmother or a person in my family who was a historian who could tell me about the recent past. And so I felt the lack of such a history very much more. I’m sure that other Zimbabwean women who perhaps did have that need fulfilled in reality would not have felt such a lack, such a dearth as I did, and would not have felt so strongly compelled to create a figure like the Grandmother’s in Nervous Conditions. (311-12)

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Bersianik, Louky. Le Pique-nique sur l’Acropole: Cahiers d’ancyl. Montreal: VLB Editeur, 1979.
    • Bordo, Susan. “The Body and Reproduction of Femininity: A Feminist Appropriation of Foucault.” Gender/Body/Knowledge: Feminist Reconstructions of Being and Knowing. Ed. Alison M. Jaggar and Susan Bordo. New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers UP, 1992.
    • Braidotti, Rosi. “Organs without Bodies.” Differences 1.1 (Winter 1989): 147-61.
    • Courville, Cindy. “Re-examining Patriarchy as a Mode of Production: The Case of Zimbabwe.” Theorizing Black Feminisms: The Visionary Pragmatism of Black Women. London: Routledge, 1993. 31-43.
    • Dangarembga, Tsitsi. Nervous Conditions. Seattle: Seal, 1988.
    • Deleuze, Gilles and Felix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • Douglas, Mary. Purity and Danger: An Analysis of Concepts of Pollution and Taboo. London: Routledge, 1966.
    • Fanon, Franz. The Wretched of the Earth. Trans. Constance Farrington. New York: Grove, 1963.
    • George, Rosemary Marangoly, and Helen Scott. “An Interview with Tsitsi Dangarembga.” Novel: A Forum of Fiction 26 (1993): 309-19.
    • Grosz, Elizabeth. Sexual Subversions: Three French Feminists. Sydney: Unwin, 1989.
    • Kristeva, Julia. Powers of Horror: An Essay on Abjection. Trans. Leon S. Roudiez. New York: Columbia UP, 1982.
    • McWilliams, Sally. “Tsitsi Dangarembga’s Nervous Conditions: At the Crossroads of Feminism and Postcolonialism.” World Literature Written in English 31.1 (1991): 103-112.
    • Mohanty, Chandra Talpade, et al. Third World Women and the Politics of Feminism. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1991.
    • —. “Under Western Eyes: Feminist Scholarship and Colonial Discourses.” Boundary 2 12.3/13.1 (Spring/Fall 1984): 333-58.
    • Ogundipe-Leslie, Molara. “African Women, Culture, and Another Development.” Theorizing Black Feminisms: The Visionary Pragmatism of Black Women. London: Routledge, 1993. 102-117.
    • Nadel, George H. and Perry Curtis, eds. Imperialism and Colonialism. New York: Macmillan, 1964.
    • Sartre, Jean-Paul. Preface. The Wretched of the Earth. By Frantz Fanon. Trans. Constance Farrington. New York: Grove, 1963. 7-31.
    • Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty. Forthcoming interview in Between the Lines: South Asians on Postcolonial Identity and Culture. Ed. Deepika Bahri and Mary Vasudeva. Philadelphia: Temple UP, 1995.
    • Strachey, Lytton. Queen Victoria. London: Collins, 1968 [1921].
    • Taussig, Michael. The Nervous System. New York: Routledge, 1992.
    • Thomas, Sue. “Killing the Hysteric in the Colonized’s House: Tsitsi Dangarembga’s Nervous Conditions.” Journal of Commonwealth Literature 27.1 (1992): 26-36.
    • Todorov, Tzvetan. The Conquest of America: The Question of the Other. Trans. Richard Howard. New York: Harper, 1984.
    • Wilkinson, Jane. Talking with African Writers: Interviews with African Poets, Playwrights and Novelists. London: Heinemann, 1990.
    • Wolf, Naomi. The Beauty Myth: How Images of Beauty are Used Against Women. New York: Anchor-Doubleday, 1991.
    • —. Fire with Fire: The New Female Power and How It Will Change the 21st Century. New York: Random House, 1993.

     

  • A Turn Toward The Past

    Jon Thompson

    Department of English
    North Carolina State University
    jthompson@unity.ncsu.edu

     

     

    Forché, Carolyn. The Angel of History. New York: Harper Collins, 1994.

     
    The title of Carolyn Forché’s newest volume of poetry comes from a famous passage of Walter Benjamin’s essay “Theses on the Philosophy of History,” in which Benjamin considers history’s power to dishevel human order and any human understanding of the past. In section IX, part of which is excerpted as an epigraph to Forché’s volume, Benjamin considers the possibility that this loss also brings about the loss of a present and a future:

     

    This is how one pictures the angel of history. His face is turned toward the past. Where we perceive a chain of events, he sees one single catastrophe which keeps piling wreckage and hurls it in front of his feet. The angel would like to say, awaken the dead, and make whole what has been smashed. But a storm is blowing in from Paradise; it has got caught in his wings with such a violence that the angel can no longer close them. The storm irresistibly propels him into the future to which his back is turned, while the pile of debris before him grows skyward.

     

    Tellingly, this passage from Benjamin’s essay emphasizes the destructive force of history. History here is perceived to be “one single catastrophe,” and “Paradise,” or the dream of utopia, far from being capable of restoring order, only adds to the storm. In subsequent sections of the essay, however, Benjamin insists upon the importance of a “hermeneutic of restoration” as a way of redeeming the past. For him the human imperative is to perform a hermeneutic of restoration as both a critical and social practice. For Benjamin, history can live meaningfully only as a redemptive vision and practice. Otherwise it becomes reified as a dead set of facts. The “weak Messianiac power” of utopianism is its power not only to make sense of the catastrophe of history, but also to redeem history by recasting its losses as part of a teleological journey which ultimately culminates in the establishment of a just social order. In this way, past, present, and future regain their lost connectedness and become part of one seamless, meaningful continuum.

     

    It is useful to recall Benjamin’s argument here in order to see how Forché makes use of aspects of it while distancing herself from, or rejecting, others. As in section IX of Benjamin’s essay, in The Angel of History Forché sees history as a catastrophe, particularly twentieth-century history. For her, the decisive moments of our history are its large-scale calamities–World War II, fascism, the Holocaust, Hiroshima, the Soviet invasion of Czechoslovakia, El Salvador, Chernobyl. All of these events have a ghost-like presence in Forché’s poetry. Past and present are affiliated through the repeated experience of political trauma. For Forché, as for Fredric Jameson, history is what hurts. Pain is history’s most enduring common denominator. Haunted by the weight of the dead, the volume speaks with a finely elegiac voice that gives it a singular intensity. The characteristic feeling in these poems is one of desolation. This feeling is evident even in relation to events not usually regarded as tragic, such as the fall of the Berlin wall. In these poems, the awareness goes to what Milan Kundera calls “the unbearable lightness of being,” the sense that freedom is, in its own way, as illusory as nonfreedom. So for Forché, the fall of the wall ushers in an age of emptiness, filled only with the wreckage of the real brought about by both totalitarian and “democratic” governments. East and West have finally achieved a state of parity, but it is parity defined by moral nullity:

     

         The homeless squatters passed through the 
         holes into empty communist gardens, and the 
         people from the east passed from their side 
         into a world unbearable to them.

     

    Forché’s volume attempts to convey her sense of the catastrophic nature of history formally by relying on poetic fragments. These are then linked together in thematically-related groups around the large-scale calamaties of the twentieth century. The continuity that exists between these poems therefore is ironic–the continuity of discontinuity.

     

    The attempt of The Angel of History, as Forché acknowledges in the notes at the end, is to write a polyphonic poetry that breaks with her earlier mode of the first-person, free-verse, lyric-narrative poetry, a poetry that relies on the staging of multiple voices rather than just one. Indeed, in many of the poems Forché has rendered unknowable at least some of the distinguishing features of her earlier poetry. Here the identity of the speaker and the addressee are frequently ambiguous, as are the events described, the time period, even the physical locations of many of the poems. There is an eerie indeterminacy to all of this. Place, time, and identity fall away or become indistinct. Instead of using the conventions of lyric poetry, Forché orchestrates a variety of voices from the past and present which speak out of a largely decontextualized landscapes of pain. As the reader is led through these twentieth-century badlands, what dominates is the disembodied voice of the speaker-poet, and the odd, frequently grotesque, details here and there that come at the reader with surrealist force. Thus, the poetry is not really polyphonic, for the voice of the poet remains central, and subordinates the other voices to its own. While these voices never contest or displace the central voice of the speaker, the blending of voices and the precise use of horrific detail evoke the nightmarish depths to twentieth-century history. This can be seen in the first two sections of poem IX, in the section entitled “The Recording Angel”:

     

    It isn't necessary to explain
    The dead girl was thought to be with child
    Until it was discovered that her belly had already been cut open
    And a man's head placed where the child would have been
    The tanks dug ladders in the earth no one was able to climb
    In every war someone puts a cigarette in the corpse's mouth
    And the corpse is never mentioned
    In the hours before his empty body was found
    It was this, this life that he longed for, this that he wrote of
    desiring,
    Yet this life leaves out everything for which he lived
    
    Hundreds of small clay heads discovered while planting coffee
    A telescope through which it was possible to watch a fly crawling the 
    neighbor's roof tiles
    The last-minute journey to the border for no reason, the secret house
    where sports  
     trophies were kept
    That weren't sport's trophies
    Someone is trying to kill me, he said. He was always saying this
    Oranges turning to glass on the trees, a field strewn with them
    In his knapsack a bar of soap, a towel the size of a dinner napkin
    A map of the world he has not opened that will one day correspond to the 
    world he has  
     seen

     

    The tendency of these poems is to generalize the experience of suffering. The various political systems responsible for specific forms of human pain are represented as vague and virtually indistinguishable principles of evil, wreaking death and destruction in the world at large. But there are other poems, arguably the most powerful ones in this collection, where Forché blends surrealistic detail with a more sharply etched evocation of readily recognizable historical situations. The impact can be tremendous, as in this excerpt from “The Garden Shukkei-en” which explores the ethics of using the atom bomb on Hiroshima:

     

         By way of a vanished bridge we cross this river
         as a cloud of lifted snow would ascend a mountain. 
    
         She has always been afraid to come here. 
    
         It is the river she most
         remembers, the living
         and the dead both crying for help. 
    
         A world that allowed neither tears nor lamentation. 
    
         The matsu trees brush her hair as she passes
         beneath them, as the shining strands of barbed wire. 
    
         Where this lake is, there was a lake,
         where these black pine grow, there grew black pine. 
    
         Where there is no teahouse I see a wooden teahouse
         and the corpses of those who slept in it. 
    
         On the opposite bank of the Ota, a weeping willow
         etches its memory of their faces into the water. 
    
         Where light touches the face, the character for heart is written. 
    
         She strokes a burnt trunk wrapped in straw:
         I was weak and my skin hung from my fingertips like cloth 
    
         Do you think for a moment that we were human beings to them? 
    
         She comes to the stone angel holding paper cranes.
         Not an angel, but a woman where she once had been, 
    
         who walks through the garden Shukkei-en
         calling the carp to the surface by clapping her hands. 
    
         Do Americans think of us?

     

    In rejecting the interiorities of her earlier, more Romantic poetry, Forché has opened herself more directly to the world of transindividual historical experience. The Angel of History is her most worldly poetic achievement to date. In it, she has freed herself from the solipsistic preoccupations of much contemporary American poetry, which by fetishizing subjectivity, removes the articulation of that subjectivity from the world that surrounds it and shapes it. And like the Latin American and European poets who have apparently influenced her here, she succeeds in linking the destiny of the individual to that of the nation, and the world at large. In giving witness to the atrocities of the twentieth-century, and America’s complicity in many of them, Forché succeeds in questioning the legitimacy of power, and in particular, American power in this century. The tension of these poems is always the tension between the horror of atrocity and the controlled lyrical grace used to evoke it, as in “The Garden Shukkei-en.” This tension establishes an ironic dissonance between life and its representation in art. Although Forché’s poetry accentuates the chasm that separates the two, it also insists that art is only created in the world and, indeed, finally, is sculpted by it.

     

    In adopting this subject matter and these poetic strategies, Forché takes a major risk. For in bringing up the question of the legitimacy of power via a poetry of witnessing, she inevitably raises questions about the legitimacy of her own witnessing. What responsibilities does the poet have to human catastrophe? Or alternately, to what extent may the poet distance herself from the horror of history and still remain responsible? And at what point does the witnessing of witnessed–and unwitnessed–human catastrophe pass from poetic and political necessity to the exploitation of the horror for dramatic effect?

     

    It is one measure of Forché’s power and skill as a poet that she allows no easy answers to these questions. While The Angel of History repeatedly returns to them–sometimes explicitly, sometimes implicitly, sometimes deliberately, sometimes not–Forché seems deliberately to run the risk of incurring the charge of exploiting twentieth-century history as the price for witnessing it. There is considerable courage in this–the courage of a poet willing to assume the burden of engaging a history that includes, but transcends, the self. In invoking the example of Walter Benjamin, whose lyric reflections on history exist as a daunting measure for any poet or philosopher, Forché runs a related risk. And although Forché’s work largely manages to fulfill this difficult charge, it still leaves open the question of the sufficiency of conceiving poetry as a means of recording history. Does poetry so conceived offer us too much, or not enough? The poetic sequences that make up The Angel of History respond to this question time and again with a dramatic urgency born of ambivalence. To be sure, Forché’s predicament is not hers alone. It is the predicament of every engaged postmodern poet. Her achievement is to have hammered it into a rare poetry of spareness and elegance and raw power.

     

  • Mapping the Dematerialized: Writing Postmodern Performance Theory

    Matthew Causey

    Department of Literature,

    Communication and Culture
    Georgia Institute of Technology
    matthew.causey@lcc.gatech.edu

     

    Kaye, Nick. Postmodernism and Performance. London: Macmillan, 1994.
    In Postmodernism and Performance, a title in the New Directions in Theatre series from Macmillan, author Nick Kaye questions the possibility of attaining an adequate definition of the postmodern performance.

     

    If the ‘postmodern event’ occurs as a breaking away, a disruption of what is ‘given’, then ‘its’ forms cannot usefully be pinned down in any final or categorical way . . . definitions cannot arrive at the postmodern, but can only set out a ground which might be challenged. (145)

     

    Echoing Paul Mann’s position in The Theory-Death of the Avant-Gardethat theory facilitates the undoing of the avant-garde, that cultural criticism enacts a theory-death on the object of its discourse, Kaye notes criticism’s collusion in the construction of postmodern performance. He asserts that the organizing compulsion of criticism is antithetical to the strategies of postmodern aesthetic practices, which are designed to frustrate foundationalist thinking. Kaye’s refusal to reproduce the normal organizational categories leads him to draw together a wide range of contemporary American cultural events–performances of Kaprow, Brecht, and Finley; dance works of Cunningham and the Judson Dance Theater; music by Cage; theatre work by Foreman, Kirby, Wilson, and the Wooster Group–treating them all as more or less exemplary postmodern confrontations with, and disruptions of, the Modernist cultural project.

     

    It seems that every book entitled Postmodernism and BLANK is required to begin with a rehearsal of the story of architectural postmodernism, and Kaye obligingly does so. Focusing on the architectural practices of Portoghesi, Klotz, and Jenc ks, he locates the key feature of postmodernism in a “falling away of the idea of a fundamental core or legitimating essence which might privilege one vocabulary over another” (9). He then offers a brief account of philosophical postmodernism, which is t o say of poststructuralist interrogations of history and meaning–interrogations which Kaye rightly claims are reproduced almost wholesale in much postmodern performance. Having thus sketched the rough contours of postmodernism as he understands it, Kaye proceeds to construct his more detailed argument about the relation between postmodernist and modernist art. He starts by glossing the modernist art theory of Clement Greenberg and Michael Fried. Greenberg’s article “After Abstract Expressionism” (1962 ) and Fried’s “Art and Objecthood” (1967) are, according to Kaye, the signal texts of modernism’s institutionalization, the texts that provided a systematic theoretical basis for the various assumptions and attitudes that had long informed the American cu ltural scene. Greenberg argues in a para-Hegelian manner that the history and progress of modernist art is a march toward purification, a divesting of art of all extraneous material, culminating in the work of art realized as a wholly manifest, self-suff icient object. Kaye quotes Greenberg’s theory that the modernist project in art is to demonstrate that many of the “conventions of the art of painting” are “dispensable, unessential” (25). Greenberg’s model of art historicity champions the works of Nola nd, Morris, and Olitksi as representing the modernist ideal of a totally autonomous art: their color fields seeped into the fabric of a dematerialized canvas achieve a coalescence of literalism and illusionism. As Greenberg wrote in “Modernist Painting,”

     

    The essence of Modernism lies, as I see it, in the use of the characteristic methods of a discipline to criticize the discipline itself–not in order to subvert it, but to entrench it more firmly in its area of competence. (qtd by Kaye, 101)

     

    The transitional stage between Greenberg’s defense of Field Painting and Fried’s attack on Minimalism is only briefly mentioned by Kaye but constitutes a critical moment in the history he narrates. In answer to the call for an autonomous art and maintai ning that the canvas was inherently representational, artists such as Donald Judd and Robert Morris furthered the quest for an essential art form through minimalist sculpture. The artists created, through the absence of connecting parts, artificial color , or representation, Minimalist sculptures that were realized as pure objects of indivisible wholeness. The “literalness” of Minimalist sculpture was meant to supplant the illusionism of the canvas. The objecthood of the object (the thingness of the thi ng in Heideggerian terms) became the object of art. However, Michael Fried spotted a problem in the work of the Minimalists. He argued that the Minimalist objects surrendered their objecthood by foregrounding the space that they occupied and the duration of the spectator’s experience of observation. Fried asserted that the Minimalist object was time-dependent and hence spectator-dependent, and that it was therefore theatrical and therefore not art.

     

    In Fried’s view, “art degenerates as it approaches the condition of theatre” (141). For Fried, the theatrical is severed from the modernist ideal of a wholly manifest thing-in-itself by virtue of its contingent unfolding in real time, its moment-by-moment dynamic with a receiving audience, its adherence to the paradigm of subjectivity. The experience of witnessing the modernist paintings of Olitski or Noland or the sculpture of Anthony Caro has, according to Fried, literally no duration, “because at every moment the work itself is wholly manifest” (145). The properly Modernist goal is an instantaneousness and presentness characterized by the collapse of the subjectivity of the spectator into the objectivity of the work. Theater and performance, which work toward presence but not toward modernist presentness, are on this account effectively voided as non-art.

     

    Having restaged the modernist arguments of Greenberg and Fried, Kaye proceeds to demonstrate the postmodernist–or more accurately anti-modernist–counter projects that have sought to disrupt any foundationalism or essentialism and have thrown into quest ion the concepts of authenticity, wholeness, meaning, and originality. If one accepts Greenberg and Fried’s model of modernism, then performance’s inherent disruption of the autonomous art work, its spatial and temporal specificity, its very “messiness,” or what Kaye calls its “evasion of stable parameters, meanings and identities” (35), make performance the perfect field on which to stage postmodernist rejections of modernist imperatives.

     

    Certainly Kaye is not the first to make this claim for performance’s special stature in postmodernity. In The Object of Performance (a book to which Kaye is indebted), Henry M. Sayre quotes from a catalogue for an exhibition of contemporary sculpture at the Hirshhorn Museum (1982) written by Howard Fox, which states that

     

    Theatricality may be considered that propensity in the visual arts for a work to reveal itself within the mind of the beholder as something other than what it is known empirically to be. This is precisely antithetical to the Modern ideal of the wholly manifest, self-sufficient object; and theatricality may be the single most pervasive property of post-Modernism. (9)

     

    Quite apart from the modernist desire to create the thing-in-itself, the desire for the de-materialization of the art object has run concurrently and in some cases has prefigured the modernist projects, reflecting Lyotard’s suggestion that the postmodern is, in fact, premodern. It is no mere anomaly that the history of the Euro-American Avant-Garde carries with it a series of performative experiments: Symbolist and Expressionists theatre, the Futurist serate and Dadaist soiree, Surrealist drama, Happenings and Performance Art. My point is that performance’s qualifications as postmodern or anti-modern have been well established. Greenberg and Fried’s derriere-garde notions of authenticity, purity, essence, reside in a historical, foundationalist, and essentialist discourse that has been thoroughly discounted from a postmodern position, voided of relevance in a contemporary model of art. I would question the validity of a continued rehearsing of their arguments to sustain performance’s val ue. Fried’s “Art and Objecthood,” not unlike Benjamin’s “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction” (whose assertion that an original is degraded through its mechanical repetition is problematized, not to say invalidated, in a digital age) is by now a tediously familiar argument with far too little contemporary resonance to function as the point of emergence for a “new vision” of postmodern art.

     

    Aside from this over-reliance on polemic against already discredited theoretical positions, there is a problem, too, in Kaye’s reliance on theoretical discourse as such. Kaye is keenly aware of theory’s collusion in manufacturing, narrativizing, and con cretizing abstract “trends” in art. Yet his own procedure reproduces, perhaps inevitably, that very tendency. By positioning postmodern performance as essentially a philosophico-aesthetic response to Modernist art, Kaye simply disregards the concrete hi story–the cultural, political, and technological realities–of postmodern society, and the significance of this social field for the emergence of postmodern artistic practices. The point here is rudimentary: what engenders an art work is not only the theory and practice of previous schools, but a complex set of relations among contemporary social and cultural phenomena. The seductive labyrinth of “pure” art theory is finally of little use unless the theorist attempts, as Edward Said has suggested, to address its “worldliness.” This is a move that Kaye never makes, and as a result his theoretical discussion seems to take place in too isolated an arena of philosophical conceits. However, he astutely challenges some traditional theories, in particular, Sally Banes’s positioning of postmodern dance as modernist in the Greenbergian sense.

     

    A large portion of the book deals with the theories and practices of modern and postmodern dance and this section is greatly indebted to the writings of Sally Banes for both its historical perspective and its theoretical model. Countering Banes, Kaye ch allenges “the very possibility of a properly ‘modernist’ performance and in turn . . . the move from a modern . . . to a postmodern dance” (71). Like Banes, Kaye traces American modern dance through the work of Martha Graham and Doris Humphrey, among others, and their rejection of conventional languages of classical dance and the formlessness of Isodora Duncan’s “free dance.” Modern dance relied instead on a formalistic expressionism aimed at representing the “inner life.” The Judson Dance Theatre (196 2-64), which included the choreographer/dancers Lucinda Childs, Steve Paxton, Yvonne Rainer, Trisha Brown and David Gordon, defined itself as postmodern, on the grounds that their work abandoned modern dance’s representational strategy of expression. Sal ly Banes has disputed this claim, defining their work as more correctly modernist, in the Greenbergian sense, in that their minimalist strategies sought to reduce dance to pure movement, severing its connection to expression and representation. Kaye counters Banes’s view by arguing that,

     

    far from rehearsing Greenberg’s program through dance, the historical postmodern dance’s reduction of dance to simply ‘movement’, or even the presence of the dancer alone, attacks the very notion of the autonomous work of art, revealing a contingency, and so an instability, in place of the center the modernist project would seek to realize. (89)

     

    Kaye is here maintaining Fried’s argument that a modernist project in performance is impossible. Banes might counter with her position that each art form has its own distinct positioning of the postmodern, or in other words, rather than constructing a me tanarrative of Modernism perhaps a local narrative of particular works would uncover more useful critiques.

     

    The value of Postmodernism and Performance lies not in Kaye’s attempt to theorize postmodern performance as the perfect counter-project to high Modernism, but in his discussion of individual performance and dance works. Aside from offering stimulating analyses of well-known works, he brings to light some more obscure but important pieces, such as “First Signs of Decadence” from Michael Kirby’s Structuralist Workshop.

     

    Kaye isolates three unifying elements in many of the postmodern works he approaches (an unavoidable but decidedly non-postmodernist tactic). The first is the deflation or dematerialization of the art object as an autonomous whole, in favor of an emphasis on the spectator’s construction of that object as an image in the mind. George Brecht in speaking of his Fluxus inspired “event-scores,” such as Water Yam (1962), said that “for me, an object does not exist outside people’s contact with it” (43). Brecht may very well be the most radical artist in Kaye’s collection, insofar as his performance works were “less concerned with the disruption or breaking down of a ‘work’ than with a catching of attention at a point at which the promise of a work, and the move toward closure, is first encountered” (40). Brecht’s Water Yam is presented as a boxed collection of white cards with black text that states various instructions or actions. One card reads, “THREE AQUEOUS EVENTS.” Under t he “title” are placed the words “ice, water, steam.” As Kaye notes, the “event scores” of Brecht can be read as a poem or procedural notation.

     

    Considered as a score, the card seems to be even more open and unclear, as it becomes an ambiguous stimulus to something or other that is yet to be made or occur. In doing so, it places its own self-sufficiency into question and explicitly looks towards a decision yet to be made. (40)

     

    From Kaye’s standpoint, one of the foremost postmodern theater companies is Richard Foreman’s Ontological-Hysteric Theatre, which carries out the shift from art as object to art as receptive event and also fulfills Kaye’s second criterion of postmode rn performance in its disruption of the meaningful. The Ontological-Hysteric Theatre has developed a performance-wrighting that stages the production of image, its immediate demise through discourse, and the persistence of a (re)appearing ideology . Kaye quotes Foreman who wrote,

     

    as Stella, Judd, et al. realized several years ago . . . one must reject composition in favor of shape (or something else). . . . Why? Because the resonance must be between the head and the object. The resonance between the elements of the object is now a DEAD THING. (49)

     

    Foreman’s performance works generally use a deceptively traditional style with a strict proscenium configuration and the trappings of the conventional stage. What Foreman does with that tradition is to turn the image-manufacturing into a “reverberation m achine” constantly undoing the image, colliding it against expectation, asking the spectator to think, to put the pieces back together in a new manner.

     

    Kaye writes clearly about Michael Kirby’s Structuralist Workshop, an important but often overlooked moment in American avant-garde theatre. The Workshop, a loosely aligned group of NYC theatre artists, whose most productive work was done in the mid to l ate seventies, is likewise concerned with the structuring of performance in the mind of the spectator, “a recognition of relation and contingency” (48). In an interview with Kaye, Kirby said that

     

    ‘structure’ is being used to refer to the way the parts of a work relate to each other, how they ‘fit together’ in the mind to form a particular configuration. This fitting together does not happen ‘out there’ in the objective work; it happens in the mind of the spectator. (48)

     

    Not unlike Foreman, Kirby employs the effects of the realistic stage only to complicate the reception of that aesthetic gesture through antithetical staging structures. In First Signs of Decadence, a work analyzed by Kaye, Kirby structures t he staging through a “complex array of rules to which the interaction of characters as well as entrances, exits, lighting, music, and even patterns of emotional response, are subject” (57). Kirby is attempting, in his words, to set up a “tension between the representational and non-representational aspects through which the performance is always being torn apart” (57); torn apart to disrupt meaning, content and closure and to open contingencies that in turn activate the spectator’s thinking.

     

    The third feature or tactic of postmodern performance, according to Kaye, is its “upsetting [of] the hierarchies and assumptions that would define and stabilize the formal and thematic parameters of [the performance] work” (142). The performance work of the Wooster Group, in existence for nearly twenty years and a spin-off company from Richard Schechner’s Performance Group, ideally fits Kaye’s depiction of the anti-modernist move in postmodern performance. The Wooster Group, under the direction of Elizabeth LeCompte, has created a radical form of performance-wrighting that includes a collision of appropriated texts from such diverse categories as traditional modern drama (Our Town, The Crucible), popular culture (cable- TV, Japanese sci-fi films), personal narratives (family suicide), and the taboo texts of pornography and blackface caricature. The fragmented texts are cut-up, reworked and edited into a larger mediatized performance work that consistently undoes its own authority. Both Philip Auslander and David Savran have written about the Wooster Group’s political postmodernism, which effects a disempowering of the performance’s status as a “charismatic other.” An image played out in a Wooster Group performance is allowed to present itself without a moralistic posturing from the performer. When the company used black-face on white actors they made no effort to let the audience off the hook by pointing to the gesture and condemning it. Instead, the spectator was f orced to articulate a response, to take responsibility for how he or she would respond. The effect is powerful and has led to acrimonious debates and funding rejections for the company.

     

    One difficulty in theorizing postmodern performance is the sheer size of the territory that the term “performance” maps out. It extends far beyond the theatre and galleries to include the total flow of the televisual, the indigenous performance, the int ertextuality of the postmodern cityscape within which we perform daily, the postorganic domain of virtual environments and cyberspace. A drawback of Postmodernism and Performance is that Kaye’s examination focuses on too narrow a series of p erformances from downtown NYC, and neglects this larger field. Though Kaye notes that postmodern performance has forgone the genres and the spatiality of modernism, he doesn’t seem to recognize that our performance theory needs to follow that lead. None theless, Kaye’s analyses of the specific performances are insightful and provocative. Whatever my specific reservations, Postmodernism and Performance is an important and thought-provoking addition to a troubled field.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Fried, Michael. “Art and Objecthood.” Minimal Art: A Critical Anthology. Gregory Battcock, ed. New York: E.P. Dutton & Co., 1968.
    • Sayre, Henry M. The Object of Performance: The American Avant-Garde Since 1970. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1989.

     

  • The Desire Called Jameson

    Steven Helmling

    Department of English
    University of Delaware
    helmling@brahms.udel.edu

     

    Fredric Jameson, The Seeds of Time. New York: Columbia University Press, 1994. xviii + 214 pages. $22.95.

     

    Fredric Jameson’s new book revisits problems treated in earlier work, with results suggested in the titles of its three chapters. The first, “The Antinomies of Postmodernism,” queries whether the venerable Hegelian-Marxist problematic of the “contradict ion,” which the historical process (“the dialectic”) will resistlessly “resolve,” must now (or again) be rethought as “antinomy,” a static, self-reinforcing overdetermination, a “stalled or arrested dialectic,” Jameson calls it, whose apparent lock on the future complements its erasure of the past (except as commodified nostalgia), to produce an “end of history” in which all difference and otherness, including that of the once-Utopian future itself, homogenizes into a tepid, entropic, indifferent conditio n of always-already-more-of-the-same. Where “permanent revolution” was, there shall “permanent reification” be–except that we must scratch that future tense: there (here) permanent reification now appears always already to have been, and promises (or th reatens) always forever to remain. Jameson has evoked this anxiety before; in the tortured prose of Postmodernism (1991) it underwrote a thematic as well as a practice of “the sublime”; but here he is much more explicit about the terms of th e predicament, and as various therapeutics (including Jameson’s own “homeopathy”) would have predicted, “explicitation”–the making conscious of this particular (political) unconscious–has helped to lower the temperature.

     

    “Utopia”–the authentic desire versus the marketable simulacrum–is a leitmotif throughout chapter 1; it becomes the main theme of chapter 2, “Utopia, Modernism, and Death,” in which an extended discussion of an only recently published early-Soviet text, Andrei Platonov’s “great peasant Utopia,” Chevengur (1927-8), reprises the “anxiety of Utopia” considered in the “Conclusion” to Postmodernism. For me, the most interesting feature of this chapter is Jameson’s speculation that it may now at last be time to credit modernism’s Utopianism, rather than dismissing it as “ideological.” (Jameson’s anti-modernism, like most academic anti-modernisms of the last two decades, was an animus more against academic appropriations of modernis m than against modernism itself, as if in despair of even the possibility of a critique that might extricate modernism’s ambitions and accomplishments from their domestication in an institutionalized “aesthetic ideology.” Can we yet entertain the challen ge of Adorno’s observation that, authorial allegiances notwithstanding, modernist art was de facto left wing? Jameson here indicates what a reconsideration of modernism in such a light might mean now.)

     

    The last chapter, “The Constraints of Postmodernism,” is to me the least satisfying of the three: a discussion of several contemporary architects (the cited texts include manifestos as well as buildings and drawings) from Venturi, Koolhaas, Eisenman and Rossi to “deconstructionists” and “neo- (or “critical”) regionalists,” as if seeking in their differences some sort of contestation of what “the postmodern” might yet mean or become. Jameson apparently wants to test whether the complacent, I’m-OK,-you’re -OK “diversity” of a postmodern now might not already be reimaginable, as if in some future retrospect, as something more vitally conflicted “in the seeds of time” than has yet appeared.

     

    I should say here, however, that my more or less obligatory attempt, as book reviewer, to provide a sketch of the “contents” of Seeds of Time is, as would be the case with any Jameson book, a futile undertaking. What Jameson has to say can’ t be summarized, because of the complication of his way of saying it. The interest of his work cannot be localized to any particular problems it takes up, solutions it offers, or positions it fortifies and defends. On the contrary: Jameson mobilizes his oft-noted “encyclopedic grasp of modern culture” not to find or propose a solution to every problem, but on the contrary, to problematize, as richly–as problematically–as possible, every possible solution; likewise his relation to any possible “positio n” is wary in the extreme, and most acutely so of those that might offer or impose themselves as his own. Like Apeneck Sweeney, who’s gotta use words when he talks to you, Jameson must traffic in positions to critique them–but only under protest: no mor e than Sweeney does Jameson like it. Most critique, partly because of its inevitably polemic motivations, operates on the model of the unmasking and the exposé, announcing its findings with the triumphant “Ah ha!” of discovery. By contrast , Jameson’s tone is a warier, wearier, “Uh oh”: not proclaiming successful conclusion, but facing up to whatever fresh prospect of obstacles and difficulties his analysis so far, in this text, on this page, in this sentence, has just now opened.

     

    Jameson has been committed to a critical prose of this unconventional kind–i.e., he has been telling us that this is how he is trying to write, and how he wants to be read–from the beginning. The program is implicit in his first book (1961), which cel ebrates Sartre’s leavening of the philosophical drive to formulation and conclusion with the existential (a.k.a. phenomenological, sc. aesthetic) particularizing temporality of the narrative artist. It is explicit in Marxism and Form (1971), whose preface celebrates the “dialectical prose” of Adorno, and whose last chapter projects a program for what Jameson calls a “dialectical criticism.” Later, adapting Barthes, Jameson speaks of “the scriptible” and “the sentence”; and in his mos t recent work, especially Late Marxism (1990) and Postmodernism (1991), this ideal of a “theoretical discourse” that refuses the false security (or resists the inevitable familiarization) of “positions” or “conclusions” is projec ted negatively, in opposition to that intellectual reification or commodification–Jameson’s calls it “thematization”–that “dialectical criticism” would overcome.

     

    A (critical) prose written on such principles is by now a familiar period feature, a veritable sign, all agree, of “the postmodern.” But the strengths enabled by such an aversion to the usual sorts of argumentative closure entail certain drawbacks; amon g them, in Jameson’s case, the difficulty that while Jameson’s work seems ready at every moment to project itself boldly out into confrontation with whatever problematic it might discover or invent for itself, its programmatic inconclusiveness can seem at times simply (or rather, complicatedly) evasive.

     

    In the present instance, for example: what is, so to speak, the time, the “moment,” of The Seeds of Time? The two books Jameson has published since the devolution of the Soviet Union three years ago merely collected material from before the fall. By now (as I write) it is 1994; surely, I thought, in this new book Jameson will have something to say about the Second World’s cataclysm. Not quite: the book offers itself as a reprint of Jameson’s Wellek lectures at Irvine, given in April 1991 (i.e., before the fall), but the text has obviously been enlarged and supplemented since, leaving many traces of what we might call a “self-difference” that is not merely temporal but historical: as if the text itself has suffered asynchronously (which is not to say diachronically) the differential seismic shocks of an “uneven development.” Thus “Second World culture” may figure in the present tense on one page, in the past on the next, while “Eastern Europe” appears throughout as ex-socialist, but in th e context of a rollback that seems to have proceeded only as far as the Soviet border–i.e., as if the “moment” of this text were quite specifiably that of post-autumn 1989 but pre-, and without anticipation of, December 1991. It is a standard move of th eory to “suspend” rather than to answer pressing questions, but this is a perplexing suspension from a critic whose best-circulated slogan is “Always historicize!”

     

    It is also, thereby, a telling sign or “symptom”–not simply of a residual nostalgia for the Soviet experiment that can seem almost a form of denial in face of its demise, but of a larger, more general and systemic conflictedness agitating all Jameson’s projects. Recall the affirmation in “Metacommentary” (1971) of the necessity of interpretation: “we are condemned to interpret at the same time that we feel an increasing repugnance to do so”; similarly, the imperative to “historicize” is not a “d esire” to do so: in The Political Unconscious, its burden is of a facing-the-worst sort, a chastening “Necessity” enforced by “the determinate [“inevitable”] failure of all the revolutions that have taken place in human history.” Since befor e The Political Unconscious, Jameson’s grim asides about “actually receding socialism” have owned that revolution’s “inevitable failure” as an established fact. But that was then, this is now: while one kind of anti-Soviet Marxist mig ht welcome the end of the USSR as good riddance to bad baggage, Jameson is of the more scrupulous sort whose qualms about the USSR were more salient before the fall than after, and whose loyalties to it will likely prove more poignant after than before.

     

    So rather than moralize or score points against Jameson’s “evasion,” we can more fruitfully consider it as an instance of the later Jameson’s own constant theme, what the title of the last chapter of The Political Unconscious calls “The Dial ectic of Utopia and Ideology”: the Eros-and-Thanatos agon of Utopian desire in its fated conflict with the reality principle, or (to use a vocabulary Jameson favors) with that Lacanian “Real” which Jameson has glossed as “simply [!] History itself.” What ever else we might want to infer from this agon’s enactment in the motions and the motives of Jameson’s prose, we can’t ascribe any of this problematic’s “political unconscious” to Jameson himself: he is no doubt as “conscious” of it as anyone could be.

     

    I put it this way to foreground what Jameson has at stake in this effort to Utopianize against the historical wind: the costs or conditions, the strains and contradictions (I-can’t-go-on-I’ll-go-on) of this Beckettian but also Promethean project. Take f or example the book’s title, drawn from a passage of Macbeth slightly misquoted in the book’s dedication to Wang Feng-zhen: “for who can look into the seeds of time / And say which grain will grow and which will not. . . .” The allusion is a t once elegiac and defiant: both a farewell to the Marxist dream of foretelling the plot of History’s grand narrative, and a protest against the postmodern ideology’s preemption of the future. Such are the ambivalences enacted in Jameson’s prose, so often suspended between, or rather overlapping and thus positioned to draw on the libidinal effects of both, a refutation of postmodernism as the (false) ideology of “late capitalism” and a raising of the alarm against a world-historical adversary that is only too real.

     

    Hence the ambivalence we might name, with this volume’s title in mind, the desire called “time.” In Jameson, the desire called Utopia, as we’ve already remembered, is indissociable from a certain “anxiety of Utopia”; and a cognate conflictedness bel ongs to “time,” the temporal, the diachronic, narrative, “History itself.” These last, it will be remembered, were stuff and substance of the “historicizing” program of The Political Unconscious, whose subtitle, “Narrative as a Socially Symb olic Act,” made narrativity and/or historicity at once the determining limit point of the “ideological closure” by which Utopian energies find themselves “contained,” and the condition of possibility of any critique that would try (in Utopia’s behalf, eve n if not in its name) to open, breach, or at least contest that closure. The Political Unconscious, acclaimed in the United States, found a chilly reception elsewhere among Althusserians hostile to its Hegelian, “historicizing” program; and ever since, Jameson has deployed “space” as a virtual watchword for “the postmodern,” and (to make the “motivation” a bit more pointed) as the “other” of a putatively modernist “time”; the gesture has sometimes been so insistent as almost to seem a kind o f penance for the earlier work’s historicism. However that may be, some of the headiest moments (or topoi) in Jameson’s consideration of postmodernism have conjured with the atmospherics of “space”: “Architecture” (“Spatial Equivalents in the World Syste m”), “Demographics of the Postmodern,” “Spatial Historiographies,” “cognitive mapping,” a “geopolitical aesthetic,” “signatures of the visual,” heightened attention to the media of the eye, video, film, etc.

     

    Even at its headiest, Jameson’s account of postmodernism was more equivocal than many of his readers seem to have grasped; but my point in thus projecting “space” as a vehicle for Jameson’s enthusiasm for the postmodern generally is that the new book’s t itle signals a renewed willingness to give “time” its innings, and in the context of a gesture most uncharacteristic for Jameson, a self-retrospect occasioned by (and confessing) a change of mind about “the postmodern,” springing, he says, from “a certain exasperation both with myself and with others, who have so frequently expressed their enthusiasm with the boundless and ungovernable richness of modern [sic: in context, read postmodern] . . . styles, which freed from the telos of modern, a re now “lawless” in any number of invigorating or enabling ways. . . . In my own case it was the conception of ‘style’. . . that prevented me for so long from shaking off this impression of illimitable pluralism.”

     

    He goes on to make the connection of “personal style” with “the individual centered subject” (both of which the postmodern promised to leave behind), and of “period style” with “aesthetic or stylistic totalization” (both of which postmodernism’s p roliferation of borrowed styles, disjoined from their former motivations by an alientated practice of “pastiche,” likewise affected to exorcise). But the disdain of “aesthetic or stylistic totalization,” Jameson cautions, should not extend to “political or philosophical totalization”: it’s a chronic theme of his that analysis must not disown the aspiration to totalization as a Hegelian hubris, but rather must accept it as a Necessity imposed by the abjection of our historical moment. Once again, what th e overhastily zealous would dismiss as an incorrect “desire called totalization,” Jameson stages as an inescapable “anxiety of totalization.”

     

    This desire/anxiety nexus has its own history; to an extent it is simply a generic feature of critique as such, the irresistible force of its meliorist motive in agon with the immovable object it aspires (with mere words) to change. But the anxiety and the desire tussle to different outcomes in different periods, different critics, and, within a given critic’s ouevre, different works–and indeed, on different pages, even in different sentences. Jameson’s own career begins with desire in the asce ndant. Sartre (1961) was a declaration of allegiance; and in Marxism and Form (1971), a sheer excitement about a variety of Western Marxist classics seemed to attest a limitless field of critical possibility. The Prison-H ouse of Language (1972) cautioned (in its titular metaphor) against a focus on “representation” at the expense (or even exclusive) of the “referent”; yet it too reveled in the multiple critical prospects opened by structuralism. Fables of Ag gression (1979) introduced, and The Political Unconscious (1981) consolidated, the darker themes of “inevitable failure” and “ideological closure,” but in counterpoint (still) with an enlarged sense of hermeneutic possibilities–as if (to recall the eleventh thesis on Feuerbach) the loss in our power to change the world could be compensated by our chance of an amplified understanding of it. But in Postmodernism (1991) and other writings of the ’80s, that opt imism receded before the “cultural logic of late capitalism.” Enter anxiety, by way of “the sublime,” which Jameson projected as “unrepresentable,” and therefore inevitably baffling any hermeneutic effort brought to bear on it–as if critique’s impotence to change the world now had to entail an inability to understand it as well. It was Postmodernism, not only projecting and dramatizing this dilemma, but impaling itself on its horns, that set, for me, the high-voltage mark fr om which the books that followed (The Geopolitical Aesthetic, Signatures of the Visible, and now The Seeds of Time) have fallen back.
    But fallback needn’t mean loss, if anxiety’s loss is desire’s gain. Much as I enjoyed the excitements of Jameson’s “sublime,” I grew impatient with its premise, that “the logic of late capitalism” is unintelligible, while every day the lies seem mor e brazenly transparent than the day before. If, indeed, you can still think of them as lies, rather than as the monstrous and cynical boasting of “enlightened false consciousness.” (“We call six percent unemployment full employment, because below that w ages begin to rise!”) In any case, since Postmodernism, Jameson has mostly reverted to making more sardonic- (rather than sublime-) sounding kinds of sense–as if understanding the world is after all possible, and even, if not exactly desira ble, still, incumbent upon us, faute de mieux, however much we may, on our gloomier days, find ourselves prey to “an increasing repugnance to do so.” Thus put, though, the case is not desire’s gain at anxiety’s expense, but rather anxiety’s migrat ion to a more settled and resigned abode.

     

    But there persists the Jamesonian vigilance lest “making sense” lapse into “thematization,” and Jameson’s prose, even when its aims are most unequivocally (or most sardonically) hermeneutic, meets this danger with a wariness in which “making sense” typic ally means un-making some oppressively familiar, “common [ideological kind of] sense.” Even at its most staid, Jameson’s impulse in practice is less toward “making sense” than toward “making difficulties.” The pursuit will qualify itself, or chan ge the subject, or multiply its aspects, in a way to preempt any achieved “sense” of anything in particular, except the ardor and the difficulty/impossibility of the quest. I offer this as value-neutral description of Jameson’s peculiar power, not as cri ticism of a weakness: on the evidence, indeed, I’d say that Jameson is least satisfying when he settles down to an extended discussion of something–in this new book, e.g., the pages on Chevengur had, for me, their longueurs; an d likewise, the consideration of architecture in the closing chapter, another connect-the-dots exercise based on one of those Greimassian rectangles Jameson so favors. The flashes come in (or through) the cracks, as asides, as details allowed their momen tary expansions that can become, for the space of a paragraph or a page, a departure from the drill. Escaping the dictates of “the drill” is the very condition of Jameson’s power.

     

    Hence the persistence, and the fascination, of a calculated “unrepresentability” in Jameson’s later work–if not as a telos, yet as an ever present potentia (desire) or ananke (anxiety) exerting pressure away from “sense” toward its unrepresentable other, whether that other be “Utopian” or “sublime.” Which raises familiar quandaries: limits, boundaries, inside/outside, hither/”beyond,” Zeno’s paradox of the infinitesimal that separates quantitative from qualitative change, etc. Wal lace Stevens’s adviso, that a poem should resist the intelligence almost successfully, licenses us to put it (again) that cutting the “almost” finer and finer is almost a period convention of that postmodern genre (or almost-genre? not-quite-genre? ) called “theory”–a gesture enacting, I take it, a sense of the toils, the struggles, “the labor and the suffering” (Hegel) as well as the self-inflicted scruples, the vigilance against hubris and mauvaise foi, of the hermeneutic will-to-understan d–a desire tragically thwarted in an absurd world, and/or (“antithetically,” in Freud’s sense), a hubris, an “omnipotence of thought,” a suppose savoir, a crypto-totalitarian lust for “totalization” and “mastery” that is properly to be thwa rted, distrusted, chastened, subverted.

     

    In this unstable and shifting scene, Eros and Thanatos change places (or “perspectives”) with dizzying facility; how to keep the dizziness from numbness, and the facility from facile-ness, are problems too many theorists negotiate altogether too successfully. Jameson’s “difficult” prose negotiates or (better) dramatizes them with more passion, as well as with more aplomb, than anyone else’s, and with a flair in the performance that makes, despite Jameson’s own “resisitance to thematization,” any dissociation of theme from practice “ultimately” unsatisfactory, even as it guards itself against, on the one hand, their premature or too-simple “synthesis,” and, on the other, an aestheticization that reifies the dissociation itself. Some such impo ssibly recursive and self-interfering “desire to desire” seems the very condition of the way we read (and write) now, drawing ambivalent satisfactions from a prose in which the satisfactions can’t be said to count for more than the frustrations, and in wh ich this (somehow) is the satisfaction, this continual deferral-yet-renewal of the promise (or mirage) of satisaction that keeps Jameson writing his texts, and us reading them. Enjoying our symptom? Repugnance to do so? I-can’t-go-on-I’ll-go-on? To the contrary, there’s no stopping him, or us.

     

  • The Gender of Geography

    Karen Morin

    Geography Department
    University of Nebraska-Lincoln
    kmorin@unlinfo.unl.edu

     

     

    Rose, Gillian. Feminism & Geography: The Limits of Geographical Knowledge. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1993. 205 pages. $44.95 cloth, $17.95 paper.

     

    Geography is a notoriously male-dominated field. To cite just one recent statistic, a 1993 profile of the Association of American Geographers (the largest professional organization in the discipline) showed that only 18.6 percent of the membership who were employed by colleges and universities were women. Evidence has shown that, in addition, a disproportionately large number of the 18.6 percent probably hold less influential temporary, part-time, and/or lower paid positions within departments. As Gillian Rose asserts in Feminism and Geography, women’s under-representation in geography departments (and its byproduct, academic publishing) points to some serious problems. Not only does it mean that most geographic research is about men and men’s activities, but more fundamentally, it produces a bias in what passes for geographic knowledge itself. The subject of her book is how one type of human geography, “masculinist,” has been constituted and defined as geography in male-dominated academia, and how feminist perspectives can respond to it.

     

    This book brings academic geography up to date with current feminist theory, something geography badly needed. Indeed, this is the only book-length work of its kind (at least in English). Whereas geographic studies of women’s work, women’s status in less developed countries, women’s relationship to imperialism, and women and the land have broadly taken off within the field, few attempts have been made to discuss feminist geography theory, at length, within the context of the history of geographic thought. More characteristic are widely-cited works such as R.J. Johnston’s Geography and Geographers: Anglo-American Human Geography Since 1945 (4th ed., 1991), which devotes only three pages to feminism. Though Rose brings together some of the substantive works in feminist geography, her primary concern is with the way geographers think and produce work, and she therefore focuses more on the “gender of geography” than the “geography of gender.”

     

    A lot is packed into this small volume (200 pages, including notes). Rose argues that as a masculinist discipline, geography is stuck in dualistic thinking and in producing grand theories that claim to speak for everyone but that actually speak only for white, bourgeois, heterosexual males. Though masculinism effectively excludes women as researchers and as research subjects, Rose says that it is not “a conscious plot” by males (p. 10), and that both men and women are caught in it. And indeed, Rose finds herself caught in it. She attempts to create a more personal geography, locating herself through her whiteness, her lower-middle class upbringing, her “seduction” by the university. (She is now a lecturer at Queen Mary and Westfield College, University of London.) But she’s not all that successful at maintaining this personalism. Recognizing this, she admits how “extraordinarily difficult [it was] to break away . . . from the unmarked tone of so much geographical writing,” admonishing her own “complicity with geography” (p. 15). At the same time, Rose consistently tries to avoid overarching theories, which she believes are antithetical to feminism, and spends a good deal of text positioning authors of both masculinist and feminist writing.

     

    Rose’s primary task is to mark the territory of masculinist thinking in geography. She demonstrates how just as there are many feminisms, so also there are many masculinisms, with boundaries that are not fixed and clear but permeable and unstable, and each invoked for particular purposes. Overall Rose discusses geographic thought at three scales: the scale of “places” (of humanistic geography), the scale of “landscapes” (of cultural geography), and the scale of individual “spaces” (of social and economic geography). She discusses the degree to which each associated branch of geography is embedded in masculinist thinking and/or holds promise for more feminist interpretations.

     

    Humanist geography, which would seem to share feminism’s goal of recovering the places of individual and everyday experience, turns out to have constituted “place” itself as feminine. Rose asserts that humanists talk about places as homes, in strictly idealized and feminized terms associated with women–as nurturing places, free of conflicts. Rose argues that “home” may not be a place universally sought after, and may in fact be more like a prison for some women. The important point is that home’s significance varies from person to person and from social group to social group. Home may indeed signify refuge for some African American women, for instance, not as idealized Mother but as an escape from racism.

     

    It is at the scale of landscape that Rose finds masculinism’s most apparent contradictions, particularly because the study of landscape often rests on “geography’s most embedded dualism”–nature/culture. Rose explains how images of the female side, nature, invoke something to be heroically conquered through fieldwork, but also something to be revered and respected. Masculinism, apparently, genders landscapes in whatever way seems most convenient for the purpose at hand, for example, by associating frontier lands with the female, a virgin awaiting penetration by male explorers, but at the same time signifying women as culture carriers, bringing “civilization” to those “savage” frontiers. Both culture and nature are gendered, but as Rose points out, one side is masculine and the other side is always the masculine idea of the feminine. Thus it is dangerous to empower the feminine side of the dualism, as radical feminists attempt to do. Instead, feminists need to destabilize the dualism itself, creating new categories to analyze how women relate to landscapes. As Rose notes, Monk and Norwood’s edited volume The Desert is No Lady: Southwestern Landscapes in Women’s Writing and Art (1987) provides an excellent model for such work. This collection demonstrates how Hispanic, Native, and Anglo women’s images of the American Southwest are quite unlike males’, yet also quite different from each others’. Women writers, photographers, and artists envisioned the desert land not in terms of its material resources to be exploited, a land awaiting metaphorical rape, but as a strong woman, unable to be conquered. The women artists’ imagery is sexual, not in terms of domination or suppression but in terms of uniting with the productive and reproductive energy of the earth.

     

    In masculinism, space itself appears ungendered, a seemingly open path to anywhere. But Rose argues that some spaces offer particular constraints to women, and may in fact mean horror and violence to women, such as when we walk through the city at night. She writes about space as oppressive:

     

    I have to tell my own fears of attack in terms of space: when I’ve felt threatened, space suffocatingly surrounds me with an opacity that robs me of my right to be there . . . space almost becomes like an enemy itself. (143)

     

    Masculinism also forces women to sense their own embodiment. Whereas men’s bodies are transparent to masculinism, women are conditioned to be aware of their bodies, as objects in space, taking up space right along with other objects. Ultimately women are doubly affected by masculinism, then, because we move through space that has been gendered by a dominant ideology, with gendered bodies.

     

    Though it is wrought with contradictions of its own, Rose cites socialist feminism’s theorizing of the domestic sphere in terms of economic life as “undoubtedly one of the major achievements of feminist geography” (p. 121). The contradictions arise when trying to account for the diversity of women’s experiences in production alongside their (seemingly) shared experiences in reproduction. On the reproductive side, feminist work has emphasized women’s spatial limitations as they try to combine domestic and waged work. Women, so the thesis goes, work closer to home to be nearer to childcare and schools, and are thus locked into female-segregated, part-time, and/or lower waged occupations, especially in the suburbs. This model turns out to be appropriate mainly for white, middle-class mothers, however. Rose asserts that when emphasis has been shifted to production, feminism has made greater strides. Research by feminist geographers such as Linda McDowell stresses difference in women’s work, particularly by social class and geographic region, where gender relations are unevenly developed because capitalism itself is.

     

    The book’s conclusion left me a bit hanging, but that may be because Rose is more interested in exposing the limitations of masculinist geography and surveying current feminist responses to it, than in laying out a more positive future trajectory for the discipline. Rose succeeds admirably in marking the contested areas, and has shown how masculinism cannot represent the gendering of places, landscapes, or spaces. Self-representation is key to women’s advancement in geography, she says, as is recognizing our multiple axes of identity, and practicing “strategic mobility” by moving between the center of academic geography and its margin to ultimately subvert that center.

     

    The book’s structure–which has it in effect beginning in the middle, then looking backward (chs. 1-4) into masculinist geography, and then moving forward (chs. 5-7) into feminist geography–is wonderfully appropriate to its argument. Yet it is also in the structure that the book reveals its most glaring flaws. Perhaps it was edited too heavily, perhaps not heavily enough. But readers will find themselves constantly reminded of what’s just been said, or previously been said in another chapter, or about to be said, so that instead of a gradual unfolding of themes, the discussion unfolds in short, awkward bursts. Moreover, the dense text is difficult to plow through at times, and Rose’s heavy reliance on academic jargon threatens to place her among the many feminists whose work is inaccessible to the very population of geographers that most needs to read it. Occasional misspellings don’t help matters, and the book’s three illustrations are merely adequately reproduced.

     

    But who’s complaining? In comparison to the enormous project Rose has undertaken, these deficiencies can be overlooked. This book should be required reading for graduate seminars dealing with the history of geographic thought, and will be indispensable for feminist geographers and other social scientists grappling with feminist epistemology and who need the discussion wrapped up in a single volume.

     

  • A Disorder of Being: Heroes, Martyrs, and the Holocaust

    Alan G. Gross

    Department of Rhetoric
    University of Minnesota-Twin Cities
    agross@maroon.tc.umn.edu

     

     

    Langer, Lawrence L. Holocaust Testimonies: The Ruins of Memory. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1991.

     

    Young, James E. The Texture of Memory: Holocaust Memorials and Meaning. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1993.

     

    Zuckerman, Yitzhak. A Surplus of Memory: Chronicle of the Warsaw Ghetto Uprising. Barbara Harshav, ed. and trans. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1993.

     

    I am looking at a photograph of a double line of children–girls before, boys behind–waiting patiently for their mikvah or ritual bath. All the boys are dressed in suits and all wear hats, mostly men’s felt hats with brims. One boy in the rear foreground turns toward the photographer, Roman Vishniak, who takes the picture with a hidden camera. (These are orthodox Jews who object to photography on religious grounds.) It is a sunny day in 1937 in Carpathian Ruthenia in an area that was to become a part of Hungary two years later.

     

    By 1945, by the time these boys and girls would have reached their late teens, they were, in all likelihood, dead at the hands of the Hungarian fascists or the Nazis. Their survival was possible, too; Lucy Dawidowicz estimates that thirty percent of the Hungarian Jews survived the war (403). But the point is that the war did not merely disrupt, it dislocated their lives, whatever the event. Even had they happened to survive, they would have had no lives to return to. Jewish life on the European Continent, which had survived fifteen hundred years of anti-Semitism, did not survive five years of Nazi rule. Thus the collection of which the photograph I have described forms a part, is entitled, appropriately, A Vanished World.

     

    The significant distant between disruption and dislocation can be measured by comparing the recent Steven Spielberg film, Schindler’s List with an incident recounted in Langer’s Holocaust Testimony. In the film, the ending is managed so as to give the impression that the Jews freed by the allies were in fact free, that is, after an extended episode of incarceration, they experienced the pleasure of anticipation that a return to their normal pre-war lives would mean. This would have been especially true of the Schindler Jews, who had been protected during the war by their eccentric industrialist-benefactor. In reasonably good health, and reasonably well-fed, they are poised on the threshold of their new lives. In such a state, naturally, they bestow upon their erstwhile benefactor the gratitude he deserves. At the film’s end, real-life Schindler Jews who have happened to survive enact the Jewish ritual of placing small stones on his tombstone, a gesture of respect, even of homage.

     

    The reality of the Schindler Jews is another matter altogether. In the Fortunoff Video Archive for Holocaust Testimonies at Yale there exists the testimony of the son of two actual Schindler Jews, Menachem S. In 1943, his parents, fearing the worst, smuggled the five-year-old out of a Polish labor camp in the hope that he would survive the war under the protection of some Polish Christian family. His parents promised to retrieve him after the war, a promise that they managed to keep, since they survived under Schindler’s protection. Nevertheless their reunion defeats all of our expectations of a happy ending. Both parents are emaciated; the six-foot tall father weights only eighty-eight pounds; his rotted teeth hang loosely from his gums.

     

    Menachim S. sees little resemblance between these people and his memory of his parents and, not surprisingly, he does not recognize them. In a scene ironically and accidentally reminiscent of Odysseus’s recognition by his old servant at his return, Menachim S. holds up the picture of his mother given to him at their parting. Recognition, however, does not ensue. “I just couldn’t believe,” he says, “that they were my parents.” For some time he calls them Mr.and Mrs. S, rather than father and mother.

     

    Lawrence Langer, whose account of the incident I have so far been paraphrasing, gets the meaning of this episode exactly right, one more insightful analysis in a masterpiece of analysis:

     

    The bizarre spectacle of an adult speaking of a seven-year-old child remembering his five-year-old self as an unrecapturable identity reminds us of the complex obstacles that frustrate a coherent narrative view of the former victim’s ordeal from the vantage point of the present. . . . Memory functions here to discredit the idea of family unity and to confirm an order of being–or more precisely, a disorder of being–that appears to the witness to have been the unique creation of the Holocaust experience. (111-112)

     

    This contrast between Hollywood and reality reveals just how Spielberg has betrayed the memory of Holocaust survivors like Menachem S. He has concealed beneath the veneer of a conventional narrative of separation and reunion the uncomfortable truth that the conditions of captivity rendered such conventional narrative impossible.

     

    What could have permitted such a desecration of character? To some, it may matter that the victims of the Holocaust were diaspora Jews, trained to survive by passivity. They should have known, they should have struggled actively against their oppressors. For those who say this, these sentences translate into: I would have known, I would have struggled to maintain my sense of self. In Surplus of Memory, Yitzhak Zuckman, a survivor of the Warsaw Uprising, shows the flaw in this self-serving view. Of foreknowledge of the Holocaust, he says:

     

    We read in Mein Kampf that Hitler would destroy the Jews; we read his speech in the Reichstag. But we didn’t take it seriously. Even today, who would consider every expression of anti-semitism? We saw it as rhetoric, not as the expression of something he intended to carry out. The idea was iberleben–we’ll get through this. (69)

     

    On the question of the link between traditional Jewish passivity and the Holocaust, Zuckerman does not mince words:

     

    When I talk to young people, . . . I explain that you can turn people of any nation, any race or religion into “Jews”–make them behave just like Jews. My comrades and I were lucky that we were always on the other side of the barricades. But those who fell into the hands of the Germans–and this time it was the Poles–behaved just like the Jews had. In a short time, in weeks, the Germans turned them into loathesome, humiliated, fearful people; and keep in mind, the Poles weren’t starved for years like the Jews in the ghettoes. (526)

     

    If Zuckerman is right, we have discovered something, not about diaspora Jewry, but about our ability to make our fellow human beings so wretched that, while they do not cease to live, their lives cease to have meaning. If Zuckerman is right, Habermas’s view of the Holocaust becomes immediately relevant:

     

    There [in Auschwitz] something happened that up to now nobody considered as even possible. There one touched on something which represents the deep layer of solidarity among all that wear a human face; notwithstanding the usual acts of beastliness of human history, the integrity of this common layer has been taken for granted. . . . Auschwitz has changed the continuity of the conditions of life within history. (quoted in Friedlander 3)

     

    If Zuckerman and Habermas are correct, we have learned from the Holocaust that a life robbed of meaning is possible, and that the task of creating a world in which that theft is impossible may be beyond our powers. If Zuckerman and Habermas are correct, the examination of the effects of dislocation on the surivivors of the Holocaust tells us something about the difficulty of this daunting task. This difficulty is evident both in private and in public memory:in the testimony of surviving Jews and the the monuments we have built commemorating the experience to which they testify.

     

    For the Jews, it is generally agreed, captivity meant passivity because those in the Nazi grip were granted virtually no freedom of action. They ceased to have their own story; they were forced, rather, to act out the story their captors had written for them. It is a story in which human beings were reduced to the moral status of sheep marked for slaughter. By actions for which they must be held responsible, the Nazis turned people into machines for survival, into men and women who cannot be held responsible for their actions.

     

    Since the causes of the passivity of the prisoners of the Nazis were the conditions of captivity themselves, they cannot really be overcome: “any brave fighter,” says Zuckerman, “was liable to wind up in Treblinka. So the distinction many people make between the fighters and the masses ‘who went like sheep to the slaughter’, was artificial, absurd, and false” (261-262).

     

    In his brilliant allegorical novel, Badenheim 1939, Aharon Appelfeld dramatizes the gradual descent into passivity that leads the Jews to their destruction. At the novel’s end,

     

    An engine, an engine coupled to four filthy freight cars, emerged from the hills and stopped at the station. Its appearance was as sudden as if it had arisen from a pit in the ground. “Get in!” yelled invisible voices. And the people were sucked in. Even those who were standing with a bottle of lemonade in their hands, a bar of chocolate, the headwaiter with his dog–they were all sucked in as easily as grains of wheat poured into a funnel. Nevertheless Dr. Pappenheim found time to make the following remark: “If the coaches are so dirty it must mean that we have not far to go.” (147-148)

     

    That there is no Jewish story after captivity–no coherent, morally satisfying narrative–is a problem for anyone who wants to represent these victims and their victimization. Raul Hilberg’s masterly historical account of the Holocaust and Spielberg’s popular film share this problem. It is Schindler’s list; it is Schindler who has control. Hilberg entitles his book The Destruction of the European Jews, a passive construction that reflects in its grammar the central fact of the camps. The Jews have no story, or rather they have only one story, the Nazis’ story about them.

     

    The actions and lives of the incarcerated Jews are, in a strict sense, meaningless. From the point of view of the Jews, nothing that they do, or can or cannot do, makes sense. In Survival at Auschwitz, Primo Levi makes the point in a memorable anecdote:

     

    Driven by thirst, I eyed a fine icicle outside the window, within hand’s reach. I opened the window and broke off the icicle but at once a large, heavy guard prowling outside brutally snatched it away from me. “Warum? I asked him in my poor German. “Hier is kein warum (there is no why here),” he replied, pushing me inside with a shove. (29)

     

    The German means that there is no whyfor Levi (or for any prisoner.) The Jewish search for meaning in camp life is bound to fail.

     

    A chief consequence of this absence of meaning is the decoupling of action from its usual consequences. According to the testimony of one survivor, he left his daily ration of bread in the care of a companion while he went off to the toilet. The companion ate the bread and the man complained. “Look, I asked him to look after my piece of bread, and he ate it up.” The Kapo [the inmate supervisor] said: “You took away his life. Right?” He said: “Well, I’ll give it back this afternoon, the ration.” He [the Kapo] said: “No, come outside.” At this point the Kapo orders the offender to lie on the floor, places a board across his neck, and stomps on it, breaking his neck (quoted in Langer 27). To grasp the “meaning” of this episode, we must imagine a world in which stealing bread is a fatal offense, murder a casual act without consequences.

     

    In this world in which acts and their consequences are so mismatched, filial piety fares no better than complaint. Arriving with his family at Auschwitz, Abraham P. finds that his parents and youngest brother are sent to the left, to death, while he and two older brothers and a younger brother are sent to the right. Abraham P. recalls:

     

    I told my little kid brother, I said to him, “Solly, geh tsu Tate un Mame [go to papa and mama].” And like a little kid, he followed–he did. . . . I wonder what my mother and father were thinking, especially when they were all . . . when they all went to the [gas chamber]. I can’t get it out of my head. It hurts me, it bothers me, I don’t know what to do. (quoted in Langer 185-186)

     

    This disproportion disables normal moral judgment. Ordinarily, we would expect a mother to care for and to comfort her children in distress; normally, we would label as self-sacrifice the gesture of a stranger who ignores danger to comfort a child in trouble. But in the world of the camps, what looks like callousness may be helpless terror, and what looks like heroism may be despair. On the ramp at Auschwitz where, upon arrival, the first “selections” were made, a ten-year-old girl refused to go to the left (toward death). She kicked and stratched and screamed to her mother, who was standing by on the right, among those temporarily spared. She pleaded with her not to let the Nazis kill her. One of the three SS men holding the young girl down approached the mother, asking her if she wanted to accompany her daughter. The mother refused the offer. Was the SS man showing compassion? Did the mother lack compassion? Merely to ask these questions is to show the inadequacy of our moral vocabulary in this instance. In making sense of a world that makes no sense, onlookers on concentration camp life are as disadvantaged as participants.

     

    During a selection at Birkenau Mrs. Zuckner, another mother, held fast to the hand of a little girl she knew, a little girl destined for the gas chambers. Mrs. Zuckner’s daughter, Esther, recalls, “This was the last time I saw my mother. She went with that neighbor’s child. So when we talk about heroes, mind you, this was a hero: a woman who would not let a four-year-old child go by herself” (Hartman 242). Was Mrs. Zuckner a heroine? We must tread delicately here so as not to dishonor her memory. But, equally, we must not do the unknown mother on the ramp the injustice of making her responsible for her conduct. The truth is we do not know how to judge in these cases, to distribute praise or blame when human beings are reduced to choices such as these. We could only know, perhaps, if we came to be in a similar situation, and we can only hope that we never do.

     

    As Langer says, we view Holocaust testimony “expecting to encounter heroes and heroines, [but] we meet only decent men and women, constrained by circumstances, reluctantly, to abandon roles that we as audience expect (and need) to find ingrained in their natures” (25) We can see this need operating in the following interview, presented verbatim with interpolations by Langer in square brackets:

     

    INTERVIEWER: You were able to survive because you were so plucky. When you stepped back in line . . .

     

    HANNA F: No dear, no dear, no . . . no, I had no . . . . It wasn’t luck, it was stupidity. [At this, the two interviewers laugh deprecatingly, overriding her voice with their own “explanation,” as one calls out, “You had a lot of guts!”]

     

    HANNA F.: [simultaneously] No, no, no, no, there were no guts, there was just sheer stupidity. (63-64)

     

    In his commentary, Langer points to the contrast between the heroic thesaurus rifled for such terms as pluck and guts and Hanna F.’s impoverished thesaurus containing only the single word, reiterated, stupidity. He points out that the interviewers exhibit an anxiety over Hanna F.’s judgment so extreme that they deny Hanna F. her own experience.

     

    The tension between Hanna F.’s insistence on her deflationary version of the past and the interviewers’ insistence on their inflationary one is evident also in the public memory, the way in which nations and future generations choose to remember their past. It is these tensions and the reconstructions and appropriations to which they lead that are the subject of James Young’s The Texture of Memory, his excellent book on Holocaust memorials and their meaning. Young’s presentation of Nathan Rapaport’s Ghetto Monument in Warsaw and the Jochen and Esther Gerz’s Monument Against Fascism in Hamburg provide us with a contrast that illustrates the strength of Young’s methods and the validity of his insights. They also illustrate what I take to be his chief weakness, an attitude of “scientific” objectivity, of tout comprendre, tout pardonner. However understandable on so potentially an explosive topic as Holocaust memorials, this attitude, unfortunately, also inhibits Young from carrying his best insights to their natural conclusions.

     

    In his discussion of Rapaport’s Warsaw Ghetto Monument, for example, although Young notices the classical proportions with which these representatives of Jewish Defense Force are sculpted, he does not notice that they do not look like the actual Jews who fought so heroically against impossible odds. Young also notices that the heroic figures in front are complemented by a bas relief of the martyrs of the Jewish people at the back of the monument, but he does not notice the significance of this placement. It was the martyrs who actually predominated, not the heroes. Moreover, those who predominated in the Ghetto were not martyrs in any real sense, but victims.

     

    Young notices the irony that the Memorial is built with stones meant for a monument to Nazi victory. Its sculptor was to be Arno Brecker, Hitler’s favorite sculptor. But Young fails to notice that the style of the Warsaw Monument is eerily remiscent of the style of the Nazi sculpture for which Brecker became known (Merker 246, 292). Despite the fact that Young notices the semantic fungibility of such monuments, used at one time to justify Israel’s struggle against its Arab neighbors, at another to justify the struggle of the Palestine Liberation Organization against Zionism, he does not notice the glorification of war inherent in the dramatization of military heroism, no matter how honorable the cause.

     

    In contrast, the Gerzes’s Monument Against Fascism is proof against inappropriate appropriations. A tall hollow aluminum pillar covered with soft lead, it is set in a pedestrian shopping mall in a commercial suburb of Hamburg. Attached to the pillar is a steel stylus, to allow the citizens to inscribe their names. On the monument’s base is the following inscription:

     

    We invite the citizens of Harburg, and visitors to the town, to add their names here to ours. In doing so, we commit ourselves to remain vigilant. As more and more names cover this 12 meter tall lead column, it will gradually be lowered into the ground. One day it will have disappeared completely, and the site of the Harburg monument against fascism will be empty. In the end, it is only we ourselves who can rise up against injustice. (30)

     

    Instead of an orderly list of names–a sort of self-constructed Vietnam Memorial–the monument proved to be a site for graffiti, from Stars of David to Swastikas, from “Jurgen liebt Kirsten (Jurgen loves Kirsten)” to “Auslïnder raus (Foreigners, get out!).” The artists approved of the “desecration,” and local newspaper made the crucial point: “The filth brings us closer to the truth than would any list of well-meaning signatures. The inscriptions, a conglomerate of approval, hatred, anger and stupidity, are like a fingerprint of our city applied to the column” (35-37).

     

    Like the Warsaw Ghetto Monument, the Monument against Fascism has been misused by onlookers, but the difference is significant: while the Ghetto Monument is incorporated into hostile fantasies with frighting ease, the Monument Against Fascism incorporates these fantasies, making them part of its trenchant message. Young does not notice this.

     

    Young notices the appropriateness of this “counter-monument” to the event it commemorates: “How better to remember forever a vanished people than by the perpetually unfinished, ever-vanishing monument?” (31). But, in the economy of his exposition, countermonuments do not occupy the central place they deserve. Their analysis forms only the first chapter of a book whose organization is concentric. Young’s book moves from Germany, where the mass murders were planned to Poland, where most of the murders took place, to Israel, whose founding relates directly to the Holocaust, to America, whose Jews were untouched by the Holocaust. In the book’s economy, therefore, the commentary onthe countermonuments forms an anomolous prelude rather than a resounding climax. As a consequence, Young fails to notice the irony that the Monument Against Fascism in the heart of Germany is more deeply respectful of the Diaspora dead than the Warsaw Ghetto Monument at the center of Jewish heroism. We cannot respect the dead by misrepresenting them, no matter how flattering the misrepresentation.

     

    We must face the unpleasant truth that the European Diaspora was a failed experiment in Jewish accomodation. The relative absence of heroism during the Holocaust is in part a function of the combination of deception, efficiency, and murderous purpose hatched in the deliberations of Nazi leaders, shaped at the Wannsee conference, and perfected in the death camps. But is also a function of Jewish life during the European Diaspora, a philosophy of iberleben, of living through persecution. We would therefore expect that Jewish heroes, if they revealed themselves, would manifest a personal history far different from the Diaspora average.

     

    This was indeed the case if the testimony of Yitzhak Zuckerman is to be believed. Surplus of Memory, his recorded testimony, is not a book but a rambling account, not history, but the raw material of history. It is not meant to be read but to be mined. Though Zuckerman’s account must be treated with the skepticism appropriate to any reminiscence, it is nevertheless a moving depiction of the birth and biography of a hero.

     

    Zuckerman was no ordinary Jew. He was a Zionist, specifically a leader of the He-Halutz Ha-Tza’ir (Young Pioneer) Zionist socialist movement, one of a collection of youth movements striving to realize their ideals on kibbutzim (collective farms) in Eretz Israel (The Land of Israel, then Palestine). It was this disciplined idealism, this task of leadership, that brought Zuckerman back to the Ghetto from which he had escaped, to organize educational efforts for the young. But by 1942 it was clear that these efforts would be hopeless, that the Jews were marked for destruction. In Zuckerman’s words:

     

    In July, the idea of uprising was remote for me, because I didn’t know how to build a force. The question then was only how to announce, to alarm. This was the execution of hundreds of thousands of Jews. The question wasn’t uprising or Treblinka [a death camp]. There was only Treblinka. The question was how to make the Jews resist going to Treblinka. (217)

     

    From this time on Zuckerman harbored no illusions: “We knew we were going to die. The question was only when and how to finish” (266). In January of 1943, there is a prelude to the Uprising that occurred in the middle of April:

     

    The January fighting taught us something. . . . The Germans were routed because their situation was worse than ours. First, they were surprised; they were organized in small platoons. They were always below, and we were always above them. . . . The first time they came with the knowledge that these Jews were like all other Jews; after all, they had seen so many Jewish youths that it didn’t occur to them that any Jews were armed. . . . So it was beyond all my expectations and I was very happy. The first time we killed Germans, we felt that this was the final battle. But there was no drama, no heroic outbursts; except for one case of hysteria, there was nothing exceptional. After that, we no longer felt like people going to death. (Zuckerman 288)

     

    Zuckerman is under no illusions about the military effectiveness of the Uprising. But the Uprising has a more general significance:

     

    If there’s a school to study the human spirit, there it should be a major subject. The really important things were inherent in the force shown by Jewish youths, after years of degradation, to rise up against their destroyers and determine what death they would choose: Treblinka or Uprising. I don’t know if there’s a standard to measure that. (xiii)

     

    The literature on the Holocaust has become, understandably, a Jewish industry. Each year sees the publication of dozens of books on the subject: memoirs, fiction, history, literary criticism. We might all be excused–Gentile and Jew–if we said genug (enough is enough). Nevertheless, the best of this work that I have come across–Claude Lanzman’s Shoah, Appelfeld’s Badenheim 1939, Levi’s Survival in Auschwitz, Langer’s Holocaust Memories–is fine by the highest standards of its various genres: film, fiction, memoirs, literary criticism.

     

    Each of these masterpieces enables us to encounter and better to understand perhaps the most disreputable incident in our checkered human past. It is a story about the conditions under which the human spirit can be dismantled beyond repair. It is also a story about how this same spirit can survive (in isolated cases) despite such massive degradation. So long as we live in a world in which “Jews” continue to be created–in Bosnia, Somalia, and Ruanda, in the Occupied Territories (where Jews create “Jews”)–the literature of the Holocaust cannot, unfortunately, cease to be relevant.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Appelfeld, Aharon. Badenheim 1939. Trans. Dalya Bilu. Boston: David R. Godine, 1980.
    • Dawidowicz, Lucy S. The War Against the Jews: 1933-1945. New York: Bantam, 1986.
    • Friedlander, Saul, ed. Probing the Limits of Representation: Nazism and the “Final Solution” Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1992.
    • Hartman, Geoffrey H., ed. Holocaust Remembrance: The Shapes of Memory. Oxford: Blackwell, 1994.
    • Hilberg, Raul. The Destruction of the European Jews. New York: Holmes and Meier, 1985.
    • Levi, Primo. Survival in Auschwitz: The Nazi Assault on Humanity. Trans. Stuart Woolf. New York: Macmillan, 1993.
    • Merker, Reinhard. Die bildenden Kánste im National sozialismus: Kulturideologie, Kulturpolitik, Kulturproduktion. Cologne: Dumont Buchverlag, 1983.
    • Vishniac, Roman. A Vanished World. New York: Farrar, Straus, and Giroux, 1983.

     

  • Bring the Noise! William S. Burroughs and Music in the Expanded Field

    Brent Wood

    Methodologies for the Study of Western History and Culture
    Trent University
    bwood@trentu.ca

     

    Burroughs, William S. Dead City Radio. Island Records, 1990.

     

    —. Spare-Ass Annie and Other Tales. Island Records, 1993.

     

    Ministry, with William S. Burroughs. Just One Fix. Sire Records, 1992.

     

    Revolting Cocks. Beers, Steers and Queers. Waxtrax,1991.

     

    —. Linger Ficken Good. Sire Records, 1993.

     

    Music, it seems, has always been the art that most easily eludes the grasp of theory. Perhaps it is the spectator relationship implied by “theory” that allows the visceral vibrations of music, even art music, to remain unaccounted for. As Frith and Goodwin (1990) have pointed out, in the discourse of cultural studies the “textual” analysis of music itself–as opposed to lyrics, iconography or consumption–remains extraordinarily immature when compared with treatment of the visual arts. Popular music in particular poses a challenge to cultural theorists who must bridge the gap between traditional musicology, which tends to isolate music from its socio-political context, and sociological or anthropological perspectives which handle music’s physical presence poorly. Post-modernist theory has dealt with many such contextual challenges in its encounters with visual pop art in sculpture, painting, film, and even television. Why, then, is it so often necessary, when confronted with academic music commentary, to ask with McClary and Walser (quoting Bloom County‘s Billy and the Boingers), “yeah, but did we kick butt?”1

     

    One obvious reason that music is so resistant to theory is the difficulty of representing the object of study verbally. Musicians have enough trouble communicating to one another what they hear in their aural imagination without bringing in non-musicians to complicate the picture. As sound has become easier to record and to reproduce, however, the concept of sound as an object manipulable by artist (and consumer) has become less far-fetched. It seems we have reached a point where it has become necessary to think of music as operating in an “expanded field” if we are to have any possibility at all of comprehending Public Enemy and Stravinsky, Woody Guthrie and John Cage, Michael Jackson and The Dead Kennedys (all available in the same digital format at the same retail outlet) as instances of one and the same “art”.2 The difficulty of commenting on music through the written word has been eclipsed by the possibilities of commenting on musical objects by manipulating copies of them with the help of sound-reproduction technology. As Laurent Jenny observed a generation ago, whenever new technological possibilities come into the hands of artists there is a tendency for the various arts to blend into one another.3 This occurs not only stylistically and thematically but also technically. In other words, modernist intertextuality explodes into a post-modernist inter-mediality. In 1994, with spoken word an MTV fad and William S. Burroughs advertising Nike products, it is past high time to examine the sort of music-poetry which is forming today, and which constitutes a major “post-modernist” project in music.

     

    Why characterize this tendency as a “project”? Because it is, naturally, a “work-in-progress.” As a time-based art, it exists “in progress” as a moment of resistance to the results of the technological acceleration of the 20th century. The project today is essentially a continuous experiment in bricolage using the mechanical and verbal and sonic tools of commerce. It has perhaps become necessary to make use of Jacques Attali’s argument for music-as-theory in order to get a grip on the currents which are most prominent in the project.4 Attali hears currents of social (re)organization in the commercialization of sound, noise and rhythm; in these general terms, the post-modernist music project is about intervening in those patterns with new patterns, sculpting with garbage, found objects, and reclaimed enemy weaponry. This is a form of theory that doesn’t meet the requirements of the print-based academy. Whether it has the stereotypical “punk” stylistic trappings or not, we can confidently give a name to this localized, ever-changing, music-in-the-expanded field, theory-project. That name is “cyberpunk.”

     

    I will now seek, in spite of the argument I have just made, to retain a modicum of credibility while attempting to describe and comment, in written words, on five interrelated instances of this project. The preceding three paragraphs may be read as a contextualization for the following review of five more-or-less-recent sound recordings in which the confluence of musical streams traceable to Euro-American and Afro-American sources forms a whirlpool around the venerable figure of William S. Burroughs. These recordings include Burroughs’s own Dead City Radio (1990) and Spare-Ass Annie (1993); the Revolting Cocks’ Beers Steers and Queers (1991) and Linger Ficken Good (1993); and the Ministry/Burroughs collaboration Just One Fix (1992). The reader will find that, like the music under study, I will end up attempting to explain the effects of various pieces by comparing them with other well-known musical texts. Perhaps I can justify my (electronically produced) literary commentary by offering it as a sort of annotated discography to contemporary recordings which can only be located as music within an expanded field. It will be up to the reader to take action (or not) in her or his sonic sphere.

     

    The motivation for this review springs from a question that was posed to me over the recent television advertisement for Nike which features William Burroughs. In the ad, Burroughs appears on a miniature TV set being kicked around by joggers. “The purpose of technology is to aid the body, not confuse the mind,” says the bard. Nike isn’t selling shoes, of course; it’s selling a mainstream counter-culture, and Burroughs is only the most recent icon chosen by the champ of hip footwear. The question is, how did we get from Spike Lee to Bull Lee? It’s no secret that Burroughs has been rediscovered by a younger generation for whom the Beats and hippies that he once inspired are no more than the stuff of which movies are made.5 Receiving much less media attention than his appearance in Van Sant’s Drugstore Cowboy (1988), or Cronenberg’s adaptation of Naked Lunch (1992), however, has been Burroughs’s 1990 CD Dead City Radio, which has had a measurable influence through the medium of college radio if nowhere else.

     

    Dead City Radio grew out of a 1981 appearance by Burroughs on Saturday Night Live during which he read “Twilight’s Last Gleaming” while an old NBC Radio Orchestra recording of “The Star Spangled Banner” was played.6 Hal Willner, then music co-ordinator for SNL, was struck by the power and grace of Burroughs’s reading voice. Willner grew interested in expanding the project of putting Burroughs on tape, and travelled to Burroughs’s home in the university town of Lawrence, Kansas to do the job. The majority of the music on Dead City Radio is drawn from those same NBC Radio Orchestra archives, and all the spoken word from the Lawrence sessions. Willner, on the recording’s liner notes, claims to have chosen the music in order to highlight Burroughs’s quintessentially American attributes. Indeed, the effect of Burroughs’s critiques of American government, Christian morality, racism, homophobia, and drug wars when set against the NBC orchestra’s nostalgic “program music” is a powerful one.

     

    In 1993 Burroughs’s familiar aging figure, in hat and tie, appeared once again in the popular music racks in another Willner production entitled Spare-Ass Annie and Other Tales. Once again, Willner had taken tracks from the Lawrence sessions and set music to them; this time it was with the aid of The Disposable Heroes of Hiphoprisy, the multi-cultural hip-hop group whose earlier popular recording “Television–the drug of a nation” echoed Burroughs’s own feelings about the addictive American psychology. In stark contrast to the symphonic textures of Dead City Radio, most of the musical material of Spare-Ass Annie consists of relaxed hip-hop grooves created from looped sound-samples. Not only had Burroughs had been brought from the past (back) into the future (a copy of the one he once imagined in his 1960’s experimental fiction), he had also been “crossed-over” from white culture into black, a vital step in the passage from the Beat-jazz of Cronenberg’s Naked Lunch to a role as technological soccer-ball kicked around by shoes the size of Michael Jordan’s over the beat of a DJ. It is apparent that Burroughs now occupies a position with respect to mainstream corporate culture analogous to the one assumed by Public Enemy and other artists who specialize in cultural appropriation to make their critiques. Bring the noise!

     

    The creation of silence through noise-making has an honourable history. Since white people deemed black people’s music to be noise several centuries ago, black people have had the lead in communicating publicly through noise. In twentieth-century art music, white European and American experimental composers, such as John Cage and Iannis Xenakis, began to play with the possibilities of noise. Since capital hit popular music in a big way, however, its principal figures have been Jimi Hendrix and Johnny Rotten, black and white icons for noise-resistance in popular music. Today, amid the never-ending war of words that characterizes our cybernetically-organized society, the control of communication technology is vital for any kind of resistance to the seductions of commercial culture. Public Enemy’s Chuck D called hip-hop “TV for black America”; in just this way, I would argue, cyberpunk music is the underground info-highway for white youth. Burroughs’s influence on Ministry’s Al Jourgensen and Paul Barker is evident throughout their work, including that done in the guise of the Revolting Cocks on the CDs Beers, Steers and Queers and Linger Ficken Good. Special tribute was paid when Burroughs’s voice and text were used on Ministry’s 1992 CD single “Just One Fix”.

     

    All five recordings examined here use sound-reproduction technology to collage together a wide range of material, including readings from previously published texts, commercial film and television soundtracks, a variety of sound effects, and clips or imitations of advertising lingo. These are recombined with minimal new musical material. The effectiveness of the resulting tracks depends entirely on a redefinition of “noise” and a recognition of the necessity of throwing back the word-garbage and music-garbage which rains down upon us from corporate culture machines. The contrast between the various elements which make up a composition is the source of its success or failure in composition terms. The role of “noise” is central, not only in the form of distortion, white noise and background noise, but also as a paradigm for the creation of silent space in a soundscape saturated by mass media. Burroughs is the perfect candidate for this kind of textual re-arrangement, since much of his own work is self-consciously the rearrangement of the work of others, designed to function in just this way. What follows here is an attempt to read the various takes on William Burroughs texts that have surfaced in the expanded field.

     

    Dead City Radio is destined to become a classic in the Burroughs catalogue. The performances by the NBC orchestra and various other sources are lush, and generally work with the texts by evoking a mood which is recognizable to the listener from other media experiences.7 The opening track, “William’s Welcome” is the exception on the album, a collectively produced soundscape for which Burroughs provides soundbites which are subjected to Pink Floyd-style electronic manipulation. In the majority of the tracks, music and text are overlaid to create a feeling of twisted Americana. This tactic is especially evident in “Kill the Badger” and “Thanksgiving Prayer,” both of which retell Burroughs’s own “Ugly American” story. In the first, the central role is occupied by Burroughs’s former counsellor at the Los Alamos boys school to which he was sent as a child. The music for this piece, an Aaron Copeland-like bit of orchestral program music, is made to feel terrible and twisted by the text. In the same way the “Pomp and Circumstance” march of “Thanksgiving Prayer” is made sad and ironic by Burroughs’s black version of grace, the blunt imagery of which, contrasted with the orchestra’s moody modal tensions, recalls in mood nothing so much as Morrison’s “American Prayer”.8

     

    Other noteworthy pieces on the disc include “Ah Pook the Destroyer,” “Where he was going” and “Apocalypse.” “Ah Pook” succinctly iterates Burroughs’s standard warning against the tools of death (time, control, and junk). The warning is set against minimalist electronic accompaniment by John Cale reminiscent of much of Laurie Anderson’s recent work. The effect here is more like the science-fiction of Anderson’s earlier sound-recordings or of the Ministry pieces which I will deal with presently. “After-dinner Conversation/Where he was going,” Burroughs’s take on Hemingway, is perhaps the most sumptuous piece on any of the discs under review. The story is a variation on Hemingway’s classic short story “Snows of Kilimanjaro,” reset in a gangster-movie rural midwest. It uses church organ, sound effects, and mild electronic voice manipulation to achieve the effect of a radio play heard as an electronic Sunday night bedtime story. The preoccupation with death continues into the series of “moralist” texts (in Burroughs’s special sense of that word) that form a suite of interconnecting sound-poems culminating in “Apocalypse.” In some segments Burroughs reads from the Bible over a background of mock middle eastern music that could have been borrowed from Ben-Hur. “Apocalypse” itself is a monumental work, beginning with a celebration of an animist theology represented by Hassan I. Sabah: “Consider a revolutionary statement. . . . Nothing is True, Everything is Permitted.” Burroughs here explains the meaning of this soundbite whose citations continue to grow more common. The text, reminiscent of Naked Lunch, is, according to liner notes, drawn from an experiment with silk screen done in collaboration with artist Keith Haring, to whom the album is dedicated. The NBC orchestra here supports the feeling of apocalypse, changing intensities, moving from mood to mood like a ballet piece, at times seemingly imitating Stravinsky’s “Sacre du Printemps”. Burroughs’s reading of “The Lord’s Prayer” functions as an appropriate culmination of the suite. This is in turn complemented by the piece which follows it and concludes the CD, a curiosity in which Burroughs sings a German love to piano and clarinet accompaniment. The album is thus wrapped by instances of Burroughs’s lean positivism, which, as in his written work, just barely manages to rescue the whole from an utterly nihilistic cynicism.

     

    In all the orchestral pieces on Dead City Radio there is an element of ironic commercial nostalgia that is not provided by the contemporary rhythms of Spare-Ass Annie. The musical arrangements on the second CD, which is either a “quick fix” attempt to surf the wave of Burroughs’s marketability or simply a poorly conceived project, are not nearly as rich as on the first. On the whole, Spare-Ass Annie is a very curious disc, one which will accordingly take its place in the curiosity bin next to other attempts to bring white media figures into the world of black-inspired popular music, such as Leonard Nimoy’s unforgettable recording of “Proud Mary.” The spoken texts used here are not as essential to Burroughs’s oeuvre as are those on Dead City Radio, nor are they as well performed. Worse still, it sounds as if Burroughs’s distinctive speech patterns have been electronically altered to fit the beats put down by the Disposable Heroes, either by digital editing, severe compression, or (ironically) by noise reduction systems. The result is that he occasionally winds up sounding something like Barney Rubble.

     

    In general, the cyclical nature of the sample-loops works against Burroughs’s speech. As any mixer knows, the rhythm track is the track that is laid first. Burroughs’s tracks are thus by definition the rhythm tracks. When these are combined with the beats of the Disposable Heroes, both layers begin to sound as if they are off-time with one another. Chopping up Burroughs’s vocal gestures to better fit the overlaid digital rhythms only makes matters worse. The loops of his vocals on “Last Words of Dutch Schultz (this is insane)” and “Words of Advice for Young People” are comic in their attempt to make Burroughs’s words into a popular refrain. The inescapable fact is that Burroughs’s particular brand of poetry has no rhymes–the quintessential element to spoken rap/hip-hop rhythm in America.9

     

    There are a few noteworthy moments on the recording. “The Last Words of Dutch Schultz” features a contradictory tape-loop similar to ones Burroughs once prescribed for therapeutic use.10 The listless repetition of “but I am dying / no you’re not,” however, ends up sounding clumsy and uninspiring. While the text of “Warning to Young Couples” is largely pointless, there is an amusing Simpsons-like irony achieved by attaching bouncy “Leave it to Beaver” type music to a story of dogs chewing babies to death. “One God Universe,” a companion piece to “Ah Pook the Destroyer” from Dead City Radio, is also tolerable, and highlights the anti-thermodynamic cosmology that supports much of Burroughs’s work. The music here is reminiscent of funky 1960s style pop and the reggae that grew from it, which at least dovetails with Burroughs’s penchant for keif-smoking.11 There are two longer pieces on the recording, both drawn from Burroughs’s early work. “Did I Ever Tell You About the Man Who Taught His Asshole to Talk?,” one of his most famous comic routines, is a major disappointment. However dull Peter Weller’s reading of it in Cronenberg’s Naked Lunch, that rendition is nevertheless more satisfying than the terrible one on Spare-Ass Annie. “Junky’s Christmas,” a piece that went unpublished in written form until Interzone (1991), doesn’t work as well as Sandra Bernhard’s “White Christmas,” to which it is comparable in form if not in spirit, but it gets by, its musical component alternating between Christmas carols and rhythmic themes typical of incidental television fare.

     

    Also in the vortex spinning around Burroughs is the work of Al Jourgensen and his cohorts in their bands Ministry and the Revolting Cocks. As Burroughs in the 1960s used the “pulp texts” of his childhood as raw material for his anarchist text-and-image-collage, so RevCo uses “video pulp” for their industrial pop music. The frontier theme so prominent in Burroughs’s narratives is treated by RevCo on the title track of their 1991 CD Beers Steers and Queers. Employing black-originated hip-hop sampling and rhyming techniques, the Cocks rhythmically cut pop culture sound-bites into their work in a way comparable to Burroughs’s importing of pulp texts into his fiction. This is, aside from the rhythmic clash, the principle area in which Spare-Ass Annie is lacking. Beers, Steers and Queers, like much of the Spare-Ass Annie material, consists primarily of a sequenced dance beat. In this case, the beat is deliberately distorted to sound as if the speakers can’t handle the volume. The only tonal portions of the composition are samples of banjo and bells from the soundtracks of the films Deliverance and The Good the Bad and the Ugly. The “rapped” lyrics concern the hypocrisy of American society as exemplified by Texan culture.12 Dialogue from Deliverance setting up a homosexual rape scene opens the piece and recurs between flat recited rhymes mixing double entrendres of morality and depravity, righteousness and fellatio, such as “The truth is hard to swallow,” “there is a law man, there is the raw man, who is the right and who is the wrong man,” and “Get in my face.” The blatantly offensive images of homosexual activity operate for RevCo just as they do for Burroughs, innoculating their work against commodification while drawing into question conventional definitions of morality. The double-meaning of “revolting” is the central feature of a tension here as the piece concludes, “Texas has religion–revolting cocks are god!” As in Burroughs’s best work, morality and brutality are pushed so close together that a feeling of great discomfort results.

     

    RevCo’s next release, Linger Ficken Good, opens with an unashamed Burroughs rip-off entitled “Gila Copter.” The opening of “Gila Copter” prefaces RevCo’s typical digital punk/funk sound with a free rhythmic soundscape. Although the spoken text is free of rhyme, it does have identifiable refrains, all included in a narrative format and returning at unpredictable intervals. This use of refrain is in contrast with the predictable and much less effective use on Spare-Ass Annie. “Gila Copter” is a highly self-conscious piece which introduces the album as if it were an advertisement included within the product.13 The text begins as a sales pitch but quickly degrades into crypto-political advice. The plea here is for silence, to be achieved by turning off the televisual manipulation of “the American prime-time victim show.”

     

    Hey kids—you want a soundtrack that’s gonna make you feel tense–let you express your frustration–make you scared, want to run out and buy a gun? You’re looking for another rock and roll record that’ll make you feel like a victim. You love to be a victim, you love the American prime-time victim show. Hey bells, gila copters, machine guns–listen to that–listen to that–kill for Allah–kill for Jesus. . . . All that 1980s shit is over–brothers and sisters–we’re going to turn the volume down.

     

    The voice subsequently begins to take on a suspiciously incestuous quality which throws a wrench into the interpretive works. It is just enough to taint the text with doubt and irony and reinforce the edge of perversity that runs through much of Burroughs’s work. In contrast to the Cocks’ typical punk-style vocals, the vocalist here has a low raspy drawl imitative of Burroughs, clear but electronically treated. “Chopper” sound effects and other television noise drones throughout the piece, erupting in a violent distorted cameo at the transition between the free rhythmic introduction and the bass/noise-percussion groove which constitutes the majority of the tune.

     

    Although Burroughs’s most popular writing seldom treats technology explicitly, his experimental work from Naked Lunch to The Soft Machine (1967) does. What makes Ministry Burroughs’s digital-era doppleganger, however, is not only the theme of the spoken (or sung) texts, but the use of technology by the ordinary citizen to shatter the control system’s hold on emotional manipulation. To this end the last and title tune from Linger Ficken Good (in which the Revolting Cocks are aided by the Revolting Pussies and, apparently, by their Revolting offspring) is an excellent example of postmodernist, underground, digital kitsch that revels in both its commerciality and its marginality in commercial terms. In this respect RevCo’s work begins to resemble the “intentional failure” of Andy Kaufman’s characters Foreign Man (resurrected as Latka Gravas in Taxi) and Tony Clifton, or that of Sandra Bernhard in Without You I’m Nothing .

     

    “Linger Ficken Good” is a fold-in of magnificent qualities when heard in these terms, a montage of advertising and pornography. Like Bernhard’s or Kaufman’s work, it is titillating and amusing at first, but demands the audience’s endurance and eventually gives rise to a level of sensibility above the merely commercial.14 The music consists of six minutes of a jazz-style walking bass with sequenced high-hat and scratching samples providing a simple beat. Over this repetitive but ever-changing groove various voices enter and leave: a male vocal chants “finger licking good” over a panting female “more,” with a chorus of “e i e i o”; the line “this is porno for your mind–porno for your crotch” is answered by an offhand comment of “family entertainment” and the sound of a chicken clucking. The result is a re-serving of the Naked Lunch, this one including meat which must have been processed in the world of David Lynch’s Eraserhead. In the second segment of the piece, the (male) members of the band are introduced by female voices as if in a television special. In a call-and-response format, with their own voices providing an ostinato of “linger ficken good,” the “revolting pussies” chant the names of the Cocks as if they were salivating over the possibility of getting a taste. The third segment is a simulated interview with a black male, ostensibly a studio-musician in the Cocks’ employ. He runs through all the members of band, telling the listener their nicknames and insulting their musical abilities. “Kiss my ass” he snorts, ” . . . punks”; the last word is spit out just as the music is pulled out from under him for a precious moment of silence. The fourth segment is another variation on this theme, with the pussies rhyming the qualities of their favourite cocks in response to an endlessly looped sample asking, “who’s your favourite cock?” The effect here is of a child repeatedly pulling the cord of a talking doll. The irony inherent in the Cocks’ name becomes clear in the piece’s repetitive (but not sampled) denouement, a group of children singing a commercial jingle melody “it’s a RevCo world–it’s a RevCo world” in warbly harmony. This clever elision of the “revolting cocks,” already a pun, into the banal ad-speak “RevCo” further confuses the position of the Cocks with respect to the corporate music machine and solidifies their ties to the tradition of Malcolm MacLaren style “punk.” This piece is a particularly extreme example of music in the expanded field; there is no element which is not to be heard as if between aural quotation marks.

     

    “Just One Fix,” a CD single put out by Ministry in 1992, features Burroughs himself as this kind of quotable sonic text. Like much of Ministry’s work, the track begins with a scream; the subsequent vocals are distorted and mixed into the noise that forms the body of the track and its various remixes. Burroughs’s words are clipped carefully and mixed in with other noise textures, rather than being featured in their own right and played against a contrasting sonic background. The piece has an electronic dance beat which, like all Ministry work, is hypnotic in effect, lending Burroughs’s words a sense of delirium. “Smash the control images; smash the control machine” are sampled and repeated on the “12” edit,” while the “Quick Fix edit” features a slightly longer text in which Burroughs confesses an ambivalent position, presumably as an American or as a communication machine, with respect to the control machine as a whole. “To put it country simple, there are some things on earth that other folks might want–like the whole planet.” Burroughs admits, “I am with the invaders–no sense trying to hide that.” He makes his standard call for quiet, at which point a gap is inserted in the spoken text to allow the noise-samples compiled by Ministry to occupy the principal listenting space. The samples sound variously like highway traffic, airport noise and creaking machinery. The atmosphere of Nova Express is reconfigured in Burroughs’s muffled claims that “there is no place else to go–the theatre is closed . . . cut music lines–cut word lines.” Burroughs is here alluding to a universe which is entirely pre-scripted, like a biologic film running in a theatre which no one is allowed to leave. Ministry in their aggressive, chaotic composition are attempting to do just as Burroughs recommends–“cut music lines” and “cut word lines” by scrambling the codes through which commercial music manages the feeling and intellect of its audience. The products of commercial culture, including television and popular music, are here exposed as techno-drugs manipulating the addictive psychology of an audience that demands “just one fix.”15

     

    There are of course other sound-recordings by other artists which exemplify the tendencies outlined at the beginning of this article. I have chosen to focus on Burroughs because his work speaks to me, and through it I have been able to connect with contemporary sonic counter-culture. I can only assume that it is because Burroughs is surely nearing death that corporate America can push him. He has become a grand old man of counter-cultural resistance, just crazy enough that his intentions are not clear to the masses. Like that of Ministry and RevCo, his revolutionary message is partially submerged in texts that promote themselves as commercial pleasure-devices, such as the five reviewed here. I hope the reader will forgive me for celebrating the theoretical possibilities of music in a wholly verbal format, and for repeatedly relating the musical texts in question to others in other musical spectra. I may not have been able to say whether or not any of the CD’s under review truly “kicked butt,” but I hope I have been able to outline some of the ways in which butt can be kicked today with nothing more than a CD player, a sampler, a tape deck and a TV set.

     

    Notes

     

    1.Susan McClary and Robert Walser pose this question intheir essay “Start Making Sense! Musicology Wrestles with Rock” (Frith andGoodwin 1990).

     

    2.Rosalind Krauss (1979) has written of “sculpture in theexpanded field” bounded by the limits of site-construction, axiomaticstructures, marked sites and sculpture. Analogously, one might think of afour-cornered field bounded by music, soundscape, advertising and poetry. Heressay “Sculpture in the Expanded Field,” originally printed inOctober 8 (Spring 1979), appears in Foster, 1983.

     

    3.Jenny’s essay “La strategies de la forme” fromPotéique 27 (1976) is referred to by Zurbrugg in his essay”Burroughs, Barthes and the Limits of Interxtuality” in the Burroughs issue ofthe Review of Contemporary Fiction (1984).

     

    4.In his book Noise, French economist andwriter Jacques Attali makes it plain that he intends “not only to theorizeabout music, but to theorize through music” (Attali 1985: 4).

     

    5.Besides Van Sant’s and Cronenberg’s film (the latterreleased in cooperation with a re-release of Burroughs’s written work byGrove, his first American publisher), the current Burroughs revival has beenfueled by Viking’s publication of Burroughs’s early work Queer(1985) and Interzone (1989) as well as the newly writtenThe Cat Inside (1986) and The Western Lands (1987)and by the popularity of Burroughs-influenced cyberpunk science-fiction(particularly Gibson’s Neuromancer (1984)).

     

    6.”Twilight’s Last Gleaming” is one of Burroughs’s earliestand most often re-told tales, appearing in various forms at various times inBurroughs’s career, including on Dead City Radio and inInterzone as well as (in a folded-in form) in NovaExpress (1964). The tale is one Burroughs came up with as a young manin tandem with friend Kells Elvins, a black comedy in which all the “basicAmerican rotteness” pent up in the Titanic’s passengers and crew spills outwhen they have to run for the life-boats.

     

    7.Other short sonic compositions to complement Burroughs’sreading were contributed by Donald Fagen, Cheryl Hardwick, Lenny Pickett,Sonic Youth and Chris Stein.

     

    8.This is ironically, for those familiar with AmericanPrayer‘s “Lament for my Cock,” followed by some amusingly banalpronouncements by Burroughs on the topic of snakes.

     

    9.The speech rhythm problem is highlighted in a peculiar wayby pieces in which Ras I. Zulu and Michael Franti read from the opening ofNova Express. This folded-in creation only barely hangs togetherwhen uttered by Burroughs, and gives a positively bizarre when read inJamaican and afro-American speech rhythms.

     

    10.In The Job (Odier 1974), Burroughsrecommends several guerrilla tactics involving tape recorders and cameras forvarious purposes. One tactic, designed to shake the mind out of its habitualdeference to authority, is to assemble a tape in which contradictory commandsalternate at high speed.

     

    11.See Burroughs’s biographers Morgan (1988) and Miles(1992) for information on the role of cannabis in the composition ofNaked Lunch and its experimental spin-offs.

     

    12.The piece can be heard as an amusing retake of the manywhite blues rip-offs concerning mistreatment in Texas, such as Johnny Winter’s”Dallas” or Creedence Clearwater Revival’s “The Midnight Special”. Its moodalso recalls Mailer’s Why Are We in Vietnam.

     

    13.The effect is similar to the one created by They Might BeGiant’s “Theme from Flood” from Flood (1990).

     

    14.My comparison is based on Philip Auslander’s chapter onKaufman and Bernhard in his 1992 book Presence and Resistance:Postmodernism and Cultural Politics in Contemporary AmericanPerformance.

     

    15.At the risk of doing exactly what Frith and Goodwindecry, I must describe the cover art of Just One Fix. It is amultimedia painting by Burroughs himself, entitled “Last Chance Junction andCurse on Drug Hysterics” consisting of a montage of newspaper articles (an AnnLanders column on drugs, an AP clip about religious fundamentalists and theend of the world, and a photograph of a steam engine with the caption “Casey’slast ride”), painted all around and over with random-looking squiggles ofblack and yellow.

    Works Cited

     

    • Attali, Jacques. Noise: the Political Economy of Music. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1985.
    • Auslander, Philip. Presence and Resistance: Postmodernism andCultural Politics in Contemporary American Performance. Ann Arbor:University of Michigan Press, 1992.
    • Burroughs, William S. Naked Lunch. New York: Grove, 1959.
    • —. Nova Express. New York: Grove, 1964.
    • —. The Soft Machine. New York: Grove, 1967.
    • —. Queer. New York: Viking, 1985.
    • —. The Western Lands. New York: Viking Penguin, 1987.
    • —. Interzone. Ed. James Grauerholz. New York: Viking,1991.
    • Foster, Hal. ed. The Anti-aesthetic: essays on postmodernculture. Seattle: Bay Press, 1983.
    • Frith, Simon and Goodwin, Andrew, eds. On Record: Rock, Pop and theWritten Word. New York: Pantheon, 1990.
    • Gibson, William. Neuromancer. New York: Ace, 1984.
    • Jenny, Laurent. “La stratgie de la forme”. Poétique 27 (1976).
    • Miles, Barry. William Burroughs: El Hombre Invisible. London: Virgin, 1992.
    • Morgan, Ted. Literary Outlaw. New York: Holt, 1988.
    • Odier, Daniel. The Job. New York: Grove, 1974.
    • Zurbrugg, Nicholas. “Burroughs, Barthes and the Limits of Intertextuality”. Review of Contemporary Fiction (Spring 1984).

     

  • Optical Allusions: Hysterical Memories and the Screening of Pregnant Sites

     

    Karen L. Carr

    English Department
    Colby College
    klcarr@colby.edu

     

    Since the seer is caught up in what he sees, it is still himself he sees: there is a fundamental narcissism of all vision. And thus, for the same reason, the vision he exercises, he also undergoes from the things, such that, as many painters have said, I feel myself looked at by the things, my activity is equally passivity–which is the second and more profound sense of the narcissism: not to see in the outside, as the others see it, the contour of a body one inhabits, but especially to be seen by the outside, to exist within it, to emigrate into it, to be seduced, captivated, alienated by the phantom so that the seer and the visible reciprocate one another and we no longer know which sees and which is seen.1

     

    I am caught, embedded in the footsteps that lead into this moment of time in which I am frozen. There, pushing itself up, out, around, in front of everything else, the large round belly that forces time into position. This is no moment of death; nor is it a moment of life. . . . Caught, transformed, transfixed. . . . A death mask? A memory? A moment in which I will always be living, always be dying. Breath never leaving dust on the glossy surface.

     

    Ultrasound uses sound waves to create an image of the fetus on a screen which is viewed by the patient, the ultrasound technician and (later, separately) the doctor. Like Freud, inquiring into the deaf mind, the ultrasound can be seen as an attempt to investigate the deafness of the pregnant body by producing sight. Sight and sound are linked via the medium of the ultrasound machine itself as well as the doctor who must be on hand to interpret its imagery. Like the psychoanalyst, the doctor is the agential figure. The image, like the memory of the hysteric, may come from the body but once it is brought into being and made visual, it has traversed the line between a “raw” visual conglomeration and into a “real” baby. This transformation of fetus to baby via the image cannot happen without the doctor. Fuzzy gray images floating, fragmented on the screen become hands, feet, penis, mouth, eyes, heart as soon as the doctor interprets them.

     

    The ultrasound technician is caught between patient and doctor in this configuration. S/he may point out bodily parts and confer gender on the fetus, as long as the fetus looks “healthy.” Often, the pregnant woman can diagnose a “problem” herself just based upon the amount of silence in the room. The technician, then, becomes the person with a secret. The “baby” is in effect hidden in and by the image until the doctor can step in to bring it forth and make it clear and whole. It is in the process of revealing that which the patient cannot see that the doctor becomes the first agent of the developing fetus’ subjectivity. Ultrasound, in its opening of the pregnant body, becomes a marker of reality. Once the doctor constructs the image on the screen, sign and referent are brought together. The pregnant body is no longer concealing a private mysterious event; rather, it is holding a “life” that we can check in on–visit–via our ability to see. In the ideological terrain of modern reproduction, this technology functions so as to change fetuses into babies, possible existence into “life” and private into public.

     

    Certainly, the rise of “fetal rights” cannot be separated from the rise in fetal technologies which allow us access to the fetus via images or via the pregnant body itself in uterine pre-partum surgery. Medical technologies which allow sight of the fetus engender a reproductive world in which, much like Foucault’s notion of panopticism, “I am seen therefore I am.” Indeed, Rosalind Petchesky argues that, from the clinician’s standpoint, fetal imaging becomes “a kind of panoptics of the womb.”2

     

    The reproductive (pregnant) body exists as spectacle–it is always a profoundly sighted body that doesn’t exist apart from being seen. There is the external sense of people looking, but with technologies such as ultrasound, there is also the internal sense that the fetus itself is, somehow, looking. Representations of the fetus by anti-choice groups focus on this notion of the fetus by accentuating its human qualities–the tiny hands and fingers, organs and sensory apparati–ears, eyes, mouth. When this technique works, it is a means of setting up internal surveillance for the woman who is pregnant. Not only is the state watching but so is the human-like fetus itself. The pregnant body then is circumscribed by a visual line that is both in and out, private and public.

     

    The pregnant woman takes on the job of surveillance herself, by “humanizing” and making real the fetus inside, by internalizing the camera eye and pulling the conglomeration of cells that is fetus into the ultrasonically constructed “whole” baby–“not only ‘already a baby,’ but more–a ‘baby-man,’ an autonomous, atomized mini-space hero.”3 This view is supported by medical and social ideologies which encourage women to view their fetuses as children from the moment they know they are there. In an episode of “Murphy Brown,” for instance, Murphy talks about the “little voice inside her” which helped engender her decision to continue her pregnancy. Pregnancy manuals, pamphlets at doctors’ and midwives’ offices frequently refer to the fetus as “your baby,” especially when directing women to refrain from “unhealthy habits which might harm the baby.” An American Cancer Society poster, circulated in the early 80s, depicted a fetus with a cigarette in its mouth to “really show” the ill-effects of smoking during pregnancy. Like ultrasound, the image of the smoking fetus worked by humanizing the fetus, by giving it representation within its womb environment. Once the “secret” of the womb environment is exposed, that environment too must be socially constructed via narrative, much like Dora’s bodily secrets. Once societal forces have gained sight, they must also construct representations which keep the fetus in circulation, in service of the ideology of pregnancy which demands rights for a fetus. This self-surveillance and social surveillance is what enables the legal regulation of the pregnant body. It is as if the woman who takes drugs, smokes or drinks during pregnancy has failed at policing herself, at merging the lines of public and private sight on top of her body. She becomes the ultimate transgressor because she has failed in her task to give the fetus subjectivity–to bestow upon it an identity which, once there, needs to be protected and nurtured at all costs. In other words, the woman who fails to be her own cop fails because she refuses to conflate pregnant body with mother by participating in the social mandate that the fetus become subject well before birth.

     

    In the realm of reproductive technologies, sight rather than language becomes the crucial determiner of subjectivity. The fetal “body” that has been constructed by medicine and culture is one that needs no words; indeed, as Peteshky makes clear, it only need have the “Silent Scream” of the movie which anti-choice groups have used so effectively.4 If subjectivity is a process that is recognized and mediated by legal discourse and ideology, then the fetus, found in the moving glops of a video screen, is subject. Lacan’s infamous mirror instead becomes a video display screen where looking at and looking out produce images through which subjectivity is granted. It hardly matters that the fetus, unlike the child in the mirror, has no recognition of its own shape, or its mother’s. What matters is that it has been found, caught by the zig-zagging sound waves, caught by the photograph that freezes its “babyhood,” its subjectivity for all the world to see. In her discussion of reproductive discourse, Valerie Hartouni quotes from a physician’s description of ultrasound:

     

    Physician Michael R. Harrison puts the issue this way:

     

    it was not until the last half of this century that the prying eye of the ultrasound (that is, ultrasound visualization) rendered the once opaque womb transparent, stripping the veil of mystery from the dark inner sanctum, and letting the light of scientific observation fall on the shy and secretive fetus. . . . The sonographic voyeur, spying on the unwary fetus finds him or her a surprisingly active little creature, and not at all the passive parasite we had imagined.”

     

    No longer a “medical recluse” or a “parasite,” the fetus has been grasped as an object of scientific observation and medical manipulation, not to mention anthropomorphic imagination.”5

     

    As I look at my fetus, floating at me from within the sound hollow cavern of my womb, I am, in a sense, re-sutured even as I am being fragmented. My uterus, on display, lit up like some video game is, paradoxically, the means to my fragmentation as well as my access to “wholeness.” It is this very fragmentation that the ultrasound machine attempts to re-absorb into an ideology of wholeness that includes sighting the fetus and granting it subjectivity even as it still resides in the body. Birth, as Kristeva talks about it in “Motherhood According to Bellini,” is no longer the only possible moment of dual subjectivity; rather, the pregnant woman becomes holder of two subjectivities, two gazes out at the moment that her fetus is sighted/sited.6 During my own ultrasound, as the fetus careened off the walls of my uterus, its hands over its ears (“Does it hurt the fetus?” I asked. “Oh no; they can’t hear any of this. It has no effect on them.”), it suddenly turned and faced the screen, peering out like some sort of amphibious alien, caught in a screen that can only contain. It was an unsettling moment–one in which my fetus became too real. In looking out at the screen–a random and coincidental movement–the fetus had returned my gaze, somehow. And that changed everything. It is the photograph moving–turning real, taking on eyes and mouth, pressing its face up against the screen like a child pushing/disfiguring his face against a window and leaving fog. Barthes writes, “if the photograph then becomes horrible, it is because it certifies, so to speak, that the corpse is alive as corpse: it is the living image of a dead thing. For the photograph’s immobility is somehow the result of a perverse confusion between two concepts: the Real and the Live.”7

     

    At the moment that I imagine a gaze for the fetus in side me, I am granting it life in death. The fetus remains as a death, as a mystery, a question until it prods one of the senses. A heartbeat, a kick or a sighting (which can be done long before a heartbeat can be heard or a kick felt) bring it into possibility–into the world of the Live. By looking out from the screen, looking back out, the fetus is both Real and Live; in looking out at me, it becomes real precisely because it is alive–precisely because it is moving through me like some wind up toy in a small box.

     

    Fetus. Baby. Baby. Fetus. These terms have become polarized as all positions within the “debate” about the right to choose abortion have relied upon the most far-reaching extremes of opposition in advancing their arguments. The “pro-life” position relies upon the assertion of life at any and all moments while the “pro-choice” position walks right into the argumentative terrain mapped by the anti-choice crusaders by opposing a construction of life with a construction of tissue, of fetus. The pregnant woman is caught in this discursive net, floating somewhere between the terms of scientific technicality and procreative astonishment. To be pregnant and construct a “baby” out of the mass of cells rapidly splintering inside is to move precariously close to a political position in which “life” becomes the operant term for the thing, the stuff of the body’s hidden insides. For a feminist committed to intervention, it is a retracing of the line between public and private as the fantasies of kicking, twirling, suckling babies must be kept “in,” lest they fall into the hands and mouths of the “wrong side,” in this case, the anti-choice marauders. Thus, the personal must be re-inscribed away from the political as the deployment of the transformation of fetus to baby can become quite problematic. Similarly, the pregnant woman who doesn’t want to be pregnant must counter the narrative seduction of life, baby, gurgling, etc. and reconceive “baby” as “fetus.” Pro-choice constructions of pregnancy and abortion make this quite difficult however, by assuming that the choice of abortion must, necessarily, be “difficult,” “painful,” etc. Abortion stories are filled with descriptions of just this sort of abortion and only work to reinforce the boundary between women who have abortions for the “right” reasons and with the proper amount of guilt and suffering and women who “take it lightly,” “do it as a form of birth control,” or have frequent abortions. This moralistic position only reinforces the arguments of those who violently oppose women’s ability to act and move with any agency and autonomy. The construction of “right” and “wrong,” good and bad abortions is similar in effect to early twentieth century eugenecists’ constructions of fit and unfit mothers, and is, at its core, an argument that is still based on a conceptualization of the fetus as life, not tissue and cells. The expectation of, indeed, the demand for suffering and levity, trauma and pain belies any attempt to construct the stuff of pregnancy as cellular matter. If this were the case, then the arguments about abortion by those committed to its continued availability would be radically different, based not on an ethic of “choice,” a false either/or pluralism which only further obscures the issue, and is the continual re-circulation of similar logic, but rather on a construction of pregnancy which works its way out, which accounts for the vast, overwhelming and contradictory constructions of pregnancy that circulate around and on top of anyone who finds herself in that position. Rather than seeing everything as either/or, and expecting women to grieve…or not, to find it hard…or not, it’s important to keep the complexity hanging, to juggle the very multiple and deeply contentious images that construct pregnant subjectivities. The notion of choice is an overly reductive one, one that circulates in such a way that it brings to mind choices like lemonade vs. ice tea, french fries vs. baked potato and quickly reduces anything else in its signifying sphere–abortion, sexuality, etc.–to the same. As so many people arguing against the notion of sexual “choice” show, the concept remains locked in its binaristic prison where all choices are available from a menu of two items. Sexuality? choice or biology. Who would choose such a life? Why aren’t there more? Abortion? choice (i.e., death) or “life.” But the choice is never an easy one. No one is saying that it’s easy, only that the choice be hers.

     

    Appeals to women to have ultrasound tend to construct ultrasound as a harmless diagnostic tool which can help the “mother” personalize the fetus, to make it more “real,” setting it up as a sort of pre-birth bonding tool while at the same time convincing women of its necessity to insure a healthy pregnancy. It’s meant to put women’s minds “at ease” in appeals, again to the unknown terrors of pregnancy–ill health, disabilities, death. As Rosalind Petchesky and Valerie Hartouni have both pointed out, ultrasound also functions as an ideological tool in that its personalizing of the fetus often sways women who might otherwise have wanted abortions.

     

    Hartouni describes the “study” (based, as she points out, “on only two, entirely unrelated interviews”) of ultrasound that led to the making of The Silent Scream:

     

    Fletcher and Evans noted that ultrasound imaging of the “fetal form” tended to foster among pregnant women a sense of recognition and identification of the fetus as their own, as something belonging to and dependent upon them alone. Constituting the stuff of maternal bonding, “the fundamental element in the later parent-child bond,” such recognition, Fletcher and Evans claimed, was more likely to lead women “to resolve ‘ambivalent’ pregnancies in favor of the fetus.”8

     

    The rhetoric of ultrasonography clearly bears them out; ultrasonographers use language of personhood when describing the floating fetus, not language of it-hood. Fetuses are often referred to as he/she (indeed, conferred on the screen as he/she), pregnant women are told to notice how cute he/she is, how he/she is sleeping, looking, sucking her/his thumb, etc. The language is active, the fetus made alive and real by the sound screen. The imaging of ultrasound can also work beyond the resolution of “ambivalent” feelings about a particular, specific pregnancy. As a recent article in the Providence Journal, makes clear, the experience of ultrasound can consolidate ambivalent feelings about abortion in general. After finally “seeing” a “live” “daughter” (with “arms, legs, face, beating heart, life”) on the ultrasound screen after two successive miscarriages, the author determines that:

     

    I now find the slogan “my body, my choice” amazingly arrogant. If there is one lesson I have learned through this year, it is that I do not create life. Life passes through me. . . . I do not create life, I house it. I did nothing different with any of my four children, but two lived within my womb and two died there. Life-giving is beyond my power, beyond my body, beyond my choice.9

     

    Rosalind Petchesky discusses the need to see ultrasound and other reproductive technologies as more than simply “an omnivorous male plot to take over their [women’s] reproductive capacities,” because this view assumes a “transhistorical need,” while also denying any possibility of women being “agents of their own reproductive destinies.”10 This is a crucial point, one that is too quickly and easily overlooked in the discourse on/of reproductive technologies. While ultrasound can be looked at as simply another aid to feminine fragmentation, the fragmentation itself is too often dismissed as automatically problematic. Here it is useful to consider Haraway as she takes a view of fragmentation which encompasses the various technological apparatuses that have become part of the web of interpellative factors. Haraway writes:

     

    A cyborg world might be about lived social and bodily realities in which people are not afraid of their joint kinship with animals and machines, not afraid of permanently partial identities and contradictory standpoints. The political struggle is to see from both perspectives at once because each reveals both dominations and possibilities unimaginable from the other vantage point.11

     

    To dismiss ultrasound, then, as a re-fragmentation of the female body is to insist that fragmentation is something that we should fight against. That we have abandoned the humanist model of “the individual”, nicely rounded and whole, but left in place the desire for a physicality that is somehow free of the variety of cultural signposts that meet at the body, is a mistake. We need to be able to affirm the very fragmentation which we would fight, to welcome the screaming eyes of the fetus glaring/gazing back. The very subjectivity that ultrasound constructs for the fetus in the service of anti-choice, pro-nuclear heterosexual family ideology also operates in such a way that the pregnant woman herself is able to attempt to make sense of a process (pregnancy) which is always already a profoundly fragmenting, disjunct enactment.

     

    (IMAGE)

     

    Both of my children were dressed in their names the day we saw them on the ultrasound screen. Like clothing on a naked body, their names, gendered and “personal,” reached over and marked the quickly moving forms that swam across the screen. The siting of my sons, in the names we had picked for them, changed the way I perceived myself as a pregnant woman. No longer floating polymorphous possibilities–BOYS stared out at me from behind a screen which had suddenly granted them gender. No matter how much I thought that I had thought and theorized my way out of gender, when my boys were called into shape by the sight and language of the ultrasound technician, they existed, from that moment on, both separate and apart from me. Boys in my body. My body in boys. The fragmentation was no more complete or incomplete than it had been before I was allowed the sight of my two male fetuses; it was only more real.

     

    (IMAGE)

     

    In the infamous pregnant nude and glamour photographs of Demi Moore in Vanity Fair, a highly erotic, decorated pregnant body stares at the viewer.12 Moore is neither apologetic nor shy, reluctant or removed from her sensuality; indeed the photographs are informed by the genre of glamour movie star photos. The pictures of Moore provoked enough controversy for the magazine to wrap that particular issue before it went out to stores and newsstands.

     

    The attempts, on the part of the magazine, to keep the pregnant body (especially the naked pregnant body) out of view is part of a cultural history in which the pregnant female body is a sight of both idolization and embarrassment. The pregnant body is perhaps the most visible marker of heterosexual sexuality–the X was here grade school desk graffiti transferred to the body of women. At the same time that the pregnant body can exist so as to re-establish, or disrupt the ideology of the heterosexual nuclear family, it is also meant to exist in a de-sexualized zone, as though all women were the Virgin Mary of Christianity. On the one hand, pregnant bodies are patted and stroked by random strangers on buses, on streets, in classrooms, yet on the other hand, their sexuality is a contained one–sexuality with a reason. For the pregnant woman to stand as a sexualized body even while she’s pregnant (presumably, the reason to be sexual/have sex is already inside her, so why would she want more?) is to transgress the boundary not only of sexuality and desire, but also of inside and outside. Sexuality occurs even as the fetus is in the body; the sexuality continues, around, on top of, next to the fetus. The pregnant woman who is represented as erotic is crossing the boundaries, even as they exist inside her.

     

    There is a looking at that photographs of Demi Moore engender. She is pregnant woman as spectacle without being specimen. She is a pregnant body that exists firmly outside of medical representation; her luxurious green gown, her diamonds, her sophisticated, cutting edge haircut all push her further away from the image of pregnant woman as medical subject who needs to be helped, medicated or somehow pathologized. Indeed, these are the very features of pregnant representation which allow it in the first place. Moore’s huge diamond wedding ring glares off her finger and the fashion that her pregnant body exudes and performs is that of completely “right” pregnancy: her body is not excessive beyond its pregnant status, and her status within society is firmly entrenched in and reiterated by the poses she strikes. Moore, then, can resist pathologization because she has already been granted that power by her acquiescences to other normalized expectations: heterosexuality, marriage, wealth, status and beauty. Still, within the rather tight frame of acquiescences which the particularity of Moore’s body reasserts, there is a space being made for an alternate representation of the pregnant body. The photographs of Moore work against pathologization by instead constructing Moore in the discourse of eroticization which works directly against the aims of medical constructions of pregnancy which seek to de-eroticize the pregnant woman’s body by various means, from dictates that women not eat too much when they’re pregnant so they don’t “gain too much weight” (wouldn’t want to mix excesses) to lack of adequate information about various sexual practices/positions as pregnancy progresses. Pregnant women are supposed to “glow” with the flush and excitement of impending motherhood and the subsumation of self into other; clearly, against this ideology, the glow of orgasm, of sexuality in progress, poses enormous resistance which leads, as in the case of Vanity Fair, to a reduction of sight–ironically, a move that only transferred the locus of sight from public to private.

     

    Sighting, then, always depends upon who is being looked at. In the case of ultrasound technology, the thing being sighted is the fetus–the raison d’être for the entire field of obstetrics, and, it is presumed, for the woman lying on the table. In a photograph of Demi Moore, pregnant, it is not her baby we see; we don’t have access to the inside; all we see is the swollen belly poking out–the maternal body that is entirely absent from the ultrasound picture. The ultrasound picture, as Petchesky has pointed out, becomes part of the family record, part of the evidential world of the family photo album; it exists as an “origin” for the fetus floating in its bit of outer space.13 As Rosalind Kraus observes: “The photographic record . . . is an agent in the collective fantasy of family cohesion, and in that sense the camera is a projective tool, part of the theater that the family constructs to convince itself that it is together and whole.”14 In my own photo albums, the ultrasound photos start my sons’ pictorial record; photographs of me pregnant exist in another album entirely, one that ostensibly traces “me.”

     

    Within the representational space that ultrasound constructs, women are, for a moment, suspended from their bodies–caught in the impossible “elsewhere” between self and other, organism and machine. The machine itself becomes the very instrument of recognition, through the ability of the woman to “site” her own body, and, like the hysteric, enact it. The woman’s body becomes the very means to link public and private, inside and outside via its performative fragmentation. For it is the machine itself–standing in the room, hooked to the belly of the woman by its long thick tangled cords–that represents, finally, the impossible fusion of those boundaries even as it tries to enact them. Thus, she is left fragmented by the very blurring of boundaries which ultrasound enables. The female body traversed by ultrasound, rummaged through via cesarean sections, is one through which the location of boundaries has been effected. It is, then, a sited body–one that can no longer exist merely as the “natural” pregnant body which so inexplicably holds and contains contradictions. The ultrasound screen shows us that containment is no longer possible–that private and public, inside and outside have all merged at the site of the fragmented pregnant body. There are no longer any clear lines of corporeal representation which we can depend upon; nothing makes this more clear than the process of ultrasound in which the pregnant body is left suspended somewhere between memory and its performance, presence and lack, transgression and suture.

     

    I lay on the cool slab of padded stretcher watching as she moves the instrument across me. She tilts the screen towards me, but not enough so that I can really see. What can I see anyway? Is there anyway to see in those blurs of shadows and light bouncing across the screen without her there? She becomes the eyes that this technology takes from me. Yet I am the one who is asked to fashion the gaze that she produces–to turn and twist and interpret until I have called the fetus in from its shadows, from its blurry frozen lines and taken it, like the picture book snapshot I hold in my hand, and made it real. Yet I have no sight here. I am blind as my seeing sees nothing but light moving and pulsing. Skull/baby, skullbaby, skull…baby. She moves the instrument and as she pushes buttons on the screen the fetus turns from baby to skull, from human to skeletal monster–all sunken sockets and splintered silence. Each time the face of the baby retreats, I long for its return as I so much want to participate in this drama of creation. Here, in the ultrasound room, is where the “life” is created. Here is where I know there is no turning back. Here is where the howling ghostly possibility becomes real. Here is where the sewing begins, and the aural images of feet, head, heart, spine, bone are all taken and pieced together and handed back to me like the fuzzy snapshots I clutch so carefully. Here is where the notion of wholeness becomes reified through a collection of the pieces of the phantom fetal body. No longer just part of the mother, a dreamlike possibility hovering somewhere in still fluids. The very wholeness of the maternal/fetal body is made possible, if not complete, by this ultrasonically induced act of interpellation. Pieces identified. Fragments made whole until a body has been made within a body which is then expected to be nothing more or less than self-sacrificing vessel for the remaining months of occupation. Mother and child are called forth there in the darkened screen blazing room, made whole by the relief of separation healed, fragmentation sited, sighted and repaired.

     

    (IMAGE)

     

    Skull. Baby. Skull. Baby. Where are we left then? I carry both fetus and baby inside me. I carry a political fetus, insofar as I challenge anyone refusing or restricting me based upon my increasingly public body. People stare at my abdomen before they meet my eyes. They have expectations, demands, desires for that abdomen as it juts out beyond the usual circumference of private space. Oh, you’re not due until then? Hmm…maybe it’s twins. You’re not drinking are you? Smoking? Eating junk food? Lifting, straining, pulling, sniffing, breathing or otherwise exposing the baby…. So my public baby is a fetus, one that must remain my body, one that must enlarge the circumference of the spaces of the private rather than those of the public. But my private fetus is a baby. Late at night when it starts its musical tumbling through the air of me, it is a baby in me. Late in pregnancy when I am tilted large, my breath overtaking me with each small step, my bladder lost in the organ crush inside me, my ligaments stretching in all directions each time I move, it is only the baby in me, not the fetus, that keeps me distanced from my body in a necessary recognition of a temporary state. Not me. Later still, pushing and screaming with sweat, pains erasing all consciousness of time, space and motion, it is only the thought of a baby–slippery and soft, fingers curled in tiny sharp-nailed fists–that even begins to justify this pain. My public fetus remains a secret to my private baby just as my private baby remains a secret to my public identification as a pro-choice feminist. Fragments. Splintery pieces which will never meet. There is no outside. Only complicated and complicitous circulations–motions, movements.

     

    A postmodern positics (politics and positionality) of pregnancy recognizes and retains that complicated, twisted and contradictory experiences of pregnant subjectivity without expecting pregnant women to fall into either of the waiting binaries of sad silence or eerie effusiveness. Narrative air tunnels, blowing and pulling wait on either side of the pregnant woman as she must filter her experience into one wholesale ideological adoption or another. Rather than watch, if not assist, in the propulsion of women into one side or another, in the easy sewing up of experience into neat and tidy bundles, we need to return to the fragmented subject and not expect that, when it comes to things like pregnancy, a de-centered, atomized subjectivity will suddenly be rendered whole. This expectation is itself a retreat to a body-based subjectivity rather than an embodied one, as it takes the fact of bodily transformation (pregnancy) and reads it as constitutive of the resulting re-sutured subjectivity. Pregnancy becomes the thing which must provoke action to one side or another rather than a site of conflictedness itself. The pregnant subject is called to beat a hasty retreat from the field of fluid, partial and provisional identity and race to a position from which her body will not define her, yet the very necessity of the race is engendered by the change of her somatic status.

     

    We are left then, with images–images floating, bending, bursting–that themselves constitute pregnant bodies, pregnant subjectivities. Fragmented, dispersed, disjunct–they reach in all directions simultaneously, and threaten to rip apart ideologies like jagged lines of lightning severing the sky.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Maurice Merleau-Ponty, The Visible and the Invisible (Evanston: Northwestern UP, 1968), 139.

     

    2. Rosalind Pollack Petchesky, “Foetal Images: the Power of Visual Culture in the Politics of Reproduction,” Reproductive Technologies: Gender, Motherhood and Medicine, Michele Stanworth, ed. (Minneapolis: U of Minnesota Press, 1987), 69.

     

    3.Petchesky, 64.

     

    4.Petchesky, 64.

     

    5.Valerie Hartouni, “Containing Women: Reproductive Discourse in the 1980s,” Technoculture, Constance Penley and Andrew Ross, eds. (Minneapolis: U of Minnesota Press, 1991), 38.

     

    6.Julia Kristeva, “Motherhood According to Bellini,” Desire in Language: A Semiotic Approach to Art and Literature, Leon Roudiez, ed. (New York, Columbia UP, 1980). While Kristeva’s essay is an intersting look at the fragmentation that occurs in and out of the maternal body, it ultimately reinforces the romanticized view of the semiotic, in which the privileged route of access is through a pregnant body, thus reinforcing naturalistic and restrictive ideas about women and pregnancy.

     

    7.Roland Barthes, Camera Lucida, trans. Richard Howard (New York: Hill and Wang, 1981), 79.

     

    8.Hartouni, 37.

     

    9.Lori Stanley Roeleveld, “My Turn” (weekly column), Providence Journal, Sun., June 27 1993: E-3.

     

    10.Petchesky, 72.

     

    11.Donna Haraway, “A Manifesto for Cyborgs,” Feminism/Postmodernism, Linda Nicholson and Nancy Fraser, eds. (New York: Routledge, 1990), 196.

     

    12.Vanity Fair, August 1991: Cover, 96-101, 142-150; August 1992: Cover, 112-119, 188-192.

     

    13.Petchesky, 70.

     

    14.Rosalind Kraus, “A Note on Photography and the Simulacral” The Critical Image Carol Squiers, ed. (Seattle: Bay Press, 1990), 19.

     

  • Evocations of Empire in A Transnational Corporate Age: Tracking the Sign of Saturn

    Dion Dennis

    Department of Criminal Justice, History, and Political Science
    Texas A&M International University
    diond@igc.apc.org

     

    I. Tales of Lost Glory

     

    In “American Tune,” Paul Simon gave an early if somewhat hazy voice to what is now a prolific and impassioned motif in premillennial American economic and political life. For many, “what’s gone wrong” is the sum total effect of global structural changes upon the once mighty U.S. economy. It is the mass exodus to the Third World of once lucrative manufacturing and management jobs from the U.S. and the subsequent replacement of the promise of stable and secure careers with “McJobs” (Coupland 5). Concurrently, millions of middle-management positions have disappeared below the incessant waves of corporate “downsizing.” What’s gone wrong, writes political pundit Kevin Phillips, is that:

     

    People were starting to sense that the so-called middle-class squeeze was really much more: a sign of America’s declining [economic] position . . . [and] a threat to their own futures and their children’s. (Boiling Point 163)

     

    And a fair number of those domestic jobs that were neither expunged nor exported across political boundaries in the ’80s and ’90s have reemerged at the American socio-economic margins–that is, at the urban core–in Hong-Kong-like or Sao Paulosque scenes, as described by Roger Rouse:

     

    In a hidden sweatshop in downtown Los Angeles, Asian and Latino migrants produce auto parts for a factory in Detroit. As the parts leave the production line, they are stamped “Made in Brazil.” (Mexican Migration 8)

     

    Auto parts are not the only simulated Brazilian import. As Barlett and Steele note, income stratification patterns in the U.S. between 1959-1989 show a rapid acceleration of the gap between rich and poor. This gap occurs at the expense of a rapidly shrin king and disproportionately taxed middle-class. That is, much of the middle class is economically downwardly mobile (America: What Went Wrong?). Coupland dubs this mass process Brazilification:

     

    Brazilification: The widening gulf between the rich and poor and the accompanying disappearance of the middle classes. (Generation X ix)

     

    All of this is a long way from the American techno-utopian workers paradise portrayed in the famed 16mm industrial cartoon, King Joe (1949). “King Joe” was an animated factory worker whose work and leisure activities were meant to be an ideol ogical sign. They depict the average (white-male, blue collar) American “Joe” as the most productive and best materially compensated worker in world history. He was an early icon of the American Empire that emerged in the post-WWII period. According to Walter Russell Mead:

     

    The basis of the American Empire after 1945 was economic. The military might that seems so awesome is the result of wealth. America rose to power because the rest of the world was exhausted. As the world recovered from the war, it was inevitable that America’s relative power would weaken. (Mortal Splendor 54)

     

    Since 1973, the material equivalents of King Joe and his realm have all but vanished. His kingdom now serves as social history and the ground for parody, nostalgia and simulation. As Europe and East Asia recovered from the effects of global and/or civil wars, new or resurrected industries, many nurtured by U.S. Cold War deterrence and containment strategies, provided stiff competition in a swiftly globalizing marketplace. As rival corporations concentrated their resources in transnational mergers and a cquisitions, the feasibility of setting in motion mobile production, capital and information strategies at sites across the globe seemed as enticing as it was necessary. In the Third World, U.S., European and Asian transnational corporations (TNCs) devel oped an economic environment characterized by low wages and low corporate tax rates. Unions were absent or ineffective and corrupt. Child labor could be easily and inexpensively procured. Environmental and/or safety regulations were non-existent or of ten easily circumvented. These competitive advantages accelerated the exodus of rust-belt manufacturing jobs. And with the mobility that the digitalization of business activity provides, the New World Order can be construed as a period of shifting flows of globalized capital and migrant bodies along information highways of magnetic oxide.

     

    As Main Street yielded to the Mall and Woolworth’s succumbed to Walmart, the factories that typified the heavy industry of the Northeast were shuttered. Decrepit brick automobile plants and rusting steel mills, surrounded by sagging cyclone fences and ba rbed wire, littered deserted urban tableaus as if they were the modernist ruins of King Joe. Two or three generations of Eastern European immigrants may have been steel workers or auto assemblers. But in the new international labor market, Gary, Indiana became a mausoleum for the Protestant ethic. And Flint, Michigan achieved cinematic celebrity through the sad but tough eyes of Fred Roth, a county sheriff’s eviction agent (Roger and Me).

     

    In the early post-WWII period, the idea and practice of social mobility had been a simple thing. Social and economic mobility was marked by a generational and spatial event such as a move into a “better” community. Mobility meant a unidirectional move f rom the crowded tenements of the inner city outward in concentric rings to emerging bungalow suburbs. (Often, this took the form of overt and collective acts of racism known as “white flight.”) Alternatively, this notion of mobility also refers to the de population of small family farms and rural towns, as youthful and not-so-youthful labor-seeking masses, displaced by the industrial efficiencies of agribusiness, emptied into the world’s service and industrial megacenters. Migration across space was tied to aspirations of upward economic mobility or the push for survival. As Rouse points out, each of several variants of the spatial concept of migration implies the idea of movement between two well-defined communities. The migrant’s dominant allegiance is assumed, in the long run, to belong to one of these distinct communities only (Mexican Migration 10-13).

     

    But this assumption, Rouse claims, is inadequate to describe current formations of social reproduction. It fails to account for the complex impacts of major transglobal circuits on the way we produce, reproduce, transmit and circulate goods, services, im ages and information, relations of power, economic benefits, bodies and social roles. We now traverse ambiguous and conflicted sites shaped by vectors of converging and diverging economies. We are hailed by intersecting and paradoxical constructions of meaning and identities. And, in a world that is simultaneously more totalizing and chaotic (the future seems unpredictable but Coca-Cola and Disney motifs are everywhere), alienation mixes with anxiety, resentment resonates with resignation and hope bond s with nostalgia on a mostly downward socio-economic escalator. It may well be, as Christopher Lasch (The Minimal Self) and R.J. Barnet and John Cavanaugh (Global Dreams) have suggested, that entire populations are now deemed ec onomically expendable. To understand how these economic marginality effects have occurred is to grapple with complexity. This marginality is a product of an intricate and mobile hardware mix of robotics, computerization, and automation of modes of produ ction and control. It has been nurtured by the extensive use of subcontractors, suppliers and temporary workers (many of the latter comprise neo-cottage industries of ersatz “independent contractors”). Spurred by the high debt levels of the leveraged bu yout (LBO) frenzy of the mid and late 1980s, the impetus to simultaneously raise productivity, while cutting personnel and production costs, allowed for internal structural reconfiguration of businesses that maximized output per employee over the short te rm while minimizing the total number of employees. One result has been an incessant wave of layoffs across industrial and information-based corporations. Another outcome is that the application of microchip-based technologies has already transformed fie lds of power on the global economic and political stages. It has reshaped the direction and purpose of higher education. It has essentially altered the fields of work, imagination, self-expression and play in the culture industries. To understand somet hing of its genealogy is to recognize the postmodern reconfiguration of fields of work, culture and knowledge.

     

    II. Fear of Losing: Security-Seeking Subjects Constituted at the Altar of Risk

     

    Among the objects of the law, security is the only one which embraces the future; subsistence, abundance, equality, may be regarded for a moment only; but security implies extension in point of time with respect to all the benefits to which it is applied. Security is therefore the principal object. (Jeremy Bentham, cited in Gordon 19)

     

    One Arizona State University professor, working recently with upper-division undergraduates in a course on the Politics of Social Movements, asked his students to pen their inscriptions of danger (with the idea that social movements are, in some sense, a response to perceived dangers and, by extension, shape security concerns). The excerpts below illustrate Bentham’s point:

     

    (Student A): I fear that I may become a nameless cog in a corporate machine . . . that I will become a wealth creating device used by some at the expense of others . . . that I will be judged only on my ability to feed the wealthy and powerful . . . because there will be no other way to maintain a reasonable standard of living . . .

     

    (Student B): The principal danger . . . is the uncertainty of my future. In a society which is dominated by change one is never able to predict or control their future with reliability. Going through proper channels and procedures no longer guarantees [anything]. . . . Will I join the quickly growing fraternity of unemployed university graduates?

     

    (Student C): The major danger is the pressure to quickly graduate while there is a shortage of jobs. Loan payments start stacking, the pressure is on to land a good paying job and your parents are staring at you as if you accomplished nothing but managed to spend half their life savings. “Go to college,” “invest some time in your future through education.” What happened to the old cliché about a college degree assuring happiness and prosperity?

     

    (Student D): [I fear] the immense uncertainty of facing the growing, intense competition for fewer and fewer jobs . . .

     

    (Student E): I’m worried that when I finally have my degree the world will have progressed to the point where you have to have a degree to be a “ditch digger.”

     

    (Student F): My danger lies in the fear of failure due to circumstances beyond my control. I have always been responsible . . . . However, when outside forces impose upon my life, I find it difficult and frustrating. (Ashley)

     

    These are tangible concerns, about the extension of personal security, into the future that are largely rooted in structural changes in the U.S. economy. Although U.S. economic productivity has increased seventy-five percent since 1970, this gain was real ized with a five percent net reduction in the labor force (“The End of Jobs” 48). This growth in output has been the combined result of belated responses, such as wage and work-rule concessions on the part of unions in response to fierce global competiti on; organizational restructuring in the wake of LBOs; the entrance of Japanese firms and heteroglot capital into the U.S. real estate, financial and labor markets and the productive application of electronic and digital technologies to previously labor-in tensive tasks. And there are no signs that the inverse relationship between material productivity and employment levels will soon abate. Not surprisingly, the expectation of downward socioeconomic mobility is now widely perceived as the norm.

     

    Concurrently, electronic and digital technologies have despatialized work sites while the functional divisions between a domestic residence (home) and work dwindle. All the while, U.S. workers confront vigorous transnational competition against less expe nsive skilled intellectual labor and semi-skilled product labor. Similarly, the diffusion of media ensembles and McDonaldization of the planet create struggles for the survival of pre-electronic cultures. In all these scenes, complex and visceral senses of loss, anger, disaffection, alienation and economic marginality present new problems for older and newer regimes of Security. One key alteration in the objects of Security is the shifting of risk-management and security concerns away from notions of “generalized risk” spread throughout a population toward those that reinscribe the Self as primary bearer of an individualized risk. This is the (philosophically) neo-liberal notion of Self as a unique site of enterprise (espoused by both Rush Limbaugh a nd Bill Clinton):

     

    Work for the worker means the use of resources of skills, aptitude and competence which comprise the worker’s human capital, to obtain earnings [that are] the revenue on that capital. Human capital is composed of an innate component of bodily and genetic equipment and an acquired component of aptitudes produced as a result of investment in the provision of appropriate environmental stimuli such as education. Economically, an aptitude is defined as a quasi-machine for the production of a value . . . akin to a consumer durable which has the peculiarity of being inseparable from its owner. The individual is in a novel sense not just an enterprise but the entrepreneur of himself. (Gordon 44)

     

    The Self becomes the primary site for continuous self-surveillance and self-construction. The notion of the Self as human capital is part of the project that globally reinscribes social reality in terms of market logics (and away from notions of race, et hnicity and group or place-based definitions, except as a demographic segment to be worked upon by the seductions of consumption). As a bicapitalized “good,” the Self circulates as a mobile commodity. Deeming the Self as the site of self-enterprise also suggests that one is constantly absorbed in self-reconstruction, self-maintenance and self-preservation (of Self as a capital investment). It is the conceptual brace for the application of regimes of oversight such as Total[izing] Quality Management (o r CQI–Continuous Quality Improvement) on self-presentations, where standardization of self-presentation is the object and goal of TQM in service organizations. It informs Bill Clinton’s calls for “permanent retraining.” It is the key assumption in the shifting paradigms of risk that hail subjects to take “responsibility for preventive care.” It resonates with Peter Drucker’s recent pronouncements on the current attributes of the corporation.

     

    For Drucker, corporations are now “temporary institutions.” Vigorous organizations are now inherently destabilizing (and this is a desirable state of affairs). As a Harvard Business Review abstract icily puts it:

     

    The organization as well as the knowledgeable individual must acquire knowledge every several years or become obsolete. (New Society)

     

    As noted elsewhere, there is an affinity between these world views, contemporary sociobiological theories and older forms of Social Darwinism (License and Commodification). Some proponents, such as Michael Rothschild, assert that hyperindust rial capitalism, with its emphasis on an information economy, is an isomorphic expression of our “natural” genetic makeup. That is, for Rothschild, capitalism is not merely a human construct but the essential expression of life itself (Bionomics xi-xii). For those on an unstable or downwardly mobile economic vector, this is a harsh judgment.

     

    It is these shifts in economic, perceptual and demographic fields that have Generation Xers so worried. Is it possible, then, in the context of a hyperglobalizing economic and information infrastructure; a despatialized and derealized physical and cultur al environment; an ascending “fin de millennium” consciousness and among a demographic bulge of “Grumpies” (grown-up mature professionals) and aging baby-boomers facing economic decline and intimations of mortality, that a mythology of a “Golden Age” has emerged? For Blonsky

     

    American mythology is now in transition from that of being a sense of a fresh beginning to that of looking back at a golden age. Once we lived in a shining city in a time of perfection. This is why, taking a trivial example, our ‘business books’ so emphasize quality, performance, all the other sorry signifiers. Roman Jakobson wrote that ‘a mask is not primarily what it represents but what it transforms, that is what it chooses either to represent or omit . . . or conceal.’ We always have to ask how a myth is able to deny what it is affirming while simultaneously remaining affirmative. Let there be quality, excellence, all the positivities, say the business books, meaning: there was [once] strength, there [once] was vigor, there [once] was coherence. (American Mythologies 500-501)

     

    And for Barbara Stern, a marketing professor at Rutgers, this is but one expression of historical nostalgia:

     

    Historical nostalgia expresses the desire to retreat from contemporary life by returning to a time in the past viewed as superior to the present. No matter whether the long-gone era is represented as richer and more complex or simpler and less corrupted, it is positioned as an escape from the here and now. (Historical and personal nostalgia 14)

     

    That is, historical nostalgia is an idiom of resistance, perhaps as escape, although it is implicated in more complex and active political fields than mere escapism. Bill Clinton has groused about such resistances (as a political problem) in two October 1993 speeches. Not so coincidentally, the subject of those speeches were claims about the changing shape of security concerns:

     

    We are living in a time of profound change. No one fully see[s] the shape of the change or imagine[s] with great precision the end of it. But we know a lot about what works and what doesn’t. And we know that if we do not embrace this change and make it our friend . . . it will become our enemy. And yet all around I see people resisting change, turning inward and away from change. And I ask myself why.

     

    When I listen . . . I hear a longing for yesterday. But I tell you my friends . . . yesterday is yesterday. If we try to recapture it, we will only lose tomorrow. (Remarks at UNC)

     

    But Clinton is not just contesting a mere politics of memory. If it were so, marketing his programs would be a much easier job. But what Clinton faces is a kind of hyper-real pastische. For example, Stephanie Coontz, in her book on 20th Century U.S. fa milies, The Way We Never Were: American Families and the Nostalgia Trap, describes the arrangement of those imagistic television fragments that shape her students’ perceptions of “the traditional family”:

     

    [Stereotypical] visions exert a powerful pull and with good reason, given the fragility of many modern communities. The problem is not only that these visions bear a suspicious resemblance to reruns of old television series, but that the scripts of different shows have been mixed up: June Cleaver suddenly has a Grandpa Walton dispensing advice in her kitchen; Donna Stone, vacuuming the living room in her inevitable pearls and high heels, is no longer married to a busy modern pediatrician but to a small town sheriff who, like Andy Taylor of “The Andy Griffith Show,” solves community problems though informal, old-fashioned common sense. (8-9)

     

    These recombinant video scripts occupy a significant part of the global cultural imagination. As such, they are active in fields of cultural, political and economic discourse and desire. The simulated world of an endless “Nick at Night” or TBS presents- –The Dick Van Dyke Show or The Brady Bunch–provide the building blocks of an active social imaginaire. As Appadurai suggests:

     

    The past is now not a land to return to in a simple politics of memory [but] is a synchronic warehouse of cultural scenarios, a kind of temporal central casting, to which recourse can be had as appropriate . . . .

     

    The crucial point is that the U.S. is but only one node of a complex transnational construction of imaginary landscapes . . . . The imagination has become an organized field of social practices, a form of work and a form of negotiation between sites of agency and globally defined fields of possibility. (“Disjuncture” 273)

     

    The imagination, as a contestable social practice, works in complex, highly active and disjunctive spheres of cultural and political signs. These signs are consumed, altered, recirculated and their meaning is constantly renegotiated. These are fields of signification through which aspects of de facto social contracts are negotiated and renegotiated. Modifying Appadurai’s taxonomy somewhat, I call these signifying fields iconospheres. And it is in our peculiar time and space of global dreams, tr ansnational corporatist practices and technological redisciplining that the promise of a reemergent Pax Americana is extended to anxious citizen-consumers in a post-sovereign world. And these promises are constructed and circulated with those iconosphere s that form the agitated nexus for the politics of signification, of which the sign of Saturn, as a promise of plentitude and security, is a prominent example.

     

    III. Signifying Practices, Sovereignty and the Search for Security: The Sign of Saturn

     

    For most, the globalization of the U.S. economy has generated persistent and troubling socio-economic problems. One famous problem-effect has been a destabilization of durable and legitimating American myths. For example, the decline of the American Dre am (which has been declared vanished or dead in some quarters and dismantled, diminished or reduced “to a nap” in others) has become an incessant and conspicuous motif in political discourse. Electronic and print media recite narratives of recoveries and reversals. Well-heeled think-tanks formulate ideological etiologies of character, consequences and countermeasures. Policy recommendations are then routinely dispensed on the shape of education, the family, job training or enterprise zones. For TNCs a nd their governmental allies, the task has been to recover the iconography of the American Dream as a positivity in a time of dislocation and disaccumulation. More specifically, iconocrats at TNCs and corporatist-shaped administrations cultivate a claim that transborder information and production practices do not represent the death of the American Dream. In the amended account, the American Dream is resurrected, phoenix-like, in the promised embodiment of a postindustrial, information-driven, “next gen eration” form.

     

    For public relations bureaucrats (iconocrats), the “problem” is how to reorganize public fields of attitudes and perception toward acceptance of this revised American Dream in a New World Order. It is about the engineering of consent.

     

    Several specific PR events and corporatist retooling projects (promising economic salvation via hypertechnological deployment) are the Saturn School of Tomorrow and GM’s Saturn subdivision. These projects, in their public relations and workplace reconfig uration practices, are part of the reorganization of economic practices and public spaces yoked, by iconocrats, to an assortment of repetitively invoked signifiers. In each, the common theme is an implicit pledge of a return to an age of economic plentit ude and technological preeminence–a “Golden Age.” Collectively, the ensemble of signifiers that may be deployed, directly or indirectly, in such representational efforts form what Kristeva called an intertext. For her, intertextuality is

     

    Any text [that] is constructed as a mosaic of quotations; Any text is the absorption and transformation of another. The notion of intertextuality replaces that of intersubjectivity. (37)

     

    Kristeva’s initial definition does not begin to exhaust the power and range of the notion of intertextuality, which is derived from Bakhtinian notions of dialogism and heteroglossia. (Both concepts underscore the active and constant renegotiation of the denotative and connotative meanings of signifiers in changing and mutually constitutive material and semiotic fields.) In an alternate formulation, she describes intertextuality as “the transposition of one or more multiple sign systems into another,” wi th the production of new accretions of meaning (cited in Stam et al. 204). This sense may be extended to include the reader’s grasp of the relations between a text and all the other relevant past, present and future texts. As such, the intertext of an I mperial signifier such as Saturn may include all depictions of Saturn and/or any and all possible imperial signifiers within an actively and plausibly constructed intertextual chain (Stam 205). Like Barthes’ notion of the readerly text, these various fra mes of reference provide a preassembly of (conventional) signifying units. As such, a series of intertextual frames may be constructed. These units are usually intended to bolster specific sets of meanings, suture troublesome narrative gaps and mold the direction of reader’s/viewer’s inferences about the account through a series of intertextual prompts.

     

    Bakhtin’s notion of a deep generating series, developed in a response to the Soviet monthly Novy Mir in 1970, delineates a typology of sign systems and signifying practices that are relevant to the analysis of historical, intertextual semioti c field (“Response” 5). For Bakhtin, a deep generating series forms rich constellations of elaborate and highly productive (political, cultural, social) signifying systems. Deep generating series have extensive histories and a profusion of meanings and usages that routinely cross cultures, idioms, representational forms and temporal periods. Conceptually mining the layers of meaning in such deep generating series is akin to a type of linguistic and cultural archeology. The sign of Saturn, with a genea logy of two dozen centuries, is just such a deep generative series.

     

    IV. “Saturnizing America”: Contexts, Texts and Intertexts

     

    On the morning of Wednesday, May 22nd, 1991, President George Bush was in St. Paul, Minnesota. He began his day with a tour of an experimental magnet school, the Saturn School for Tomorrow. During the walkaround tour of the refurbished YWCA building, Bu sh, a personal computer novice, seemed mesmerized as fifth, sixth and seventh graders sat at computer terminals working on assignments. As if imitating Star Trek’s Mr. Spock, Bush repeatedly uttered “fascinating” in response to the ensembles of technolog ical largess and preadolescent skill displayed for him (Johnston). With its emphasis on computerized “Personal Growth Plans,” interactive video, word processing, modems, LEGO-LOGO robotics and Hypercards, proponents claim that learning is project-based, student-centered and active. According to Saturn teacher-proponent Thomas King:

     

    [We] use the ICS Discourse System (which allows the teacher to see student answers typed at their keyboards hooked to the teacher’s computer) . . .

     

    Students have access to interactive integrated learning systems (ILSs) . . . . Hundreds of lessons on reading, math, writing, science . . . are always available. . . . These ILSs pre-test and then select lessons [for students]. . . . Reports are generated for staff, students and parents . . . .

     

    ILS is also tied to . . . math manipulative classes [and] whole language instruction. . . . Because of the assumption of passivity of textbooks, Saturn students almost never use them. (“The Saturn School”)

     

    On that May morning, George Bush was still basking in the political afterglow of victory in the Gulf War. It was a military exploit that was perceived as the high-tech triumph of computer-guided heat seeking “smart bombs” and “patriot missiles” over seco nd-rate Soviet SCUDS. For Bush, the Saturn School of Tomorrow, with its routine use of high-technology in the service of pedagogy, was “a school for a New World Order.” Waxing enthusiastically, Bush declared that this pilot project was

     

    breaking the mold, building for the next American century, reinventing, literally, starting from the bottom up to build revolutionary new schools, not with bricks and mortars, but with questions and ideas and determination. We’re looking at every possible way to [reinvent] schools while still keeping our eyes on the results. (MacNeil/Lehrer)

     

    For Bush, just as the technology-based Gulf War victory had “finally gotten that monkey [of moral and performative doubt provoked by the Vietnam War] off our back” (Bush 1991), the application of such computerized ensembles to presumably intractable and s ystemic educational problems would provide comparably swift and productive results. Such results would dispel those open questions of moral malaise, economic insecurity and performative deficits that beset the next generation of Americans. That is, Bush ‘s sense of education is instrumentalist and techno-utopian. His notion of desirable educational horizons appears to consist of the social production of a durable political allegiance best expressed through the superior technical competence of citizen-su bjects. The idea of education as critical reflection seems noticeably absent. For Bush, war and education are but dual aspect of a single project funneled through a common technological imperative:

     

    (IMAGE)

    The American soldiers manning our Patriot stations perform such complex tasks with unerring accuracy. And they, along with the children in our schools today, are part of the generation that will put unparalleled American technology to use as a tool for change. (Remarks at Raytheon)

    [Quicktime clip (6.0 MB)]

     

    Through the matrix of Bush’s rhetoric on the relations between technology, education and war, several points are worth mentioning. Saturn, as a technologically imbued sign, is a marker of a project of self-restoration. (This is signified by the phrases of “revolutionary new schools and the determination employed in building [them].”) And, for Bush, the Saturn School of Tomorrow is a desirable and innovative prototype for securely anchoring the project of civic rejuvenation in schools. (This is signifi ed by the positive connotation of “mold-breaking.”) Furthermore, in the second excerpt (from the Raytheon Speech) Bush, in his lavish praise of American techno-competence, condensed the identities of soldiers and schoolchildren (“soldiers along with chil dren”) as mutually engaged in the service of the patriotic by way of the technological. The intertext formed by these statements is meant to signify a redemptive recouping of American might through manifestations of techno-efficiency. (This is signified by the phrase “[they] deployed Patriot missiles with unerring accuracy.” In doing so, they “put unparalleled American technology” in service of the “next American Century.”) And who are they? Soldiers and children, exemplars of institutionally docile and technically efficient Patriots (all of them–citizens and missiles).

     

    But Saturn, as signifier, is part of a larger, more complex and intricate intertextual system. For example, the Saturn signifier adopted by the school was transposed from General Motors’ highly visible and expensive project to reinvent its behemoth corpo rate practices and redress its well-deserved negative public image. As an early participant in the Saturn School for Tomorrow project explains:

     

    A planning committee met for a three-year period beginning in 1986 to envision a new schooling process. A major catalyst was American Federation of Teachers’ (AFT) president Al Shanker’s exhortation for a ‘Saturn project’ to re-tool American education, just as General Motors’ Saturn automobile project was to invent a ‘quality team’ approach to challenge [the] Japanese. (MacNeil/Lehrer)

     

    By appropriating the signifier Saturn, Shanker tacitly acknowledged that the public schools had common ground with GM. That is, both have been widely perceived to be competitive product and market failures with bloated bureaucracies and negative public i mages. Like GM, the schools needed extensive reform to reduce costs and increase productivity in a New World Economic Order. But GM had funded Saturn Corporation, its symbol of self-transformation, with a capital investment of 3.5 billion dollars. Satu rn’s first seven years were devoted to intra and interorganizational negotiation, the development of infrastructure and the implementation of new labor and management practices. AFT’s President Al Shanker was calling for an infusion of money on a similar scale, similar processes of negotiation and a similar request for patience. In return was the promise of reshaping administrative and pedagogical practices toward corporatist “quality” circles and reinscribing students as “customers,” “consumers” or “cl ients.” This is consistent with what David Payne, a teacher at the Saturn School, said about how the goals of the project were shaped:

     

    What we’ve done at [the] Saturn [School] is we’ve looked at what the futurists, what the business leaders, and what the education leaders say people are going to be able to do in order to be successful in the 21st Century. (MacNeil/Lehrer)

     

    For a variety of tactical reasons, educational bureaucracies eagerly absorbed the intertext of GM’s Saturn signifier, shaping it and being shaped by it. But GM’s Saturn is a only one point of emergence for the sign of Saturn. In the next section, we con sider how GM’s Saturn signifier relates to relevant past Saturnian texts.

     

    V. The Long and Winding Road: Saturn as GM’s Bid to Rescue a Moribund Empire

     

    By the early 1980s, the threat to General Motors’ long-term future took a complex but identifiable shape. One facet of the threat was the substandard quality of its vehicles and the (then) well-deserved reputation that followed. By 1985, the Chevrolet C elebrity, Citation and Chevette, Oldsmobile Ciera, Buick Century and Pontiac 6000 were legendary for a myriad of serious and endemic manufacturing defects. The sheer number and frequency of factory defects across GM’s cookie-cutter divisions was a major public relations embarrassment.

     

    Another menacing threat to the once proud flagship of “the industry of industries” was structural. For example, a January, 1992 article in Fortune Magazine claimed that despite improvements in quality, mammoth capital investment

     

    and even with massive cutbacks, [GM] lagged behind major competitors in almost every measure of efficiency. By some key standards–how many worker hours it takes to assemble a car–GM was an astounding 40% less productive than Ford. In 1991 GM lost, on average, $1500 on [each] of the more than 3.5 million [vehicles produced] in North America. It ended [1991] with 34% of the U.S. market. In 1979, [its share of a larger U.S.] market was 46%. [Reform efforts] had been crippled by middle-management . . . and the UAW.

     

    Perceptive managers see a company that is building better cars . . . but has yet to confront enormous structural problems: Says one: ‘There is a monumental challenge ahead. We can make great products. But can we do that and make money?’ (Taylor et al.)

     

    Since 1953, when then GM President “Engine Charlie” Wilson uttered the notorious aphorism that “what’s good for country is good for General Motors” and vice versa, GM has become something of a synecdoche for the U.S. economy. And it is in the context of confronting an external threat (the “rising sun” of Japanese economic power as signified by automotive imports) with a deteriorating base of productive power (the “setting sun” of U.S. economic power as signified by GM) that the sign of Saturn surfaced. A ccording to one account:

     

    Saturn was conceived [in 1982 as] an all-out, all American effort to beat the Japanese in the small car market. Starting from scratch, Saturn would slash costs and boost quality by using the best technology and organization . . . show[ing] GM how a car company should be run in the 21st Century. Roger Smith set the stakes when he formed Saturn as an independent subsidiary, proclaiming it “the key to GM’s long-term competitiveness, survival and success. (Taylor et al.)

     

    In giving their small-car project the code-name of Saturn, GM’s public relations unit invoked a chapter in the history of the Cold War. In 1957, the Soviet Union launched the world’s first orbiting satellite, the Sputnik. For the U.S. government, electr onic and print media and public opinion, complaisant in an assumption of technological superiority, the reaction to Sputnik’s success was alarm, panic and paranoia. Newspaper and magazine headlines issued dire warnings about Soviet superiority in space. Frenzied prophecies about the likelihood of a Soviet nuclear attack from orbiting satellites were in wide currency. Sputnik’s success was seen as the dominant threat, in technological form, to U.S. sovereignty and national security. The federal governm ent mobilized resources as if in a national emergency. Congress created NASA and funded countless science and technology initiatives on multiple institutional levels.

     

    In the 1950s and 1960s, both the Pentagon and NASA were fond of naming their technological projects and specific pieces of hardware after mythological Greek and Roman gods or characters. For example, early intercontinental ballistic missiles (ICBMs) were christened as the Atlas or Titan series. NASA’s space ventures were designated as the Mercury and Apollo projects. In line with this, a set of rockets deployed in the late 1950s and the early 1960s, the Saturn series, marked those technological events t hat soared past early Soviet space accomplishments, never to look back. The Saturn project became the symbol of an ideological triumph made possible through a successful recouping of technological preeminence. Deployed at the height of economic and mili tary dominance, the Saturn project became a signifier for an epic narrative, one in which a resourceful redeployment of technological talent repelled a perceived threat to sovereignty and security.

     

    By the time of GM’s inauguration of its Saturn project in the early 1980s, the globalization of social, political and economic arrangements had already recast U.S. socio-economic practices. In its legitimating narrative, the neo-conservative movement had already constructed an American mythology that roughly corresponded with GM’s symbolic move to reappropriate elements of a certain moment in American history, through the redeployment of the sign of Saturn. That moment was 1962-1963. It was just before the tragic tide of assassinations, just before a massive escalation of U.S. involvement in Vietnam and just before the significant expansion of transfer payments and entitlement programs initiated by the “Great Society.” It was just before the onset of urban riots and campus demonstrations. It was just prior to psychedelia and the widespread burnings of flags and draft cards. It was at the dawn of an environmental movement that soon exposed long-term toxic consequences of unregulated industrial and ag ricultural practices. And it was just before intensive and novel forms of business regulation were set in motion. The fiscal budgets for the years of 1962-1963 were also the first to employ, in a very measured way, the practice of federal deficit spendin g. As Walter Russell Mead notes:

     

    The art of economic management was, people believed, nearly perfected. . . . The Kennedy tax cuts nipped a recession in the bud, giving a classroom demonstration of effective government management. . . . The so-called Kennedy round of tariff cuts resulted in the closest approach to pure free trade that world had ever known. . . . Economists believed that [key] economic problems had been solved. (Mortal Splendor 44)

     

    This was the zenith of the Pax Americana. Quickly idealized as Camelot (1964), this is the proximate, if somewhat variable (1955-1973), temporal referent for prolific narratives of “a Golden Age.” GM, by transposing the profuse threads of social history , imperialist nostalgia and contemporary security concerns onto the Saturn Car Corporation, seemed to be saying, to workers, commodity markets and potential customers (in a deliberately intertexutal way): Participate in this reinvention of socio-technolog ical fields and we (implicitly) promise a return to a stable and secure Saturnian order (“the golden happy age” Webster’s). Even at this layer, the sign of Saturn is a productive and revealing intertextual site. But it is only one of a prof use series of intended and unintended intertextual meanings. These are discussed below.

     

    VI. The Sign of Saturn as a Metonym for the Imperial 60s: Intertexts of Dominance, Domesticity, Dissent, Decadence and Danger

     

    Common to these various sites, signs, and practices associated with the sign of Saturn is the promise of a new “Golden Age.” Saturn signifies both the result and the means under which this (mythological) Golden Age effect will reappear. A confident, ord erly and recognizable domesticity will reemerge and flourish by means of intensive digitalization of social fields. The contemporary function of the scientific and ideological success of the Saturn rocket in the early ’60s was to serve as a symbolic cent er for a remembrance of a still reclaimable politics of dominance and a restoration of economic security. Whether it is invoked by a U.S. President, a pilot educational project, a President of the American Teachers’ Federation or General Motors, the depl oyment of the sign of Saturn, in this way, is a conscious public relations gesture designed to tap into current public habits of historical nostalgia and the abiding American creed of techno-utopianism.

     

    But both the social history of the 1960s and the intertext of Saturn exceed these attempts to denotate and domesticate both social history and the range and meaning of Saturn, as a sign of an imperial period. As Bakhtin says:

     

    No living [sign] relates to its object in a singular way: between the [sign] and its object, between the [sign] and the speaking subject, there exists an elastic environment of other, alien [signs] about the same object, the same theme, and this is . . . the specific environment that the [sign] may be individualized and given stylistic shape.

     

    Indeed, any utterance finds the object at which it was directed already overlain with qualifications, open to dispute, charged with value, already enveloped in an obscuring mist, entangled . . . [and] enters a dialogically agitated and tension filled environment of value judgments and accents [that] weave in and out of complex interrelationships . . . . This is the social atmosphere of the [sign]. (Dialogic 276)

     

    And this is true of the sign of Saturn. Even a quick glance at Websters’ delineations of several aspects of the word Saturn is revealing:

     

    a. Saturn n., L. Saturnus, connected with Serere, to sow. 1. in Roman mythology, the god of agriculture and husband of Oops, the goddess of the harvest, identified with the Greek God Chronos. . . . 3. in alchemy, lead (the metal);

     

    b. Saturnian, adj., from Saturnius, of Saturn. 1. pertaining to the Roman god Saturn, whose reign was called “the golden happy age”–hence, prosperous, contented, happy and peaceful;

     

    c. Saturnine (Fr. Saturnien, sad, sour) 1. heavy, grave, gloomy, morose, glum, phlegmatic;

     

    d. Saturnalia (L. belonging to Saturn) excess, orgy, orgiastic rituals (performed in times of the Roman Empire at the Winter Solstice). (1611)

     

    That the generative intertextual series of Saturn is deeply embedded in the Pax Romana is almost too obvious to mention. General Motors’ use of the sign is eerily resonant of several connotative intertexutal aspects of the deep generative series of Satur n. For example, GM’s Saturn complex, at Spring Hill, was built in the midst of Tennessee farmlands (agriculture). The Saturn Car Corporation, with its innovative technological arrangements and reshaped labor/management social fields, was intended, at S pring Hill, to sow the seeds (serere) that would lead General Motors, in time (Chronos), from the current Saturnine period (phlegmatic, gloomy) with its bloated workforce and inefficient management practices to a Saturnian period (prosperous and happy tim e). One evocative connotation is that GM, through the sign of Saturn, intends to (metaphorically) conjure up a social and economic alchemy (of practices) that will transmute (dense, dead weight) lead into gold (Saturnian).

     

    General Motors’ iconocrats, conflating the (older) deep generative series of Saturn with the political and economic dominance of the 1960s (represented by the Saturn rocket), covered all the major connotative fields but one. That omission is the signifie r of excess, the Saturnalia. And that was, undoubtedly, an intentional exclusion. But the self-described “counterculture,” of the 1960s, as a sign of excess, was the arational twin, the alternative face of the American Empire–a drugged-out Nietzschean Dionysus shadowing the rationalizing technocrat Apollo.

     

    These Saturnalian aspects were rendered by Tom Wolfe’s chronicle of the Merry Pranksters (Acid Test). These were the “summers of love” and protest and of sexual promiscuity and recreational use of marijuana and hallucinogens. There was a si gnificant revival of interest in pagan practice and ritual. Drugs, anti-war demonstrations, riots and the sense of revolution were an integral part of daily life on urban streets. As one popular chronicle stated, it was a time when, out of hubris, anger , indignation, idealism, impatience, curiosity or noble sentiment, many were “storming heaven” (Stephens).

     

    These activities are now often portrayed as self-absorbed and part of a treacherous rounds of excess. The panoply of the dead rock ‘n roll icons of the period–Jimi Hendrix, Janis Joplin and Jim Morrison–routinely signify the deleterious effects of dang erous orgies of sex and drugs–a Saturnalia. In retrospect, it is likely that some of the behavioral excesses of the ’60s were the result of (then) emerging technological deterritorialization. The onset of commercial jet travel, the invention and expans ion of television and satellite communications, the construction and expansion of the interstate highway system that hastened enormous changes in the demographics of the urban core and the northeastern industrial belt, all of these generated novel express ions of desire and opened up new forms of physical and psychological mobility. It was these fields of desire and mobility that became the objects for our current round of intensive reterritorializations. According to Deleuze and Guattari:

     

    Capitalism constantly counteracts, constantly inhibits this inherent tendency [of the mobility of bodies, consciousness and information] while at the same time allowing it free rein; it continually seeks to avoid reaching its limit while simultaneously tending toward that limit. Capitalism institutes or restores all sorts of residual and artificial, imaginary or symbolic territorialities attempting to recode, rechannel persons. . . . Everything returns or recurs: states, nations, families. That is what makes the ideology of capitalism “a motley painting of everything that has ever been believed.” There is the twofold movement of decoding or deterritorializing flows on the one hand, and their violent and artificial reterritorialization on the other. The more the capitalist machine deterritorializes, decoding and axiomatizing flows . . . the more its ancillary apparatuses . . . do their utmost to reterritorialize. (Anti-Oedipus 34)

     

    For public and corporate administrators in the post-Watergate, post-Vietnam era, the paroxysm of events characteristic of the late 1960s required the invention of new wrinkles on a Benthamite techno-political problematic of governance. In the face of unr uly generational “mobs” and ersatz liberation movements, the technical issues focused on how to redesign, redeploy or invent architectural and informational regimes to fix and intensify the surveillance of movement and activities of those bodies, identiti es and allegiances that escaped a normalizing gaze. In a general sense, the social construction of danger inscribed and ascribed to those who would “turn on, tune in and drop out” on the streets of San Francisco, circa 1969, resembles the way English pau pers were portrayed (as a threat to social order) in the early and mid-19th Century:

     

    [It is indolence] intensified to the level of social danger: the spectre of the mob; a collective [and] urban phenomenon. It is a composite and [ominous] population which ‘encircles’ the social order from within. . . . It is a magma in which are fused all the dangers which beset the social order, shifting along unpredictable, untraceable channels of transmission and aggregation. The definition [of hippies?] does not work essentially through economic categories . . . images put the stress on feelings of fluidity and indefiniteness, on the impression, at once massive and vague [of menace]. (Procacci 158)

     

    Then, as Procacci asserts, and now, as I claim, social morality is often equated with the idea of order: “The moral element is order, that order which liberal society [embraces] as [the] vital need” (159). That is, order as morality, grafted onto the eco nomic and all summed up in the term “Personal Security,” is the rationale for ongoing projects of reterritorialization. And these modes of postmodern reterritorialization–the commercialization of public space represented by the mall and the New American City, the intensification of digital regimes of surveillance, the commodification and licensing of information and icons formerly external to direct market logic and the renarration of the 1960s as a reclaimable Apollonian project–are all activities of governance (except the last) whose emergence predates the 1960s but whose organizing principle remains consistent with both cold-war-era themes of security and the newly emergent objects for novel security concerns (such as enforcement of a convertible ab stract intellectual property rights of the TNCs).

     

    VII. Conclusion

     

    Gilles Deleuze has depicted historical configurations of governance, including the nation-state, as specific, localized and variable “immanent models of realization” of mobile global capital formations. He makes a persuasive argument that modern nation-s tates are but one of several possible modes of territorialization (A Thousand Plateaus 454). For Deleuze, capitalism may develop an economic form of governance that would render the State superfluous. He says that:

     

    capitalism is not short on war cries against the State, not only in the name of the market, but by virtue of its superior deterritorialization. (454)

     

    The dispersion of commodities (Coca-Cola, Levi’s), transnational cultural iconographies (Disney, MTV) and technological ensembles of hyperindustrial capitalism (satellite dishes), are highly effective, in certain moments and sites, at “authorless” tasks o f nation-state deterritorialization. Often, the result is a subsequent reterritorialization of identity and desires, primarily recognizable within global consumption circuits such as malls, suburban housing configurations or televised home shopping netwo rks. Generally, this is accompanied by local stylistic adjustment while stroking the population through the propagation of a reassuring ideology of a free, secure and stable domestic identity, heroically reaffirming itself through repetitive acts of comm odity consumption. Within U.S. national technocratic circuits, I argue that the sign of Saturn functions in a similarly Janus-inflected way. As a signifier for a promise of a return to a “happy and prosperous” Pax Americana, it is deployed as a pledge ( rooted in highly selective constructions of memories of an Imperial 1960s) that functions to discipline potential and acutal discontented U.S. subjects in an era of disaccumulation and downward mobility. To do this, iconocrats had to re-encode the stream s of desires, dissent, death and excess that the late ’60s represented. They emerged as streams of consumables, as “lifestyles,” or as new and more finely attenuated “market segments” within reinvented realms of collectively marketed but privately consum ed pleasures. Or, other practices, the Saturnalia, have been reinscribed, as in the age of AIDS and the War on Drugs, as cautionary moral tales. Collectively, many remember the fate of those humans as a series of cautionary tales about the effects of su ccumbing to dangerous, corrosive and indolent practices.

     

    There are many aspects of the 1960s that, at different points in time, embody more than a single connotative aspect of the sign of Saturn. Often, a denotative construction of an icon of the 1960s exorcises personal history or political programmatic from an officially sanctified (and sanctifying of the present) remembrance. For example: The passage of a National Civil Rights Day, to honor the selective reconstruction of Dr. Martin Luther King, Jr., elevated a pre-Selma (1965) iconography of King as proof that “the system works.” The historical reality of the last years of King’s life, which was spent in critical reflection and action in response to an emerging transnational corporate order (1965-1968), has been all but completely erased (Smith). There is a lesson here: States, and the icons that legitimate states, are absorbed into the order of TNCs. But they are given new economic, iconic and policing functions. They become a bureaucratic tool for a corporatist reterritorialization. (Think about Fo rtune 500 sponsorship of PBS programming or the still unfolding effects of NAFTA and GATT.)

     

    Likewise, the sartorial and sonic styles of the period have become the object of nostalgic aestheticization, even among those (nationally and globally) who longingly gaze back to a world they have never lost. This is also a postmodern irony that Appadura i characterizes as “nostalgia without memory” (“Disjuncture” 272). Much of the electronic social imaginaire is tied to a memory of a nation-state empire that obscures full reflection on the effects of corporate transnationalism. Regardless of the sophistication of Saturnian promises, it seems unlikely that the cultivation of a national hypertechnical competency will dent these transnational flows in favor of the reconstitution of the economically-predominant nation-state, at least in the near ter m. Already, forty-seven of the world’s one hundred largest economies are TNCs (Barlow).

     

    The iconography of global dreams and a New World Order dominated by the repetitive commercial simulacra of TNCs is reminiscent of Foucault’s characterization of pre-Cartesian discursive regimes. Like the four similitudes that shaped representational fiel ds in the Middle Ages, the video, audio, and digitized products of the infoconglomerates could be characterized by

     

    First and foremost, the plethoric yet absolutely poverty-stricken character of this knowledge. Plethoric because it is limitless. Resemblance never remains stable within itself; it can be fixed only if it refers back to another similitude, which then, refers to others. . . . For this reason, this knowledge will be a thing of sand. (The Order of Things 30)

     

    Whether this type of judgment will be visited upon our ways of knowing and doing is still unclear. But it will be up to us to reflect upon the consequences of these regimes of distraction and consumption. It will be up to us to decode their products and imagine, from a conceptual space outside of these effects, thought and representational possibilities that will resist and exceed the material and semiotic poverty of these practices.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Appadurai, Arjun. “Disjuncture and Difference in the Global Cultural Economy.” The Phantom Public Sphere. Ed. Bruce Robbins. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1993.
    • Ashley, Richard K. Student Responses to Questions on Perceived Dangers, in Politics of Social Movement (undergraduate class), Spring 1993. Arizona State University (unpublished).
    • Bakhtin, M.M. The Dialogic Imagination: Four Essays by M.M. Bakhtin. Trans. Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist. Ed. Michael Holquist. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1981.
    • —. “Response To A Question From The Novy Mir Eidtorial Staff.” Speech Genres and Other Late Essays. Trans. Vern W. McGee. Eds. Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1986, 1-9.
    • Barlett, Donald L. and James B. Steele. America: What Went Wrong. Kansas City: Universal Press Syndicate, 1992.
    • Barlow, Maude. “Global Competitiveness: Corporate Canada’s New Theology.” The Action Canada Network Action Dossier 38 (Dec. 1992). N. pag. E-text downloaded from the Internet.
    • Barnet, Richard J. “The End of Jobs.” Harpers 287 (1720), September 1993, 47-52.
    • Barnet, Richard J. and John Cavanaugh. Global Dreams: Imperial Corporations and the New World Order. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1994.
    • Blonsky, Marshall. American Mythologies. New York: Oxford University Press, 1992.
    • Bush, George. Remarks by the President at the Raytheon Corporation Factory, Massachussettes. February 15, 1991.
    • Clinton, Bill. Remarks by the President at the University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill. October 12, 1993. Office of the Press Secretary document path retrieval/.data/politics/Pres.Pres.Clinton/unc.1012′.October 12, 1993.
    • Coontz, Stephanie. The Way We Never Were: American Families and the Nostalgia Trap. New York: Basic Books, 1992.
    • Coupland, Douglas. Generation X: Tales for an Accelerated Culture. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1991.
    • Deleuze, Gilles and Felix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1987.
    • —. Anti-Oedipus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Trans. Helen R. Lane, Robert Hurley, and Mark Seem. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1983.
    • Dennis, Dion. “License and Commodification: The Birth of an Information Oligarchy.” Humanity and Society 17 (1993), 48-69.
    • Drucker, Peter F. “New Society of Organizations.” Harvard Business Review 70 (1992). Abstract 92503. N. pag. Downloaded from the HBR gopher on the Internet.
    • Foucault, Michel. The Order of Things: An Archaeology of the Human Sciences.” New York: Vintage Books, 1973.
    • Gordon, Colin. “Governmental Rationality: An Introduction.” The Foucault Effect: Studies in Governmentality. Eds. Graham Burcell, Colin Gordon and Peter Miller. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1991, 1-52.
    • Johnston, Oswald. “Bush Visits St. Paul School to Highlight Education Goals.” Los Angeles Times 23 May 1991, A 31.
    • King Joe. Produced by Arkansas State College, 1949.
    • King, Thomas. “The Saturn School of Tomorrow: a Reality Today.” T H E Journal 19:2 (April 1992).
    • Kristeva, Julia. The Kristeva Reader. Ed. Tori Moi. New York: Columbia University Press, 1986.
    • Lasch, Christopher. The Minimal Self: Psychic Survival in Troubled Times. New York: W.W. Norton, 1984.
    • MacNeil/Lehrer NewsHour. “Corporate Classroom,” Transcript #4038, May 22, 1991. Educational Broadcasting and GWETA, Transcript #4038. N. pag. E-text downloaded from Nexis/Lexis.
    • Mead, Walter Russell. Mortal Splendor: The American Empire in Transition. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1987.
    • Moore, Michael, Dir. Roger and Me. 1988
    • Phillips, Kevin. Boiling Point: Democrats, Republicans and the Decline of Middle-Class Prosperity. New York: Harper Collins, 1993.
    • Procacci, Giovanna. “Social Econony and the Government of Poverty.” The Foucault Effect: Studies in Governmentality. Eds. Graham Burcell, Colin Gordon and Peter Miller. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1991, 151-168.
    • Rothschild, Michael. Bionomics: The Inevitability of Capitalism. New York: Henry Holt, 1990.
    • Rouse, Roger. “Mexican Migration and the Social Space of Postmodernism.” Diaspora 1 1 (1991).
    • Smith, Kenneth L. “The Radicalization of Martin Luther King, Jr. The Last Three Years.” Journal of Ecumenical Studies 26:2 (1989), 270-289.
    • Stam, Robert, Robert Burgoyne, and Sandy Flitterman-Lewis. New Vocabularies in Film Semiotics: Structuralism, Post-Structuralism and Beyond. New York: Routledge, 1992.
    • Stern, Barbara. “Historical and personal nostalgia in advertising text: the Fin de siecle effect.” Journal of Advertising 21.4 (1992). N. pag. Retrieved e-text from Nexis/Lexis.
    • Stephens, Jay. Storming Heaven: LSD and the American Dream. New York: Atlantic Monthly Press, 1987.
    • Taylor III, Alex, Alicia Hills Moore, and Wilton Woods. “Can GM Remodel Itself?” Fortune Magazine. January 13, 1992. N. pag. E-text downloaded from Nexis/Lexis.
    • Webster’s New 20th Century Dictionary, Unabridged. 2nd Edition. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1983.
    • Wolfe, Tom. The Electric Kool-Aid Acid Test. New York: Farrar, Strauss and Giroux, 1968.

     

  • Waxing Kriger

    Jeffrey Yule

    Department of English
    Ohio State University
    jyule@magnus.acs.ohio-state.edu

     

    After they waxed Kriger, he was supposed to stay dead. Kriger, that Kriger anyway, was a rare one. Wanted nothing to do with reconstitution. Reconstruction was okay, for light stuff. You lose an arm or some brain tissue, maybe even a whole lobe, of c ourse you get that fixed. He wasn’t a fundamentalist. But the part about no reconstitution was supposed to have been an actual clause in his contract. That was the word out about it, anyway. Of course you hear rumors about all sorts of things in this business and a lot of it’s crap. Still, I think that story was true. I say that because I talked to him about it once. Not much, but it was enough.

     

    I’m not saying the guy took me into his confidence. He didn’t. I’m no big operator myself, but Kriger–well, that Kriger anyway–he was good, as big a deal as everybody says. He didn’t talk much to people like me, only even ran into ’em every once in a while and never for very long. We were just subcontracted labor. But I did a job for him in Belize once, and that’s where I got the impression the stories were true. Down there, they called him the man, el hombre, but the way they said it was like in capital letters–El Hombre. They wanted to call him el hombreisimo, you know, like he was the most incredible of men, but he didn’t like the way it sounded. So it was El Hombre, pronounced like with capital letters. And wit h the job he did, he earned that too. During some down time on that job, I asked him what he thought about reconstitution. I was thinking about it for myself for after I could afford it, but I was also curious about him. Even then he had quite a reputa tion.

     

    What he said was, “Guys get re-sti clauses, they don’t have to worry much anymore. They get sloppy.”

     

    He said it like he’d seen it happen, and I guess that’s why he didn’t go in for reconstitution. He didn’t want to get soft. Maybe because his work was his art or maybe because if he got soft, he wouldn’t pull down the same sort of money on each job. M aybe both. And maybe he was right, because he was sharp then. He was almost too good.

     

    You still hear a lot of stories about Kriger, but who the hell knows for sure what happened and what didn’t? I don’t know that anyone could ever sort it all out now. But I know this for sure. On that Belize job, we had two teams setting up perimeter d iversions for him so he could go in solo somewhere else along the line, into this guy’s compound. No names, okay? But you know the type. The guy had his hands in some of this and some of that, major supply contacts with different organizations, some of them competing–Mafia, Tong, Yakuza, everybody. As a consequence of his clientele, he’s a real security freak, trying to make sure nobody’s going to pay him a visit–cut him up, kidnap him, maybe even make an example of him. Mess him up bad but keep sh owing his reconstitution company that he’s alive so they can’t replace him. He was a real paranoid operator. Too much white powder and cash will do that to people. Given the type, of course, his place is wired every which way: motion sensors, IR trip b eams, countermeasures, everything. We even ran into some cyborged guard dogs his security people were running off an AI system. Nasty things–godawful tough to kill. Plus he’s got guards all over the place with IR equipment. But it’s a very strange si tuation. There’s this self-contained, high-tech fortress, built right into the side of a mountain, right? But the people who grow the man’s plant live in huts, so all around this place things are strictly stone age, third world.

     

    Apparently the target had connections with somebody in the government and he stepped on the wrong toes. So Uncle says, “Central, wax that problem.” Central takes a look and thinks, “What we need here is deniability and lots and lots of insulation becau se this is an ugly situation that’s just waiting to blow up in our faces.” So they contract it out to Kriger, and he subcontracts out for support and I get a spot on a diversion team. It was my first big job and to me it was exceedingly smooth, almost s upernatural. We did our thing and he did his. He didn’t say how and nobody asked, but we all wondered. He went in and waxed the guy rough. Napalm, I think, one of those mini-flamethrower rigs. I guess they sent the guy a vid of the way it went after his reconstitution, one of those, “Next time, there better not be a next time” kind of messages. After that job, everybody called Kriger “The Man,” with capitals. And he really absolutely was. He was the best in the business, maybe the best ever. I’v e done some other big jobs where security was tight, but I’ve never seen anything tighter. I’m telling you, that place was seamless. And those goddamned dogs. Believe me, you don’t know how hard those are to deal with unless you’ve ever tried to shake one and found out that there was no other way but to kill it. Even with the diversions, I have no idea how Kriger got past everything and to the target. That was impressive enough. But he also cooked the guy and vidded it. He didn’t just go in and ner ve gas the place or even find the guy and shoot him. He found out where he was, got to him, did his things for fifteen, twenty minutes at least, and then he left. I never saw anything like it.

     

    But that was a long time ago. Kriger himself got it, let’s see, about four, four and a half years ago now. Any number of people were supposed to have done it. There were a lot of rumors at the time. Some people thought Central might have been behind it because Kriger was getting too wild, taking on contracts they didn’t like. With Central you never know, especially with Uncle getting sloppy sometimes, a little old and not so much on the cutting edge anymore. Sometimes the parts just don’t do what t he head tells them when things get to that point, so that talk about Central might’ve been right. I heard some other people talking about a year later who thought a renegade state might’ve done it. Again, no names, okay? But there were sure people who he crossed in some of those governments, and some of them he’d really pissed off doing it. To me that theory makes a lot more sense than a Central-directed hit, but it’s damn near impossible to say. It could’ve been any number of people or groups that k illed him. Maybe it was a government-sanctioned job or maybe something that an intelligence clique put together. Could even have been one or another terrorist groups behind it. He’d thrown a few wrenches into the moving parts of some of their operation s over the years and taken out some of their people doing it. It might’ve been corporate or a criminal organization or maybe some independent contractor looking to make a name for himself with the right people. It could’ve been a combination of things. Shit, for all I know it could’ve been the guy he cooked with napalm on that Belìze job.

     

    I’m not saying there aren’t people who know. I’m sure there are, but there you’re talking about people who move in higher circles than me. I’m strictly middle level, right? That’s something I’m not ashamed of either. Maybe I could’ve made it in those circles–the money’s certainly attractive–but there’s just too much pressure. There were people I worked with who went that way, and they were always walking around like they couldn’t afford to relax for a split second. This one guy went through two, three stomachs in something like eight years. Ulcers. You got other people who’d be burning holes through their noses with powders or needing liver transplants because of the drinking and the drugs. Sure the money’s good, but what did they do but spend it on extra security, bribes, transplants, and reconstructions. Now maybe some of those people know who waxed Kriger, but they’re the ones who have to worry about the fact that they know. Screw that. There are a few things that I can tell you, though.

     

    Just after it happened, there was a rumor that it was a clean hit, a sniper, and that it went down in Dresden when he was on vacation or some sort of bullshit. That’s one story, the main one everybody heard for about a year. There was also talk that it was one of those old M-9 grenades launched into his car outside of Los Angeles. Either way, though, it was supposed to have been gentle. But it was probably rough no matter what you heard. On this security job a few years ago I had to liason with a co mputers op who had a thing for hardware and the merc scene, and he’d heard of Kriger and was all hard to talk to me about him and about the business. Said he had some good information to trade, and it was down time, so I figured, why not? He showed me t his vid clip he’d turned up which his source said was a partial copy of the Kriger hit. I’m no vid expert, but I watched the thing and it looked like the genuine article. The guy told me he got it in trade from an AI that pops up now and then on the net . Maybe or maybe not. I didn’t even bother trying to check into it. It fell into my lap so I gave it a look, sure, but I wasn’t going to go poking around in something that might end up giving somebody a reason to come and step on me. But, like I said, it looked genuine enough.

     

    The clip is short, maybe a minute and a half long. The picture was a little jumpy, like the computer they used to edit the thing couldn’t smooth it out completely. Looked like it was shot by someone wearing a concealed camera and following along on bac kup while the rest of the team did the actual job. At first it’s a stable picture, though. You see this guy who looks like Kriger come into a building, a big hotel lobby or maybe something corporate, a place with marble floors, lots of metal, glass, sus pended balconies, fountains, like that. A man in uniform, the concierge or corporation toad boy, whatever, comes from behind the counter to meet Kriger, reaches out to shake his hand, and the picture jumps a little as the person with the vid equipment ge ts up. From that point on, it stays a little jumpy, but it’s still a good, clear sequence.

     

    On the balcony out of Kriger’s field of vision, you see a guy suddenly looking very bothered. He’s probably someone on Kriger’s security team, and it looks like he’s seeing something he doesn’t like. I had the computer kid enhance the image, and what i t looked like to me was that he was trying to use a throat mike to tell Kriger or somebody else that something looked funny, but he wasn’t getting the message through. Either he was getting jammed or the people that waxed Kriger had some sort of interfer ence software on-line and they were jamming and sending all clear signals at the same time on the skip frequencies Kriger’s people were using. It’s a pain in the ass to do, but you can pull it off if you’ve got an AI with an expert system hookup that’s f ast enough to track the shifts from frequency to frequency. The thing is, though, if the people whose signal you’re substituting for find out quick enough, your operation’s probably blown because the whole target team finds out what’s going on instantly.

     

    Kriger’s people apparently had some sort of countermeasure that picked up the problem or something else tipped Kriger off because he all of a sudden veers away from the concierge-type guy. In the upper right of the picture, you see the guy who was havin g trouble with his throat mike go for a gun. He gets some shots off at one or more people who aren’t in the picture. Then he just gets absolutely raked by small flechette fire–the things hit his whole left side in a wave. One second you see him and th e next you lose sight of that half of his body in a red mist. It was very messy–painful, too, I bet–but it looked like the people who planned it probably meant for him to live. The computer liason guy couldn’t give me a good enough image to be sure, b ut I don’t think the stuff they used was meant to do a lot of deep tissue damage. It was just supposed to take off the skin and mess up the muscle–that way even if you’ve got a guy pumped with endorphin analogs, he won’t be able to do anything because t he muscles are too torn up and he doesn’t have enough blood to run them anyway.

     

    While this is going on, Kriger’s moving away from the concierge. This guy’s still got his hand out, and there’s the start of a surprised look on his face as Kriger turns away from him. Then this guy takes a wave of flechette fire at about a thre e quarters full angle, and this time the hit team was obviously using something that would do deep tissue damage. It looks like most of his right side just explodes. But you only see that for a second because the camera’s following Kriger, who would’ve taken that flechette wave full in the back and gone down if he hadn’t gotten out of the way. As it is, he takes some fire from the outside edge of the scatter pattern, and you see some blood on him but not much. He was probably wearing light armor fabri cs, so his clothes took a lot of the kinetic energy out of the stuffbefore it got to him. If it hadn’t just been some some scatter, though, it would’ve torn him up too, even if he was wearing a tougher fabric. That’s probably why the hit team tried to u se the heavier flechettes on Kriger. Those things pretty much sandblast anything up to a medium-grade body armor right off a target. The hotel guy wasn’t wearing anything like that, though, and he just got torn up.

     

    By this time, I suppose that any security Kriger had must have been out of the picture, if there was even anybody else still standing when the guy with the throat mike realized things were going sour. That’s how it goes on rough waxes: targets have to be cut completely loose from their support. Kriger must have known he was on his own by then. While he’s running, he lays down some flare grenades and suddenly it’s like he’s inside his own little supernova, which I suppose threw a tangle into the plans of whoever was running the op because you can’t draw a bead on somebody who’s inside that sort of lightsource. But of course the tradeoff is that Kriger can’t see anything either, so if he’s firing, he’s firing blind too. You can’t tell for sure, but b efore he threw down the flares it looked like he was headed for a cluster of furniture next to a fountain. Looked like the best available cover.

     

    Now even though the camera’s still going, all you see for about three, four seconds is a lot of white light, until Kriger’s flares burn out. Then the person with the camera pans around trying to find Kriger. You see some more bodies, although it’s hard to say for sure which were on the hit team and which were with Kriger. Most of them are either still armed or lying near weapons, though, so it looks like the only person hurt who wasn’t involved was the concierge, but–if he was a crooked, greedy, or c orporate–he might not have been an innocent bystander anyway. You also see four people moving in toward the furniture where Kriger was headed when the camera last had him. They’ve all got filter masks on and they’re launching cannisters in a standard s pread pattern. There’s no visible gas, though, so they were using something colorless, a mild nerve agent probably–something that would cause a lot of pain and either full voluntary muscle paralysis or at least a lot of problems with motor function and reflex.

     

    Then three of these four get slammed in quick succession, all within about five centimeters dead center of their sternums, by something high caliber. Blows right through any armor they were wearing. These three are write offs–no doubt in my mind they were dead before they hit the floor. Whatever they got hit with probably tore them to pieces internally. No surprise there. A guy who doesn’t go in for reconstitution certainly wouldn’t treat the squad hitting him gently. Anyway, one of the guys who w as firing the gas cannisters gets to some cover without getting shot. From the camera angle, I couldn’t see where the shots came from that killed the three who were with him, and I’m not sure that he could either. Certainly, though, this guy’s got reaso n to be careful. It’s no surprise that he doesn’t come into the picture again.

     

    At about this point, the person carrying the camera must have gotten involved in the operation, because the picture you see from then on isn’t just a vid of the hit anymore. It’s an operative’s-eye view. You see everything from the perspective of some one a lot closer to the ground, like what an op sees when he’s trying to stay low enough to avoid drawing fire. The camera shows this guy taking a winding course from cover to cover toward the place where it looks like Kriger was headed. A few times you even see his rifle barrel come into the picture. Then the camera carrier must have gotten the all clear because the picture jumps, and you can tell he’s gone into an upright position. The camera moves forward smoothly after that and, after going around this huge marble-backed leather couch that’s been chewed up by fire, you see Kriger on the floor, eyes open, teeth clenched, and his muscles all knotted up. He’s twitching a little too, his nerves obviously not firing right. Looks like he’d taken some more fire, too, something high caliber in the left leg. There was a lot of blood, some of it splattered all the way to the edge of the fountain. The camera stays on Kriger for about three seconds and no one touches him during that time. Then the clip ends.

     

    The guy who showed me the thing said he didn’t know if Kriger got away or, if he was killed, how it was done. He said he asked the AI who traded him the clip, and the thing either didn’t know or wouldn’t tell. As far as I’m concerned, that’s just as we ll. Like I said before, it’s not like Kriger and I were friends, but I had a lot of respect for the man’s work. I had no reason to want to see someone mess him up on camera. This merc groupie asks me all these questions, like was it possible maybe that Kriger could’ve gotten away or something, and the answer to that is absolutely not. Before the clip ends what you see is an immobilized target. Kriger wasn’t going anywhere alive.

     

    What it looked like to me is this: it was supposed to be a rough wax, and it started out well enough and should’ve gone smoothly except that Kriger was just too good at what he did. After the point where he veered away from the guy who was getting ready to shake his hand, things went badly for the hit team. Counting the downed bodies and figuring that even if only half of them were part of the hit, Kriger and his people took down something like ten or eleven of them. And that’s just counting the bodies I could see. The fact that the person with the camera started out on backup and had to move into an active role also tells me things didn’t go well. But it looks like they wanted to do as clean a job as they could. The hotel guy getting killed was probably a mistake. Based on everything else, I’d say they just wanted Kriger dead and the people on his security team out of the picture while they killed him. They got what they were after, but it took too long, they took too many losses, and it was messy.

     

    After all that, it’s hard to imagine that the hit team killed Kriger quickly. Obviously, someone had reason to make sure he died rough because what you see in the vid is a very expensive job. There wouldn’t have been any sense in going to all the trouble of cutting him off from his support and immobilizing him if they were just going to pop him in the head and make extra sure afterward with a few more shots to the heart and spine. So, no, I didn’t see what happened exactly, whether it was corrosives o r inflammables or what, but I don’t doubt they picked a bad way for Kriger to die.

     

    What surprised me was that he turned up again at all. This was about six or eight months after I saw the vid clip. I got a call from this guy with an accent, asking am I free to do support on an external job, something in the Baltics, but, again, no names, all right? He also tells me the pay and gives me a few general details. I say, maybe, who wants to know?

     

    “The job is to do support for Kriger. Same sort of scenario as before. Take it now or not, but no more questions either way,” he said.

     

    “Sounds interesting,” I tell the guy. “But last I heard, Kriger was dead.”

     

    “Just a rumor. In or out?”

     

    I wondered if maybe it was a set up to take me out because I’d seen that partial clip of the Kriger hit, but it didn’t figure. People don’t need to go to that kind of trouble to kill guys like me. They had my job pickup number, which is at a public loc ation. The line was secure but they wouldn’t have had any problem tracing it and just meeting me outside to blow me away if they wanted to. So the offer looked as safe as any other. And I was curious about it. So I tell the guy, “I’m in.”

     

    “Fine. You’ll hear from me again this time tomorrow. Be ready to move out any time after that. You’ll get half up front and half on completion. We supply the hardware. You can bring anything else you want so long as the total weight is under thirty- five kilos. Questions?”

     

    “No.”

     

    “Fine. Tomorrow then.”

     

    And so I was in.

     

    Except that I was hired help for a diversion team, it wasn’t much like the Belize job. I never knew what the operation was about exactly, and it didn’t matter. I saw Kriger and I wanted to talk to him, see if he remembered me, but the opportunity never came up. He briefed us and made sure everything was clear. He looked like I remembered. Sounded the same. There were no differences I could see, so I started to wonder if maybe the vid clip I saw was fake–still, you’re not supposed to be able to tel l the re-sti copy from the original. So I wasn’t sure. But something happened that convinced me that this wasn’t the same Kriger I worked with in Belize.

     

    Like I said, I didn’t know what the objective was on this job. I just knew what my team was supposed to do: make a lot of noise and draw as much attention as possible so Kriger could get in there and do his thing. There was another diversion team too, which means he had as much backup there as in Belize. So the time comes and we do our jobs. But the thing I notice right away is that this isn’t a tight target area. There’s security, sure–some armed guards, some motion sensors. But it’s just a little more than enough to keep the amateurs off the grounds–radio shack hardware and rent a cops. Nowhere near what Kriger went up against in Belize. I think there was just one guard with IR equipment, and he was an easy take down, probably didn’t even hav e any special training. There was nothing remotely as much a problem as those cyborged dogs were, either. The site wasn’t even self-contained. They had people coming and going on a daily basis. The place was a little sloppy, really. I remember thinking at the time that whoever paid for the job must have had paranoid fits. Any competent solo operator could have handled it without diversions, probably without a support team either if it came down to that.

     

    But I get paid to do my job whether they need me there or not, so I did what I was supposed to do: set off some charges, got a fix on the guard with the IR equipment and made sure they dropped him. We even managed to draw a guard squad completely outside their perimeter. Plain amateurs. No security team worth anything gets drawn out like that. It looked to me like having two diversion teams along was serious overkill. But we wrapped up the job and got to the rendezvous for airlift out. And that’s w here I saw the difference between this Kriger and the man I saw in the vid, twitching on a floor waiting to get waxed. Because this Kriger showed up at the rendezvous shot, and he looked like he’d barely made it out. He gave me that feeling you hate to get. I don’t know how to describe it, exactly. You have to experience it yourself, maybe. It’s the feeling you get off people whose op went bad. It’s like a smell almost, or a kind of metal taste in your mouth. You work enough jobs and you can pick i t up off even some of the very best people. And we all picked it up off Kriger. He even looked a little rattled, scared or pissed off maybe. Maybe something else. And then it occurred to me.

     

    Whoever brought him back must have edited his psychic makeup, mellowed him on reconstitution–probably so they could get him to go in for more frequent brain tapings. That way he wouldn’t lose so much memory if he got killed again. See, somebody who’s at most willing to have a lobe replaced isn’t going bother going in for recordings as often as a reconstitution company’s clients would. And, like I said, Kriger wasn’t a reconstitution client, so whoever brought him back must have done it on their own initiative. They were treating him as a long-term investment. He was a kept operator at that point, probably. If they’d tinkered with him enough to change his mind about reconstitution, they might’ve done more. Made him a career corporate boy or Central op, any number of things. That’s some nasty black bag medical, but there are people out there bent enough to do most anything for a price, so it happens sometimes.

     

    But the people who did it didn’t get what they were after. Serves them right, too, the fucks. An op has a clause in his agent’s contract, it ought to be honored. But those helix robbers not only ignored the clause, they tinkered with the man’s psych profile and memory. The thing is, though, that when you take away from an operator like Kriger the thing that gives him his edge, what you end up with isn’t an operator like Kriger. You get something a lot less than that, a guy who maybe looks the same and acts the same and seems the same but who isn’t the same. The Kriger I knew got inside a place and did a job that I wouldn’t have believed was possible if I hadn’t been there myself. He got waxed later, sure, but that’s reality. Nobody’s invulnerable . And even though the hit they put on him was first quality, he still took a lot of their people with him. Kriger, that Kriger, was the genuine article. That guy on the Baltics job, he was just a cheap copy, a meat puppet. You wanna know the truth, I felt sorry for him. The original Kriger, I bet he’d rather be dead than going around like that. But the copy, he probably doesn’t even know. Probably just feels like something’s wrong and can’t figure out what. It’s a shame, really. Poor son of a bitch.

     

  • Images Without: Deleuzian Becoming, Science Fiction Cinema in the Eighties

    Hassan Melehy

    Dept. of French and Italian
    Vanderbilt University
    melehyh@ctrvax.vanderbilt.edu

     

    To overturn Platonism: what philosophy has not tried?

     

    –Michel Foucault1

     

    There are two things I would like to do in this paper: elaborate on some Deleuzian concepts and examine recent science fiction cinema from Hollywood and its periphery (Canada, Britain, and the usually suspicious European transplants, whose films enter into “mainstream” flows or circulation). Ideally, I will do both in the same act, working the concepts and showing how they work themselves into and out of the movies in question,2 producing a configuration that says something about philosophy and its relation to other aspects of the world as well as about the importance of the films. The mapping of various relations that will occur in the process will not take either philosophy or film studies as starting points or guiding frameworks, will not explicitly reject the integrity of either, but rather will reach into an interdisciplinary field that resists accusations of eclecticism yet refuses to call itself an institutional unity. I would like, among other things, to argue for the consideration of Gilles Deleuze as a philosopher because of (not in spite of) his interest in non-philosophical practices, in a nomadic entrance into cinema, in conducting “one of the finest contemporary reflections on the liveliness and grandeur of the seventh art” (Bensmaïa 57). In his reflection he makes connections between aspects of this art and trajectories of the philosophical project that may be discerned running through his books. I would also like to argue for the appreciation of science fiction films from the eighties as participating in the production of philosophical concepts, while, in their capacity as movies and especially “B” movies, they wrest these concepts from the institutional closure that the term “philosophical” might tend to impose on them.

     

    An evident place to start is with Deleuze’s work on the cinema, which has received less critical attention than many of his other texts. This is in part because of their relatively recent appearance and translation but also in part, I suspect, because the connections Deleuze tries to make between philosophy and cinema are very demanding–because the concepts he produces are new, unknown, alien to traditional film studies, and particularly illustrative of Deleuze’s treatment of philosophy as a Foucauldian “system of dispersion” (Foucault, Archéologie 44-54) rather than an institutional unity. To begin with the Cinema books, then, one would have to proceed through extensions of the multidirectionality of their project and would not be able to avoid various enlistments of other sections of Deleuze’s work. This process can’t start by summarizing the books or by taking a set of statements from them as a guiding principle in critical analysis of the films.3 It must rather select a line in them, with a certain agenda in mind, and follow it through various materials as it gathers layers–other texts of Deleuze, the films in question–and work with the becomings that take place.

     

    What I would like to do is see the cinema books in light of Deleuze’s earlier alliance of his own philosophical project with that of Nietzsche’s as something that would contribute to the overturning of Platonism.4 And I would like to see the films as contributing to the same event, by seeing them in light of certain Deleuzian concepts–becoming, image, multiplicity, body without organs, assemblage, becoming-animal, simulacrum, the machinic, becoming-woman, etc. (which Deleuze himself has gathered from a variety of planes–hence Deleuze’s “counter history” of philosophy [Douglass 47-48]). Their examinations of, among other things, the cyberneticization of the human organism–the destabilization of its organic structure–and the displacement of a grounded notion of the real by the simulacrum of the televisual image do not simply constitute a social or aesthetic epiphenomenon, but rather participate in the emergenc(e)(y) that Deleuze’s efforts map, as well as, in so far as in their images they present crystallizations of philosophical concepts, disturb the unified and privileged discourse of philosophy, something the latter retains from its Platonic legacy. This is the period in which it may be said that “there is no more philosophy in the sense that metaphysics has become impossible as a discourse, simply because it is realized in the contemporary world” (Lyotard 45)–that is, in which philosophy can no longer be an autonomous, self-crowning discipline. One begins, then, to see philosophy and philosophers at the movies.

     

    Deleuze’s writing on cinema may be seen as directly tied to the task of overturning Platonism in that it bears on freeing the image from the hold that mimesis has placed on it throughout the history of the west (Bogue, especially 77-78). Constituting as much a treatise on Henri Bergson as an appreciation of the cinema, the two books work with a concept of image that may be attributed to the earlier French philosopher. The following definition goes a long way, I think, toward illuminating the importance Deleuze assigns to the cinema in the revaluation of experience and philosophy’s relation to the actual world: “Matter, in our view, is an aggregate of ‘images.’ And by ‘image’ we mean a certain existence which is more than what the idealist calls a representation, but less than that which the realist calls a thing,–an existence placed half-way between the ‘thing’ and the ‘representation’” (Bergson x; quoted in Douglass 51). This notion of image is a direct challenge to the Platonic dualism that would hold the “representation” in a subordinate relation of mimesis to the “thing.” To say that “matter” is made up of images is to suggest that consciousness apprehends and inhabits its world in a way fundamentally different from that conceived in the traditional subject-object relationship that has dominated western thinking since Descartes–indeed that it is not the exclusive property of the organic human being at all. Hence Deleuze may speak of the “machine”–here and elsewhere–not in opposition to the organic but as an assemblage of elements in motion, as extending vitality through movement into all of matter.5 If cinema becomes a locus of the image in the twentieth century–one of the “social and scientific factors which placed more and more movement into conscious life, and more and more images into the material world” (Cinema 1 56)–it must be seen as nothing else than the plane on which this transformation in philosophy takes place.

     

    Deleuze acknowledges that Bergson did not find much use for the early cinema in demonstrating his theses on movement: Bergson wanted to free movement from its conception as a sequence of privileged instants, from its subordination to the immobilizing representation of the thing, and to allow it to be considered as belonging to matter and hence to matter’s intertwining with consciousness (1-11). Nonetheless Deleuze pays homage to his predecessor in showing that Bergson’s conception of the material universe, the “infinite set of all images” (58), involves precisely the identification of image and matter that the cinema makes available after its first twenty or thirty years. The image is the movement that belongs to matter, the latter no longer subordinate to a frozen, single-frame representation or an accompanying ideal form, but in constant flow, all of its elements interacting: “This is not mechanism, it is machinism. The material universe, the plane of immanence, is the machinic assemblage of movement-images. Here Bergson is startlingly ahead of his time: it is the universe as cinema in itself, metacinema” (59). The cinema becomes what Deleuze, writing with Félix Guattari, elsewhere terms a “map” (Plateaus 12-13)–it doesn’t separate itself from and raise itself up as a mimetic image of the world, but rather weaves itself into the world, becoming the world as the world becomes it, each and both a multiplicity rather than a unity or part of a duality. If the cinema begins as a series of mimetic representations, each frame giving an isolated idea of the thing, it immediately transforms: “If these are privileged instants, it is as remarkable or singular points which belong to movement, and not as the moments of actualisation of a transcendent form. . . . The remarkable or singular instant remains any-instant-whatever among the others” (Cinema 1 5-6). In its placement in the cinematic series, an instant of this type cannot claim a superior position; each image constitutes a portion of the machinic interaction of matter. This machinic interaction, this assemblage or agencement, is a whole, if not the Whole, a universe, and each of its portions is a set of moments in and of motion, a segment of time or durée. With the Bergsonian concept of the image, which Deleuze sees actualized in the cinema, there is no matter that may be abstracted as an ideal form from its reality in time (10-11; also Bogue 83-84).

     

    Though Deleuze devotes much of Cinema 1 to producing “a taxonomy, an attempt at the classification of images and signs” (Cinema 1 xiv)–masterfully borrowing from and adapting the semiotics of Charles Peirce as he gives detailed attention to his examples drawn from the history of cinema–my interest here bears more strongly on the outcome of the study of signs and images, which occurs in the second book. This is the advent of “a direct time-image” (ix), the completion, as it were, of the valorization of the Bergsonian image, whose links with the project of overturning Platonism I would like to comment on here. In this type of image time is no longer subordinate to movement: that is, it is not in sequential segments of movement that time is viewed. The image is freed from its placement in a sequence; instants do not need to follow their order as determined in movement, but may all become available to view, such that a restrictive picture to which the world must conform6 is no longer possible. There is no more progression of time such that all past moments are seen to be contributing to the constitution of the present; rather, they begin to assume directions and vitalities of their own, and present and past cease to be a dualism. Again Deleuze acknowledges his predecessor: “Bergson’s major theses on time are as follows: the past coexists with the present that it has been; the past is preserved in itself, as past in general (non-chronological); at each moment time splits itself into present and past, present that passes and past which is preserved” (Cinema 2 82). Time first becomes available as time-image with Orson Welles’s Citizen Kane (1941), in which “time became out of joint and reversed its dependent relation to movement; temporality showed itself as it really was for the first time, but in the form of a coexistence of large regions to be explored” (105). In this film, the present is constituted through several parallel narratives of the past, not always congruent with each other. None of them manages to make any greater claim to reality than the others, yet all permeate the present and are part of what makes it a complex reality, unbounded by narrative closure (“Rosebud” remains, largely, a floating signifier).

     

    It is in relation to such a multiplicity of possible worlds that Deleuze introduces another concept of fascination to him, that of Leibniz’s “incompossibility”: “Leibniz says that the naval battle may or may not take place, but that this is not in the same world: it takes place in one world and does not take place in a different world, and these two worlds are possible, but are not ‘compossible’ with each other” (130).7 A figure from Deleuze’s “counter history” of philosophy, Leibniz presents a challenge to the Platonic heritage in which our understanding of the world may reflect only one, noncontradictory reality. “He is thus obliged to forge the wonderful notion of incompossibility (very different from contradiction) in order to resolve the paradox while saving truth: according to him, it is not the impossible, but only the incompossible that proceeds from the possible; and the past may be true without being necessarily true” (130).8 But Deleuze wants to free the incompossible worlds from the restrictions that Leibniz places on them: still a party to the ascendancy of the west as self-instituting dominancy, Leibniz leaves it up to God to choose which of the possible worlds will exist (The Fold 63). The cinema’s direct time-image may take philosophy a step beyond, as Deleuze states in connection with Alain Robbe-Grillet’s L’Homme qui ment, “contrary to what Leibniz believed, all these worlds belong to the same universe and constitute modifications of the same story” (Cinema 2 132).

     

    So, for Deleuze, the cinema becomes a part of the counter history of philosophy, constitutes a series with the latter’s imagery, in that it participates in the shaking loose of the Platonic dualism of reality and representation in a way that is akin to the flashes that are available in various philosophical texts. Deleuze makes the cinema accessible to philosophy in a way that it perhaps has not been before, in large part because of its status as image–and particularly, as Deleuze shows, Bergsonian image. The cinema is simulacrum, phantasm, excluded from philosophy’s world of admissible representations because of the threat it poses to the ordered world of “true” representations, copies determined by their originals.

     

    But as Deleuze demonstrates in “Plato and the Simulacrum,” the distinction is problematic in the Platonic dialogues themselves. It is possible that it is not a distinction of opposition, but rather of degree:

     

    To participate is, at best, to rank second. The celebrated Neoplatonic triad of the “Unparticipated,” the participated, and the participant follows from this. One could express it in the following manner as well: the foundation, the object aspired to, and the pretender. . . . Undoubtedly, one must distinguish all sorts of degrees, an entire hierarchy, in this elective participation. Is there not a possessor of the third or the fourth rank, and on to an infinity of degradation culminating in the one who possesses no more than a simulacrum, a mirage–the one who is himself a mirage and simulacrum? (255)

     

    Deleuze’s example is from the Statesman, which distinguishes “the true statesman or the well-founded aspirer, then relatives, auxiliaries, and slaves, down to simulacra and counterfeits” (255-256). The simulacrum and the good representation–the copy or the icon–may then be seen as constituting a series with one another. It is possible, then, that the “original” is instituted through a ruse on the part of those in “second” place to maintain their place in the hierarchy, and that they designate the false pretenders, the simulacra, the phantasms, as dangerous because in essence the latter are the same as they are: and their nature as simulacrum threatens the stable order–which is the same thing as the tyranny–of the situation.9

     

    [I]t may be that the end of the Sophist contains the most extraordinary adventure of Platonism: as a consequence of searching in the direction of the simulacrum and of leaning over its abyss, Plato discovers, in the flash of an instant, that the simulacrum is not simply a false copy, but that it places in question the very notions of copy and model. The final definition of the Sophist leads us to the point where we can no longer distinguish him from Socrates himself–the ironist working in private by means of brief arguments. Was it not necessary to push irony to the extreme? Was it not Plato himself who pointed out the direction for the reversal of Platonism? (256)

     

    And it may then be said that this division in the founding discourse of western philosophy–that between the discovery of the value of the simulacrum and the ruse by which this value is hidden in order to maintain a hierarchy–persists through the history of philosophy, leaving traces of itself that may be discerned only if philosophy is read, as it were, against itself, against the determinations on its own understanding of itself that it would enact. Throughout the history of western metaphysics philosophy is able to maintain itself as a discourse on being only by instituting a simulacrum of itself. “Affirming the rights” (262) of simulacra, overturning Platonism, is thus to free philosophy from the restrictions it has placed on itself from the outset. It is to link up with a series that has always been available in philosophy, but that has been repressed. In the age of the cinema as locus of the image, the world may reveal itself as image, image reveal itself as simulacrum, philosophy recover simulacrum. And the latter in so doing may redefine its own relation to the world. Philosophy may function according to one of its most traditional tasks, as “the art of forming, of inventing, of fabricating concepts” (Deleuze and Guattari, Philosophie 8), and elaborate the relation of thought and matter not as one of opposition–as between subject and object–but as one of coinhabitation, intertwining, or machinic assemblage.

     

    In this age of the image, and in about the same period in which Deleuze’s philosophy has been written–in the very decade of A Thousand Plateaus and the cinema books–there appears a variation on the image in the form of specifically technological phantasms. In its various manifestations–television, computer-generated images for television and cinema that can’t be distinguished from images of “real” objects–it displaces the cinematic image, effectively suppressing the latter’s effectiveness. It may be seen as a kind of coup de force10 against the productivity of the cinematic image, imposing a world picture that is a veritable microcosm, a severance of the relation of thought and matter, a last and tyrannical effort on the part of metaphysics to preserve the domination of a homogeneous, limited, and overwhelming reality. But on the other hand it is the outcome of the emergence of the image as Deleuze describes it: the distinction between virtual and actual worlds, and between imagination and reality, and even between subject and object, is less tenable than ever; any world at all may come into being on the little screen, and the world itself begins to be composed of the picture elements or pixels that make up its own simulacrum. The power to produce worlds is redirected to the production of a single, untouchable world; what we see is the ultimate simulacrum enacting the ultimate exclusion of the simulacrum.11

     

    Where is this coup de force, as well as the conflicts that ensue from it, most visible, and where are its effects represented? In the cinema: in that particular cinema that takes an interest in the technological production of phantasms, in the accompanying transformation of the human body in its ever more intimate interaction with machinery, in the role of the televisual image in relation to consciousness–and that also reflects on its own dependence on the technology of special effects as well as the restriction of its own images through mass production on videocassettes. The genre that makes phantasms out of the material of the extreme truth-telling discourses of the technological sciences is of course science fiction. I am referring to a group of science fiction films that appeared, in my view, as something quite new to cinema in the 1980s, precisely because they may be seen as participating in as well as criticizing, in a sometimes painfully concentrated way, the technological conditions in which the phantasms are produced.

     

    I would like to examine these movies with the Deleuzian notion of the image, as well as a number of other Deleuzian concepts, in mind. The films may be said to constitute a set, or an arrangement, or an assemblage, in the ways that they address and interact with the conditions. As I have mentioned, they are what might be considered “B” movies, often cheaply made, and occasionally expensive but deemed unworthy of serious consideration because participating in some of the forces of which they at least partially reflect on–pretenders, simulacra with regard to the “art” of cinema. There has, of course, been some attention paid to them, as there has been to the genre of science fiction, in which the reasons for their being received a certain way are understood, acknowledged, and taken as an object of criticism. Often enough, this attention is paid in connection with Deleuze and certain Deleuzian concepts, because of the affinity the latter machinic assemblage has with the transformations of the body, spatiality, temporality, and the very idea of the human being represented in science fiction and its recent cinema.12

     

    One figure, in several senses of the term, that recurs in science fiction film from the eighties is that of the cyborg, the cybernetic organism from science and science fiction, which is a “coupling” of machine and animal, and which provides, in the destabilization of the organic structure of the human being, a site for different sorts of becoming.13 The cyborg often appears as something monstrous–as it should be, since the intermeshing of human and machine defies a number of traditional oppositions (spirit/matter, life/death, among others)–and is seen, inscribed in Hollywood narrative codes, as incarnating something evil or potentially evil. The cyborg is usually violent; it is so in its essence, as it is the product of machinery making ruthless incisions into flesh. But evaluation should be disengaged from the prescriptive ideological systems that operate in the films, and offered the chance to present something that marks a fundamental transformation in the human being that may well have very progressive aspects. In their valorization of the simulacrum and their contestation of metaphysical oppositions, I would like to argue, these movies undermine the ideological systems in which they function. Since in every instance an effort is made at producing an identification between the point of view of the spectator and that of the cyborg, the violence of the human-machine relation (the cyborg relation–I would rather see the cyborg as a relation than as a thing or a unity) should be seen as a figuration of the violence of the everyday interface of human beings and technology, particularly televisual technology, that results in the imposition of the strictest of world pictures, the programmed redirection of desires, and an unprecedented hierarchization of the flesh.

     

    In James Cameron’s The Terminator (1984), for example, the cyborg, played by an appropriately stony Arnold Schwarzenegger, is described as a “hyperalloy combat chassis” with human flesh “grown for the cyborgs” on the outside, produced by a machine intelligence whose purpose is to exterminate the human population. Ostensibly a simulacrum built for infiltration, this cyborg may be seen as a quaint metaphor for the human-machine relations the film’s dystopian vision depicts: human beings have allowed machinery to run them, until they are little more than pieces of flesh hanging on the periphery. But the intertwining of organism and machine is more complex and subtle14. It is by way of machinery–not as accessory or extension, but body part–that the Terminator will be defeated: Reese, the resistance fighter played by Michael Biehn, is sent back in time from the dark future (2029) to stop the Terminator’s mission, which is to kill Sarah Connor (Linda Hamilton), future mother of resistance leader John Connor, in contemporary Los Angeles. The time travel machinery (which Penley suggests is a kind of figure of the cinema [“Time Travel” 66]), then, not only is essential to the continuation of life–both the life of Reese, from 2029 to 1984, and that of humanity–but also enhances life, transforms it, turns it into something else by freeing it from the constraints of linear time (part of a system of determined mimesis).

     

    The time travel machinery is explicitly connected to the cinematic apparatus through its use in the production of the narrative. Relying on a simple, standard Hollywood story, The Terminator removes the time of the narrative from the requirement of conformity to linear progression. The narrative moves, of course, toward a future: killing the Terminator, saving Sarah, during the course of the movie, and of course then saving humanity farther in the future. But it plays with the relationships of past, present, and future: the film uses a customary technique of flashing back, so that the past may be employed to endow the present with sense. But these are Reese’s flashbacks, and so are representations of the future; and this past is as malleable as the future, since saving Sarah would save the resistance movement through the preservation of its leader’s life. The same type of sense is derived from references to the past as from those to the future. In one sequence, a sound overlap is used for a cut from a junkyard in the present, in which a moving industrial vehicle is seen, to a similar vehicle in the future. The change is registered when the vehicle’s treads are seen rolling over skulls. But the sound overlap and the visual similarity work together to give the effect of a continuity between moments that would otherwise be discontinuous; and in the time sequence of Reese, the cut is to the past, while in “our” time sequence it is to the future. The machinery becomes the cinematic machinery, in its production of images bringing the past, the future, and the present to inhabit each other, their relations of causality, sense-determination, and even sequence transformed.

     

    And later in the film the cyborg relation is seen as having a direct effect on the view of the spectators, both as violence and as creating the capacity to see the production of the restrictive images, exactly what the televisual apparatus would disallow. This sequence involves close-ups of the cyborg eye–several in a quickly cut succession–which has already been identified as participating in the viewer’s perspective, through a number of point-of-view shots done in “cybervision.”15 The Terminator’s sight is composed of red-tinted pixels, as though mediated by a television screen, as would be that of most of the spectators watching the film, with the advent of movie viewing on VCRs well established by 1984. The sequence is an evident reference to Un chien andalou:16 there is an extreme close-up of the eye as the cyborg cuts into it with an Exacto knife. Where Buñuel and Dali were concerned with a metaphor involving the cutting process of cinematic production, depicting it as a cutting into the viewing apparatus of the spectator, Cameron turns the image into that of a surgical machine incision. What is revealed beneath the human eye surface is a camera lens–moving around, microprocessor controlled, all-seeing, its aperture dilating and contracting. The cyborg cutting–identified with the cinematic/televisual apparatus–reveals and promotes the affinity between human and machine views.

     

    The Terminator attempts to delineate what, in the present, would constitute a progressive cyborg relation–one that would have the effect of dehierarchizing the human body–and a repressive one. Deleuze and Guattari make a comparable distinction between types of bodies without organs, which may assist in understanding the different cyborg relations. The body without organs (BwO), it must be affirmed, “is not at all the opposite of the organs. The organs are not its enemies. The enemy is the organism. The BwO is opposed not to the organs but to that organization of the organs called organism” (Plateaus 158). The organism is a structure that hangs the organs on it as subordinated bits of flesh. And, further, the organism can destroy the body in its attempt at strict, hierarchical layering, which itself produces a kind of body without organs.

     

    Take the organism as a stratum: there is indeed a BwO that opposes the organizations of the organs we call the organism, but there is also a BwO of the organism that belongs to that stratum. Cancerous tissue: each instant, each second, a cell becomes cancerous, mad, proliferates and loses its configuration, takes over everything; the organism must resubmit to its rule or restratify it, not only for its own survival, but also to make possible an escape from the organism, the fabrication of the “other” BwO on the plane of consistency. (162-163)

     

    The globe-encompassing machinery itself of The Terminator, reproducing itself to no end, growing formless flesh to put on the mechanical frames, is akin to this second type of BwO, cancerous. And though, in the end, the human-machine relation seems to be sorted out with the “human” in the superior position–the film’s ideological inscription, or unreflective metaphysical determination, shows here–Cameron’s engagement of the cinematic apparatus in the exploration and deployment of the cyborg relation tends to weaken that hierarchy.

     

    Another movie that plays with the double possibility of the cyborg relation, the body without organs, is Robocop (1987), directed by Paul Verhoeven, a filmmaker of Dutch origin who would set spending records after his arrival in Hollywood. Robocop is the first of his exclusively U.S. productions, and is lower budget, less afraid of transgressing Hollywood convention, and less ideologically entrenched than his subsequent efforts (Total Recall, Basic Instinct–though these too have a number of noteworthy qualities, in a rebarbative imbalance with their overt inscriptions). There are moments when Robocop engages in a detailed critique of the late-capitalist management of flesh, of the technocratic colonization of the human body–even though it seems to reaffirm the benevolent paternity of the corporate structure at the end, in keeping, one would suppose, with Verhoeven’s own position in the film industry.

     

    The story concerns a Detroit police officer, Murphy (Peter Weller), who is brutally executed by criminals (whose own connections with and participation in the corporate structure is made patent–Verhoeven for the most part avoids the Manicheanism of traditional U.S. representations of illegality). He is mutilated, his right arm shot off by high-tech shotgun blasts, his legs destroyed, before being killed. His flesh, it turns out, fits right into the plans of the corporation–Omni Consumer Products (OCP), a caricature of Reagan-era privatization and malignant corporate growth–that has taken over the operation of the Detroit Police. The company will build a cyborg, made of machinery and Murphy’s remains. According to Bob Morton (Miguel Ferrer, with exquisite ruthlessness), the executive in charge of production, “We get the best of both worlds: the fastest reflexes modern technology has to offer, on-board computer-assisted memory, and a lifetime of on-the-street law-enforcement programming. It is my great pleasure to present to you–Robocop.” This bigger and better police officer is the result of already-existing company policies concerning human flesh. When it is being discussed whether the cyborg transformation should involve “total body prosthesis”–the complete subordination of the flesh to the machinery–one executive remarks, “He signed the release forms when he joined the force; he’s legally dead–we can do pretty much what we want to.” The creation of this law-enforcement product is presented as a continuation of the operation of the organized crime group–particularly when it is established that the group is directed by one of OCP’s top executives.

     

    Robocop is, to an extreme degree, a cancerous body without organs, a “body of war and money” (Plateaus 163). The corporate extensions are evidently cancerous, with their proliferation into all areas of life (“Good business is where you find it”)–and the Robocop project even follows the failure of another law-enforcement device, a comically monstrous robot that in a display of corporate brutality kills an executive in the OCP boardroom during a demonstration gone awry. In this meeting, before the robot goes haywire, the CEO of OCP, the Old Man (Dan O’Herlihy), speaks of the “cancer” of crime–the very same processes, evidently, as those which move the corporation, which the corporation will turn against some of its own human elements. But through the engagement and mise-en-scène of the cinematic/televisual apparatus, the cancerous proliferation of images that Robocop depicts and participates in–its overtly stated appeal is “classic” Hollywood action–is undermined. There are a number of sequences done in “cybervision”–these are almost too unsubtly reminiscent of the TV screen, with their pixelated composition and the corner-inset flashbacks, the latter exactly like those on the news programs that constitute segments of the film’s narrative. Verhoeven goes out of his way to show the ties between this cyborg POV and the constitution of our own televisually mediated experience, as though the time lines of our lives, and the memories by which we narrate these time lines, were determined entirely by the editing of news program videotape.

     

    The most interesting of these sequences is the one that effects a transition from Murphy’s point of view to that of Robocop–its time sequence is delimited by the cyborg’s machine functioning. It begins after Murphy’s execution, in a frantic urban emergency room, with attempts to revive him. The medical machinery already makes its incisions into his body, the technologization of the flesh quite under way before the event of the cyborg’s construction. The recurring shot is Murphy’s point of view, intercut with a reverse shot of his dead eyes. The camera participates directly in the cyborg relation: the gaze is dead, but still sees, indicating broader possibilities of life than those offered by the organic alone. This relation, instituted between the spectators and the image, is then placed inside the represented cyborg; the cyborg then becomes a figure of the cinematic/televisual apparatus. At the moment of Murphy’s death the screen goes black; the image begins to come back on, exactly as a TV screen would light up. It is clear that it is Robocop’s POV. The image disappears a few times, sometimes because of a technical error, sometimes because the cyborg is shut off, but we see and hear nothing that is not seen and heard by the cyborg: this includes conversations about him, in a very cinematic/televisual way, under the pretense that he (the camera and microphone) is not there.

     

    In this interweaving of flesh and machinery that works through the characters on screen and at the same time cuts across the relation between the screen and the spectators, a subversive and transgressive BwO is produced, at least at certain moments in the film. As a point in the corporate grid of control, Robocop undergoes a type of individuation; there is no more unified consciousness for him, but rather the capacity to move in that grid and to form unanticipated linkages with other elements in the network. Though Robocop’s recovery of the identity “Murphy” is ideologically inscribed as a triumph of individualism, it may rather be seen as the affirmation of what Deleuze and Guattari call a “haecceity.”17 The production of a cyborg identity in the corporate structure gives way to the possibility for the subjected body to become something quite different.

     

    This notion of becoming, through haecceity as a mode of individuation, involving transformations on the “molecular” level that do not allow for the persistence of the organic unity of the “molar” individual, is exemplified in the most viscerally horrific of this set of films, The Fly (1986). This movie was directed by David Cronenberg, a Canadian who, though often working with U.S. money, remains mostly in Toronto, deterritorializing the Hollywood system of production. The Fly is arguably one of the finest cinematic renditions of the Deleuzoguattarian concept of “becoming-animal,”18 as it involves the transformation of a man into a monstrous genetic hybrid of a human being and a housefly.19 A remake of an earlier Hollywood movie whose setting is Montreal, the distinctive feature of this version is that neither human being nor fly, in the process of teleportation that takes place on the molecular level, retains any trace of its composition as a molar entity. In the 1958 movie, two creatures result from the transference, a human being with a fly’s head and a fly with a human head; in Cronenberg’s, there is only one remaining, a multiplicity of various fly and human parts and characteristics.

     

    The teleportation devices in this film–this set of films always produces images of flesh-altering machinery–are explicitly figures of electronic reproduction. In a conversation over lunch, the inventor, Seth Brundle (Jeff Goldblum), and the journalist, Ronnie Quafe (Geena Davis), compare the disgusting results of attempts to transport organic matter to what they are eating, fast food–an excellent example of a copy without an original. And when Brundle steps out of the telepod after successfully transporting himself, he remarks, “Is it live or is it Memorex?”–he repeats an advertising slogan that may be considered a hallmark phrase of the “precession of the simulacrum.” The telepods figure the valorization of the simulacrum, which also entails the essential transformation of the spatiotemporal coordinates in which mimesis, and the institution of molar entities as those constituting the nodes of reality, take place. Brundle’s purpose in creating the telepods is to overcome a phobia, that of being transported physically. From now on, movement will not be required to submit to the Cartesian grid of space; lines of motion will be valorized, freed from their subordination to fixed points; travel will more and more resemble the cuts of cinema and, to a greater extent, TV. Time will be transformed in that it won’t be measured according to movement, will no longer be constituted as the gap between two places. Brundle, becoming-simulacrum, becoming-image, ceases to be a molar entity: he is not a man but rather a becoming-animal.20 He loses his scientist’s clear consciousness, his dominating subjectivity, and becomes a haecceity by way of this becoming-fly. He discovers what has happened to him through assistance from his computer–his scientific mind has always functioned in interface, through forming an assemblage, with the machinery–which prints its description of the event on its screen: “Fusion of Brundle and fly at molecular-genetic level.” At this level, the molecular plane of consistency, the organic being cannot retain its integrity, its molar composition, and must engage in becoming.

     

    The body without organs that Brundle becomes (in the mutation his external organs fall off and his internal organs become useless) is, as in Robocop, one in which there is a fight between the cancerous and the productive kinds of BwO. But the possibility that these two could form an intersection, that the cancer might actually work toward a transformative productivity, is raised. Describing his mutation to Quafe, Brundle says that the fusion is showing itself as a “bizarre form of cancer.” Further along in the process of transformation, he terms his affliction “a disease with a purpose–maybe not such a bad disease after all”; he remarks that the disease “wants to turn me into something else, . . . something that never existed before.” We see here an instantiation of what Cronenberg terms a “creative cancer,” elaborated in a number of his works (Rodley 80).21 And though the transformation does end up being destructive–“Brundlefly” becomes violent, almost murders, and brings on its own death–the moments in which transformation becomes possible are of interest here. Cronenberg produces these images in the machinic assemblage of the cinematic apparatus: the molecular, machinic transformation is represented as a series of figures flashing across the computer screen, the latter shot in cutaway so that it fills the movie screen. Such an image of the computer screen is frequently used as an establishing shot for sequences in Brundle’s lab, as though, to follow the rhetoric of North American editing convention, it constituted and determined the space depicted in the assemblage of shots that compose the sequence. And there is an identification of the fly’s eye, belonging to the molecular transformation, and the machinery of cinema in the opening sequence: it is an unrecognizable image, the view from an insect’s composite eye, with the cinematic colors separated, movements discernible but not attributable to any entity, until it transforms and reveals itself to be a shot from the ceiling of the convention where Brundle and Quafe first meet and the unity of the narrative begins.

     

    Other movies in this set show the cyborg coupling, the assemblage of machinery and human being that turns out to be machinic and thereby productive of becomings, molecular transformations, as being both repressive and transgressive. Ridley Scott’s Alien (1979), a British production and historically the first of the set, elaborates a relation of self and other in which self, combating other, cannot maintain integrity and must reveal to itself that it is a becoming, in a series and molecular relation with the other rather than in opposition to it. The alien–in constant mutation throughout the movie, at one point incubated in the guts of a human being, whom it subsequently destroys by disemboweling him in its “birth”–is placed in homologous relation with the human beings themselves in their spaceship. The computer that runs the ship–the consciousness that inhabits the machinery–is called “Mother,” and has a biological relation to the crew: they are “born” in its interior at the outset of the movie–the ship brings the crew into life, awakening them from their prolonged sleep in chambers that look like incubators. This “birth” sequence is preceded by a series of shots, moving down one corridor after another of the ship, figurative of endless machine intestines (Greenberg). The human-machine coupling, as well as the intestinal birth that will be reproduced later with the alien, suggest monstrosity, the elusion of pregiven forms and the bypassing of normal routes of genetic reproduction. The coupling is monstrous because it produces a cyborg relation and because it produces the film’s monster. But on the one hand, it limits life, and on the other extends it multidirectionally: the alien kills ruthlessly, but the relationship that Ripley (Sigourney Weaver), the crew’s one surviving member, reworks with the machinery is what provides the possibility of transgressing the limitations.

     

    And in John Carpenter’s overlooked gem They Live (1988), the cyborg relation takes the form of the possibility of reprogramming, or even rewiring, the human brain. The movie begins as a critique of Reaganism, unusually stark for Hollywood of the period: it takes place in a very contemporary urban U.S., depicted of images borrowed from Depression-era cinema. John Ford’s The Grapes of Wrath (1940) and Preston Sturges’s Sullivan’s Travels (1941) are distinct references–the film announces its participation in an instituted system of representation.22 What becomes immediately evident is the disparity between the images of everyday life and those seen on numerous television screens. The narrative follows the main character, played by professional wrestler Roddy Piper, a nomadic member of the lumpenproletariat (who goes unnamed, but is identified in the credits as “Nada”: a movement without solid form, a haecceity), who, sleeping on the streets, settling in a camp for the homeless, cannot avoid exposure to electronic representations of extreme affluence. After suggestions of a proto-fascist police state, in which the poor are constantly under surveillance and attack, the movie reveals its surprise: none of what anyone is seeing is real, since a signal is transmitted directly into the brain, by a TV broadcasting company, to construct perception. Everything looks quite “normal,” when quite a lot is wrong: the film’s dramatization bears on the capacity of simulated images to declare themselves as real, and thus exclude the production of alternative images.

     

    What turns out to be the case, when “Nada” gains the capacity to see, is that there has been an alien invasion, the earth is being exploited, treated as “their third world.” In the simulacrum-world, the aliens look like human beings; they maintain a social hierarchy through control of corporations, recruiting human collaborators through a proliferation of consumerism. And the “reality” of the consumerist images that “Nada” sees is a shock: instead of advertising’s pretty pictures, he sees a bombardment of blatant commands. “Marry and reproduce” is the “real” content of an ad depicting a woman on the beach; “Stay asleep,” “Do not question authority,” and other messages appear regularly; money becomes white sheets of paper with the words “This is your God” printed across it. The urban landscape, with such phrases plastered across it, are an evident reference to Barbara Kruger’s collages: their ugliness and blatancy, in continual interference with seeing, uncannily calls attention to the functioning of a society of consumption. It is the “society of the spectacle” in which nothing may be seen that isn’t preconfigured in a determined system.

     

    Though the distinction that They Live makes between the simulacrum-world and the “real” one may at first sight seem to be a simple dualism, the relation is more complicated. “Nada” is able to engage in resistance by transforming the destructive cyborg relation into a productive, machinically transgressive one. The apparatus with which he discovers the simulation is a pair of dark glasses, manufactured and distributed by the underground movement. Wearing them he can see the aliens and the commands. But these “real” images are themselves constructed: besides being a visual pun on the “society of the spectacle(s),” the glasses are borrowed from 1950s 3-D movie viewing23–the image looks more “real” because it is more faked. And the “real” world appears in black and white, reminiscent of both classic science fiction cinema and the television of the same period. This world is just as much a construction, an assemblage of images taken from instituted systems of representation, just as much a simulacrum; but it is the simulacrum that breaks the hold of the image that declares itself to be real. It does this through “Nada’s” nomadic practice of transformation, becoming-machine. Putting the glasses on also then becomes a figure for the act of going to see this “B” science fiction movie, a construction of images by which the constructed nature of the images of everyday life, determined by mechanisms of economic and social repression, is revealed.

     

    A similar problematic is explored in the film from this set that treats most thoroughly the concepts I have introduced, a film to which Carpenter gives a number of admiring nods, Cronenberg’s Videodrome (1982).24 This movie also concerns the transmission of a mind-altering signal. The target is Civic TV, a Toronto cable operation that specializes in sex and violence; the signal would induce hallucinations in the viewer, as part of a global conspiracy by a multinational called Spectacular Optical. “We make inexpensive glasses for the Third World and missile guidance systems for NATO,” says Barry Convex (Les Carlson) to Max Renn (James Woods), manager of Civic TV and the guinea pig for the Videodrome signal. The company, as it were bringing the world into focus, has interests in spectacles, the spectacle, and domination through representation: its interest in Civic TV derives from the station’s transmissions of sexual violence because of their capacity to initiate a cutting into the spectator’s perceptual apparatus. Max finds himself cut into, after several days of watching the “Videodrome” tapes: in front of the television, his face lit by the flicker of the screen (in the movie all images seem in one way or another generated by TV), he discovers a new orifice in his abdomen. He assumes the position of spectator to the horrific corporeal transformation to which he is subject: the opening is distinctively vaginal, but it also functions, according to the traditional masculine viewpoint identified by psychoanalysis, as a wound, a phantasm of the castration anxiety. But this initial coding of the orifice is reconfigured; just as Deleuze and Guattari suggest that Freud’s characterization of the castration anxiety results from a molar conception of the human body, and that rethinking the latter as a machinic assemblage may give way to a release from the limitations of strict sexual division,25 Max is able to give way to the transformation and engage in a productive becoming-woman. He is not losing his body, but becoming a body without organs; he is losing his molar composition as a man, a dominant male, the integrated subject of the spectacle.

     

    His transformation is molecular: as in The Fly, it is the effect of a “creative cancer.” The Videodrome signal induces a brain tumor, which will become “a new organ, . . . a new outgrowth of the human brain,” according to media theorist Professor Brian O’Blivion (Jack Creley) who only appears as a televisual image. This freely acting organ–the organic composition of the body is losing its grip–will allow hallucination, or, as it turns out to be the case, the production of simulacra such that the hold of instituted reality ceases to be viable, reveals itself to be the ruse of a simulacrum. And the transformation is machinic, occurring when Max engages in a coupling with his video equipment: in a bizarre sequence the TV screen bears the image of his lover, Nicki Brand (Deborah Harry), first her face and then just her mouth in enormous proportion, as the VCR displays the contours and motions of desirous flesh. Neither the VCR nor Nicki, in their merging, are organically female, with the multiple machine parts functioning as all manner of sexual organs whose molar gender specificity has been dislocated. Max moves toward the large, open mouth, as it gives him “head,” transforming his head as well as his other organs in this machinic assemblage.

     

    In the mutation, Max spends some time as a product of the corporate engineering, a cancerous BwO whose control he is completely under. His new orifice also functions as a video slot–in the completely passive position, forced open, in which the shows his station runs would place the female sexual organs–so that he may be “programmed” by Spectacular Optical to eradicate the opposition, a movement directed by Bianca O’Blivion, the daughter of the media image. But his transformation advances as he reconfigures the machinery, activating the creative and transgressive aspects of the cancer: the program becomes the destruction of the repressive force, Spectacular Optical–Max turns the corporation’s own weapons against it, using the gun he had obtained in company service.

     

    Videodrome‘s violence is troubling, its mutilated bodies often seeming to be equivalent to those represented in Civic TV’s programming, gratuitous. However, the idea of violent death undergoes a reconfiguration at the end of the movie, when Max turns the gun against his own head, a final transgression of the limits imposed by the organic composition of the body. At the sound of the shot the screen goes black; the credits run, marking the film’s own limit, the end of its possibilities of representation.26 After considering several possible endings that would show Max after this “death,” which becomes a transformation of life, Cronenberg opted for this one as the best (Rodley 97). Its effect is to affirm an incapacity to depict what is effectively the end of a metaphysical system, the becoming of the body without organs, within a system of cinematic and televisual representation that is still quite infected with mimesis, by the simulacrum that excludes the production of simulacra. Such a cinema can go to the limit, and can show the limit, but cannot yet move to the intertwining and coinhabitation of thought and matter, the liberation of the image from its Platonic determination. Its indirect presentation, its “presenting the unpresentable,” which by all means leaves a feeling of incompleteness at the end, also resists a recuperation by the forces that would subordinate the image to mimesis and, through a limitation of the possibilities of thought, promote a complete spectator passivity.

    Notes

     

    1.Foucault, “Theatrum Philosophicum” 166. Translation slightly modified.

     

    2.Deleuze, Cinema 2 280: “[Philosophical theory] is a practice of concepts, and it must be judged in the light of the other practices with which it interferes. A theory of cinema is not ‘about’ cinema, but about the concepts that cinema gives rise to and which are themselves related to other concepts corresponding to other practices, the practice of concepts in general having no privilege over others, anymore than one object has over others.”

     

    3.Marie-Claire Ropars-Wuilleumier suggests of these books–and this could be said of all of Deleuze’s writing: “In the form of organization they adopt–that of non-linearity–and in the conceptual order they engage–that of divided thought–the two books defy any synthesis other than a disjunctive one. And even this sort of synthesis might betray an exposition that takes the form of a becoming” (120).

     

    4.In a 1967 essay entitled “Plato and the Simulacrum,” which appears as an appendix to the 1969 Logic of Sense.

     

    5.Deleuze and Guattari, Plateaus 256: “This is not animism, any more than it is mechanism; rather, it is universal machinism: a plane of consistency occupied by an immense abstract machine comprising an infinite number of assemblages.”

     

    6.It is this determination of representation that Heidegger sees occurring with Descartes, as the culmination of western metaphysics, following groundwork laid by the Greeks. The latter is evident in Plato’s designation as eidos, something seen, of the ideal form that determines the being of a thing (131 and 143-147).

     

    7.Leibniz elaborates this concept in the Théodicée, 414-416.

     

    8.A treatment of the idea of incompossibility that Deleuze gives in his recent book on Leibniz may be of interest here: “Leibniz innovates when he invokes a profoundly original relation among all possible worlds. By stating that it is a great mystery buried in God’s understanding, Leibniz gives the new relation the name of incompossibility. We discover that we are in a dilemma of seeking the solution to a Leibnizian problem under the conditions that Leibniz has established: we cannot know what God’s reasons are, nor how he applies them in each case, but we can demonstrate that he possesses some of them, and what their principle may be” (The Fold 59-60).

     

    9.Deleuze acknowledges Jacques Derrida’s closely related work on writing as simulacrum in Plato, its being viewed as a threat to the paternal order of the transmission of the Logos, in “La Pharmacie de Platon”; Logic 361:2.

     

    10.I purposely use the term that Foucault chooses to describe the exclusion of madness by a restrictive and tyrannical reason–of a certain production of phantasms by institutional order–at the outset of modernity, in Histoire de la folie, 56-59 (this section, on Descartes, does not appear in the abridged English translation, Madness and Civilization); I wish to mark the phenomenon I am describing as a repetition of that event.

     

    11.Cinema 2 265: “The electronic image, that is, the tele and video image, the numerical image coming into being, either had to transform cinema or to replace it, to mark its death.”

     

    12.Most notably: see Bukatman, “Postcards from the Posthuman Solar System,” and “Who Programs You?”; and Stivale, “Mille/Punks/Cyber/Plateaus.”

     

    13.I am, of course, bringing in Donna Haraway’s notion of the cyborg, from her 1984 “A Cyborg Manifesto.”

     

    Stivale is very interested in possible rapprochements between Haraway’s idea of the cyborg and various Deleuzoguattarian concepts, such as the “machinic” and the “body without organs.”

     

    14.Constance Penley goes into some detail on the ambiguities of the human-machine relations in the film in her “Time Travel, Primal Scene, and the Critical Dystopia.”

     

    15.The term is Cameron’s, from the script.

     

    16.Cameron, as well as a number of the other directors I will consider, is fairly liberal with references, to both film and television history. His purpose is one that, after the New Wave, may be called a traditional cinematic one: to call attention to the fact that this sequence of images is part of a coded system of representation. The practice becomes quite interesting, though, when it is coupled with representations of the technological production of images, and when the cinematic references are adapted to comment specifically on the electronic age, as in this sequence.

     

    17.Plateaus 261: “A season, a winter, a summer, an hour, a date have a perfect individuality lacking nothing, even though this individuality is different from that of a thing or a subject. They are haecceities in the sense that they consist entirely of relations of movement and rest between molecules or particles, capacities to affect and be affected.”
    See also Stivale 71-72.

     

    18.For elaborations on molar unities and molecular transformations, as well as on becoming-animal, see Plateaus, ch. 10, “1730: Becoming-Intense, Becoming-Animal, Becoming-imperceptible,” 232-309.

     

    19.Cronenberg’s own term for the genre that The Fly delineates is “metaphysical horror” (Rodley 134).

     

    20.Plateaus 292: “There is no becoming-man because man is the molar entity par excellence.”

     

    21.This intersection or hybrid of two types of BwO would seem to be a transformation of the concept put forth by Deleuze and Guattari; they speak of the “dangers” and the necessary “precautions” involved in the fabrication of the BwO, since there is the possibility of “cancerous tissue” (Plateaus 162-163). But we should also be cautious about making such a clear-cut distinction in their concept: they speak of a cancer cell as becoming “mad,” a term that cannot be separated from the various critical works on the history of psychiatry, mental illness, and insanity (especially Foucault’s), which designates, in one way or another, the proliferation of phantasms or simulacra as well as the latter’s repression. The cancer cell may transgress the organic composition of the “healthy” cell–the transformations the cell undergoes in its submission to the hierarchy may give way to its capacity to be productive, creative.

     

    22.See note 16.

     

    23.A later U.S. edition of Guy Debord’s manifesto has as its cover photo the image of a crowd wearing 3-D glasses.

     

    24.The remarks that follow derive from a paper that I co-wrote with Larry Shillock, delivered at the 1992 MMLA convention in St. Louis, entitled “Cronenberg’s Videology.” I would like to add now that I owe many of the observations on the films in the present paper to lengthy viewing sessions and discussions with Larry over the last few years.

     

    25.Plateaus 256: “When Little Hans talks about a ‘peepee-maker,’ he is referring not to an organ or an organic function but basically to a material, in other words, to an aggregate whose elements vary according to its connections, its relations of movement and rest, the different individuated assemblages it enters. Does a girl have a peepee-maker? The boy says yes, and not by analogy, nor in order to conjure away a fear of castration. It is obvious that girls have a peepee-maker because they effectively pee: a machinic functioning rather than an organic function. Quite simply, the same material has different connections, different relations of movement and rest, enters different assemblages in the case of the boy and the girl (a girl does not pee standing or into the distance). Does a locomotive have a peepee-maker? Yes, in yet another machinic assemblage. Chairs don’t have them: but that is because the elements of the chair were not able to integrate this material into their relations, or decomposed the relation with that material to the point that it yielded something else, a rung, for example.”

     

    26.Bukatman, “Postcards” 353-354: “Wren [sic] may in fact be approaching the Body without Organs when he fires at his temple, but that’s precisely the point at which the film has to end. This re-embodying is inconceivable: even the imagination can only approach its condition.

     

    Works Cited

     

    (For the French texts that I cite, the translation is in each case mine. –H. M.)

     

    • Alien. Dir. Ridley Scott. Brandywine, 1979.
    • Bensmaïa, Réda. “Un philosophe au cinéma.” Magazine Littéraire 257 (1988), 57-59.
    • Bergson, Henri. Matter and Memory. Trans. Nancy Margaret Paul and W. Scott Palmer. London: Allen & Unwin, 1911.
    • Bogue, Ronald. “Word, Image and Sound: The Non-Representational Semiotics of Gilles Deleuze.” Mimesis, Semiosis and Power. Ed. Ronald Bogue. Mimesis in Contemporary Theory: An Interdisciplinary Approach 2. Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 1991, 77-97.
    • Bukatman, Scott. “Postcards from the Posthuman Solar System.” Science Fiction Studies 55 (1991), 343-357.
    • —. “Who Programs You? The Science Fiction of the Spectacle.” Alien Zone: Cultural Theory and Contemporary Science Fiction. Ed. Annette Kuhn. New York: Verso, 1990, 196-213.
    • Debord, Guy. The Society of the Spectacle. Detroit: Black and Red, 1983.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Cinema 1. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara Habberjam. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1986.
    • —. Cinema 2. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Robert Galatea. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1989.
    • —. The Fold. Trans. Tom Conley. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1993.
    • —. “Plato and the Simulacrum.” The Logic of Sense. Trans. Mark Lester and Charles Stivale. New York: Columbia UP, 1990, 253-266.
    • Deleuze, Gilles and Félix Guattari. Qu est-ce que la philosophie? Paris: Minuit, 1991.
    • —. A Thousand Plateaus. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1987.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “La Pharmacie de Platon.” La Dissémination. Paris: le Seuil, 1972, 69-197.
    • Douglass, Paul. “Deleuze and the Endurance of Bergson.” Thought 67 (March 1992), 47-61.
    • Fly, The. Dir. David Cronenberg. Brooksfilms, 1986.
    • Foucault, Michel. L’Archéologie du savoir. Paris: Gallimard, 1969.
    • —. Histoire de la folie à l’âge classique. Paris: Gallimard, 1972.
    • —. “Theatrum Philosophicum.” Language, Countermemory, Practice. Ed. Donald F. Bouchard, Trans. Donald F. Bouchard and Sherry Simon. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1977, 165-196. Greenberg, Harvey R., M.D. “Remaining the Gargoyle: Psychoanalytic Notes on Alien.” Close Encounters: Film, Feminism, and Science Fiction. Ed. Constance Penley et al. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1991, 83-104.
    • Haraway, Donna. “A Cyborg Manifesto.” Simians, Cyborgs, and Women: The Reinvention of Nature. New York: Routledge, 1991, 149-181.
    • Heidegger, Martin. “The Age of the World Picture.” The Question Concerning Technology and Other Essays. Trans. William Lovitt. New York: Harper and Row, 1977, 115-154.
    • Lyotard, Jean-Francois. “Que peindre?” Interview with Bernard Macade. Art Press 125 (mai 1988), 42-45.
    • Penley, Constance. “Time Travel, Primal Scene, and the Critical Dystopia.” Close Encounters: Film, Feminism, and Science Fiction. Ed. Constance Penley et al. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1991, 64-6.
    • Robocop. Dir. Paul Verhoeven. Orion, 1987.
    • Rodley, Chris, Ed. Cronenberg on Cronenberg. London and Boston: Faber and Faber, 1992.
    • Ropars-Wuilleumier, Marie-Claire. “The Cinema, Reader of Gilles Deleuze.” Trans. Dana Polan. Camera Obscura 18 (1988), 120-126.
    • Stivale, Charles. “Mille/Punks/Cyber/Plateaus: Science Fiction and Deleuzo-Guattarian Becomings.” SubStance 66 (1991), 66-84.
    • Terminator, The. Dir. James Cameron. Hemdale, 1984.
    • They Live. Dir. John Carpenter. Alive Films, 1988.
    • Videodrome. Dir. David Cronenberg. Filmplan International, 1982.